diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 05:17:43 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 05:17:43 -0700 |
| commit | edec6315e35dfa50b8128439c3d340ac1407064e (patch) | |
| tree | a452aa7e0211f07b81c938bd8c6ee5b17dee6d10 | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 1759-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 110083 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 1759-h/1759-h.htm | 5798 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 1759.txt | 5026 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 1759.zip | bin | 0 -> 106118 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/bbbrb09.txt | 5329 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/bbbrb09.zip | bin | 0 -> 104883 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/bbbrb10.txt | 5368 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/bbbrb10.zip | bin | 0 -> 105229 bytes |
11 files changed, 21537 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/1759-h.zip b/1759-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..01a21e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/1759-h.zip diff --git a/1759-h/1759-h.htm b/1759-h/1759-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..be196e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/1759-h/1759-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,5798 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="us-ascii"?> + +<!DOCTYPE html + PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd" > + +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" lang="en"> + <head> + <title> + The Black-bearded Barbarian, by Marian Keith + </title> + <style type="text/css" xml:space="preserve"> + + body { margin:5%; background:#faebd0; text-align:justify} + P { text-indent: 1em; margin-top: .25em; margin-bottom: .25em; } + H1,H2,H3,H4,H5,H6 { text-align: center; margin-left: 15%; margin-right: 15%; } + hr { width: 50%; text-align: center;} + .foot { margin-left: 20%; margin-right: 20%; text-align: justify; text-indent: -3em; font-size: 90%; } + blockquote {font-size: 97%; font-style: italic; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;} + .mynote {background-color: #DDE; color: #000; padding: .5em; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 95%;} + .toc { margin-left: 10%; margin-bottom: .75em;} + .toc2 { margin-left: 20%;} + div.fig { display:block; margin:0 auto; text-align:center; } + div.middle { margin-left: 20%; margin-right: 20%; text-align: justify; } + .figleft {float: left; margin-left: 0%; margin-right: 1%;} + .figright {float: right; margin-right: 0%; margin-left: 1%;} + .pagenum {display:inline; font-size: 70%; font-style:normal; + margin: 0; padding: 0; position: absolute; right: 1%; + text-align: right;} + pre { font-style: italic; font-size: 90%; margin-left: 10%;} + +</style> + </head> + <body> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Black-Bearded Barbarian (George Leslie +Mackay), by Mary Esther Miller MacGregor, AKA Marion Keith + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Black-Bearded Barbarian (George Leslie Mackay) + +Author: Mary Esther Miller MacGregor, AKA Marion Keith + +Release Date: September 21, 2008 [EBook #1759] +Last Updated: February 4, 2013 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BLACK-BEARDED BARBARIAN *** + + +Produced by An Anonymous Volunteer, and David Widger + + + + + + + +</pre> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <h1> + THE BLACK-BEARDED BARBARIAN + </h1> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <h2> + by Mary Esther Miller MacGregor<br /> (AKA Marion Keith) + </h2> + <p> + <br /> <br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <br /> <br /> + </p> + <h2> + Contents + </h2> + <h4> + <a href="#link2H_4_0001"> THE BLACK BEARDED BARBARIAN </a> + </h4> + <p> + <br /> + </p> + <table summary="" style="margin-right: auto; margin-left: auto"> + <tr> + <td> + <a href="#link2HCH0001"> CHAPTER I. </a> + </td> + <td> + SPLITTING ROOKS + </td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td> + <a href="#link2HCH0002"> CHAPTER II. </a> + </td> + <td> + A VOYAGE OF DISCOVERY + </td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td> + <a href="#link2HCH0003"> CHAPTER III. </a> + </td> + <td> + RECONNOITERING THE TERRITORY + </td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td> + <a href="#link2HCH0004"> CHAPTER IV. </a> + </td> + <td> + BEGINNING THE SIEGE + </td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td> + <a href="#link2HCH0005"> CHAPTER V. </a> + </td> + <td> + SOLDIERS TWO + </td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td> + <a href="#link2HCH0006"> CHAPTER VI. </a> + </td> + <td> + THE GREAT KAI BOK-SU + </td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td> + <a href="#link2HCH0007"> CHAPTER VII. </a> + </td> + <td> + BESIEGING HEAD-HUNTERS + </td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td> + <a href="#link2HCH0008"> CHAPTER VIII. </a> + </td> + <td> + CITIES CAPTURED AND FORTS BUILT + </td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td> + <a href="#link2HCH0009"> CHAPTER IX. </a> + </td> + <td> + OTHER CONQUESTS. + </td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td> + <a href="#link2HCH0010"> CHAPTER X. </a> + </td> + <td> + REENFORCEMENTS + </td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td> + <a href="#link2HCH0011"> CHAPTER XI. </a> + </td> + <td> + UNEXPECTED BOMBARDMENT + </td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td> + <a href="#link2HCH0012"> CHAPTER XII. </a> + </td> + <td> + TRIUMPHAL MARCH + </td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td> + <a href="#link2HCH0013"> CHAPTER XIII. </a> + </td> + <td> + THE LAND OCCUPIED + </td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td> + </td> + </tr> + </table> + <p> + <br /> <br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <br /><a name="link2H_4_0001" id="link2H_4_0001"></a> <br /> + </p> + <h2> + THE BLACK BEARDED BARBARIAN + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + (1) The name by which George Leslie Mackay was + known among the Chinese of north Formosa. +</pre> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0001" id="link2HCH0001"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER I. SPLITTING ROCKS + </h2> + <p> + Up in the stony pasture-field behind the barn the boys had been working + all the long afternoon. Nearly all, that is, for, being boys, they had + managed to mix a good deal of fun with their labor. But now they were + tired of both work and play, and wondered audibly, many times over, why + they were not yet called home to supper. + </p> + <p> + The work really belonged to the Mackay boys, but, like Tom Sawyer, they + had made it so attractive that several volunteers had come to their aid. + Their father was putting up a new stone house, near the old one down there + behind the orchard, and the two youngest of the family had been put at the + task of breaking the largest stones in the field. + </p> + <p> + It meant only to drag some underbrush and wood from the forest skirting + the farm, pile them on the stones, set fire to them, and let the heat do + the rest. It had been grand sport at first, they all voted, better than + playing shinny, and almost as good as going fishing. In fact it was a kind + of free picnic, where one could play at Indians all day long. But as the + day wore on, the picnic idea had languished, and the stone-breaking grew + more and more to resemble hard work. + </p> + <p> + The warm spring sunset had begun to color the western sky; the + meadow-larks had gone to bed, and the stone-breakers were tired and + ravenously hungry—as hungry as only wolves or country boys can be. + The visitors suggested that they ought to be going home. "Hold on, Danny, + just till this one breaks," said the older Mackay boy, as he set a burning + stick to a new pile of brush. + </p> + <p> + "This'll be a dandy, and it's the last, too. They're sure to call us to + supper before we've time to do another." + </p> + <p> + The new fire, roaring and snapping, sending up showers of sparks and + filling the air with the sweet odor of burning cedar, proved too alluring + to be left. The company squatted on the ground before it, hugging their + knees and watching the blue column of smoke go straight up into the + colored sky. It suggested a camp-fire in war times, and each boy began to + tell what great and daring deeds he intended to perform when he became a + man. + </p> + <p> + Jimmy, one of the visitors, who had been most enthusiastic over the picnic + side of the day's work, announced that he was going to be a sailor. He + would command a fleet on the high seas, so he would, and capture pirates, + and grow fabulously wealthy on prize-money. Danny, who was also a guest, + declared his purpose one day to lead a band of rough riders to the Western + plains, where he would kill Indians, and escape fearful deaths by the + narrowest hairbreadth. + </p> + <p> + "Mebbe I'm goin'to be Premier of Canada, some day," said one youngster, + poking his bare toes as near as he dared to the flames. + </p> + <p> + There were hoots of derision. This was entirely too tame to be even + considered as a career. + </p> + <p> + "And what are you going to be, G. L.?" inquired the biggest boy of the + smallest. + </p> + <p> + The others looked at the little fellow and laughed. George Mackay was the + youngest of the group, and was a small wiry youngster with a pair of + flashing eyes lighting up his thin little face. He seemed far too small + and insignificant to even think about a career. But for all the difference + in their size and age the bigger boys treated little George with a good + deal of respect. For, somehow, he never failed to do what he set out to + do. He always won at races, he was never anywhere but at the head of his + class, he was never known to be afraid of anything in field or forest or + school ground, he was the hardest worker at home or at school, and by + sheer pluck he managed to do everything that boys bigger and older and + stronger could do. + </p> + <p> + So when Danny asked, "And what are you going to be, G. L.?" though the + boys laughed at the small thin little body, they respected the daring + spirit it held, and listened for his answer. + </p> + <p> + "He's goin' to be a giant, and go off with a show," cried one, and they + all laughed again. + </p> + <p> + Little G. L. laughed too, but he did not say what he intended to do when + he grew big. Down in his heart he held a far greater ambition than the + others dreamed of. It was too great to be told—so great he scarcely + knew what it was himself. So he only shook his small head and closed his + lips tightly, and the rest forgot him and chattered on. + </p> + <p> + Away beyond the dark woods, the sunset shone red and gold between the + black tree trunks. The little boy gazed at it wonderingly. The sight of + those morning and evening glories always stirred his child's soul, and + made him long to go away—away, he knew not where—to do great + and glorious deeds. The Mackay boys' grandfather had fought at Waterloo, + and little George Leslie, the youngest of six, had heard many, many tales + of that gallant struggle, and every time they had been told him he had + silently resolved that, some day, he too would do just such brave deeds as + his grandfather had done. + </p> + <p> + As the boys talked on, and the little fellow gazed at the sunset and + dreamed, the big stone cracked in two, the fire died down, and still there + came no welcome call to supper from any of the farmhouses in sight. The + Mackay boys had been trained in a fine old-fashioned Canadian home, and + did not dream of quitting work until they were summoned. But the visitors + were merely visitors, and could go home when they liked. The future + admiral of the pirate-killing fleet declared he must go and get supper, or + he'd eat the grass, he was so hungry. The coming Premier of Canada and the + Indian-slayer agreed with him, and they all jumped the fence, and went + whooping away over the soft brown fields toward home. + </p> + <p> + There was just one big stone left. It was a huge boulder, four feet + across. + </p> + <p> + "We'll never get enough wood to crack that, G. L.," declared his brother. + "It just can't be done." + </p> + <p> + But little George answered just as any one who knew his determination + would have expected. In school he astonished his teacher by learning + everything at a tremendous rate, but there was one small word he refused + to learn—the little word "can't." His bright eyes flashed, now, at + the sound of it. He jumped upon the big stone, and clenched his fist. + </p> + <p> + "It's GOT to be broken!" he cried. "I WON'T let it beat me." He leaped + down, and away he ran toward the woods. His brother caught his spirit, and + ran too. They forgot they were both tired and hungry. They seized a big + limb of a fallen tree and dragged it across the field. They chopped it + into pieces, and piled it high with plenty of brush, upon the big stone. + In a few minutes it was all in a splendid blaze, leaping and crackling, + and sending the boys' long shadows far across the field. + </p> + <p> + The fire grew fiercer and hotter, and suddenly the big boulder cracked in + four pieces, as neatly as though it had been slashed by a giant's sword. + Little G. L. danced around it, and laughed triumphantly. The next moment + there came the welcome "hoo-hoo" from the house behind the orchard, and + away the two scampered down the hill toward home and supper. + </p> + <p> + When the day's work of the farmhouse had been finished, the Mackay family + gathered about the fire, for the spring evening was chilly. George Leslie + sat near his mother, his face full of deep thought. It was the hour for + family worship, and always at this time he felt most keenly that longing + to do something great and glorious. Tonight his father read of a Man who + was sending out his army to conquer the world. It was only a little army, + just twelve men, but they knew their Leader had more power than all the + soldiers of the world. And they were not afraid, though he said, "Behold, + I send you forth as sheep in the midst of wolves." For he added, "Fear ye + not," for he would march before them, and they would be sure of victory. + </p> + <p> + The little boy listened with all his might. He did everything that way. + Surely this was a story of great and glorious deeds, even better than + Waterloo, he felt. And there came to his heart a great longing to go out + and fight wrong and put down evil as these men had done. He did not know + that the longing was the voice of the great King calling his young knight + to go out and "Live pure, speak true, right wrong, follow the King." + </p> + <p> + But there came a day when he did understand, and on that day he was ready + to obey. + </p> + <p> + When bedtime came the boys were asked if they had finished their work, and + the story of the last big stone was told. "G. L. would not leave it," the + brother explained. The father looked smilingly at little G. L. who still + sat, dangling his short legs from his chair, and studying the fire. + </p> + <p> + He spoke to his wife in Gaelic. "Perhaps the lad will be called to break a + great rock some day. The Lord grant he may do it." + </p> + <p> + The boy looked up wonderingly. He understood Gaelic as well as English, + but he did not comprehend his father's words. He had no idea they were + prophetic, and that away on the other side of the world, in a land his + geography lessons had not yet touched, there stood a great rock, ugly and + hard and grim, which he was one day to be called upon to break. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0002" id="link2HCH0002"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER II. A VOYAGE OF DISCOVERY + </h2> + <p> + The steamship America, bound for Hongkong, was leaving the dock at San + Francisco. All was bustle and noise and stir. Friends called a last + farewell from the deck, handkerchiefs waved, many of them wet with tears. + The long boom of a gun roared out over the harbor, a bell rang, and the + signal was given. Up came the anchor, and slowly and with dignity the + great vessel moved out through the Golden Gate into the wide Pacific. + </p> + <p> + Crowds stood on the deck to get a last glimpse of home and loved ones, and + to wave to friends as long as they could be distinguished. There was one + young man who stood apart from the crowd, and who did not wave farewell to + any one. He had come on board with a couple of men, but they had gone back + to the dock, and were lost in the crowd. He seemed entirely alone. He + leaned against the deck-railing and gazed intently over the widening strip + of tumbling waters to the city on the shore. But he did not see it. + Instead, he saw a Canadian farmhouse, a garden and orchard, and gently + sloping meadows hedged in by forest. And up behind the barn he saw a stony + field, where long ago he and his brother and the neighbor boys had broken + the stones for the new house. + </p> + <p> + His quick movements, his slim, straight figure, and his bright, piercing + eyes showed he was the same boy who had broken the big rock in the + pasture-field long before. Just the same boy, only bigger, and more man + than boy now, for he wore an air of command and his thin keen face bore a + beard, a deep black, like his hair. And now he was going away, as he had + longed to go, when he was a boy, and ahead of him lay the big frowning + rock, which he must either break or be broken upon. + </p> + <p> + He had learned many things since those days when he had scampered barefoot + over the fields, or down the road to school. He had been to college in + Toronto, in Princeton, and away over in Edinburgh, in the old homeland + where his father and mother were born. And all through his life that call + to go and do great deeds for the King had come again and again. He had + determined to obey it when he was but a little lad at school. He had + encountered many big stones in his way, which he had to break, before he + could go on. But the biggest stone of all lay across his path when college + was over, and he was ready and anxious to go away as a missionary. The + Presbyterian Church of Canada had never yet sent out a missionary to a + foreign land, and some of the good old men bade George Mackay stay at home + and preach the gospel there. But as usual he conquered. Every one saw he + would be a great missionary if he were only given a chance. At last the + General Assembly gave its consent, and now, in spite of all stones in the + way, here he was, bound for China, and ready to do anything the King + commanded. Land was beginning to fade away into a gray mist, the November + wind was damp and chill, he turned and went down to his stateroom. He sat + down on his little steamer trunk, and for the first time the utter + loneliness and the uncertainty of this voyage came over him. He took up + his Bible and turned to the fly-leaf. There he read the inscription: + </p> + <p> + Presented to REV. G. L. MACKAY + </p> + <p> + First missionary of the Canadian Presbyterian Church to China, by the + Foreign Mission Committee, as a parting token of their esteem, when about + to leave his native land for the sphere of his future labors among the + heathen. WILLIAM MACLAREN, Convener. + </p> + <p> + Ottawa, 9th October, 1871. Matthew xxviii: 18-20. Psalm cxxi + </p> + <p> + It was a moment of severe trial to the young soldier. But he turned to the + Psalm marked on the fly-leaf of his Bible, and he read it again and again. + </p> + <p> + "My help cometh from the Lord which made heaven and earth" + </p> + <p> + "The Lord is thy keeper: the Lord is thy shade upon thy right hand." + </p> + <p> + "The sun shall not smite thee by day, nor the moon by night." + </p> + <p> + The beautiful words gave him comfort. Homesickness, loneliness, and fears + for the future all vanished. He was going out to an unknown land where + dangers and perhaps death awaited him, but the Lord would be his keeper + and nothing could harm him. + </p> + <p> + Twenty-six days on the Pacific! And a stormy voyage it was, for the + Pacific does not always live up to her beautiful name, and she tossed the + America about in a shocking manner. But the voyage did not seem long to + George Mackay. There were other missionaries on board with whom he had + become acquainted, and he had long delightful talks with them and they + taught him many things about his new work. He was the same busy G. L. he + had been when a boy; always working, working, and he did not waste a + moment on the voyage. There was a fine library on the ship and he studied + the books on China until he knew more about the religion of that country + than did many of the Chinese themselves. + </p> + <p> + One day, as he was poring over a Chinese history, some one called him + hastily to come on deck. He threw down his book and ran up-stairs. The + whole ship was in a joyous commotion. His friend pointed toward the + horizon, and away off there against the sky stood the top of a snow-capped + peak—Fujiyama!—the majestic, sacred mountain of Japan! + </p> + <p> + It was a welcome sight, after the long ocean voyage, and the hours they + lay in Yokahama harbor were full of enjoyment. Every sight was thrilling + and strange to young Mackay's Western eyes. The harbor fairly swarmed with + noisy, shouting, chattering Japanese boatmen. He wondered why they seemed + so familiar, until it suddenly dawned on him that their queer ricestraw + coats made them look like a swarm of Robinson Crusoes who had just been + rescued from their islands. + </p> + <p> + When he landed he found things still funnier. The streets were noisier + than the harbor. Through them rolled large heavy wooden carts, pulled and + pushed by men, with much grunting and groaning. Past him whirled what + looked like overgrown baby carriages, also pulled by men, and each + containing a big grown-up human baby. It was all so pretty too, and so + enchanting that the young missionary would fain have remained there. But + China was still farther on, so when the America again set sail, he was on + board. + </p> + <p> + Away they sailed farther and farther east, or was it west? He often asked + himself that question in some amusement as they approached the coast of + China. They entered a long winding channel and steamed this way and that + until one day they sailed into a fine broad harbor with a magnificent city + rising far up the steep sides of a hill. It was an Oriental city, and + therefore strange to the young traveler. But for all that there seemed + something familiar in the fine European buildings that lined the streets, + and something still more homelike in that which floated high above them—something + that brought a thrill to the heart of the young Canadian—the + red-crossed banner of Britain! + </p> + <p> + It was Hongkong, the great British port of the East, and here he decided + to land. No sooner had the travelers touched the dock, than they were + surrounded by a yelling, jostling crowd of Chinese coolies, all shouting + in an outlandish gibberish for the privilege of carrying the Barbarians' + baggage. A group gathered round Mackay, and in their eagerness began + hammering each other with bamboo poles. He was well-nigh bewildered, when + above the din sounded the welcome music of an English voice. + </p> + <p> + "Are you Mackay from Canada?" + </p> + <p> + He whirled round joyfully. It was Dr. E. J. Eitel, a missionary from + England. He had been told that the young Canadian would arrive on the + America and was there to welcome him. + </p> + <p> + Although the Canadian Presbyterian Church had as yet sent out no + missionaries to a foreign land, the Presbyterian Church of England had + many scattered over China. They were all hoping that the new recruit would + join them, and invited him to visit different mission stations, and see + where he would like to settle. + </p> + <p> + So he remained that night in Hongkong, as Dr. Eitel's guest, and the next + morning he took a steamer for Canton. Here he was met on the pier by an + old fellow student of Princeton University, and the two old college + friends had a grand reunion. He returned to Hongkong shortly, and next + visited Swatow. As they sailed into the harbor, he noticed two Englishmen + rowing out toward them in a sampan. (*) No sooner had the ship's ladder + been lowered, than the two sprang out of their boat and clambered quickly + on deck. To Mackay's amazement, one of them called out, "Is Mackay of + Canada on board?" + </p> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + * A Chinese boat from twelve to fifteen feet long, covered + with a house. +</pre> + <p> + "Mackay of Canada," sprang forward delighted, and found his two new + friends to be Mr. Hobson of the Chinese imperial customs, and Dr. Thompson + of the English Presbyterian mission in Swatow. + </p> + <p> + The missionaries here gave the stranger a warm welcome. At every place he + had visited there had awaited him a cordial invitation to stay and work. + And now at Swatow he was urged to settle down and help them. There was + plenty to be done, and they would be delighted to have his help. + </p> + <p> + But for some reason, Mackay scarcely knew why himself, he wanted to see + another place. + </p> + <p> + Away off the southeastern coast of China lies a large island called + Formosa. It is separated from the mainland by a body of water called the + Formosa Channel. This is in some places eighty miles wide, in others + almost two hundred. Mackay had often heard of Formosa even before coming + to China, and knew it was famed for its beauty. + </p> + <p> + Even its name shows this. Long, long years before, some navigators from + Portugal sailed to this beautiful island. They had stood on the deck of + their ship as they approached it, and were amazed at its loveliness. They + saw lofty green mountains piercing the clouds. They saw silvery cascades + tumbling down their sides, flashing in the sunlight, and, below, terraced + plains sloping down to the sea, covered with waving bamboo or with little + water-covered rice-fields. It was all so delightful that no wonder they + cried, + </p> + <p> + "Illha Formosa! Illha Formosa!" + </p> + <p> + "Beautiful Isle! Beautiful Isle." Since that day the "Beautiful Isle," + perhaps the most charming in all the world, has been called Formosa. + </p> + <p> + And, somehow, Mackay longed to see this "Beautiful Isle" before he decided + where he was going to preach the gospel. And so when the kind friends at + Swatow said, "Stay and work with us," he always answered, "I must first + see Formosa." + </p> + <p> + So, one day, he sailed away from the mainland toward the Beautiful Isle. + He landed at Takow in the south of the island, just about Christmas-time. + But Formosa was green, the weather was hot, and he could scarcely believe + that, at home in Oxford county, Ontario, they were flying over the snow to + the music of sleigh-bells. On New Year's day he met a missionary of this + south Formosa field, named Dr. Ritchie. He belonged to the Presbyterian + Church of England, which had a fine mission there. For nearly a month + Mackay visited with him and studied the language. + </p> + <p> + And while he visited and worked there the missionaries told him of the + northern part of the island. No person was there to tell all those crowded + cities of Jesus Christ and His love. It would be lonely for him there, it + would be terribly hard work, but it would be a grand Thing to lay the + foundations, to be the first to tell those people the "good news," the + young missionary thought. And, one day, he looked up from the Chinese book + he was studying and said to Dr. Ritchie: + </p> + <p> + "I have decided to settle in north Formosa." + </p> + <p> + And Dr. Ritchie's quick answer was: + </p> + <p> + "God bless you, Mackay." + </p> + <p> + As soon as the decision was made, another missionary, Dr. Dickson, who was + with Mr. Ritchie, decided to go to north Formosa with the young man, and + show him over the ground. So, early in the month of March in the year + 1872, the three men set off by steamship to sail for Tamsui, a port in + north Formosa. They were two days making the voyage, and a tropical storm + pitched the small vessel hither and thither, so that they were very much + relieved when they sailed up to the mouth of the Tamsui river. + </p> + <p> + It was low tide and a bare sand-bar stretched across the mouth of the + harbor, so the anchor was dropped, and they waited until the tide should + cover the bar, and allow them to sail in. + </p> + <p> + This wait gave the travelers a fine opportunity to see the country. The + view from this harbor of the "Beautiful Island" was an enchanting one. + Before them, toward the east, rose tier upon tier of magnificent + mountains, stretching north and south. Down their sloping sides tumbled + sparkling cascades and here and there patches of bright green showed where + there were tea plantations. Farther down were stretches of grass and + groves of lovely feathery bamboo. And between these groves stretched what + seemed to be little silvery lakes, with the reflection of the great + mountains in them. They were really the famous rice-fields of Formosa, at + this time of the year all under water. There were no fences round their + little lake-fields. They were of all shapes and sizes, and were divided + from each other by little green fringed dykes or walls. Each row of fields + was lower than the last until they came right down to the sea-level, and + all lay blue and smiling in the blazing sunlight. + </p> + <p> + As the young missionary stood spellbound, gazing over the lovely, + fairylike scene, Mr. Ritchie touched his arm. + </p> + <p> + "This is your parish, Mackay," he whispered smilingly. + </p> + <p> + And then for the first time since he had started on his long, long + journey, the young missionary felt his spirit at peace. The restlessness + that had driven him on from one Chinese port to another was gone. This was + indeed his parish. + </p> + <p> + Suddenly out swung a signal; the tide had risen. Up came the anchor, and + away they glided over the now submerged sand-bar into the harbor. + </p> + <p> + A nearer view showed greater charms in the Beautiful Isle. On the south, + at their right, lay the great Quan Yin mountain, towering seventeen + hundred feet above them, clothed in tall grass and groves of bamboo, + banyan, and fir trees of every conceivable shade of green. Nestling at its + feet were little villages almost buried in trees. Slowly the ship drifted + along, passing, here a queer fishing village close to the sandy shore, + yonder a light-house, there a battered Chinese fort rising from the top of + a hill. + </p> + <p> + And now Tamsui came in sight—the new home of the young missionary. + It seemed to him that it was the prettiest and the dirtiest place he had + ever seen. The town lay along the bank of the river at the foot of a hill. + This bluff rose abruptly behind it to a height of two hundred feet. On its + face stood a queer-looking building. It was red in color, solid and + weather worn, and above it floated the grand old flag of Britain. + </p> + <p> + "That's an old Dutch fort," explained Mr. Ritchie, "left there since they + were in the island. It is the British consulate now. There, next to it, is + the consul's residence." + </p> + <p> + It was a handsome house, just below the fort, and surrounded by lovely + gardens. But down beneath it, on the shore, was the most interesting place + to the newcomer, the town of Tamsui proper, or Ho Be, as the Chinese + called it. The foreigners landed and made their way up the street. To the + two from south Formosa, Tamsui was like every other small Chinese town, + but Mackay had not yet become accustomed to the strange sights and sounds + and stranger smells, and his bright eyes were keen with interest. + </p> + <p> + The main thoroughfare wound this way and that, only seven or eight feet + wide at its best. It was filled with noisy crowds of men who acted as if + they were on the verge of a terrible fight. But the older missionaries + knew that they were merely acting as Chinese crowds always do. On each + side were shops,—tea shops, rice shops, tobacco shops, and many + other kinds. And most numerous of all were the shops where opium, one of + the greatest curses of Chinese life, was sold. The front wall of each was + removed, and the customers stood in the street and dickered with the + shopkeeper, while at the top of his harsh voice the latter swore by all + the gods in China that he was giving the article away at a terrific loss. + Through the crowd pushed hawkers, carrying their wares balanced on poles + across their shoulders. Boys with trays of Chinese candies and sugar-cane + yelled their wares above the din. The visitors stumbled along over the + rough stones of the pavement until they came to the market-place. + Foreigners were not such a curiosity in Tamsui as in the inland towns, and + not a great deal of notice was taken of them, but occasionally Mackay + could hear the now familiar words of contempt —"Ugly barbarian"—"Foreign + devil" from the men that passed them. And one man, pointing to Mackay, + shouted "Ho! the black-bearded barbarian!" It was a name the young + missionary was destined to hear very frequently. Past opium-dens, barber + shops, and drug stores they went and through the noise and bustle and din + of the market-place. They knew that the inns, judging by the outside, + would be filthy, so Mr. Ritchie suggested, as evening was approaching, + that they find some comfortable place to spend the night. + </p> + <p> + There was a British merchant in Tamsui named Mr. Dodd, whom the + missionaries knew. So to him they went, and were given fine quarters in + his warehouse. They ate their supper here, from the provisions they had + bought in the market, and stretching themselves out on their grass mats + they slept soundly. The next day was Sunday, but the three travelers spent + it quietly in the warehouse by the river, studying their Bibles and + discussing their proposed trip. They concluded it was best not to provoke + the anger of the people against the new missionary by preaching, so they + did not go out. To-morrow they would start southward and take Mackay to + the bounds of their mission field, and show him the land that was to be + "his parish." + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0003" id="link2HCH0003"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER III. RECONNOITERING THE TERRITORY + </h2> + <p> + Early Monday morning Mackay peeped out of the big warehouse door at the + great calm mountain shrouded in the pale mists of early dawn. The other + two travelers were soon astir, and were surprised to find their young + companion all ready. They were not yet well enough acquainted with him to + know that he could do with less sleep at night than an owl. He was in high + spirits and as eager to be off as he had ever been to start for a day's + fishing in the old times back in Ontario. And indeed this was just a great + fishing expedition he was commencing. For had not One said to him, long + long ago when he was but a little boy, "Come follow me, and I will make + you to become a fisher of men"? and he had obeyed. The first task was to + go out and buy food for the journey, and to hire a couple of coolies to + carry it and what baggage they must take. + </p> + <p> + Dr. Dickson went off on this errand, and being well acquainted with + Formosan customs and language, soon returned with two Chinese carriers and + plenty of food. This last consisted of canned meats, biscuits, coffee, and + condensed milk, bought at a store where ships' supplies were kept for + sale. There was also some salted water-buffalo meat, a Chinese dish with + which the young missionary was destined to become very familiar. + </p> + <p> + They started out three abreast, Mr. Ritchie's blue serge figure capped by + a white helmet on the right, Dr. Dickson on the left in his Scotch tweed, + and between them the alert, slim figure of the newcomer, in his suit of + Canadian gray. The coolies, with baskets hung to a pole across their + shoulders, came ambling along behind. + </p> + <p> + The three travelers were in the gayest mood. Perhaps it was the clear + spring morning air, or the breath of the salt ocean, perhaps it was the + intoxicating beauty of mountain and plain and river that surrounded them + or it may have been because they had given their lives in perfect service + to the One who is the source of all happiness, but whatever was the cause, + they were all like schoolboys off for a holiday. The coolies who trotted + in the rear were very much amazed and not a little amused at the actions + of these foolish foreign devils, who laughed and joked and seemed in such + high spirits for no reason at all. + </p> + <p> + They swung along the bank of the river until they came to the ferry that + was to take them to the other side. They sprang into the boat and were + shoved off. Before they reached the other side, at Dr. Dickson's + suggestion, they took off their shoes and socks, and stowed them away in + the carriers' baskets. When they came to the opposite bank they rolled up + their trousers to their knees and sprang out into the shallow water. For a + short distance they had the joy of tramping barefoot along the hard + gleaming sand of the harbor. + </p> + <p> + But shoes and stockings had to be resumed, for soon they turned inland, on + a path that wound up to the high plain above the river. "Do you ever use a + horse on your travels?" asked young Mackay as they climbed upward. + </p> + <p> + Mr. Ritchie laughed. "You couldn't get one in north Formosa for love or + money. And if you could, he wouldn't be any use." + </p> + <p> + "Unless he was a second Pegasus, and could soar above the Formosan roads," + added Dr. Dickson. "Wait a bit and you'll understand." + </p> + <p> + The young missionary waited, and kept his eyes open for the answer. The + pathway crossed a grassy plain where groups of queer-looking, + mouse-colored animals, half ox, half buffalo, with great spreading horns, + strayed about, herded by boys, or lay wallowing in deep pools. + </p> + <p> + "Water-buffaloes," he said, remembering them as he had seen them in the + south. + </p> + <p> + "The most useful animal on the island," remarked Mr. Ritchie, adding with + a laugh, "except perhaps the pig. You'll have a taste of Mr. Buffalo for + your dinner, Mackay." + </p> + <p> + And now they were up on the heights, and the lovely country lay spread out + before them. Mackay mentally compared this walk to many he had taken along + the country roads of his native land. It was early in March, but as there + had been no winter, so there was no spring. It was summer, warm, radiant + summer, like a lovely day in June at home. Dandelions, violets, and many + gay flowers that he did not recognize spangled the grassy plain. The + skylark high overhead was pouring out its glorious song, just as he had + heard it in his student days in Scotland. Here and there were clumps of + fir trees that reminded him of Canada, but on the whole the scene was new + and wonderful to his Western eyes. + </p> + <p> + They were now on the first level of the rice-fields. The farms were tiny + things, none larger than eight or ten acres. They were divided into + queer-shaped little irrigated fields, separated not by fences, but by + little low walls of mud. Every farm was under water now, and here and + there, wading through his little flooded fields, went the farmer with his + plough, drawn by a useful water-buffalo,—the latter apparently quite + happy at being allowed to splash about in the mud. + </p> + <p> + These rice-farms soon became a familiar sight to the newcomer. He liked to + see them at all times—when each field was a pretty blue or green + lake, later when the water was choked with the fresh green growth, or in + harvest days, when the farmers stripped the fields of their grain. Just + now they were at their prettiest. Row above row, they went up the + mountainside, like a great glass stairs, each row reflecting the green + hills and the bamboo groves above. And from each terrace to the one below, + the water tumbled in pretty little cascades that sparkled in the sunlight + and filled the air with music. For travelers there were only narrow paths + between farms, and often only the ridge of the dykes between field and + field. As they made their way between the tiny fields, walking along the + narrow dykes, and listening to the splashing sound of the water, Mackay + understood what Dr. Dickson meant, when he remarked that only a flying + horse could be of use on such Formosan cross-country journeys. + </p> + <p> + Soon the pathway changed once more to the broader public highway. Here + there was much traffic, and many travelers carried in sedan-chairs passed + them. And many times by the roadside Mackay saw something that reminded + him forcibly of why he had come to Formosa—a heathen shrine. The + whole countryside seemed dotted with them. And as he watched the + worshipers coming and going, and heard the disdainful words from the + priests cast at the hated foreigners, he realized that he was face to face + with an awful opposing force. It was the great stone of heathenism he had + come to break, and the question was, would he be as successful as he had + been long ago in the Canadian pasture-field? + </p> + <p> + The travelers ate their dinner by the roadside under the shade of some fir + trees that made Mackay feel at home. They were soon up and off again, and, + tired with their long tramp, they arrived at a town called Tionglek, and + decided to spend the night there. The place was about the size of Tamsui, + with between four and five thousand inhabitants, and was quite as dirty + and almost as noisy. They walked down the main street with its uneven + stone pavement, its open shops, its noisy bargains, and above all its + horrible smells. With the exception of an occasional visit from an + official, foreigners scarcely ever came to Tiong-lek, and on every side + were revilings and threatenings. One yellow-faced youngster picked up a + handful of mud and threw it at the hated foreigners; and "Black-bearded + barbarian," mingled with their shouts. Mackay's bright eyes took in + everything, and he realized more and more the difficulties of the task + before him. + </p> + <p> + They stopped in front of a low one-story building made of sun-dried + bricks. This was the Tiong-lek hotel where they were to spend the night. + Like most Chinese houses it was composed of a number of buildings arranged + in the form of a square with a courtyard in the center. Dr. Dickson asked + for lodgings from the slant-eyed proprietor. He looked askance at the + foreigners, but concluded that their money was as good as any one else's, + and he led them through the deep doorway into the courtyard. + </p> + <p> + In the center of this yard stood an earthen range, with a fire in it. + Several travelers stood about it cooking their rice. It was evidently the + hotel dining-room; a diningroom that was open to all too, for chickens + clucked and cackled and pigs grunted about the range and made themselves + quite at home. The men about the gateway scowled and muttered "Foreign + devil," as the three strangers passed them. + </p> + <p> + They crossed the courtyard and entered their room, or rather stumbled into + it, in semi-darkness. Mackay peered about him curiously. He discovered + three beds, made of planks and set on brick pillars for legs. Each was + covered with a dirty mat woven from grass and reeking with the odor of + opium smoke. + </p> + <p> + A servant came in with something evidently intended for a lamp—a + burning pith wick set in a saucer of peanut oil. It gave out only a faint + glimmer of light, but enough to enable the young missionary to see + something else in the room,—some THINGS rather, that ran and skipped + and swarmed all over the damp earthen floor and the dirty walls. There + were thousands of these brisk little creatures, all leaping about in + pleasant anticipation of the good time they would have when the barbarians + went to bed. There was no window, and only the one door that opened into + the courtyard. An old pig, evidently more friendly to the foreigners than + her masters, came waddling toward them followed by her squealing little + brood, and flopping down into the mud in the doorway lay there uttering + grunts of content. + </p> + <p> + The evil smells of the room, the stench from the pigs, and the still more + dreadful odors wafted from the queer food cooking on the range, made the + young traveler's unaccustomed senses revolt. He had a half notion that the + two older men were putting up a joke on him. + </p> + <p> + "I suppose you thought it wise to give me a strong dose of all this at the + start?" he inquired humorously, holding his nose and glancing from the + pigs at the door to the crawlers on the wall. + </p> + <p> + "A strong dose!" laughed Mr. Ritchie. "Not a bit of it, young man. Wait + till you've had some experience of the luxuries of Formosan inns. You'll + be calling this the Queen's Hotel, before you've been here long!" + </p> + <p> + And so indeed it proved later, for George Mackay had yet much to learn of + the true character of Chinese inns. Needless to say he spent a wakeful + night, on his hard plank bed, and was up early in the morning. The + travelers ate their breakfast in a room where the ducks and hens clattered + about under the table and between their legs. Fortunately the food was + taken from their own stores, and in spite of the surroundings was quite + appetizing. + </p> + <p> + They started off early, drawing in great breaths of the pure morning air, + relieved to be away from the odors of the "Queen's Hotel." Three hundred + feet above them, high against the deep blue of the morning sky, stood + Table Hill, and they started on a brisk climb up its side. The sun had not + risen, but already the farmers were out in their little water-fields, or + working in their tea plantations. The mountain with its groves of bamboo + lay reflected in the little mirrors of the rice-fields. A steady climb + brought them to the summit, and after a long descent on the other side and + a tramp through tea plantations they arrived in the evening at a large + city with a high wall around it, the city of Tek-chham. That night in the + city inn was so much worse than the one at Tionglek that the Canadian was + convinced his friends must have reserved the "strong dose" for the second + night. There were the same smells, the same sorts of pigs and ducks and + hens, the same breeds of lively nightly companions, and each seemed to + have gained a fresh force. + </p> + <p> + It was a relief to be out in the fields again after the foul odors of the + night, and the travelers were off before dawn. The country looked more + familiar to Mackay this morning, for they passed through wheat and barley + fields. It seemed so strange to wander over a man's farm by a footpath, + but it was a Chinese custom to which he soon became accustomed. + </p> + <p> + The sun was blazing hot, and it was a great relief when they entered the + cool shade of a forest. It was a delightful place and George Mackay + reveled in its beauty. Ever since he had been able to run about his own + home farm in Ontario his eyes had always been wide open to observe + anything new. He had studied as much out of doors, all his life, as he had + done in college, and now he found this forest a perfect library of new + Things. Nearly every tree and flower was strange to his Canadian eyes. + Here and there, in sheltered valleys, grew the tree-fern, the most + beautiful object in the forest, towering away up sometimes to a height of + sixty feet, and spreading its stately fronds out to a width of fifteen + feet. There was a lovely big plant with purple stem and purple leaves, and + when Dr. Dickson told him it was the castor-oil plant, he smiled at the + remembrance of the trials that plant had caused him in younger days. One + elegant tree, straight as a pine, rose fifty feet in height, with leaves + away up at the top only. + </p> + <p> + This was the betel-nut tree. + </p> + <p> + "The nuts of that tree," said Mr. Ritchie, standing and pointing away up + to where the sunlight filtered through the far-off leaves, "are the + chewing tobacco of Formosa and all the islands about here. The Chinese do + not chew it, but the Malayans do. You will meet some of these natives + soon." + </p> + <p> + On every side grew the rattan, half tree, half vine. It started off as a + tree and grew straight up often to twenty feet in height, and then spread + itself out over the tops of other trees and plants in vine-like fashion; + some of its branches measured almost five hundred feet in length. + </p> + <p> + The travelers paused to admire one high in the branches of the trees. + </p> + <p> + "Many a Chinaman loses his head hunting that plant," remarked Mr. Ritchie. + "These islanders export a great deal of rattan, and the head-hunters up + there in the mountains watch for the Chinese when they are working in the + forest." + </p> + <p> + Mackay listened eagerly to his friends' tales of the head-hunting savages, + living in the mountains. They were always on the lookout for the farmers + near their forest lairs. They watched for any unwary man who went too near + the woods, pounced upon him, and went off in triumph with his head in a + bag. + </p> + <p> + The young traveler's eyes brightened, "I'll visit them some day!" he + cried, looking off toward the mountainside. Mr. Ritchie glanced quickly at + the flashing eyes and the quick, alert figure of the young man as he + strode along, and some hint came to him of the dauntless young heart which + beat beneath that coat of Canadian gray. + </p> + <p> + Two days more over hill and dale, through rice and tea and tobacco-fields, + and then, in the middle of a hot afternoon, Mr. Ritchie began to shiver + and shake as though half frozen. Dr. Dickson understood, and at the next + stopping-place he ordered a sedan-chair and four coolies to carry it. It + was the old dreaded disease that hangs like a black cloud over lovely + Formosa, the malarial fever. Mr. Ritchie had been a missionary only four + years in the island, but already the scourge had come upon him, and his + system was weakened. For, once seized by malaria in Formosa, one seldom + makes his escape. They put the sick man into the chair, now in a raging + fever, and he was carried by the four coolies. + </p> + <p> + They were nearing the end of their journey and were now among a people not + Chinese. They belonged to the original Malayan race of the island. They + had been conquered by the Chinese, who in the early days came over from + China under a pirate named Koxinga. As the Chinese name every one but + themselves "barbarians," they gave this name to all the natives of the + island. They had conquered all but the dreaded head-hunters, who, free in + their mountain fastnesses, took a terrible toll of heads from their + would-be conquerors, or even from their own half-civilized brethren. + </p> + <p> + The native Malayans who had been subdued by the Chinese were given + different names. Those who lived on the great level rice-plain over which + the missionaries were traveling, were called Pe-po-hoan, "Barbarians of + the plain." Mackay could see little difference between them and the + Chinese, except in the cast of their features, and their long-shaped + heads. They wore Chinese dress, even to the cue, worshiped the Chinese + gods, and spoke with a peculiar Malayan twang. + </p> + <p> + The travelers were journeying rather wearily over a low muddy stretch of + ground, picking their way along the narrow paths between the rice-fields, + when they saw a group of men come hurrying down the path to meet them. + They kept calling out, but the words they used were not the familiar + "foreign devil" or "ugly barbarian." Instead the people were shouting + words of joyful welcome. + </p> + <p> + Dr. Dickson hailed them with delight, and soon he and Mr. Ritchie's + sedan-chair were surrounded by a clamorous group of friends. + </p> + <p> + They had journeyed so far south that they had arrived at the borders of + the English Presbyterian mission, and the people crowding about them were + native Christians. It was all so different from their treatment by the + heathen that Mackay's heart was warmed. When the great stone of heathenism + was broken, what love and kindness were revealed! + </p> + <p> + The visitors were led in triumph to the village. There was a chapel here, + and they stayed nearly a week, preaching and teaching. + </p> + <p> + The rest did Mr. Ritchie much good, and at the end of their visit he was + once more able to start off on foot. They moved on from village to village + and everywhere the Pe-po-hoan Christians received them with the greatest + hospitality. + </p> + <p> + But at last the three friends found the time had come for them to part. + The two Englishmen had to go on through their fields to their south + Formosan home and the young Canadian must go back to fight the battle + alone in the north of the island. He had endeared himself to the two older + men, and when the farewells came they were filled with regret. + </p> + <p> + They bade him a lingering good-by, with many blessings upon his young + head, and many prayers for success in the hard fight upon which he was + entering. They walked a short way with him, and stood watching the + straight, lithe young figure, SO full of courage and hope until it + disappeared down the valley. They knew only too well the dangers and + trials ahead of him, but they knew also that he was not going into the + fight alone. For the Captain was going with his young soldier. + </p> + <p> + There was a suspicion of moisture in the eyes of the older missionaries as + they turned back to prepare for their own journey southward. + </p> + <p> + "God bless the boy!" said Dr. Dickson fervently. "We'll hear of that young + fellow yet, Ritchie. He's on fire." + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0004" id="link2HCH0004"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER IV. BEGINNING THE SIEGE + </h2> + <p> + The news was soon noised about Tamsui that one of the three barbarians who + had so lately visited the town had returned to make the place his home. + This was most unwelcome tidings to the heathen, and the air was filled + with mutterings and threatenings, and every one was determined to drive + the foreign devil out if at all possible. So Mackay found himself meeting + every kind of opposition. He was too independent to ask assistance from + the British consul in the old Dutch fort on the bluff, or of any other + European settlers in Tamsui. He was bound to make his own way. But it was + not easy to do so in view of the forces which opposed him. He had now been + in Formosa about two months and had studied the Chinese language every + waking hour, but it was very difficult, and he found his usually ready + tongue wofully handicapped. + </p> + <p> + His first concern was to get a dwelling-place, and he went from house to + house inquiring for some place to rent. Everywhere he went he was turned + away with rough abuse, and occasionally the dogs were set upon him. + </p> + <p> + But at last he was successful. Up on the bank of the river, a little way + from the edge of the town, he found a place which the owner condescended + to rent. It was a miserable little hut, half house, half cellar, built + into the side of the hill facing the river. A military officer had + intended it for his horse-stable, and yet Mackay paid for this hovel the + sum of fifteen dollars a month. It had three rooms, one without a floor. + The road ran past the door, and a few feet beyond was the river. By + spending money rather liberally he managed to hire the coolie who had + accompanied him to south Formosa. With his servant's help Mackay had his + new establishment thoroughly cleaned and whitewashed, and then he moved in + his furniture. He laughed as he called it furniture, for it consisted of + but two packing boxes full of books and clothing. But more came later. The + British consul, Mr. Frater, lent him a chair and a bed. There was one old + Chinese, who kept a shop near by, and who seemed inclined to be friendly + to the queer barbarian with the black beard. He presented him with an old + pewter lamp, and the house was furnished complete. + </p> + <p> + Mackay sat down at his one table, the first night after he was settled. + The damp air was hot and heavy, and swarms of tormenting mosquitoes filled + the room. Through the open door came the murmur of the river, and from far + down in the village the sounds of harsh, clamorous voices. He was alone, + many, many miles from home and friends. Around him on every side were + bitter enemies. + </p> + <p> + One might have supposed he would be overcome at the thought of the + stupendous task before him, but whoever supposed that did not know George + Mackay. He lighted his pewter lamp, opened his diary, and these are the + words he wrote: + </p> + <p> + "Here I am in this house, having been led all the way from the old + homestead in Zorra by Jesus, as direct as though my boxes were labeled, + `Tamsui, Formosa, China.' Oh, the glorious privilege to lay the foundation + of Christ's Church in unbroken heathenism! God help me to do this with the + open Bible! Again I swear allegiance to thee, O King Jesus, my Captain. So + help me God!" + </p> + <p> + And now his first duty was to learn the Chinese language. He could already + speak a little, but it would be a long time, he knew, before he could + preach. And yet, how was he to learn? he asked himself. He was a scholar + without a teacher or school. But there was his servant, and nothing + daunted by the difficulties to be overcome, he set to work to make him his + teacher also. + </p> + <p> + George Mackay always went at any task with all his might and main, and he + attacked the Chinese language in the same manner. He found it a hard stone + to break, however. "Of all earthly things I know of," he remarked once, + "it is the most intricate and difficult to master." + </p> + <p> + His unwilling teacher was just about as hard to manage as his task, for + the coolie did not take kindly to giving lessons. He certainly had a + rather hard time. Day and night his master deluged him with questions. He + made him repeat phrases again and again until his pupil could say them + correctly. He asked him the name of everything inside the house and out, + until the easy-going Oriental was overcome with dismay. This wild + barbarian, with the fiery eyes and the black beard, was a terrible + creature who gave one no rest night nor day. Sometimes after Mackay had + spent hours with him, imitating sounds and repeating the names of things + over and over, his harassed teacher would back out of the room stealthily, + keeping an anxious eye on his master, and showing plainly he had grave + fears that the foreigner had gone quite mad. + </p> + <p> + Mackay realized that the pace was too hard for his servant, and that the + poor fellow was in a fair way to lose what little wits he had, if not left + alone occasionally. So one day he wandered out along the riverbank, in + search of some one who would talk with him. He turned into a path that led + up the hill behind the town. He was in hopes he might meet a farmer who + would be friendly. + </p> + <p> + When he reached the top of the bluff he found a grassy common stretching + back toward the rice-fields. Here and there over these downs strayed the + queer-looking water-buffaloes. Some of them were plunged deep in pools of + water, and lay there like pigs with only their noses out. + </p> + <p> + He heard a merry laugh and shout from another part of the common, and + there sat a crowd of frolicsome Chinese boys, in large sun hats, and short + loose trousers. There were about a dozen of them, and they were supposed + to be herding the water-buffaloes to keep them out of the unfenced fields. + But, boylike, they were flying kites, and letting their huge-horned + charges herd themselves. + </p> + <p> + Mackay walked over toward them. It was not so long since he had been a boy + himself, and these jolly lads appealed to him. But the moment one caught + sight of the stranger, he gave a shout of alarm. The rest jumped up, and + with yells of terror and cries of "Here's the foreign devil!" "Run, or the + foreign devil will get you!" away they went helter-skelter, their big hats + waving, their loose clothes flapping wildly. They all disappeared like + magic behind a big boulder, and the cause of their terror had to walk + away. + </p> + <p> + But the next day, when his servant once more showed signs of mental + exhaustion, he strolled out again upon the downs. The boys were there and + saw him coming. Though they did not actually run away this time, they + retired to a safe distance, and stood ready to fly at any sign of the + barbarian's approach. They watched him wonderingly. They noticed his + strange white face, his black beard, his hair cut off quite short, his + amazing hat, and his ridiculous clothes. And when at last he walked away, + and all danger was over, they burst into shouts of laughter. + </p> + <p> + The next day, as they scampered about the common, here again came the + absurd-looking stranger, walking slowly, as though careful not to frighten + them. The boys did not run away this time, and to their utter astonishment + he spoke to them. Mackay had practised carefully the words he was to say + to them, and the well-spoken Chinese astounded the lads as much as if one + of the monkeys that gamboled about the trees of their forests should come + down and say, "How do you do, boys?" + </p> + <p> + "Why, he speaks our words!" they all cried at once. + </p> + <p> + As they stood staring, Mackay took out his watch and held it up for them + to see. It glittered in the sun, and at the sight of it and the kind + smiling face above, they lost their fears and crowded around him. They + examined the watch in great wonder. They handled his clothes, exclaimed + over the buttons on his coat, and inquired what they were for. They felt + his hands and his fingers, and finally decided that, in spite of his queer + looks, he was after all a man. + </p> + <p> + From that day the young missionary and the herd-boys were great friends. + Every day he joined them in the buffalo pasture, and would spend from four + to five hours with them. And as they were very willing to talk, he not + only learned their language rapidly, but also learned much about their + homes, their schools, their customs, and their religion. + </p> + <p> + One day, after a lengthy lesson from his servant, the latter decided that + the barbarian was unbearable, and bundling up his clothes he marched off, + without so much as "by your leave." So Mackay fell back entirely upon his + little teachers on the common. With their assistance in the daytime and + his Chinese-English dictionary at night, he made wonderful progress. + </p> + <p> + He was left alone now, to get his own meals and keep the swarms of flies + and the damp mold out of his hut by the riverside. He soon learned to eat + rice and water-buffalo meat, but he missed the milk and butter and cheese + of his old Canadian home. For he discovered that cows were never milked in + Formosa. There was variety of food, however, as almost every kind of + vegetable that he had ever tasted and many new kinds that he found + delicious were for sale in the open-fronted shops in the village. Then the + fruits! They were fresh at all seasons—oranges the whole year, + bananas fresh from the fields—and such pineapples! He realized that + he had never really tasted pineapples before. + </p> + <p> + Meanwhile, he was becoming acquainted. All the families of the herd-boys + learned to like him, and when others came to know him they treated him + with respect. He was a teacher, they learned, and in China a teacher is + always looked upon with something like reverence. And, besides, he had a + beard. This appendage was considered very honorable among Chinese, so the + black-bearded barbarian was respected because of this. + </p> + <p> + But there was one class that treated him with the greatest scorn. These + were the Chinese scholars. They were the literati, and were like princes + in the land. They despised every one who was not a graduate of their + schools, and most of all they despised this barbarian who dared to set + himself up as a teacher. Mackay had now learned Chinese well enough to + preach, and his sermons aroused the indignation of these proud graduates. + </p> + <p> + Sometimes when one was passing the little hut by the river, he would drop + in, and glance around just to see what sort of place the barbarian kept. + He would pick up the Bible and other books, throw them on the floor, and + with words of contempt strut proudly out. + </p> + <p> + Mackay endured this treatment patiently, but he set himself to study their + books, for he felt sure that the day was not far distant when he must meet + these conceited literati in argument. + </p> + <p> + He went about a good deal now. The Tamsui people became accustomed to him, + and he was not troubled much. His bright eyes were always wide open and he + learned much of the lives of the people he had come to teach. Among the + poor he found a poverty of which he had never dreamed. They could live + upon what a so-called poor family in Canada would throw away. Nothing was + wasted in China. He often saw the meat and fruit tins he threw away when + they were emptied, reappearing in the market-place. He learned that these + poorer people suffered cruel wrongs at the hands of their magistrates. He + visited a yamen, or court-house, and saw the mandarin "dispense justice," + but his judgment was said to be always given in favor of the one who paid + him the highest bribe. He saw the widow robbed, and the innocent suffering + frightful tortures, and sometimes he strode home to his little hut by the + river, his blood tingling with righteous indignation. And then he would + pray with all his soul: + </p> + <p> + "O God, give me power to teach these people of thy love through Jesus + Christ!" + </p> + <p> + But of all the horrors of heathenism, and there were many, he found the + religion the most dreadful. He had read about it when on board ship, but + he found it was infinitely worse when written in men's lives than when set + down in print. He never realized what a blessing was the religion of Jesus + Christ to a nation until he lived among a people who did not know Him. + </p> + <p> + He found almost as much difficulty in learning the Chinese religion as the + Chinese language. After he had spent days trying to understand it, it + would seem to him like some horrible nightmare filled with wicked devils + and no less wicked gods and evil spirits and ugly idols. And to make + matters worse there was not one religion, but a bewildering mixture of + three. First of all there was the ancient Chinese religion, called + Confucianism. Confucius, a wise man of China, who lived ages before, had + laid down some rules of conduct, and had been worshiped ever since. Very + good rules they were as far as they went, and if the Chinese had followed + this wise man they would not have drifted so far from the truth. But + Confucianism meant ancestor-worship. In every home was a little tablet + with the names of the family's ancestors upon it, and every one in the + house worshiped the spirits of those departed. With this was another + religion called Taoism. This taught belief in wicked demons who lurked + about people ready to do them some ill. Then, years and years before, some + people from India had brought over their religion, Buddhism, which had + become a system of idol-worship. These three religions were so mixed up + that the people themselves were not able to distinguish between them. The + names of their idols would cover pages, and an account of their religion + would fill volumes. The more Mackay learned of it, the more he yearned to + tell the people of the one God who was Lord and Father of them all. + </p> + <p> + As soon as he had learned to write clearly, he bought a large sheet of + paper, and printed on it the ten commandments in Chinese characters. Then + he hung it on the outside of his door. People who passed read it and made + comments of various kinds. Several threw mud at it, and at last a proud + graduate, who came striding past his silk robes rustling grandly, caught + the paper and tore it down. Mackay promptly put up another. It shared the + fate of the first. Then he put up a third, and the people let it alone. + Even these heathen Chinese were beginning to get an impression of the + dauntless determination of the man with whom they were to get much better + acquainted. + </p> + <p> + And all this time, while he was studying and working and arguing with the + heathen and preaching to them, the young missionary was working just as + hard at something else; something into which he was putting as much energy + and force as he did into learning the Chinese language. With all his might + and main, day and night, he was praying—praying for one special + object. He had been praying for this long before he saw Formosa. He was + pleading with God to give him, as his first convert, a young man of + education. And so he was always on the lookout for such, as he preached + and taught, and never once did he cease praying that he might find him. + </p> + <p> + One forenoon he was sitting at his books, near the open door, when a + visitor stopped before him. It was a fine-looking young man, well dressed + and with all the unmistakable signs of the scholar. He had none of the + graduate's proud insolence, however, for when Mackay arose, he spoke in + the most gentlemanly manner. At the missionary's invitation he entered, + and sat down, and the two chatted pleasantly. The visitor seemed + interested in the foreigner, and asked him many questions that showed a + bright, intelligent mind. When he arose to go, Mackay invited him to come + again, and he promised he would. He left his card, a strip of pink paper + about three inches by six; the name on it read Giam Cheng Hoa. Mackay was + very much interested in him, he was so bright, so affable, and such + pleasant company. He waited anxiously to see if he would return. + </p> + <p> + At the appointed hour the visitor was at the door, and the missionary + welcomed him warmly. The second visit was even more pleasant than the + first. And Mackay told his guest why he had come to Formosa, and of Jesus + Christ who was both God and man and who had come to the earth to save + mankind. + </p> + <p> + The young man's bright eyes were fixed steadily upon the missionary as he + talked, and when he went away his face was very thoughtful. Mackay sat + thinking about him long after he had left. + </p> + <p> + He had met many graduates, but none had impressed him as had this youth, + with his frank face and his kind, genial manner. There was something too + about the young fellow, he felt, that marked him as superior to his + companions. And then a sudden divine inspiration flashed into the lonely + young missionary's heart. THIS WAS HIS MAN! This was the man for whom he + had been praying. The stranger had as yet shown no sign of conversion, but + Mackay could not get away from that inspired thought. And that night he + could not sleep for joy. + </p> + <p> + In a day or two the young man returned. With him was a noted graduate, who + asked many questions about the new religion. The next day he came again + with six graduates, who argued and discussed. + </p> + <p> + When they were gone Mackay paced up and down the room and faced the + serious situation which he realized he was in. He saw plainly that the + educated men of the town were banded together to beat him in argument. And + with all his energy and desperate determination he set to work to be ready + for them. + </p> + <p> + His first task was to gain a thorough knowledge of the Chinese religions. + He had already learned much about them, both from books on shipboard and + since he had come to the island. But now he spent long hours of the night, + poring over the books of Confucianism, Buddhism, and Taoism, by the light + of his smoky little pewter lamp. And before the next visit of his enemies + he knew almost more of their jumble of religions than they did themselves. + </p> + <p> + It was well he was prepared, for his opponents came down upon him in full + force. Every day a band of college graduates, always headed by Giam Cheng + Hoa, came up from the town to the missionary's little hut by the river, + and for hours they would sit arguing and talking. They were always the + most noted scholars the place could produce, but in spite of all their + cleverness the barbarian teacher silenced them every time. He fairly took + the wind out of their sails by showing he knew quite as much about Chinese + religions as they did. If they quoted Confucius to contradict the Bible, + he would quote Confucius to contradict them. He confounded them by proving + that they were not really followers of Confucius, for they did not keep + his sayings. And with unanswerable arguments he went on to show that the + religion taught by Jesus Christ was the one and only religion to make man + good and noble. + </p> + <p> + Each day the group of visitors grew larger, and at last one morning, as + Mackay looked out of his door, he saw quite a crowd approaching. They were + led, as usual, by the friendly young scholar. By his side walked, or + rather, swaggered a man of whom the missionary had often heard. He was a + scholar of high degree and was famed all over Formosa for his great + learning. Behind him came about twenty men, and Mackay could see by their + dress and appearance that they were all literary graduates. They were + coming in great force this time, to crush the barbarian with their + combined knowledge. He met them at the door with his usual politeness and + hospitality. He was always courteous to these proud literati, but he + always treated them as equals, and showed none of the deference they felt + he owed them. The crowd seated itself on improvised benches and the + argument opened. + </p> + <p> + This time Mackay led the attack. He carried the war right into the enemy's + camp. Instead of letting them put questions to him, he asked them question + after question concerning Confucianism, Buddhism, and Taoism. They were + questions that sometimes they could not answer, and to their chagrin they + had to hear "the barbarian" answer for them. There were other questions, + still more humiliating, which, when they answered, only served to show + their religion as false and degrading. Their spokesman, the great learned + man, became at last so entangled that there was nothing for him but + flight. He arose and stalked angrily away, and in a little while they all + left. Mackay looked wistfully at young Giam as he went out, wondering what + effect these words had upon him. + </p> + <p> + He was not left long in doubt. Not half an hour after a shadow fell across + the open Bible the missionary was studying. He glanced up. There he stood! + His bright face was very serious. He looked gravely at the other young + man, and his eyes shone as he spoke. + </p> + <p> + "I brought all those graduates and teachers here," he confessed, "to + silence you or be silenced. And now I am convinced that the doctrines you + teach are true. I am determined to become a Christian, even though I + suffer death for it." + </p> + <p> + Mackay rose from his seat, his face alight with an overwhelming joy. The + man he had prayed for! He took the young fellow's hand—speechless. + And together the only missionary of north Formosa and his first convert + fell upon their knees before the true God and poured out their hearts in + joy and thanksgiving. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0005" id="link2HCH0005"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER V. SOLDIERS TWO + </h2> + <p> + And now a new day dawned for the lonely young missionary. He had not a + convert but a helper and a delightful companion. His new friend was of a + bright, joyous nature, the sort that everybody loves. Giam was his + surname, but almost every one called him by his given name, Hoa, and those + who knew him best called him A Hoa. Mackay used this more familiar boyish + name, for Giam was the younger by a few years. + </p> + <p> + To A Hoa his new friend was always Pastor Mackay, or as the Chinese put + it, Mackay Pastor, Kai Bok-su was the real Chinese of it, and Kai Bok-su + soon became a name known all over the island of Formosa. + </p> + <p> + A Hoa needed all his kind new friend's help in the first days after his + conversion. For family, relatives, and friends turned upon him with the + bitterest hatred for taking up the barbarian's religion. So, driven from + his friends, he came to live in the little hut by the river with Mackay. + While at home these two read, sang, and studied together all the day long. + It would have been hard for an observer to guess who was teacher and who + pupil. For at one time A Hoa was receiving Bible instruction and the next + time Mackay was being drilled in the Chinese of the educated classes. Each + teacher was as eager to instruct as each pupil was eager to learn. + </p> + <p> + The Bible was, of course, the chief textbook, but they studied other + things, astronomy, geology, history, and similar subjects. One day the + Canadian took out a map of the world, and the Chinese gazed with amazement + at the sight of the many large countries outside China. A Hoa had been + private secretary to a mandarin, and had traveled much in China, and once + spent six months in Peking. His idea had been that China was everything, + that all countries outside it were but insignificant barbarian places. His + geography lessons were like revelations. + </p> + <p> + His progress was simply astonishing, as was also Mackay's. The two seemed + possessed with the spirit of hard work. But a superstitious old man who + lived near believed they were possessed with a demon. He often listened to + the two singing, drilling, and repeating words as they marched up and + down, either in the house or in front of it, and he became alarmed. He was + a kindly old fellow, and, though a heathen, felt well disposed toward the + missionary and A Hoa. So one day, very much afraid, he slipped over to the + little house with two small cups of strong tea. He came to the door and + proffered them with a polite bow. He hoped they might prove soothing to + the disturbed nerves of the patients, he said. He suggested, also, that a + visit to the nearest temple might help them. + </p> + <p> + The two affected ones received his advice politely, but the humor of it + struck them both, and when their visitor was gone they laughed so hard the + tea nearly choked them. + </p> + <p> + The missionary was soon able to speak so fluently that he preached almost + every day, either in the little house by the river, or on the street in + some open square. There were other things he did, too. On every side he + saw great suffering from disease. The chief malady was the terrible + malaria, and the native doctors with their ridiculous remedies only made + the poor sufferers worse. Mackay had studied medicine for a short time + while in college, and now found his knowledge very useful. He gave some + simple remedies to several victims of malaria which proved effective. The + news of the cures spread far and wide. The barbarian was kind, he had a + good heart, the people declared. Many more came to him for medicine, and + day by day the circle of his friends grew. And wherever he went, curing + disease, teaching, or preaching, A Hoa went with him, and shared with him + the taunts of their heathen enemies. + </p> + <p> + But the gospel was gradually making its way. Not long after A Hoa's + conversion a second man confessed Christ. He had previously disturbed the + meetings by throwing stones into the doorway whenever he passed. But his + sister was cured of malaria by the missionary's medicine, and soon both + sister and mother became Christians, and finally the stone-thrower + himself. And so, gradually, the lines of the enemy were falling back, and + at every sign of retreat the little army of two advanced. A little army? + No! For was there not the whole host of heaven moving with them? And + Mackay was learning that his boyish dreams of glory were truly to be + fulfilled. He had wanted always to be a soldier like his grandfather, and + fight a great Waterloo, and here he was right in the midst of the battle + with the victory and the glory sure. + </p> + <p> + The two missionaries often went on short trips here and there into the + country around Tamsui, and Mackay determined that when the intense summer + heat had lessened they would make a long tour to some of the large cities. + The heat of August was almost overpowering to the Canadian. Flies and + mosquitoes and insect pests of all kinds made his life miserable, too, and + prevented his studying as hard as he wished. + </p> + <p> + One oppressive day he and A Hoa returned from a preaching tour in the + country to find their home in a state of siege. Right across the threshold + lay a monster serpent, eight feet in length. A Hoa shouted a warning, and + seized a long pole, and the two managed to kill it. But their troubles + were not yet over. The next morning, Mackay stepped outside the door and + sprang back just in time to escape another, the mate of the one killed. + This one was even larger than the first, and was very fierce. But they + finished it with sticks and stones. + </p> + <p> + When September came the days grew clearer, and the many pests of summer + were not so numerous. The mosquitoes and flies that had been such torments + disappeared, and there was some relief from the damp oppressive heat. But + he had only begun to enjoy the refreshing breaths of cool air, and had + remarked to A Hoa that the days reminded him of Canadian summers, when the + weather gave him to understand that every Formosan season has its + drawbacks. September brought tropical storms and typhoons that were + terrible, and he saw from his little house on the hillside big trees torn + up by the root, buildings swept away like chaff, and out in the harbor + great ships lifted from their anchorage and whirled away to destruction. + And then he was sometimes thankful that his little hut was built into the + hillside, solid and secure. + </p> + <p> + But the fierce storms cleared away the heavy dampness that had made the + heat of the summer so unbearable, and October and November brought + delightful days. The weather was still warm of course, but the nights were + cool and pleasant. + </p> + <p> + So early one October morning, Mackay and A Hoa started off on a tour to + the cities. + </p> + <p> + "We shall go to Kelung first," said the missionary. Kelung was a seaport + city on the northern coast, straight east across the island from Tamsui. A + coolie to carry food and clothing was hired, and early in the morning, + while the stars were still shining, they passed through the sleeping town + and out on the little paths between the rice-fields. Though it was yet + scarcely daylight, the farmers were already in their fields. It was + harvest-time—the second harvest of the year—and the little + rice-fields were no longer like mirrors, but were filled with high + rustling grain ready for the sickle. The water had been drained off and + the reaper and thrasher were going through the fields before dawn. There + was no machinery like that used at home. The reaper was a short sickle, + the thrashing-machine a kind of portable tub, and Mackay looked at them + with some amusement, and described to A Hoa how they took off the great + wheat crops in western Canada. + </p> + <p> + The two were in high spirits, ready for any sort of adventure and they met + some. Toward evening they reached a place called Sek-khau, and went to the + little brick inn to get a sleeping-place. The landlord came to the door + and was about to bid A Hoa enter, when the light fell upon Mackay's face. + With a shout, "Black-bearded barbarian!" he slammed the door in their + faces. They turned away, but already a crowd had begun to gather. "The + black-bearded barbarian is here! The foreign devil from Tamsui has come!" + was the cry. The mob followed the two down the streets, shouting curses. + Some one threw a broken piece of brick, another a stone. Mackay turned and + faced them, and for a few moments they seemed cowed. But the crowd was + increasing, and he deemed it wise to move on. So the two marched out of + the town followed by stones and curses. And, as they went, Mackay reminded + A Hoa of what they had been reading the night before. + </p> + <p> + "Yes," said A Hoa brightly. "The Lord was driven out of his own town in + Galilee." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, and Paul—you remember how he was stoned. Our Master counts us + worthy to suffer for him." But where to go was the question. Before they + could decide, night came down upon them, and it came in that sudden + tropical way to which Mackay, all his life accustomed to the long mellow + twilights of his northern home, could never grow accustomed. They each + took a torch out of the carrier's bag, lighted it, and marched bravely on. + The path led along the Kelung river, through tall grass. They were not + sure where it led to, but thought it wise to follow the river; they would + surely come to Kelung some time. Mackay was ahead, A Hoa right at his + heels, and behind them the basketbearer. At a sudden turn in the path A + Hoa gave a shout of warning, and the next instant, a band of robbers + leaped from the long reeds and grass, and brandished their spears in the + travelers' faces. The torchlight shone on their fierce evil eyes and their + long knives, making a horrible picture. The young Canadian Scot did not + flinch for a second. He looked the wild leader straight in the face. + </p> + <p> + "We have no money, so you cannot rob us," he said steadily, "and you must + let us pass at once. I am a teacher and—" + </p> + <p> + "A TEACHER!" he was interrupted by a dismayed exclamation from several of + the wild band. "A teacher!" As if with one accord they turned and fled + into the darkness. For even a highwayman in China respects a man of + learning. The travelers went on again, with something of relief and + something of the exultation that youth feels in having faced danger. But a + second trouble was upon them. One of those terrible storms that still + raged occasionally had been brewing all evening, and now it opened its + artillery. Great howling gusts came down from the mountain, carrying + sheets of driving rain. Their torches went out like matches, and they were + left to stagger along in the black darkness. What were they to do? They + could not go back. They could not stay there. They scarcely dared go on. + For they did not know the way, and any moment a fresh blast of wind or a + misstep might hurl them into the river. But they decided that they must go + on, and on they went, stumbling, slipping, sprawling, and falling + outright. Now there would be an exclamation from Mackay as he sank to the + knees in the mud of a rice-field, now a groan from A Hoa as he fell over a + boulder and bruised and scratched himself, and oftenest a yell from the + poor coolie, as he slipped, baskets and all, into some rocky crevice, and + was sure he was tumbling into the river; but they staggered on, Mackay + secure in his faith in God. His Father knew and his Father would keep him + safely. And behind him came brave young A Hoa, buoyed up by his new + growing faith, and learning the lesson that sometimes the Captain asks his + soldier to march into hard encounters, but that the soldier must never + flinch. + </p> + <p> + The "everlasting arms" were around them, for by midnight they reached + Kelung. They were drenched, breathless, and worn out, and they spent the + night in a damp hovel, glad of any shelter from the wind and rain. + </p> + <p> + But the next morning, young soldier A Hoa had a fiercer battle to fight + than any with robbers or storms. As soon as the city was astir, Mackay and + he went out to find a good place to preach. They passed down the main + thoroughfare, and everywhere they attracted attention. Cries of "Ugly + barbarian!" and oftenest "Black-bearded barbarian" were heard on all + sides. A Hoa was known in Kelung and contempt and ridicule was heaped upon + him by his old college acquaintances. He was consorting with the + barbarian! He was a friend of this foreigner! They poured more insults + upon him than they did upon the barbarian himself. Some took the stranger + as a joke, and laughed and made funny remarks upon his appearance. Here + and there an old woman, peeping through the doorway, would utter a loud + cackling laugh, and pointing a wizened finger at the missionary would cry: + "Eh, eh, look at him! Tee hee! He's got a wash basin on for a hat!" A Hoa + was distressed at these remarks, but Mackay was highly amused. + </p> + <p> + "We're drawing a crowd, anyway," he remarked cheerfully, "and that's what + we want." + </p> + <p> + Soon they came to an open square in front of a heathen temple. The + building had several large stone steps leading up to the door. Mackay + mounted them and stood facing the buzzing crowd, with A Hoa at his side. + They started a hymn. + </p> + <p> + All people that on earth do dwell Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice. + </p> + <p> + The open square in front of them began to fill rapidly. The people jostled + each other in their endeavors to get a view of the barbarian. Every one + was curious, but every one was angry and indignant, so sometimes the sound + of the singing was lost in the shouts of derision. + </p> + <p> + When the hymn was finished, Mackay had a sudden inspiration. "They will + surely listen to one of their own people," he said to himself, and turned + to A Hoa. + </p> + <p> + "Speak to them," he said. "Tell them about the true God." + </p> + <p> + That was a hard moment for the young convert. He had been a Christian only + a few months and had never yet spoken in public for Christ. He looked + desperately over the sea of mocking faces beneath him. He opened his + mouth, as though to speak, and hesitated. Just then came a rough and + bitter taunt from one of his old companions. It was too much. A Hoa turned + away and hung his head. + </p> + <p> + The young missionary said nothing. But he did the very wisest thing he + could have done. He had some time before taught A Hoa a grand old Scottish + paraphrase, and they had often sung it together: + </p> + <p> + I'm not ashamed to own my Lord Or to defend his cause, Maintain the glory + of his cross And honor all his laws. + </p> + <p> + Mackay's voice, loud and clear, burst into this fine old hymn. A Hoa + raised his head. He joined in the hymn and sang it to the end. It put + mettle into him. It was the battle-song that brought back the young + recruit's courage. Almost before the last note sounded he began to speak. + His voice rang out bold and unafraid over the crowd of angry heathen. + </p> + <p> + "I am a Christian!" he said distinctly. "I worship the true God. I cannot + worship idols," with a gesture toward the temple door, "that rats can + destroy. I am not afraid. I love Jesus. He is my Savior and Friend." + </p> + <p> + No, A Hoa was not "ashamed" any more. His testing time had come, and he + had not failed after all. And his brave, true words sent a thrill of joy + through the more seasoned soldier at his side. + </p> + <p> + That was not the only difficult situation he met on that journey. The two + soldiers of the cross had many trials, but the thrill of that victory + before the Kelung temple never left them. + </p> + <p> + When they returned to Tamsui they held daily services in their house, and + A Hoa often spoke to the people who gathered there. + </p> + <p> + One Sunday they noticed an old woman present, who had come down the river + in a boat. Women as a rule did not come out to the meetings, but this old + lady continued to come every Sunday. She showed great interest in the + missionary's words, and, at the close of one meeting, he spoke to her. She + told him she was a poor widow, that her name was Thah-so, and that she had + come down the river from Go-ko-khi to hear him preach. Then she added, "I + have passed through many trials in this world, and my idols never gave me + any comfort." Then her eyes shone, "But I like your teaching very much," + she went on. "I believe the God you tell about will give me peace.. I will + come again, and bring others." + </p> + <p> + Next Sunday she was there with several other women. And after that she + came every Sunday, bringing more each time, until at last a whole + boat-load would come down to the service. + </p> + <p> + These people were so interested that they asked the missionary if he would + not visit them. So one day he and A Hoa boarded one of the queer-looking + flat-bottomed river-boats and were pulled up the rapids to Go ko-khi. + Every village in Formosa had its headman, who is virtually the ruler of + the place. When the boat landed, many of the villagers were at the shore + to meet their visitors and took them at once to their mayor's house, the + best building in the village. Tan Paugh, a fine, big, powerfully-built + man, received them cordially. He frankly declared that he was tired and + sick of idols and wanted to hear more of this new religion. An empty + granary was obtained for both church and home, and the missionary and his + assistant took up their quarters there, and for several months they + remained, preaching and teaching the Bible either in Go-ho-khi, or in the + lovely surrounding valleys. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0006" id="link2HCH0006"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER VI. THE GREAT KAI BOK-SU + </h2> + <p> + The missionary was now becoming a familiar figure both in Tamsui and in + the surrounding country. By many he was loved, by all he was respected, + but by a large number he was bitterly hated. The scholars continued his + worst enemies. They could never forgive him for beating them so completely + in argument, in the days when A Hoa was striving for the light, and their + hatred increased as they saw other scholars becoming Christians under his + teaching. There was something about him, however, that compelled their + respect and even their admiration. Wherever they met him—on the + street, by their temples, or on the country roads—he bore himself in + such a way as to make them confess that he was their superior both in + ability and knowledge. + </p> + <p> + These Chinese literati had a custom which Mackay found very interesting. + One proud scholar marching down the street and scarcely noticing the + obsequious bows of his inferiors, would meet another equally proud + scholar. Each would salute the other in an exceedingly grand manner, and + then one would spin off a quotation from the writings of Confucius or some + other Chinese sage and say, "Now tell me where that is found." And scholar + number two had to ransack his brains to remember where the saying was + found, or else confess himself beaten. Mackay thought it might be a good + habit for the graduates of his own alma mater across the wide sea to + adopt. He wondered what some of his old college chums would think, if, + when he got back to Canada, he should buttonhole one on the street some + day, recite a quotation from Shakespeare or Macaulay, and demand from his + friend where it could be found. He had a suspicion that the old friend + would be afraid that the Oriental sun had touched George Mackay's brain. + </p> + <p> + Nevertheless he thought the custom one he could turn to good account, and + before long he was trying it himself. He had such a wonderful memory that + he never forgot anything he had once read. So the scholars of north + Formosa soon discovered, again to their humiliation, that this Kai Bok-su + of Tamsui could beat them at their own game. They did not care how much he + might profess to know of writers and lands beyond China. Such were only + barbarians anyway. But when, right before a crowd, he would display a + surer knowledge of the Chinese classics than they themselves, they began + not only to respect but to fear him. It was no use trying to humiliate him + with a quotation. With his bright eyes flashing, he would tell, without a + moment's hesitation, where it was found and come back at the questioner + swiftly with another, most probably one long forgotten, and reel it off as + though he had studied Chinese all his life. + </p> + <p> + He was a wonderful man certainly, they all agreed, and one whom it was not + safe to oppose. The common people liked him better every day. He was so + tactful, so kind, and always so careful not to arouse the prejudice of the + heathen. He was extremely wise in dealing with their superstitions. No + matter how absurd or childish They might be, he never ridiculed them, but + only strove to show the people how much happier they might be if they + believed in God as their Father and in Jesus Christ as their Savior. He + never made light of anything sacred to the Chinese mind, but always tried + to take whatever germ of good he could find in their religion, and lead on + from it to the greater good found in Christianity. He discovered that the + ancestral worship made the younger people kind and respectful to older + folk, and he saw that Chinese children reverenced their parents and elders + in a way that he felt many of his young friends across the sea would do + well to copy. + </p> + <p> + One day when he and A Hoa were out on a preaching tour, the wise Kai + Bok-su made use of this respect for parents in quieting a mob. He and his + comrade were standing side by side on the steps of a heathen temple as + they had done at Kelung. The angry crowd was scowling and muttering, ready + to throw stones as soon as the preacher uttered a word. Mackay knew this, + and when they had sung a hymn and the people waited, ready for a riot, his + voice rang out clear and steady, repeating the fifth commandment "Honor + thy father and thy mother: that thy days may be long upon the land which + the Lord thy God giveth thee." A silence fell over the muttering crowd, + and an old heathen whose cue was white and whose aged hands trembled on + the top of his staff, nodded his head and said, "That is heavenly + doctrine." The people were surprised and disarmed. If the black-bearded + barbarian taught such truths as this, he surely was not so very wicked + after all. And so they listened attentively as he went on to show that + they had all one great Father, even God. + </p> + <p> + He sometimes found it rather a task to treat with respect that which the + Chinese held sacred. Especially was this so when he discovered to his + amusement and to some carefully concealed disgust, that in the Chinese + family the pig was looked upon with affection, and as a young naval + officer, who visited Mackay remarked, "was treated like a gentleman." + </p> + <p> + Every Chinese house of any size was made up of three buildings joined + together so as to make three sides of an enclosure. This space was called + a court, and a door led from it to another next the street. In this outer + yard pigs and fowl were always to be found. Whenever the missionary + dropped in at a home, mother pig and all the little pigs often followed + him inside the house, quite like members of the family. Every one was + always glad to see Kai Bok-su, pigs and all, and as soon as he appeared + the order was given—"Infuse tea." And when the little handleless + cups of clear brown liquid were passed around and they all drank and + chatted, Mrs. Pig and her children strolled about as welcome as the guest. + </p> + <p> + The Chinese would allow no one to hurt their pigs, either. One day as + Mackay sat in his rooms facing the river, battling with some new Chinese + characters, he heard a great hubbub coming up the street. The threatening + mobs that used to surround his house had long ago ceased to trouble him. + He arose in some surprise and went to the door to see what was the matter. + A very unusual sight for Tamsui met his gaze. Coming up the street at a + wild run were some half-dozen English sailors, their loose blue blouses + and trousers flapping madly. They were evidently from a ship which Mackay + had seen lying in the harbor that morning. + </p> + <p> + "Give us a gun!" roared the foremost as soon as he saw the missionary. + </p> + <p> + Mackay did not possess a gun, and would not have given the enraged + bluejacket one had he owned a dozen. But the Chinese mob, roaring with + fury, were coming up the street after the men and he swiftly pointed out a + narrow alley that led down to the river. "Run down there!" he shouted to + the sailors. "You can get to your boats before they find you." + </p> + <p> + They were gone in an instant, and the next moment the crowd of pursuers + were storming about the door demanding whither the enemy had disappeared. + </p> + <p> + "What is all this disturbance about?" demanded Kai Bok-su calmly, glad of + an opportunity to gain time for the fleeing sailors. + </p> + <p> + The aggrieved Chinese gathered about him, each telling the story as loud + as his voice would permit. Those barbarians of the sea had come swaggering + along the streets waving their big sticks. And they had dared—yes + actually DARED—to hit the pet pigs belonging to every house as they + passed. The poor pigs who lay sunning themselves at the door! + </p> + <p> + This was indeed a serious offense. Mackay could picture the rollicking + sailor-lads gaily whacking the lazy porkers with their canes as they + passed, happily unconscious of the trouble they were raising. But there + was no amusement in Kai Bok-su's grave face. He spoke kindly, and + soothingly, and promised that if the offenders misbehaved again he would + complain to the authorities. That made it all right. Heathen though they + were, they knew Kai Bok-su's promise would not be broken, and away they + went quite satisfied. + </p> + <p> + One day he learned, quite by accident, a new and very useful way of + helping his people. He and A Hoa and several other young men who had + become Christians, went on a missionary tour to Tek-chham, a large city + which he had visited once before. + </p> + <p> + On the day they left the place, Kai Boksu's preaching had drawn such + crowds that the authorities of the city became afraid of him. And when the + little party left, a dozen soldiers were sent to follow the dangerous + barbarian and his students and see that they did not bewitch the people on + the road. + </p> + <p> + The soldiers tramped along after the missionary party, and with his usual + ability to make use of any situation, Mackay stepped back and chatted with + his spies. He found one poor fellow in agony with the toothache. This + malady was very common in north Formosa, partly owing to the habit of + chewing the betel-nut. He examined the aching tooth and found it badly + decayed. "There is a worm in it," the soldier said, for the Formosan + doctors had taught the people this was the cause of toothache. + </p> + <p> + Mackay had no forceps, but he knew how to pull a tooth, and he was not the + sort to be daunted by the lack of tools. He got a piece of hard wood, + whittled it into shape and with it pried out the tooth. The relief from + pain was so great that the soldier almost wept for joy and overwhelmed the + tooth-puller with gratitude. And for the remainder of the journey the + guards sent to spy on the missionary's doings were his warmest friends. + </p> + <p> + After this, dentistry became a part of this many-sided missionary's work. + He went to a native blacksmith and had a pair of forceps hammered out of + iron. It was a rather clumsy instrument, but it proved of great value, and + later he sent for a complete set of the best instruments made in New York. + </p> + <p> + So with forceps in one hand and the Bible in the other, Mackay found + himself doubly equipped. Every second person seemed to be suffering from + toothache, and when the pain was relieved by the missionary, the patient + was in a state of mind to receive his teaching kindly. The cruel methods + by which the native doctors extracted teeth often caused more suffering + than the toothache, and sometimes even resulted in death through + blood-poisoning. + </p> + <p> + A Hoa and some of the other young converts learned from their teacher how + to pull a tooth, and they, too, became experts in the art. + </p> + <p> + Whenever they visited a town or city after this, they had a program which + they always followed. First they would place themselves in front of an + idol temple or in an open square. Here they would sing a hymn which always + attracted a crowd. Next, any one who wanted a tooth pulled was invited to + come forward. Many accepted the invitation gladly and sometimes a long + line of twenty or thirty would be waiting, each his turn. The Chinese had + considerable nerve, the Canadian discovered, and stood the pain bravely. + They literally "stood" it, too, for there was no dentist's chair and every + man stood up for his operation, very much pleased and very grateful when + it was over. Then there were quinine and other simple remedies for malaria + handed round, for in a Formosan crowd there were often many shaking in the + grip of this terrible disease. And now, having opened the people's hearts + by his kindness, Kai Bok-su brought forth his cure for souls. He would + mount the steps of the temple or stand on a box or stone, and tell the + wonderful old story of the man Jesus who was also God, and who said to all + sick and weary and troubled ones, "Come unto me,... and I will give you + rest." And often, when he had finished, the disease of sin in many a heart + was cured by the remedy of the gospel. + </p> + <p> + And so the autumn passed away happily and busily, and Mackay entered his + first Formosan winter. And such a winter! The young man who had felt the + clear, bright cold of a Canadian January needed all his fine courage to + bear up under its dreariness. It started about Christmas time. Just when + his own people far away in Canada were gathering about the blazing fire or + jingling over the crisp snow in sleighs and cutters, the great winter + rains commenced. Christmas day—his first Christmas in a land that + did not know its beautiful meaning—was one long dreary downpour. It + rained steadily all Christmas week. It poured on Newyear's day and for a + week after. It came down in torrents all January. February set in and + still it rained and rained, with only a short interval each afternoon. Day + and night, week in, week out, it poured, until Mackay forgot what sunlight + looked like, his house grew damp, his clothes moldy. A stream broke out up + in the hill behind and one morning he awoke to find a cascade tumbling + into his kitchen, and rushing across the floor out into the river beyond. + And still it poured and the wind blew and everything was damp and cold and + dreary. + </p> + <p> + He caught an occasional glimpse of snow, only a very far-off view, for it + lay away up on the top of a mountain, but it made his heart long for just + one breath of good dry Canadian air, just one whiff of the keen, cutting + frost. + </p> + <p> + But Kai Bok-su was not the sort to spend these dismal days repining. + Indeed he had no time, even had he been so inclined. His work filled up + every minute of every rainy day and hours of the drenched night. If there + was no sunshine outside there was plenty in his brave heart, and A Hoa's + whole nature radiated brightness. + </p> + <p> + And there were many reasons for being happy after all. On the second + Sabbath of February, 1873, just one year after his arrival in Tamsui, the + missionary announced, at the close of one of his Sabbath services, that he + would receive a number into the Christian church. There was instantly a + commotion among the heathen who were in the house, and yells and jeers + from those crowding about the door outside. + </p> + <p> + "We'll stop him," they shouted. "Let us beat the converts," was another + cry. + </p> + <p> + But Mackay went quietly on with the beautiful ceremony in spite of the + disturbance. Five young men, with A Hoa at their head, came and were + baptized into the name of the Father, the Son, and the Holy Spirit. + </p> + <p> + When the next Sabbath came these five with their missionary sat down for + the first time to partake of the Lord's Supper. It was a very impressive + ceremony. One young fellow broke down, declaring he was not worthy. Mackay + took him alone into his little room and they prayed together, and the + young man came out to the Lord's Supper comforted, knowing that all might + be worthy in Jesus Christ. + </p> + <p> + Spring came at last, bright and clear, and Mackay announced to A Hoa that + they must go up the river and visit their friends at Goko-khi. The two did + not go alone this time. Three other young men who wanted to be + missionaries were now spending their days with their teacher, learning + with A Hoa how to preach the gospel. So it was quite a little band of + disciples that walked along the river bank up to Go-ko-khi. Mackay + preached at all the villages along the route, and visited the homes of + Christians. + </p> + <p> + One day, as they passed a yamen or Chinese court-house where a mandarin + was trying some cases, they stepped in to see what was going on. At one + end of the room sat the mandarin who was judge. He was dressed in + magnificent silks and looked down very haughtily upon the lesser people + and the retinue of servants who were gathered about him. On either side of + the room stood a row of constables and near them the executioners. The + rest of the room was filled with friends of the people on trial and by the + rabble from the street. The missionaries mixed with the former and stood + watching proceedings. There were no lawyers, no jury. The mandarin's + decision was law. + </p> + <p> + The first case was one of theft. Whether the man had really committed the + crime or not was a question freely discussed among the onlookers around + Mackay. But there seemed no doubt as to his punishment being swift and + heavy. "He has not paid the mandarin," a friend explained to the + missionary. "He will be punished." + </p> + <p> + "The mandarin eats cash," remarked another with a shrug. It was a saying + to which Mackay had become accustomed. For it was one of the shameless + proverbs of poor, oppressed Formosa. + </p> + <p> + The case was soon finished. Nothing was definitely proven against the man. + But the mandarin pronounced the sentence of death. The victim was hurried + out, shrieking his innocence, and praying for mercy. Case followed case, + each one becoming more revolting than the last to the eyes of the young + man accustomed to British justice. Imprisonment and torture were meted out + to prisoners, and even witnesses were laid hold of and beaten on the face + by the executioners if their tale did not suit the mandarin. Men who were + plainly guilty but who had given their judge a liberal bribe were let off, + while innocent men were made to pay heavy fines or were thrown into + prison. The young missionary went out and on his way sickened by the + sights he had witnessed. And as he went, he raised his eyes to heaven and + prayed fervently that he might be a faithful preacher of the gospel, and + that one day Formosa would be a Christian land and injustice and + oppression be done away. + </p> + <p> + The next scene was a happier one. There was an earnest little band of + Christians in Go-ko-khi, and two of the young people were about to be + married. It was the first Christian marriage in the place and Kai Bok-su + was called upon to officiate. There was a great deal of opposition raised + among the heathen, but after seeing the ceremony, they all voted a + Christian wedding everything that was beautiful and good. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0007" id="link2HCH0007"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER VII. BESIEGING HEAD-HUNTERS + </h2> + <p> + When they returned from their trip, Mackay and A Hoa with the assistance + of some of their Christian friends set about looking for a new house in a + more wholesome district. It was much easier for the missionary to rent a + place now, and he managed to secure a comfortable home upon the bluff + above the town. It was a dryer situation and much more healthful. Here one + room was used as a study and every morning when not away on a tour a party + of young men gathered in it for lessons. Sometimes, what with traveling, + preaching, training his students, visiting the sick, and pulling teeth, + Mackay had scarcely time to eat, and very little to sleep. But always as + he came and went on his travels, his eyes would wander to the mountains + where the savages lived, and with all his heart he would wish that he + might visit them also. + </p> + <p> + His Chinese friends held up their hands in dismay when he broached the + subject. To the mountains where the Chhi-hoan lived! Did Kai Bok-su not + know that every man of them was a practised head-hunter, and that behind + every rock and tree and in the darkness of the forests they lay in wait + for any one who went beyond the settled districts? Yes, Kai Bok-su knew + all that, but he could not quite explain that it was just that which made + the thought of a visit to them seem so alluring, just that which made him + so anxious to tell them of Jesus Christ, who wished all men to live as + brothers. A Hoa and a few others who had caught the spirit of the true + soldier of the cross understood. For they had learned that one who follows + Jesus must be ready to dare anything, death included, to carry the news of + his salvation to the dark corners of the world. + </p> + <p> + But the days were so filled with preaching, teaching, and touring, that + for some time Mackay had no opportunity for a trip into the head-hunters' + territory. And then one day, quite unexpectedly, his chance came. There + sailed into Tamsui harbor, one hot afternoon, a British man-of-war, named + The Dwarf. Captain Bax from this vessel visited Tamsui, and expressed a + desire to see something of the life of the savages in the mountains. This + was Mackay's opportunity, and in spite of protests from his friends he + offered to accompany the captain. So together they started off, the + sailor-soldier of England and the soldier of the cross, each with the same + place in view but each with a very different object. + </p> + <p> + It took three days journey from Tamsui across rice-fields and up hillsides + to reach even the foot of the mountains. Here there lived a village of + natives, closely related to the savages. But they were not given to + head-hunting and were quite friendly with the people about them. Mackay + had met some of these people on a former trip inland, and now he and + Captain Bax hired their chief and a party of his men to guide them up into + savage territory. + </p> + <p> + The travelers slept that night in the village, and before dawn were up and + ready to start on their dangerous undertaking. Before them in the gray + dawn rose hill upon hill, each loftier than the last, till they melted + into the mountains, the territory of the dreaded head-hunters. They + started off on a steady tramp, up hills, down valleys, and across streams, + until at last they came to the foot of the first mountain. + </p> + <p> + Before them rose its sheer side, towering thirty-five hundred feet above + their heads. It was literally covered with rank growth of all kinds, + through which it was impossible to move. So a plan of march had to be + decided upon. In front went a line of men with long sharp knives. With + these they cut away the creepers and tangled scrub or undergrowth. Next + came the coolies with the baggage, and last the two travelers. It was slow + work, and sometimes the climb was so steep they held their breath, as they + crept over a sheer ledge and saw the depth below to which they might + easily be hurled. The chief of the guides himself collapsed in one + terrible climb, and his men tied rattan ropes about him and hauled him up + over the steepest places. + </p> + <p> + During this wearisome ascent the most untiring one was the missionary; and + the sailor often looked at him in amazement. His lithe, wiry frame never + seemed to grow weary. He was often in the advance line, cutting his way + through the tangle, and here on that first afternoon he met with an + unpleasant adventure. + </p> + <p> + The natives had warned the two strangers to be on the lookout for + poisonous snakes, and Mackay's year in Formosa had taught him to be wary. + But he had forgotten all danger in the toilsome climb. He was soon + reminded of it. They were passing up a slope covered with long dense grass + when a rustling at his side made the young missionary pause. The next + moment a huge cobra sprang out from a clump of grass and struck at him. + Mackay sprang aside just in time to escape its deadly fangs. The guides + rushed up with their spears only to see its horrible scaly length + disappear in the long grass. + </p> + <p> + That was not the only escape of the young adventurer, for there were wild + animals as well as poisonous snakes along the line of march, and the man + in the front was always in danger. But at the front Mackay must be in + spite of all warning. Nobody moved fast enough for him. + </p> + <p> + At last they reached the summit of the range. They were now on the + dividing line between Chinese ground and savage territory, and the men who + dared go a step farther went at terrible risk. The head-hunters would very + likely see that they did not return. + </p> + <p> + But Mackay was all for pushing forward, and Captain Bax was no less eager. + So they spent a night in the forest and the next day marched on up another + and higher range. As they journeyed, the travelers could not but burst + into exclamations of delight at the loveliness about them. Behind those + great trees and in those tangles of vines might lurk the head-hunters, but + for all that the beauty of the place made them forget the dangers. The + great banyan trees whose branches came down and took root in the earth, + making a wonderful round leafy tent, grew on every side. Camphor trees + towered far above them and then spread out great branches sixty or seventy + feet from the ground. Then there was the rattan creeping out over the tops + of the other trees and making a thick canopy through which the hot + tropical sun-rays could not penetrate. + </p> + <p> + And the flowers! Sometimes Mackay and Bax would stand amazed at their + beauty. They came one afternoon to an open glade in the cool green dimness + of the forest. On all sides the stately tree-ferns rose up thirty or forty + feet above them, and underneath grew a tangle of lovely green undergrowth. + </p> + <p> + And upon this green carpet it seemed to their dazzled eyes that thousands + of butterflies of the loveliest form and color had just alighted. And not + only butterflies, but birds and huge insects and all sorts of winged + creatures, pink and gold and green and scarlet and blue, and all + variegated hues. But the lovely things sat motionless, sending out such a + delightful perfume that there could be no doubt that they were flowers,—the + wonderful orchids of Formosa! Mackay was a keen scientist, always highly + interested in botany, and he was charmed with this sight. There were many + such in the forest, and often he would stop spellbound before a blaze of + flowers hanging from tree or vine or shrub. Then he would look up at the + tangled growths of the bamboo, the palm, and the elegant tree-fern, + standing there all silent and beautiful, and he would be struck by the + harmony between God's work and Word. "I can't keep from studying the flora + of Formosa," he said to Captain Bax. "What missionary would not be a + better man, the bearer of a richer gospel, what convert would not be a + more enduring Christian from becoming acquainted with such wonderful works + of the Creator?" + </p> + <p> + At last they stood on the summit of the second range and saw before them + still more mountains, clothed from summit to base with trees. They were + now right in savage territory and their guide clambered out upon a spur of + rock and announced that there was a party of head-hunters in the valley + below. He gave a long halloo. From away down in the valley came an + answering call, ringing through the forest. Then far down through the + thicket Mackay's sharp eyes descried the party coming up to meet them. + Just then their own guide gave the signal to move on, and the missionary + and Captain Bax walked down the hill—the first white men who had + ever come out to meet those savages. + </p> + <p> + Half-way down the slope the two parties came face to face. The + head-hunters were a wild, uncouth-looking company, armed to the teeth. + They all carried guns, spears, and knives and some had also bows and + arrows slung over their backs. Their faces were hideously tattooed in a + regular pattern, while they wore no more clothes than were necessary. A + sort of sack of coarse linen with holes in the sides for their arms, + served as the chief garment, and generally the only one. Every one wore a + broad belt of woven rattan in which was stuck his crooked pointed knife. + Some of the younger men had their coats ornamented with bright red and + blue threads woven into the texture. They had brass rings on their arms + and legs too, and even sported big earrings. These were ugly looking + things made of bamboo sticks. The head-hunters were all barefooted, but + most of them wore caps—queer-looking things, made of rattan. From + many of them hung bits of skin of the boar or other wild animals they had + killed. They stood staring suspiciously at the two strangers. Never before + had they seen a white man, and the appearance of the naval officer and the + missionary, so different from themselves, and yet so different from their + hated enemies, the Chinese, filled them with amazement and a good deal of + suspicion. After a little talk with the guides, however, the visitors were + allowed to pass on. As soon as they began to move, the savages fell into + line behind them and followed closely. The two white men, walking calmly + onward, could not help thinking how easy it would be for one of those + fierce-looking tattooed braves to win applause by springing upon both of + them and carrying their heads in triumph to the next village. + </p> + <p> + As they came down farther into the valley, they passed the place where the + savages had their camp. Here naked children and tattooed women crept out + of the dense woods to stare at the queer-looking Chinamen who had white + faces and wore no cue. + </p> + <p> + The march through this valley, even without the head-hunters at their + heels, would not have been easy. The visitors clambered over huge trunks + blown across the path, and tore their clothes and hands scrambling through + the thorny bushes. The sun was still shining on the mountain-peaks far + above them, but away down here in the valley it was rapidly growing dark + and very cold. They had almost decided to stop and wait for morning when a + light ahead encouraged them to go on. They soon came upon a big camp-fire + and round it were squatted several hundred savages. The firelight gleaming + upon the dark, fierce faces of the head-hunters and on their spears and + knives, made a startling picture. + </p> + <p> + They were round the visitors immediately, staring at the two white men in + amazement. The party of savages who had escorted them seemed to be making + some explanation of their appearance, for they all subsided at last and + once more sat round their fire. + </p> + <p> + The newcomers started a fire of their own, and their servants cooked their + food. The white men were in momentary danger of their lives. But they sat + on the ground before the fire and quietly ate their supper while hundreds + of savage eyes were fixed upon them in suspicious, watchful silence. + </p> + <p> + The meal over the servants prepared a place for the travelers to sleep, + and while they were so doing, the young missionary was not idle. He longed + to speak to these poor, darkened heathen, but they could not understand + Chinese. However, he found several poor fellows lying prostrate on the + ground, overcome with malaria, and he got his guide to ask if he might not + give the sick ones medicine. Being allowed to do so, he gave each one a + dose of quinine. The poor creatures tried to look their gratitude when the + terrible chills left them, and soon they were able to sink into sleep. + </p> + <p> + Before he retired to his own bed of boughs, the young missionary sang that + grand old anthem which these lonely woods and their savage inhabitants had + never yet heard: + </p> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + All people that on earth do dwell, + Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice. +</pre> + <p> + But these poor people could not "sing to the Lord," for they had never yet + so much as heard his name. + </p> + <p> + All night the missionary lay on the ground, finding the chill mountain air + too cold for sleep, and whenever he looked out from his shelter of boughs + he saw hundreds of savage eyes, gleaming in the firelight, still wide open + and fixed upon him. + </p> + <p> + Day broke late in the valley, but the travelers were astir in the morning + twilight. The mountain-tops were touched with rosy light even while it was + dark down in these forest depths. + </p> + <p> + The chilled white men were glad to get up and exercise their stiffened + limbs. There were several of their party who could speak both Chinese and + the dialect of these mountaineers, and through them Mackay persuaded the + chief of the tribe to take them to visit his village. + </p> + <p> + He seemed reluctant at first and there was much discussion with his + braves. Evidently they were more anxious to go on a head-hunt than to act + the part of hosts. However, after a great deal of chatter, they consented, + and the chief and his son with thirty men separated themselves from the + rest of the band and led the way out of the valley up the mountainside. + The travelers had to stop often, for, besides the natural difficulties of + the way, the chief proved a new obstacle. Every mile or so he would + apparently repent of his hospitality. He would stop, gather his tattooed + braves about him and confer with them, while his would-be visitors sat on + the ground or a fallen tree-trunk to await his pleasure. Finally he would + start off again, the travelers following, but no sooner were they under + way than again their uncertain guide would stop. Once he and his men stood + motionless, listening. Away up in the boughs of a camphor tree a little + tailor-bird was twittering. The savages listened as though to the voice of + an oracle. + </p> + <p> + "What are they doing?" Mackay asked of one of his men, when the + head-hunters stopped a second time and stared earnestly at the boughs + above. + </p> + <p> + "Bird-listening," explained the guide. A few more questions drew from him + the fact that the savages believed the little birds would tell them + whether or not they should bring these strangers home. They always + consulted the birds when starting out on a head-hunt, he further + explained. If the birds gave a certain kind of chirp and flew in a certain + direction, then all was well, and the hunters would go happily forward. + But if the birds acted in the opposite way, nothing in the world could + persuade the chief to go on. Evidently the birds gave their permission to + bring the travelers home, for in spite of many halts, the savages still + moved forward. + </p> + <p> + They had been struggling for some miles through underbrush and prickly + rattan and the white men's clothes were torn and their hands scratched. + Now, however, they came upon a well-beaten path, winding up the + mountainside, and it proved a great relief to the weary travelers. But + here occurred another delay. The savages all stopped, and the chief + approached Mackay and spoke to him through the interpreter. Would the + white man join him in a head-hunting expedition, was his modest request. + There were some Chinese not so far below them, cutting out rattan, and he + was sure they could secure one or more heads. He shook the big net + head-bag that hung over his shoulder and grinned savagely as he made his + proposal. If the white men and their party would come at the enemy from + one side, he and his men would attack them from the other, he said, and + they would be sure to get them all. The incongruity of a Christian + missionary being invited on a head-hunt struck Captain Bax as rather funny + in spite of its gruesomeness. This was a delicate situation to handle, but + Mackay put a bold front on it. He answered indignantly that he and his + friend had come in peace to visit the chief, and that he was neither kind + nor honorable in trying to get his visitors to fight his battles. + </p> + <p> + The interpreter translated and for a moment several pairs of savage eyes + gleamed angrily at the bold white man. But second thoughts proved calmer. + After another council the savages moved on. + </p> + <p> + They were now at the top of a range, and every one was ordered to halt and + remain silent. Mackay thought that advice was again to be asked of some + troublesome little birds, but instead the savages raised a peculiar + long-drawn shout. It was answered at once from the opposite mountain-top, + and immediately the whole party moved on down the slope. + </p> + <p> + Here was the same lovely tangle of vines and ferns and beautiful flowers. + Monkeys sported in the trees and chattered and scolded the intruders. Down + one range and up another they scrambled and at last they came upon the + village of the head-hunters. + </p> + <p> + It lay in a valley in an open space where the forest trees had been + cleared away. It consisted of some half-dozen houses or huts made of + bamboo or wickerwork, and the place seemed literally swarming with women + and children and noisy yelping dogs. But even these could not account for + the terrible din that seemed to fill the valley. Such unearthly yells and + screeches the white men had never heard before. + </p> + <p> + "What is it?" asked Captain Bax. "Has the whole village gone mad?" + </p> + <p> + Mackay turned to one of his guides, and the man explained that the noise + came from a village a little farther down the valley. A young hunter had + returned with a Chinaman's head, and his friends were rejoicing over it. + The merrymaking sounded to the visitors more like the howling of a pack of + fiends, for it bore no resemblance to any human sounds they had ever + heard. + </p> + <p> + Fortunately they were invited to stop at the nearer village and were not + compelled to take part in the horrible celebration. They were taken at + once to the chief's house. It was the best in the village, and boasted of + a floor, made of rattan ropes half an inch thick. All along the outside + wall, under the eaves, hung a row of gruesome ornaments, heads of the boar + and deer and other wild animals killed in the chase, and here and there + mingled with them the skulls of Chinamen. The house held one large room, + and, as it was a cold evening, a fire burned at either end of it. At one + end the men stood chatting, at the other the women squatted. The visitors + were invited to sit by the men's fire. There were several beds along the + wall, two of which were offered to the strangers. But they were not + prepared to remain for the night, and had decided to start back before the + shadows fell. + </p> + <p> + The whole village came to the chief's house and crowded round the + newcomers, men first, women and children on the outskirts, and dogs still + farther back. Several men came forward and claimed Mackay as a friend. + They touched their own breasts and then his, in salutation, grinning in a + most friendly manner. The young missionary was at first puzzled, then + smiled delightedly. They were some of the poor fellows to whom he had + given quinine the evening before in the valley. + </p> + <p> + This greeting seemed to encourage the others. They became more friendly + and suddenly one man who had been circling round the visitors touched the + back of Mackay's head and exclaimed, "They do not wear the cue! They are + our kinsmen." From that moment they were treated with far greater + kindness, and on several other visits that Mackay made to the + head-hunters, they always spoke with interest of him as kinsman. + </p> + <p> + But all danger was not over. The savages were still suspicious, and at any + moment the newcomers might excite them. So they decided to start back at + once, while every one was in a friendly mood. They made presents to the + chief and some of his leading men; and left with expressions of good-will + on both sides. + </p> + <p> + By evening they had reached the valley where they had first met the + savages and here they prepared to spend the night. They had no sooner + kindled their fires than from the darkness on every side shadowy forms + silently emerged,—the savages come to visit them! They glided out of + the black forest into the ring of firelight and squatted upon the ground + until fully five hundred dusky faces looked out at the travelers from the + gloom. It was rather an unpleasant situation, there in the depths of the + forest, but Mackay turned it to good account. First he and Captain Bax + made presents to the headmen and they were as pleased as children to + receive the gay ornaments and bright cloth the travelers gave them. And + then Mackay called their interpreter to his side and they stood up + together, facing the crowd. Speaking through his interpreter, the + missionary said he wished to tell them a story. These mountain savages + were veritable children in their love for a story, as they were in so many + other ways, and their eyes gleamed with delight. + </p> + <p> + It was a wonderful story he told them, the like of which they had never + heard before. It was about the great God, who had made the earth and the + people on it, and was the Father of them all. He told how God loved + everybody, because they were his children. Chinese, white men beyond the + sea like himself and Captain Bax, the people of the mountains,—all + were God's children. And so all men were brothers, and should love God + their Father and each other. And because God loved his children so, he + sent his Son, Jesus Christ, to live among men and to die for them. He told + the story simply and beautifully, just as he would to little children, and + these children of the forest listened and their savage eyes grew less + fierce as they heard for the first time of the story of the Savior. + </p> + <p> + The next day, after a toilsome journey, the travelers reached the plain + below. They had made their dangerous trip and had escaped the + head-hunters, but as fierce an enemy was lying in wait for both, an enemy + that in Formosa devours native and foreigner alike. Captain Bax was the + first to be attacked. All day, as they descended the mountain, the rain + came down in torrents, a real Formosan rain that is like the floodgates + opening. The travelers were drenched and chilly, and just as they emerged + from the forest Captain Bax succumbed to the enemy. Malaria had smitten + him. + </p> + <p> + Shaking with chills and then burning with fever, he was placed in a + sedan-chair and carried the remainder of the way, three days' journey, to + the coast, where the medical attendants on board his ship cured him. + Mackay was feeling desperately ill all the way across the plain, but with + his usual determination he refused to give in until he almost staggered + across the threshold of his home. + </p> + <p> + The house had been closed in his absence. It was now damp and chilly and + everything was covered with mold. He lay down in his bed, alternately + shivering with cold and burning with fever. In the next room A Hoa, who + had gone to bed also, heard his teeth chattering and came to him at once. + It was a terrible thing to the young fellow to see his dauntless Kai + Bok-su overcome by any kind of force. It seemed impossible that he who had + cured so many should become a victim himself. A Hoa proved a kind nurse. + He stayed by the bedside all night, doing everything in his power to allay + the fever. His efforts proved successful, and in a few days the patient + was well. But never again was he quite free from the dreaded disease, and + all the rest of his life he was subject to the most violent attacks of + malaria, a terrible memento by which he was always to remember his first + visit to the headhunters. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0008" id="link2HCH0008"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER VIII. CITIES CAPTURED AND FORTS BUILT + </h2> + <p> + Up the river to Go-ko-khi! That was always a joy, and whenever Mackay + could take a day from his many duties, with A Hoa and one or more other + students, he would go up and visit old Thah-so and the kindly people of + this little village. + </p> + <p> + One day, after they had preached in the empty granary and the rain had + come in, Mr. Tan, the headman, walked up the village street with them, and + he made them an offer. They might have the plot of ground opposite his + house for a chapel-site. This was grand news. A chapel in north Formosa! + Mackay could hardly believe it, but it seemed that there really was to be + one. There were many Christians in Go-ko-khi now, and each one was ready + for work. Some collected stones, others prepared sun-dried bricks, others + dug the foundation, and the first church in north Formosa was commenced. + </p> + <p> + Now Go-ko-khi was, unfortunately, near the great city of Bang-kah. This + was the most hostile and wicked place in all that country, and A Hoa and + Mackay had been stoned out of it on their visit there. The people in + Bang-kah learned of the new church building, and one day, when the brick + walls were about three feet high, there arose a tramp of feet, beating of + drums, and loud shouts, and up marched a detachment of soldiers sent with + orders from the prefect of Bang-kah to stop the building of the chapel. + Their officers went straight to the house of the headman with his + commands. Mr. Tan was six feet two and he rose to his full height and + towered above his visitor majestically. The "mayor" of Go-ko-khi was a + Christian now, and on the wall of his house was pasted a large sheet of + paper with the ten commandments printed on it. He pointed to this and + said: "I am determined to abide by these." The officer was taken aback. He + was scarcely prepared to defy the headman, and he went away to stir up the + villagers. But everywhere the soldiers met with opposition. There seemed + no one who would take their part. The officer knew he and his men were + scarcely within their rights in what they were doing; so, fearing trouble, + he marched back to the city, reporting there that the black-bearded + barbarian had bewitched the villagers with some magic art. + </p> + <p> + The prefect of Bang-kah next sent a message to the British consul. The + missionary was building a fort at Go-ko-khi, he declared in great alarm, + and would probably bring guns up the river at night. He was a very bad man + indeed, and if the British consul desired peace he should stop this wicked + Kai Bok-su at once. And the British consul down in his old Dutch fort at + Tamsui laughed heartily over the letter, knowing all about Kai Bok-su and + the sort of fort he was building. + </p> + <p> + So, in spite of all opposition, the little church rose steadily up and up + until it was crowned with a tiled roof and was ready for the worshipers. + </p> + <p> + That was a great day for north Formosa and its young missionary, the day + the first church was opened. The place was packed to the doors, and many + stood outside listening at the windows. And of that crowd one hundred and + fifty arose and declared that from henceforth they would cast away their + idols and worship only the one and true God. Standing up there in his + first pulpit and looking down upon the crowd of upturned faces, and seeing + the new light in them which the blessed good news of Jesus and his love + had brought, Kai Bok-su's heart swelled with joy. + </p> + <p> + He stayed with them some time after this, for, though so many people had + become Christians, they were like little children and needed much careful + teaching. Especially they must learn how to live as Jesus Christ would + have his followers live. Many heathen as well as the Christians came to + his meetings and listened eagerly. At first the people found it almost + impossible to sit quiet and still during a service. They had never been + accustomed to such a task, and some of the missionary's experiences were + very funny. When they had sung a hymn and had settled down to listen to + the address, the preacher would no sooner start than out would come one + long pipe after another, pieces of flint would strike on steel, and in a + few minutes the smoke would begin to ascend. Mackay would pause and gently + tell them that as this was a Christian service they must not do anything + that might disturb it. They were anxious to do just as he bade, so the + pipes would disappear, and nodding their heads politely they would say, + "Oh, yes, we must be quiet; oh, yes, indeed." + </p> + <p> + One day when the congregation was very still and their young pastor was + speaking earnest words to them, one man less attentive than the others + happened to glance out of the window. Instantly he sprang to his feet + shouting, "Buffaloes in the rice-fields! Buffaloes in the rice-fields!" + and away he went with a good fraction of the congregation helter-skelter + at his heels. + </p> + <p> + The missionary spoke again upon the necessity of quiet, and his hearers + nodded agreeably and murmured, "Yes, yes, we must be quiet." + </p> + <p> + They were very good for the next few minutes and the minister had reached + a very important point in his address, when there was a great disturbance + at the door. An old woman came hobbling up on her small feet and poking + her head in at the church door screamed, "My pig has gone! Pig has gone!" + and away went another portion of the congregation to help find the truant + porker. + </p> + <p> + But, in spite of many interruptions, the congregation at Go-ko-khi learned + much of the beautiful truth of their new religion. Their indulgent pastor + never blamed his restless hearers, but before the church was two months + old he had trained them so well that there was not a more orderly and + attentive congregation even in his own Christian Canada than that which + gathered in the first chapel in north Formosa. + </p> + <p> + But the day came at last when he had to leave them, and the question was + who should be left over them. The answer seemed very plain,—A Hoa. + The first convert placed as pastor over the first church! It was very + fitting. Some months before, down in Tamsui, when A Hoa had been baptized + and had taken his first communion, he had vowed to give his life more + fully to his Master's service. So here was his field of labor, and here he + began his work. He was so utterly sincere and lovable, so bright and + jovial, so firm of purpose and yet so kindly, that he was soon beloved by + all the Christians and respected by the heathen. And one of his greatest + helpers was widow Thah-so, who had been instrumental in bringing the + missionary with his glad tidings to her village. + </p> + <p> + Mackay missed A Hoa sorely at first, but he had his other students about + him, and often when bent upon a long journey would send for his first + convert, and together they would travel here and there over the island, + making new recruits everywhere for the army of their great Captain. + </p> + <p> + The little church at Go-ko-khi was but the first of many. Like the + hepaticas that used to peep forth in the missionary's home woods, telling + that spring had arrived, here and there they came up, showing that the + long cruel winter of heathenism in north Formosa was drawing to an end. + </p> + <p> + Away up the Tamsui river, nestled at the foot of the mountains, stood a + busy town called Sin-tiam. A young man from this place sailed down to + Tamsui on business one day and there heard the great Kai Bok-su preach of + the new Jehovah-God, he went home full of the wonderful news, and so much + did he talk about it that a large number of people in Sin-tiam were very + anxious to hear the barbarian themselves. So one day a delegation came + down the river to the house on the bluff above Tamsui. They made this + request known to the missionary as he sat teaching his students in the + study. Would he not come and tell the people of Sin-tiam the story about + this Jesus-God who loved all men? Would he go? Kai Bok-su was on the road + almost before the slow-going Orientals had finished delivering the + message. + </p> + <p> + It was the season of a feast to their idols in Sin-tiam when the + missionary and his party arrived. Great crowds thronged the streets, and + the barbarian with his white face and his black beard and his queer + clothes attracted unusual attention. The familiar cry, "Foreign devil," + was mingled with "Kill the barbarian," "Down with the foreigner." The + crowd began to surge closer around the missionary party, and affairs + looked very serious. Suddenly a little boy right in Mackay's path was + struck on the head by a brick intended for the missionary. He was picked + up, and Mackay, pressing through the crowd to where the little fellow lay, + took out his surgical instruments and dressed the wound. All about him the + cries of "Kill the foreign devil" changed to cries of "Good heart! Good + heart!" The crowd became friendly at once, and Mackay passed on, having + had once more a narrow escape from death. + </p> + <p> + The work of preaching to these people was carried on vigorously, and + before many months had passed the Christians met together and declared + they must build a chapel for the worship of the true God. So, close by the + riverside, in a most picturesque spot, the walls of the second chapel of + north Formosa began to rise. It was not without opposition of course. One + rabid idol-worshiper stopped before the half-finished building with its + busy workmen, and, picking up a large stone, declared that he would smash + the head of the black-bearded barbarian if the work was not stopped that + moment. Needless to say, the missionary, standing within a good stone's + throw of his enemy, ordered the workers to continue. George Mackay was not + to be stopped by all the stones in north Formosa. + </p> + <p> + This stone was never thrown, however, and at last the chapel was finished. + Once more a preacher was ready to be its pastor. Tan He, a young man who + had been studying earnestly under his leader for some time, was placed + over this second congregation, and once more there blossomed out a sure + sign that the spring had indeed come to north Formosa. + </p> + <p> + Tek-chham, a walled city of over forty thousand inhabitants, was the next + place to be attacked by this little army of the King's soldiers. The first + visit of the missionary caused a riot, but before long Tek-chham had a + chapel with some of the rioters for its best members, and a once proud + graduate and worshiper of Confucius installed in it as its pastor. + </p> + <p> + Ten miles from Tek-chham stood a little village called Geh-bai. The + missionary-soldiers visited it, and to their delight found a church + building ready for them. It was quite a wonderful place, capable of + holding fully a thousand people without much crowding. Its roof was the + boughs of the great banyan tree; its one pillar the trunk, and its walls + the branches that bent down to enter the ground and take root. It made a + delightful shelter from the broiling sun. And here Kai Bok-su preached. + But a banyan does not give perfect shelter in all kinds of weather, so + when a number of people had declared themselves followers of the Lord + Jesus, a large house was rented and fitted up as a chapel, with another + native pastor over it. + </p> + <p> + Away over at Kelung a church was founded through a man who had carried the + gospel home from one of the missionary's sermons. Here and there the + hepaticas were springing up. From all sides came invitations to preach the + great news of the true God, and the young missionary gave himself scarcely + time to eat or sleep. He worked like a giant himself, and he inspired the + same spirit in the students that accompanied him. He was like a Napoleon + among his soldiers. Wherever he went they would go, even though it would + surely mean abuse and might mean death. And, wherever they went, they + brought such a wonderful, glad change to people's hearts that they were + like slave-liberators setting captives free. + </p> + <p> + The most lawless and dangerous region in all north Formosa was that + surrounding the small town of Sa-kak-eng. In the mountains near by lived a + band of robbers who kept the people in a constant state of dread by their + terrible deeds of plunder and murder. Sometimes the frightened townspeople + would help the highwaymen just to gain their good-will, and such treatment + only made them bolder. Bands of them would even come down into the town + and march through the streets, frightening every one into flight. They + would shout and sing, and their favorite song was one that showed how + little they cared for the laws of the land. + </p> + <p> + You trust the mandarins, We trust the mountains. + </p> + <p> + So the song went, and when the missionary heard it first he could not help + confessing that after all it was a sorry job trusting the mandarins for + protection. + </p> + <p> + The first time he visited the place with A Hoa they were stoned and driven + out. But the missionaries came back, and at last were allowed to preach. + And then converts came and a church was established. The robber bands + received no more assistance from the people, and were soon scattered by + the officers of the law. And Sa-kak-eng was in peace because the + missionary had come. + </p> + <p> + But there was one place Mackay had so far scarcely dared to enter. Even + the robber-infested Sa-kak-eng would yield, but Bang-kah defied all + efforts. To the missionary it was the Gibraltar of heathen Formosa, and he + longed to storm it. North, south, east, and west of this great wicked city + churches had been planted, some only within a few miles of its walls. But + Bang-kah still stood frowning and unyielding. It had always been very + bitter against outsiders of all kinds. No foreign merchant was allowed to + do business in Bang-kah, so no wonder the foreign missionary was driven + out. + </p> + <p> + Mackay had dared to enter the place, being of the sort that would dare + anything. It was soon after he had settled in Formosa and A Hoa had + accompanied him. The result had been a riot. The streets had immediately + filled with a yelling, cursing mob that pelted the two missionaries with + stones and rotten eggs and filth, and drove them from the city. + </p> + <p> + But "Mackay never knew when he was beaten," as a fellow worker of his once + said, and though he was taking desperate chances, he went once more inside + the walls of Bangkah. This time he barely escaped with his life, and the + city authorities forbade every one, on pain of death, to lease or sell + property to him or in any way accommodate the barbarian missionary. + </p> + <p> + But meanwhile Kai Bok-su was keeping his eye on Bang-kah, and when the + territory around had been possessed, he went up to Go-ko—khi and + made the daring proposition to A Hoa. Should they go up again and storm + the citadel of heathenism? And A Hoa answered promptly and bravely, "Let + us go." + </p> + <p> + So one day early in December, when the winter rains had commenced to pour + down, these two marched across the plain and into Bang-kah. By keeping + quiet and avoiding the main thoroughfare, they managed to rent a house. It + was a low, mean hovel in a dirty, narrow street, but it was inside the + forbidden city, and that was something. The two daring young men then + procured a large sheet of paper, printed on it in Chinese characters + "Jesus' Temple," and pasted it on the door. This announced what they had + come for, and they awaited results. + </p> + <p> + Presently there came the heavy tramp, tramp of feet on the stone pavement. + Mackay and A Hoa looked out. A party of soldiers, armed with spears and + swords, were returning from camp. They stopped before the hut and read the + inscription. They shouted loud threats and tramped away to report the + affair to headquarters. + </p> + <p> + In a short time, with a great noise and tramping, once more soldiers were + at the door. Mackay waked out and faced them quietly. The general had + given orders that the barbarian must leave this house immediately, the + soldier declared in a loud voice. The place belonged to the military + authorities. + </p> + <p> + "Show me your proof," said Mackay calmly. His bold behavior demanded + respectful treatment, so the soldier produced the deed for the property. + </p> + <p> + "I respect your law," said Mackay after he examined it, "and my companion + and I will vacate. But I have paid rent for this place, therefore I am + entitled to remain for the night. I will not go out until morning." + </p> + <p> + His firm words and fearless manner had their effect both on the soldiers + and the noisy mob waiting for him outside, and the men, muttering angrily, + turned away. That night Mackay and A Hoa lay on a dirty grass mat on the + mud floor. The place was damp and filthy, but even had it been comfortable + they would have had little sleep. For, far into the night, angry soldiers + paraded the street. Often their voices rose to a clamor and they would + make a rush for the frail door of the little hut. Many times the two young + fellows arose, believing their last hour had come. But the long night + passed and they found that they were still left untouched. + </p> + <p> + They rose early and started out. Already a great mob filled the space in + front of the house. Even the low roofs of the surrounding houses were + covered with people all out early to see the barbarian and his despised + companion driven from Bang-kah, and perhaps have the added pleasure of + witnessing their death. + </p> + <p> + The two walked bravely down the street. Curses were showered upon them + from all sides; broken tiles, stones, and filth were thrown at them, but + they moved on steadily. The mob hampered them so that they were hours + walking the short distance to the river. Here they entered a boat and went + down a few miles to a point where a chapel stood, and where some of + Mackay's students awaited them. + </p> + <p> + But the man who "did not know when he was beaten" had not turned his back + on the enemy. He gathered the group of students around him in the little + room attached to the chapel. Here they all knelt and the young missionary + laid their trouble before the great Captain who had said, "All power is + given unto me." "Give us an entrance to Bang-kah," was the burden of the + missionary 's prayer. They arose from their knees, and he turned to A Hoa + with that quick challenging movement his students had learned to know so + well. + </p> + <p> + "Come," he said, "we are going back to Bang-kah." + </p> + <p> + And A Hoa, whose habit it was to walk into all danger with a smile, + answered with all his heart: + </p> + <p> + "It is well, Kai Bok-su; we go back to Bang-kah." + </p> + <p> + And straight back to this Gibraltar the little army of two marched. It was + quite dark by the time they entered. A Formosan city is not the blaze of + electricity to which Westerners are accustomed, and only here and there in + the narrow streets shone a dim light. The travelers stumbled along, + scarcely knowing whither they were going. As they turned a dark corner and + plunged into another black street they met an old man hobbling with the + aid of a staff over the uneven stones of the pavement. Mackay spoke to him + politely and asked if he could tell him of any one who would rent a house. + "We want to do mission work," he added, feeling that he must not get + anything under false pretenses. + </p> + <p> + The old man nodded. "Yes, I can rent you my place," he answered readily. + "Come with me." + </p> + <p> + Full of amazement and gratitude the two adventurers groped their way after + him, stumbling over stones and heaps of rubbish. They could not help + realizing, as they got farther into the city, that should the old man + prove false and give an alarm the whole murderous populace of that + district would be around them instantly like a swarm of hornets. But + whether he was leading them into a trap or not their only course was to + follow. + </p> + <p> + At last he paused at a low door opening into the back part of a house. The + old man lighted a lamp, a pith wick in a saucer of peanut oil, and the + visitors looked around. The room was damp and dirty and infested with the + crawling creatures that fairly swarm in the Chinese houses of the lower + order. Rain dripped from the low ceiling on the mud floor, and the meager + furniture was dirty and sticky. + </p> + <p> + But the two young men who had found it were delighted. They felt like the + advance guard of an army that has taken the enemy's first outpost. They + were established in Bang-kah! They set to work at once to draw out a + rental paper. A Hoa sat at the table and wrote it out so that they might + be within the law which said that no foreigner must hold property in + Bang-kah. When the paper was signed and the money paid, the old man crept + stealthily away. He had his money, but he was too wary to let his fellow + citizens find how he had earned it. + </p> + <p> + As soon as morning came the little army in the midst of the hostile camp + hoisted its banner. When the citizens of Bang-kah awoke, they found on the + door of the hut the hated sign, in large Chinese characters, "Jesus' + Temple." + </p> + <p> + In less than an hour the street in front of it was thronged with a + shouting crowd. Before the day was past the news spread, and the whole + city was in an uproar. By the next afternoon the excitement had reached + white heat, and a wild crowd of men came roaring down the street. They + hurled themselves at the little house where the missionaries were waiting + and literally tore it to splinters. The screams of rage and triumph were + so horrible that they reminded Mackay of the savage yells of the + head-hunters. + </p> + <p> + When the mob leaped upon the roof and tore it off, the two hunted men + slipped out through a side door, and across the street into an inn. The + crowd instantly attacked it, smashing doors, ripping the tiles off the + roof, and uttering such bloodthirsty howls that they resembled wild beasts + far more than human beings. The landlord ordered the missionaries out to + where the mob was waiting to tear them limb from limb. + </p> + <p> + It was an awful moment. To go out was instant death, to remain merely put + off the end a few moments. Mackay, knowing his source of help, sent up a + desperate prayer to his Father in heaven. + </p> + <p> + Suddenly there was a strange lull in the street outside. The yells ceased, + the crashing of tiles stopped. The door opened, and there in his + sedan-chair of state surrounded by his bodyguard, appeared the Chinese + mandarin. And just behind him—blessed sight to the eyes of Kai + Bok-su—Mr. Scott, the British consul of Tamsui! + </p> + <p> + Without a word the two British-born clasped hands. It was not an occasion + for words. There was immediately a council of war. The mandarin urged the + British consul to send the missionary out of the city. + </p> + <p> + "I have no authority to give such an order," retorted Mr. Scott quickly. + "On the other hand you must protect him while he is here. He is a British + subject." + </p> + <p> + Mackay's heart swelled with pride. And he thanked God that his Empire had + such a worthy representative. + </p> + <p> + Having again impressed upon the mandarin that the missionary must be + protected or there would be trouble, Mr. Scott set off for his home. + Mackay accompanied him to the city gate. Then he turned and walked back + through the muttering crowds straight to the inn he had left. He stopped + occasionally to pull a tooth or give medicine for malaria, for even in + Bang-kah he had a few friends. + </p> + <p> + The mandarin was now as much afraid of the missionary as if he had been + the plague. He knew he dared not allow him to be touched, and he also knew + he had very little power over a mob. He was responsible, too, to men in + higher office, for the control of the people, and would be severely + punished if there was a riot, he was indeed in a very bad way when he + heard that the troublesome missionary had come back, and he followed him + to the inn to try to induce him to leave. + </p> + <p> + He found Mackay with A Hoa, quietly seated in their room. First he + commanded, then he tried to bribe, and then he even descended to beg the + "foreign devil" to leave the city. But Mackay was immovable. + </p> + <p> + "I cannot leave," he said, touched by the man's distress. "I cannot quit + this city until I have preached the gospel here." He held up his forceps + and his Bible. "See! I use these to relieve pain of the body, and this + gives relief from sin,—the disease of the soul. I cannot go until I + have given your people the benefit of them." + </p> + <p> + The mandarin went away enraged and baffled. He could not persuade the man + to go; he dared not drive him out. He left a squad of soldiers to guard + the place, however, remembering the British consul's warning. + </p> + <p> + In a few days the excitement subsided. People became accustomed to seeing + the barbarian teacher and his companion go about the streets. Many were + relieved of much pain by him too, and a large number listened with some + interest to the new doctrine he taught concerning one God. + </p> + <p> + He had been there a week when some prominent citizens came to him with a + polite offer. They would give him free a piece of ground outside the city + on which to build a church. Kai Bok-su's flashing black eyes at once saw + the bribe. They wanted to coax him out when they could not drive him. He + refused politely but firmly. + </p> + <p> + "I own that property," he declared, pointing to the heap of ruins into + which his house had been turned, "and there I will build a church." + </p> + <p> + They did everything in their power to prevent him, but one day, many + months after, right on the site where they had literally torn the roof + from above him, arose a pretty little stone church, and that was the + beginning of great things in Bang-kah. + </p> + <p> + And so Gibraltar was taken,—taken by an army of two,—a + Canadian missionary and a Chinese soldier of the King, for behind them + stood all the army of the Lord of hosts, and he led them to victory! + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0009" id="link2HCH0009"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER IX. OTHER CONQUESTS. + </h2> + <p> + Away over on the east of the island ran a range of beautiful mountains. + And between these mountains and the sea stretched a low rice plain. Here + lived many Pe-po-hoan,—"Barbarians of the plain." Mackay had never + visited this place, for the Kap-tsu-lan plain, as it was called, was very + hard to reach on account of the mountains; but this only made the + dauntless missionary all the more anxious to visit it. + </p> + <p> + So one day he suggested to his students, as they studied in his house on + the bluff, that they make a journey to tell the people of Kap-tsu-lan the + story of Jesus. Of course, the young fellows were delighted. To go off + with Kai Bok-su was merely transferring their school from his house to the + big beautiful outdoors. For he always taught them by the way, and besides + they were all eager to go with him and help spread the good news that had + made such a difference in their lives. So when Kai Bok-su piled his books + upon a shelf and said, "Let us go to Kaptsu-lan," the young fellows ran + and made their preparations joyfully. A Hoa was in Tamsui at the time, and + Mackay suggested that he come too, for a trip without A Hoa was robbed of + half its enjoyment. + </p> + <p> + Mackay had just recovered from one of those violent attacks of malaria + from which he suffered so often now, and he was still looking pale and + weak. So Sun-a, a bright young student-lad, came to the study door with + the suggestion, "Let us take Lu-a for Kai Bok-su to ride." + </p> + <p> + There was a laugh from the other students and an indulgent smile from Kai + Bok-su himself. Lu-a was a small, rather stubborn-looking donkey with meek + eyes and a little rat tail. He was a present to the missionary from the + English commissioner of customs at Tamsui, when that gentleman was leaving + the island. Donkeys were commonly used on the mainland of China, and + though an animal was scarcely ever ridden in Formosa, horses being almost + unknown, the commissioner did not see why his Canadian friend, who was an + introducer of so many new things, should not introduce donkey-riding. So + he sent him Lu-a as a farewell present and leaving this token of his + good-will departed for home. + </p> + <p> + Up to this time Lu-a had served only as a pet and a joke among the + students, and high times they had with him in the grassy field behind the + missionary's house when lessons were over. In great glee they brought him + round to the door now, "all saddled and bridled" and ready for the trip. + The missionary mounted, and Lu-a trotted meekly along the road that wound + down the bluff toward Kelung. The students followed in high spirits. The + sight of their teacher astride the donkey was such a novel one to them, + and Lu-a was such a joke at any time, that they were filled with + merriment. All went well until they left the road and turned into a path + that led across the buffalo common. At the end of it they came to a ravine + about fifteen feet deep. Over this stretched a plank bridge not more than + three feet wide. Here Lu-a came to a sudden stop. He had no mind to risk + his small but precious body on that shaky structure. His rider bade him + "go on," but the command only made Lu-a put back his ears, plant his fore + feet well forward and stand stock still. In fact he looked much more + settled and immovable than the bridge over which he was being urged. The + students gathered round him and petted and coaxed. They called him "Good + Lu-a" and "Honorable Lu-a" and every other flattering title calculated to + move his donkeyship, but Lu-a flattened his ears back so he could not hear + and would not move. So Mackay dismounted and tried the plan of pulling him + forward by the bridle while some of the boys pushed him from behind. Lu-a + resented this treatment, especially that from the rear, and up went his + heels, scattering students in every direction; and to discomfit the enemy + in front he opened his mouth and gave forth such loud resonant brays that + the ravine fairly rang with his music. + </p> + <p> + A balking donkey is rather amusing to boys of any country, but to these + Formosan lads who had had no experience with one the sound of Lu-a's harsh + voice and the sight of his flying heels brought convulsions of merriment. + "He's pounding rice! He's pounding rice!" shouted the wag of the party, + and his companions flung themselves upon the grass and rolled about + laughing themselves sick. + </p> + <p> + With his followers rendered helpless and his steed continuing stubborn, + Mackay saw the struggle was useless. He could not compete alone with + Lu-a's firmness, so he gave orders that the obstinate little obstructer of + their journey be trotted back to his pasture. + </p> + <p> + "And to think that any one of us might have carried the little rascal + over!" he cried as he watched the donkey meekly depart. His students + looked at the little beast with something like respect. Lu-a had beaten + the dauntless Kai Bok-su who had never before been beaten by anything. He + was indeed a marvelous donkey! + </p> + <p> + So the journey to the Kap-tsu-lan plain was made on foot. It was a very + wearisome one and often dangerous. The mountain paths were steep and + difficult and the travelers knew that often the head-hunters lurked near. + But the way was wonderfully beautiful nevertheless. Standing on a mountain + height one morning and looking away down over wooded hills and valleys and + the lake-like terraces of the rice-fields, Mackay repeated to his students + a line of the old hymn: + </p> + <p> + Every prospect pleases and only man is vile. + </p> + <p> + Around them the stately tree-fern lifted its lovely fronds and the orchids + dotted the green earth like a flock of gorgeous butterflies just settled. + Tropical birds of brilliant plumage flashed among the trees. Beside them a + great tree raised itself, fairly covered with morning-glories, and over at + their right a mountainside gleamed like snow in the sunlight, clothed from + top to bottom with white lilies. + </p> + <p> + But the way had its dangers as well as its beauties. They were passing the + mouth of a ravine when they were stopped by yells and screams of terror + coming from farther up the mountainside. In a few minutes a Chinaman + darted out of the woods toward them. His face was distorted with terror + and he could scarcely get breath to tell his horrible story. He and his + four companions had been chipping the camphor trees up in the woods; + suddenly the armed savages had leaped out upon them and he alone of the + five had escaped. + </p> + <p> + At last they left the dangerous mountain and came down into the + Kap-tsu-lan plain. On every side was rice-field after rice-field, with the + water pouring from one terrace to another. The plain was low and damp and + the paths and roads lay deep in mud. They had a long toilsome walk between + the ricefields until they came to the first village of these barbarians of + the plain. It was very much like a Chinese village,—dirty, noisy, + and swarming with wild-looking children and wolfish dogs. + </p> + <p> + The visitors were received with the utmost disdain. The Chinese students + were of course well known, for these aborigines had long ago adopted their + customs and language. But the Chinese visitors were in company with the + foreigners, and all foreigners were outcaste in this eastern plain. The + men shouted the familiar "foreign devil" and walked contemptuously away. + The dirty women and children fled into their grass huts and set the dogs + upon the strangers. They tried by all sorts of kindnesses to gain a + hearing, but all to no effect. So they gave it up, and plodded through the + mud and water a mile farther on to the next village. But village number + two received them in exactly the same way. Only rough words and the barks + of cruel dogs met them. The next village was no better, the fourth a + little worse. And so on they went up and down the Kap-tsu-lan plain, + sleeping at night in some poor empty hut or in the shadow of a rice + strawstack, eating their meals of cold rice and buffalo-meat by the + wayside, and being driven from village to village, and receiving never a + word of welcome. + </p> + <p> + And all through those wearisome days the young men looked at their leader + in vain for any smallest sign of discouragement or inclination to retreat. + There was no slightest look of dismay on the face of Kai Bok-su, for how + was it possible for a man who did not know when he was beaten to feel + discouraged? So still undaunted in the face of defeat, he led them here + and there over the plain, hoping that some one would surely relent and + give them a hearing. + </p> + <p> + One night, footsore and worn out, they slept on the damp mud floor of a + miserable hut where the rain dripped in upon their faces. In the morning + prospects looked rather discouraging to the younger members of the party. + They were wet and cold and weary, and there seemed no use in going again + and again to a village only to be turned away. But Kai Bok-su's mouth was + as firm as ever, and his dark eyes flashed resolutely, as once more he + gave the order to march. It was a lovely morning, the sun was rising + gloriously out of the sea and the heavy mists were melting from above the + little rice-fields. Here and there fairy lakes gleamed out from the rosy + haze that rolled back toward the mountains. They walked along the shore in + the pink dawn-light and marched up toward a fishing village. They had + visited it before and had been driven away, but Kai Bok-su was determined + to try again. They were surprised as they came nearer to see three men + come out to meet them with a friendly expression on their faces. + </p> + <p> + The foremost was an old man who had been nicknamed "Black-face," because + of his dark skin. The second was a middleaged man, and the third was a + young fellow about the age of the students. They saluted the travelers + pleasantly, and the old man addressed the missionary. + </p> + <p> + "You have been going through and through our plain and no one has received + you," he said politely. "Come to our village, and we will now be ready to + listen to you." + </p> + <p> + The door of Kap-tsu-lan had opened at last! The missionary's eyes gleamed + with joy and gratitude as he accepted the invitation. The delegation led + the visitors straight to the house of the headman. For the Pepo-hoan + governed their communities in the Chinese style and had a headman for each + village. The missionary party sat down in front of the hut on some large + flat stones and talked over the matter with the chief and other important + men. And while they talked "Black-face" slipped away. He returned in a few + moments with a breakfast of rice and fish for the visitors. + </p> + <p> + The result of the conference was that the villagers decided to give the + barbarian a chance. All he wanted it seemed was to tell of this new + Jehovah-religion which he believed, and surely there could be no great + harm in listening to him talk. + </p> + <p> + In the evening the headman with the help of some friends set to work to + construct a meeting-house. A tent was erected, made from boat sails. + Several flat stones laid at one end and a plank placed upon them made a + pulpit. And that was the first church on the Kap-tsu-lan plain! There was + a "church bell" too, to call the people to worship. In the village were + some huge marine shells with the ends broken off. In the old days these + were used by the chiefs as trumpets by which they called their men + together whenever they were starting out on the war-path. But now the + trumpet-shell was used to call the people to follow the King. Just at dark + a man took one, and walking up and down the straggling village street blew + loudly—the first "church bell" in east Formosa. + </p> + <p> + The loud roar brought the villagers flocking down to the tent-church by + the shore. For the most part they brought their pews with them. They came + hurrying out of their huts carrying benches, and arranging them in rows + they seated themselves to listen. + </p> + <p> + Mackay and the students sang and the people listened eagerly. The + Pe-po-hoan by nature were more musical than the Chinese, and the singing + delighted them. Then the missionary arose and addressed them. He told + clearly and simply why he had come and preached to them of the true God. + Afterward the congregation was allowed to ask questions, and they learned + much of this God and of his love in his Son Jesus Christ. + </p> + <p> + The wonder of the great news shone in the eyes upturned to the preacher. + In the gloom of the half-lighted tent their dark faces took on a new + expression of half-wondering hope. Could it be possible that this was + true? Their poor, benighted minds had always been held in terror of their + gods and of the evil spirits that forever haunted their footsteps. Could + it be possible that God was a great Father who loved his children? They + asked so many eager questions, and the story of Jesus Christ had to be + told over and over so many times, that before this first church service + ended a gray gleam of dawn was spreading out over the Pacific. + </p> + <p> + It was only the next day that these newly-awakened people decided that + they must have a church building. And they went to work to get one in a + way that might have shamed a congregation of people in a Christian land. + This new wonderful hope that had been raised in their hearts by the + knowledge that God loved them set them to work with glad energy. Kai + Bok-su and his men still preached and prayed and sang and taught in the + crazy old wind-flapped tent by the seashore, and the people listened + eagerly, and then, when services were over, every one,—preacher, + assistants, and congregation,—set bravely to work to build a church. + Brave they certainly had to be, for at the very beginning they had to risk + their lives for their chapel. A party sailed down the coast and entered + savage territory for the poles to construct the building. They were + attacked and one or two were badly wounded, though they managed to escape. + But they were quite ready to go back and fight again had it been + necessary. Then they made the bricks for the walls. Rice chaff mixed with + clay were the materials, and the Kap-tsu-lan plain had an abundance of + both. The roof was made of grass, the floor of hard dried earth, and a + platform of the same at one end served as a pulpit. + </p> + <p> + When the little chapel was finished, every evening the big shell rang out + its summons through the village; and out from every house came the people + and swarmed into the chapel to hear Kai Bok-su explain more of the wonders + of God and his Son Jesus Christ. + </p> + <p> + Mackay's home during this period was a musty little room in a damp + mud-walled hut; and here every day he received donations of idols, + ancestral tablets, and all sorts of things belonging to idol-worship. He + was requested to burn them, and often in the mornings he dried his damp + clothes and moldy boots at a fire made from heathen idols. + </p> + <p> + For eight weeks the missionary party remained in this place, preaching, + teaching, and working among the people. It was a mystery to the students + how their teacher found time for the great amount of Bible study and + prayer which he managed to get. He surely worked as never man worked + before. Late at night, long after every one else was in bed, he would be + bending over his Bible, beside his peanut-oil lamp, and early in the + morning before the stars had disappeared he was up and at work again. Four + hours' sleep was all his restless, active mind could endure, and with that + he could do work that would have killed any ordinary man. + </p> + <p> + One evening some new faces looked up at him from his congregation in the + little brick church. When the last hymn was sung the missionary stepped + down from his pulpit and spoke to the strangers. They explained that they + were from the next village. They had heard rumors of this new doctrine, + and had been sent to find out more about it. They had been charmed with + the singing, for that evening over two hundred voices had joined in a + ringing praise to the new Jehovah-God. They wanted to hear more, they + said, and they wanted to know what it was all about. Would Kai Bok-su and + his students deign to visit their village too? + </p> + <p> + Would he? Why that was just what he was longing to do. He had been driven + out of that village by dogs only a few weeks before, but a little thing + like that did not matter to a man like Mackay. This village lay but a + short distance away, being connected with their own by a path winding here + and there between the rice-fields. Early the next evening Mackay formed a + procession. He placed himself at its head, with A Hoa at his side. The + students came next, and then the converts in a double row. And thus they + marched slowly along the pathway singing as they went. It was a stirring + sight. On either side the waving fields of rice, behind them the gleam of + the blue ocean, before them the great towering mountains clothed in green. + Above them shone the clear dazzling sky of a tropical evening. And on + wound the long procession of Christians in a heathen land, and from them + arose the glorious words: + </p> + <p> + O thou, my soul, bless God the Lord, And all that in me is Be stirred up + his holy name To magnify and bless. + </p> + <p> + And the heathen in the rice-fields stopped to gaze at the strange sight, + and the mountains gave back the echo of that Name which is above every + name. + </p> + <p> + And so, marching to their song, the procession came to the village. + Everybody in the place had come out to meet them at the first sound of the + singing. And now they stood staring, the men in a group by themselves, the + women and children in the background, the dogs snarling on the outskirts + of the crowd. + </p> + <p> + The congregation was there ready, and without waiting to find a place of + meeting, right out under the clear evening skies, the young missionary + told once more the great story of God and his love as shown through Jesus + Christ. The message took the village by storm. It was like water to + thirsty souls. The next day five hundred of them brought their idols to + the missionary to be burned. + </p> + <p> + And now Mackay went up and down the Kap-tsu-lan plain from village to + village as he had done before, but this time it was a triumphal march. And + everywhere he went throngs threw away their idols and declared themselves + followers of the true God. + </p> + <p> + He was overcome with joy. It was so glorious he wished he could stay there + the rest of his life and lead these willing people to a higher life. But + Tamsui was waiting; Sin-tiam, Bang-kah, Kelung, Go-ko-khi, they must all + be visited; and finally he tore himself away, leaving some of his students + to care for these people of Kap-tsu-lan. + </p> + <p> + But he came back many times, until at last nineteen chapels dotted the + plain, and in them nineteen native preachers told the story of Jesus and + his love. Sometimes, in later years, when Mackay was with them, tears + would roll down the people's faces as they recalled how badly they had + used him on his first visit. + </p> + <p> + It was while on his third visit here that he had a narrow escape from the + head-hunters. He was staying at a village called "South Wind Harbor," + which was near the border of savage territory. Mackay often walked on the + shore in the evening just before the meeting, always with a book in his + hand. One night he was strolling along in deep meditation when he noticed + some extremely large turtle tracks in the sand. He followed them, for he + liked to watch the big clumsy creatures. These green turtles were from + four to five feet in length. They would come waddling up from the sea, + scratch a hole in the sand with their flippers, lay their eggs, cover them + carefully, and with head erect and neck out-thrust waddle back. Mackay was + intensely interested in all the animal life of the island and made a study + of it whenever he had a chance. He knew the savages killed and ate these + turtles, but he supposed he was as yet too near the village to be molested + by them. So he followed the tracks and was nearing the edge of the forest, + when he heard a shout behind him. As he turned, one of his village friends + came running out of his hut waving to him frantically to come back. + Thinking some one must be ill, Mackay hurried toward the man, to find that + it was he himself who was in danger. The man explained breathlessly that + it was the habit of the wily savages to make marks in the sand resembling + turtle tracks to lure people into the forest. If Kai Bok-su had entered + the woods, his head would certainly have been lost. + </p> + <p> + It was always hard to say farewell to Kaptsu-lan, the people were so + warm-hearted, so kind, and so anxious for him to stay. One morning just + before leaving after his third visit, Mackay had an experience that + brought him the greatest joy. + </p> + <p> + He had stayed all night at the little fishing village where the first + chapel had been built. As usual he was up with the dawn, and after his + breakfast of cold boiled rice and pork he walked down to the shore for a + farewell look at the village. As he passed along the little crooked street + he could see old women sitting on the mud floors of their huts, by the + open door, weaving. They were all poor, wrinkled, toothless old folk with + faces seamed by years of hard heathen experience. But in their eyes shone + a new light, the reflection of the glory that they had seen when the + missionary showed them Jesus their Savior. And as they threw their thread + their quavering voices crooned the sweet words: + </p> + <p> + There is a happy land Far, far away. + </p> + <p> + And their old weary faces were lighted up with a hope and happiness that + had never been there in youth. + </p> + <p> + Kai Bok-su smiled as he passed their doors and his eyes were misty with + tender tears. + </p> + <p> + Just before him, playing on the sand with "jacks" or tops, just as he had + played not so very long ago away back in Canada, were the village boys. + And as they played they too were singing, their little piping voices, + sweet as birds, thrilling the morning air. And the words they sang were: + </p> + <p> + Jesus loves me, this I know, For the Bible tells me so. + </p> + <p> + They nodded and smiled to Kai Bok-su as he passed. He went down to the + shore where the wide Pacific flung long rollers away up the hard-packed + sand. The fishermen were going out to sea in the rosy morning light, and + as they stood up in their fishing-smacks, and swept their long oars + through the surf, they kept time to the motion with singing. And their + strong, brave voices rang out above the roar of the breakers: + </p> + <p> + I'm not ashamed to own my Lord, Or to defend his cause. + </p> + <p> + And standing there on the sunlit shore the young missionary raised his + face to the gleaming blue heavens with an emotion of unutterable joy and + thanksgiving. And in that moment he knew what was that glory for which he + had so vaguely longed in childish years. It was the glory of work + accomplished for his Master's sake, and he was realizing it to the full. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0010" id="link2HCH0010"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER X. REENFORCEMENTS + </h2> + <p> + Some of Mackay's happiest days were spent with his students. He was such a + wonder of a man for work himself that he inspired every one else to do his + best, so the young men made rapid strides with their lessons. No matter + how busy he was, and he was surely one of the busiest men that ever lived, + he somehow found time for them. + </p> + <p> + Sometimes in his house, sometimes on the road, by the seashore, under a + banyan tree, here and there and everywhere, the missionary and his pupils + held their classes. If he went on a journey, they accompanied him and + studied by the way. And it was a familiar sight on north Formosan roads or + field paths to see Mackay, always with his book in one hand and his big + ebony stick under his arm, walking along surrounded by a group of young + men. + </p> + <p> + Sometimes there were as many as twenty in the student-band, but somewhere + in the country a new church would open, and the brightest of the class + would be called away to be its minister. But just as often a young + Christian would come to the missionary and ask if he too might not be + trained to preach the gospel of Jesus Christ. + </p> + <p> + Whether at home or abroad, pupils and teacher had to resort to all sorts + of means to get away for an uninterrupted hour together. For Kai Bok-su + was always in demand to visit the sick or sad or troubled. + </p> + <p> + There was a little kitchen separate from the house on the bluff, and over + this Mackay with his students built a second story. And here they would + often slip away for a little quiet time together. One night, about eleven + o'clock, Mackay was here alone poring over his books. The young men had + gone home to bed except two or three who were in the kitchen below. Some + papers had been dropped over a pipe-hole in the floor of the room where + Mackay was studying, and for some time he had been disturbed by a rustling + among them. At last without looking up, he called to his boys below: "I + think there are rats up here among my papers!" + </p> + <p> + Koa Kau, one of the younger of the students, ran lightly up the stairs to + give battle to the intruders. What was his horror when he saw fully three + feet of a monster serpent sticking up through the pipe-hole and waving its + horrible head in the air just a little distance from Kai Bok-su's chair. + </p> + <p> + The boy gave a shout, darted down the stair, and with a sharp stick, + pinned the body of the snake to the wall below. The creature became + terribly violent, but Koa Kau held on valiantly and Mackay seized an old + Chinese spear that happened to be in the room above and pierced the + serpent through the head. They pulled its dead body down into the kitchen + below and spread it out. It measured nine feet. The students would not + rest until it was buried, and the remembrance of the horrible creature's + visit for some time spoiled the charm of the little upper room. + </p> + <p> + The rocks at Kelung harbor were another favorite spot for this little + traveling university to hold its classes. Sometimes they would take their + dinner and row out in a little sampan to the rocks outside the harbor and + there, undisturbed, they would study the whole day long. + </p> + <p> + They always began the day's work with a prayer and a hymn of praise, and + no matter what subjects they might study, most of the time was spent on + the greatest of books. After a hard morning's work each one would gather + sticks, make a fire, and they would have their dinner of vegetables, rice, + and pork or buffalo-meat. Then there were oysters, taken fresh off the + rocks, to add to their bill of fare. + </p> + <p> + At five in the afternoon, when the strain of study was beginning to tell, + they would vary the program. One or two of the boys would take a plunge + into the sea and bring up a subject for study,—a shell, some living + coral, sea-weed, sea-urchins, or some such treasure. They would examine + it, and Kai Bok-su, always delighted when on a scientific subject, would + give them a lesson in natural history. And he saw with joy how the wonders + of the sea and land opened these young men's minds to understand what a + great and wonderful God was theirs, who had made "the heaven and the earth + and the sea, and all that in them is." + </p> + <p> + When they visited a chapel in the country, they had a daily program which + they tried hard to follow. They studied until four o'clock every afternoon + and all were trained in speaking and preaching. After four they made + visits together to Christians or heathen, speaking always a word for their + Master. Every evening a public service was held at which Mackay preached. + These sermons were an important part of the young men's training, for he + always treated the gospel in a new way. A Hoa, who was Mackay's companion + for the greater part of sixteen years, stated that he had never heard Kai + Bok-su preach the same sermon twice. + </p> + <p> + On the whole the students liked their college best when it was moving. For + on the road, while their principal gave much time to the Bible and how to + present the gospel, he would enliven their walks by conversing about + everything by the way and making it full of interest. The structure of a + wayside flower, the geological formation of an overhanging rock, the + composition of the soil of the tea plantations, the stars that shone in + the sky when night came down upon them;—all these made the traveling + college a delight. + </p> + <p> + Although his days were crammed with work, Mackay found time to make + friends among the European population of the island. They all liked and + admired him, and many of them tried to help the man who was giving his + life and strength so completely to others. They were familiar with his + quick, alert figure passing through the streets of Tamsui, with his + inevitable book and his big ebony cane. And they would smile and say, + "There goes Mackay; he's the busiest man in China." (*) + </p> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + * See CHAPTER XIII, Formosa becomes Japanese territory. +</pre> + <p> + The British consul in the old Dutch fort and the English commissioner of + customs proved true and loyal friends. The representatives of foreign + business firms, too, were always ready to lend him a helping hand where + possible. His most useful friends were the foreign medical men. They + helped him very much. They not only did all they could for his own + recovery when malaria attacked him, but they helped also to cure his + patients. Traveling scientists always gave him a visit to get his help and + advice. He had friends that were shipcaptains, officers, engineers, + merchants, and British consuls. Everybody knew the wonderful Kai Bok-su. + "Whirlwind Mackay," some of them called him, and they knew and admired him + with the true admiration that only a brave man can inspire. + </p> + <p> + The friends to whom he turned for help of the best kind were the English + Presbyterians in south Formosa. They, more than any others, knew his + trials and difficulties. They alone could enter with true sympathy into + all his triumphs. At one time Dr. Campbell, one of the south Formosan + missionaries, paid him a visit. He proved a delightful companion, and + together the two made a tour of the mission stations. Dr. Campbell + preached wherever they went and was a great inspiration to the people, as + well as to the students and to the missionary himself. + </p> + <p> + One evening, when they were in Kelung, Mackay, with his insatiable desire + to use every moment, suggested that they spend ten days without speaking + English, so that they might improve their Chinese. Dr. Campbell agreed, + and they started their "Chinese only." Next morning from the first early + call of "Liong tsong khi lai," "All, all, up come," not one word of their + native tongue did they speak. They had a long tramp that morning and there + was much to talk about and the conversation was all in Chinese, according + to the bargain. Dr. Campbell was ahead, and after an hour's talk he + suddenly turned upon his companion: "Mackay!" he exclaimed, "this + jabbering in Chinese is ridiculous, and two Scotchmen should have more + sense; let us return to our mother tongue." Which advice Mackay gladly + followed. + </p> + <p> + His next visitor was the Rev. Mr. Ritchie from south Formosa, one of the + friends who had first introduced him to his work. Every day of his visit + was a joy. With nine of Mackay's students, the two missionaries set out on + a trip through the north Formosa mission that lasted many weeks. + </p> + <p> + But the more pleasant and helpful such companionship was the more alone + Mackay felt when it was over. His task was becoming too much for one man. + He was wanted on the northern coast, at the southern boundary of his + mission field, and away on the Kap-tsu-lan plain all at once. He was + crowded day and night with work. What with preaching, dentistry, attending + the sick, training his students, and encouraging the new churches, he had + enough on his hands for a dozen missionaries. + </p> + <p> + But now at last the Church at home, in far-away Canada, bestirred herself + to help him. They had been hearing something of the wonderful mission in + Formosa, but they had heard only hints of it, for Mackay would not confess + how he was toiling day and night and how the work had grown until he was + not able to overtake it alone. But the Church understood something of his + need, and they now sent him the best present they could possibly give,—an + assistant. Just three years after Mackay had landed in Formosa, the Rev. + J. B. Fraser, M. D., and his wife and little ones arrived. He was a young + man, too, vigorous and ready for work. Besides being an ordained minister, + he was a physician as well, just exactly what the north Formosan mission + needed. + </p> + <p> + Along with the missionary, the Church had sent funds for a house for him + and also one for Mackay. So the poor old Chinese house on the bluff was + replaced by a modern, comfortable dwelling, and by its side another was + built for the new missionary and his family. One room of Mackay's house + was used as a study for his students. + </p> + <p> + After the houses were built and the new doctor was able to use the + language, he began to fill a long-felt want. Mackay had always done a + little medical work, and the foreign doctor of Tamsui had been most kind + in giving his aid, but a doctor of his own, a missionary doctor, was + exactly what Kai Bok-su wanted. Soon the sick began to hear of the wonders + the missionary doctor could perform, and they flocked to him to be cured. + </p> + <p> + It must not be supposed that there were not already doctors in north + Formosa. There were many in Tamsui alone, and very indignant they were at + this new barbarian's success. But the native doctors were about the worst + trouble that the people had to bear. Their medical knowledge, like their + religion, was a mixture of ignorance and superstition, and some of their + practises would have been inexcusable except for the fact that they + themselves knew no better. There were two classes of medical men; those + who treated internal diseases and those who professed to cure external + maladies. It was hard to judge which class did the more mischief, but + perhaps the "inside doctors" killed more of their patients. Dog's flesh + was prescribed as a cure for dyspepsia, a chip taken from a coffin and + boiled and the water drunk was a remedy for catarrh, and an apology made + to the moon was a specific for wind-roughened skin. For the dreaded + malaria, the scourge of Formosa, the young Canadian doctor found many and + amazing remedies prescribed, some worse than the disease itself. The + native doctors believed malaria to be caused by two devils in a patient, + one causing the chills, the other the fever. One of the commonest + remedies, and one that was quite as sensible as any of the rest, was to + tie seven hairs plucked from a black dog around the sick one's wrist. + </p> + <p> + But when the barbarian doctor opened his dispensary in Tamsui, a new era + dawned for the poor sick folk of north Formosa. The work went on + wonderfully well and Mackay found so much more time to travel in the + country that the gospel spread rapidly. + </p> + <p> + But just when prospects were looking so fair and every one was happy and + hopeful, a sad event darkened the bright outlook of the two missionaries. + The young doctor had cured scores of cases, and had brought health and + happiness to many homes, but he was powerless to keep death from his own + door. + </p> + <p> + And one day, a sad day for the mission of north Formosa, the mother was + called from husband and little ones to her home and her reward in heaven. + </p> + <p> + So the home on the bluff, the beautiful Christian home, which was a + pattern for all the Chinese, was broken up. The young doctor was compelled + to leave his patients, and taking his motherless children he returned with + them to Canada. + </p> + <p> + The church at home sent out another helper. The Rev. Kenneth Junor arrived + one year later, and once more the work received a fresh impetus. And then, + just about two years after Mr. Junor's arrival, Kai Bok-su found an + assistant of his own right in Formosa, and one who was destined to become + a wonderful help to him. And so one bright day, there was a wedding in the + chapel of the old Dutch fort, where the British consul married George + Leslie Mackay to a Formosan lady. Tui Chhang Mai, her name had been. She + was of a beautiful Christian character and for a long time she had been a + great help in the church. But as Mrs. Mackay she proved a marvelous + assistance to her husband. + </p> + <p> + It had long been a great grief to the missionary that, while the men would + come in crowds to his meetings, the poor women had to be left at home. + Sometimes in a congregation of two hundred there would be only two or + three women. Chinese custom made it impossible for a man missionary to + preach to the women. Only a few of the older ones came out. So the mothers + of the little children did not hear about Jesus and so could not teach + their little ones about him. + </p> + <p> + But now everything was changed for them. They had a lady-missionary, and + one of their own people too. The Mackays went on a wedding-trip through + the country. Kai Bok-su walked, as usual, and his wife rode in a + sedan-chair. The wedding-trip was really a missionary tour; for they + visited all the chapels, and the women came to the meetings in crowds, + because they wanted to hear and see the lady who had married Kai Bok-su. + Often, after the regular meetings when the men had gone away, the women + would crowd in and gather round Mrs. Mackay and she would tell them the + story of Jesus and his love. + </p> + <p> + It was a wonderful wedding-journey and it brought a double blessing + wherever the two went. Their experiences were not all pleasant. One day + they traveled over a sand plain so hot that Mackay's feet were blistered. + Another time they were drenched with rain. One afternoon there came up a + terrific wind storm. It blew Mrs. Mackay's sedan-chair over and sent her + and the carriers flying into the mud by the roadside. At another place + they all barely escaped drowning when crossing a stream. But the brave + young pair went through it all dauntlessly. The wife had caught something + of her husband's great spirit of sacrifice, and he was always the man on + fire, utterly forgetful of self. + </p> + <p> + For two years they worked happily together and at last a great day came to + Kai Bok-su. He had been nearly eight years in Formosa. It was time he came + home, the Church in Canada said, for a little rest and to tell the people + at home something of his great work. + </p> + <p> + And so he and his Formosan wife said good-by, amid tears and regrets on + all sides, and leaving Mr. Junor in charge with A Hoa to help, they set + sail for Canada. It was just a little over seven years since he had + settled in that little hut by the river, despised and hated by every one + about him; and now he left behind him twenty chapels, each with a native + preacher over it, and hundreds of warm friends scattered over all north + Formosa. + </p> + <p> + He was not quite the same Mackay who had stood on the deck of the America + seven years before. His eyes were as bright and daring as ever and his + alert figure as full of energy, but his face showed that his life had been + a hard one. And no wonder, for he had endured every kind of hardship and + privation in those seven years. He had been mobbed times without number. + He had faced death often, and day and night since his first year on the + island his footsteps had been dogged by the torturing malaria. + </p> + <p> + But he was still the great, brave Mackay and his home-coming was like the + return of a hero from battle. He went through Canada preaching in the + churches, and his words were like a call to arms. He swept over the + country like one of his own Formosan winds, carrying all before him. + Wherever he preached hearts were touched by his thrilling tales, and + purses opened to help in his work. Queen's University made him a Doctor of + Divinity; Mrs. Mackay, a lady of Detroit, gave him money enough to build a + hospital; and his home county, Oxford, presented him with $6,215 with + which to build a college. + </p> + <p> + He visited his old home and had many long talks of his childhood days with + his loved ones. And he was reminded of the big stone in the pasture-field + which he was so determined to break. And he thanked his heavenly Father + for allowing him to break the great rock of heathenism in north Formosa. + </p> + <p> + He returned to his mission work more on fire than ever. If he had been + received with acclaim in his native land, his Formosan friends' welcome + was not less warm. Crowds of converts, all his students who were not too + far inland, and among them, Mr. Junor, his face all smiles, were thronging + the dock, many of them weeping for joy. It was as if a long-absent father + had come back to his children. + </p> + <p> + The work went forward now by leaps and bounds. Mackay's first thought, + after a hurried visit to the chapels and their congregations, was to see + that the hospital and college were built. + </p> + <p> + All day long the sound of the builders could be heard up on the bluff near + the missionaries' houses, and in a wonderfully short time there arose two + beautiful, stately buildings. Mackay hospital they called one, not for Kai + Bok-su—he did not like things named for him—but in memory of + the husband of the kind lady who had furnished the money for it. The + school for training young men in the ministry was called Oxford College, + in honor of the county whose people had made it possible. + </p> + <p> + Oxford College stood just overlooking the Tamsui river, two hundred feet + above its waters. The building was 116 feet long and 67 feet wide, and was + built of small red bricks brought from across the Formosa Channel. A wide, + airy hall ran down the middle of the building, and was used as a + lecture-room. On either side were rooms capable of accommodating fifty + students and apartments for two teachers and their families. There were, + besides, two smaller lecture-rooms, a museum filled with treasures + collected from all over Formosa by Dr. Mackay and his students, a library, + a bathroom, and a kitchen. + </p> + <p> + The grounds about the college and hospital were very beautiful. Nature had + given one of the finest situations to be found about Tamsui, and Kai + Bok-su did the rest. The climate helped him, for it was no great task to + have a luxurious garden in north Formosa. So, in a few years there were + magnificent trees and hedges, and always glorious flower beds abloom all + the time around the missionary premises. + </p> + <p> + But all this was not accomplished without great toil, and Kai Bok-su + appeared never to rest in those building days. It seemed impossible that + one man should work so hard, he was in Tamsui superintending the hospital + building to-day, and away off miles in the country preaching to-morrow. He + never seemed to get time to eat, and he certainly slept less than his + allotted four hours. + </p> + <p> + A great disappointment was pending, however, and one he saw coming nearer + every day. The trying Formosan climate was proving too much for his young + assistant, and one sad day he stood on the dock and saw Mr. Junor, pale + and weak and broken in health, sail away back to Canada. + </p> + <p> + But there was always a brave soldier waiting to step into the breach, and + the next year Kai Bok-su had the joy of welcoming two new helpers, when + the Rev. Mr. Jamieson and his wife came out from Canada and settled in the + empty house on the bluff. Yes, and in time there came to his own house + other helpers—very little and helpless at first they were—but + they soon made the house ring with happy noise and filled the hearts of + their parents with joy. + </p> + <p> + There were two ladies now to lead in the work for girls and women. Their + sisters in Canada came to their help too. The young men had a school in + Formosa, and why should there not be a school for women and girls? they + asked. And so the Women's Foreign Missionary Society of Canada sent to Dr. + Mackay money to build one. It took only two months to erect it. It stood + just a few rods from Oxford College, and was a fine, airy building. Here a + native preacher and his wife took up their abode and with the help of Mrs. + Mackay and two other native Christian women they strove to teach the girls + of north Formosa how to make beautiful Christian homes. + </p> + <p> + And now to the two missionaries every prospect seemed bright. The college, + the girls' school, the hospital, were all in splendid working order. Mr. + and Mrs. Jamieson were giving their best assistance. A Hoa and the other + native pastors were working faithfully. God's blessing seemed to be + showering down upon the work and on every side were signs of growth. And + then, right from this shining sky, there fell a storm of such fierceness + that it threatened to wipe out completely the whole north Formosan + mission. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0011" id="link2HCH0011"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XI. UNEXPECTED BOMBARDMENT + </h2> + <p> + An enemy's battle-ships off the coast of Formosa! During all the spring + rumors of trouble had been coming across the channel from the mainland. + France (*) and China had been quarreling over a boundaryline in Tongking. + The affair had been settled but not in a way that pleased France. So, + without even waiting to declare war, she sent a fleet to the China Sea and + bombarded some of her enemy's ports. Formosa, of course, came in for her + share of the trouble, and it was early in the summer that the French + battle-ships appeared. They hove in sight, sailing down the Formosa + Channel or Strait one hot day, and instantly all Formosa was in an uproar + of alarm and rage. The rage was greater than the alarm, for China + cordially despised all peoples beyond her own border, and felt that the + barbarians would probably be too feeble to do them any harm. But that the + barbarians should dare to approach their coast with a war-vessel! That was + a terrible insult, and the fierce indignation of the people knew no + bounds. Their rage broke out against all foreigners. They did not + distinguish between the missionary from British soil and the French + soldiers on their enemy's vessels. They were all barbarians alike, the + Chinese declared, and as such were the deadly foe of China. This Kai + Bok-su was in league with the French, and the native Christians all over + Formosa were in league with him, and all deserved death! + </p> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + * War in 1844. +</pre> + <p> + So hard days came for the Christians of north Formosa. Wherever there was + a house containing converts, there was riot and disorder. For bands of + enraged heathen, armed with knives and swords, would parade the streets + about them and threaten all with a violent death the moment the French + fired a shot. + </p> + <p> + In some places near the coast the Christian people dared not leave their + houses, and whenever they sent out their children to buy food, often a + heathen neighbor would catch them, brandish knives over the terrified + little ones' heads and declare they would all be cut to pieces when the + barbarian ships came into port. + </p> + <p> + Every hour of the day and often in the night, letters came from all parts + of the country to Dr. Mackay. They were brought by runners who came at + great peril of their lives, and were sent by the poor Christians. Each + letter told the same tale; the lives and property of all the converts were + in grave danger if the enemy did not leave. And they all asked Kai Bok-su + to do something to help them. + </p> + <p> + Now Kai Bok-su was a man with great power and influence both in Formosa + and in his far-off Canada, but he had no means of bringing that power to + bear on the French. And indeed his own life was in as great danger as any + one's. + </p> + <p> + He wrote to the Christians comforting them and enthusing them with his own + spirit. He bade them all be brave, and no matter what came, danger or + torture or death itself, they must be true to Jesus Christ. He went about + his work in the college or hospital just as usual, though he knew that any + day the angry mob from the town below might come raging up to destroy and + kill. + </p> + <p> + The French had entered Kelung harbor and the danger was growing more + serious every day when Mackay found it necessary to go to Palm Island, a + pretty islet in the mouth of the Kelung river. It was almost courting + death to go, but he had been sent for, and he went. He found the place + right under the French guns and in the midst of raging Chinese. Some of + the faithful students were there, and they were overcome with joy and hope + at the sight of him. He gathered them about him in a mission house for + prayer and a word of encouragement. Outside the Chinese soldiers paraded + up and down. Sometimes indeed they would burst into the room and threaten + the inmates with violence should the French fire. Kai Bok-su went on + quietly talking to his students. He urged them to be faithful and reminded + them of what their Master suffered at the hands of a mob for their sake. + But, in spite of their brave spirits, the little company could not help + listening for the boom of the French guns. It was fully expected that the + enemy would soon fire, and when they did, the Christians well knew there + would be little chance for them to escape. + </p> + <p> + But God had prepared a way out of the difficulty. The meeting was scarcely + over when a messenger came in, asking for the missionary. A Christian on + the mainland was very ill and wanted Kai Bok-su to visit him. Mackay with + his students left the island at once and went to the home of the sick man. + </p> + <p> + They had been gone but a short time when the thunder of the French cannon + broke over the harbor. The guns from the Chinese fort answered, and had + the missionary been on Palm Island he and his converts would surely have + been killed. + </p> + <p> + The Chinese were no match for the French gunners. The bombardment + destroyed the fort and killed every soldier who did not manage to get + away. A great shell crashed into the magazine of the fort, and the + explosion hurled masses of the concrete walls an incredible distance. The + city about the fort was completely deserted, for the people fled at the + first sound of the guns. + </p> + <p> + As soon as the firing was over, the rabble broke loose and a perfect reign + of terror prevailed. The mob carried black flags and swept over town and + country, plundering and murdering. The Christians were of course the first + object of attack, and to tear down a church was the mob's fiercest joy. + Seven of the most beautiful chapels were completely destroyed and many + others injured. + </p> + <p> + In the town of Toa-liong-pong was the home of Koa Kau, one of Kai Bok-su's + most devoted students. Here was a lovely chapel built at great expense. + The crowd tore it to pieces from roof to foundation. Then, out of the + bricks of the ruin they erected a huge pile, eight feet high; they + plastered it over with mud, and on the face of it, next the highway where + every one might see it, they wrote in large Chinese characters: + </p> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + MACKAY, THE BLACK-BEARDED BARBARIAN, + LIES HERE. HIS WORK IS ENDED. +</pre> + <p> + They knew that the first was not true, but they firmly believed the latter + statement, for they understood little of the power of the gospel. + </p> + <p> + At Sin-tiam the crowd of ruffians smashed the doors and windows of the + church. Then they took the communion roll and read aloud the names of the + Christians who had been baptized. As each name was announced, some of the + murderers would rush off toward the home of the one mentioned. Here they + would torture and often kill the members of the family. The native + preacher and his family barely escaped with their lives. One good old + Christian man with his wife, both over sixty, were dragged out into the + deep water of the Sin-tiam river. Here they were given a choice. If they + gave up Jesus Christ, their lives would be saved. If they still remained + Christians, they would be drowned right there and then. The brave old + couple refused to accept life at such a cost. + </p> + <p> + "I'm not ashamed to own my Lord," was a hymn Kai Bok-su had taught them, + and They had meant every word as they had sung it many times in the pretty + chapel by the river. And so they were "not ashamed" now. They were led + deeper and deeper into the water, and at every few feet the way of escape + was offered, but they steadily refused, and were at last flung into the + river—faithful martyrs who certainly won a crown of life. + </p> + <p> + These were only two among many brave Christians who died for their + Master's sake. Some were put to tortures too horrible to tell to make them + give up their faith. Some were hung by their hair to trees, some were + kicked or beaten to death, many were slashed with knives until death + relieved their pain. And on every side the most noble Christian heroism + was shown. In all ages there have been those who died for their faith in + Jesus Christ; and these Formosan followers of their Master proved + themselves no less faithful than the martyrs of old. + </p> + <p> + And where was Kai Bok-su while the mob raged over the country? Going about + his work in Tamsui as of old. Only now he worked both night and day, and + the anxiety for his poor converts kept him awake in the few hours when he + might have snatched some sleep. He was here, there, everywhere at once, it + seemed, writing letters to encourage the Christians in distress, visiting + those who were wavering to strengthen their faith, teaching his students, + praying, preaching, night and day, he never ceased; and always the mob + surged about him threatening his life. + </p> + <p> + The French ships now sailed out of Kelung harbor and took up their + position opposite Tamsui. Every one knew this probably meant bombardment, + and Dr. Mackay and Mr. Jamieson, standing on the bluff before their + houses, looked at each other and each knew the other's thought. + Bombardment would mean that the mob would come raging up and destroy both + life and property on the hill. + </p> + <p> + But just as they expected the roar of guns to open, there sailed into + Tamsui harbor a vessel that flew a different flag from the French. Mackay, + looking at her through a glass, made out with joy the crosses on the red + banner of Britain! England had nothing to do with this Chinese-French war, + but as a British vessel can be found lying around almost any port in the + wide world, there of course happened to be one near Tamsui. She gained a + passport into the harbor and sailed in with a very kindly mission; it was + to protect the lives of foreigners, not only from the French guns, but + from the Chinese mobs. + </p> + <p> + The ship had been in the harbor but a short time when a young English + naval officer, carrying the British flag, came up the path to the houses + on the bluff. Dr. Mackay was in the library of Oxford College, lecturing + to his students, when the visitor entered. + </p> + <p> + The missionary made the sailor welcome and the young man told his errand. + Dr. Mackay was invited to bring his family and his valuables and come on + board the vessel to be the guest of the captain until the disturbance was + over. + </p> + <p> + It was a most kindly invitation and Dr. Mackay shook his visitor's hand + warmly as he thanked him. He turned and translated the message to his + students, and their hearts stood still with dismay. If Kai Bok-su, their + stay and support, were to be taken away, what would become of them? But + Kai Bok-su had not changed with the changing circumstances. He was still + as brave and undaunted as though trouble had never come to his island. + </p> + <p> + He turned to the officer again with a smile. "My family would not be hard + to move," he said, "but my valuables—I am afraid I could not take + them." He made a gesture toward the students standing about him. "These + young men and many more converts scattered all over north Formosa, are my + valuables. Many of them have faced death unflinchingly for my sake. They + are my valuables, and I cannot leave them." + </p> + <p> + It was bravely said, just as Kai Bok-su might be expected to speak, and + the English officer's eyes kindled with appreciation. The words found a + ready response in his heart. They were the words of a true soldier of the + King. The officer went back to his captain with Mackay's message and with + a deep admiration in his heart for the man who would rather face death + than leave his friends. + </p> + <p> + So the British man-of-war drew off, leaving the missionaries in the midst + of danger. And almost immediately, with a great bursting roar, the + bombardment from the French ships opened. Sometimes the shells flew high + over the town and up to the bluff, so Dr. and Mrs. Mackay put their three + little ones in a safe corner under the house; but they themselves as well + as Mr. and Mrs. Jamieson, went in and out to and from the college, and the + girls' school as though nothing were happening. + </p> + <p> + Every day Mackay's work grew heavier and his anxiety for the persecuted + Christians grew deeper. He ate very little, and he scarcely slept at all. + It was not the noise of the carnage about him that kept him awake. He + would have fallen asleep peacefully amidst bursting shells, but he had no + opportunity. The whole burden of the young Church, harassed by persecution + on all sides, seemed to rest upon his spirit. Anxiety for the Christians + in the inland stations from whom he could not hear weighed on him night + and day, and his brave spirit was put to the severest test. + </p> + <p> + Only his great strong faith in God kept him up and kept up the spirits of + the converts who looked to him for an example. And a brave pattern he + showed them. Often he and A Hoa paced the lawn in front of the house while + shot and shell whizzed around them. During the worst of the bombardment + they came and went between the college and the house as if they had + charmed lives. One day there was a great roar and a shell struck Oxford + College, shaking it to its foundations. The smoke from fort and ships had + scarcely cleared away when, crash! and the girls' school was struck by a + bursting shell. Next moment there was a fearful bang and a great stone + that stood in front of the Mackays' house went up into the air in a + thousand fragments. + </p> + <p> + But when the firing was hottest, Kai Bok-su would repeat to his students + the comforting Psalm: + </p> + <p> + "Thou shalt not be afraid for the terror by night; nor for the arrow that + flieth by day." + </p> + <p> + But in spite of his brave demeanor, the strain on the shepherd of this + harassed flock was beginning to tell. And when the bombardment ceased and + the intense anxiety for his loved ones was over, Kai Bok-su suddenly + collapsed. Dr. Johnsen, the foreign physician of Tamsui, came hurriedly up + to the mission house to see him. His verdict sent a thrill of dismay + through every heart that loved him, from the anxious little wife by the + patient's side, to the poorest convert in the town below. Their beloved + Kai Bok-su had brain fever. + </p> + <p> + "Too much anxiety and too little sleep," said the medical man. "He must + sleep now," he added, "or he will die." But now that Kai Bok-su had a + chance to rest, he could not. Sleep had been chased away too long to stay + with him. Night and day he tossed about, wide awake and burning with + fever. His temperature was never less than 102 during those days, and all + the doctor's efforts could not lower it. The awful heat of September was + on, and the great typhoons that would soon sweep across the country and + clear the air had not yet come. The glaring sun and the stifling damp heat + were all against the patient. At last one day the doctor saw a crisis was + approaching. He stood looking down at the hot, flushed face, at the + burning eyes, and the restless hands that were never still, and he said to + himself, "If the fever does not go down to-day, he will die." + </p> + <p> + The doctor went along "College Road" toward his home, answering the eager, + anxious questions that met him on all sides with only a shake of his head. + </p> + <p> + A Hoa followed him, his drawn face full of pleading. Was he no better? he + asked with quivering lips. It was the question poor A Hoa asked many, many + times a day, for he never left the house when not away on duty. The + doctor's face was full of sympathy and his own heart weighed down as he + sadly answered, "No." + </p> + <p> + "If I only had some ice," he muttered, knowing well he had none. "If there + was only one bit of ice in Tamsui, I'd save him yet." + </p> + <p> + Over in the British consulate Dr. Johnsen had another patient. Mr. Dodd + lay sick there, though not nearly as ill as the missionary, and the + physician's next visit was to him. When he entered he found a servant + carrying a tray with some ice on it to the sick room. + </p> + <p> + "Ice!" cried the doctor, overjoyed. "Where did it come from?" + </p> + <p> + The servant explained that the steamship Hailoong had just arrived in + Tamsui harbor with it that morning. The doctor entered Mr. Dodd's room. + Would he give him that ice to save Mackay's life? was the question he + asked. To save such a life as Mackay's! That was an absurd question, Mr. + Dodd declared, and he immediately ordered that every bit of ice he had + should be sent at once to the missionary's house. + </p> + <p> + The doctor hurried back up the hill with the precious remedy. He broke up + a piece and laid it like a little cushion on poor Kai Bok-su's hot + forehead; that forehead beneath which the busy brain, resting neither day + nor night, was burning up. It had not been there a great while before the + restless eyes lost their fire, the eyelids drooped and, wonderful sight, + Kai Bok-su sank into a sleep! The doctor hardly dared to breathe If he + could only be kept asleep now, he had a chance. Dr. Mackay had never been + a sleeper, he well knew. He was too restless, too energetic, to allow + himself even proper rest. When Dr. Fraser, his first assistant, had been + with him, he had struggled to persuade him to stay in bed at least six + hours every night, but not always with success. But now he was to show + what he could do in the matter of sleeping. All that night he lay, + breathing peacefully, the next day he slept on from morning till night, + and little by little the ice melted away on his forehead. He did not move + all the next night, and A Hoa and Mrs. Mackay and the doctor took turns at + his bedside watching that the precious ice was always there. Morning came + and it was all finished. The patient opened his eyes. He had slept + thirty-six hours, and a thrill of joy went through every Christian heart + in Tamsui, for their Kai Bok-su was saved! + </p> + <p> + But though the crisis was over, he was still very weak, and such was the + state of affairs through the country that he was in no condition to cope + with them. Riot and plunder was the order of the day. News of churches + being destroyed, of faithful Christians being tortured or put to death, + were still coming to the mission house, and no one could tell what day + would bring Kai Boksu's turn. + </p> + <p> + And now came an order from the British consul which the missionaries could + not disobey. He commanded that their families must be moved at once from + Formosa, as he could not answer for their protection. So at once + preparations for their departure were made, and Mr. Jamieson took his wife + and Mrs. Mackay and her three little ones and sailed away for Hongkong. + </p> + <p> + But once more Kai Bok-su stayed behind. It cost him bitter pain to part + with his loved ones, knowing he might never see them again; he was weak + and spent with fever, and his poor body was worn to a shadow, but he + stubbornly refused to leave the men who had stood by him in every danger. + The consul commanded, the doctor pleaded, but no, Kai Bok-su would not go. + If the danger had grown greater, then all the more reason why he should + stay and comfort his people. And if God were pleased to send death, then + they would all die together. + </p> + <p> + But he was so weak and sick that the doctor feared that if he remained + there would be little chance for the mob to kill him: death would come + sooner. So he came to his stubborn patient with a new proposition. The + Fukien, a merchant steamship, was now lying in Tamsui harbor. She was to + run to Hongkong and back directly. If Mackay would only take that trip, + his physician urged, the sea air would make him new again, and he would + return in a short time and be ready to take up his work once more. + </p> + <p> + It was that promise that moved Mackay's resolution. His utter weakness + held him down from work, and he longed with all his soul to go out through + the country to help the poor, suffering churches. So he finally consented + to take the short journey and pay a visit to his dear ones in Hongkong. + </p> + <p> + He did not get back quite as soon as he intended, for the French blockade + delayed his vessel. But at last he stepped out upon the Tamsui dock into a + crowd of preachers, students, and converts who were weeping for joy about + him and exclaiming over his improved looks. + </p> + <p> + The voyage had certainly done wonders for him, and at once he declared he + must take a trip into the country and visit those who were left of the + churches. + </p> + <p> + It was a desperate undertaking, for French soldiers were now scattered + through the country, guarding the larger towns and cities and everywhere + mobs of furious Chinese were ready to torture or kill every foreigner. But + it would take even greater difficulties than these to stop Kai Bok-su, and + he began at once to lay plans for going on a tour. + </p> + <p> + He first went to the British consul and came back in high spirits with a + folded paper in his hand. He spread it out on the library table before A + Hoa and Sun-a, who were to go with him, and this is what it said: + </p> + <p> + British Consulate, Tamsui, + </p> + <p> + May 27th, 1885. + </p> + <p> + To THE OFFICER IN CHIEF COMMAND OF THE FRENCH FORCES AT KELUNG: + </p> + <p> + The bearer of this paper, the Rev. George Leslie Mackay, D.D., a British + subject, missionary in Formosa, wishes to enter Kelung, to visit his + chapel and his house there, and to proceed through Kelung to Kap-tsu-lan + on the east coast of Formosa to visit his converts there. Wherefore I, the + undersigned, consul for Great Britain at Tamsui, do beg the officer in + chief command of the French forces in Kelung to grant the said George + Leslie Mackay entry into, and a free and safe passage through, Kelung. He + will be accompanied by two Chinese followers, belonging to his mission, + named, respectively, Giam Chheng Hoa, and Iap Sun. A. FRATER, Her + Britannic Majesty's Consul at Tamsui. + </p> + <p> + They had all the power of the British Empire behind them so long as they + held that paper. Then they hired a burdenbearer to carry their food, and + Mackay cut a bamboo pole, fully twenty feet long, and on it tied the + British flag. With this floating over them, the little army marched + through the rice-fields down to Kelung. + </p> + <p> + It was an adventurous journey. But, wonderful though it seemed, they came + through it safely. Poor Kai Bok-su's heart was torn as he saw the ravages + the mob had made on his churches. But what a cheer his heart received when + he found that persecution had strengthened the converts that were left and + everywhere the heathen marveled that men should die for the faith the + barbarian missionary had taught. They were taken prisoners once for German + spies, and led far out of their way. But they came back to Tamsui safely, + having greatly cheered the faithful Christians who still were true to + their Master, Jesus Christ. It was early in June, just one year from the + opening of the war, that the French sailed away. They were disgusted with + the whole affair, the commander of one vessel told Dr. Mackay, and they + were all very glad it was over. + </p> + <p> + Mr. and Mrs. Jamieson and Dr. Mackay's family returned to their homes on + the bluff, and work started up again with its old vigor. + </p> + <p> + But everywhere the heathen were in great glee. Christianity had been + destroyed with the chapels, they were sure. Wherever Mackay went, shouts + of derision followed him, and everywhere he could hear the joyful cry + "Long-tsong bo-khi!" which meant "The mission is wiped out!" + </p> + <p> + But strange though it may seem, the mission had never been stronger, and + it soon began to assert itself. Dr. Mackay went at the work of repairing + the lost buildings with all the force of his nature. First, he and Mr. + Jamieson and A Hoa sat down and prepared a statement of their losses. This + they sent to the commander-in-chief of the Chinese forces, who had been + responsible for law and order. Without any delay or questioning of the + missionaries' rights, the general sent Dr. Mackay the sum asked for—ten + thousand Mexican dollars. (*) + </p> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + *About $5000. +</pre> + <p> + The next thing was to plan the new chapels and see to the building of + them. And before the shouts of "Long-tsong bo-khi" had well started, they + began to be contradicted by walls of brick or stone that rose up strong + and sure to show that the mission had not been wiped out. Three of the + chapels were commenced all at once—at Sintiam, at Bang-kah and at + Sek-khau. Before anything was done Dr. Mackay and a party of his students + went up to Sin-tiam to look over the site. They stood up on the pile of + ruins, surrounded by the Christians, and a crowd of heathen came around + gleefully to watch them in the hopes of seeing their despair. + </p> + <p> + But to their amazement the little company of Christians led by the + wonderful Kai Bok-su, suddenly burst into a hymn of praise to God who had + brought them safely through all their troubles: + </p> + <p> + Bless, O my soul, the Lord thy God, And not forgetful be Of all his + gracious benefits He hath bestowed on thee! + </p> + <p> + The heathen listened in wonder to the words of praise where they had + expected lamentation, and they asked each other what was this strange + power that made men so strong and brave. + </p> + <p> + And their amazement grew as the chapels, the lovely new chapels of stone + or brick, began to rise from the ruins of the old ones. And not only did + the old ones reappear, new and more beautiful, but as Dr. Mackay and his + native preachers went here and there over the country others peeped forth + like the hepaticas of springtime, until there were not only the forty + original chapels, but in a few years the number had increased to sixty. + </p> + <p> + The triumphant shout that the mission had been wiped out ceased + completely, and the people declared that they had been fools to try to + destroy the chapels, for the result had been only bigger and better ones. + </p> + <p> + "Look now," said one old heathen, pointing a withered finger to the + handsome spire of the Bang-kah chapel, that lifted itself toward the sky, + "Look now, the chapel towers above our temple. It is larger than the one + we destroyed." + </p> + <p> + His neighbors crowding about him and gazing up with superstitious awe at + the spire, agreed. + </p> + <p> + "If we touch this one he will build another and a bigger one," remarked + another man. + </p> + <p> + "We cannot stop the barbarian missionary," said the old heathen with an + air of conviction. + </p> + <p> + "No, no one can stop the great Kai Boksu," they finally agreed, and so + they left off all opposition in despair. + </p> + <p> + Yes, the cry of "Long-tsong bo-khi" had died, and the answer to it was + inscribed on the front of the splendid chapels that sprang up all over + north Formosa. For, just above the main entrance to each, worked out in + stucco plaster, was a picture of the burning bush, and around it in + Chinese the grand old motto: + </p> + <p> + "Nec tamen consumebatur" ("Yet it was not consumed.") + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0012" id="link2HCH0012"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XII. TRIUMPHAL MARCH + </h2> + <p> + Up and down the length and breadth of north Formosa, seeming to be in two + or three places at once, went Kai Bok-su, during this time of reviving + after the war. He would be in Kelung to-day superintending the new chapel + building, in Tamsui at Oxford College the next day, in Bangkah preaching a + short while after, and no one could tell just where the next day. + </p> + <p> + But every one did know that wherever he went, Christians grew stronger and + heathen gave up their idols. The Kap-tsu-lan plain, away on the eastern + coast, seemed to be a sort of pet among all his mission fields, and he was + always turning his steps thither. For the Pe-pohoan who lived there, while + they were simple and warm-hearted and easily moved by the gospel story, + were not such strong characters as the Chinese. So the missionary felt he + must visit them often to help steady their faith. + </p> + <p> + Not long after the close of the war, he set off on a trip to the + Kap-tsu-lan plain. Besides his students, he was accompanied by a young + German scientist Dr. Warburg had come from Germany to Formosa to collect + peculiar plants and flowers and to find any old weapons or relics of + interest belonging to the savage tribes. All these were for the use of the + university in Germany which had sent him out. + </p> + <p> + The young scientist was delighted with Dr. Mackay and found in him a very + interesting companion. They met in Kelung, and when Dr. Warburg found that + Dr. Mackay was going to visit the Kap-tsu-lan plain, he joined his party. + The stranger found many rare specimens of orchids on that trip and several + peculiar spear and arrow heads to be taken back as curios to Germany. But + he found something rarer and more wonderful and something for which he had + not come to search. + </p> + <p> + He saw in one place three hundred people gather about their missionary and + raise a ringing hymn of praise to the God of heaven, of whom they had not + so much as heard but a few short years before. He visited sixteen little + chapels and heard clever, brightfaced young Chinese preachers stand up in + them and tell the old, old story of Jesus and his love. And he realized + that these things were far more wonderful than the rarest curios he could + find in all Formosa. + </p> + <p> + When he bade good-by to Dr. Mackay, he said: "I never saw anything like + this before. If scientific skeptics had traveled with a missionary as I + have and witnessed what I have witnessed on this plain, they would assume + a different attitude toward the heralds of the cross." + </p> + <p> + Not many months later Dr. Mackay again went down the eastern coast. This + time he took three of his closest friends, all preacher students, Tan be, + Sun-a, and Koa Kau. With a coolie to carry provisions, their Bibles, their + forceps, and some malaria medicine, they started off fully equipped. + </p> + <p> + By steam launch to Bang-kah, by a queer little railway train to + Tsui-tng-kha and by foot to Kelung was the first part of the journey. The + next part was a tramp over the mountains to Kap-tsu-lan. + </p> + <p> + The road now grew rough and dangerous. Overhead hung loose rocks, huge + enough to crush the whole party should they fall. Underneath were wet, + slippery stones which might easily make one go sliding down into the chasm + below. + </p> + <p> + As usual on this trip they had many hairbreadth escapes, for there were + savages too hiding up in the dense forest and waiting an opportunity to + spring out upon the travelers. Dr. Mackay was almost caught in a small + avalanche also. He leaped over a narrow stream-bed, and as he did so, he + dislodged a loose mass of rock above him. It came down with a fearful + crash, scattering the smaller pieces right upon his heels; but they passed + all dangers safely and toward evening reached the shore where the great + long Pacific billows rolled upon the sand. They were in the Kap-tsu-lan + plain. + </p> + <p> + Their journey through the plain was like a triumphal march. Wherever a + chapel had been erected, there were converts to be examined; wherever + there was no chapel, the people gathered about the missionary and pleaded + for one. They often recalled the first visit of Kai Bok-su when "No room + for barbarians" were the only words that met him. + </p> + <p> + But Dr. Mackay wished to go farther on this journey than he had ever gone. + Some distance south of Kap-tsu-lan lay another district called the Ki-lai + plain. The people here were also aborigines of the island who had been + conquered by the Chinese like the Pepo-hoan. But the inhabitants of Ki-lai + were called Lam-si-hoan, which means "Barbarians of the south." Dr. Mackay + had never been among them, but they had heard the gospel. A missionary + from Oxford College had journeyed away down there to tell the people about + Jesus and had been working among them for some years. He was not a + graduate, not even a student—but only the cook! For Oxford College + was such a place of inspiration under Kai Bok-su, that even the servants + in the kitchen wanted to go out and preach the gospel. So the cook had + gone away to the Ki-lai plain, and, ever since he had left, Dr. Mackay had + longed to go and see how his work was prospering. + </p> + <p> + So at one of the most southerly points of the Kap-tsu-lan plain he secured + a boat for the voyage south. The best he could get was a small craft quite + open, only twelve feet long. It was not a very fine vessel with which to + brave the Pacific Ocean, but where was the crazy craft in which Kai Bok-su + would not embark to go and tell the gospel to the heathen? The boat was + manned by six Pe-po-hoan rowers, all Christians, and at five o'clock in + the evening they pushed out into the surf of So Bay. A crowd of converts + came down to the shore to bid them farewell. As the boat shoved off the + friends on the beach started a hymn. The rowers and the missionaries + caught it up and the two groups joined, the sound of each growing fainter + and fainter to the other as the distance widened. + </p> + <p> + All lands to God in joyful sounds Aloft your voices raise, Sing forth the + honor of his name, And glorious make his praise! + </p> + <p> + And the land and the sea, answering each other, joined in praise to him + who was the Maker of both. + </p> + <p> + And so the rowers pulled away in time to the swing of the Psalm, the boat + rounded a point, and the beloved figure of Kai Bok-su disappeared from + sight. + </p> + <p> + Away down the coast the oarsmen pulled, and the four missionaries squeezed + themselves into as small a space as possible to be out of the way of the + oars. All the evening they rowed steadily, and as they still swept along + night came down suddenly. They kept close to the shore, where to their + right arose great mountains straight up from the water's edge. They were + covered with forest, and here and there in the blackness fires twinkled. + </p> + <p> + "Head-hunters!" said the helmsman, pointing toward them. + </p> + <p> + Away to the left stretched the Pacific Ocean, and above shone the stars in + the deep blue dome. It was a still, hot tropical night. From the land came + the heavy scent of flowers. The only sound that broke the stillness was + the regular thud, thud of the oars or the cry of some wild animal floating + out from the jungle. As they passed on through the warm darkness, the sea + took on that wonderful fiery glow that so often burns on the oceans of the + tropics. Every wave became a blaze of phosphorescence. Every ripple from + the oars ran away in many-colored flames—red, green, blue, and + orange. Kai Bok-su, sitting amazed at the glory to which the Pe-po-hoan + boatmen had become accustomed, was silent with awe. He had seen the + phosphorescent lights often before, but never anything like this. He put + his hand down into the molten sea and scooped up handfuls of what seemed + drops of liquid fire. And as his fingers dipped into the water they shone + like rods of red-hot iron. Over the gleaming iridescent surface, sparks of + fire darted like lightning, and from the little boat's sides flashed out + flames of gold and rose and amber. It was grand. And no wonder they all + joined—Chinese, Malayan, and Canadian—in making the dark + cliffs and the gleaming sea echo to the strains of praise to the One who + had created all this glory. <br /><br /> + O come let us sing to the Lord,<br /> + To him our voices raise With joyful noise,<br /> + Let us the rock Of our salvation praise.<br /> + To him the spacious sea belongs,<br /> + For he the same did make;<br /> + The dry land also from his hand<br /> + Its form at first did take. + </p> + <p> + Dawn came up out of the Pacific with a new glory of light and color that + dispelled the wonders of the night. It showed the voyagers that they were + very near a low shore where it would be possible to land. But the helmsman + shook his head at the proposal. He pointed out huts along the line of + forest and figures on the shore. And then with a common impulse, the + rowers swung round and pulled straight out to sea; for with Pe-po-hoan + experience they saw at once that here was a savage village, and not long + would their heads remain on their shoulders should they touch land. + </p> + <p> + The scorching sun soon poured its hot rays upon the tired rowers, but they + pulled steadily. They too, like Kai Bok-su, were anxious to take this + great good news of Jesus Christ to those who had not yet learned of him. + When safely out of reach of the headhunters, they once more turned south, + and, about noon, tired and hot, at last approached the first port of the + Ki-lai plain. Every one drew a sigh of relief, for the men had been rowing + steadily all night and half the day. As they drew near Dr. Mackay looked + eagerly at the queer village. It appeared to be half Chinese and half + Lam-si-hoan. It consisted of two rows of small thatched houses with a + street between nearly two hundred feet wide. + </p> + <p> + The rowers ran the boat up on the sloping pebbly beach and all stepped out + with much relief to stretch their stiffened limbs. They had scarcely done + so when a military officer came down the shore and approaching Dr. Mackay + made him welcome with the greatest warmth. There was a military encampment + here, and this was the officer as well as the headman of the village. He + invited Dr. Mackay and his friends to take dinner with him. Dr. Mackay + accepted with pleased surprise. This was far better than he had expected. + He was still more surprised to hear his name on every hand. + </p> + <p> + "It is the great Kai Bok-su," could be heard in tones of deepest respect + from fishermen at their nets and old women by the door and children + playing with their kites in the wide street. + </p> + <p> + "How do they know me?" he asked, as he was greeted by a rice-seller, + sitting at the open front of his shop. + </p> + <p> + "Ah, we have heard of you and your work in the north, Pastor Mackay," said + his host, smiling, "and our people want to hear of this new + Jehovah-religion too." + </p> + <p> + The cook-missionary had evidently spread wonderful reports of Kai Bok-su + and his gospel and so prepared the way. He was preaching just then in a + place called Ka-le-oan, farther inland. When the officer learned that Dr. + Mackay wanted to visit him he turned to his servant with a most surprising + order. It was to saddle his pony and bring him for Kai Bok-su to ride to + Ka-le-oan. + </p> + <p> + The pony came, sleek and plump and with a string of jingling bells + adorning him. A pony was a wonderful sight in Formosa, and Dr. Mackay had + not used any sort of animal in his work since that disastrous day when he + had tried in vain to ride the stubborn Lu-a. But now he gladly mounted the + sedate little steed and trotted away along the narrow pathway between the + rice-fields toward Ka-le-oan. + </p> + <p> + Darkness had almost descended when he rode into the village and stopped + before a small grass-covered bamboo dwelling where the cook-preacher + lived. For years the people here had looked for Kai Bok-su's coming, for + years they had talked of this great event, and for years their preacher + had been writing and saying as he received his reply from the eager + missionary in Tamsui, "He may come soon." + </p> + <p> + And now he was really here! The sound of his horse's bells had scarcely + stopped before the preacher's house, when the news began to spread like + fire through the village. The preacher, who had worked so hard and waited + so long, wept for joy, and before he could make Dr. Mackay welcome in a + proper manner the room was filled with men, all wildly eager for a sight + of the great Kai Bok-su, while outside a crowd gathered about the door + striving to get even a glimpse of him. The ex-cook of Oxford College had + preached so faithfully that many were already converted to Christianity, + many more knew a good deal of the gospel, and crowds were ready to throw + away their idols. They were weary of their heathen rites and + superstitions. They were longing for something better, they scarcely knew + what. "But the mandarin will not let them become Christians," said the + preacher anxiously. "It is he who is keeping them from decision. He has + said that they must continue in idolatry, as a token of loyalty to China." + </p> + <p> + "Are you sure that is true?" cried Dr. Mackay. + </p> + <p> + The converts nodded. They had "heard" it said at least. + </p> + <p> + But Kai Bok-su was not the man to accept mere hearsay. He was always + wisely careful to avoid any collision with the authorities. But + remembering the kindness shown him back in Hoe-lien-kang, he could not + quite believe that the mandarin who had been so kind to him could be + hostile to the religion of Jesus Christ. + </p> + <p> + To think was to act, and early the next morning, he was riding back to the + seacoast, to inquire how much of this rumor was true. + </p> + <p> + His reception was very warm. It was all right, the officer declared. + Whatever had been said or done in the past must be forgotten. Kai Bok-su + might go where he pleased and preach his Jehovah-religion to whomsoever he + would. + </p> + <p> + It was a very light-hearted rider the pony carried as he galloped back + along the narrow paths, with the good news for the villagers. The word + went round as soon as he arrived. Kai Bok-su wanted to know how many were + for the true God. All who would worship him were at once to clear their + houses of idols and declare that they would serve Jehovah and him only. At + dark a great crowd gathered in an open space in the village. + Representatives from five villages were there, chiefs were shouting to + their people, and when Dr. Mackay and his students arrived, the place was + all noise and confusion. He was puzzled. It almost looked as if there was + to be a riot, though the voices did not sound angry. + </p> + <p> + He climbed up on a pile of rubbish and his face shone clear in the light + of the flaring torches. His voice rang out loud and commanding above the + tumult. + </p> + <p> + "What is this noise about?" he cried. "Is there a difference of opinion + among you as to whether you shall worship these poor toys of wood and + stone, or the true God who is your Father?" + </p> + <p> + He paused and as if from one man came back the answer in a mighty shout: + </p> + <p> + "No, we will worship the true God!" + </p> + <p> + The tumult had been one of enthusiasm and not of dispute! + </p> + <p> + Kai Bok-su's heart gave a great bound. For a moment he could not speak. He + who had so often stood up fearless and bold before a raging heathen mob, + now faltered before this sea of eager faces, upturned to him. It seemed + too good to be true that all this crowd, representing five villages, was + anxious to become followers of the God of heaven. His voice grew steady at + last, and standing up there in the flickering torchlight he told those + children of the plain what it meant to be a follower of Jesus Christ. It + was a late hour when the meeting broke up, but even then Dr. Mackay could + not go to bed. Never since the day that A Hoa, his first convert, had + accepted Jesus Christ as his Savior, had he felt such joy, and all night + he walked up and down in front of the preacher's house, unable to sleep + for the thankfulness to God that surged in his heart. + </p> + <p> + Morning brought a wonderful day for the Ki-lai plain. It was like a day + when freedom from slavery was announced. Had there been bells in the + village they would certainly have been rung. But joy bells were ringing in + every heart. Nobody could work all day. The rice-fields and the shops and + the pottery works lay idle. There was but one business to do that day, and + that was to get rid of their idols. + </p> + <p> + Early in the morning the mayor of the place, or the headman as he was + called, came to the house to invite the missionary and his party to join + him. Behind him walked four big boys, carrying two large wicker baskets, + hanging from poles across their shoulders; and behind them came the whole + village, men, women, and children, their faces shining with a new joy. The + procession moved along from house to house. At every place it stopped and + out from the home were carried idols, ancestral tablets, mock-money, + flags, incense sticks, and all the stuff used in idol worship. These were + all emptied into the baskets carried by the boys. When even the temple had + been ransacked and the work of clearing out the idols in the village was + finished, the procession moved on to the next hamlet. The villages were + very near each other, so the journey was not wearisome; and at last when + every vestige of the old idolatrous life had been taken from the homes of + five villages, the happy crowd marched back to the first village. There + was a large courtyard near the temple and here the procession halted. The + boys dropped their well-filled baskets, and their contents were piled in + the center of the court. The people gathered about the heap and with + shouts of joy set fire to these signs of their lifelong slavery. Soon the + pile was blazing and crackling, and all the people, even the chiefs of the + villages, vied with each other in burning up the idols they had so lately + besought for blessings. + </p> + <p> + And then they turned toward the heathen temple and delivered it over to + Kai Bok-su for a chapel in which he and his students might preach the + gospel. + </p> + <p> + And so the temple was lighted up for a new kind of worship. It had been + used for worship many, many times before, but oh, how different it was + this time! Instead of coming in fear of demons, dread of their gods' + anger, and determination to cheat them if possible, these poor folk + crowded into the new-old temple with light, happy hearts, as children + coming to their Father. And was not God their Father, only they had not + known him before? + </p> + <p> + The heathen temple was dedicated to the worship of the true God by singing + the old but always new, one hundredth Psalm. The Lam-si-hoan were not very + good singers. They had not much idea of tune. They had less idea of just + when to start, and there was very little to be said about the harmony of + those hundreds of voices. But in spite of it all, Kai Bok-su had to + confess that never in the music of his homeland or in the more finished + harmonies of Europe, had he heard anything so grandly uplifting as when + those newly-freed people stood up in their idol temple and with heart and + soul and voice unitedly poured forth in thunderous volume of praise the + great command: + </p> + <p> + All people that on earth do dwell, Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice. + </p> + <p> + For a whole week with his pony and groom, which were still his to do with + as he pleased, the busy missionary rode up and down this plain, visiting + the villages, preaching, and teaching the people how to live as Jesus + Christ their Savior had lived; for it was necessary to impress upon their + childlike minds that it would be of no use to burn up the idols in their + homes and temple unless they also gave up the still more harmful idols in + their hearts. + </p> + <p> + But at last the day came when the pony had to be returned to its owner and + the missionary and his helpers must leave. It was a sad day but a joyous + one—the day that great visit came to an end. Crowds of Christians, + fain to keep him, followed him down to the shore, and many kindly but + reluctant hands shoved the little boat out into the surf. And as the + rowers sent it skimming out over the great Pacific rollers, there rose + from the beach the parting hymn, the one that had dedicated the heathen + temple to the worship of the true God: + </p> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + All people that on earth do dwell, + Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice. +</pre> + <p> + and from the rowers and the missionaries in the boat, came back the glad + echo: + </p> + <p> + Know that the Lord is God indeed Without our aid he did us make. + </p> + <p> + They were soon out of sight. The rowers pulled hard, but a stiff + northeaster straight from Japan was blowing against them, and they made + but little headway. Night came down, and they were again skirting those + dark cliffs, where, here and there, along the narrow strip of sand, the + night-fires of the savages flamed out against the dark tangle of foliage. + All night long the rowers struggled against the wind. They were afraid to + go out far for the waves were wild, they dared not land, for, crueler than + the sea, the head-hunters waited for them on the shore. And so all that + night, taking turns with the rowers, the missionary and his students + toiled against the wind and wave. The dawn came up gray and stormy, and + they were still tossing about among the white billows. No one had touched + food for twenty-four hours. They had rice in the boat, but there was no + place where they dared land to have it cooked. There was nothing to do but + to pull, pull at the oars, and a weary task it seemed, for the boat + appeared to make little headway, and the rowers barely succeeded in + keeping her from being dashed upon the rocks. + </p> + <p> + They were becoming almost too weak to keep any control over their boat, + when about three o'clock in the afternoon they managed to round a point. + There before them curved a beautiful bay. Behind it and on both sides + arose a perpendicular wall several hundred feet high. At its foot + stretched a narrow sandy beach. It was an ideal spot, secure from savages + both by land and sea. A shout of encouragement from Kai Bok-su was the one + thing needed. Tired arms and aching backs bent to the oars for one last + effort, and when the boat swept up on the sandy beach every one uttered a + heartfelt prayer of thankfulness to the Father who had provided this + little haven in a time of such distress. + </p> + <p> + The rest of the journey was made safely, and just forty days after their + departure the four missionaries returned, worn out, to Tamsui. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0013" id="link2HCH0013"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XIII. THE LAND OCCUPIED + </h2> + <p> + But Kai Bok-su had no sooner returned than he was off again. He was not + one of that sort who could settle down after an achievement, content to + rest for a little. He seemed to forget all about what had been done and + was "up and at it again." If he "did not know when he was beaten," neither + did he seem to know when he was successful; and like Alexander the Great + he was always sighing for new worlds to conquer, yes, and marching off and + conquering them too. + </p> + <p> + But every time he returned to his work at Tamsui from one of these tours, + it was borne in upon him more forcibly every day that his faithful + assistant who was left in charge, could not long shoulder his work. Mr. + Jamieson was fighting a losing battle with ill health. The terrible + experiences during the war year, the hard work, and the trying Formosan + climate had all combined against him. His brave spirit could not always + sustain the body that was growing gradually weaker, and one day, a dark, + sad day, the devoted soul was set free from the poor pain-racked body. He + had given eight years of hard, faithful work to the study of the language + and to the service of the Master in the mission. Mrs. Jamieson returned to + Canada, and once more Dr. Mackay faced the work, unaided except by native + preachers. But he was not daunted even by this bereavement, for he always + lived in the perfect faith that God was on his side. + </p> + <p> + And then, he had by this time three new assistants in the mission-house on + the bluff. They did not even guess that they were any help to him, for + they could never go with him on his mission tours. But by their sweet + merry ways and their joyous welcome to father, when he returned, they did + help him greatly, and made his home-comings a delight. + </p> + <p> + "How many did you baptize, father?" was baby George's inevitable question + on his father's return. For already the wise toddler had learned something + of the bitter enmity of the heathen world, and knew that converts meant + friends. Then father's home-coming meant presents too, wonderful things, + bows and arrows, rare curios for the museum in the college, and, once, a + pair of the funniest monkeys in the world, which proved most entertaining + playthings for the little boy and his two sisters. Another time the father + brought home a young bear to keep the monkeys company, but they were not + at all polite to their guest, for they made poor bruin's life miserable by + teasing him. They would torment him until he would stamp with rage. But he + was not always badly used, for when the three children would come out to + feed him, he was very happy, and he would show his pleasure by putting his + head between his paws and rolling over and over like a big ball of fur. + And he always seemed quite proud of his performance when his three little + keepers shrieked with laughter. + </p> + <p> + The next year after Mr. Jamieson's death the empty mission-house was once + more filled. In September the Rev. Mr. William and Mrs. Gauld sailed from + Canada, and with their arrival Dr. Mackay took new heart. + </p> + <p> + The new missionaries had learned the language and their work was well + under way when the time came round once more for Dr. Mackay to go back to + Canada for a year's rest. This time there was quite a little party went + with him: his wife, their three children, and Koa Kau, one of his + students. + </p> + <p> + Among those left to assist Mr. Gauld, there was none he relied upon more + than A Hoa. Mr. Gauld, at the close of his second year's work, wrote of + this fellow worker: "The longer and better I know him, the more I can love + him, trust his honesty, and respect his judgment. He knows his own people, + from the governor of the island to the ragged opium-smoking beggar, and + has influence with them all." + </p> + <p> + There were many others besides A Hoa to render the missionary faithful + help; among them Sun-a and Tan He, the latter pastor of the church of + Sin-tiam; and just because Kai Bok-su was away they worked the harder, + that he might receive a good report of them on his return. + </p> + <p> + The separation was longer this time, for Dr. Mackay wished to send his + children to school, and he decided that they would remain in Canada two + years. He was made Moderator of the General Assembly, too, and the Church + at home needed him to stir them up to a greater desire to help those + beyond the seas. + </p> + <p> + While he was working and preaching in Canada, his heart turned always to + his beloved Formosa, and letters from the friends there were among his + greatest pleasures. A Hoa's of course, were doubly welcome. Pastor Giam, + the name by which he was now called, was Mr. Gauld's right-hand helper in + those days, and once he went alone on a tour away to the eastern shore. + While there he had an adventure of which he wrote to Kai Bok-su. + </p> + <p> + "The other morning while walking on the seashore I saw a sailing-vessel + slowly drifting shoreward and in danger of being wrecked, for there was a + fog and a heavy sea. I hastened back to the chapel and beat the drum to + call the villagers to worship. As soon as it was over I asked converts and + heathen to go in their fishing-boats as quickly as possible and let the + sailors know they need not fear savages there, and if they wished to come + ashore a chapel would be given them to stay in. The whole crew came ashore + in the boats at once. I gave your old room to the captain, his wife and + child, and other accommodation to the rest. I then hurried away to a + mandarin and asked him to send men to protect the ship." + </p> + <p> + When Kai Bok-su read the story and remembered that, twenty-five years + earlier, the crew of that vessel would have been murdered and their ship + plundered, he exclaimed with joy, "Blessed Christianity! Surely, + </p> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + Blessings abound where'er He reigns!" +</pre> + <p> + A Hoa had another tale to tell. One afternoon he had a strange + congregation in that little chapel. There were one hundred and forty-six + native converts and twenty-one Europeans. These were made up of seven + nationalities, British, American, French, Danish, Turkish, Swiss, and + Norwegian. Their ship was from America and was bound for Hongkong with + coal-oil. + </p> + <p> + They were amazed at seeing a pretty, neat chapel away in this wild, remote + place, which they had always supposed was overrun by head-hunters, and + indeed it was just that little chapel that had made the great change. + These men now entered it and joined the natives in worshiping the true + God, where, only a few years before, their blood would have stained the + sands. + </p> + <p> + A Hoa told them something of the great Kai Bok-su and the struggles he had + had with savages and other enemies, when he first came to this region. The + visitors were very much interested and did not wonder that the name "Kai + Bok-su" was held in such reverence. When they left, the captain presented + the little chapel with a bell, a lamp, and a mirror which were on board + his ship. + </p> + <p> + The long months of separation were rolling around, when something happened + that brought Kai Bok-su back to his island in great haste. Once more war + swept over Formosa. This time the trouble was between China and Japan. The + big Empire proved no match for the clever Japanese, and everywhere China + was forced to give in. + </p> + <p> + One of the places which Japan set her affections on was Formosa. She must + have the Beautiful Isle and have it at once. China was in no position to + say no, so the Chinese envoy went on board a Japanese vessel and sailed + toward Formosa. When in sight of its lovely mountains, without any + ceremony he pointed to the land and said, "There it is, take it." And that + was how Formosa became a province of Japan. At noon on May 26, 1895, the + dragon flag of China was hauled down from Formosan forts and the banner of + Japan was hoisted. + </p> + <p> + Of course this was not done without a struggle. The Formosans themselves + fought hard, and in the fight the Christians came in for times of trouble. + So Kai Bok-su, hearing that his "valuables" were again in danger, set sail + for Tamsui. + </p> + <p> + When he arrived the war was practically over, but everywhere were signs of + strife. As soon as he was able, he took A Hoa and Koa Kau and visited the + chapels all over the country. Everywhere were sights to make his heart + very sad. The Japanese soldiers had used many of the chapels for military + stables, and they were in a filthy state. At one place the native preacher + was a prisoner, the Japanese believing him to be a spy. At another village + the Christians sadly led their missionary out to a tea plantation and + showed him the place where their beloved pastor had been shot by the + Japanese soldiers. Mackay stood beside his grave, his heart heavy with + sorrow. + </p> + <p> + But his courage never left him. The native Christians everywhere forgot + their woes in the great joy of seeing him once more; and he joined them in + a brave attempt to put things to rights once more. The Japanese paid for + all damages done by their soldiers and in a short time the work was going + on splendidly. + </p> + <p> + "We have no fear," wrote Dr. Mackay. "The King of kings is greater than + Emperor or Mikado. He will rule and overrule all things." + </p> + <p> + His faith was rewarded, for when the troublous time was over, the + government of Japan proved better than that of China, and on the whole the + trial proved a blessing. + </p> + <p> + Oxford College had been closed while Dr. Mackay was away, and the girls' + school had not been opened since the war commenced, for it was not safe + for the girls and women to leave their homes during such disturbed times. + But now both schools reopened, and again Kai Bok-su with his cane and his + book and his crowd of students could be seen going up to the lecture + halls, or away out on the Formosan roads. + </p> + <p> + He had conquered so often, overcome such tremendous obstacles, and faced + unflinchingly so many awful dangers for the sake of his converts, that it + was no wonder that they adored him, their feeling amounting almost to + worship. "Kai Bok-su says it must be so" was sufficient to compel any one + in the north Formosa Church to do what was required. Surely never before + was a man so wonderfully rewarded in this life. He had given up all he + possessed for the glory of his Master and he had his full compensation. + </p> + <p> + A few happy years sped round. The time for him to go back home again was + drawing near when there came the first hint that he might soon be called + on a longer furlough than he would have in Canada. + </p> + <p> + At first, when the dread suspicion began to be whispered in the halls of + Oxford College and in the chapel gatherings throughout the country, people + refused to believe it. Kai Bok-su ill? No, no, it was only the malaria, + and he always arose from that and went about again. It could not be + serious. + </p> + <p> + But in spite of the fact that loving hearts refused to accept it, there + was no use denying the sad fact. There was something wrong with Kai + Bok-su. For months his voice had been growing weaker, the doctors had + examined his throat, and attended him, but it was all of no use. At last + he could not speak at all, but wrote his words on a slate. + </p> + <p> + And everywhere in north Formosa, converts and students and preachers + watched and waited and prayed most fervently that he might soon recover. + Those who lived in Tamsui whispered to each other in tones of dread, as + they watched him come and go with slower steps than they had been + accustomed to see. + </p> + <p> + "He will be well next month," they would say hopefully, or, "He will look + like himself when the rains dry." But little by little the conviction grew + that the beloved missionary was seriously ill, and a great gloom settled + all over north Formosa. There was a little gleam of joy when the doctor in + Tamsui advised him finally to go to Hongkong and see a specialist He went, + leaving many loving hearts waiting anxiously between hope and fear to hear + what the doctors would say. And prayers went up night and day from those + who loved him. From the heart-broken wife in the lonely house on the bluff + to the farthest-off convert on the Ki-lai plain, every Christian on the + island, even those in the south Formosa mission, prayed that the useful + life might be spared. + </p> + <p> + But God had other and greater plans for Kai Bok-su. He came back from + Hongkong, and the first look at his pale face told the dreaded truth. The + shadow of death lay on it. + </p> + <p> + Those were heart-breaking days in north Formosa. From all sides came such + messages of devotion that it seemed as if the passionate love of his + followers must hold him back. But a stronger love was calling him on. And + one bright June day, in 1901, when the green mountainsides, the blue + rivers, and the waving rice-fields of Formosa lay smiling in the sun, Kai + Bok-su heard once more that call that had brought him so far from home. + Once more he obeyed, and he opened his eyes on a new glory greater than + any of which he had ever dreamed. The task had been a hard one. The "big + stone" had been stubborn, but it had been broken, and not long after the + noontide of his life the tired worker was called home. + </p> + <p> + They laid his poor, worn body up on the hill above the river, beside the + bodies of the Christians he had loved so well. And the soft Formosan grass + grew over his grave, the winds roared about it, and the river and the sea + sang his requiem. + </p> + <p> + Gallant Kai Bok-su! As he rests up there on his wind-swept height, there + are hearts in the valleys and on the plains of his beloved Formosa and in + his far-off native land that are aching for him. And sometimes to these + last comes the question "Was it well?" Was it well that he should wear out + that splendid life in such desperate toil among heathen that hated and + reviled him? And from every part of north Formosa, sounding on the wind, + comes many an answer. + </p> + <p> + Up from the damp rice-fields, where the farmer goes to and fro in the gray + dawn, arises a song: + </p> + <p> + I'm not ashamed to own my Lord, Or to defend his cause. + </p> + <p> + Far away on the mountainside, the once savage mother draws her little one + to her and teaches him, not the old lesson of bloodshed, but the older one + of love and kindness, and together they croon: + </p> + <p> + Jesus loves me, this I know, For the Bible tells me so. + </p> + <p> + And up from scores of chapels dotting the land, comes the sound of the + old, old story of Jesus and his love, preached by native Formosans, and + from the thousand tongues of their congregations soars upward the Psalm: + </p> + <p> + All people that on earth do dwell, Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice! + </p> + <p> + These all unite in one great harmony, replying, "It is well!" + </p> + <p> + But is it well with the work? What of his Beautiful Island, now that Kai + Bok-su has left for a greater work in a more beautiful land? Yes, it is + well also with Formosa. The work goes on. + </p> + <p> + There are two thousand, one hundred members now in the four organized + congregations, and over fifty mission stations and outstations. But better + still there are in addition twenty-two hundred who have forsaken their + idols and are being trained to become church-members. The Formosa Church + out of its poverty gives liberally too. In 1911 they contributed more than + thirty-five hundred dollars to Christian work. "Every year," writes Mr. + Jack, "a special collection is taken by the Church for the work among the + Ami—the aborigines of the Ki-lai plain." This is the foreign mission + of the north Formosa Church. + </p> + <p> + A Hoa lately followed his pastor to the home above, but many others + remain. Mr. Gauld and his family are still there, in the front of the + battle, and with him is a fine corps of soldiers, comprising fifty-nine + native and several Canadian missionaries, including the Rev. Dr. J. Y. + Ferguson and his wife, the Rev. Milton Jack and Mrs. Jack, the Rev. and + Mrs. Duncan MacLeod, Miss J. M. Kinney, Miss Hannah Connell, Miss Mabel G. + Clazie, and Miss Lily Adair. Miss Isabelle J. Elliott, a graduate nurse, + and deaconess, will join the staff shortly, and a few others will be sent + when secured, in order that the force may be sufficient to evangelize the + million people in north Formosa. + </p> + <p> + Mrs. Mackay and her two daughters, Helen and Mary, the latter having + married native preachers, Koa Kau and Tan He, are keeping up the work that + husband and father left. A new hospital is being built under Dr. Ferguson, + and plans are on foot for new school and college buildings. + </p> + <p> + And the latest arrived missionary? What of him? Why his name is George + Mackay, and he has just sailed from Canada as the first Mackay sailed + forty-one years earlier. He has been nine years in Canada and the United + States, at school and college, and now with his Canadian wife, has gone + back to his native land. Yes, Kai Bok-su's son has gone out to carry on + his father's work, and Formosa has welcomed him as no other missionary has + been welcomed since Kai Bok-su's day. + </p> + <p> + But these are not all. From far across the sea, in the land where Kai + Bok-su lived his boyhood days, comes a voice. It is the echo from the + hearts of other boys, who have read his noble life. And their answer is, + "We too will go out, as he went, and fight and win!" + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </p> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Black-Bearded Barbarian (George +Leslie Mackay), by Mary Esther Miller MacGregor, AKA Marion Keith + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BLACK-BEARDED BARBARIAN *** + +***** This file should be named 1759-h.htm or 1759-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/1/7/5/1759/ + +Produced by An Anonymous Volunteer, and David Widger + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + </body> +</html> diff --git a/1759.txt b/1759.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..783c34b --- /dev/null +++ b/1759.txt @@ -0,0 +1,5026 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Black-Bearded Barbarian (George Leslie +Mackay), by Mary Esther Miller MacGregor, AKA Marion Keith + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Black-Bearded Barbarian (George Leslie Mackay) + +Author: Mary Esther Miller MacGregor, AKA Marion Keith + +Posting Date: September 21, 2008 [EBook #1759] +Release Date: May, 1999 +Last updated: November 27, 2011 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BLACK-BEARDED BARBARIAN *** + + + + + + + + + + +THE BLACK-BEARDED BARBARIAN + +by Mary Esther Miller MacGregor (AKA Marion Keith) + + + + +THE BLACK BEARDED BARBARIAN (1) + + (1) The name by which George Leslie Mackay was + known among the Chinese of north Formosa. + + + + +CHAPTER I. SPLITTING ROCKS + +Up in the stony pasture-field behind the barn the boys had been working +all the long afternoon. Nearly all, that is, for, being boys, they had +managed to mix a good deal of fun with their labor. But now they were +tired of both work and play, and wondered audibly, many times over, why +they were not yet called home to supper. + +The work really belonged to the Mackay boys, but, like Tom Sawyer, they +had made it so attractive that several volunteers had come to their aid. +Their father was putting up a new stone house, near the old one down +there behind the orchard, and the two youngest of the family had been +put at the task of breaking the largest stones in the field. + +It meant only to drag some underbrush and wood from the forest skirting +the farm, pile them on the stones, set fire to them, and let the heat do +the rest. It had been grand sport at first, they all voted, better than +playing shinny, and almost as good as going fishing. In fact it was a +kind of free picnic, where one could play at Indians all day long. +But as the day wore on, the picnic idea had languished, and the +stone-breaking grew more and more to resemble hard work. + +The warm spring sunset had begun to color the western sky; the +meadow-larks had gone to bed, and the stone-breakers were tired and +ravenously hungry--as hungry as only wolves or country boys can be. The +visitors suggested that they ought to be going home. "Hold on, Danny, +just till this one breaks," said the older Mackay boy, as he set a +burning stick to a new pile of brush. + +"This'll be a dandy, and it's the last, too. They're sure to call us to +supper before we've time to do another." + +The new fire, roaring and snapping, sending up showers of sparks and +filling the air with the sweet odor of burning cedar, proved too +alluring to be left. The company squatted on the ground before it, +hugging their knees and watching the blue column of smoke go straight +up into the colored sky. It suggested a camp-fire in war times, and each +boy began to tell what great and daring deeds he intended to perform +when he became a man. + +Jimmy, one of the visitors, who had been most enthusiastic over the +picnic side of the day's work, announced that he was going to be a +sailor. He would command a fleet on the high seas, so he would, and +capture pirates, and grow fabulously wealthy on prize-money. Danny, who +was also a guest, declared his purpose one day to lead a band of rough +riders to the Western plains, where he would kill Indians, and escape +fearful deaths by the narrowest hairbreadth. + +"Mebbe I'm goin'to be Premier of Canada, some day," said one youngster, +poking his bare toes as near as he dared to the flames. + +There were hoots of derision. This was entirely too tame to be even +considered as a career. + +"And what are you going to be, G. L.?" inquired the biggest boy of the +smallest. + +The others looked at the little fellow and laughed. George Mackay was +the youngest of the group, and was a small wiry youngster with a pair of +flashing eyes lighting up his thin little face. He seemed far too +small and insignificant to even think about a career. But for all the +difference in their size and age the bigger boys treated little George +with a good deal of respect. For, somehow, he never failed to do what he +set out to do. He always won at races, he was never anywhere but at the +head of his class, he was never known to be afraid of anything in field +or forest or school ground, he was the hardest worker at home or at +school, and by sheer pluck he managed to do everything that boys bigger +and older and stronger could do. + +So when Danny asked, "And what are you going to be, G. L.?" though the +boys laughed at the small thin little body, they respected the daring +spirit it held, and listened for his answer. + +"He's goin' to be a giant, and go off with a show," cried one, and they +all laughed again. + +Little G. L. laughed too, but he did not say what he intended to do when +he grew big. Down in his heart he held a far greater ambition than the +others dreamed of. It was too great to be told--so great he scarcely +knew what it was himself. So he only shook his small head and closed his +lips tightly, and the rest forgot him and chattered on. + +Away beyond the dark woods, the sunset shone red and gold between the +black tree trunks. The little boy gazed at it wonderingly. The sight of +those morning and evening glories always stirred his child's soul, +and made him long to go away--away, he knew not where--to do great and +glorious deeds. The Mackay boys' grandfather had fought at Waterloo, and +little George Leslie, the youngest of six, had heard many, many tales +of that gallant struggle, and every time they had been told him he had +silently resolved that, some day, he too would do just such brave deeds +as his grandfather had done. + +As the boys talked on, and the little fellow gazed at the sunset and +dreamed, the big stone cracked in two, the fire died down, and still +there came no welcome call to supper from any of the farmhouses in +sight. The Mackay boys had been trained in a fine old-fashioned Canadian +home, and did not dream of quitting work until they were summoned. But +the visitors were merely visitors, and could go home when they liked. +The future admiral of the pirate-killing fleet declared he must go and +get supper, or he'd eat the grass, he was so hungry. The coming Premier +of Canada and the Indian-slayer agreed with him, and they all jumped the +fence, and went whooping away over the soft brown fields toward home. + +There was just one big stone left. It was a huge boulder, four feet +across. + +"We'll never get enough wood to crack that, G. L.," declared his +brother. "It just can't be done." + +But little George answered just as any one who knew his determination +would have expected. In school he astonished his teacher by learning +everything at a tremendous rate, but there was one small word he refused +to learn--the little word "can't." His bright eyes flashed, now, at the +sound of it. He jumped upon the big stone, and clenched his fist. + +"It's GOT to be broken!" he cried. "I WON'T let it beat me." He leaped +down, and away he ran toward the woods. His brother caught his spirit, +and ran too. They forgot they were both tired and hungry. They seized a +big limb of a fallen tree and dragged it across the field. They chopped +it into pieces, and piled it high with plenty of brush, upon the big +stone. In a few minutes it was all in a splendid blaze, leaping and +crackling, and sending the boys' long shadows far across the field. + +The fire grew fiercer and hotter, and suddenly the big boulder cracked +in four pieces, as neatly as though it had been slashed by a giant's +sword. Little G. L. danced around it, and laughed triumphantly. The +next moment there came the welcome "hoo-hoo" from the house behind +the orchard, and away the two scampered down the hill toward home and +supper. + +When the day's work of the farmhouse had been finished, the Mackay +family gathered about the fire, for the spring evening was chilly. +George Leslie sat near his mother, his face full of deep thought. It was +the hour for family worship, and always at this time he felt most keenly +that longing to do something great and glorious. Tonight his father read +of a Man who was sending out his army to conquer the world. It was only +a little army, just twelve men, but they knew their Leader had more +power than all the soldiers of the world. And they were not afraid, +though he said, "Behold, I send you forth as sheep in the midst of +wolves." For he added, "Fear ye not," for he would march before them, +and they would be sure of victory. + +The little boy listened with all his might. He did everything that way. +Surely this was a story of great and glorious deeds, even better than +Waterloo, he felt. And there came to his heart a great longing to go out +and fight wrong and put down evil as these men had done. He did not +know that the longing was the voice of the great King calling his young +knight to go out and "Live pure, speak true, right wrong, follow the +King." + +But there came a day when he did understand, and on that day he was +ready to obey. + +When bedtime came the boys were asked if they had finished their work, +and the story of the last big stone was told. "G. L. would not leave it," +the brother explained. The father looked smilingly at little G. L. +who still sat, dangling his short legs from his chair, and studying the +fire. + +He spoke to his wife in Gaelic. "Perhaps the lad will be called to break +a great rock some day. The Lord grant he may do it." + +The boy looked up wonderingly. He understood Gaelic as well as English, +but he did not comprehend his father's words. He had no idea they were +prophetic, and that away on the other side of the world, in a land his +geography lessons had not yet touched, there stood a great rock, ugly +and hard and grim, which he was one day to be called upon to break. + + + + +CHAPTER II. A VOYAGE OF DISCOVERY + +The steamship America, bound for Hongkong, was leaving the dock at San +Francisco. All was bustle and noise and stir. Friends called a last +farewell from the deck, handkerchiefs waved, many of them wet with +tears. The long boom of a gun roared out over the harbor, a bell rang, +and the signal was given. Up came the anchor, and slowly and with +dignity the great vessel moved out through the Golden Gate into the wide +Pacific. + +Crowds stood on the deck to get a last glimpse of home and loved ones, +and to wave to friends as long as they could be distinguished. There +was one young man who stood apart from the crowd, and who did not wave +farewell to any one. He had come on board with a couple of men, but +they had gone back to the dock, and were lost in the crowd. He seemed +entirely alone. He leaned against the deck-railing and gazed intently +over the widening strip of tumbling waters to the city on the shore. But +he did not see it. Instead, he saw a Canadian farmhouse, a garden and +orchard, and gently sloping meadows hedged in by forest. And up behind +the barn he saw a stony field, where long ago he and his brother and the +neighbor boys had broken the stones for the new house. + +His quick movements, his slim, straight figure, and his bright, piercing +eyes showed he was the same boy who had broken the big rock in the +pasture-field long before. Just the same boy, only bigger, and more man +than boy now, for he wore an air of command and his thin keen face bore +a beard, a deep black, like his hair. And now he was going away, as +he had longed to go, when he was a boy, and ahead of him lay the big +frowning rock, which he must either break or be broken upon. + +He had learned many things since those days when he had scampered +barefoot over the fields, or down the road to school. He had been to +college in Toronto, in Princeton, and away over in Edinburgh, in the old +homeland where his father and mother were born. And all through his +life that call to go and do great deeds for the King had come again +and again. He had determined to obey it when he was but a little lad at +school. He had encountered many big stones in his way, which he had to +break, before he could go on. But the biggest stone of all lay across +his path when college was over, and he was ready and anxious to go away +as a missionary. The Presbyterian Church of Canada had never yet sent +out a missionary to a foreign land, and some of the good old men bade +George Mackay stay at home and preach the gospel there. But as usual he +conquered. Every one saw he would be a great missionary if he were only +given a chance. At last the General Assembly gave its consent, and now, +in spite of all stones in the way, here he was, bound for China, and +ready to do anything the King commanded. Land was beginning to fade +away into a gray mist, the November wind was damp and chill, he turned +and went down to his stateroom. He sat down on his little steamer trunk, +and for the first time the utter loneliness and the uncertainty of this +voyage came over him. He took up his Bible and turned to the fly-leaf. +There he read the inscription: + +Presented to REV. G. L. MACKAY + +First missionary of the Canadian Presbyterian Church to China, by the +Foreign Mission Committee, as a parting token of their esteem, when +about to leave his native land for the sphere of his future labors among +the heathen. WILLIAM MACLAREN, Convener. + +Ottawa, 9th October, 1871. Matthew xxviii: 18-20. Psalm cxxi + +It was a moment of severe trial to the young soldier. But he turned to +the Psalm marked on the fly-leaf of his Bible, and he read it again and +again. + +"My help cometh from the Lord which made heaven and earth" + +"The Lord is thy keeper: the Lord is thy shade upon thy right hand." + +"The sun shall not smite thee by day, nor the moon by night." + +The beautiful words gave him comfort. Homesickness, loneliness, and +fears for the future all vanished. He was going out to an unknown land +where dangers and perhaps death awaited him, but the Lord would be his +keeper and nothing could harm him. + +Twenty-six days on the Pacific! And a stormy voyage it was, for the +Pacific does not always live up to her beautiful name, and she tossed +the America about in a shocking manner. But the voyage did not seem long +to George Mackay. There were other missionaries on board with whom he +had become acquainted, and he had long delightful talks with them and +they taught him many things about his new work. He was the same busy G. +L. he had been when a boy; always working, working, and he did not waste +a moment on the voyage. There was a fine library on the ship and he +studied the books on China until he knew more about the religion of that +country than did many of the Chinese themselves. + +One day, as he was poring over a Chinese history, some one called him +hastily to come on deck. He threw down his book and ran up-stairs. The +whole ship was in a joyous commotion. His friend pointed toward +the horizon, and away off there against the sky stood the top of a +snow-capped peak--Fujiyama!--the majestic, sacred mountain of Japan! + +It was a welcome sight, after the long ocean voyage, and the hours they +lay in Yokahama harbor were full of enjoyment. Every sight was thrilling +and strange to young Mackay's Western eyes. The harbor fairly swarmed +with noisy, shouting, chattering Japanese boatmen. He wondered why they +seemed so familiar, until it suddenly dawned on him that their queer +ricestraw coats made them look like a swarm of Robinson Crusoes who had +just been rescued from their islands. + +When he landed he found things still funnier. The streets were noisier +than the harbor. Through them rolled large heavy wooden carts, pulled +and pushed by men, with much grunting and groaning. Past him whirled +what looked like overgrown baby carriages, also pulled by men, and each +containing a big grown-up human baby. It was all so pretty too, and so +enchanting that the young missionary would fain have remained there. But +China was still farther on, so when the America again set sail, he was +on board. + +Away they sailed farther and farther east, or was it west? He often +asked himself that question in some amusement as they approached the +coast of China. They entered a long winding channel and steamed this +way and that until one day they sailed into a fine broad harbor with +a magnificent city rising far up the steep sides of a hill. It was an +Oriental city, and therefore strange to the young traveler. But for all +that there seemed something familiar in the fine European buildings +that lined the streets, and something still more homelike in that which +floated high above them--something that brought a thrill to the heart of +the young Canadian--the red-crossed banner of Britain! + +It was Hongkong, the great British port of the East, and here he decided +to land. No sooner had the travelers touched the dock, than they were +surrounded by a yelling, jostling crowd of Chinese coolies, all shouting +in an outlandish gibberish for the privilege of carrying the Barbarians' +baggage. A group gathered round Mackay, and in their eagerness began +hammering each other with bamboo poles. He was well-nigh bewildered, +when above the din sounded the welcome music of an English voice. + +"Are you Mackay from Canada?" + +He whirled round joyfully. It was Dr. E. J. Eitel, a missionary from +England. He had been told that the young Canadian would arrive on the +America and was there to welcome him. + +Although the Canadian Presbyterian Church had as yet sent out no +missionaries to a foreign land, the Presbyterian Church of England had +many scattered over China. They were all hoping that the new recruit +would join them, and invited him to visit different mission stations, +and see where he would like to settle. + +So he remained that night in Hongkong, as Dr. Eitel's guest, and the +next morning he took a steamer for Canton. Here he was met on the +pier by an old fellow student of Princeton University, and the two old +college friends had a grand reunion. He returned to Hongkong shortly, +and next visited Swatow. As they sailed into the harbor, he noticed two +Englishmen rowing out toward them in a sampan. (*) No sooner had the ship's +ladder been lowered, than the two sprang out of their boat and clambered +quickly on deck. To Mackay's amazement, one of them called out, "Is +Mackay of Canada on board?" + + * A Chinese boat from twelve to fifteen feet long, covered + with a house. + +"Mackay of Canada," sprang forward delighted, and found his two new +friends to be Mr. Hobson of the Chinese imperial customs, and Dr. +Thompson of the English Presbyterian mission in Swatow. + +The missionaries here gave the stranger a warm welcome. At every place +he had visited there had awaited him a cordial invitation to stay and +work. And now at Swatow he was urged to settle down and help them. There +was plenty to be done, and they would be delighted to have his help. + +But for some reason, Mackay scarcely knew why himself, he wanted to see +another place. + +Away off the southeastern coast of China lies a large island called +Formosa. It is separated from the mainland by a body of water called +the Formosa Channel. This is in some places eighty miles wide, in others +almost two hundred. Mackay had often heard of Formosa even before coming +to China, and knew it was famed for its beauty. + +Even its name shows this. Long, long years before, some navigators from +Portugal sailed to this beautiful island. They had stood on the deck +of their ship as they approached it, and were amazed at its loveliness. +They saw lofty green mountains piercing the clouds. They saw silvery +cascades tumbling down their sides, flashing in the sunlight, and, +below, terraced plains sloping down to the sea, covered with waving +bamboo or with little water-covered rice-fields. It was all so +delightful that no wonder they cried, + +"Illha Formosa! Illha Formosa!" + +"Beautiful Isle! Beautiful Isle." Since that day the "Beautiful Isle," +perhaps the most charming in all the world, has been called Formosa. + +And, somehow, Mackay longed to see this "Beautiful Isle" before he +decided where he was going to preach the gospel. And so when the kind +friends at Swatow said, "Stay and work with us," he always answered, +"I must first see Formosa." + +So, one day, he sailed away from the mainland toward the Beautiful +Isle. He landed at Takow in the south of the island, just about +Christmas-time. But Formosa was green, the weather was hot, and he could +scarcely believe that, at home in Oxford county, Ontario, they were +flying over the snow to the music of sleigh-bells. On New Year's day +he met a missionary of this south Formosa field, named Dr. Ritchie. He +belonged to the Presbyterian Church of England, which had a fine mission +there. For nearly a month Mackay visited with him and studied the +language. + +And while he visited and worked there the missionaries told him of +the northern part of the island. No person was there to tell all those +crowded cities of Jesus Christ and His love. It would be lonely for him +there, it would be terribly hard work, but it would be a grand Thing +to lay the foundations, to be the first to tell those people the "good +news," the young missionary thought. And, one day, he looked up from the +Chinese book he was studying and said to Dr. Ritchie: + +"I have decided to settle in north Formosa." + +And Dr. Ritchie's quick answer was: + +"God bless you, Mackay." + +As soon as the decision was made, another missionary, Dr. Dickson, who +was with Mr. Ritchie, decided to go to north Formosa with the young man, +and show him over the ground. So, early in the month of March in the +year 1872, the three men set off by steamship to sail for Tamsui, a port +in north Formosa. They were two days making the voyage, and a tropical +storm pitched the small vessel hither and thither, so that they were +very much relieved when they sailed up to the mouth of the Tamsui river. + +It was low tide and a bare sand-bar stretched across the mouth of the +harbor, so the anchor was dropped, and they waited until the tide should +cover the bar, and allow them to sail in. + +This wait gave the travelers a fine opportunity to see the country. The +view from this harbor of the "Beautiful Island" was an enchanting +one. Before them, toward the east, rose tier upon tier of magnificent +mountains, stretching north and south. Down their sloping sides tumbled +sparkling cascades and here and there patches of bright green showed +where there were tea plantations. Farther down were stretches of grass +and groves of lovely feathery bamboo. And between these groves stretched +what seemed to be little silvery lakes, with the reflection of the great +mountains in them. They were really the famous rice-fields of Formosa, +at this time of the year all under water. There were no fences round +their little lake-fields. They were of all shapes and sizes, and were +divided from each other by little green fringed dykes or walls. Each +row of fields was lower than the last until they came right down to the +sea-level, and all lay blue and smiling in the blazing sunlight. + +As the young missionary stood spellbound, gazing over the lovely, +fairylike scene, Mr. Ritchie touched his arm. + +"This is your parish, Mackay," he whispered smilingly. + +And then for the first time since he had started on his long, long +journey, the young missionary felt his spirit at peace. The restlessness +that had driven him on from one Chinese port to another was gone. This +was indeed his parish. + +Suddenly out swung a signal; the tide had risen. Up came the anchor, and +away they glided over the now submerged sand-bar into the harbor. + +A nearer view showed greater charms in the Beautiful Isle. On the south, +at their right, lay the great Quan Yin mountain, towering seventeen +hundred feet above them, clothed in tall grass and groves of bamboo, +banyan, and fir trees of every conceivable shade of green. Nestling at +its feet were little villages almost buried in trees. Slowly the ship +drifted along, passing, here a queer fishing village close to the sandy +shore, yonder a light-house, there a battered Chinese fort rising from +the top of a hill. + +And now Tamsui came in sight--the new home of the young missionary. It +seemed to him that it was the prettiest and the dirtiest place he had +ever seen. The town lay along the bank of the river at the foot of a +hill. This bluff rose abruptly behind it to a height of two hundred +feet. On its face stood a queer-looking building. It was red in color, +solid and weather worn, and above it floated the grand old flag of +Britain. + +"That's an old Dutch fort," explained Mr. Ritchie, "left there since +they were in the island. It is the British consulate now. There, next to +it, is the consul's residence." + +It was a handsome house, just below the fort, and surrounded by lovely +gardens. But down beneath it, on the shore, was the most interesting +place to the newcomer, the town of Tamsui proper, or Ho Be, as the +Chinese called it. The foreigners landed and made their way up the +street. To the two from south Formosa, Tamsui was like every other small +Chinese town, but Mackay had not yet become accustomed to the strange +sights and sounds and stranger smells, and his bright eyes were keen +with interest. + +The main thoroughfare wound this way and that, only seven or eight feet +wide at its best. It was filled with noisy crowds of men who acted as if +they were on the verge of a terrible fight. But the older missionaries +knew that they were merely acting as Chinese crowds always do. On each +side were shops,--tea shops, rice shops, tobacco shops, and many other +kinds. And most numerous of all were the shops where opium, one of the +greatest curses of Chinese life, was sold. The front wall of each was +removed, and the customers stood in the street and dickered with the +shopkeeper, while at the top of his harsh voice the latter swore by +all the gods in China that he was giving the article away at a terrific +loss. Through the crowd pushed hawkers, carrying their wares balanced +on poles across their shoulders. Boys with trays of Chinese candies and +sugar-cane yelled their wares above the din. The visitors stumbled +along over the rough stones of the pavement until they came to the +market-place. Foreigners were not such a curiosity in Tamsui as in the +inland towns, and not a great deal of notice was taken of them, but +occasionally Mackay could hear the now familiar words of contempt +--"Ugly barbarian"--"Foreign devil" from the men that passed them. And +one man, pointing to Mackay, shouted "Ho! the black-bearded barbarian!" +It was a name the young missionary was destined to hear very frequently. +Past opium-dens, barber shops, and drug stores they went and through the +noise and bustle and din of the market-place. They knew that the inns, +judging by the outside, would be filthy, so Mr. Ritchie suggested, as +evening was approaching, that they find some comfortable place to spend +the night. + +There was a British merchant in Tamsui named Mr. Dodd, whom the +missionaries knew. So to him they went, and were given fine quarters in +his warehouse. They ate their supper here, from the provisions they had +bought in the market, and stretching themselves out on their grass mats +they slept soundly. The next day was Sunday, but the three travelers +spent it quietly in the warehouse by the river, studying their Bibles +and discussing their proposed trip. They concluded it was best not to +provoke the anger of the people against the new missionary by preaching, +so they did not go out. To-morrow they would start southward and take +Mackay to the bounds of their mission field, and show him the land that +was to be "his parish." + + + + +CHAPTER III. RECONNOITERING THE TERRITORY + +Early Monday morning Mackay peeped out of the big warehouse door at the +great calm mountain shrouded in the pale mists of early dawn. The other +two travelers were soon astir, and were surprised to find their young +companion all ready. They were not yet well enough acquainted with him +to know that he could do with less sleep at night than an owl. He was in +high spirits and as eager to be off as he had ever been to start for a +day's fishing in the old times back in Ontario. And indeed this was just +a great fishing expedition he was commencing. For had not One said to +him, long long ago when he was but a little boy, "Come follow me, and I +will make you to become a fisher of men"? and he had obeyed. The first +task was to go out and buy food for the journey, and to hire a couple of +coolies to carry it and what baggage they must take. + +Dr. Dickson went off on this errand, and being well acquainted with +Formosan customs and language, soon returned with two Chinese carriers +and plenty of food. This last consisted of canned meats, biscuits, +coffee, and condensed milk, bought at a store where ships' supplies were +kept for sale. There was also some salted water-buffalo meat, a Chinese +dish with which the young missionary was destined to become very +familiar. + +They started out three abreast, Mr. Ritchie's blue serge figure capped +by a white helmet on the right, Dr. Dickson on the left in his Scotch +tweed, and between them the alert, slim figure of the newcomer, in his +suit of Canadian gray. The coolies, with baskets hung to a pole across +their shoulders, came ambling along behind. + +The three travelers were in the gayest mood. Perhaps it was the clear +spring morning air, or the breath of the salt ocean, perhaps it was the +intoxicating beauty of mountain and plain and river that surrounded +them or it may have been because they had given their lives in perfect +service to the One who is the source of all happiness, but whatever was +the cause, they were all like schoolboys off for a holiday. The coolies +who trotted in the rear were very much amazed and not a little amused at +the actions of these foolish foreign devils, who laughed and joked and +seemed in such high spirits for no reason at all. + +They swung along the bank of the river until they came to the ferry that +was to take them to the other side. They sprang into the boat and +were shoved off. Before they reached the other side, at Dr. Dickson's +suggestion, they took off their shoes and socks, and stowed them away in +the carriers' baskets. When they came to the opposite bank they rolled +up their trousers to their knees and sprang out into the shallow water. +For a short distance they had the joy of tramping barefoot along the +hard gleaming sand of the harbor. + +But shoes and stockings had to be resumed, for soon they turned inland, +on a path that wound up to the high plain above the river. "Do you ever +use a horse on your travels?" asked young Mackay as they climbed upward. + +Mr. Ritchie laughed. "You couldn't get one in north Formosa for love or +money. And if you could, he wouldn't be any use." + +"Unless he was a second Pegasus, and could soar above the Formosan +roads," added Dr. Dickson. "Wait a bit and you'll understand." + +The young missionary waited, and kept his eyes open for the answer. +The pathway crossed a grassy plain where groups of queer-looking, +mouse-colored animals, half ox, half buffalo, with great spreading +horns, strayed about, herded by boys, or lay wallowing in deep pools. + +"Water-buffaloes," he said, remembering them as he had seen them in the +south. + +"The most useful animal on the island," remarked Mr. Ritchie, adding +with a laugh, "except perhaps the pig. You'll have a taste of Mr. +Buffalo for your dinner, Mackay." + +And now they were up on the heights, and the lovely country lay spread +out before them. Mackay mentally compared this walk to many he had taken +along the country roads of his native land. It was early in March, but +as there had been no winter, so there was no spring. It was summer, +warm, radiant summer, like a lovely day in June at home. Dandelions, +violets, and many gay flowers that he did not recognize spangled the +grassy plain. The skylark high overhead was pouring out its glorious +song, just as he had heard it in his student days in Scotland. Here and +there were clumps of fir trees that reminded him of Canada, but on the +whole the scene was new and wonderful to his Western eyes. + +They were now on the first level of the rice-fields. The farms were +tiny things, none larger than eight or ten acres. They were divided into +queer-shaped little irrigated fields, separated not by fences, but by +little low walls of mud. Every farm was under water now, and here and +there, wading through his little flooded fields, went the farmer with +his plough, drawn by a useful water-buffalo,--the latter apparently quite +happy at being allowed to splash about in the mud. + +These rice-farms soon became a familiar sight to the newcomer. He liked +to see them at all times--when each field was a pretty blue or green +lake, later when the water was choked with the fresh green growth, or in +harvest days, when the farmers stripped the fields of their grain. +Just now they were at their prettiest. Row above row, they went up the +mountainside, like a great glass stairs, each row reflecting the green +hills and the bamboo groves above. And from each terrace to the one +below, the water tumbled in pretty little cascades that sparkled in the +sunlight and filled the air with music. For travelers there were only +narrow paths between farms, and often only the ridge of the dykes +between field and field. As they made their way between the tiny fields, +walking along the narrow dykes, and listening to the splashing sound of +the water, Mackay understood what Dr. Dickson meant, when he remarked +that only a flying horse could be of use on such Formosan cross-country +journeys. + +Soon the pathway changed once more to the broader public highway. Here +there was much traffic, and many travelers carried in sedan-chairs +passed them. And many times by the roadside Mackay saw something that +reminded him forcibly of why he had come to Formosa--a heathen shrine. +The whole countryside seemed dotted with them. And as he watched the +worshipers coming and going, and heard the disdainful words from the +priests cast at the hated foreigners, he realized that he was face to +face with an awful opposing force. It was the great stone of heathenism +he had come to break, and the question was, would he be as successful as +he had been long ago in the Canadian pasture-field? + +The travelers ate their dinner by the roadside under the shade of some +fir trees that made Mackay feel at home. They were soon up and off +again, and, tired with their long tramp, they arrived at a town called +Tionglek, and decided to spend the night there. The place was about the +size of Tamsui, with between four and five thousand inhabitants, and +was quite as dirty and almost as noisy. They walked down the main street +with its uneven stone pavement, its open shops, its noisy bargains, and +above all its horrible smells. With the exception of an occasional visit +from an official, foreigners scarcely ever came to Tiong-lek, and on +every side were revilings and threatenings. One yellow-faced youngster +picked up a handful of mud and threw it at the hated foreigners; and +"Black-bearded barbarian," mingled with their shouts. Mackay's bright +eyes took in everything, and he realized more and more the difficulties +of the task before him. + +They stopped in front of a low one-story building made of sun-dried +bricks. This was the Tiong-lek hotel where they were to spend the +night. Like most Chinese houses it was composed of a number of buildings +arranged in the form of a square with a courtyard in the center. Dr. +Dickson asked for lodgings from the slant-eyed proprietor. He looked +askance at the foreigners, but concluded that their money was as good +as any one else's, and he led them through the deep doorway into the +courtyard. + +In the center of this yard stood an earthen range, with a fire in it. +Several travelers stood about it cooking their rice. It was evidently +the hotel dining-room; a diningroom that was open to all too, for +chickens clucked and cackled and pigs grunted about the range and made +themselves quite at home. The men about the gateway scowled and muttered +"Foreign devil," as the three strangers passed them. + +They crossed the courtyard and entered their room, or rather stumbled +into it, in semi-darkness. Mackay peered about him curiously. He +discovered three beds, made of planks and set on brick pillars for legs. +Each was covered with a dirty mat woven from grass and reeking with the +odor of opium smoke. + +A servant came in with something evidently intended for a lamp--a +burning pith wick set in a saucer of peanut oil. It gave out only a +faint glimmer of light, but enough to enable the young missionary to see +something else in the room,--some THINGS rather, that ran and skipped +and swarmed all over the damp earthen floor and the dirty walls. There +were thousands of these brisk little creatures, all leaping about +in pleasant anticipation of the good time they would have when the +barbarians went to bed. There was no window, and only the one door that +opened into the courtyard. An old pig, evidently more friendly to the +foreigners than her masters, came waddling toward them followed by her +squealing little brood, and flopping down into the mud in the doorway +lay there uttering grunts of content. + +The evil smells of the room, the stench from the pigs, and the still +more dreadful odors wafted from the queer food cooking on the range, +made the young traveler's unaccustomed senses revolt. He had a half +notion that the two older men were putting up a joke on him. + +"I suppose you thought it wise to give me a strong dose of all this at +the start?" he inquired humorously, holding his nose and glancing from +the pigs at the door to the crawlers on the wall. + +"A strong dose!" laughed Mr. Ritchie. "Not a bit of it, young man. Wait +till you've had some experience of the luxuries of Formosan inns. You'll +be calling this the Queen's Hotel, before you've been here long!" + +And so indeed it proved later, for George Mackay had yet much to learn +of the true character of Chinese inns. Needless to say he spent a +wakeful night, on his hard plank bed, and was up early in the morning. +The travelers ate their breakfast in a room where the ducks and hens +clattered about under the table and between their legs. Fortunately the +food was taken from their own stores, and in spite of the surroundings +was quite appetizing. + +They started off early, drawing in great breaths of the pure morning +air, relieved to be away from the odors of the "Queen's Hotel." Three +hundred feet above them, high against the deep blue of the morning sky, +stood Table Hill, and they started on a brisk climb up its side. The +sun had not risen, but already the farmers were out in their little +water-fields, or working in their tea plantations. The mountain with its +groves of bamboo lay reflected in the little mirrors of the rice-fields. +A steady climb brought them to the summit, and after a long descent on +the other side and a tramp through tea plantations they arrived in +the evening at a large city with a high wall around it, the city of +Tek-chham. That night in the city inn was so much worse than the one at +Tionglek that the Canadian was convinced his friends must have reserved +the "strong dose" for the second night. There were the same smells, the +same sorts of pigs and ducks and hens, the same breeds of lively nightly +companions, and each seemed to have gained a fresh force. + +It was a relief to be out in the fields again after the foul odors of +the night, and the travelers were off before dawn. The country looked +more familiar to Mackay this morning, for they passed through wheat and +barley fields. It seemed so strange to wander over a man's farm by +a footpath, but it was a Chinese custom to which he soon became +accustomed. + +The sun was blazing hot, and it was a great relief when they entered +the cool shade of a forest. It was a delightful place and George Mackay +reveled in its beauty. Ever since he had been able to run about his +own home farm in Ontario his eyes had always been wide open to observe +anything new. He had studied as much out of doors, all his life, as he +had done in college, and now he found this forest a perfect library of +new Things. Nearly every tree and flower was strange to his Canadian +eyes. Here and there, in sheltered valleys, grew the tree-fern, the most +beautiful object in the forest, towering away up sometimes to a height +of sixty feet, and spreading its stately fronds out to a width of +fifteen feet. There was a lovely big plant with purple stem and purple +leaves, and when Dr. Dickson told him it was the castor-oil plant, he +smiled at the remembrance of the trials that plant had caused him in +younger days. One elegant tree, straight as a pine, rose fifty feet in +height, with leaves away up at the top only. + +This was the betel-nut tree. + +"The nuts of that tree," said Mr. Ritchie, standing and pointing away +up to where the sunlight filtered through the far-off leaves, "are the +chewing tobacco of Formosa and all the islands about here. The Chinese +do not chew it, but the Malayans do. You will meet some of these natives +soon." + +On every side grew the rattan, half tree, half vine. It started off as +a tree and grew straight up often to twenty feet in height, and then +spread itself out over the tops of other trees and plants in vine-like +fashion; some of its branches measured almost five hundred feet in +length. + +The travelers paused to admire one high in the branches of the trees. + +"Many a Chinaman loses his head hunting that plant," remarked Mr. +Ritchie. "These islanders export a great deal of rattan, and the +head-hunters up there in the mountains watch for the Chinese when they +are working in the forest." + +Mackay listened eagerly to his friends' tales of the head-hunting +savages, living in the mountains. They were always on the lookout for +the farmers near their forest lairs. They watched for any unwary man who +went too near the woods, pounced upon him, and went off in triumph with +his head in a bag. + +The young traveler's eyes brightened, "I'll visit them some day!" he +cried, looking off toward the mountainside. Mr. Ritchie glanced quickly +at the flashing eyes and the quick, alert figure of the young man as +he strode along, and some hint came to him of the dauntless young heart +which beat beneath that coat of Canadian gray. + +Two days more over hill and dale, through rice and tea and +tobacco-fields, and then, in the middle of a hot afternoon, Mr. Ritchie +began to shiver and shake as though half frozen. Dr. Dickson understood, +and at the next stopping-place he ordered a sedan-chair and four coolies +to carry it. It was the old dreaded disease that hangs like a black +cloud over lovely Formosa, the malarial fever. Mr. Ritchie had been a +missionary only four years in the island, but already the scourge had +come upon him, and his system was weakened. For, once seized by malaria +in Formosa, one seldom makes his escape. They put the sick man into the +chair, now in a raging fever, and he was carried by the four coolies. + +They were nearing the end of their journey and were now among a people +not Chinese. They belonged to the original Malayan race of the island. +They had been conquered by the Chinese, who in the early days came over +from China under a pirate named Koxinga. As the Chinese name every one +but themselves "barbarians," they gave this name to all the natives of +the island. They had conquered all but the dreaded head-hunters, who, +free in their mountain fastnesses, took a terrible toll of heads +from their would-be conquerors, or even from their own half-civilized +brethren. + +The native Malayans who had been subdued by the Chinese were given +different names. Those who lived on the great level rice-plain +over which the missionaries were traveling, were called Pe-po-hoan, +"Barbarians of the plain." Mackay could see little difference between +them and the Chinese, except in the cast of their features, and their +long-shaped heads. They wore Chinese dress, even to the cue, worshiped +the Chinese gods, and spoke with a peculiar Malayan twang. + +The travelers were journeying rather wearily over a low muddy stretch +of ground, picking their way along the narrow paths between the +rice-fields, when they saw a group of men come hurrying down the path to +meet them. They kept calling out, but the words they used were not the +familiar "foreign devil" or "ugly barbarian." Instead the people were +shouting words of joyful welcome. + +Dr. Dickson hailed them with delight, and soon he and Mr. Ritchie's +sedan-chair were surrounded by a clamorous group of friends. + +They had journeyed so far south that they had arrived at the borders +of the English Presbyterian mission, and the people crowding about them +were native Christians. It was all so different from their treatment +by the heathen that Mackay's heart was warmed. When the great stone of +heathenism was broken, what love and kindness were revealed! + +The visitors were led in triumph to the village. There was a chapel +here, and they stayed nearly a week, preaching and teaching. + +The rest did Mr. Ritchie much good, and at the end of their visit he +was once more able to start off on foot. They moved on from village to +village and everywhere the Pe-po-hoan Christians received them with the +greatest hospitality. + +But at last the three friends found the time had come for them to part. +The two Englishmen had to go on through their fields to their south +Formosan home and the young Canadian must go back to fight the battle +alone in the north of the island. He had endeared himself to the two +older men, and when the farewells came they were filled with regret. + +They bade him a lingering good-by, with many blessings upon his young +head, and many prayers for success in the hard fight upon which he +was entering. They walked a short way with him, and stood watching +the straight, lithe young figure, SO full of courage and hope until it +disappeared down the valley. They knew only too well the dangers and +trials ahead of him, but they knew also that he was not going into the +fight alone. For the Captain was going with his young soldier. + +There was a suspicion of moisture in the eyes of the older missionaries +as they turned back to prepare for their own journey southward. + +"God bless the boy!" said Dr. Dickson fervently. "We'll hear of that +young fellow yet, Ritchie. He's on fire." + + + + +CHAPTER IV. BEGINNING THE SIEGE + +The news was soon noised about Tamsui that one of the three barbarians +who had so lately visited the town had returned to make the place his +home. This was most unwelcome tidings to the heathen, and the air was +filled with mutterings and threatenings, and every one was determined to +drive the foreign devil out if at all possible. So Mackay found +himself meeting every kind of opposition. He was too independent to ask +assistance from the British consul in the old Dutch fort on the bluff, +or of any other European settlers in Tamsui. He was bound to make +his own way. But it was not easy to do so in view of the forces which +opposed him. He had now been in Formosa about two months and had studied +the Chinese language every waking hour, but it was very difficult, and +he found his usually ready tongue wofully handicapped. + +His first concern was to get a dwelling-place, and he went from house to +house inquiring for some place to rent. Everywhere he went he was turned +away with rough abuse, and occasionally the dogs were set upon him. + +But at last he was successful. Up on the bank of the river, a little way +from the edge of the town, he found a place which the owner condescended +to rent. It was a miserable little hut, half house, half cellar, +built into the side of the hill facing the river. A military officer had +intended it for his horse-stable, and yet Mackay paid for this hovel the +sum of fifteen dollars a month. It had three rooms, one without a floor. +The road ran past the door, and a few feet beyond was the river. By +spending money rather liberally he managed to hire the coolie who had +accompanied him to south Formosa. With his servant's help Mackay had his +new establishment thoroughly cleaned and whitewashed, and then he moved +in his furniture. He laughed as he called it furniture, for it consisted +of but two packing boxes full of books and clothing. But more came +later. The British consul, Mr. Frater, lent him a chair and a bed. There +was one old Chinese, who kept a shop near by, and who seemed inclined to +be friendly to the queer barbarian with the black beard. He presented +him with an old pewter lamp, and the house was furnished complete. + +Mackay sat down at his one table, the first night after he was settled. +The damp air was hot and heavy, and swarms of tormenting mosquitoes +filled the room. Through the open door came the murmur of the river, and +from far down in the village the sounds of harsh, clamorous voices. He +was alone, many, many miles from home and friends. Around him on every +side were bitter enemies. + +One might have supposed he would be overcome at the thought of the +stupendous task before him, but whoever supposed that did not know +George Mackay. He lighted his pewter lamp, opened his diary, and these +are the words he wrote: + +"Here I am in this house, having been led all the way from the old +homestead in Zorra by Jesus, as direct as though my boxes were labeled, +`Tamsui, Formosa, China.' Oh, the glorious privilege to lay the +foundation of Christ's Church in unbroken heathenism! God help me to +do this with the open Bible! Again I swear allegiance to thee, O King +Jesus, my Captain. So help me God!" + +And now his first duty was to learn the Chinese language. He could +already speak a little, but it would be a long time, he knew, before he +could preach. And yet, how was he to learn? he asked himself. He was +a scholar without a teacher or school. But there was his servant, and +nothing daunted by the difficulties to be overcome, he set to work to +make him his teacher also. + +George Mackay always went at any task with all his might and main, and +he attacked the Chinese language in the same manner. He found it a hard +stone to break, however. "Of all earthly things I know of," he remarked +once, "it is the most intricate and difficult to master." + +His unwilling teacher was just about as hard to manage as his task, for +the coolie did not take kindly to giving lessons. He certainly had a +rather hard time. Day and night his master deluged him with questions. +He made him repeat phrases again and again until his pupil could say +them correctly. He asked him the name of everything inside the house and +out, until the easy-going Oriental was overcome with dismay. This wild +barbarian, with the fiery eyes and the black beard, was a terrible +creature who gave one no rest night nor day. Sometimes after Mackay had +spent hours with him, imitating sounds and repeating the names of +things over and over, his harassed teacher would back out of the room +stealthily, keeping an anxious eye on his master, and showing plainly he +had grave fears that the foreigner had gone quite mad. + +Mackay realized that the pace was too hard for his servant, and that the +poor fellow was in a fair way to lose what little wits he had, if not +left alone occasionally. So one day he wandered out along the riverbank, +in search of some one who would talk with him. He turned into a path +that led up the hill behind the town. He was in hopes he might meet a +farmer who would be friendly. + +When he reached the top of the bluff he found a grassy common stretching +back toward the rice-fields. Here and there over these downs strayed the +queer-looking water-buffaloes. Some of them were plunged deep in pools +of water, and lay there like pigs with only their noses out. + +He heard a merry laugh and shout from another part of the common, and +there sat a crowd of frolicsome Chinese boys, in large sun hats, and +short loose trousers. There were about a dozen of them, and they were +supposed to be herding the water-buffaloes to keep them out of the +unfenced fields. But, boylike, they were flying kites, and letting their +huge-horned charges herd themselves. + +Mackay walked over toward them. It was not so long since he had been a +boy himself, and these jolly lads appealed to him. But the moment one +caught sight of the stranger, he gave a shout of alarm. The rest jumped +up, and with yells of terror and cries of "Here's the foreign devil!" +"Run, or the foreign devil will get you!" away they went helter-skelter, +their big hats waving, their loose clothes flapping wildly. They all +disappeared like magic behind a big boulder, and the cause of their +terror had to walk away. + +But the next day, when his servant once more showed signs of mental +exhaustion, he strolled out again upon the downs. The boys were there +and saw him coming. Though they did not actually run away this time, +they retired to a safe distance, and stood ready to fly at any sign of +the barbarian's approach. They watched him wonderingly. They noticed his +strange white face, his black beard, his hair cut off quite short, his +amazing hat, and his ridiculous clothes. And when at last he walked +away, and all danger was over, they burst into shouts of laughter. + +The next day, as they scampered about the common, here again came +the absurd-looking stranger, walking slowly, as though careful not to +frighten them. The boys did not run away this time, and to their utter +astonishment he spoke to them. Mackay had practised carefully the words +he was to say to them, and the well-spoken Chinese astounded the lads +as much as if one of the monkeys that gamboled about the trees of their +forests should come down and say, "How do you do, boys?" + +"Why, he speaks our words!" they all cried at once. + +As they stood staring, Mackay took out his watch and held it up for them +to see. It glittered in the sun, and at the sight of it and the kind +smiling face above, they lost their fears and crowded around him. They +examined the watch in great wonder. They handled his clothes, exclaimed +over the buttons on his coat, and inquired what they were for. They felt +his hands and his fingers, and finally decided that, in spite of his +queer looks, he was after all a man. + +From that day the young missionary and the herd-boys were great friends. +Every day he joined them in the buffalo pasture, and would spend from +four to five hours with them. And as they were very willing to talk, +he not only learned their language rapidly, but also learned much about +their homes, their schools, their customs, and their religion. + +One day, after a lengthy lesson from his servant, the latter decided +that the barbarian was unbearable, and bundling up his clothes he +marched off, without so much as "by your leave." So Mackay fell back +entirely upon his little teachers on the common. With their assistance +in the daytime and his Chinese-English dictionary at night, he made +wonderful progress. + +He was left alone now, to get his own meals and keep the swarms of flies +and the damp mold out of his hut by the riverside. He soon learned to +eat rice and water-buffalo meat, but he missed the milk and butter and +cheese of his old Canadian home. For he discovered that cows were never +milked in Formosa. There was variety of food, however, as almost every +kind of vegetable that he had ever tasted and many new kinds that he +found delicious were for sale in the open-fronted shops in the village. +Then the fruits! They were fresh at all seasons--oranges the whole year, +bananas fresh from the fields--and such pineapples! He realized that he +had never really tasted pineapples before. + +Meanwhile, he was becoming acquainted. All the families of the herd-boys +learned to like him, and when others came to know him they treated him +with respect. He was a teacher, they learned, and in China a teacher is +always looked upon with something like reverence. And, besides, he had +a beard. This appendage was considered very honorable among Chinese, so +the black-bearded barbarian was respected because of this. + +But there was one class that treated him with the greatest scorn. These +were the Chinese scholars. They were the literati, and were like princes +in the land. They despised every one who was not a graduate of their +schools, and most of all they despised this barbarian who dared to set +himself up as a teacher. Mackay had now learned Chinese well enough +to preach, and his sermons aroused the indignation of these proud +graduates. + +Sometimes when one was passing the little hut by the river, he would +drop in, and glance around just to see what sort of place the barbarian +kept. He would pick up the Bible and other books, throw them on the +floor, and with words of contempt strut proudly out. + +Mackay endured this treatment patiently, but he set himself to study +their books, for he felt sure that the day was not far distant when he +must meet these conceited literati in argument. + +He went about a good deal now. The Tamsui people became accustomed to +him, and he was not troubled much. His bright eyes were always wide open +and he learned much of the lives of the people he had come to teach. +Among the poor he found a poverty of which he had never dreamed. They +could live upon what a so-called poor family in Canada would throw away. +Nothing was wasted in China. He often saw the meat and fruit tins he +threw away when they were emptied, reappearing in the market-place. He +learned that these poorer people suffered cruel wrongs at the hands +of their magistrates. He visited a yamen, or court-house, and saw the +mandarin "dispense justice," but his judgment was said to be always given +in favor of the one who paid him the highest bribe. He saw the widow +robbed, and the innocent suffering frightful tortures, and sometimes +he strode home to his little hut by the river, his blood tingling with +righteous indignation. And then he would pray with all his soul: + +"O God, give me power to teach these people of thy love through Jesus +Christ!" + +But of all the horrors of heathenism, and there were many, he found the +religion the most dreadful. He had read about it when on board ship, but +he found it was infinitely worse when written in men's lives than when +set down in print. He never realized what a blessing was the religion of +Jesus Christ to a nation until he lived among a people who did not know +Him. + +He found almost as much difficulty in learning the Chinese religion as +the Chinese language. After he had spent days trying to understand it, +it would seem to him like some horrible nightmare filled with wicked +devils and no less wicked gods and evil spirits and ugly idols. And to +make matters worse there was not one religion, but a bewildering mixture +of three. First of all there was the ancient Chinese religion, called +Confucianism. Confucius, a wise man of China, who lived ages before, had +laid down some rules of conduct, and had been worshiped ever since. +Very good rules they were as far as they went, and if the Chinese had +followed this wise man they would not have drifted so far from the +truth. But Confucianism meant ancestor-worship. In every home was a +little tablet with the names of the family's ancestors upon it, and +every one in the house worshiped the spirits of those departed. With +this was another religion called Taoism. This taught belief in wicked +demons who lurked about people ready to do them some ill. Then, +years and years before, some people from India had brought over their +religion, Buddhism, which had become a system of idol-worship. These +three religions were so mixed up that the people themselves were not +able to distinguish between them. The names of their idols would cover +pages, and an account of their religion would fill volumes. The more +Mackay learned of it, the more he yearned to tell the people of the one +God who was Lord and Father of them all. + +As soon as he had learned to write clearly, he bought a large sheet of +paper, and printed on it the ten commandments in Chinese characters. +Then he hung it on the outside of his door. People who passed read it +and made comments of various kinds. Several threw mud at it, and at +last a proud graduate, who came striding past his silk robes rustling +grandly, caught the paper and tore it down. Mackay promptly put up +another. It shared the fate of the first. Then he put up a third, and +the people let it alone. Even these heathen Chinese were beginning to +get an impression of the dauntless determination of the man with whom +they were to get much better acquainted. + +And all this time, while he was studying and working and arguing with +the heathen and preaching to them, the young missionary was working just +as hard at something else; something into which he was putting as much +energy and force as he did into learning the Chinese language. With +all his might and main, day and night, he was praying--praying for one +special object. He had been praying for this long before he saw Formosa. +He was pleading with God to give him, as his first convert, a young +man of education. And so he was always on the lookout for such, as he +preached and taught, and never once did he cease praying that he might +find him. + +One forenoon he was sitting at his books, near the open door, when a +visitor stopped before him. It was a fine-looking young man, well +dressed and with all the unmistakable signs of the scholar. He had none +of the graduate's proud insolence, however, for when Mackay arose, he +spoke in the most gentlemanly manner. At the missionary's invitation +he entered, and sat down, and the two chatted pleasantly. The visitor +seemed interested in the foreigner, and asked him many questions that +showed a bright, intelligent mind. When he arose to go, Mackay invited +him to come again, and he promised he would. He left his card, a strip +of pink paper about three inches by six; the name on it read Giam +Cheng Hoa. Mackay was very much interested in him, he was so bright, +so affable, and such pleasant company. He waited anxiously to see if he +would return. + +At the appointed hour the visitor was at the door, and the missionary +welcomed him warmly. The second visit was even more pleasant than the +first. And Mackay told his guest why he had come to Formosa, and of +Jesus Christ who was both God and man and who had come to the earth to +save mankind. + +The young man's bright eyes were fixed steadily upon the missionary as +he talked, and when he went away his face was very thoughtful. Mackay +sat thinking about him long after he had left. + +He had met many graduates, but none had impressed him as had this youth, +with his frank face and his kind, genial manner. There was something +too about the young fellow, he felt, that marked him as superior to his +companions. And then a sudden divine inspiration flashed into the lonely +young missionary's heart. THIS WAS HIS MAN! This was the man for whom he +had been praying. The stranger had as yet shown no sign of conversion, +but Mackay could not get away from that inspired thought. And that night +he could not sleep for joy. + +In a day or two the young man returned. With him was a noted graduate, +who asked many questions about the new religion. The next day he came +again with six graduates, who argued and discussed. + +When they were gone Mackay paced up and down the room and faced the +serious situation which he realized he was in. He saw plainly that the +educated men of the town were banded together to beat him in argument. +And with all his energy and desperate determination he set to work to be +ready for them. + +His first task was to gain a thorough knowledge of the Chinese +religions. He had already learned much about them, both from books on +shipboard and since he had come to the island. But now he spent long +hours of the night, poring over the books of Confucianism, Buddhism, +and Taoism, by the light of his smoky little pewter lamp. And before +the next visit of his enemies he knew almost more of their jumble of +religions than they did themselves. + +It was well he was prepared, for his opponents came down upon him in +full force. Every day a band of college graduates, always headed by Giam +Cheng Hoa, came up from the town to the missionary's little hut by +the river, and for hours they would sit arguing and talking. They were +always the most noted scholars the place could produce, but in spite of +all their cleverness the barbarian teacher silenced them every time. He +fairly took the wind out of their sails by showing he knew quite as +much about Chinese religions as they did. If they quoted Confucius to +contradict the Bible, he would quote Confucius to contradict them. +He confounded them by proving that they were not really followers of +Confucius, for they did not keep his sayings. And with unanswerable +arguments he went on to show that the religion taught by Jesus Christ +was the one and only religion to make man good and noble. + +Each day the group of visitors grew larger, and at last one morning, as +Mackay looked out of his door, he saw quite a crowd approaching. They +were led, as usual, by the friendly young scholar. By his side walked, +or rather, swaggered a man of whom the missionary had often heard. He +was a scholar of high degree and was famed all over Formosa for his +great learning. Behind him came about twenty men, and Mackay could see +by their dress and appearance that they were all literary graduates. +They were coming in great force this time, to crush the barbarian +with their combined knowledge. He met them at the door with his usual +politeness and hospitality. He was always courteous to these proud +literati, but he always treated them as equals, and showed none of the +deference they felt he owed them. The crowd seated itself on improvised +benches and the argument opened. + +This time Mackay led the attack. He carried the war right into the +enemy's camp. Instead of letting them put questions to him, he asked +them question after question concerning Confucianism, Buddhism, and +Taoism. They were questions that sometimes they could not answer, and +to their chagrin they had to hear "the barbarian" answer for them. There +were other questions, still more humiliating, which, when they answered, +only served to show their religion as false and degrading. Their +spokesman, the great learned man, became at last so entangled that there +was nothing for him but flight. He arose and stalked angrily away, and +in a little while they all left. Mackay looked wistfully at young Giam +as he went out, wondering what effect these words had upon him. + +He was not left long in doubt. Not half an hour after a shadow fell +across the open Bible the missionary was studying. He glanced up. There +he stood! His bright face was very serious. He looked gravely at the +other young man, and his eyes shone as he spoke. + +"I brought all those graduates and teachers here," he confessed, "to +silence you or be silenced. And now I am convinced that the doctrines +you teach are true. I am determined to become a Christian, even though I +suffer death for it." + +Mackay rose from his seat, his face alight with an overwhelming joy. The +man he had prayed for! He took the young fellow's hand--speechless. And +together the only missionary of north Formosa and his first convert fell +upon their knees before the true God and poured out their hearts in joy +and thanksgiving. + + + + +CHAPTER V. SOLDIERS TWO + +And now a new day dawned for the lonely young missionary. He had +not a convert but a helper and a delightful companion. His new friend +was of a bright, joyous nature, the sort that everybody loves. Giam was +his surname, but almost every one called him by his given name, Hoa, and +those who knew him best called him A Hoa. Mackay used this more familiar +boyish name, for Giam was the younger by a few years. + +To A Hoa his new friend was always Pastor Mackay, or as the Chinese put +it, Mackay Pastor, Kai Bok-su was the real Chinese of it, and Kai Bok-su +soon became a name known all over the island of Formosa. + +A Hoa needed all his kind new friend's help in the first days after his +conversion. For family, relatives, and friends turned upon him with the +bitterest hatred for taking up the barbarian's religion. So, driven from +his friends, he came to live in the little hut by the river with Mackay. +While at home these two read, sang, and studied together all the day +long. It would have been hard for an observer to guess who was teacher +and who pupil. For at one time A Hoa was receiving Bible instruction +and the next time Mackay was being drilled in the Chinese of the +educated classes. Each teacher was as eager to instruct as each pupil +was eager to learn. + +The Bible was, of course, the chief textbook, but they studied other +things, astronomy, geology, history, and similar subjects. One day +the Canadian took out a map of the world, and the Chinese gazed with +amazement at the sight of the many large countries outside China. A +Hoa had been private secretary to a mandarin, and had traveled much in +China, and once spent six months in Peking. His idea had been that China +was everything, that all countries outside it were but insignificant +barbarian places. His geography lessons were like revelations. + +His progress was simply astonishing, as was also Mackay's. The two +seemed possessed with the spirit of hard work. But a superstitious old +man who lived near believed they were possessed with a demon. He often +listened to the two singing, drilling, and repeating words as they +marched up and down, either in the house or in front of it, and he +became alarmed. He was a kindly old fellow, and, though a heathen, felt +well disposed toward the missionary and A Hoa. So one day, very much +afraid, he slipped over to the little house with two small cups of +strong tea. He came to the door and proffered them with a polite bow. He +hoped they might prove soothing to the disturbed nerves of the patients, +he said. He suggested, also, that a visit to the nearest temple might +help them. + +The two affected ones received his advice politely, but the humor of it +struck them both, and when their visitor was gone they laughed so hard +the tea nearly choked them. + +The missionary was soon able to speak so fluently that he preached +almost every day, either in the little house by the river, or on the +street in some open square. There were other things he did, too. On +every side he saw great suffering from disease. The chief malady was the +terrible malaria, and the native doctors with their ridiculous remedies +only made the poor sufferers worse. Mackay had studied medicine for a +short time while in college, and now found his knowledge very useful. +He gave some simple remedies to several victims of malaria which proved +effective. The news of the cures spread far and wide. The barbarian was +kind, he had a good heart, the people declared. Many more came to +him for medicine, and day by day the circle of his friends grew. And +wherever he went, curing disease, teaching, or preaching, A Hoa went +with him, and shared with him the taunts of their heathen enemies. + +But the gospel was gradually making its way. Not long after A Hoa's +conversion a second man confessed Christ. He had previously disturbed +the meetings by throwing stones into the doorway whenever he passed. But +his sister was cured of malaria by the missionary's medicine, and soon +both sister and mother became Christians, and finally the stone-thrower +himself. And so, gradually, the lines of the enemy were falling back, +and at every sign of retreat the little army of two advanced. A little +army? No! For was there not the whole host of heaven moving with them? +And Mackay was learning that his boyish dreams of glory were truly to +be fulfilled. He had wanted always to be a soldier like his grandfather, +and fight a great Waterloo, and here he was right in the midst of the +battle with the victory and the glory sure. + +The two missionaries often went on short trips here and there into +the country around Tamsui, and Mackay determined that when the intense +summer heat had lessened they would make a long tour to some of +the large cities. The heat of August was almost overpowering to the +Canadian. Flies and mosquitoes and insect pests of all kinds made his +life miserable, too, and prevented his studying as hard as he wished. + +One oppressive day he and A Hoa returned from a preaching tour in +the country to find their home in a state of siege. Right across the +threshold lay a monster serpent, eight feet in length. A Hoa shouted +a warning, and seized a long pole, and the two managed to kill it. +But their troubles were not yet over. The next morning, Mackay stepped +outside the door and sprang back just in time to escape another, the +mate of the one killed. This one was even larger than the first, and was +very fierce. But they finished it with sticks and stones. + +When September came the days grew clearer, and the many pests of summer +were not so numerous. The mosquitoes and flies that had been such +torments disappeared, and there was some relief from the damp oppressive +heat. But he had only begun to enjoy the refreshing breaths of cool +air, and had remarked to A Hoa that the days reminded him of Canadian +summers, when the weather gave him to understand that every Formosan +season has its drawbacks. September brought tropical storms and typhoons +that were terrible, and he saw from his little house on the hillside big +trees torn up by the root, buildings swept away like chaff, and out in +the harbor great ships lifted from their anchorage and whirled away to +destruction. And then he was sometimes thankful that his little hut was +built into the hillside, solid and secure. + +But the fierce storms cleared away the heavy dampness that had made +the heat of the summer so unbearable, and October and November brought +delightful days. The weather was still warm of course, but the nights +were cool and pleasant. + +So early one October morning, Mackay and A Hoa started off on a tour to +the cities. + +"We shall go to Kelung first," said the missionary. Kelung was a seaport +city on the northern coast, straight east across the island from Tamsui. +A coolie to carry food and clothing was hired, and early in the morning, +while the stars were still shining, they passed through the sleeping +town and out on the little paths between the rice-fields. Though it was +yet scarcely daylight, the farmers were already in their fields. It was +harvest-time--the second harvest of the year--and the little rice-fields +were no longer like mirrors, but were filled with high rustling grain +ready for the sickle. The water had been drained off and the reaper +and thrasher were going through the fields before dawn. There was no +machinery like that used at home. The reaper was a short sickle, the +thrashing-machine a kind of portable tub, and Mackay looked at them with +some amusement, and described to A Hoa how they took off the great wheat +crops in western Canada. + +The two were in high spirits, ready for any sort of adventure and they +met some. Toward evening they reached a place called Sek-khau, and went +to the little brick inn to get a sleeping-place. The landlord came to +the door and was about to bid A Hoa enter, when the light fell upon +Mackay's face. With a shout, "Black-bearded barbarian!" he slammed the +door in their faces. They turned away, but already a crowd had begun +to gather. "The black-bearded barbarian is here! The foreign devil +from Tamsui has come!" was the cry. The mob followed the two down +the streets, shouting curses. Some one threw a broken piece of brick, +another a stone. Mackay turned and faced them, and for a few moments +they seemed cowed. But the crowd was increasing, and he deemed it wise +to move on. So the two marched out of the town followed by stones and +curses. And, as they went, Mackay reminded A Hoa of what they had been +reading the night before. + +"Yes," said A Hoa brightly. "The Lord was driven out of his own town in +Galilee." + +"Yes, and Paul--you remember how he was stoned. Our Master +counts us worthy to suffer for him." But where to go was the question. +Before they could decide, night came down upon them, and it came in that +sudden tropical way to which Mackay, all his life accustomed to the long +mellow twilights of his northern home, could never grow accustomed. +They each took a torch out of the carrier's bag, lighted it, and marched +bravely on. The path led along the Kelung river, through tall grass. +They were not sure where it led to, but thought it wise to follow the +river; they would surely come to Kelung some time. Mackay was ahead, A +Hoa right at his heels, and behind them the basketbearer. At a sudden +turn in the path A Hoa gave a shout of warning, and the next instant, +a band of robbers leaped from the long reeds and grass, and brandished +their spears in the travelers' faces. The torchlight shone on their +fierce evil eyes and their long knives, making a horrible picture. The +young Canadian Scot did not flinch for a second. He looked the wild +leader straight in the face. + +"We have no money, so you cannot rob us," he said steadily, "and you +must let us pass at once. I am a teacher and--" + +"A TEACHER!" he was interrupted by a dismayed exclamation from several +of the wild band. "A teacher!" As if with one accord they turned and +fled into the darkness. For even a highwayman in China respects a man +of learning. The travelers went on again, with something of relief and +something of the exultation that youth feels in having faced danger. But +a second trouble was upon them. One of those terrible storms that still +raged occasionally had been brewing all evening, and now it opened its +artillery. Great howling gusts came down from the mountain, carrying +sheets of driving rain. Their torches went out like matches, and they +were left to stagger along in the black darkness. What were they to do? +They could not go back. They could not stay there. They scarcely dared +go on. For they did not know the way, and any moment a fresh blast of +wind or a misstep might hurl them into the river. But they decided that +they must go on, and on they went, stumbling, slipping, sprawling, and +falling outright. Now there would be an exclamation from Mackay as he +sank to the knees in the mud of a rice-field, now a groan from A Hoa as +he fell over a boulder and bruised and scratched himself, and oftenest +a yell from the poor coolie, as he slipped, baskets and all, into some +rocky crevice, and was sure he was tumbling into the river; but they +staggered on, Mackay secure in his faith in God. His Father knew and +his Father would keep him safely. And behind him came brave young A +Hoa, buoyed up by his new growing faith, and learning the lesson that +sometimes the Captain asks his soldier to march into hard encounters, +but that the soldier must never flinch. + +The "everlasting arms" were around them, for by midnight they reached +Kelung. They were drenched, breathless, and worn out, and they spent the +night in a damp hovel, glad of any shelter from the wind and rain. + +But the next morning, young soldier A Hoa had a fiercer battle to fight +than any with robbers or storms. As soon as the city was astir, Mackay +and he went out to find a good place to preach. They passed down the +main thoroughfare, and everywhere they attracted attention. Cries of +"Ugly barbarian!" and oftenest "Black-bearded barbarian" were heard +on all sides. A Hoa was known in Kelung and contempt and ridicule was +heaped upon him by his old college acquaintances. He was consorting +with the barbarian! He was a friend of this foreigner! They poured more +insults upon him than they did upon the barbarian himself. Some took +the stranger as a joke, and laughed and made funny remarks upon his +appearance. Here and there an old woman, peeping through the doorway, +would utter a loud cackling laugh, and pointing a wizened finger at the +missionary would cry: "Eh, eh, look at him! Tee hee! He's got a wash +basin on for a hat!" A Hoa was distressed at these remarks, but Mackay +was highly amused. + +"We're drawing a crowd, anyway," he remarked cheerfully, "and that's +what we want." + +Soon they came to an open square in front of a heathen temple. The +building had several large stone steps leading up to the door. Mackay +mounted them and stood facing the buzzing crowd, with A Hoa at his side. +They started a hymn. + +All people that on earth do dwell Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice. + +The open square in front of them began to fill rapidly. The people +jostled each other in their endeavors to get a view of the barbarian. +Every one was curious, but every one was angry and indignant, so +sometimes the sound of the singing was lost in the shouts of derision. + +When the hymn was finished, Mackay had a sudden inspiration. "They +will surely listen to one of their own people," he said to himself, and +turned to A Hoa. + +"Speak to them," he said. "Tell them about the true God." + +That was a hard moment for the young convert. He had been a Christian +only a few months and had never yet spoken in public for Christ. He +looked desperately over the sea of mocking faces beneath him. He opened +his mouth, as though to speak, and hesitated. Just then came a rough +and bitter taunt from one of his old companions. It was too much. A Hoa +turned away and hung his head. + +The young missionary said nothing. But he did the very wisest thing +he could have done. He had some time before taught A Hoa a grand old +Scottish paraphrase, and they had often sung it together: + +I'm not ashamed to own my Lord Or to defend his cause, Maintain the +glory of his cross And honor all his laws. + +Mackay's voice, loud and clear, burst into this fine old hymn. A Hoa +raised his head. He joined in the hymn and sang it to the end. It put +mettle into him. It was the battle-song that brought back the young +recruit's courage. Almost before the last note sounded he began to +speak. His voice rang out bold and unafraid over the crowd of angry +heathen. + +"I am a Christian!" he said distinctly. "I worship the true God. I +cannot worship idols," with a gesture toward the temple door, "that rats +can destroy. I am not afraid. I love Jesus. He is my Savior and Friend." + +No, A Hoa was not "ashamed" any more. His testing time had come, and he +had not failed after all. And his brave, true words sent a thrill of joy +through the more seasoned soldier at his side. + +That was not the only difficult situation he met on that journey. +The two soldiers of the cross had many trials, but the thrill of that +victory before the Kelung temple never left them. + +When they returned to Tamsui they held daily services in their house, +and A Hoa often spoke to the people who gathered there. + +One Sunday they noticed an old woman present, who had come down the +river in a boat. Women as a rule did not come out to the meetings, but +this old lady continued to come every Sunday. She showed great interest +in the missionary's words, and, at the close of one meeting, he spoke to +her. She told him she was a poor widow, that her name was Thah-so, and +that she had come down the river from Go-ko-khi to hear him preach. +Then she added, "I have passed through many trials in this world, and my +idols never gave me any comfort." Then her eyes shone, "But I like your +teaching very much," she went on. "I believe the God you tell about will +give me peace.. I will come again, and bring others." + +Next Sunday she was there with several other women. And after that +she came every Sunday, bringing more each time, until at last a whole +boat-load would come down to the service. + +These people were so interested that they asked the missionary if +he would not visit them. So one day he and A Hoa boarded one of the +queer-looking flat-bottomed river-boats and were pulled up the rapids +to Go ko-khi. Every village in Formosa had its headman, who is virtually +the ruler of the place. When the boat landed, many of the villagers were +at the shore to meet their visitors and took them at once to their +mayor's house, the best building in the village. Tan Paugh, a fine, big, +powerfully-built man, received them cordially. He frankly declared +that he was tired and sick of idols and wanted to hear more of this new +religion. An empty granary was obtained for both church and home, and +the missionary and his assistant took up their quarters there, and for +several months they remained, preaching and teaching the Bible either in +Go-ho-khi, or in the lovely surrounding valleys. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. THE GREAT KAI BOK-SU + +The missionary was now becoming a familiar figure both in Tamsui and in +the surrounding country. By many he was loved, by all he was respected, +but by a large number he was bitterly hated. The scholars continued +his worst enemies. They could never forgive him for beating them so +completely in argument, in the days when A Hoa was striving for the +light, and their hatred increased as they saw other scholars becoming +Christians under his teaching. There was something about him, however, +that compelled their respect and even their admiration. Wherever they +met him--on the street, by their temples, or on the country roads--he +bore himself in such a way as to make them confess that he was their +superior both in ability and knowledge. + +These Chinese literati had a custom which Mackay found very interesting. +One proud scholar marching down the street and scarcely noticing the +obsequious bows of his inferiors, would meet another equally proud +scholar. Each would salute the other in an exceedingly grand manner, and +then one would spin off a quotation from the writings of Confucius or +some other Chinese sage and say, "Now tell me where that is found." +And scholar number two had to ransack his brains to remember where the +saying was found, or else confess himself beaten. Mackay thought it +might be a good habit for the graduates of his own alma mater across the +wide sea to adopt. He wondered what some of his old college chums would +think, if, when he got back to Canada, he should buttonhole one on the +street some day, recite a quotation from Shakespeare or Macaulay, and +demand from his friend where it could be found. He had a suspicion that +the old friend would be afraid that the Oriental sun had touched George +Mackay's brain. + +Nevertheless he thought the custom one he could turn to good account, +and before long he was trying it himself. He had such a wonderful memory +that he never forgot anything he had once read. So the scholars of +north Formosa soon discovered, again to their humiliation, that this Kai +Bok-su of Tamsui could beat them at their own game. They did not care +how much he might profess to know of writers and lands beyond China. +Such were only barbarians anyway. But when, right before a crowd, +he would display a surer knowledge of the Chinese classics than they +themselves, they began not only to respect but to fear him. It was +no use trying to humiliate him with a quotation. With his bright eyes +flashing, he would tell, without a moment's hesitation, where it +was found and come back at the questioner swiftly with another, most +probably one long forgotten, and reel it off as though he had studied +Chinese all his life. + +He was a wonderful man certainly, they all agreed, and one whom it was +not safe to oppose. The common people liked him better every day. He was +so tactful, so kind, and always so careful not to arouse the +prejudice of the heathen. He was extremely wise in dealing with their +superstitions. No matter how absurd or childish They might be, he never +ridiculed them, but only strove to show the people how much happier they +might be if they believed in God as their Father and in Jesus Christ +as their Savior. He never made light of anything sacred to the Chinese +mind, but always tried to take whatever germ of good he could find +in their religion, and lead on from it to the greater good found in +Christianity. He discovered that the ancestral worship made the younger +people kind and respectful to older folk, and he saw that Chinese +children reverenced their parents and elders in a way that he felt many +of his young friends across the sea would do well to copy. + +One day when he and A Hoa were out on a preaching tour, the wise Kai +Bok-su made use of this respect for parents in quieting a mob. He and +his comrade were standing side by side on the steps of a heathen temple +as they had done at Kelung. The angry crowd was scowling and muttering, +ready to throw stones as soon as the preacher uttered a word. Mackay +knew this, and when they had sung a hymn and the people waited, ready +for a riot, his voice rang out clear and steady, repeating the fifth +commandment "Honor thy father and thy mother: that thy days may be long +upon the land which the Lord thy God giveth thee." A silence fell over +the muttering crowd, and an old heathen whose cue was white and whose +aged hands trembled on the top of his staff, nodded his head and said, +"That is heavenly doctrine." The people were surprised and disarmed. If +the black-bearded barbarian taught such truths as this, he surely was +not so very wicked after all. And so they listened attentively as he +went on to show that they had all one great Father, even God. + +He sometimes found it rather a task to treat with respect that which the +Chinese held sacred. Especially was this so when he discovered to his +amusement and to some carefully concealed disgust, that in the Chinese +family the pig was looked upon with affection, and as a young naval +officer, who visited Mackay remarked, "was treated like a gentleman." + +Every Chinese house of any size was made up of three buildings joined +together so as to make three sides of an enclosure. This space was +called a court, and a door led from it to another next the street. In +this outer yard pigs and fowl were always to be found. Whenever the +missionary dropped in at a home, mother pig and all the little pigs +often followed him inside the house, quite like members of the family. +Every one was always glad to see Kai Bok-su, pigs and all, and as soon +as he appeared the order was given--"Infuse tea." And when the little +handleless cups of clear brown liquid were passed around and they all +drank and chatted, Mrs. Pig and her children strolled about as welcome +as the guest. + +The Chinese would allow no one to hurt their pigs, either. One day as +Mackay sat in his rooms facing the river, battling with some new +Chinese characters, he heard a great hubbub coming up the street. The +threatening mobs that used to surround his house had long ago ceased to +trouble him. He arose in some surprise and went to the door to see what +was the matter. A very unusual sight for Tamsui met his gaze. Coming +up the street at a wild run were some half-dozen English sailors, their +loose blue blouses and trousers flapping madly. They were evidently from +a ship which Mackay had seen lying in the harbor that morning. + +"Give us a gun!" roared the foremost as soon as he saw the missionary. + +Mackay did not possess a gun, and would not have given the enraged +bluejacket one had he owned a dozen. But the Chinese mob, roaring with +fury, were coming up the street after the men and he swiftly pointed out +a narrow alley that led down to the river. "Run down there!" he shouted +to the sailors. "You can get to your boats before they find you." + +They were gone in an instant, and the next moment the crowd of +pursuers were storming about the door demanding whither the enemy had +disappeared. + +"What is all this disturbance about?" demanded Kai Bok-su calmly, glad +of an opportunity to gain time for the fleeing sailors. + +The aggrieved Chinese gathered about him, each telling the story as +loud as his voice would permit. Those barbarians of the sea had come +swaggering along the streets waving their big sticks. And they had +dared--yes actually DARED--to hit the pet pigs belonging to every house +as they passed. The poor pigs who lay sunning themselves at the door! + +This was indeed a serious offense. Mackay could picture the rollicking +sailor-lads gaily whacking the lazy porkers with their canes as they +passed, happily unconscious of the trouble they were raising. But there +was no amusement in Kai Bok-su's grave face. He spoke kindly, and +soothingly, and promised that if the offenders misbehaved again he would +complain to the authorities. That made it all right. Heathen though they +were, they knew Kai Bok-su's promise would not be broken, and away they +went quite satisfied. + +One day he learned, quite by accident, a new and very useful way of +helping his people. He and A Hoa and several other young men who had +become Christians, went on a missionary tour to Tek-chham, a large city +which he had visited once before. + +On the day they left the place, Kai Boksu's preaching had drawn such +crowds that the authorities of the city became afraid of him. And +when the little party left, a dozen soldiers were sent to follow the +dangerous barbarian and his students and see that they did not bewitch +the people on the road. + +The soldiers tramped along after the missionary party, and with his +usual ability to make use of any situation, Mackay stepped back and +chatted with his spies. He found one poor fellow in agony with the +toothache. This malady was very common in north Formosa, partly owing +to the habit of chewing the betel-nut. He examined the aching tooth and +found it badly decayed. "There is a worm in it," the soldier said, +for the Formosan doctors had taught the people this was the cause of +toothache. + +Mackay had no forceps, but he knew how to pull a tooth, and he was not +the sort to be daunted by the lack of tools. He got a piece of hard +wood, whittled it into shape and with it pried out the tooth. The +relief from pain was so great that the soldier almost wept for joy and +overwhelmed the tooth-puller with gratitude. And for the remainder of +the journey the guards sent to spy on the missionary's doings were his +warmest friends. + +After this, dentistry became a part of this many-sided missionary's +work. He went to a native blacksmith and had a pair of forceps hammered +out of iron. It was a rather clumsy instrument, but it proved of great +value, and later he sent for a complete set of the best instruments made +in New York. + +So with forceps in one hand and the Bible in the other, Mackay found +himself doubly equipped. Every second person seemed to be suffering from +toothache, and when the pain was relieved by the missionary, the patient +was in a state of mind to receive his teaching kindly. The cruel methods +by which the native doctors extracted teeth often caused more suffering +than the toothache, and sometimes even resulted in death through +blood-poisoning. + +A Hoa and some of the other young converts learned from their teacher +how to pull a tooth, and they, too, became experts in the art. + +Whenever they visited a town or city after this, they had a program +which they always followed. First they would place themselves in front +of an idol temple or in an open square. Here they would sing a hymn +which always attracted a crowd. Next, any one who wanted a tooth pulled +was invited to come forward. Many accepted the invitation gladly and +sometimes a long line of twenty or thirty would be waiting, each his +turn. The Chinese had considerable nerve, the Canadian discovered, and +stood the pain bravely. They literally "stood" it, too, for there was +no dentist's chair and every man stood up for his operation, very much +pleased and very grateful when it was over. Then there were quinine and +other simple remedies for malaria handed round, for in a Formosan crowd +there were often many shaking in the grip of this terrible disease. +And now, having opened the people's hearts by his kindness, Kai Bok-su +brought forth his cure for souls. He would mount the steps of the temple +or stand on a box or stone, and tell the wonderful old story of the man +Jesus who was also God, and who said to all sick and weary and troubled +ones, "Come unto me,... and I will give you rest." And often, when he +had finished, the disease of sin in many a heart was cured by the remedy +of the gospel. + +And so the autumn passed away happily and busily, and Mackay entered his +first Formosan winter. And such a winter! The young man who had felt the +clear, bright cold of a Canadian January needed all his fine courage to +bear up under its dreariness. It started about Christmas time. Just when +his own people far away in Canada were gathering about the blazing fire +or jingling over the crisp snow in sleighs and cutters, the great winter +rains commenced. Christmas day--his first Christmas in a land that did +not know its beautiful meaning--was one long dreary downpour. It rained +steadily all Christmas week. It poured on Newyear's day and for a week +after. It came down in torrents all January. February set in and still +it rained and rained, with only a short interval each afternoon. Day and +night, week in, week out, it poured, until Mackay forgot what sunlight +looked like, his house grew damp, his clothes moldy. A stream broke +out up in the hill behind and one morning he awoke to find a cascade +tumbling into his kitchen, and rushing across the floor out into the +river beyond. And still it poured and the wind blew and everything was +damp and cold and dreary. + +He caught an occasional glimpse of snow, only a very far-off view, for +it lay away up on the top of a mountain, but it made his heart long for +just one breath of good dry Canadian air, just one whiff of the keen, +cutting frost. + +But Kai Bok-su was not the sort to spend these dismal days repining. +Indeed he had no time, even had he been so inclined. His work filled +up every minute of every rainy day and hours of the drenched night. If +there was no sunshine outside there was plenty in his brave heart, and A +Hoa's whole nature radiated brightness. + +And there were many reasons for being happy after all. On the second +Sabbath of February, 1873, just one year after his arrival in Tamsui, +the missionary announced, at the close of one of his Sabbath services, +that he would receive a number into the Christian church. There was +instantly a commotion among the heathen who were in the house, and yells +and jeers from those crowding about the door outside. + +"We'll stop him," they shouted. "Let us beat the converts," was another +cry. + +But Mackay went quietly on with the beautiful ceremony in spite of the +disturbance. Five young men, with A Hoa at their head, came and were +baptized into the name of the Father, the Son, and the Holy Spirit. + + +When the next Sabbath came these five with their missionary sat down for +the first time to partake of the Lord's Supper. It was a very impressive +ceremony. One young fellow broke down, declaring he was not worthy. +Mackay took him alone into his little room and they prayed together, and +the young man came out to the Lord's Supper comforted, knowing that all +might be worthy in Jesus Christ. + +Spring came at last, bright and clear, and Mackay announced to A Hoa +that they must go up the river and visit their friends at Goko-khi. The +two did not go alone this time. Three other young men who wanted to be +missionaries were now spending their days with their teacher, learning +with A Hoa how to preach the gospel. So it was quite a little band +of disciples that walked along the river bank up to Go-ko-khi. Mackay +preached at all the villages along the route, and visited the homes of +Christians. + +One day, as they passed a yamen or Chinese court-house where a mandarin +was trying some cases, they stepped in to see what was going on. At +one end of the room sat the mandarin who was judge. He was dressed in +magnificent silks and looked down very haughtily upon the lesser people +and the retinue of servants who were gathered about him. On either side +of the room stood a row of constables and near them the executioners. +The rest of the room was filled with friends of the people on trial and +by the rabble from the street. The missionaries mixed with the former +and stood watching proceedings. There were no lawyers, no jury. The +mandarin's decision was law. + +The first case was one of theft. Whether the man had really committed +the crime or not was a question freely discussed among the onlookers +around Mackay. But there seemed no doubt as to his punishment being +swift and heavy. "He has not paid the mandarin," a friend explained to +the missionary. "He will be punished." + +"The mandarin eats cash," remarked another with a shrug. It was a saying +to which Mackay had become accustomed. For it was one of the shameless +proverbs of poor, oppressed Formosa. + +The case was soon finished. Nothing was definitely proven against the +man. But the mandarin pronounced the sentence of death. The victim +was hurried out, shrieking his innocence, and praying for mercy. Case +followed case, each one becoming more revolting than the last to the +eyes of the young man accustomed to British justice. Imprisonment and +torture were meted out to prisoners, and even witnesses were laid hold +of and beaten on the face by the executioners if their tale did not suit +the mandarin. Men who were plainly guilty but who had given their judge +a liberal bribe were let off, while innocent men were made to pay heavy +fines or were thrown into prison. The young missionary went out and +on his way sickened by the sights he had witnessed. And as he went, +he raised his eyes to heaven and prayed fervently that he might be a +faithful preacher of the gospel, and that one day Formosa would be a +Christian land and injustice and oppression be done away. + + +The next scene was a happier one. There was an earnest little band of +Christians in Go-ko-khi, and two of the young people were about to be +married. It was the first Christian marriage in the place and Kai Bok-su +was called upon to officiate. There was a great deal of opposition +raised among the heathen, but after seeing the ceremony, they all voted +a Christian wedding everything that was beautiful and good. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. BESIEGING HEAD-HUNTERS + +When they returned from their trip, Mackay and A Hoa with the assistance +of some of their Christian friends set about looking for a new house in +a more wholesome district. It was much easier for the missionary to rent +a place now, and he managed to secure a comfortable home upon the bluff +above the town. It was a dryer situation and much more healthful. Here +one room was used as a study and every morning when not away on a tour a +party of young men gathered in it for lessons. Sometimes, what with +traveling, preaching, training his students, visiting the sick, and +pulling teeth, Mackay had scarcely time to eat, and very little to +sleep. But always as he came and went on his travels, his eyes would +wander to the mountains where the savages lived, and with all his heart +he would wish that he might visit them also. + +His Chinese friends held up their hands in dismay when he broached the +subject. To the mountains where the Chhi-hoan lived! Did Kai Bok-su not +know that every man of them was a practised head-hunter, and that behind +every rock and tree and in the darkness of the forests they lay in wait +for any one who went beyond the settled districts? Yes, Kai Bok-su knew +all that, but he could not quite explain that it was just that which +made the thought of a visit to them seem so alluring, just that which +made him so anxious to tell them of Jesus Christ, who wished all men to +live as brothers. A Hoa and a few others who had caught the spirit of +the true soldier of the cross understood. For they had learned that one +who follows Jesus must be ready to dare anything, death included, to +carry the news of his salvation to the dark corners of the world. + +But the days were so filled with preaching, teaching, and touring, +that for some time Mackay had no opportunity for a trip into the +head-hunters' territory. And then one day, quite unexpectedly, his +chance came. There sailed into Tamsui harbor, one hot afternoon, a +British man-of-war, named The Dwarf. Captain Bax from this vessel +visited Tamsui, and expressed a desire to see something of the life of +the savages in the mountains. This was Mackay's opportunity, and in +spite of protests from his friends he offered to accompany the captain. +So together they started off, the sailor-soldier of England and the +soldier of the cross, each with the same place in view but each with a +very different object. + +It took three days journey from Tamsui across rice-fields and up +hillsides to reach even the foot of the mountains. Here there lived a +village of natives, closely related to the savages. But they were not +given to head-hunting and were quite friendly with the people about +them. Mackay had met some of these people on a former trip inland, and +now he and Captain Bax hired their chief and a party of his men to guide +them up into savage territory. + +The travelers slept that night in the village, and before dawn were up +and ready to start on their dangerous undertaking. Before them in the +gray dawn rose hill upon hill, each loftier than the last, till they +melted into the mountains, the territory of the dreaded head-hunters. +They started off on a steady tramp, up hills, down valleys, and across +streams, until at last they came to the foot of the first mountain. + +Before them rose its sheer side, towering thirty-five hundred feet above +their heads. It was literally covered with rank growth of all kinds, +through which it was impossible to move. So a plan of march had to be +decided upon. In front went a line of men with long sharp knives. With +these they cut away the creepers and tangled scrub or undergrowth. Next +came the coolies with the baggage, and last the two travelers. It was +slow work, and sometimes the climb was so steep they held their breath, +as they crept over a sheer ledge and saw the depth below to which they +might easily be hurled. The chief of the guides himself collapsed in one +terrible climb, and his men tied rattan ropes about him and hauled him +up over the steepest places. + +During this wearisome ascent the most untiring one was the missionary; +and the sailor often looked at him in amazement. His lithe, wiry frame +never seemed to grow weary. He was often in the advance line, cutting +his way through the tangle, and here on that first afternoon he met with +an unpleasant adventure. + +The natives had warned the two strangers to be on the lookout for +poisonous snakes, and Mackay's year in Formosa had taught him to be +wary. But he had forgotten all danger in the toilsome climb. He was soon +reminded of it. They were passing up a slope covered with long dense +grass when a rustling at his side made the young missionary pause. The +next moment a huge cobra sprang out from a clump of grass and struck at +him. Mackay sprang aside just in time to escape its deadly fangs. The +guides rushed up with their spears only to see its horrible scaly length +disappear in the long grass. + +That was not the only escape of the young adventurer, for there were +wild animals as well as poisonous snakes along the line of march, and +the man in the front was always in danger. But at the front Mackay must +be in spite of all warning. Nobody moved fast enough for him. + +At last they reached the summit of the range. They were now on the +dividing line between Chinese ground and savage territory, and the men +who dared go a step farther went at terrible risk. The head-hunters +would very likely see that they did not return. + +But Mackay was all for pushing forward, and Captain Bax was no less +eager. So they spent a night in the forest and the next day marched on +up another and higher range. As they journeyed, the travelers could not +but burst into exclamations of delight at the loveliness about them. +Behind those great trees and in those tangles of vines might lurk the +head-hunters, but for all that the beauty of the place made them forget +the dangers. The great banyan trees whose branches came down and took +root in the earth, making a wonderful round leafy tent, grew on every +side. Camphor trees towered far above them and then spread out great +branches sixty or seventy feet from the ground. Then there was the +rattan creeping out over the tops of the other trees and making a thick +canopy through which the hot tropical sun-rays could not penetrate. + + And the flowers! Sometimes Mackay and Bax would stand amazed at +their beauty. They came one afternoon to an open glade in the cool +green dimness of the forest. On all sides the stately tree-ferns rose up +thirty or forty feet above them, and underneath grew a tangle of lovely +green undergrowth. + +And upon this green carpet it seemed to their dazzled eyes that +thousands of butterflies of the loveliest form and color had just +alighted. And not only butterflies, but birds and huge insects and all +sorts of winged creatures, pink and gold and green and scarlet and blue, +and all variegated hues. But the lovely things sat motionless, sending +out such a delightful perfume that there could be no doubt that they +were flowers,--the wonderful orchids of Formosa! Mackay was a keen +scientist, always highly interested in botany, and he was charmed with +this sight. There were many such in the forest, and often he would stop +spellbound before a blaze of flowers hanging from tree or vine or shrub. +Then he would look up at the tangled growths of the bamboo, the palm, +and the elegant tree-fern, standing there all silent and beautiful, and +he would be struck by the harmony between God's work and Word. "I can't +keep from studying the flora of Formosa," he said to Captain Bax. "What +missionary would not be a better man, the bearer of a richer gospel, +what convert would not be a more enduring Christian from becoming +acquainted with such wonderful works of the Creator?" + +At last they stood on the summit of the second range and saw before them +still more mountains, clothed from summit to base with trees. They were +now right in savage territory and their guide clambered out upon a spur +of rock and announced that there was a party of head-hunters in the +valley below. He gave a long halloo. From away down in the valley came +an answering call, ringing through the forest. Then far down through the +thicket Mackay's sharp eyes descried the party coming up to meet them. +Just then their own guide gave the signal to move on, and the missionary +and Captain Bax walked down the hill--the first white men who had ever +come out to meet those savages. + +Half-way down the slope the two parties came face to face. The +head-hunters were a wild, uncouth-looking company, armed to the teeth. +They all carried guns, spears, and knives and some had also bows and +arrows slung over their backs. Their faces were hideously tattooed in a +regular pattern, while they wore no more clothes than were necessary. +A sort of sack of coarse linen with holes in the sides for their arms, +served as the chief garment, and generally the only one. Every one wore +a broad belt of woven rattan in which was stuck his crooked pointed +knife. Some of the younger men had their coats ornamented with bright +red and blue threads woven into the texture. They had brass rings on +their arms and legs too, and even sported big earrings. These were +ugly looking things made of bamboo sticks. The head-hunters were all +barefooted, but most of them wore caps--queer-looking things, made of +rattan. From many of them hung bits of skin of the boar or other wild +animals they had killed. They stood staring suspiciously at the two +strangers. Never before had they seen a white man, and the appearance of +the naval officer and the missionary, so different from themselves, and +yet so different from their hated enemies, the Chinese, filled them with +amazement and a good deal of suspicion. After a little talk with the +guides, however, the visitors were allowed to pass on. As soon as they +began to move, the savages fell into line behind them and followed +closely. The two white men, walking calmly onward, could not help +thinking how easy it would be for one of those fierce-looking tattooed +braves to win applause by springing upon both of them and carrying their +heads in triumph to the next village. + +As they came down farther into the valley, they passed the place where +the savages had their camp. Here naked children and tattooed women +crept out of the dense woods to stare at the queer-looking Chinamen who +had white faces and wore no cue. + +The march through this valley, even without the head-hunters at their +heels, would not have been easy. The visitors clambered over huge trunks +blown across the path, and tore their clothes and hands scrambling +through the thorny bushes. The sun was still shining on the +mountain-peaks far above them, but away down here in the valley it was +rapidly growing dark and very cold. They had almost decided to stop and +wait for morning when a light ahead encouraged them to go on. They soon +came upon a big camp-fire and round it were squatted several hundred +savages. The firelight gleaming upon the dark, fierce faces of the +head-hunters and on their spears and knives, made a startling picture. + +They were round the visitors immediately, staring at the two white men +in amazement. The party of savages who had escorted them seemed to be +making some explanation of their appearance, for they all subsided at +last and once more sat round their fire. + +The newcomers started a fire of their own, and their servants cooked +their food. The white men were in momentary danger of their lives. But +they sat on the ground before the fire and quietly ate their supper +while hundreds of savage eyes were fixed upon them in suspicious, +watchful silence. + +The meal over the servants prepared a place for the travelers to sleep, +and while they were so doing, the young missionary was not idle. He +longed to speak to these poor, darkened heathen, but they could not +understand Chinese. However, he found several poor fellows lying +prostrate on the ground, overcome with malaria, and he got his guide to +ask if he might not give the sick ones medicine. Being allowed to do +so, he gave each one a dose of quinine. The poor creatures tried to look +their gratitude when the terrible chills left them, and soon they were +able to sink into sleep. + +Before he retired to his own bed of boughs, the young missionary +sang that grand old anthem which these lonely woods and their savage +inhabitants had never yet heard: + + All people that on earth do dwell, + Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice. + +But these poor people could not "sing to the Lord," for they had never +yet so much as heard his name. + +All night the missionary lay on the ground, finding the chill mountain +air too cold for sleep, and whenever he looked out from his shelter of +boughs he saw hundreds of savage eyes, gleaming in the firelight, still +wide open and fixed upon him. + +Day broke late in the valley, but the travelers were astir in the +morning twilight. The mountain-tops were touched with rosy light even +while it was dark down in these forest depths. + +The chilled white men were glad to get up and exercise their stiffened +limbs. There were several of their party who could speak both Chinese +and the dialect of these mountaineers, and through them Mackay persuaded +the chief of the tribe to take them to visit his village. + +He seemed reluctant at first and there was much discussion with his +braves. Evidently they were more anxious to go on a head-hunt than to +act the part of hosts. However, after a great deal of chatter, +they consented, and the chief and his son with thirty men separated +themselves from the rest of the band and led the way out of the valley +up the mountainside. The travelers had to stop often, for, besides the +natural difficulties of the way, the chief proved a new obstacle. Every +mile or so he would apparently repent of his hospitality. He would stop, +gather his tattooed braves about him and confer with them, while his +would-be visitors sat on the ground or a fallen tree-trunk to await his +pleasure. Finally he would start off again, the travelers following, +but no sooner were they under way than again their uncertain guide would +stop. Once he and his men stood motionless, listening. Away up in +the boughs of a camphor tree a little tailor-bird was twittering. The +savages listened as though to the voice of an oracle. + +"What are they doing?" Mackay asked of one of his men, when the +head-hunters stopped a second time and stared earnestly at the boughs +above. + +"Bird-listening," explained the guide. A few more questions drew from +him the fact that the savages believed the little birds would tell +them whether or not they should bring these strangers home. They +always consulted the birds when starting out on a head-hunt, he further +explained. If the birds gave a certain kind of chirp and flew in a +certain direction, then all was well, and the hunters would go happily +forward. But if the birds acted in the opposite way, nothing in the +world could persuade the chief to go on. Evidently the birds gave their +permission to bring the travelers home, for in spite of many halts, the +savages still moved forward. + +They had been struggling for some miles through underbrush and prickly +rattan and the white men's clothes were torn and their hands scratched. +Now, however, they came upon a well-beaten path, winding up the +mountainside, and it proved a great relief to the weary travelers. But +here occurred another delay. The savages all stopped, and the chief +approached Mackay and spoke to him through the interpreter. Would the +white man join him in a head-hunting expedition, was his modest request. +There were some Chinese not so far below them, cutting out rattan, and +he was sure they could secure one or more heads. He shook the big net +head-bag that hung over his shoulder and grinned savagely as he made his +proposal. If the white men and their party would come at the enemy from +one side, he and his men would attack them from the other, he said, +and they would be sure to get them all. The incongruity of a Christian +missionary being invited on a head-hunt struck Captain Bax as rather +funny in spite of its gruesomeness. This was a delicate situation to +handle, but Mackay put a bold front on it. He answered indignantly that +he and his friend had come in peace to visit the chief, and that he was +neither kind nor honorable in trying to get his visitors to fight his +battles. + +The interpreter translated and for a moment several pairs of savage +eyes gleamed angrily at the bold white man. But second thoughts proved +calmer. After another council the savages moved on. + +They were now at the top of a range, and every one was ordered to halt +and remain silent. Mackay thought that advice was again to be asked of +some troublesome little birds, but instead the savages raised a +peculiar long-drawn shout. It was answered at once from the opposite +mountain-top, and immediately the whole party moved on down the slope. + +Here was the same lovely tangle of vines and ferns and beautiful +flowers. Monkeys sported in the trees and chattered and scolded the +intruders. Down one range and up another they scrambled and at last they +came upon the village of the head-hunters. + +It lay in a valley in an open space where the forest trees had been +cleared away. It consisted of some half-dozen houses or huts made of +bamboo or wickerwork, and the place seemed literally swarming with women +and children and noisy yelping dogs. But even these could not account +for the terrible din that seemed to fill the valley. Such unearthly +yells and screeches the white men had never heard before. + +"What is it?" asked Captain Bax. "Has the whole village gone mad?" + +Mackay turned to one of his guides, and the man explained that the noise +came from a village a little farther down the valley. A young hunter had +returned with a Chinaman's head, and his friends were rejoicing over it. +The merrymaking sounded to the visitors more like the howling of a pack +of fiends, for it bore no resemblance to any human sounds they had ever +heard. + +Fortunately they were invited to stop at the nearer village and were not +compelled to take part in the horrible celebration. They were taken at +once to the chief's house. It was the best in the village, and boasted +of a floor, made of rattan ropes half an inch thick. All along the +outside wall, under the eaves, hung a row of gruesome ornaments, heads +of the boar and deer and other wild animals killed in the chase, and +here and there mingled with them the skulls of Chinamen. The house held +one large room, and, as it was a cold evening, a fire burned at either +end of it. At one end the men stood chatting, at the other the women +squatted. The visitors were invited to sit by the men's fire. There +were several beds along the wall, two of which were offered to the +strangers. But they were not prepared to remain for the night, and had +decided to start back before the shadows fell. + +The whole village came to the chief's house and crowded round the +newcomers, men first, women and children on the outskirts, and dogs +still farther back. Several men came forward and claimed Mackay as a +friend. They touched their own breasts and then his, in salutation, +grinning in a most friendly manner. The young missionary was at first +puzzled, then smiled delightedly. They were some of the poor fellows to +whom he had given quinine the evening before in the valley. + +This greeting seemed to encourage the others. They became more friendly +and suddenly one man who had been circling round the visitors touched +the back of Mackay's head and exclaimed, "They do not wear the cue! They +are our kinsmen." From that moment they were treated with far +greater kindness, and on several other visits that Mackay made to the +head-hunters, they always spoke with interest of him as kinsman. + +But all danger was not over. The savages were still suspicious, and at +any moment the newcomers might excite them. So they decided to start +back at once, while every one was in a friendly mood. They made presents +to the chief and some of his leading men; and left with expressions of +good-will on both sides. + +By evening they had reached the valley where they had first met the +savages and here they prepared to spend the night. They had no sooner +kindled their fires than from the darkness on every side shadowy forms +silently emerged,--the savages come to visit them! They glided out of +the black forest into the ring of firelight and squatted upon the ground +until fully five hundred dusky faces looked out at the travelers from +the gloom. It was rather an unpleasant situation, there in the depths of +the forest, but Mackay turned it to good account. First he and Captain +Bax made presents to the headmen and they were as pleased as children to +receive the gay ornaments and bright cloth the travelers gave them. +And then Mackay called their interpreter to his side and they stood +up together, facing the crowd. Speaking through his interpreter, the +missionary said he wished to tell them a story. These mountain savages +were veritable children in their love for a story, as they were in so +many other ways, and their eyes gleamed with delight. + +It was a wonderful story he told them, the like of which they had never +heard before. It was about the great God, who had made the earth and +the people on it, and was the Father of them all. He told how God loved +everybody, because they were his children. Chinese, white men beyond the +sea like himself and Captain Bax, the people of the mountains,--all were +God's children. And so all men were brothers, and should love God their +Father and each other. And because God loved his children so, he sent +his Son, Jesus Christ, to live among men and to die for them. He told +the story simply and beautifully, just as he would to little children, +and these children of the forest listened and their savage eyes grew +less fierce as they heard for the first time of the story of the Savior. + +The next day, after a toilsome journey, the travelers reached the +plain below. They had made their dangerous trip and had escaped the +head-hunters, but as fierce an enemy was lying in wait for both, an +enemy that in Formosa devours native and foreigner alike. Captain Bax +was the first to be attacked. All day, as they descended the mountain, +the rain came down in torrents, a real Formosan rain that is like the +floodgates opening. The travelers were drenched and chilly, and just as +they emerged from the forest Captain Bax succumbed to the enemy. Malaria +had smitten him. + +Shaking with chills and then burning with fever, he was placed in a +sedan-chair and carried the remainder of the way, three days' journey, +to the coast, where the medical attendants on board his ship cured him. +Mackay was feeling desperately ill all the way across the plain, but +with his usual determination he refused to give in until he almost +staggered across the threshold of his home. + +The house had been closed in his absence. It was now damp and chilly and +everything was covered with mold. He lay down in his bed, alternately +shivering with cold and burning with fever. In the next room A Hoa, +who had gone to bed also, heard his teeth chattering and came to him at +once. It was a terrible thing to the young fellow to see his dauntless +Kai Bok-su overcome by any kind of force. It seemed impossible that he +who had cured so many should become a victim himself. A Hoa proved a +kind nurse. He stayed by the bedside all night, doing everything in his +power to allay the fever. His efforts proved successful, and in a few +days the patient was well. But never again was he quite free from the +dreaded disease, and all the rest of his life he was subject to the most +violent attacks of malaria, a terrible memento by which he was always to +remember his first visit to the headhunters. + + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. CITIES CAPTURED AND FORTS BUILT + +Up the river to Go-ko-khi! That was always a joy, and whenever Mackay +could take a day from his many duties, with A Hoa and one or more other +students, he would go up and visit old Thah-so and the kindly people of +this little village. + +One day, after they had preached in the empty granary and the rain had +come in, Mr. Tan, the headman, walked up the village street with them, +and he made them an offer. They might have the plot of ground opposite +his house for a chapel-site. This was grand news. A chapel in north +Formosa! Mackay could hardly believe it, but it seemed that there really +was to be one. There were many Christians in Go-ko-khi now, and each +one was ready for work. Some collected stones, others prepared sun-dried +bricks, others dug the foundation, and the first church in north Formosa +was commenced. + +Now Go-ko-khi was, unfortunately, near the great city of Bang-kah. This +was the most hostile and wicked place in all that country, and A Hoa +and Mackay had been stoned out of it on their visit there. The people in +Bang-kah learned of the new church building, and one day, when the brick +walls were about three feet high, there arose a tramp of feet, beating +of drums, and loud shouts, and up marched a detachment of soldiers sent +with orders from the prefect of Bang-kah to stop the building of the +chapel. Their officers went straight to the house of the headman with +his commands. Mr. Tan was six feet two and he rose to his full height +and towered above his visitor majestically. The "mayor" of Go-ko-khi was +a Christian now, and on the wall of his house was pasted a large sheet +of paper with the ten commandments printed on it. He pointed to this and +said: "I am determined to abide by these." The officer was taken aback. +He was scarcely prepared to defy the headman, and he went away to stir +up the villagers. But everywhere the soldiers met with opposition. There +seemed no one who would take their part. The officer knew he and his men +were scarcely within their rights in what they were doing; so, +fearing trouble, he marched back to the city, reporting there that the +black-bearded barbarian had bewitched the villagers with some magic art. + +The prefect of Bang-kah next sent a message to the British consul. The +missionary was building a fort at Go-ko-khi, he declared in great alarm, +and would probably bring guns up the river at night. He was a very bad +man indeed, and if the British consul desired peace he should stop this +wicked Kai Bok-su at once. And the British consul down in his old Dutch +fort at Tamsui laughed heartily over the letter, knowing all about Kai +Bok-su and the sort of fort he was building. + +So, in spite of all opposition, the little church rose steadily up +and up until it was crowned with a tiled roof and was ready for the +worshipers. + +That was a great day for north Formosa and its young missionary, the day +the first church was opened. The place was packed to the doors, and many +stood outside listening at the windows. And of that crowd one hundred +and fifty arose and declared that from henceforth they would cast away +their idols and worship only the one and true God. Standing up there in +his first pulpit and looking down upon the crowd of upturned faces, and +seeing the new light in them which the blessed good news of Jesus and +his love had brought, Kai Bok-su's heart swelled with joy. + +He stayed with them some time after this, for, though so many people +had become Christians, they were like little children and needed much +careful teaching. Especially they must learn how to live as Jesus Christ +would have his followers live. Many heathen as well as the Christians +came to his meetings and listened eagerly. At first the people found +it almost impossible to sit quiet and still during a service. They +had never been accustomed to such a task, and some of the missionary's +experiences were very funny. When they had sung a hymn and had settled +down to listen to the address, the preacher would no sooner start than +out would come one long pipe after another, pieces of flint would strike +on steel, and in a few minutes the smoke would begin to ascend. Mackay +would pause and gently tell them that as this was a Christian service +they must not do anything that might disturb it. They were anxious to do +just as he bade, so the pipes would disappear, and nodding their heads +politely they would say, "Oh, yes, we must be quiet; oh, yes, indeed." + +One day when the congregation was very still and their young pastor was +speaking earnest words to them, one man less attentive than the others +happened to glance out of the window. Instantly he sprang to his feet +shouting, "Buffaloes in the rice-fields! Buffaloes in the rice-fields!" +and away he went with a good fraction of the congregation helter-skelter +at his heels. + +The missionary spoke again upon the necessity of quiet, and his hearers +nodded agreeably and murmured, "Yes, yes, we must be quiet." + +They were very good for the next few minutes and the minister had +reached a very important point in his address, when there was a great +disturbance at the door. An old woman came hobbling up on her small feet +and poking her head in at the church door screamed, "My pig has gone! +Pig has gone!" and away went another portion of the congregation to help +find the truant porker. + +But, in spite of many interruptions, the congregation at Go-ko-khi +learned much of the beautiful truth of their new religion. Their +indulgent pastor never blamed his restless hearers, but before the +church was two months old he had trained them so well that there was +not a more orderly and attentive congregation even in his own Christian +Canada than that which gathered in the first chapel in north Formosa. + +But the day came at last when he had to leave them, and the question was +who should be left over them. The answer seemed very plain,--A Hoa. +The first convert placed as pastor over the first church! It was +very fitting. Some months before, down in Tamsui, when A Hoa had been +baptized and had taken his first communion, he had vowed to give his +life more fully to his Master's service. So here was his field of labor, +and here he began his work. He was so utterly sincere and lovable, so +bright and jovial, so firm of purpose and yet so kindly, that he was +soon beloved by all the Christians and respected by the heathen. And one +of his greatest helpers was widow Thah-so, who had been instrumental in +bringing the missionary with his glad tidings to her village. + +Mackay missed A Hoa sorely at first, but he had his other students about +him, and often when bent upon a long journey would send for his first +convert, and together they would travel here and there over the island, +making new recruits everywhere for the army of their great Captain. + +The little church at Go-ko-khi was but the first of many. Like the +hepaticas that used to peep forth in the missionary's home woods, +telling that spring had arrived, here and there they came up, showing +that the long cruel winter of heathenism in north Formosa was drawing to +an end. + +Away up the Tamsui river, nestled at the foot of the mountains, stood +a busy town called Sin-tiam. A young man from this place sailed down to +Tamsui on business one day and there heard the great Kai Bok-su preach +of the new Jehovah-God, he went home full of the wonderful news, and so +much did he talk about it that a large number of people in Sin-tiam were +very anxious to hear the barbarian themselves. So one day a delegation +came down the river to the house on the bluff above Tamsui. They made +this request known to the missionary as he sat teaching his students in +the study. Would he not come and tell the people of Sin-tiam the story +about this Jesus-God who loved all men? Would he go? Kai Bok-su was on +the road almost before the slow-going Orientals had finished delivering +the message. + +It was the season of a feast to their idols in Sin-tiam when the +missionary and his party arrived. Great crowds thronged the streets, +and the barbarian with his white face and his black beard and his queer +clothes attracted unusual attention. The familiar cry, "Foreign devil," +was mingled with "Kill the barbarian," "Down with the foreigner." The +crowd began to surge closer around the missionary party, and affairs +looked very serious. Suddenly a little boy right in Mackay's path was +struck on the head by a brick intended for the missionary. He was picked +up, and Mackay, pressing through the crowd to where the little fellow +lay, took out his surgical instruments and dressed the wound. All about +him the cries of "Kill the foreign devil" changed to cries of "Good +heart! Good heart!" The crowd became friendly at once, and Mackay passed +on, having had once more a narrow escape from death. + +The work of preaching to these people was carried on vigorously, and +before many months had passed the Christians met together and declared +they must build a chapel for the worship of the true God. So, close +by the riverside, in a most picturesque spot, the walls of the second +chapel of north Formosa began to rise. It was not without opposition +of course. One rabid idol-worshiper stopped before the half-finished +building with its busy workmen, and, picking up a large stone, declared +that he would smash the head of the black-bearded barbarian if the work +was not stopped that moment. Needless to say, the missionary, standing +within a good stone's throw of his enemy, ordered the workers to +continue. George Mackay was not to be stopped by all the stones in north +Formosa. + +This stone was never thrown, however, and at last the chapel was +finished. Once more a preacher was ready to be its pastor. Tan He, a +young man who had been studying earnestly under his leader for some +time, was placed over this second congregation, and once more there +blossomed out a sure sign that the spring had indeed come to north +Formosa. + +Tek-chham, a walled city of over forty thousand inhabitants, was the +next place to be attacked by this little army of the King's soldiers. +The first visit of the missionary caused a riot, but before long +Tek-chham had a chapel with some of the rioters for its best members, +and a once proud graduate and worshiper of Confucius installed in it as +its pastor. + +Ten miles from Tek-chham stood a little village called Geh-bai. The +missionary-soldiers visited it, and to their delight found a church +building ready for them. It was quite a wonderful place, capable of +holding fully a thousand people without much crowding. Its roof was the +boughs of the great banyan tree; its one pillar the trunk, and its walls +the branches that bent down to enter the ground and take root. It made a +delightful shelter from the broiling sun. And here Kai Bok-su preached. +But a banyan does not give perfect shelter in all kinds of weather, so +when a number of people had declared themselves followers of the Lord +Jesus, a large house was rented and fitted up as a chapel, with another +native pastor over it. + +Away over at Kelung a church was founded through a man who had carried +the gospel home from one of the missionary's sermons. Here and there the +hepaticas were springing up. From all sides came invitations to preach +the great news of the true God, and the young missionary gave himself +scarcely time to eat or sleep. He worked like a giant himself, and he +inspired the same spirit in the students that accompanied him. He was +like a Napoleon among his soldiers. Wherever he went they would go, +even though it would surely mean abuse and might mean death. And, +wherever they went, they brought such a wonderful, glad change to +people's hearts that they were like slave-liberators setting captives +free. + +The most lawless and dangerous region in all north Formosa was that +surrounding the small town of Sa-kak-eng. In the mountains near by lived +a band of robbers who kept the people in a constant state of dread by +their terrible deeds of plunder and murder. Sometimes the frightened +townspeople would help the highwaymen just to gain their good-will, and +such treatment only made them bolder. Bands of them would even come down +into the town and march through the streets, frightening every one into +flight. They would shout and sing, and their favorite song was one that +showed how little they cared for the laws of the land. + +You trust the mandarins, We trust the mountains. + +So the song went, and when the missionary heard it first he could not +help confessing that after all it was a sorry job trusting the mandarins +for protection. + +The first time he visited the place with A Hoa they were stoned and +driven out. But the missionaries came back, and at last were allowed to +preach. And then converts came and a church was established. The +robber bands received no more assistance from the people, and were +soon scattered by the officers of the law. And Sa-kak-eng was in peace +because the missionary had come. + +But there was one place Mackay had so far scarcely dared to enter. Even +the robber-infested Sa-kak-eng would yield, but Bang-kah defied all +efforts. To the missionary it was the Gibraltar of heathen Formosa, and +he longed to storm it. North, south, east, and west of this great wicked +city churches had been planted, some only within a few miles of its +walls. But Bang-kah still stood frowning and unyielding. It had always +been very bitter against outsiders of all kinds. No foreign merchant was +allowed to do business in Bang-kah, so no wonder the foreign missionary +was driven out. + +Mackay had dared to enter the place, being of the sort that would dare +anything. It was soon after he had settled in Formosa and A Hoa had +accompanied him. The result had been a riot. The streets had immediately +filled with a yelling, cursing mob that pelted the two missionaries with +stones and rotten eggs and filth, and drove them from the city. + +But "Mackay never knew when he was beaten," as a fellow worker of his +once said, and though he was taking desperate chances, he went once more +inside the walls of Bangkah. This time he barely escaped with his life, +and the city authorities forbade every one, on pain of death, to +lease or sell property to him or in any way accommodate the barbarian +missionary. + +But meanwhile Kai Bok-su was keeping his eye on Bang-kah, and when the +territory around had been possessed, he went up to Go-ko--khi and made +the daring proposition to A Hoa. Should they go up again and storm the +citadel of heathenism? And A Hoa answered promptly and bravely, "Let us +go." + +So one day early in December, when the winter rains had commenced to +pour down, these two marched across the plain and into Bang-kah. By +keeping quiet and avoiding the main thoroughfare, they managed to rent +a house. It was a low, mean hovel in a dirty, narrow street, but it was +inside the forbidden city, and that was something. The two daring young +men then procured a large sheet of paper, printed on it in Chinese +characters "Jesus' Temple," and pasted it on the door. This announced +what they had come for, and they awaited results. + +Presently there came the heavy tramp, tramp of feet on the stone +pavement. Mackay and A Hoa looked out. A party of soldiers, armed with +spears and swords, were returning from camp. They stopped before the hut +and read the inscription. They shouted loud threats and tramped away to +report the affair to headquarters. + +In a short time, with a great noise and tramping, once more soldiers +were at the door. Mackay waked out and faced them quietly. The general +had given orders that the barbarian must leave this house immediately, +the soldier declared in a loud voice. The place belonged to the military +authorities. + +"Show me your proof," said Mackay calmly. His bold behavior demanded +respectful treatment, so the soldier produced the deed for the property. + +"I respect your law," said Mackay after he examined it, "and my +companion and I will vacate. But I have paid rent for this place, +therefore I am entitled to remain for the night. I will not go out until +morning." + +His firm words and fearless manner had their effect both on the soldiers +and the noisy mob waiting for him outside, and the men, muttering +angrily, turned away. That night Mackay and A Hoa lay on a dirty grass +mat on the mud floor. The place was damp and filthy, but even had it +been comfortable they would have had little sleep. For, far into the +night, angry soldiers paraded the street. Often their voices rose to a +clamor and they would make a rush for the frail door of the little hut. +Many times the two young fellows arose, believing their last hour had +come. But the long night passed and they found that they were still left +untouched. + +They rose early and started out. Already a great mob filled the space +in front of the house. Even the low roofs of the surrounding houses were +covered with people all out early to see the barbarian and his despised +companion driven from Bang-kah, and perhaps have the added pleasure of +witnessing their death. + +The two walked bravely down the street. Curses were showered upon them +from all sides; broken tiles, stones, and filth were thrown at them, but +they moved on steadily. The mob hampered them so that they were hours +walking the short distance to the river. Here they entered a boat and +went down a few miles to a point where a chapel stood, and where some of +Mackay's students awaited them. + +But the man who "did not know when he was beaten" had not turned his +back on the enemy. He gathered the group of students around him in the +little room attached to the chapel. Here they all knelt and the young +missionary laid their trouble before the great Captain who had said, +"All power is given unto me." "Give us an entrance to Bang-kah," was the +burden of the missionary 's prayer. They arose from their knees, and he +turned to A Hoa with that quick challenging movement his students had +learned to know so well. + +"Come," he said, "we are going back to Bang-kah." + +And A Hoa, whose habit it was to walk into all danger with a smile, +answered with all his heart: + +"It is well, Kai Bok-su; we go back to Bang-kah." + +And straight back to this Gibraltar the little army of two marched. +It was quite dark by the time they entered. A Formosan city is not the +blaze of electricity to which Westerners are accustomed, and only +here and there in the narrow streets shone a dim light. The travelers +stumbled along, scarcely knowing whither they were going. As they turned +a dark corner and plunged into another black street they met an old man +hobbling with the aid of a staff over the uneven stones of the pavement. +Mackay spoke to him politely and asked if he could tell him of any one +who would rent a house. "We want to do mission work," he added, feeling +that he must not get anything under false pretenses. + +The old man nodded. "Yes, I can rent you my place," he answered readily. +"Come with me." + +Full of amazement and gratitude the two adventurers groped their way +after him, stumbling over stones and heaps of rubbish. They could not +help realizing, as they got farther into the city, that should the old +man prove false and give an alarm the whole murderous populace of that +district would be around them instantly like a swarm of hornets. But +whether he was leading them into a trap or not their only course was to +follow. + +At last he paused at a low door opening into the back part of a house. +The old man lighted a lamp, a pith wick in a saucer of peanut oil, and +the visitors looked around. The room was damp and dirty and infested +with the crawling creatures that fairly swarm in the Chinese houses of +the lower order. Rain dripped from the low ceiling on the mud floor, and +the meager furniture was dirty and sticky. + +But the two young men who had found it were delighted. They felt like +the advance guard of an army that has taken the enemy's first outpost. +They were established in Bang-kah! They set to work at once to draw out +a rental paper. A Hoa sat at the table and wrote it out so that they +might be within the law which said that no foreigner must hold property +in Bang-kah. When the paper was signed and the money paid, the old man +crept stealthily away. He had his money, but he was too wary to let his +fellow citizens find how he had earned it. + +As soon as morning came the little army in the midst of the hostile camp +hoisted its banner. When the citizens of Bang-kah awoke, they found on +the door of the hut the hated sign, in large Chinese characters, "Jesus' +Temple." + +In less than an hour the street in front of it was thronged with a +shouting crowd. Before the day was past the news spread, and the whole +city was in an uproar. By the next afternoon the excitement had reached +white heat, and a wild crowd of men came roaring down the street. +They hurled themselves at the little house where the missionaries were +waiting and literally tore it to splinters. The screams of rage and +triumph were so horrible that they reminded Mackay of the savage yells +of the head-hunters. + +When the mob leaped upon the roof and tore it off, the two hunted men +slipped out through a side door, and across the street into an inn. The +crowd instantly attacked it, smashing doors, ripping the tiles off the +roof, and uttering such bloodthirsty howls that they resembled wild +beasts far more than human beings. The landlord ordered the missionaries +out to where the mob was waiting to tear them limb from limb. + +It was an awful moment. To go out was instant death, to remain merely +put off the end a few moments. Mackay, knowing his source of help, sent +up a desperate prayer to his Father in heaven. + +Suddenly there was a strange lull in the street outside. The yells +ceased, the crashing of tiles stopped. The door opened, and there in his +sedan-chair of state surrounded by his bodyguard, appeared the Chinese +mandarin. And just behind him--blessed sight to the eyes of Kai +Bok-su--Mr. Scott, the British consul of Tamsui! + +Without a word the two British-born clasped hands. It was not an +occasion for words. There was immediately a council of war. The mandarin +urged the British consul to send the missionary out of the city. + +"I have no authority to give such an order," retorted Mr. Scott quickly. +"On the other hand you must protect him while he is here. He is a +British subject." + +Mackay's heart swelled with pride. And he thanked God that his Empire +had such a worthy representative. + +Having again impressed upon the mandarin that the missionary must be +protected or there would be trouble, Mr. Scott set off for his home. +Mackay accompanied him to the city gate. Then he turned and walked back +through the muttering crowds straight to the inn he had left. He stopped +occasionally to pull a tooth or give medicine for malaria, for even in +Bang-kah he had a few friends. + +The mandarin was now as much afraid of the missionary as if he had been +the plague. He knew he dared not allow him to be touched, and he also +knew he had very little power over a mob. He was responsible, too, +to men in higher office, for the control of the people, and would be +severely punished if there was a riot, he was indeed in a very bad way +when he heard that the troublesome missionary had come back, and he +followed him to the inn to try to induce him to leave. + +He found Mackay with A Hoa, quietly seated in their room. First he +commanded, then he tried to bribe, and then he even descended to beg the +"foreign devil" to leave the city. But Mackay was immovable. + +"I cannot leave," he said, touched by the man's distress. "I cannot quit +this city until I have preached the gospel here." He held up his forceps +and his Bible. "See! I use these to relieve pain of the body, and this +gives relief from sin,--the disease of the soul. I cannot go until I +have given your people the benefit of them." + +The mandarin went away enraged and baffled. He could not persuade the +man to go; he dared not drive him out. He left a squad of soldiers to +guard the place, however, remembering the British consul's warning. + +In a few days the excitement subsided. People became accustomed to +seeing the barbarian teacher and his companion go about the streets. +Many were relieved of much pain by him too, and a large number listened +with some interest to the new doctrine he taught concerning one God. + +He had been there a week when some prominent citizens came to him with +a polite offer. They would give him free a piece of ground outside the +city on which to build a church. Kai Bok-su's flashing black eyes at +once saw the bribe. They wanted to coax him out when they could not +drive him. He refused politely but firmly. + +"I own that property," he declared, pointing to the heap of ruins into +which his house had been turned, "and there I will build a church." + +They did everything in their power to prevent him, but one day, many +months after, right on the site where they had literally torn the roof +from above him, arose a pretty little stone church, and that was the +beginning of great things in Bang-kah. + +And so Gibraltar was taken,--taken by an army of two,--a Canadian +missionary and a Chinese soldier of the King, for behind them stood all +the army of the Lord of hosts, and he led them to victory! + + + + +CHAPTER IX. OTHER CONQUESTS. + +Away over on the east of the island ran a range of beautiful mountains. +And between these mountains and the sea stretched a low rice plain. +Here lived many Pe-po-hoan,--"Barbarians of the plain." Mackay had never +visited this place, for the Kap-tsu-lan plain, as it was called, was +very hard to reach on account of the mountains; but this only made the +dauntless missionary all the more anxious to visit it. + +So one day he suggested to his students, as they studied in his house +on the bluff, that they make a journey to tell the people of Kap-tsu-lan +the story of Jesus. Of course, the young fellows were delighted. To go +off with Kai Bok-su was merely transferring their school from his house +to the big beautiful outdoors. For he always taught them by the way, and +besides they were all eager to go with him and help spread the good news +that had made such a difference in their lives. So when Kai Bok-su piled +his books upon a shelf and said, "Let us go to Kaptsu-lan," the young +fellows ran and made their preparations joyfully. A Hoa was in Tamsui +at the time, and Mackay suggested that he come too, for a trip without A +Hoa was robbed of half its enjoyment. + +Mackay had just recovered from one of those violent attacks of malaria +from which he suffered so often now, and he was still looking pale and +weak. So Sun-a, a bright young student-lad, came to the study door with +the suggestion, "Let us take Lu-a for Kai Bok-su to ride." + +There was a laugh from the other students and an indulgent smile from +Kai Bok-su himself. Lu-a was a small, rather stubborn-looking donkey +with meek eyes and a little rat tail. He was a present to the missionary +from the English commissioner of customs at Tamsui, when that gentleman +was leaving the island. Donkeys were commonly used on the mainland of +China, and though an animal was scarcely ever ridden in Formosa, horses +being almost unknown, the commissioner did not see why his Canadian +friend, who was an introducer of so many new things, should not +introduce donkey-riding. So he sent him Lu-a as a farewell present and +leaving this token of his good-will departed for home. + +Up to this time Lu-a had served only as a pet and a joke among the +students, and high times they had with him in the grassy field behind +the missionary's house when lessons were over. In great glee they +brought him round to the door now, "all saddled and bridled" and ready +for the trip. The missionary mounted, and Lu-a trotted meekly along the +road that wound down the bluff toward Kelung. The students followed in +high spirits. The sight of their teacher astride the donkey was such a +novel one to them, and Lu-a was such a joke at any time, that they were +filled with merriment. All went well until they left the road and turned +into a path that led across the buffalo common. At the end of it they +came to a ravine about fifteen feet deep. Over this stretched a plank +bridge not more than three feet wide. Here Lu-a came to a sudden +stop. He had no mind to risk his small but precious body on that shaky +structure. His rider bade him "go on," but the command only made Lu-a +put back his ears, plant his fore feet well forward and stand stock +still. In fact he looked much more settled and immovable than the bridge +over which he was being urged. The students gathered round him and +petted and coaxed. They called him "Good Lu-a" and "Honorable Lu-a" and +every other flattering title calculated to move his donkeyship, but +Lu-a flattened his ears back so he could not hear and would not move. +So Mackay dismounted and tried the plan of pulling him forward by the +bridle while some of the boys pushed him from behind. Lu-a resented +this treatment, especially that from the rear, and up went his heels, +scattering students in every direction; and to discomfit the enemy in +front he opened his mouth and gave forth such loud resonant brays that +the ravine fairly rang with his music. + +A balking donkey is rather amusing to boys of any country, but to these +Formosan lads who had had no experience with one the sound of Lu-a's +harsh voice and the sight of his flying heels brought convulsions of +merriment. "He's pounding rice! He's pounding rice!" shouted the wag of +the party, and his companions flung themselves upon the grass and rolled +about laughing themselves sick. + +With his followers rendered helpless and his steed continuing stubborn, +Mackay saw the struggle was useless. He could not compete alone with +Lu-a's firmness, so he gave orders that the obstinate little obstructer +of their journey be trotted back to his pasture. + +"And to think that any one of us might have carried the little rascal +over!" he cried as he watched the donkey meekly depart. His students +looked at the little beast with something like respect. Lu-a had beaten +the dauntless Kai Bok-su who had never before been beaten by anything. +He was indeed a marvelous donkey! + +So the journey to the Kap-tsu-lan plain was made on foot. It was a very +wearisome one and often dangerous. The mountain paths were steep and +difficult and the travelers knew that often the head-hunters lurked +near. But the way was wonderfully beautiful nevertheless. Standing on a +mountain height one morning and looking away down over wooded hills and +valleys and the lake-like terraces of the rice-fields, Mackay repeated +to his students a line of the old hymn: + +Every prospect pleases and only man is vile. + + +Around them the stately tree-fern lifted its lovely fronds and the +orchids dotted the green earth like a flock of gorgeous butterflies just +settled. Tropical birds of brilliant plumage flashed among the +trees. Beside them a great tree raised itself, fairly covered with +morning-glories, and over at their right a mountainside gleamed like +snow in the sunlight, clothed from top to bottom with white lilies. + +But the way had its dangers as well as its beauties. They were passing +the mouth of a ravine when they were stopped by yells and screams of +terror coming from farther up the mountainside. In a few minutes a +Chinaman darted out of the woods toward them. His face was distorted +with terror and he could scarcely get breath to tell his horrible story. +He and his four companions had been chipping the camphor trees up in the +woods; suddenly the armed savages had leaped out upon them and he alone +of the five had escaped. + +At last they left the dangerous mountain and came down into the +Kap-tsu-lan plain. On every side was rice-field after rice-field, with +the water pouring from one terrace to another. The plain was low and +damp and the paths and roads lay deep in mud. They had a long toilsome +walk between the ricefields until they came to the first village +of these barbarians of the plain. It was very much like a Chinese +village,--dirty, noisy, and swarming with wild-looking children and +wolfish dogs. + +The visitors were received with the utmost disdain. The Chinese students +were of course well known, for these aborigines had long ago adopted +their customs and language. But the Chinese visitors were in company +with the foreigners, and all foreigners were outcaste in this eastern +plain. The men shouted the familiar "foreign devil" and walked +contemptuously away. The dirty women and children fled into their grass +huts and set the dogs upon the strangers. They tried by all sorts of +kindnesses to gain a hearing, but all to no effect. So they gave it +up, and plodded through the mud and water a mile farther on to the next +village. But village number two received them in exactly the same way. +Only rough words and the barks of cruel dogs met them. The next village +was no better, the fourth a little worse. And so on they went up and +down the Kap-tsu-lan plain, sleeping at night in some poor empty hut or +in the shadow of a rice strawstack, eating their meals of cold rice and +buffalo-meat by the wayside, and being driven from village to village, +and receiving never a word of welcome. + +And all through those wearisome days the young men looked at their +leader in vain for any smallest sign of discouragement or inclination +to retreat. There was no slightest look of dismay on the face of Kai +Bok-su, for how was it possible for a man who did not know when he was +beaten to feel discouraged? So still undaunted in the face of defeat, +he led them here and there over the plain, hoping that some one would +surely relent and give them a hearing. + +One night, footsore and worn out, they slept on the damp mud floor of a +miserable hut where the rain dripped in upon their faces. In the morning +prospects looked rather discouraging to the younger members of the +party. They were wet and cold and weary, and there seemed no use in +going again and again to a village only to be turned away. But +Kai Bok-su's mouth was as firm as ever, and his dark eyes flashed +resolutely, as once more he gave the order to march. It was a lovely +morning, the sun was rising gloriously out of the sea and the heavy +mists were melting from above the little rice-fields. Here and there +fairy lakes gleamed out from the rosy haze that rolled back toward +the mountains. They walked along the shore in the pink dawn-light and +marched up toward a fishing village. They had visited it before and had +been driven away, but Kai Bok-su was determined to try again. They were +surprised as they came nearer to see three men come out to meet them +with a friendly expression on their faces. + +The foremost was an old man who had been nicknamed "Black-face," because +of his dark skin. The second was a middleaged man, and the third was a +young fellow about the age of the students. They saluted the travelers +pleasantly, and the old man addressed the missionary. + +"You have been going through and through our plain and no one has +received you," he said politely. "Come to our village, and we will now +be ready to listen to you." + +The door of Kap-tsu-lan had opened at last! The missionary's eyes +gleamed with joy and gratitude as he accepted the invitation. The +delegation led the visitors straight to the house of the headman. For +the Pepo-hoan governed their communities in the Chinese style and had a +headman for each village. The missionary party sat down in front of the +hut on some large flat stones and talked over the matter with the chief +and other important men. And while they talked "Black-face" slipped +away. He returned in a few moments with a breakfast of rice and fish for +the visitors. + +The result of the conference was that the villagers decided to give +the barbarian a chance. All he wanted it seemed was to tell of this new +Jehovah-religion which he believed, and surely there could be no great +harm in listening to him talk. + +In the evening the headman with the help of some friends set to work +to construct a meeting-house. A tent was erected, made from boat sails. +Several flat stones laid at one end and a plank placed upon them made +a pulpit. And that was the first church on the Kap-tsu-lan plain! There +was a "church bell" too, to call the people to worship. In the village +were some huge marine shells with the ends broken off. In the old days +these were used by the chiefs as trumpets by which they called their men +together whenever they were starting out on the war-path. But now the +trumpet-shell was used to call the people to follow the King. Just at +dark a man took one, and walking up and down the straggling village +street blew loudly--the first "church bell" in east Formosa. + +The loud roar brought the villagers flocking down to the tent-church +by the shore. For the most part they brought their pews with them. They +came hurrying out of their huts carrying benches, and arranging them in +rows they seated themselves to listen. + +Mackay and the students sang and the people listened eagerly. The +Pe-po-hoan by nature were more musical than the Chinese, and the singing +delighted them. Then the missionary arose and addressed them. He told +clearly and simply why he had come and preached to them of the true +God. Afterward the congregation was allowed to ask questions, and they +learned much of this God and of his love in his Son Jesus Christ. + +The wonder of the great news shone in the eyes upturned to the preacher. +In the gloom of the half-lighted tent their dark faces took on a new +expression of half-wondering hope. Could it be possible that this was +true? Their poor, benighted minds had always been held in terror of +their gods and of the evil spirits that forever haunted their footsteps. +Could it be possible that God was a great Father who loved his children? +They asked so many eager questions, and the story of Jesus Christ had +to be told over and over so many times, that before this first church +service ended a gray gleam of dawn was spreading out over the Pacific. + +It was only the next day that these newly-awakened people decided that +they must have a church building. And they went to work to get one in a +way that might have shamed a congregation of people in a Christian land. +This new wonderful hope that had been raised in their hearts by the +knowledge that God loved them set them to work with glad energy. Kai +Bok-su and his men still preached and prayed and sang and taught in the +crazy old wind-flapped tent by the seashore, and the people listened +eagerly, and then, when services were over, every one,--preacher, +assistants, and congregation,--set bravely to work to build a church. +Brave they certainly had to be, for at the very beginning they had to +risk their lives for their chapel. A party sailed down the coast and +entered savage territory for the poles to construct the building. They +were attacked and one or two were badly wounded, though they managed to +escape. But they were quite ready to go back and fight again had it been +necessary. Then they made the bricks for the walls. Rice chaff mixed +with clay were the materials, and the Kap-tsu-lan plain had an abundance +of both. The roof was made of grass, the floor of hard dried earth, and +a platform of the same at one end served as a pulpit. + +When the little chapel was finished, every evening the big shell rang +out its summons through the village; and out from every house came the +people and swarmed into the chapel to hear Kai Bok-su explain more of +the wonders of God and his Son Jesus Christ. + +Mackay's home during this period was a musty little room in a damp +mud-walled hut; and here every day he received donations of idols, +ancestral tablets, and all sorts of things belonging to idol-worship. He +was requested to burn them, and often in the mornings he dried his damp +clothes and moldy boots at a fire made from heathen idols. + +For eight weeks the missionary party remained in this place, preaching, +teaching, and working among the people. It was a mystery to the students +how their teacher found time for the great amount of Bible study and +prayer which he managed to get. He surely worked as never man worked +before. Late at night, long after every one else was in bed, he would +be bending over his Bible, beside his peanut-oil lamp, and early in the +morning before the stars had disappeared he was up and at work again. +Four hours' sleep was all his restless, active mind could endure, and +with that he could do work that would have killed any ordinary man. + +One evening some new faces looked up at him from his congregation in the +little brick church. When the last hymn was sung the missionary stepped +down from his pulpit and spoke to the strangers. They explained that +they were from the next village. They had heard rumors of this new +doctrine, and had been sent to find out more about it. They had been +charmed with the singing, for that evening over two hundred voices had +joined in a ringing praise to the new Jehovah-God. They wanted to hear +more, they said, and they wanted to know what it was all about. Would +Kai Bok-su and his students deign to visit their village too? + +Would he? Why that was just what he was longing to do. He had been +driven out of that village by dogs only a few weeks before, but a little +thing like that did not matter to a man like Mackay. This village lay +but a short distance away, being connected with their own by a path +winding here and there between the rice-fields. Early the next evening +Mackay formed a procession. He placed himself at its head, with A Hoa at +his side. The students came next, and then the converts in a double row. +And thus they marched slowly along the pathway singing as they went. It +was a stirring sight. On either side the waving fields of rice, behind +them the gleam of the blue ocean, before them the great towering +mountains clothed in green. Above them shone the clear dazzling sky of +a tropical evening. And on wound the long procession of Christians in a +heathen land, and from them arose the glorious words: + +O thou, my soul, bless God the Lord, And all that in me is Be stirred up +his holy name To magnify and bless. + +And the heathen in the rice-fields stopped to gaze at the strange sight, +and the mountains gave back the echo of that Name which is above every +name. + +And so, marching to their song, the procession came to the village. +Everybody in the place had come out to meet them at the first sound +of the singing. And now they stood staring, the men in a group by +themselves, the women and children in the background, the dogs snarling +on the outskirts of the crowd. + +The congregation was there ready, and without waiting to find a place of +meeting, right out under the clear evening skies, the young missionary +told once more the great story of God and his love as shown through +Jesus Christ. The message took the village by storm. It was like water +to thirsty souls. The next day five hundred of them brought their idols +to the missionary to be burned. + +And now Mackay went up and down the Kap-tsu-lan plain from village to +village as he had done before, but this time it was a triumphal march. +And everywhere he went throngs threw away their idols and declared +themselves followers of the true God. + +He was overcome with joy. It was so glorious he wished he could stay +there the rest of his life and lead these willing people to a higher +life. But Tamsui was waiting; Sin-tiam, Bang-kah, Kelung, Go-ko-khi, +they must all be visited; and finally he tore himself away, leaving some +of his students to care for these people of Kap-tsu-lan. + +But he came back many times, until at last nineteen chapels dotted the +plain, and in them nineteen native preachers told the story of Jesus and +his love. Sometimes, in later years, when Mackay was with them, tears +would roll down the people's faces as they recalled how badly they had +used him on his first visit. + +It was while on his third visit here that he had a narrow escape +from the head-hunters. He was staying at a village called "South Wind +Harbor," which was near the border of savage territory. Mackay often +walked on the shore in the evening just before the meeting, always with +a book in his hand. One night he was strolling along in deep meditation +when he noticed some extremely large turtle tracks in the sand. He +followed them, for he liked to watch the big clumsy creatures. These +green turtles were from four to five feet in length. They would +come waddling up from the sea, scratch a hole in the sand with their +flippers, lay their eggs, cover them carefully, and with head erect and +neck out-thrust waddle back. Mackay was intensely interested in all +the animal life of the island and made a study of it whenever he had +a chance. He knew the savages killed and ate these turtles, but he +supposed he was as yet too near the village to be molested by them. So +he followed the tracks and was nearing the edge of the forest, when he +heard a shout behind him. As he turned, one of his village friends came +running out of his hut waving to him frantically to come back. Thinking +some one must be ill, Mackay hurried toward the man, to find that it was +he himself who was in danger. The man explained breathlessly that it +was the habit of the wily savages to make marks in the sand resembling +turtle tracks to lure people into the forest. If Kai Bok-su had entered +the woods, his head would certainly have been lost. + +It was always hard to say farewell to Kaptsu-lan, the people were so +warm-hearted, so kind, and so anxious for him to stay. One morning just +before leaving after his third visit, Mackay had an experience that +brought him the greatest joy. + +He had stayed all night at the little fishing village where the first +chapel had been built. As usual he was up with the dawn, and after his +breakfast of cold boiled rice and pork he walked down to the shore for +a farewell look at the village. As he passed along the little crooked +street he could see old women sitting on the mud floors of their huts, +by the open door, weaving. They were all poor, wrinkled, toothless old +folk with faces seamed by years of hard heathen experience. But in their +eyes shone a new light, the reflection of the glory that they had seen +when the missionary showed them Jesus their Savior. And as they threw +their thread their quavering voices crooned the sweet words: + +There is a happy land Far, far away. + +And their old weary faces were lighted up with a hope and happiness that +had never been there in youth. + +Kai Bok-su smiled as he passed their doors and his eyes were misty with +tender tears. + +Just before him, playing on the sand with "jacks" or tops, just as he +had played not so very long ago away back in Canada, were the village +boys. And as they played they too were singing, their little piping +voices, sweet as birds, thrilling the morning air. And the words they +sang were: + +Jesus loves me, this I know, For the Bible tells me so. + +They nodded and smiled to Kai Bok-su as he passed. He went down to the +shore where the wide Pacific flung long rollers away up the hard-packed +sand. The fishermen were going out to sea in the rosy morning light, +and as they stood up in their fishing-smacks, and swept their long oars +through the surf, they kept time to the motion with singing. And their +strong, brave voices rang out above the roar of the breakers: + +I'm not ashamed to own my Lord, Or to defend his cause. + +And standing there on the sunlit shore the young missionary raised his +face to the gleaming blue heavens with an emotion of unutterable joy and +thanksgiving. And in that moment he knew what was that glory for which +he had so vaguely longed in childish years. It was the glory of work +accomplished for his Master's sake, and he was realizing it to the full. + + + + +CHAPTER X. REENFORCEMENTS + +Some of Mackay's happiest days were spent with his students. He was such +a wonder of a man for work himself that he inspired every one else to +do his best, so the young men made rapid strides with their lessons. No +matter how busy he was, and he was surely one of the busiest men that +ever lived, he somehow found time for them. + +Sometimes in his house, sometimes on the road, by the seashore, under +a banyan tree, here and there and everywhere, the missionary and his +pupils held their classes. If he went on a journey, they accompanied him +and studied by the way. And it was a familiar sight on north Formosan +roads or field paths to see Mackay, always with his book in one hand and +his big ebony stick under his arm, walking along surrounded by a group +of young men. + +Sometimes there were as many as twenty in the student-band, but +somewhere in the country a new church would open, and the brightest of +the class would be called away to be its minister. But just as often a +young Christian would come to the missionary and ask if he too might not +be trained to preach the gospel of Jesus Christ. + +Whether at home or abroad, pupils and teacher had to resort to all sorts +of means to get away for an uninterrupted hour together. For Kai Bok-su +was always in demand to visit the sick or sad or troubled. + +There was a little kitchen separate from the house on the bluff, and +over this Mackay with his students built a second story. And here they +would often slip away for a little quiet time together. One night, about +eleven o'clock, Mackay was here alone poring over his books. The young +men had gone home to bed except two or three who were in the kitchen +below. Some papers had been dropped over a pipe-hole in the floor of the +room where Mackay was studying, and for some time he had been disturbed +by a rustling among them. At last without looking up, he called to his +boys below: "I think there are rats up here among my papers!" + +Koa Kau, one of the younger of the students, ran lightly up the stairs +to give battle to the intruders. What was his horror when he saw fully +three feet of a monster serpent sticking up through the pipe-hole and +waving its horrible head in the air just a little distance from Kai +Bok-su's chair. + +The boy gave a shout, darted down the stair, and with a sharp stick, +pinned the body of the snake to the wall below. The creature became +terribly violent, but Koa Kau held on valiantly and Mackay seized an +old Chinese spear that happened to be in the room above and pierced +the serpent through the head. They pulled its dead body down into the +kitchen below and spread it out. It measured nine feet. The students +would not rest until it was buried, and the remembrance of the horrible +creature's visit for some time spoiled the charm of the little upper +room. + +The rocks at Kelung harbor were another favorite spot for this little +traveling university to hold its classes. Sometimes they would take +their dinner and row out in a little sampan to the rocks outside the +harbor and there, undisturbed, they would study the whole day long. + +They always began the day's work with a prayer and a hymn of praise, and +no matter what subjects they might study, most of the time was spent on +the greatest of books. After a hard morning's work each one would gather +sticks, make a fire, and they would have their dinner of vegetables, +rice, and pork or buffalo-meat. Then there were oysters, taken fresh off +the rocks, to add to their bill of fare. + +At five in the afternoon, when the strain of study was beginning to +tell, they would vary the program. One or two of the boys would take +a plunge into the sea and bring up a subject for study,--a shell, some +living coral, sea-weed, sea-urchins, or some such treasure. They would +examine it, and Kai Bok-su, always delighted when on a scientific +subject, would give them a lesson in natural history. And he saw with +joy how the wonders of the sea and land opened these young men's minds +to understand what a great and wonderful God was theirs, who had made +"the heaven and the earth and the sea, and all that in them is." + +When they visited a chapel in the country, they had a daily program +which they tried hard to follow. They studied until four o'clock every +afternoon and all were trained in speaking and preaching. After four +they made visits together to Christians or heathen, speaking always a +word for their Master. Every evening a public service was held at which +Mackay preached. These sermons were an important part of the young men's +training, for he always treated the gospel in a new way. A Hoa, who was +Mackay's companion for the greater part of sixteen years, stated that he +had never heard Kai Bok-su preach the same sermon twice. + +On the whole the students liked their college best when it was moving. +For on the road, while their principal gave much time to the Bible and +how to present the gospel, he would enliven their walks by conversing +about everything by the way and making it full of interest. The +structure of a wayside flower, the geological formation of an +overhanging rock, the composition of the soil of the tea plantations, +the stars that shone in the sky when night came down upon them;--all +these made the traveling college a delight. + +Although his days were crammed with work, Mackay found time to make +friends among the European population of the island. They all liked and +admired him, and many of them tried to help the man who was giving his +life and strength so completely to others. They were familiar with his +quick, alert figure passing through the streets of Tamsui, with his +inevitable book and his big ebony cane. And they would smile and say, +"There goes Mackay; he's the busiest man in China." (*) + + * See CHAPTER XIII, Formosa becomes Japanese territory. + +The British consul in the old Dutch fort and the English commissioner +of customs proved true and loyal friends. The representatives of foreign +business firms, too, were always ready to lend him a helping hand where +possible. His most useful friends were the foreign medical men. They +helped him very much. They not only did all they could for his own +recovery when malaria attacked him, but they helped also to cure his +patients. Traveling scientists always gave him a visit to get his help +and advice. He had friends that were shipcaptains, officers, engineers, +merchants, and British consuls. Everybody knew the wonderful Kai Bok-su. +"Whirlwind Mackay," some of them called him, and they knew and admired +him with the true admiration that only a brave man can inspire. + +The friends to whom he turned for help of the best kind were the English +Presbyterians in south Formosa. They, more than any others, knew his +trials and difficulties. They alone could enter with true sympathy into +all his triumphs. At one time Dr. Campbell, one of the south Formosan +missionaries, paid him a visit. He proved a delightful companion, and +together the two made a tour of the mission stations. Dr. Campbell +preached wherever they went and was a great inspiration to the people, +as well as to the students and to the missionary himself. + +One evening, when they were in Kelung, Mackay, with his insatiable +desire to use every moment, suggested that they spend ten days without +speaking English, so that they might improve their Chinese. Dr. Campbell +agreed, and they started their "Chinese only." Next morning from the +first early call of "Liong tsong khi lai," "All, all, up come," not one +word of their native tongue did they speak. They had a long tramp that +morning and there was much to talk about and the conversation was all in +Chinese, according to the bargain. Dr. Campbell was ahead, and after +an hour's talk he suddenly turned upon his companion: "Mackay!" he +exclaimed, "this jabbering in Chinese is ridiculous, and two Scotchmen +should have more sense; let us return to our mother tongue." Which +advice Mackay gladly followed. + +His next visitor was the Rev. Mr. Ritchie from south Formosa, one of the +friends who had first introduced him to his work. Every day of his visit +was a joy. With nine of Mackay's students, the two missionaries set out +on a trip through the north Formosa mission that lasted many weeks. + +But the more pleasant and helpful such companionship was the more alone +Mackay felt when it was over. His task was becoming too much for one +man. He was wanted on the northern coast, at the southern boundary of +his mission field, and away on the Kap-tsu-lan plain all at once. He +was crowded day and night with work. What with preaching, dentistry, +attending the sick, training his students, and encouraging the new +churches, he had enough on his hands for a dozen missionaries. + +But now at last the Church at home, in far-away Canada, bestirred +herself to help him. They had been hearing something of the wonderful +mission in Formosa, but they had heard only hints of it, for Mackay +would not confess how he was toiling day and night and how the work +had grown until he was not able to overtake it alone. But the Church +understood something of his need, and they now sent him the best present +they could possibly give,--an assistant. Just three years after Mackay +had landed in Formosa, the Rev. J. B. Fraser, M. D., and his wife and +little ones arrived. He was a young man, too, vigorous and ready for +work. Besides being an ordained minister, he was a physician as well, +just exactly what the north Formosan mission needed. + +Along with the missionary, the Church had sent funds for a house for him +and also one for Mackay. So the poor old Chinese house on the bluff was +replaced by a modern, comfortable dwelling, and by its side another was +built for the new missionary and his family. One room of Mackay's house +was used as a study for his students. + +After the houses were built and the new doctor was able to use the +language, he began to fill a long-felt want. Mackay had always done a +little medical work, and the foreign doctor of Tamsui had been most kind +in giving his aid, but a doctor of his own, a missionary doctor, was +exactly what Kai Bok-su wanted. Soon the sick began to hear of the +wonders the missionary doctor could perform, and they flocked to him to +be cured. + +It must not be supposed that there were not already doctors in north +Formosa. There were many in Tamsui alone, and very indignant they were +at this new barbarian's success. But the native doctors were about the +worst trouble that the people had to bear. Their medical knowledge, like +their religion, was a mixture of ignorance and superstition, and some +of their practises would have been inexcusable except for the fact that +they themselves knew no better. There were two classes of medical men; +those who treated internal diseases and those who professed to cure +external maladies. It was hard to judge which class did the more +mischief, but perhaps the "inside doctors" killed more of their +patients. Dog's flesh was prescribed as a cure for dyspepsia, a chip +taken from a coffin and boiled and the water drunk was a remedy +for catarrh, and an apology made to the moon was a specific for +wind-roughened skin. For the dreaded malaria, the scourge of Formosa, +the young Canadian doctor found many and amazing remedies prescribed, +some worse than the disease itself. The native doctors believed malaria +to be caused by two devils in a patient, one causing the chills, the +other the fever. One of the commonest remedies, and one that was quite +as sensible as any of the rest, was to tie seven hairs plucked from a +black dog around the sick one's wrist. + +But when the barbarian doctor opened his dispensary in Tamsui, a new +era dawned for the poor sick folk of north Formosa. The work went on +wonderfully well and Mackay found so much more time to travel in the +country that the gospel spread rapidly. + +But just when prospects were looking so fair and every one was happy +and hopeful, a sad event darkened the bright outlook of the two +missionaries. The young doctor had cured scores of cases, and had +brought health and happiness to many homes, but he was powerless to keep +death from his own door. + +And one day, a sad day for the mission of north Formosa, the mother +was called from husband and little ones to her home and her reward in +heaven. + +So the home on the bluff, the beautiful Christian home, which was +a pattern for all the Chinese, was broken up. The young doctor was +compelled to leave his patients, and taking his motherless children he +returned with them to Canada. + +The church at home sent out another helper. The Rev. Kenneth Junor +arrived one year later, and once more the work received a fresh impetus. +And then, just about two years after Mr. Junor's arrival, Kai Bok-su +found an assistant of his own right in Formosa, and one who was destined +to become a wonderful help to him. And so one bright day, there was a +wedding in the chapel of the old Dutch fort, where the British consul +married George Leslie Mackay to a Formosan lady. Tui Chhang Mai, her +name had been. She was of a beautiful Christian character and for a long +time she had been a great help in the church. But as Mrs. Mackay she +proved a marvelous assistance to her husband. + +It had long been a great grief to the missionary that, while the men +would come in crowds to his meetings, the poor women had to be left at +home. Sometimes in a congregation of two hundred there would be only two +or three women. Chinese custom made it impossible for a man missionary +to preach to the women. Only a few of the older ones came out. So the +mothers of the little children did not hear about Jesus and so could not +teach their little ones about him. + +But now everything was changed for them. They had a lady-missionary, and +one of their own people too. The Mackays went on a wedding-trip through +the country. Kai Bok-su walked, as usual, and his wife rode in a +sedan-chair. The wedding-trip was really a missionary tour; for they +visited all the chapels, and the women came to the meetings in crowds, +because they wanted to hear and see the lady who had married Kai Bok-su. +Often, after the regular meetings when the men had gone away, the women +would crowd in and gather round Mrs. Mackay and she would tell them the +story of Jesus and his love. + +It was a wonderful wedding-journey and it brought a double blessing +wherever the two went. Their experiences were not all pleasant. One +day they traveled over a sand plain so hot that Mackay's feet were +blistered. Another time they were drenched with rain. One afternoon +there came up a terrific wind storm. It blew Mrs. Mackay's sedan-chair +over and sent her and the carriers flying into the mud by the roadside. +At another place they all barely escaped drowning when crossing a +stream. But the brave young pair went through it all dauntlessly. The +wife had caught something of her husband's great spirit of sacrifice, +and he was always the man on fire, utterly forgetful of self. + +For two years they worked happily together and at last a great day came +to Kai Bok-su. He had been nearly eight years in Formosa. It was time he +came home, the Church in Canada said, for a little rest and to tell the +people at home something of his great work. + +And so he and his Formosan wife said good-by, amid tears and regrets on +all sides, and leaving Mr. Junor in charge with A Hoa to help, they +set sail for Canada. It was just a little over seven years since he had +settled in that little hut by the river, despised and hated by every one +about him; and now he left behind him twenty chapels, each with a native +preacher over it, and hundreds of warm friends scattered over all north +Formosa. + +He was not quite the same Mackay who had stood on the deck of the +America seven years before. His eyes were as bright and daring as ever +and his alert figure as full of energy, but his face showed that his +life had been a hard one. And no wonder, for he had endured every kind +of hardship and privation in those seven years. He had been mobbed times +without number. He had faced death often, and day and night since his +first year on the island his footsteps had been dogged by the torturing +malaria. + +But he was still the great, brave Mackay and his home-coming was like +the return of a hero from battle. He went through Canada preaching in +the churches, and his words were like a call to arms. He swept over the +country like one of his own Formosan winds, carrying all before him. +Wherever he preached hearts were touched by his thrilling tales, and +purses opened to help in his work. Queen's University made him a Doctor +of Divinity; Mrs. Mackay, a lady of Detroit, gave him money enough to +build a hospital; and his home county, Oxford, presented him with $6,215 +with which to build a college. + +He visited his old home and had many long talks of his childhood +days with his loved ones. And he was reminded of the big stone in the +pasture-field which he was so determined to break. And he thanked his +heavenly Father for allowing him to break the great rock of heathenism +in north Formosa. + +He returned to his mission work more on fire than ever. If he had been +received with acclaim in his native land, his Formosan friends' welcome +was not less warm. Crowds of converts, all his students who were not +too far inland, and among them, Mr. Junor, his face all smiles, were +thronging the dock, many of them weeping for joy. It was as if a +long-absent father had come back to his children. + +The work went forward now by leaps and bounds. Mackay's first thought, +after a hurried visit to the chapels and their congregations, was to see +that the hospital and college were built. + +All day long the sound of the builders could be heard up on the bluff +near the missionaries' houses, and in a wonderfully short time there +arose two beautiful, stately buildings. Mackay hospital they called one, +not for Kai Bok-su--he did not like things named for him--but in memory +of the husband of the kind lady who had furnished the money for it. The +school for training young men in the ministry was called Oxford College, +in honor of the county whose people had made it possible. + +Oxford College stood just overlooking the Tamsui river, two hundred feet +above its waters. The building was 116 feet long and 67 feet wide, and +was built of small red bricks brought from across the Formosa Channel. +A wide, airy hall ran down the middle of the building, and was used as +a lecture-room. On either side were rooms capable of accommodating fifty +students and apartments for two teachers and their families. There +were, besides, two smaller lecture-rooms, a museum filled with treasures +collected from all over Formosa by Dr. Mackay and his students, a +library, a bathroom, and a kitchen. + +The grounds about the college and hospital were very beautiful. Nature +had given one of the finest situations to be found about Tamsui, and Kai +Bok-su did the rest. The climate helped him, for it was no great task to +have a luxurious garden in north Formosa. So, in a few years there were +magnificent trees and hedges, and always glorious flower beds abloom all +the time around the missionary premises. + +But all this was not accomplished without great toil, and Kai Bok-su +appeared never to rest in those building days. It seemed impossible +that one man should work so hard, he was in Tamsui superintending the +hospital building to-day, and away off miles in the country preaching +to-morrow. He never seemed to get time to eat, and he certainly slept +less than his allotted four hours. + +A great disappointment was pending, however, and one he saw coming +nearer every day. The trying Formosan climate was proving too much for +his young assistant, and one sad day he stood on the dock and saw Mr. +Junor, pale and weak and broken in health, sail away back to Canada. + +But there was always a brave soldier waiting to step into the breach, and +the next year Kai Bok-su had the joy of welcoming two new helpers, when +the Rev. Mr. Jamieson and his wife came out from Canada and settled in +the empty house on the bluff. Yes, and in time there came to his own +house other helpers--very little and helpless at first they were--but +they soon made the house ring with happy noise and filled the hearts of +their parents with joy. + +There were two ladies now to lead in the work for girls and women. Their +sisters in Canada came to their help too. The young men had a school in +Formosa, and why should there not be a school for women and girls? they +asked. And so the Women's Foreign Missionary Society of Canada sent to +Dr. Mackay money to build one. It took only two months to erect it. +It stood just a few rods from Oxford College, and was a fine, airy +building. Here a native preacher and his wife took up their abode and +with the help of Mrs. Mackay and two other native Christian women +they strove to teach the girls of north Formosa how to make beautiful +Christian homes. + +And now to the two missionaries every prospect seemed bright. The +college, the girls' school, the hospital, were all in splendid working +order. Mr. and Mrs. Jamieson were giving their best assistance. A Hoa +and the other native pastors were working faithfully. God's blessing +seemed to be showering down upon the work and on every side were signs +of growth. And then, right from this shining sky, there fell a storm +of such fierceness that it threatened to wipe out completely the whole +north Formosan mission. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. UNEXPECTED BOMBARDMENT + +An enemy's battle-ships off the coast of Formosa! During all the spring +rumors of trouble had been coming across the channel from the mainland. +France (*) and China had been quarreling over a boundaryline in Tongking. +The affair had been settled but not in a way that pleased France. So, +without even waiting to declare war, she sent a fleet to the China Sea +and bombarded some of her enemy's ports. Formosa, of course, came in for +her share of the trouble, and it was early in the summer that the French +battle-ships appeared. They hove in sight, sailing down the Formosa +Channel or Strait one hot day, and instantly all Formosa was in an +uproar of alarm and rage. The rage was greater than the alarm, for China +cordially despised all peoples beyond her own border, and felt that the +barbarians would probably be too feeble to do them any harm. But that +the barbarians should dare to approach their coast with a war-vessel! +That was a terrible insult, and the fierce indignation of the people +knew no bounds. Their rage broke out against all foreigners. They did +not distinguish between the missionary from British soil and the French +soldiers on their enemy's vessels. They were all barbarians alike, the +Chinese declared, and as such were the deadly foe of China. This Kai +Bok-su was in league with the French, and the native Christians all over +Formosa were in league with him, and all deserved death! + + * War in 1844. + +So hard days came for the Christians of north Formosa. Wherever there +was a house containing converts, there was riot and disorder. For bands +of enraged heathen, armed with knives and swords, would parade the +streets about them and threaten all with a violent death the moment the +French fired a shot. + +In some places near the coast the Christian people dared not leave their +houses, and whenever they sent out their children to buy food, often a +heathen neighbor would catch them, brandish knives over the terrified +little ones' heads and declare they would all be cut to pieces when the +barbarian ships came into port. + +Every hour of the day and often in the night, letters came from all +parts of the country to Dr. Mackay. They were brought by runners +who came at great peril of their lives, and were sent by the poor +Christians. Each letter told the same tale; the lives and property of +all the converts were in grave danger if the enemy did not leave. And +they all asked Kai Bok-su to do something to help them. + +Now Kai Bok-su was a man with great power and influence both in Formosa +and in his far-off Canada, but he had no means of bringing that power +to bear on the French. And indeed his own life was in as great danger as +any one's. + +He wrote to the Christians comforting them and enthusing them with his +own spirit. He bade them all be brave, and no matter what came, danger +or torture or death itself, they must be true to Jesus Christ. He went +about his work in the college or hospital just as usual, though he knew +that any day the angry mob from the town below might come raging up to +destroy and kill. + +The French had entered Kelung harbor and the danger was growing more +serious every day when Mackay found it necessary to go to Palm Island, +a pretty islet in the mouth of the Kelung river. It was almost courting +death to go, but he had been sent for, and he went. He found the place +right under the French guns and in the midst of raging Chinese. Some of +the faithful students were there, and they were overcome with joy and +hope at the sight of him. He gathered them about him in a mission +house for prayer and a word of encouragement. Outside the Chinese +soldiers paraded up and down. Sometimes indeed they would burst into the +room and threaten the inmates with violence should the French fire. +Kai Bok-su went on quietly talking to his students. He urged them to be +faithful and reminded them of what their Master suffered at the hands of +a mob for their sake. But, in spite of their brave spirits, the little +company could not help listening for the boom of the French guns. It was +fully expected that the enemy would soon fire, and when they did, the +Christians well knew there would be little chance for them to escape. + +But God had prepared a way out of the difficulty. The meeting was +scarcely over when a messenger came in, asking for the missionary. A +Christian on the mainland was very ill and wanted Kai Bok-su to visit +him. Mackay with his students left the island at once and went to the +home of the sick man. + +They had been gone but a short time when the thunder of the French +cannon broke over the harbor. The guns from the Chinese fort answered, +and had the missionary been on Palm Island he and his converts would +surely have been killed. + +The Chinese were no match for the French gunners. The bombardment +destroyed the fort and killed every soldier who did not manage to get +away. A great shell crashed into the magazine of the fort, and the +explosion hurled masses of the concrete walls an incredible distance. +The city about the fort was completely deserted, for the people fled at +the first sound of the guns. + +As soon as the firing was over, the rabble broke loose and a perfect +reign of terror prevailed. The mob carried black flags and swept over +town and country, plundering and murdering. The Christians were of +course the first object of attack, and to tear down a church was the +mob's fiercest joy. Seven of the most beautiful chapels were completely +destroyed and many others injured. + +In the town of Toa-liong-pong was the home of Koa Kau, one of Kai +Bok-su's most devoted students. Here was a lovely chapel built at great +expense. The crowd tore it to pieces from roof to foundation. Then, out +of the bricks of the ruin they erected a huge pile, eight feet high; +they plastered it over with mud, and on the face of it, next the highway +where every one might see it, they wrote in large Chinese characters: + + MACKAY, THE BLACK-BEARDED BARBARIAN, + LIES HERE. HIS WORK IS ENDED. + +They knew that the first was not true, but they firmly believed the +latter statement, for they understood little of the power of the gospel. + +At Sin-tiam the crowd of ruffians smashed the doors and windows of the +church. Then they took the communion roll and read aloud the names of +the Christians who had been baptized. As each name was announced, some +of the murderers would rush off toward the home of the one mentioned. +Here they would torture and often kill the members of the family. The +native preacher and his family barely escaped with their lives. One good +old Christian man with his wife, both over sixty, were dragged out into +the deep water of the Sin-tiam river. Here they were given a choice. +If they gave up Jesus Christ, their lives would be saved. If they still +remained Christians, they would be drowned right there and then. The +brave old couple refused to accept life at such a cost. + +"I'm not ashamed to own my Lord," was a hymn Kai Bok-su had taught them, +and They had meant every word as they had sung it many times in the +pretty chapel by the river. And so they were "not ashamed" now. They +were led deeper and deeper into the water, and at every few feet the way +of escape was offered, but they steadily refused, and were at last flung +into the river--faithful martyrs who certainly won a crown of life. + +These were only two among many brave Christians who died for their +Master's sake. Some were put to tortures too horrible to tell to make +them give up their faith. Some were hung by their hair to trees, some +were kicked or beaten to death, many were slashed with knives until +death relieved their pain. And on every side the most noble Christian +heroism was shown. In all ages there have been those who died for their +faith in Jesus Christ; and these Formosan followers of their Master +proved themselves no less faithful than the martyrs of old. + +And where was Kai Bok-su while the mob raged over the country? Going +about his work in Tamsui as of old. Only now he worked both night and +day, and the anxiety for his poor converts kept him awake in the few +hours when he might have snatched some sleep. He was here, there, +everywhere at once, it seemed, writing letters to encourage the +Christians in distress, visiting those who were wavering to strengthen +their faith, teaching his students, praying, preaching, night and day, +he never ceased; and always the mob surged about him threatening his +life. + +The French ships now sailed out of Kelung harbor and took up +their position opposite Tamsui. Every one knew this probably meant +bombardment, and Dr. Mackay and Mr. Jamieson, standing on the bluff +before their houses, looked at each other and each knew the other's +thought. Bombardment would mean that the mob would come raging up and +destroy both life and property on the hill. + +But just as they expected the roar of guns to open, there sailed into +Tamsui harbor a vessel that flew a different flag from the French. +Mackay, looking at her through a glass, made out with joy the crosses +on the red banner of Britain! England had nothing to do with this +Chinese-French war, but as a British vessel can be found lying around +almost any port in the wide world, there of course happened to be one +near Tamsui. She gained a passport into the harbor and sailed in with a +very kindly mission; it was to protect the lives of foreigners, not only +from the French guns, but from the Chinese mobs. + +The ship had been in the harbor but a short time when a young English +naval officer, carrying the British flag, came up the path to the houses +on the bluff. Dr. Mackay was in the library of Oxford College, lecturing +to his students, when the visitor entered. + +The missionary made the sailor welcome and the young man told his +errand. Dr. Mackay was invited to bring his family and his valuables +and come on board the vessel to be the guest of the captain until the +disturbance was over. + +It was a most kindly invitation and Dr. Mackay shook his visitor's hand +warmly as he thanked him. He turned and translated the message to his +students, and their hearts stood still with dismay. If Kai Bok-su, their +stay and support, were to be taken away, what would become of them? But +Kai Bok-su had not changed with the changing circumstances. He was still +as brave and undaunted as though trouble had never come to his island. + +He turned to the officer again with a smile. "My family would not be +hard to move," he said, "but my valuables--I am afraid I could not take +them." He made a gesture toward the students standing about him. "These +young men and many more converts scattered all over north Formosa, are +my valuables. Many of them have faced death unflinchingly for my sake. +They are my valuables, and I cannot leave them." + +It was bravely said, just as Kai Bok-su might be expected to speak, and +the English officer's eyes kindled with appreciation. The words found +a ready response in his heart. They were the words of a true soldier of +the King. The officer went back to his captain with Mackay's message and +with a deep admiration in his heart for the man who would rather face +death than leave his friends. + +So the British man-of-war drew off, leaving the missionaries in the +midst of danger. And almost immediately, with a great bursting roar, the +bombardment from the French ships opened. Sometimes the shells flew +high over the town and up to the bluff, so Dr. and Mrs. Mackay put their +three little ones in a safe corner under the house; but they themselves +as well as Mr. and Mrs. Jamieson, went in and out to and from the +college, and the girls' school as though nothing were happening. + +Every day Mackay's work grew heavier and his anxiety for the persecuted +Christians grew deeper. He ate very little, and he scarcely slept at +all. It was not the noise of the carnage about him that kept him awake. +He would have fallen asleep peacefully amidst bursting shells, but he +had no opportunity. The whole burden of the young Church, harassed by +persecution on all sides, seemed to rest upon his spirit. Anxiety +for the Christians in the inland stations from whom he could not hear +weighed on him night and day, and his brave spirit was put to the +severest test. + +Only his great strong faith in God kept him up and kept up the spirits +of the converts who looked to him for an example. And a brave pattern +he showed them. Often he and A Hoa paced the lawn in front of the +house while shot and shell whizzed around them. During the worst of the +bombardment they came and went between the college and the house as +if they had charmed lives. One day there was a great roar and a shell +struck Oxford College, shaking it to its foundations. The smoke from +fort and ships had scarcely cleared away when, crash! and the girls' +school was struck by a bursting shell. Next moment there was a fearful +bang and a great stone that stood in front of the Mackays' house went up +into the air in a thousand fragments. + +But when the firing was hottest, Kai Bok-su would repeat to his students +the comforting Psalm: + +"Thou shalt not be afraid for the terror by night; nor for the arrow +that flieth by day." + +But in spite of his brave demeanor, the strain on the shepherd of this +harassed flock was beginning to tell. And when the bombardment ceased +and the intense anxiety for his loved ones was over, Kai Bok-su suddenly +collapsed. Dr. Johnsen, the foreign physician of Tamsui, came hurriedly +up to the mission house to see him. His verdict sent a thrill of dismay +through every heart that loved him, from the anxious little wife by the +patient's side, to the poorest convert in the town below. Their beloved +Kai Bok-su had brain fever. + +"Too much anxiety and too little sleep," said the medical man. "He must +sleep now," he added, "or he will die." But now that Kai Bok-su had a +chance to rest, he could not. Sleep had been chased away too long to +stay with him. Night and day he tossed about, wide awake and burning +with fever. His temperature was never less than 102 during those days, +and all the doctor's efforts could not lower it. The awful heat of +September was on, and the great typhoons that would soon sweep across +the country and clear the air had not yet come. The glaring sun and the +stifling damp heat were all against the patient. At last one day the +doctor saw a crisis was approaching. He stood looking down at the hot, +flushed face, at the burning eyes, and the restless hands that were +never still, and he said to himself, "If the fever does not go down +to-day, he will die." + +The doctor went along "College Road" toward his home, answering the +eager, anxious questions that met him on all sides with only a shake of +his head. + +A Hoa followed him, his drawn face full of pleading. Was he no better? +he asked with quivering lips. It was the question poor A Hoa asked many, +many times a day, for he never left the house when not away on duty. The +doctor's face was full of sympathy and his own heart weighed down as he +sadly answered, "No." + +"If I only had some ice," he muttered, knowing well he had none. "If +there was only one bit of ice in Tamsui, I'd save him yet." + +Over in the British consulate Dr. Johnsen had another patient. Mr. Dodd +lay sick there, though not nearly as ill as the missionary, and the +physician's next visit was to him. When he entered he found a servant +carrying a tray with some ice on it to the sick room. + +"Ice!" cried the doctor, overjoyed. "Where did it come from?" + +The servant explained that the steamship Hailoong had just arrived in +Tamsui harbor with it that morning. The doctor entered Mr. Dodd's room. +Would he give him that ice to save Mackay's life? was the question he +asked. To save such a life as Mackay's! That was an absurd question, Mr. +Dodd declared, and he immediately ordered that every bit of ice he had +should be sent at once to the missionary's house. + +The doctor hurried back up the hill with the precious remedy. He broke +up a piece and laid it like a little cushion on poor Kai Bok-su's hot +forehead; that forehead beneath which the busy brain, resting neither +day nor night, was burning up. It had not been there a great while +before the restless eyes lost their fire, the eyelids drooped and, +wonderful sight, Kai Bok-su sank into a sleep! The doctor hardly dared +to breathe If he could only be kept asleep now, he had a chance. Dr. +Mackay had never been a sleeper, he well knew. He was too restless, too +energetic, to allow himself even proper rest. When Dr. Fraser, his first +assistant, had been with him, he had struggled to persuade him to stay +in bed at least six hours every night, but not always with success. But +now he was to show what he could do in the matter of sleeping. All +that night he lay, breathing peacefully, the next day he slept on from +morning till night, and little by little the ice melted away on his +forehead. He did not move all the next night, and A Hoa and Mrs. Mackay +and the doctor took turns at his bedside watching that the precious +ice was always there. Morning came and it was all finished. The patient +opened his eyes. He had slept thirty-six hours, and a thrill of joy went +through every Christian heart in Tamsui, for their Kai Bok-su was saved! + +But though the crisis was over, he was still very weak, and such was the +state of affairs through the country that he was in no condition to cope +with them. Riot and plunder was the order of the day. News of churches +being destroyed, of faithful Christians being tortured or put to death, +were still coming to the mission house, and no one could tell what day +would bring Kai Boksu's turn. + +And now came an order from the British consul which the missionaries +could not disobey. He commanded that their families must be moved at +once from Formosa, as he could not answer for their protection. So at +once preparations for their departure were made, and Mr. Jamieson took +his wife and Mrs. Mackay and her three little ones and sailed away for +Hongkong. + +But once more Kai Bok-su stayed behind. It cost him bitter pain to part +with his loved ones, knowing he might never see them again; he was weak +and spent with fever, and his poor body was worn to a shadow, but +he stubbornly refused to leave the men who had stood by him in every +danger. The consul commanded, the doctor pleaded, but no, Kai Bok-su +would not go. If the danger had grown greater, then all the more reason +why he should stay and comfort his people. And if God were pleased to +send death, then they would all die together. + +But he was so weak and sick that the doctor feared that if he remained +there would be little chance for the mob to kill him: death would come +sooner. So he came to his stubborn patient with a new proposition. The +Fukien, a merchant steamship, was now lying in Tamsui harbor. She was to +run to Hongkong and back directly. If Mackay would only take that trip, +his physician urged, the sea air would make him new again, and he would +return in a short time and be ready to take up his work once more. + +It was that promise that moved Mackay's resolution. His utter weakness +held him down from work, and he longed with all his soul to go out +through the country to help the poor, suffering churches. So he finally +consented to take the short journey and pay a visit to his dear ones in +Hongkong. + +He did not get back quite as soon as he intended, for the French +blockade delayed his vessel. But at last he stepped out upon the Tamsui +dock into a crowd of preachers, students, and converts who were weeping +for joy about him and exclaiming over his improved looks. + +The voyage had certainly done wonders for him, and at once he declared +he must take a trip into the country and visit those who were left of +the churches. + +It was a desperate undertaking, for French soldiers were now scattered +through the country, guarding the larger towns and cities and everywhere +mobs of furious Chinese were ready to torture or kill every foreigner. +But it would take even greater difficulties than these to stop Kai +Bok-su, and he began at once to lay plans for going on a tour. + +He first went to the British consul and came back in high spirits with a +folded paper in his hand. He spread it out on the library table before A +Hoa and Sun-a, who were to go with him, and this is what it said: + +British Consulate, Tamsui, + +May 27th, 1885. + +To THE OFFICER IN CHIEF COMMAND OF THE FRENCH FORCES AT KELUNG: + +The bearer of this paper, the Rev. George Leslie Mackay, D.D., a British +subject, missionary in Formosa, wishes to enter Kelung, to visit his +chapel and his house there, and to proceed through Kelung to Kap-tsu-lan +on the east coast of Formosa to visit his converts there. Wherefore I, +the undersigned, consul for Great Britain at Tamsui, do beg the officer +in chief command of the French forces in Kelung to grant the said George +Leslie Mackay entry into, and a free and safe passage through, Kelung. +He will be accompanied by two Chinese followers, belonging to his +mission, named, respectively, Giam Chheng Hoa, and Iap Sun. A. FRATER, +Her Britannic Majesty's Consul at Tamsui. + +They had all the power of the British Empire behind them so long as they +held that paper. Then they hired a burdenbearer to carry their food, +and Mackay cut a bamboo pole, fully twenty feet long, and on it tied +the British flag. With this floating over them, the little army marched +through the rice-fields down to Kelung. + +It was an adventurous journey. But, wonderful though it seemed, they +came through it safely. Poor Kai Bok-su's heart was torn as he saw the +ravages the mob had made on his churches. But what a cheer his heart +received when he found that persecution had strengthened the converts +that were left and everywhere the heathen marveled that men should +die for the faith the barbarian missionary had taught. They were taken +prisoners once for German spies, and led far out of their way. But +they came back to Tamsui safely, having greatly cheered the faithful +Christians who still were true to their Master, Jesus Christ. It was +early in June, just one year from the opening of the war, that the +French sailed away. They were disgusted with the whole affair, the +commander of one vessel told Dr. Mackay, and they were all very glad it +was over. + +Mr. and Mrs. Jamieson and Dr. Mackay's family returned to their homes on +the bluff, and work started up again with its old vigor. + +But everywhere the heathen were in great glee. Christianity had been +destroyed with the chapels, they were sure. Wherever Mackay went, shouts +of derision followed him, and everywhere he could hear the joyful cry +"Long-tsong bo-khi!" which meant "The mission is wiped out!" + +But strange though it may seem, the mission had never been stronger, and +it soon began to assert itself. Dr. Mackay went at the work of repairing +the lost buildings with all the force of his nature. First, he and Mr. +Jamieson and A Hoa sat down and prepared a statement of their losses. +This they sent to the commander-in-chief of the Chinese forces, who had +been responsible for law and order. Without any delay or questioning +of the missionaries' rights, the general sent Dr. Mackay the sum asked +for--ten thousand Mexican dollars. (*) + + *About $5000. + +The next thing was to plan the new chapels and see to the building of +them. And before the shouts of "Long-tsong bo-khi" had well started, +they began to be contradicted by walls of brick or stone that rose up +strong and sure to show that the mission had not been wiped out. Three +of the chapels were commenced all at once--at Sintiam, at Bang-kah and +at Sek-khau. Before anything was done Dr. Mackay and a party of his +students went up to Sin-tiam to look over the site. They stood up on the +pile of ruins, surrounded by the Christians, and a crowd of heathen came +around gleefully to watch them in the hopes of seeing their despair. + +But to their amazement the little company of Christians led by the +wonderful Kai Bok-su, suddenly burst into a hymn of praise to God who +had brought them safely through all their troubles: + +Bless, O my soul, the Lord thy God, And not forgetful be Of all his +gracious benefits He hath bestowed on thee! + +The heathen listened in wonder to the words of praise where they had +expected lamentation, and they asked each other what was this strange +power that made men so strong and brave. + +And their amazement grew as the chapels, the lovely new chapels of stone +or brick, began to rise from the ruins of the old ones. And not only did +the old ones reappear, new and more beautiful, but as Dr. Mackay and +his native preachers went here and there over the country others peeped +forth like the hepaticas of springtime, until there were not only the +forty original chapels, but in a few years the number had increased to +sixty. + +The triumphant shout that the mission had been wiped out ceased +completely, and the people declared that they had been fools to try +to destroy the chapels, for the result had been only bigger and better +ones. + +"Look now," said one old heathen, pointing a withered finger to the +handsome spire of the Bang-kah chapel, that lifted itself toward the +sky, "Look now, the chapel towers above our temple. It is larger than +the one we destroyed." + +His neighbors crowding about him and gazing up with superstitious awe at +the spire, agreed. + +"If we touch this one he will build another and a bigger one," remarked +another man. + +"We cannot stop the barbarian missionary," said the old heathen with an +air of conviction. + +"No, no one can stop the great Kai Boksu," they finally agreed, and so +they left off all opposition in despair. + +Yes, the cry of "Long-tsong bo-khi" had died, and the answer to it was +inscribed on the front of the splendid chapels that sprang up all over +north Formosa. For, just above the main entrance to each, worked out +in stucco plaster, was a picture of the burning bush, and around it in +Chinese the grand old motto: + +"Nec tamen consumebatur" ("Yet it was not consumed.") + + + + +CHAPTER XII. TRIUMPHAL MARCH + +Up and down the length and breadth of north Formosa, seeming to be +in two or three places at once, went Kai Bok-su, during this time of +reviving after the war. He would be in Kelung to-day superintending +the new chapel building, in Tamsui at Oxford College the next day, in +Bangkah preaching a short while after, and no one could tell just +where the next day. + +But every one did know that wherever he went, Christians grew stronger +and heathen gave up their idols. The Kap-tsu-lan plain, away on the +eastern coast, seemed to be a sort of pet among all his mission fields, +and he was always turning his steps thither. For the Pe-pohoan who lived +there, while they were simple and warm-hearted and easily moved by the +gospel story, were not such strong characters as the Chinese. So the +missionary felt he must visit them often to help steady their faith. + +Not long after the close of the war, he set off on a trip to the +Kap-tsu-lan plain. Besides his students, he was accompanied by a young +German scientist Dr. Warburg had come from Germany to Formosa to collect +peculiar plants and flowers and to find any old weapons or relics of +interest belonging to the savage tribes. All these were for the use of +the university in Germany which had sent him out. + +The young scientist was delighted with Dr. Mackay and found in him a +very interesting companion. They met in Kelung, and when Dr. Warburg +found that Dr. Mackay was going to visit the Kap-tsu-lan plain, he +joined his party. The stranger found many rare specimens of orchids on +that trip and several peculiar spear and arrow heads to be taken back as +curios to Germany. But he found something rarer and more wonderful and +something for which he had not come to search. + +He saw in one place three hundred people gather about their missionary +and raise a ringing hymn of praise to the God of heaven, of whom they +had not so much as heard but a few short years before. He visited +sixteen little chapels and heard clever, brightfaced young Chinese +preachers stand up in them and tell the old, old story of Jesus and his +love. And he realized that these things were far more wonderful than the +rarest curios he could find in all Formosa. + +When he bade good-by to Dr. Mackay, he said: "I never saw anything like +this before. If scientific skeptics had traveled with a missionary as +I have and witnessed what I have witnessed on this plain, they would +assume a different attitude toward the heralds of the cross." + +Not many months later Dr. Mackay again went down the eastern coast. This +time he took three of his closest friends, all preacher students, Tan +be, Sun-a, and Koa Kau. With a coolie to carry provisions, their +Bibles, their forceps, and some malaria medicine, they started off fully +equipped. + +By steam launch to Bang-kah, by a queer little railway train to +Tsui-tng-kha and by foot to Kelung was the first part of the journey. +The next part was a tramp over the mountains to Kap-tsu-lan. + +The road now grew rough and dangerous. Overhead hung loose rocks, huge +enough to crush the whole party should they fall. Underneath were wet, +slippery stones which might easily make one go sliding down into the +chasm below. + +As usual on this trip they had many hairbreadth escapes, for there were +savages too hiding up in the dense forest and waiting an opportunity to +spring out upon the travelers. Dr. Mackay was almost caught in a small +avalanche also. He leaped over a narrow stream-bed, and as he did so, +he dislodged a loose mass of rock above him. It came down with a fearful +crash, scattering the smaller pieces right upon his heels; but they +passed all dangers safely and toward evening reached the shore where +the great long Pacific billows rolled upon the sand. They were in the +Kap-tsu-lan plain. + +Their journey through the plain was like a triumphal march. Wherever a +chapel had been erected, there were converts to be examined; wherever +there was no chapel, the people gathered about the missionary and +pleaded for one. They often recalled the first visit of Kai Bok-su when +"No room for barbarians" were the only words that met him. + +But Dr. Mackay wished to go farther on this journey than he had ever +gone. Some distance south of Kap-tsu-lan lay another district called the +Ki-lai plain. The people here were also aborigines of the island who had +been conquered by the Chinese like the Pepo-hoan. But the inhabitants of +Ki-lai were called Lam-si-hoan, which means "Barbarians of the south." +Dr. Mackay had never been among them, but they had heard the gospel. A +missionary from Oxford College had journeyed away down there to tell the +people about Jesus and had been working among them for some years. He +was not a graduate, not even a student--but only the cook! For Oxford +College was such a place of inspiration under Kai Bok-su, that even the +servants in the kitchen wanted to go out and preach the gospel. So the +cook had gone away to the Ki-lai plain, and, ever since he had left, Dr. +Mackay had longed to go and see how his work was prospering. + +So at one of the most southerly points of the Kap-tsu-lan plain he +secured a boat for the voyage south. The best he could get was a small +craft quite open, only twelve feet long. It was not a very fine vessel +with which to brave the Pacific Ocean, but where was the crazy craft +in which Kai Bok-su would not embark to go and tell the gospel to the +heathen? The boat was manned by six Pe-po-hoan rowers, all Christians, +and at five o'clock in the evening they pushed out into the surf of So +Bay. A crowd of converts came down to the shore to bid them farewell. As +the boat shoved off the friends on the beach started a hymn. The rowers +and the missionaries caught it up and the two groups joined, the +sound of each growing fainter and fainter to the other as the distance +widened. + +All lands to God in joyful sounds Aloft your voices raise, Sing forth +the honor of his name, And glorious make his praise! + +And the land and the sea, answering each other, joined in praise to him +who was the Maker of both. + +And so the rowers pulled away in time to the swing of the Psalm, the +boat rounded a point, and the beloved figure of Kai Bok-su disappeared +from sight. + +Away down the coast the oarsmen pulled, and the four missionaries +squeezed themselves into as small a space as possible to be out of the +way of the oars. All the evening they rowed steadily, and as they still +swept along night came down suddenly. They kept close to the shore, +where to their right arose great mountains straight up from the water's +edge. They were covered with forest, and here and there in the blackness +fires twinkled. + +"Head-hunters!" said the helmsman, pointing toward them. + +Away to the left stretched the Pacific Ocean, and above shone the stars +in the deep blue dome. It was a still, hot tropical night. From the land +came the heavy scent of flowers. The only sound that broke the stillness +was the regular thud, thud of the oars or the cry of some wild animal +floating out from the jungle. As they passed on through the warm +darkness, the sea took on that wonderful fiery glow that so often +burns on the oceans of the tropics. Every wave became a blaze of +phosphorescence. Every ripple from the oars ran away in many-colored +flames--red, green, blue, and orange. Kai Bok-su, sitting amazed at the +glory to which the Pe-po-hoan boatmen had become accustomed, was silent +with awe. He had seen the phosphorescent lights often before, but never +anything like this. He put his hand down into the molten sea and scooped +up handfuls of what seemed drops of liquid fire. And as his fingers +dipped into the water they shone like rods of red-hot iron. Over the +gleaming iridescent surface, sparks of fire darted like lightning, and +from the little boat's sides flashed out flames of gold and rose and +amber. It was grand. And no wonder they all joined--Chinese, Malayan, +and Canadian--in making the dark cliffs and the gleaming sea echo to the +strains of praise to the One who had created all this glory. + + O come let us sing to the Lord, + To him our voices raise With joyful noise, + Let us the rock Of our salvation praise. + To him the spacious sea belongs, + For he the same did make; + The dry land also from his hand + Its form at first did take. + +Dawn came up out of the Pacific with a new glory of light and color that +dispelled the wonders of the night. It showed the voyagers that they +were very near a low shore where it would be possible to land. But the +helmsman shook his head at the proposal. He pointed out huts along the +line of forest and figures on the shore. And then with a common +impulse, the rowers swung round and pulled straight out to sea; for with +Pe-po-hoan experience they saw at once that here was a savage village, +and not long would their heads remain on their shoulders should they +touch land. + +The scorching sun soon poured its hot rays upon the tired rowers, but +they pulled steadily. They too, like Kai Bok-su, were anxious to take +this great good news of Jesus Christ to those who had not yet learned of +him. When safely out of reach of the headhunters, they once more turned +south, and, about noon, tired and hot, at last approached the first port +of the Ki-lai plain. Every one drew a sigh of relief, for the men had +been rowing steadily all night and half the day. As they drew near +Dr. Mackay looked eagerly at the queer village. It appeared to be half +Chinese and half Lam-si-hoan. It consisted of two rows of small thatched +houses with a street between nearly two hundred feet wide. + +The rowers ran the boat up on the sloping pebbly beach and all stepped +out with much relief to stretch their stiffened limbs. They had scarcely +done so when a military officer came down the shore and approaching Dr. +Mackay made him welcome with the greatest warmth. There was a military +encampment here, and this was the officer as well as the headman of the +village. He invited Dr. Mackay and his friends to take dinner with him. +Dr. Mackay accepted with pleased surprise. This was far better than +he had expected. He was still more surprised to hear his name on every +hand. + +"It is the great Kai Bok-su," could be heard in tones of deepest respect +from fishermen at their nets and old women by the door and children +playing with their kites in the wide street. + +"How do they know me?" he asked, as he was greeted by a rice-seller, +sitting at the open front of his shop. + +"Ah, we have heard of you and your work in the north, Pastor Mackay," +said his host, smiling, "and our people want to hear of this new +Jehovah-religion too." + +The cook-missionary had evidently spread wonderful reports of Kai +Bok-su and his gospel and so prepared the way. He was preaching just +then in a place called Ka-le-oan, farther inland. When the officer +learned that Dr. Mackay wanted to visit him he turned to his servant +with a most surprising order. It was to saddle his pony and bring him +for Kai Bok-su to ride to Ka-le-oan. + +The pony came, sleek and plump and with a string of jingling bells +adorning him. A pony was a wonderful sight in Formosa, and Dr. Mackay +had not used any sort of animal in his work since that disastrous day +when he had tried in vain to ride the stubborn Lu-a. But now he gladly +mounted the sedate little steed and trotted away along the narrow +pathway between the rice-fields toward Ka-le-oan. + +Darkness had almost descended when he rode into the village and stopped +before a small grass-covered bamboo dwelling where the cook-preacher +lived. For years the people here had looked for Kai Bok-su's coming, for +years they had talked of this great event, and for years their preacher +had been writing and saying as he received his reply from the eager +missionary in Tamsui, "He may come soon." + +And now he was really here! The sound of his horse's bells had scarcely +stopped before the preacher's house, when the news began to spread +like fire through the village. The preacher, who had worked so hard +and waited so long, wept for joy, and before he could make Dr. Mackay +welcome in a proper manner the room was filled with men, all wildly +eager for a sight of the great Kai Bok-su, while outside a crowd +gathered about the door striving to get even a glimpse of him. The +ex-cook of Oxford College had preached so faithfully that many were +already converted to Christianity, many more knew a good deal of the +gospel, and crowds were ready to throw away their idols. They were +weary of their heathen rites and superstitions. They were longing for +something better, they scarcely knew what. "But the mandarin will not +let them become Christians," said the preacher anxiously. "It is he who +is keeping them from decision. He has said that they must continue in +idolatry, as a token of loyalty to China." + +"Are you sure that is true?" cried Dr. Mackay. + +The converts nodded. They had "heard" it said at least. + +But Kai Bok-su was not the man to accept mere hearsay. He was always +wisely careful to avoid any collision with the authorities. But +remembering the kindness shown him back in Hoe-lien-kang, he could not +quite believe that the mandarin who had been so kind to him could be +hostile to the religion of Jesus Christ. + +To think was to act, and early the next morning, he was riding back to +the seacoast, to inquire how much of this rumor was true. + +His reception was very warm. It was all right, the officer declared. +Whatever had been said or done in the past must be forgotten. Kai Bok-su +might go where he pleased and preach his Jehovah-religion to whomsoever +he would. + +It was a very light-hearted rider the pony carried as he galloped back +along the narrow paths, with the good news for the villagers. The word +went round as soon as he arrived. Kai Bok-su wanted to know how many +were for the true God. All who would worship him were at once to clear +their houses of idols and declare that they would serve Jehovah and him +only. At dark a great crowd gathered in an open space in the village. +Representatives from five villages were there, chiefs were shouting to +their people, and when Dr. Mackay and his students arrived, the place +was all noise and confusion. He was puzzled. It almost looked as if +there was to be a riot, though the voices did not sound angry. + +He climbed up on a pile of rubbish and his face shone clear in the light +of the flaring torches. His voice rang out loud and commanding above the +tumult. + +"What is this noise about?" he cried. "Is there a difference of opinion +among you as to whether you shall worship these poor toys of wood and +stone, or the true God who is your Father?" + +He paused and as if from one man came back the answer in a mighty shout: + +"No, we will worship the true God!" + +The tumult had been one of enthusiasm and not of dispute! + +Kai Bok-su's heart gave a great bound. For a moment he could not speak. +He who had so often stood up fearless and bold before a raging heathen +mob, now faltered before this sea of eager faces, upturned to him. +It seemed too good to be true that all this crowd, representing five +villages, was anxious to become followers of the God of heaven. His +voice grew steady at last, and standing up there in the flickering +torchlight he told those children of the plain what it meant to be a +follower of Jesus Christ. It was a late hour when the meeting broke up, +but even then Dr. Mackay could not go to bed. Never since the day that A +Hoa, his first convert, had accepted Jesus Christ as his Savior, had +he felt such joy, and all night he walked up and down in front of the +preacher's house, unable to sleep for the thankfulness to God that +surged in his heart. + +Morning brought a wonderful day for the Ki-lai plain. It was like a day +when freedom from slavery was announced. Had there been bells in the +village they would certainly have been rung. But joy bells were ringing +in every heart. Nobody could work all day. The rice-fields and the shops +and the pottery works lay idle. There was but one business to do that +day, and that was to get rid of their idols. + +Early in the morning the mayor of the place, or the headman as he was +called, came to the house to invite the missionary and his party to join +him. Behind him walked four big boys, carrying two large wicker baskets, +hanging from poles across their shoulders; and behind them came the +whole village, men, women, and children, their faces shining with a new +joy. The procession moved along from house to house. At every place it +stopped and out from the home were carried idols, ancestral tablets, +mock-money, flags, incense sticks, and all the stuff used in idol +worship. These were all emptied into the baskets carried by the boys. +When even the temple had been ransacked and the work of clearing out the +idols in the village was finished, the procession moved on to the next +hamlet. The villages were very near each other, so the journey was not +wearisome; and at last when every vestige of the old idolatrous life had +been taken from the homes of five villages, the happy crowd marched back +to the first village. There was a large courtyard near the temple and +here the procession halted. The boys dropped their well-filled baskets, +and their contents were piled in the center of the court. The people +gathered about the heap and with shouts of joy set fire to these signs +of their lifelong slavery. Soon the pile was blazing and crackling, and +all the people, even the chiefs of the villages, vied with each other in +burning up the idols they had so lately besought for blessings. + +And then they turned toward the heathen temple and delivered it over to +Kai Bok-su for a chapel in which he and his students might preach the +gospel. + +And so the temple was lighted up for a new kind of worship. It had been +used for worship many, many times before, but oh, how different it was +this time! Instead of coming in fear of demons, dread of their gods' +anger, and determination to cheat them if possible, these poor folk +crowded into the new-old temple with light, happy hearts, as children +coming to their Father. And was not God their Father, only they had not +known him before? + +The heathen temple was dedicated to the worship of the true God by +singing the old but always new, one hundredth Psalm. The Lam-si-hoan +were not very good singers. They had not much idea of tune. They had +less idea of just when to start, and there was very little to be said +about the harmony of those hundreds of voices. But in spite of it all, +Kai Bok-su had to confess that never in the music of his homeland or in +the more finished harmonies of Europe, had he heard anything so grandly +uplifting as when those newly-freed people stood up in their idol temple +and with heart and soul and voice unitedly poured forth in thunderous +volume of praise the great command: + +All people that on earth do dwell, Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice. + +For a whole week with his pony and groom, which were still his to do +with as he pleased, the busy missionary rode up and down this plain, +visiting the villages, preaching, and teaching the people how to live +as Jesus Christ their Savior had lived; for it was necessary to impress +upon their childlike minds that it would be of no use to burn up the +idols in their homes and temple unless they also gave up the still more +harmful idols in their hearts. + +But at last the day came when the pony had to be returned to its owner +and the missionary and his helpers must leave. It was a sad day but +a joyous one--the day that great visit came to an end. Crowds of +Christians, fain to keep him, followed him down to the shore, and many +kindly but reluctant hands shoved the little boat out into the surf. And +as the rowers sent it skimming out over the great Pacific rollers, there +rose from the beach the parting hymn, the one that had dedicated the +heathen temple to the worship of the true God: + + All people that on earth do dwell, + Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice. + +and from the rowers and the missionaries in the boat, came back the glad +echo: + +Know that the Lord is God indeed Without our aid he did us make. + +They were soon out of sight. The rowers pulled hard, but a stiff +northeaster straight from Japan was blowing against them, and they made +but little headway. Night came down, and they were again skirting those +dark cliffs, where, here and there, along the narrow strip of sand, +the night-fires of the savages flamed out against the dark tangle of +foliage. All night long the rowers struggled against the wind. They were +afraid to go out far for the waves were wild, they dared not land, for, +crueler than the sea, the head-hunters waited for them on the shore. And +so all that night, taking turns with the rowers, the missionary and his +students toiled against the wind and wave. The dawn came up gray and +stormy, and they were still tossing about among the white billows. No +one had touched food for twenty-four hours. They had rice in the boat, +but there was no place where they dared land to have it cooked. There +was nothing to do but to pull, pull at the oars, and a weary task it +seemed, for the boat appeared to make little headway, and the rowers +barely succeeded in keeping her from being dashed upon the rocks. + +They were becoming almost too weak to keep any control over their boat, +when about three o'clock in the afternoon they managed to round a +point. There before them curved a beautiful bay. Behind it and on both +sides arose a perpendicular wall several hundred feet high. At its +foot stretched a narrow sandy beach. It was an ideal spot, secure from +savages both by land and sea. A shout of encouragement from Kai Bok-su +was the one thing needed. Tired arms and aching backs bent to the oars +for one last effort, and when the boat swept up on the sandy beach every +one uttered a heartfelt prayer of thankfulness to the Father who had +provided this little haven in a time of such distress. + +The rest of the journey was made safely, and just forty days after their +departure the four missionaries returned, worn out, to Tamsui. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. THE LAND OCCUPIED + +But Kai Bok-su had no sooner returned than he was off again. He was not +one of that sort who could settle down after an achievement, content to +rest for a little. He seemed to forget all about what had been done +and was "up and at it again." If he "did not know when he was beaten," +neither did he seem to know when he was successful; and like Alexander +the Great he was always sighing for new worlds to conquer, yes, and +marching off and conquering them too. + +But every time he returned to his work at Tamsui from one of these +tours, it was borne in upon him more forcibly every day that his +faithful assistant who was left in charge, could not long shoulder his +work. Mr. Jamieson was fighting a losing battle with ill health. The +terrible experiences during the war year, the hard work, and the trying +Formosan climate had all combined against him. His brave spirit could +not always sustain the body that was growing gradually weaker, and +one day, a dark, sad day, the devoted soul was set free from the poor +pain-racked body. He had given eight years of hard, faithful work to the +study of the language and to the service of the Master in the mission. +Mrs. Jamieson returned to Canada, and once more Dr. Mackay faced the +work, unaided except by native preachers. But he was not daunted even by +this bereavement, for he always lived in the perfect faith that God was +on his side. + +And then, he had by this time three new assistants in the mission-house +on the bluff. They did not even guess that they were any help to him, +for they could never go with him on his mission tours. But by their +sweet merry ways and their joyous welcome to father, when he returned, +they did help him greatly, and made his home-comings a delight. + +"How many did you baptize, father?" was baby George's inevitable +question on his father's return. For already the wise toddler had +learned something of the bitter enmity of the heathen world, and knew +that converts meant friends. Then father's home-coming meant presents +too, wonderful things, bows and arrows, rare curios for the museum in +the college, and, once, a pair of the funniest monkeys in the world, +which proved most entertaining playthings for the little boy and his two +sisters. Another time the father brought home a young bear to keep the +monkeys company, but they were not at all polite to their guest, for +they made poor bruin's life miserable by teasing him. They would torment +him until he would stamp with rage. But he was not always badly used, +for when the three children would come out to feed him, he was very +happy, and he would show his pleasure by putting his head between his +paws and rolling over and over like a big ball of fur. And he always +seemed quite proud of his performance when his three little keepers +shrieked with laughter. + +The next year after Mr. Jamieson's death the empty mission-house was +once more filled. In September the Rev. Mr. William and Mrs. Gauld +sailed from Canada, and with their arrival Dr. Mackay took new heart. + +The new missionaries had learned the language and their work was well +under way when the time came round once more for Dr. Mackay to go back +to Canada for a year's rest. This time there was quite a little party +went with him: his wife, their three children, and Koa Kau, one of his +students. + +Among those left to assist Mr. Gauld, there was none he relied upon more +than A Hoa. Mr. Gauld, at the close of his second year's work, wrote of +this fellow worker: "The longer and better I know him, the more I can +love him, trust his honesty, and respect his judgment. He knows his +own people, from the governor of the island to the ragged opium-smoking +beggar, and has influence with them all." + +There were many others besides A Hoa to render the missionary faithful +help; among them Sun-a and Tan He, the latter pastor of the church of +Sin-tiam; and just because Kai Bok-su was away they worked the harder, +that he might receive a good report of them on his return. + +The separation was longer this time, for Dr. Mackay wished to send his +children to school, and he decided that they would remain in Canada +two years. He was made Moderator of the General Assembly, too, and the +Church at home needed him to stir them up to a greater desire to help +those beyond the seas. + +While he was working and preaching in Canada, his heart turned always to +his beloved Formosa, and letters from the friends there were among his +greatest pleasures. A Hoa's of course, were doubly welcome. Pastor Giam, +the name by which he was now called, was Mr. Gauld's right-hand helper +in those days, and once he went alone on a tour away to the eastern +shore. While there he had an adventure of which he wrote to Kai Bok-su. + +"The other morning while walking on the seashore I saw a sailing-vessel +slowly drifting shoreward and in danger of being wrecked, for there was +a fog and a heavy sea. I hastened back to the chapel and beat the +drum to call the villagers to worship. As soon as it was over I asked +converts and heathen to go in their fishing-boats as quickly as possible +and let the sailors know they need not fear savages there, and if they +wished to come ashore a chapel would be given them to stay in. The +whole crew came ashore in the boats at once. I gave your old room to the +captain, his wife and child, and other accommodation to the rest. I +then hurried away to a mandarin and asked him to send men to protect the +ship." + +When Kai Bok-su read the story and remembered that, twenty-five years +earlier, the crew of that vessel would have been murdered and their ship +plundered, he exclaimed with joy, "Blessed Christianity! Surely, + + Blessings abound where'er He reigns!" + +A Hoa had another tale to tell. One afternoon he had a strange +congregation in that little chapel. There were one hundred and forty-six +native converts and twenty-one Europeans. These were made up of seven +nationalities, British, American, French, Danish, Turkish, Swiss, and +Norwegian. Their ship was from America and was bound for Hongkong with +coal-oil. + +They were amazed at seeing a pretty, neat chapel away in this +wild, remote place, which they had always supposed was overrun by +head-hunters, and indeed it was just that little chapel that had made +the great change. These men now entered it and joined the natives in +worshiping the true God, where, only a few years before, their blood +would have stained the sands. + +A Hoa told them something of the great Kai Bok-su and the struggles +he had had with savages and other enemies, when he first came to this +region. The visitors were very much interested and did not wonder that +the name "Kai Bok-su" was held in such reverence. When they left, the +captain presented the little chapel with a bell, a lamp, and a mirror +which were on board his ship. + +The long months of separation were rolling around, when something +happened that brought Kai Bok-su back to his island in great haste. Once +more war swept over Formosa. This time the trouble was between China +and Japan. The big Empire proved no match for the clever Japanese, and +everywhere China was forced to give in. + +One of the places which Japan set her affections on was Formosa. She +must have the Beautiful Isle and have it at once. China was in no +position to say no, so the Chinese envoy went on board a Japanese +vessel and sailed toward Formosa. When in sight of its lovely mountains, +without any ceremony he pointed to the land and said, "There it is, take +it." And that was how Formosa became a province of Japan. At noon on May +26, 1895, the dragon flag of China was hauled down from Formosan forts +and the banner of Japan was hoisted. + +Of course this was not done without a struggle. The Formosans themselves +fought hard, and in the fight the Christians came in for times of +trouble. So Kai Bok-su, hearing that his "valuables" were again in +danger, set sail for Tamsui. + +When he arrived the war was practically over, but everywhere were signs +of strife. As soon as he was able, he took A Hoa and Koa Kau and visited +the chapels all over the country. Everywhere were sights to make his +heart very sad. The Japanese soldiers had used many of the chapels for +military stables, and they were in a filthy state. At one place the +native preacher was a prisoner, the Japanese believing him to be a spy. +At another village the Christians sadly led their missionary out to a +tea plantation and showed him the place where their beloved pastor had +been shot by the Japanese soldiers. Mackay stood beside his grave, his +heart heavy with sorrow. + +But his courage never left him. The native Christians everywhere forgot +their woes in the great joy of seeing him once more; and he joined them +in a brave attempt to put things to rights once more. The Japanese paid +for all damages done by their soldiers and in a short time the work was +going on splendidly. + +"We have no fear," wrote Dr. Mackay. "The King of kings is greater than +Emperor or Mikado. He will rule and overrule all things." + +His faith was rewarded, for when the troublous time was over, the +government of Japan proved better than that of China, and on the whole +the trial proved a blessing. + +Oxford College had been closed while Dr. Mackay was away, and the girls' +school had not been opened since the war commenced, for it was not +safe for the girls and women to leave their homes during such disturbed +times. But now both schools reopened, and again Kai Bok-su with his cane +and his book and his crowd of students could be seen going up to the +lecture halls, or away out on the Formosan roads. + +He had conquered so often, overcome such tremendous obstacles, and faced +unflinchingly so many awful dangers for the sake of his converts, that +it was no wonder that they adored him, their feeling amounting almost +to worship. "Kai Bok-su says it must be so" was sufficient to compel any +one in the north Formosa Church to do what was required. Surely never +before was a man so wonderfully rewarded in this life. He had given +up all he possessed for the glory of his Master and he had his full +compensation. + +A few happy years sped round. The time for him to go back home again was +drawing near when there came the first hint that he might soon be called +on a longer furlough than he would have in Canada. + +At first, when the dread suspicion began to be whispered in the halls +of Oxford College and in the chapel gatherings throughout the country, +people refused to believe it. Kai Bok-su ill? No, no, it was only the +malaria, and he always arose from that and went about again. It could +not be serious. + +But in spite of the fact that loving hearts refused to accept it, there +was no use denying the sad fact. There was something wrong with Kai +Bok-su. For months his voice had been growing weaker, the doctors had +examined his throat, and attended him, but it was all of no use. At last +he could not speak at all, but wrote his words on a slate. + +And everywhere in north Formosa, converts and students and preachers +watched and waited and prayed most fervently that he might soon recover. +Those who lived in Tamsui whispered to each other in tones of dread, +as they watched him come and go with slower steps than they had been +accustomed to see. + +"He will be well next month," they would say hopefully, or, "He +will look like himself when the rains dry." But little by little the +conviction grew that the beloved missionary was seriously ill, and a +great gloom settled all over north Formosa. There was a little gleam of +joy when the doctor in Tamsui advised him finally to go to Hongkong and +see a specialist He went, leaving many loving hearts waiting anxiously +between hope and fear to hear what the doctors would say. And prayers +went up night and day from those who loved him. From the heart-broken +wife in the lonely house on the bluff to the farthest-off convert on +the Ki-lai plain, every Christian on the island, even those in the south +Formosa mission, prayed that the useful life might be spared. + +But God had other and greater plans for Kai Bok-su. He came back from +Hongkong, and the first look at his pale face told the dreaded truth. The +shadow of death lay on it. + +Those were heart-breaking days in north Formosa. From all sides came +such messages of devotion that it seemed as if the passionate love of +his followers must hold him back. But a stronger love was calling him +on. And one bright June day, in 1901, when the green mountainsides, the +blue rivers, and the waving rice-fields of Formosa lay smiling in the +sun, Kai Bok-su heard once more that call that had brought him so far +from home. Once more he obeyed, and he opened his eyes on a new glory +greater than any of which he had ever dreamed. The task had been a hard +one. The "big stone" had been stubborn, but it had been broken, and not +long after the noontide of his life the tired worker was called home. + +They laid his poor, worn body up on the hill above the river, beside +the bodies of the Christians he had loved so well. And the soft Formosan +grass grew over his grave, the winds roared about it, and the river and +the sea sang his requiem. + +Gallant Kai Bok-su! As he rests up there on his wind-swept height, there +are hearts in the valleys and on the plains of his beloved Formosa and +in his far-off native land that are aching for him. And sometimes to +these last comes the question "Was it well?" Was it well that he should +wear out that splendid life in such desperate toil among heathen that +hated and reviled him? And from every part of north Formosa, sounding on +the wind, comes many an answer. + +Up from the damp rice-fields, where the farmer goes to and fro in the +gray dawn, arises a song: + +I'm not ashamed to own my Lord, Or to defend his cause. + +Far away on the mountainside, the once savage mother draws her little +one to her and teaches him, not the old lesson of bloodshed, but the +older one of love and kindness, and together they croon: + +Jesus loves me, this I know, For the Bible tells me so. + +And up from scores of chapels dotting the land, comes the sound of the +old, old story of Jesus and his love, preached by native Formosans, and +from the thousand tongues of their congregations soars upward the Psalm: + +All people that on earth do dwell, Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice! + +These all unite in one great harmony, replying, "It is well!" + +But is it well with the work? What of his Beautiful Island, now that Kai +Bok-su has left for a greater work in a more beautiful land? Yes, it is +well also with Formosa. The work goes on. + +There are two thousand, one hundred members now in the four organized +congregations, and over fifty mission stations and outstations. But +better still there are in addition twenty-two hundred who have forsaken +their idols and are being trained to become church-members. The Formosa +Church out of its poverty gives liberally too. In 1911 they contributed +more than thirty-five hundred dollars to Christian work. "Every year," +writes Mr. Jack, "a special collection is taken by the Church for the +work among the Ami--the aborigines of the Ki-lai plain." This is the +foreign mission of the north Formosa Church. + +A Hoa lately followed his pastor to the home above, but many others +remain. Mr. Gauld and his family are still there, in the front of the +battle, and with him is a fine corps of soldiers, comprising fifty-nine +native and several Canadian missionaries, including the Rev. Dr. J. Y. +Ferguson and his wife, the Rev. Milton Jack and Mrs. Jack, the Rev. and +Mrs. Duncan MacLeod, Miss J. M. Kinney, Miss Hannah Connell, Miss Mabel +G. Clazie, and Miss Lily Adair. Miss Isabelle J. Elliott, a graduate +nurse, and deaconess, will join the staff shortly, and a few others +will be sent when secured, in order that the force may be sufficient to +evangelize the million people in north Formosa. + +Mrs. Mackay and her two daughters, Helen and Mary, the latter having +married native preachers, Koa Kau and Tan He, are keeping up the work +that husband and father left. A new hospital is being built under Dr. +Ferguson, and plans are on foot for new school and college buildings. + +And the latest arrived missionary? What of him? Why his name is George +Mackay, and he has just sailed from Canada as the first Mackay sailed +forty-one years earlier. He has been nine years in Canada and the United +States, at school and college, and now with his Canadian wife, has gone +back to his native land. Yes, Kai Bok-su's son has gone out to carry on +his father's work, and Formosa has welcomed him as no other missionary +has been welcomed since Kai Bok-su's day. + +But these are not all. From far across the sea, in the land where Kai +Bok-su lived his boyhood days, comes a voice. It is the echo from the +hearts of other boys, who have read his noble life. And their answer is, +"We too will go out, as he went, and fight and win!" + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Black-Bearded Barbarian (George +Leslie Mackay), by Mary Esther Miller MacGregor, AKA Marion Keith + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BLACK-BEARDED BARBARIAN *** + +***** This file should be named 1759.txt or 1759.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/1/7/5/1759/ + + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/1759.zip b/1759.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..855519d --- /dev/null +++ b/1759.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b54b53a --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #1759 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/1759) diff --git a/old/bbbrb09.txt b/old/bbbrb09.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..aaab69c --- /dev/null +++ b/old/bbbrb09.txt @@ -0,0 +1,5329 @@ +Project Gutenberg Etext of The Black-Bearded Barbarian, by Keith + + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world, be sure to check +the copyright laws for your country before posting these files!! + +Please take a look at the important information in this header. +We encourage you to keep this file on your own disk, keeping an +electronic path open for the next readers. Do not remove this. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**Etexts Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*These Etexts Prepared By Hundreds of Volunteers and Donations* + +Information on contacting Project Gutenberg to get Etexts, and +further information is included below. We need your donations. + + +The Black-Bearded Barbarian + +by Marian Keith + +May, 1999 [Etext #1759] + + +Project Gutenberg Etext of The Black-Bearded Barbarian, by Keith +******This file should be named bbbrb09.txt or bbbrb09.zip****** + +Corrected EDITIONS of our etexts get a new NUMBER, bbbrb10.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, bbbrb11a.txt + + +Project Gutenberg Etexts are usually created from multiple editions, +all of which are in the Public Domain in the United States, unless a +copyright notice is included. Therefore, we usually do NOT keep any +of these books in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +We are now trying to release all our books one month in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. + +Please note: neither this list nor its contents are final till +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg Etexts is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. To be sure you have an +up to date first edition [xxxxx10x.xxx] please check file sizes +in the first week of the next month. Since our ftp program has +a bug in it that scrambles the date [tried to fix and failed] a +look at the file size will have to do, but we will try to see a +new copy has at least one byte more or less. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any etext selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. This +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If our value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour this year as we release thirty-six text +files per month, or 432 more Etexts in 1999 for a total of 2000+ +If these reach just 10% of the computerized population, then the +total should reach over 200 billion Etexts given away this year. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away One Trillion Etext +Files by December 31, 2001. [10,000 x 100,000,000 = 1 Trillion] +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only ~5% of the present number of computer users. + +At our revised rates of production, we will reach only one-third +of that goal by the end of 2001, or about 3,333 Etexts unless we +manage to get some real funding; currently our funding is mostly +from Michael Hart's salary at Carnegie-Mellon University, and an +assortment of sporadic gifts; this salary is only good for a few +more years, so we are looking for something to replace it, as we +don't want Project Gutenberg to be so dependent on one person. + +We need your donations more than ever! + + +All donations should be made to "Project Gutenberg/CMU": and are +tax deductible to the extent allowable by law. (CMU = Carnegie- +Mellon University). + +For these and other matters, please mail to: + +Project Gutenberg +P. O. Box 2782 +Champaign, IL 61825 + +When all other email fails. . .try our Executive Director: +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> +hart@pobox.com forwards to hart@prairienet.org and archive.org +if your mail bounces from archive.org, I will still see it, if +it bounces from prairienet.org, better resend later on. . . . + +We would prefer to send you this information by email. + +****** + +To access Project Gutenberg etexts, use any Web browser +to view http://promo.net/pg. This site lists Etexts by +author and by title, and includes information about how +to get involved with Project Gutenberg. You could also +download our past Newsletters, or subscribe here. This +is one of our major sites, please email hart@pobox.com, +for a more complete list of our various sites. + +To go directly to the etext collections, use FTP or any +Web browser to visit a Project Gutenberg mirror (mirror +sites are available on 7 continents; mirrors are listed +at http://promo.net/pg). + +Mac users, do NOT point and click, typing works better. + +Example FTP session: + +ftp sunsite.unc.edu +login: anonymous +password: your@login +cd pub/docs/books/gutenberg +cd etext90 through etext99 +dir [to see files] +get or mget [to get files. . .set bin for zip files] +GET GUTINDEX.?? [to get a year's listing of books, e.g., GUTINDEX.99] +GET GUTINDEX.ALL [to get a listing of ALL books] + +*** + +**Information prepared by the Project Gutenberg legal advisor** + +(Three Pages) + + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this etext, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you can distribute copies of this etext if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS ETEXT +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +etext, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this etext by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this etext on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM ETEXTS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG- +tm etexts, is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor +Michael S. Hart through the Project Gutenberg Association at +Carnegie-Mellon University (the "Project"). Among other +things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this etext +under the Project's "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +To create these etexts, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's etexts and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other etext medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] the Project (and any other party you may receive this +etext from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext) disclaims all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this etext within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS ETEXT IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE ETEXT OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold the Project, its directors, +officers, members and agents harmless from all liability, cost +and expense, including legal fees, that arise directly or +indirectly from any of the following that you do or cause: +[1] distribution of this etext, [2] alteration, modification, +or addition to the etext, or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this etext electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + etext or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this etext in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word pro- + cessing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The etext, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The etext may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the etext (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + etext in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the etext refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Project of 20% of the + net profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Association/Carnegie-Mellon + University" within the 60 days following each + date you prepare (or were legally required to prepare) + your annual (or equivalent periodic) tax return. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +The Project gratefully accepts contributions in money, time, +scanning machines, OCR software, public domain etexts, royalty +free copyright licenses, and every other sort of contribution +you can think of. Money should be paid to "Project Gutenberg +Association / Carnegie-Mellon University". + +*END*THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS*Ver.04.29.93*END* + + + + + +The Black-Bearded Barbarian + +by Marian Keith + + + + +THE BLACK BEARDED BARBARIAN[1] + +[1] The name by which George Leslie Mackay was +known among the Chinese of north Formosa. + + + + +CHAPTER I. SPLITTING ROOKS + +Up in the stony pasture-field behind the barn the boys had been +working all the long afternoon. Nearly all, that is, for, being +boys, they had managed to mix a good deal of fun with their +labor. But now they were tired of both work and play, and +wondered audibly, many times over, why they were not yet called +home to supper. + +The work really belonged to the Mackay boys, but, like Tom +Sawyer, they had made it so attractive that several volunteers +had come to their aid. Their father was putting up a new stone +house, near the old one down there behind the orchard, and the +two youngest of the family had been put at the task of breaking +the largest stones in the field. + +It meant only to drag some underbrush and wood from the forest +skirting the farm, pile them on the stones, set fire to them, and +let the heat do the rest. It had been grand sport at first, they +all voted, better than playing shinny, and almost as good as +going fishing. In fact it was a kind of free picnic, where one +could play at Indians all day long. But as the day wore on, the +picnic idea had languished, and the stone-breaking grew more and +more to resemble hard work. + +The warm spring sunset had begun to color the western sky; the +meadow-larks had gone to bed, and the stone-breakers were tired +and ravenously hungry--as hungry as only wolves or country boys +can be. The visitors suggested that they ought to be going home. +"Hold on, Danny, just till this one breaks," said the older +Mackay boy, as he set a burning stick to a new pile of brush. + +"This'll be a dandy, and it's the last, too. They're sure to call +us to supper before we've time to do another." + +The new fire, roaring and snapping, sendkg up showers of sparks +and filling the air with the sweet odor of burning cedar, proved +too alluring to be left. The company squatted on the ground +before it, hugging their knees and watching the blue column of +smoke go straight up into the colored sky. It suggested a +camp-fire in war times, and each boy began to tell what great and +daring deeds he intended to perform when he became a man. + +Jimmy, one of the visitors, who had been most enthusiastic over +the picnic side of the day's work, announced that he was going to +be a sailor. He would command a fleet on the high seas, so he +would, and capture pirates, and grow fabulously wealthy on +prize-money. Danny, who was also a guest, declared his purpose +one day to lead a band of rough riders to the Western plains, +where he would kill Indians, and escape fearful deaths by the +narrowest hairbreadth. + +"Mebbe I'm goin'to be Premier of Canada, some day," said one +youngster, poking his bare toes as near as he dared to the +flames. + +There were hoots of derision. This was entirely too tame to be +even considered as a career. + +"And what are you going to be, G. L.?" inquired the biggest boy +of the smallest. + +The others looked at the little fellow and laughed. George Mackay +was the youngest of the group, and was a small wiry youngster +with a pair of flashing eyes lighting up his thin little face. He +seemed far too small and insignificant to even think about a +career. But for all the difference in their size and age the +bigger boys treated little George with a good deal of respect. +For, somehow, he never failed to do what he set out to do. He +always won at races, he was never anywhere but at the head of his +class, he was never known to be afraid of anything in field or +forest or school ground, he was the hardest worker at home or at +school, and by sheer pluck he managed to do everything that boys +bigger and older and stronger could do. + +So when Danny asked, "And what are you going to be, G. L. ? +"though the boys laughed at the small thin little body, they +respected the daring spirit it held, and listened for his answer. + +"He's goin' to be a giant, and go off with a show," cried one, +and they all laughed again. + +Little G. L. laughed too, but he did not say what he intended to +do when he grew big. Down in his heart he held a far greater +ambition than the others dreamed of. It was too great to be +told--so great he scarcely knew what it was himself. So he only +shook his small head and closed his lips tightly, and the rest +forgot him and chattered on. + +Away beyond the dark woods, the sunset shone red and gold between +the black tree trunks. The little boy gazed at it wonderingly. +The sight of those morning and evening glories always stirred his +child's soul, and made him long to go away--away, he knew not +where--to do great and glorious deeds. The Mackay boys' +grandfather had fought at Waterloo, and little George Leslie, the +youngest of six, had heard many, many tales of that gallant +struggle, and every time they had been told him he had silently +resolved that, some day, he too would do just such brave deeds as +his grandfather had done. + +As the boys talked on, and the little fellow gazed at the sunset +and dreamed, the big stone cracked in two, the fire died down, +and still there came no welcome call to supper from any of the +farmhouses in sight. The Mackay boys had been trained in a fine +oldfashioned Canadian home, and did not dream of quitting work +until they were summoned. But the visitors were merely visitors, +and could go home when they liked. The future admiral of the +pirate-killing fleet declared he must go and get supper, or he'd +eat the grass, he was so hungry. The coming Premier of Canada and +the Indianslayer agreed with him, and they all jumped the fence, +and went whooping away over the soft brown fields toward home. + +There was just one big stone left. It was a huge boulder, four +feet across. + +"We'll never get enough wood to crack that, G. L.," declared his +brother. "It just can't be done." + +But little George answered just as any one who knew his +determination would have expected. In school he astonished his +teacher by learning everything at a tremendous rate, but there +was one small word he refused to learn--the little word "can't." +His bright eyes flashed, now, at the sound of it. He jumped upon +the big stone, and clenched his fist. + +"It's GOT to be broken!" he cried. "I WON'T let it beat me." He +leaped down, and away he ran toward the woods. His brother caught +his spirit, and ran too. They forgot they were both tired and +hungry. They seized a big limb of a fallen tree and dragged it +across the field. They chopped it into pieces, and piled it high +with plenty of brush, upon the big stone. In a few minutes it was +all in a splendid blaze, leaping and crackling, and sending the +boys' long shadows far across the field. + +The fire grew fiercer and hotter, and suddenly the big boulder +cracked in four pieces, as neatly as though it had been slashed +by a giant's sword. Little G. L. danced around it, and laughed +triumphantly. The next moment there came the welcome "hoo-hoo" +from the house behind the orchard, and away the two scampered +down the hill toward home and supper. + +When the day's work of the farmhouse had been finished, the +Mackay family gathered about the fire, for the spring evening was +chilly. George Leslie sat near his mother, his face full of deep +thought. It was the hour for family worship, and always at this +time he felt most keenly that longing to do something great and +glorious. Tonight his father read of a Man who was sending out +his army to conquer the world. It was only a little army, just +twelve men, but they knew their Leader had more power than all +the soldiers of the world. And they were not afraid, though he +said, "Behold, I send you forth as sheep in the midst of wolves." +For he added, "Fear ye not," for he would march before them, and +they would be sure of victory. + +The little boy listened with all his might. He did everything +that way. Surely this was a story of great and glorious deeds, +even better than Waterloo, he felt. And there came to his heart a +great longing to go out and fight wrong and put down evil as +these men had done. He did not know that the longing was the +voice of the great King calling his young knight to go out and +"Live pure, speak true, right wrong, follow the King." + +But there came a day when he did understand, and on that day he +was ready to obey. + +When bedtime came the boys were asked if they had finished their +work, and the story of the last big stone was told. "G. L. would +not leave it, "the brother explained. The father looked smilingly +at little G. L. who still sat, dangling his short legs from his +chair, and studying the fire. + +He spoke to his wife in Gaelic. "Perhaps the lad will be called +to break a great rock some day. The Lord grant he may do it." + +The boy looked up wonderingly. He understood Gaelic as well as +English, but he did not comprehend his father's words. He had no +idea they were prophetic, and that away on the other side of the +world, in a land his geography lessons had not yet touched, there +stood a great rock, ugly and hard and grim, which he was one day +to be called upon to break. + + +CHAPTER II. A VOYAGE OF DISCOVERY + +The steamship America, bound for Hongkong, was leaving the dock +at San Francisco. All was bustle and noise and stir. Friends +called a last farewell from the deck, handkerchiefs waved, many +of them wet with tears. The long boom of a gun roared out over +the harbor, a bell rang, and the signal was given. Up came the +anchor, and slowly and with dignity the great vessel moved out +through the Golden Gate into the wide Pacific. + +Crowds stood on the deck to get a last glimpse of home and loved +ones, and to wave to friends as long as they could be +distinguished. There was one young man who stood apart from the +crowd, and who did not wave farewell to any one. He had come on +board with a couple of men, but they had gone back to the dock, +and were lost in the crowd. He seemed entirely alone. He leaned +against the deck-railing and gazed intently over the widening +strip of tumbling wafers to the city on the shore. But he did not +see it. Instead, he saw a Canadian farmhouse, a garden and +orchard, and gently sloping meadows hedged in by forest. And up +behind the barn he saw a stony field, where long ago he and his +brother and the neighbor boys had broken the stones for the new +house. + +His quick movements, his slim, straight figure, and his bright, +piercing eyes showed he was the same boy who had broken the big +rock in the pasture-field long before. Just the same boy, only +bigger, and more man than boy now, for he wore an air of command +and his thin keen face bore a beard, a deep black, like his hair. +And now he was going away, as he had longed to go, when he was a +boy, and ahead of him lay the big frowning rock, which he must +either break or be broken upon. + +He had learned many things since those days when he had scampered +barefoot over the fields, or down the road to school. He had been +to college in Toronto, in Princeton, and away over in Edinburgh, +in the old homeland where his father and mother were born. And +all through his life that call to go and do great deeds for the +King had come again and again. He had determined to obey it when +he was but a little lad at school. He had encountered many big +stones in his way, which he had to break, before he could go on. +But the biggest stone of all lay across his path when college was +over, and he was ready and anxious to go away as a missionary. +The Presbyterian Church of Canada had never yet sent but a +missionary to a foreign land, and some of the good old men bade +George Mackay stay at home and preach the gospel there. But as +usual he conquered. Every one saw he would be a great missionary +if he were only given a chance. At last the General Assembly gave +its consent, and now, in spite of all stones in the way, here he +was, bound for China, and ready to do anything the King +cornmanded. Land was beginning to fade away into a gray mist, the +November wind was damp and chill, he turned and went down to his +stateroom. He sat down on his little steamer trunk, and for the +first time the utter loneliness and the uncertainty of this +voyage came over him. He took up his Bible and turned to the +fly-leaf. There he read the inscription: + +Presented to +REV. G. L. MACKAY + +First missionary of the Canadian Presbyterian Church to China, by +the Foreign Mission Committee, as a parting token of their +esteem, when about to leave his native land for the sphere of his +future labors among the heathen. WILLIAM MACLAREN, Convener. + +Ottawa, 9th October, 1871. +Matthew xxviii: 18-20. Psalm cxxi + +It was a moment of severe trial to the young soldier. But he +turned to the Psalm marked on the fly-leaf of his Bible, and he +read it again and again. + +"My help cometh from the Lord which made heaven and earth" + +"The Lord is thy keeper: the Lord is thy shade upon thy right +hand." + +"The sun shall not smite thee by day, nor the moon by night." + +The beautiful words gave him comfort. Homesickness, loneliness, +and fears for the future all vanished. He was going out to an +unknown land where dangers and perhaps death awaited him, but the +Lord would be his keeper and nothing could harm him. + +Twenty-six days on the Pacific! And a stormy voyage it was, for +the Pacific does not always live up to her beautiful name, and +she tossed the America about in a shockkg manner. But the voyage +did not seem long to George Mackay. There were other missionaries +on board with whom he had become acquainted, and he had long +delightful talks with them and they taught him many things about +his new work. He was the same busy G. L. he had been when a boy; +always working, working, and he did not waste a moment on the +voyage. There was a fine library on the ship and he studied the +books on China until he knew more about the religion of that +country than did many of the Chinese themselves. + +One day, as he was poring over a Chinese history, some one called +him hastily to come on deck. He threw down his book and ran +up-stairs. The whole ship was in a joyous commotion. His friend +pointed toward the horizon, and away off there against the sky +stood the top of a snow-capped peak--Fujiyama!--the majestic, +sacred mountain of Japan! + +It was a welcome sight, after the long ocean voyage, and the +hours they lay in Yokahama harbor were full of enjoyment. Every +sight was thrilling and strange to young Mackay's Western eyes. +The harbor fairly swarmed with noisy, shouting, chattering +Japanese boatmen. He wondered why they seemed so familiar, until +it suddenly dawned on him that their queer ricestraw coats made +them look like a swarm of Robinson Crusoes who had just been +rescued from their islands. + +When he landed he found things still funnier. The streets were +noisier than the harbor. Through them rolled large heavy wooden +carts, pulled and pushed by men, with much grunting and groaning. +Past him whirled what looked like overgrown baby carriages, also +pulled by men, and each containing a big grown-up human baby. It +was all so pretty too, and so enchanting that the young +missionary would fain have remained there. But China was still +farther on, so when the America again set sail, he was on board. + +Away they sailed farther and farther east, or was it west? He +often asked himself that question in some amusement as they +approached the coast of China. They entered a long winding +channel and steamed this way and that until one day they sailed +into a fine broad harbor with a magnificent city rising far up +the steep sides of a hill. It was an Oriental city, and therefore +strange to the young traveler. But for all that there seemed +something familiar in the fine European buildings that lined the +streets, and something still more homelike in that which floated +high above them--something that brought a thrill to the heart of +the young Canadian--the red-crossed banner of Britain! + +It was Hongkong, the great British port of the East, and here he +decided to land. No sooner had the travelers touched the dock, +than they were surrounded by a yelling, jostling crowd of Chinese +coolies, all shouting in an outlandish gibberish for the +privilege of carrying the Barbarians' baggage. A group gathered +round Mackay, and in their eagerness began hammering each other +with bamboo poles. He was well-nigh bewildered, when above the +din sounded the welcome music of an English voice. + +"Are you Mackay from Canada?" + +He whirled round joyfully. It was Dr. E. J. Eitel, a missionary +from England. He had been told that the young Canadian would +arrive on the America and was there to welcome him. + +Although the Canadian Presbyterian Church had as yet sent out no +missionaries to a foreign land, the Presbyterian Church of +England had many scattered over China. They were all hoping that +the new recruit would join them, and invited him to visit +different mission stations, and see where he would like to +settle. + +So he remained that night in Hongkong, as Dr. Eitel's guest, and +the next morning he took a steamer for Canton. Here he was met on +the pier by an old fellow student of Princeton University, and +the two old college friends had a grand reunion. He returned to +Hongkong shortly, and next visited Swatow. As they sailed into +the harbor, he noticed two Englishmen rowing out toward them in a +sampan.* No sooner had the ship's ladder been lowered, than the +two sprang out of their boat and clambered quickly on deck. To +Mackay's amazement, one of them called out, "Is Mackay of Canada +on board?" + +* A Chinese boat from twelve to fifteen feet long, covered with +a house. + +"Mackay of Canada," sprang forward delighted, and found his two +new friends to be Mr. Hobson of the Chinese imperial customs, and +Dr. Thompson of the English Presbyterian mission in Swatow. + +The missionaries here gave the stranger a warm welcome. At every +place he had visited there had awaited him a cordial invitation +to stay and work. And now at Swatow he was urged to settle down +and help them. There was plenty to be done, and they would be +delighted to have his help. + +But for some reason, Mackay scarcely knew why himself, he wanted +to see another place. + +Away off the southeastern coast of China lies a large island +called Formosa. It is separated from the mainland by a body of +water called the Formosa Channel. This is in some places eighty +miles wide, in others almost two hundred. Mackay had often heard +of Formosa even before coming to China, and knew it was famed for +its beauty. + +Even its name shows this. Long, long years before, some +navigators from Portugal sailed to this beautiful island. They +had stood on the deck of their ship as they approached it, and +were amazed at its loveliness. They saw lofty green mountains +piercing the clouds. They saw silvery cascades tumbling down +their sides, flashing in the sunlight, and, below, terraced +plains sloping down to the sea, covered with waving bamboo or +with little water-covered rice-fields. It was all so delightful +that no wonder they cried, + +"Illha Formosa! Illha Formosa!" + +"Beautiful Isle! Beautiful Isle." Since that day the "Beautiful +Isle," perhaps the most charming in all the world, has been +called Formosa. + +And, somehow, Mackay longed to see this Beautiful Isle" before he +decided where he was going to preach the gospel. And so when the +kind friends at Swatow said," Stay and work with he always +answered, "I must first see Formosa." + +So, one day, he sailed away from the mainland toward the +Beautiful Isle. He landed at Takow in the south of the island, +just about Christmas-time. But Formosa was green, the weather was +hot, and he could scarcely believe that, at home in Oxford +county, Ontario, they were flying over the snow to the music of +sleigh-bells. On New Year's day he met a missionary of this south +Formosa field, named Dr. Ritchie. He belonged to the Presbyterian +Church of England, which had a fine mission there. For nearly a +month Mackay visited with him and studied the language. + +And while he visited and worked there the missionaries told him +of the northern part of the island. No person was there to tell +all those crowded cities of Jesus Christ and His love. It would +be lonely for him there, it would be terribly hard work, but it +would be a grand Thing to lay the foundations, to be the first to +tell those people the "good news," the young missionary thought. +And, one day, he looked up from the Chinese book he was studying +and said to Dr. Ritchie: + +"I have decided to settle in north Formosa." + +And Dr. Ritchie's quick answer was: + +"God bless you, Mackay." + +As soon as the decision was made, another missionary, Dr. +Dickson, who was with Mr. Ritchie, decided to go to north Formosa +with the young man, and show him over the ground. So, early in +the month of March in the year 1872, the three men set off by +steamship to sail for Tamsui, a port in north Formosa. They were +two days making the voyage, and a tropical storm pitched the +small vessel hither and thither, so that they were very much +relieved when they sailed up to the mouth of the Tamsiu river. + +It was low tide and a bare sand-bar stretched across the mouth of +the harbor, so the anchor was dropped, and they waited until the +tide should cover the bar, and allow them to sail in. + +This wait gave the travelers a fine opportunity to see the +country. The view from this harbor of the "Beautiful Island" was +an enchanting one. Before them, toward the east, rose tier upon +tier of magnificent mountains, stretching north and south. Down +their sloping sides tumbled sparkling cascades and here and there +patches of bright green showed where there were tea plantations. +Farther down were stretches of grass and groves of lovely +feathery bamboo. And between these groves stretched what seemed +to be little silvery lakes, with the reflection of the great +moantains in them. They were really the famous rice-fields of +Formosa, at this time of the year all under water. There were no +fences round their little lake-fields. They were of all shapes +and sizes, and were divided from each other by little green +fringed dykes or walls. Each row of fields was lower than the +last until they came right down to the sea-level, and all lay +blue and smiling in the blazing sunlight. + +As the young missionary stood spellbound, gazing over the lovely, +fairylike scene, Mr. Ritchie touched his arm. + +"This is your parish, Mackay," he whispered smilingly. + +And then for the first time since he had started on his long, +long journey, the young missionary felt his spirit at peace. The +restlessness that had driven him on from one Chinese port to +another was gone. This was indeed his parish. + +Suddenly out swung a signal; the tide had risen. Up came the +anchor, and away they glided over the now submerged sand-bar into +the harbor. + +A nearer view showed greater charms in the Beautiful Isle. On the +south, at their right, lay the great Quan Yin mountain, towering +seventeen hundred feet above them, clothed in tall grass and +groves of bamboo, banyan, and fir trees of every conceivable +shade of green. Nestling at its feet were little villages almost +buried in trees. Slowly the ship drifted along, passing, here a +queer fishing village close to the sandy shore, yonder a +light-house, there a battered Chinese fort rising from the top of +a hill. + +And now Tamsui came in sight--the new home of the young +missionary. It seemed to him that it was the prettiest and the +dirtiest place he had ever seen. The town lay along the bank of +the river at the foot of a hill. This bluff rose abruptly behind +it to a height of two hundred feet. On its face stood a +queer-looking building. It was red in color, solid and weather +worn, and above it floated the grand old flag of Britain. + +"That's an old Dutch fort," explained Mr. Ritchie, "left there +since they were in the island. It is the British consulate now. +There, next to it, is the consul's residence. + +It was a handsome house, just below the fort, and surrounded by +lovely gardens. But down beneath it, on the shore, was the most +interesting place to the newcomer, the town of Tamsui proper, or +Ho Be, as the Chinese called it. The foreigners landed and made +their way up the street. To the two from south Formosa, Tamsui +was like every other small Chinese town, but Mackay had not yet +become accustomed to the strange sights and sounds and stranger +smells, and his bright eyes were keen with interest. + +The main thoroughfare wound this way and that, only seven or +eight feet wide at its best. It was filled with noisy crowds of +men who acted as if they were on the verge of a terrible fight. +But the older missionaries knew that they were merely acting as +Chinese crowds always do. On each side were shops,--tea shops, +rice shops, tobacco shops, and many other kinds. And most +numerous of all were the shops where opium, one of the greatest +curses of Chinese life, was sold. The front wall of each was +removed, and the customers stood in the street and dickered with +the shopkeeper, while at the top of his harsh voice the latter +swore by all the gods in China that he was giving the article +away at a terrific loss. Through the crowd pushed hawkers, +carrying their wares balanced on poles across their shoulders. +Boys with trays of Chinese candies and sugar-cane yelled their +wares above the din. The visitors stumbled along over the rough +stones of the pavement until they came to the market-place. +Foreigners were not such a curiosity in Tamsui as in the inland +towns, and not a great deal of notice was taken of them, but +occasionally Mackay could hear the now familiar words of contempt +--"Ugly barbarian"--"Foreign devil" from the men that passed +them. And one man, pointing to Mackay, shouted "Ho! the +black-bearded barbarian!" It was a name the young missionary was +destined to hear very frequently. Past opium-dens, barber shops, +and drug stores they went and through the noise and bustle and +din of the market-place. They knew that the inns, judging by the +outside, would be filthy, so Mr. Ritchie suggested, as evening +was approaching, that they find some comfortable place to spend +the night. + +There was a British merchant in Tamsui named Mr. Dodd, whom the +missionaries knew. So to him they went, and were given fine +quarters in his warehouse. They ate their supper here, from the +provisions they had bought in the market, and stretching +themselves out on their grass mats they slept soundly. The next +day was Sunday, but the three travelers spent it quietly in the +warehouse by the river, studying their Bibles and discussing +their proposed trip. They concluded it was best not to provoke +the anger of the people against the new missionary by preaching, +so they did not go out. To-morrow they would start southward and +take Mackay to the bounds of their mission field, and show him +the land that was to be "his parish." + + +CHAPTER III. RECONNOITERING THE TERRITORY + +Early Monday morning Mackay peeped out of the big warehouse door +at the great calm niountain shrouded in the pale mists of early +dawn. The other two travelers were soon astir, and were surprised +to find their young companion all ready. They were not yet well +enough acquainted with him to know that he could do with less +sleep at night than an owl. He was in high spirits and as eager +to be off as he had ever been to start for a day's fishing in the +old tunes back in Ontario. And indeed this was -just a great +fishing expedition he was comnaencing. For had not One said to +him, long long ago when he was but a little boy, "Come follow me, +and I will make you to become a fisher of men"? and he had +obeyed. The first task was to go out and buy food for the +journey, and to hire a couple of coolies to carry it and what +baggage they must take. + +Dr. Dickson went off on this errand, and being well acquainted +with Formosan customs and language, soon returned with two +Chinese carriers and plenty of food. This last consisted of +canned meats, biscuits, coffee, and condensed milk, bought at a +store where ships' supplies were kept for sale. There was also +some salted water-buffalo meat, a Chinese dish with which the +young missionary was destined to become very familiar. + +They started out three abreast, Mr. Ritchie's blue serge figure +capped by a white helmet on the right, Dr. Dickson on the left in +his Scotch tweed, and between them the alert, slim figure of the +newcomer, in his suit of Canadian gray. The coolies, with baskets +hung to a pole across their shoulders, came ambling along behind. + +The three travelers were in the gayest mood. Perhaps it was the +clear spring morning air, or the breath of the salt ocean, +perhaps it was the intoxicating beauty of mountain and plain and +river that surrounded them or it may have been because they had +given their lives in perfect service to the One who is the source +of all happiness, but whatever was the cause, they were all like +schoolboys off for a holiday. The coolies who trotted in the rear +were very much amazed and not a little amused at the actions of +these foolish foreign devils, who laughed and joked and seemed in +such high spirits for no reason at all. + +They swung along the bank of the river until they came to the +ferry that was to take them to the other side. They sprang into +the boat and were shoved off. Before they reached the other side, +at Dr. Dickson's suggestion, they took off their shoes and socks, +and stowed them away in the carriers' baskets. When they came to +the opposite bank they rolled up their trousers to their knees +and sprang out into the shallow water. For a short distance they +had the joy of tramping barefoot along the hard gleaming sand of +the harbor. + +But shoes and stockings had to be resumed, for soon they turnel +inland, on a path that'wound up to the high plain above the +river. "Do you ever use a horse on your travels?" asked young +Mackay as they climbed upward. + +Mr. Ritchie laughed. "You couldn't get one in north Formosa for +love or money. And if you could, he wouldn't be any use." + +"Unless he was a second Pegasus, and could soar above the +Formosan roads," added Dr. Dickson. "Wait a bit and you'll +understand." + +The young missionary waited, and kept his eyes open for the +answer. The pathway crossed a grassy plain where groups of +queer-looking, mouse-colored animals, half ox, half buffalo, with +great spreading horns, strayed about, herded by boys, or lay +wallowing in deep pools. + +"Water-buffaloes," he said, remembering them as he had seen them +in the south. + +"The most useful animal on the island," remarked Mr. Ritchie, +adding with a laugh, "except perhaps the pig. You'll have a taste +of Mr. Buffalo for your dinner, Mackay." + +And now they were up on the heights, and the lovely country lay +spread out before them. Mackay mentally compared this walk to +many he had taken along the country roads of his native land. It +was early in March, but as there had been no winter, so there was +no spring. It was summer, warm, radiant summer, like a lovely day +in June at home. Dandelions, violets, and many gay flowers that +he did not recognize spangled the grassy plain. The skylark high +overhead was pouring out its glorious song, just as he had heard +it in his student days in Scotland. Here and there were clumps of +fir trees that reminded him of Canada, but on the whole the scene +was new and wonderful to his Western eyes. + +They were now on the first level of the rice-fields. The farms +were tiny things, none larger than eight or ten acres. They were +divided into queer-shaped little irrigated fields, separated not +by fences, but by little low walls of mud. Every farm was under +water now, and here and there, wading through his little flooded +fields, went the farmer with his plough, drawn by a useful +water-buffalo,--the ;atter apparently quite happy at being +allowed to splash about in the mud. + +These rice-farms soon became a familiar sight to the newcomer. He +liked to see them at all times--when each field was a pretty blue +or green lake, later when the water was choked with the fresh +green growth, or in harvest days, when the farmers stripped the +fields of their grain. Just now they were at their prettiest. Row +above row, they went up the mountainside, like a great glass +stairs, each row reflecting the green hills and the bamboo groves +above. And from each terrace to the one below, the water tumbled +in pretty little cascades that sparkled in the sunlight and +filled the air with music. For travelers there were only narrow +paths between farms, and often only the ridge of the dykes +between field and field. As they made their way between the tiny +fields, walking along the narrow dykes, and listening to the +splashing sound of the water, Mackay understood what Dr. Dickson +meant, when he remarked that only a flying horse could be of use +on such Formosan cross-country journeys. + +Soon the pathway changed once more to the broader public highway. +Here there was much traffic, and many travelers carried in +sedan-chairs passed them. And many times by the roadside Mackay +saw something that reminded him forcibly of why he had come to +Formosa--a heathen shrine. The whole countryside seemed dotted +with them. And as he watched the worshipers coming and going, and +heard the disdainful words from the priests cast it the hated +foreigners, he realized that he was face to face with an awful +opposing force. It was the great stone of heathenism he had come +to break, and the question was, would he be as successful as he +had been long ago in the Canadian pasture-field? + +The travelers ate their dinner by the roadside under the shade of +some fir trees that made Mackay feel at home. They were soon up +and off again, and, tired with their long tramp, they arrived at +a town called Tionglek, and decided to spend the night there. The +place was about the size of Tamsui, with between four and five +thousand inhabitants, and was quite as dirty and almost as noisy. +They walked down the main street with its uneven stone pavement, +its open shops, its noisy bargains, and above all its horrible +smells. With the exception of an occasional visit from an +official, foreigners scarcely ever came to Tiong-lek, and on +every side were revilings and threatenings. One yellow-faced +youngster picked up a handful of mud and threw it at the hated +foreigners; and "Black-bearded barbarian," mingled with their +shouts. Mackay's bright eyes took in everything, and he realized +more and more the difficulties of the task before him. + +They stopped in front of a low one-story building made of +sun-dried bricks. This was the Tiong-lek hotel where they were +to spend the night. Like most Chinese houses it was composed of a +number of buildings arranged in the form of a square with a +courtyard in the center. Dr. Dickson asked for lodgings from the +slant-eyed proprietor. He looked askance at the foreigners, but +concluded that their money was as good as any one else's, and he +led them through the deep doorway into the courtyard. + +In the center of this yard stood an earthen range, with a fire in +it. Several travelers stood about it cooking their rice. It was +evidently the hotel dining-room; a diningroom that was open to +all too, for chickens clucked and cackled and pigs grunted about +the range and made themselves quite at home. The men about the +gateway scowled and muttered "Foreign devil," as the three +strangers passed them. + +They crossed the courtyard and entered their room, or rather +stumbled into it, in semi-darkness. Mackay peered about him +curiously. He discovered three beds, made of planks and set on +brick pillars for legs. Each was covered with a dirty mat woven +from grass and reeking with the odor of opium smoke. + +A servant came in with something evidently intended for a lamp--a +burning pith wick set in a saucer of peanut oil. It gave out only +a faint glimmer of light, but enough to enable the young +missionary to see something else in the room,--some THINGS +rather, that ran and skipped and swarmed all over the damp +earthen floor and the dirty walls. There were thousands of these +brisk little creatures, all leaping about in pleasant +anticipation ot the good time they would have when the barbarians +went to bed. There was no window, and only the one door that +opened into the courtyard. An old pig, evidently more friendly to +the foreigners than her masters, came waddling toward them +followed by her squealing little brood, and flopping down into +the mud in the doorway lay there uttering grunts of content. + +The evil smells of the room, the stench from the pigs, and the +still more dreadful odors wafted from the queer food cooking on +the range, made the young traveler's unaccustomed senses revolt. +He had a half notion that the two older men were putting up a +joke on him. + +"I suppose you thought it wise to give me a strong dose of all +this at the start?" he inquired humorously, holding his nose and +glancing from the pigs at the door to the crawlers on the wall. + +"A strong dose!" laughed Mr. Ritchie. "Not a bit of it, young +man. Wait till you've had some experience of the luxuries of +Formosan inns. You'll be calling this the Queen's Hotel, before +you've been here long!" + +And so indeed it proved later, for George Mackay had yet much to +learn of the true character of Chinese inns. Needless to say he +spent a wakeful night, on his hard plank bed, and was up early in +the morning. The travelers ate their breakfast in a room where +the ducks and hens clattered about under the table and between +their legs. Fortunately the food was taken from their own stores, +and in spite of the surroundings was quite appetizing. + +They started off early, drawing in great breaths of the pure +morning air, relieved to be away from the odors of the "Queen's +Hotel." Three hundred feet above them, high against the deep blue +of the morning sky, stood Table Hill, and they started on a brisk +climb up its side. The sun had not risen, but already the farmers +were out in their little water-fields, or working in their tea +plantations. The mountain with its groves of bamboo lay reflected +in the little mirrors of the rice-fields. A steady climb brought +them to the summit, and after a long descent on the other side +and a tramp through tea plantations they arrived in the evening +at a large city with a high wall around it, the city of +Tek-chham. That night in the city inn was so much worse than the +one at Tionglek that the Canadian was convinced his friends must +have reserved the "strong dose" for the second night. There were +the same smells, the same sorts of pigs and ducks and hens, the +same breeds of lively nightly companions, and each seemed to have +gained a fresh force. + +It was a relief to be out in the fields again after the foul +odors of the night, and the travelers were off before dawn. The +country looked more familiar to Mackay this morning, for they +passed through wheat and barley fields. It seemed so strange to +wander over a man's farm by a footpath, but it was a Chinese +custom to which he soon became accustomed. + +The sun was blazing hot, and it was a great relief when they +entered the cool shade of a forest. It was a delightful place and +George Mackay reveled in its beauty. Ever since he had been able +to run about his own home farm in Ontario his eyes had always +been wide open to observe anything new. He had studied as much +out of doors, all his life, as he had done in college, and now he +found this forest a perfect library of new Things. Nearly every +tree and flower was strange to his Canadian eyes. Here and there, +in sheltered valleys, grew the treefern, the most beautiful +object in the forest, towering away up sometimes to a height of +sixty feet, and spreading its stately fronds out to a width of +fifteen feet. There was a lovely big plant with purple stem and +purple leaves, and when Dr. Dickson told him it was the +castor-oil plant, he smiled at the remembrance of the trials that +plant had caused him in younger days. One elegant tree, straight +as a pine, rose fifty feet in height, with leaves away up at the +top only. + +This was the betel-nut free. + +"The nuts of that tree," said Mr. Ritchie, standing and pointing +away up to where the sunlight filtered through the far-off +leaves, "are the chewing tobacco of Formosa and all the islands +about here. The Chinese do not chew it, but the Malayans do. You +will meet some of these natives soon." + +On every side grew the rattan, half tree, half vine. It started +off as a tree and grew straight up often to twenty feet in +height, and then spread itself out over the tops of other trees +and plants in vine-like fashion; some of its branches measured +almost five hundred feet in length. + +The travelers paused to admire one high in the branches of the +trees. + +"Many a Chinaman loses his head hunting that plant," remarked Mr. +Ritchie. "These islanders export a great deal of rattan, and the +head-hunters up there in the mountains watch for the Chinese when +they are working in the forest." + +Mackay listened eagerly to his friends' tales of the head-hunting +savages, living in the mountains. They were always on the lookout +for the farmers near their forest lairs. They watched for any +unwary man who went too near the woods, pounced upon him, and +went off in triumph with his head in a bag. + +The young traveler's eyes brightened, "I'll visit them some day!" +he cried, lookkg off toward the mountainside. Mr. Ritchie glanced +quickly at the flashing eyes and the quick, alert figure of the +young man as he strode along, and some hint came to him of the +dauntless young heart which beat beneath that coat of Canadian +gray. + +Two days more over hill and dale, through rice and tea and +tobacco-fields, and then, in the middle of a hot afternoon, Mr. +Ritchie began to shiver and shake as though half frozen. Dr. +Dickson understood, and at the next stopping-place he ordered a +sedan-chair and four coolies to carry it. It was the old dreaded +disease that hangs like a black cloud over lovely Formosa, the +malarial fever. Mr. Ritchie had been a missionary only four years +in the island, but already the scourge had come upon him, and his +system was weakened. For, once seized by malaria in Formosa, one +seldom makes his escape. They put the sick man into the chair, +now in a raging fever, and he was carried by the four coolies. + +They were nearing the end of their journey and were now among a +people not Chinese. They belonged to the original Malayan race of +the island. They had been conquered by the Chinese, who in the +early days came over from China under a pirate named Koxinga. As +the Chinese name every one but themselves "barbarians," they gave +this name to all the natives of the island. They had conquered +all but the dreaded head-hunters, who, free in their mountain +fastnesses, took a terrible toll of heads from their would-be +conquerors, or even from their own half-civilized brethren. + +The native Malayans who had been subdued by the Chinese were +given different names. Those who lived on the great level +rice-plain over which the missionaries were traveling, were +called Pe-po-hoan, "Barbarians of the plain." Mackay could see +little difference between them and the Chinese, except in the +cast of their features, and their long-shaped heads. They wore +Chinese dress, even to the cue, worshiped the Chinese gods, and +spoke with a peculiar Malayan twang. + +The travelers were journeying rather wearily over a low muddy +stretch of ground, picking their way along the narrow paths +between the rice-fields, when they saw a group of men come +hurrying down the path to meet them. They kept calling out, but +the words they used were not the familiar "foreign devil" or +"ugly barbarian." Instead the people were shouting words of +joyful welcome. + +Dr. Dickson hailed them with delight, and soon he and Mr. +Ritchie's sedan-chair were surrounded by a clamorous group of +friends. + +They had journeyed so far south that they had arrived at the +borders of the English Presbyterian mission, and the people +crowding about them were native Christians. It was all so +different from their treatment by the heathen that Mackay's heart +was warmed. When the great stone of heathenism was broken, what +love and kindness were revealed! + +The visitors were led in triumph to the village. There was a +chapel here, and they stayed nearly a week, preaching and +teaching. + +The rest did Mr. Ritchie much good, and at the end of their visit +he was once more able to start off on foot. They moved on +from village to village and everywhere the Pe-po-hoan Christians +received them with the greatest hospitality. + +But at last the three friends found the time had come for them to +part. The two Englishmen had to go on through their fields to +their south Formosan home and the young Canadian must go back to +fight the battle alone in the north of the island. He had +endeared himself to the two older men, and when the farewells +came they were filled with regret. + +They bade him a lingering good-by, with many blessings upon his +young head, and many prayers for success in the hard fight upon +which he was entering. They walked a short way with him, and +stood watching the straight, lithe young figure, SO full of +courage and hope until it disappeared down the valley. They knew +only too well the dangers and trials ahead of him, but they knew +also that he was not going into the fight alone. For the Captain +was going with his young soldier. + +There was a suspicion of moisture in the eyes of the older +missionaries as they turned back to prepare for their own journey +southward. + +"God bless the boy!" said Dr. Dickson fervently. "We'll hear of +that young fellow yet, Ritchie. He's on fire." + + +CHAPTER IV. BEGINNING THE SIEGE + +The news was soon noised about Tamsui that one of the three +barbarians who had so lately visited the town had returned to +make the place his home. This was most unwelcome tidings to the +heathen, and the air was filled with mutterings and threatenings, +and every one was determined to drive the foreign devil out if at +all possible. So Mackay found himself meeting every kind of +opposition. He was too independent to ask assistance from the +British consul in the old Dutch fort on the bluff, or of any +other European settlers in Tamsui. He was bound to make his own +way. But it was not easy to do so in view of the forces which +opposed him. He had now been in Formosa about two months and had +studied the Chinese language every waking hour, but it was very +difficult, and he found his usually ready tongue wofully +handicapped. + +His first concern was to get a dwelling-place, and he went from +house to house inquiring for some place to rent. Everywhere he +went he was turned away with rough abuse, and occasionally the +dogs were set upon him. + +But at last he was successful. Up on the bank of the river, a +little way from the edge of the town, he found a place which the +owner condescended to rent. lilt was a miserable little hut, half +house, half cellar, built into the side of the hill facing the +river. A military officer had intended for his horsestable, and +yet Mackay paid for this hovel the sum of fifteen dollars a +month. It had three rooms, one without a floor. The road ran past +the door, and a few feet beyond was the river. By spending money +rather liberally he managed to hire the coolie who had +accompanied him to south Formosa. With his servant's help Mackay +had his new establishment thoroughly cleaned and whitewashed, and +then he moved in his furniture. He laughed as he called it +furniture, for it consisted of but two packing boxes full of +books and clothing. But more came later. The British consul, Mr. +Frater, lent him a chair and a bed. There was one old Chinese, +who kept a shop near by, and who seemed inclined to be friendly +to the queer barbarian with the black beard. He presented him +with an old pewter lamp, and the house was furnished complete. + +Mackay sat down at his one table, the first night after he was +settled. The damp air was hot and heavy, and swarms of tormenting +mosquitoes filled the room. Through the open door came the murmur +of the river, and from far down in the village the sounds of +harsh, clamorous voices. He was alone, many, many miles from home +and friends. Around him on every side were bitter enemies. + +One might have supposed he would be overcome at the thought of +the stupendous task before him, but whoever supposed that did not +know George Mackay. He lighted his pewter lamp, opened his diary, +and these are the words he wrote: + +"Here I am in this house, having been led all the way from the +old homestead in Zorra by Jesus, as direct as though my boxes +were labeled, `Tamsui, Formosa, China.' Oh, the glorious +privilege to lay the foundation of Christ's Church in unbroken +heathenism! God help me to do this with the open Bible! Again I +swear allegiance to thee, O King Jesus, my Captain. So help me +God!" + +And now his first duty was to learn the Chinese language. He +could already speak a little, but it would be a long time, he +knew, before he could preach. And yet, how was he to learn? he +asked himself. He was a scholar without a teacher or school. But +there was his servant, and nothing daunted by the difficulties to +be overcome, he set to work to make him his teacher also. + +George Mackay always went at any task with all his might and +main, and he attacked the Chinese language in the same manner. He +found it a hard stone to break, however. "Of all earthly things I +know of," he remarked once, "it is the most intricate and +difficult to master." + +His unwilling teacher was just about as hard to manage as his +task, for the coolie did not take kindly to giving lessons. He +certainly had a rather hard time. Pay and night his master +deluged him with questions. He made him repeat phrases again and +again until his pupil could say them correctly. He asked him the +name of everything inside the house and out, until the easy-going +Oriental was overcome with dismay. This wild barbarian, with the +fiery eyes and the black beard, was a terrible creature who gave +one no rest night nor day. Sometimes after Mackay had spent +hours with him, imitating sounds and repeating the names of +things over and over, his harassed teacher would back out of the +room stealthily, keeping an anxious eye on his master, and +showing plainly he had grave fears that the foreigner had gone +quite mad. + +Mackay realized that the pace was too hard for his servant, and +that the poor fellow was in a fair way to lose what little wits +he had, if not left alone occasionally. So one day he wandered +out along the riverbank, in search of some one who would talk +with him. He turned into a path that led up the hill behind the +town. He was in hopes he might meet a farmer who would be +friendly. + +When he reached the top of the bluff he found a grassy common +stretching back toward the rice-fields. Here and there over these +downs strayed the queer-looking water-buffaloes. Some of them +were plunged deep in pools of water, and lay there like pigs with +only their noses out. + +He heard a merry laugh and shout from another part of the common, +and there sat a crowd of frolicsome Chinese boys, in large sun +hats, and short loose trousers. There were about a dozen of them, +and they were supposed to be herding the water-buffaloes to keep +them out of the unfenced fields. But, boylike, they were flying +kites, and letting their huge-horned charges herd themselves. + +Mackay walked over toward them. It was not so long since he had +been a boy himself, and these jolly lads appealed to him. But the +moment one caught sight of the stranger, he gave a shout of +alarm. The rest jumped up, and with yells of terror and cries of +"Here's the foreign devil!" "Run, or the foreign devil will get +you!" away they went helter-skelter, their big hats waving, their +loose clothes flapping wildly. They all disappeared like magic +behind a big boulder, and the cause of their terror had to walk +away. + +But the next day, when his servant once more showed signs of +mental exhaustion, he strolled out again upon the downs. The boys +were there and saw him coming. Though they did not actually run +away this time, they retired to a safe distance, and stood ready +to fly at any sign of the barbarian's approach. They watched him +wonderingly. They noticed his strange white face, his black +beard, his hair cut off quite short, his amazing hat, and his +ridiculous clothes. And when at last he walked away, and all +danger was over, they burst into shouts of laughter. + +The next day, as they scampered about the common, here again came +the absurdlooking stranger, walking slowly, as though careful not +to frighten them. The boys did not run away this time, and to +their utter astonishment he spoke to them. Mackay had practised +carefully the words he was to say to them, and the well-spoken +Chinese astounded the lads as much as if one of the monkeys that +gamboled about the trees of their forests should come down and +say, "How do you do, boys?" + +"Why, he speaks our words!" they all cried at once. + +As they stood staring, Mackay took out his watch and held it up +for them to see. It glittered in the sun, and at the sight of it +and the kind smiling face above, they lost their fears and +crowded around him. They examined the watch in great wonder. They +handled his clothes, exclaimed over the buttons on his coat, and +inquired what they were for. They felt his hands and his fingers, +and finally decided that, in spite of his queer looks, he was +after all a man. + +From that day the young missionary and the herd-boys were great +friends. Every day he joined them in the buffalo pasture, and +would spend from four to five hours with them. And as they were +very willing to talk, he not only learned their language rapidly, +but also learned much about their homes, their schools, their +customs, and their religion. + +One day, after a lengthy lesson from his servant, the latter +decided that the barbarian was unbearable, and bundling up his +clothes he marched off, without so much as "by your leave." So +Mackay fell back entirely upon his little teachers on the common. +With their assistance in the daytime and his Chinese-English +dictionary at night, he made wonderful progress. + +He was left alone now, to get his own meals and keep the swarms +of flies and the damp mold out of his hut by the riverside. He +soon learned to eat rice and water-buffalo meat, but he missed +the milk and butter and cheese of his old Canadian home. For he +discovered that cows were never milked in Formosa. There was +variety of food, however, as almost every kind of vegetable that +he had ever tasted and many new kinds that he found delicious +were for sale in the open-fronted shops in the village. Then the +fruits! They were fresh at all seasons-- oranges the whole year, +bananas fresh from the fields--and such pineapples! He realized +that he had never really tasted pineapples before. + +Meanwhile, he was becoming acquainted. All the families of the +herd-boys learned to like him, and when others came to know him +they treated him with respect. He was a teacher, they learned, +and in China a teacher is always looked upon with something like +reverence. And, besides, he had a beard. This appendage was +considered very honorable among Chinese, so the blackbearded +barbarian was respected because of this. + +But there was one class that treated him with the greatest scorn. +These were the Chinese scholars. They were the literati, and were +like princes in the land. They despised every one who was not a +graduate of their schools, and most of all they despised this +barbarian who dared to set himself up as a teacher. Mackay had +now learned Chinese well enough to preach, and his sermons +aroused the indignation of these proud graduates. + +Sometimes when one was passing the little hut by the river, he +would drop in, and glance around just to see what sort of place +the barbarian kept. He would pick up the Bible and other books, +throw them on the floor, and with words of contempt strut proudly +out. + +Mackay endured this treatment patiently, but he set himself to +study their books, for he felt sure that the day was not far +distant when he must meet these conceited literati in argument. + +He went about a good deal now. The Tamsui people became +accustomed to him, and he was not troubled much. His bright eyes +were always wide open and he learned much of the lives of the +people he had come to teach. Among the poor he found a poverty of +which he had never dreamed. They could live upon what a so-called +poor family in Canada would throw away. Nothing was wasted in +China. He often saw the meat and fruit tins he threw away when +they were emptied, reappearing in the market-place. He learned +that these poorer people suffered cruel wrongs at the hands of +their magistrates. He visited a yamen, or court-house, and saw +the mandarin dispense justice," but his judgment was said to be +always given in favor of the one who paid him the highest bribe. +He saw the widow robbed, and the innocent suffering frightful +tortures, and sometimes he strode home to his little hut by the +river, his blood tingling with righteous indignation. And then he +would pray with all his soul: + +"O God, give me power to teach these people of thy love through +Jesus Christ!" + +But of all the horrors of heathenism, and there were many, he +found the religion the most dreadful. He had read about it when +on board ship, but he found it was infinitely worse when written +in men's lives than when set down in print. He never realized +what a blessing was the religion of Jesus Christ to a nation +until he lived among a people who did not know Him. + +He found almost as much difficulty in learning the Chinese +religion as the Chinese language. After he had spent days trying +to understand it, it would seem to him like some horrible +nightmare filled with wicked devils and no less wicked gods and +evil spirits and ugly idols. And to make matters worse there was +not one religion, but a bewildering mixture of three. First of +all there was the ancient Chinese religion, called Confucianism. +Confucius, a wise man of China, who lived ages before, had laid +down some rules of conduct, and had been worshiped ever since. +Very good rules they were as far as they went, and if the Chinese +had followed this wise man they would not have drifted so far +from the truth. But Confucianism meant ancestor-worship. In every +home was a little tablet with the names of the family's ancestors +upon it, and every one in the house worshiped the spirits of +those departed. With this was another religion called Taoism. +This taught belief in wicked demons who lurked about people ready +to do them some ill. Then, years and years before, some people +from India had brought over their religion, Buddhism, which had +become a system of idol-worship. These three religions were so +mixed up that the people themselves were not able to distinguish +between them. The names of their idols would cover pages, and an +account of their religion would fill volumes. The more Mackay +learned of it, the more he yearned to tell the people of the one +God who was Lord and Father of them all. + +As soon as he had learned to write clearly, he bought a large +sheet of paper, and printed on it the ten commandments in Chinese +characters. Then he hung it on the outside of his door. People +who passed read it and made comments of various kinds. Several +threw mud at it, and at last a proud graduate, who came striding +past his silk robes rustling grandly, caught the paper and tore +it down. Mackay promptly put up another. It shared the fate of +the first. Then he put up a third, and the people let it alone. +Even these heathen Chinese were beginning to get an impression of +the dauntless determination of the man with whom they were to get +much better acquainted. + +And all this time, while he was studying and working and arguing +with the heathen and preaching to them, the young missionary was +working just as hard at something else; something into which he +was putting as much energy and force as he did into learning the +Chinese langrnige. With all his might and main, day and night, he +was praying--praying for one special object. He had been praying +for this long before he saw Formosa. He was pleading with God to +give him, as his first convert, a young man of education. And so +he was always on the lookout for such, as he preached and taught, +and never once did he cease praying that he might find him. + +One forenoon he was sitting at his books, near the open door, +when a visitor stopped before him. lilt was a fine-looking young +man, well dressed and with all the unmistakable signs of the +scholar. He had none of the graduate's proud insolence, however, +for when Mackay arose, he spoke in the most gentlemanly manner. +At the missionary's invitation he entered, and sat down, and the +two chatted pleasantly. The visitor seemed interested in the +foreigner, and asked him many questions that showed a bright, +intelligent mind. When he arose to go, Mackay invited him to come +again, and he promised he would. He left his card, a strip of +pink paper about three inches by six; the name on it read Giam +Cheng Hoa. Mackay was very much interested in him, he was so +bright, so affable, and such pleasant company. He waited +anxiously to see if he would return. + +At the appointed hour the visitor was at the door, and the +missionary welcomed him warmly. The second visit was even more +pleasant than the first. And Mackay told his guest why he had +come to Formosa, and of Jesus Christ who was both God and man and +who had come to the earth to save mankind. + +The young man's bright eyes were fixed steadily upon the +missionary as he talked, and when he went away his face was very +thoughtful. Mackay sat thinking about him long after he had left. + +He had met many graduates, but none had impressed him as had this +youth, with his frank face and his kind, genial manner. There was +something too about the young fellow, he felt, that marked him as +superior to his companions. And then a sudden divine inspiration +flashed into the lonely young missionary's heart. THIS WAS HIS +MAN! This was the man for whom he had been praying. The stranger +had as yet shown no sign of conversion, but Mackay could not get +away from that inspired thought. And that night he could not +sleep for joy. + +In a day or two the young man returned. With him was a noted +graduate, who asked many questions about the new religion. The +next day he came again with six graduates, who argued and +discussed. + +When they were gone Mackay paced up and down the room and faced +the serious situation which he realized he was in. He saw plainly +that the educated men of the town were banded together to beat +him in argument. And with all his energy and desperate +determination he set to work to be ready for them. + +His first task was to gain a thorough knowledge of the Chinese +religions. He had already learned much about them, both from +books on shipboard and since he had come to the island. But now +he spent long hours of the night, poring over the books of +Confucianism, Buddhism, and Taoism, by the light of his smoky +little pewter lamp. And before the next visit of his enemies he +knew almost more of their jumble of religions than they did +themselves. + +It was well he was prepared, for his opponents came down upon him +in full force. Every day a band of college graduates, always +headed by Giam Cheng Hoa, came up from the town to the +missionary's little hut by the river, and for hours they would +sit arguing and talking. They were always the most noted scholars +the place could produce, but in spite of all their cleverness the +barbarian teacher silenced them every time. He fairly took the +wind out of their sails by showing he knew quite as much about +Chinese religions as they did. If they quoted Confucius to +contradict the Bible, he would quote Confucius to contradict +them. He confounded them by proving that they were not really +followers of Confucius, for they did not keep his sayings. And +with unanswerable arguments he went on to show that the religion +taught by Jesus Christ was the one and only religion to make man +good and noble. + +Each day the group of visitors grew larger, and at last one +morning, as Mackay looked out of his door, he saw quite a crowd +approaching. They were led, as usual, by the friendly young +scholar. By his side walked, or rather, swaggered a man of whom +the missionary had often heard. He was a scholar of high degree +and was famed all over Formosa for his great learning. Behind him +came about twenty men, and Mackay could see by their dress and +appearance that they were all literary graduates. They were +coming in great force this time, to crush the barbarian with +their combined knowledge. lie met them at the door with his usual +politeness and hospitality. He was always courteous to these +proud literati, but he always treated them as equals, and showed +none of the deference they felt he owed them. The crowd seated +itself on improvised benches and the argument opened. + +This time Mackay led the attack. He carried the war right into +the enemy's camp. Instead of letting them put questions to him, +he asked them question after question concerning Confucianism, +Buddhism, and Taoism. They were questions that sometimes they +could not answer, and to their chagrin they had to hear "the +barbarian" answer for them. There were other questions, still +more humiliating, which, when they answered, only served to show +their religion as false and degrading. Their spokesman, the great +learned man, became at last so entangled that there was nothing +for him but flight. He arose and stalked angrily away, and in a +little while they all left. Mackay looked wistfully at young Giam +as he went out, wondering what effect these words had upon him. + +He was not left long in doubt. Not half an hour after a shadow +fell across the open Bible the missionary was studying. He +glanced up. There he stood! His bright face was very serious. He +looked gravely at the other young man, and his eyes shone as he +spoke. + +"I brought all those graduates and teachers here," he confessed, +"to silence you or be silenced. And now I am convinced that the +doctrines you teach are true. I am determined to become a +Christian, even though I suffer death for it." + +Mackay rose from his seat, his face alight with an overwhelming +joy. The man he had prayed for! He took the young fellow's hand-- +speechless. And together the only missionary of north Formosa and +his first convert fell upon their knees before the true God and +poured out their hearts in joy and thanksgiving. + + +CHAPTER V. SOLDIERS TWO + +And now a new day dawned for the only lonely young missionary. He +had not + +a convert but a helper and a delightful companion. His new friend +was of a bright, joyous nature, the sort that everybody loves. +Giam was his surname, but almost every one called him by his +given name, Hoa, and those who knew him best called him A Hoa. +Mackay used this more familiar boyish name, for Giam was the +younger by a few years. + +To A Hoa his new friend was always Pastor Mackay, or as the +Chinese put it, Mackay Pastor, Kai Bok-su was the real Chinese of +it, and Kai Bok-su soon became a name known all over the island +of Formosa. + +A Hoa needed all his kind new friend's help in the first days +after his conversion. For family, relatives, and friends turned +upon him with the bitterest hatred for taking up the barbarian's +religion. So, driven from his friends, he came to live in the +little hut by the river with Mackay. While at home these two +read, sang, and studied together all the day long. It would have +been hard for an observer to guess who was teacher and who pupil. +For at one time A IIoa was receiving Bible instruction and the +next time Mackay was being drilled in the Chinese of the educated +classes. Each teacher was as eager to instruct as each pupil was +eager to learn. + +The Bible was, of course, the chief textbook, but they studied +other things, astronomy, geology, history, and similar subjects. +One day the Canadian took out a map of the world, and the Chinese +gazed with amazement at the sight of the many large countries +outside China. A Hoa had been private secretary to a mandarin, +and had traveled much in China, and once spent six months in +Peking. His idea had been that China was everything, that all +countries outside it were but insignificant barbarian places. His +geography lessons were like revelations. + +His progress was simply astonishing, as was also Mackay's. The +two seemed possessed with the spirit of hard work. But a +superstitious old man who lived near believed they were possessed +with a demon. He often listened to the two singing, drilling, and +repeating words as they marched up and down, either in the house +or in front of it, and he became alarmed. He was a kindly old +fellow, and, though a heathen, felt well disposed toward the +missionary and A Hoa. So one day, very much afraid, he slipped +over to the little house with two small cups of strong tea. He +came to the door and proffered them with a polite bow. He hoped +they might prove soothing to the disturbed nerves of the +patients, he said. He suggested, also, that a visit to the +nearest temple might help them. + +The two affected ones received his advice politely, but the humor +of it struck them both, and when their visitor was gone they +laughed so hard the tea nearly choked them. + +The missionary was soon able to speak so fluently that he +preached almost every day, either in the little house by the +river, or on the street in some open square. There were other +things he did, too. On every side he saw great suffering from +disease. The chief malady was the terrible malaria, and the +native doctors with their ridiculous remedies only made the poor +sufferers worse. Mackay had studied medicine for a short time +while in college, and now found his knowledge very useful. He +gave some simple remedies to several victims of malaria which +proved effective. The news of the cures spread far and wide. The +barbarian was kind, he had a good heart, the people declared. +Many more came to him for medicine, and day by day the circle of +his friends grew. And wherever he went, curing disease, teaching, +or preaching, A Hoa went with him, and shared with him the taunts +of their heathen enemies. + +But the gospel was gradually making its way. Not long after A +Hoa's conversion a second man confessed Christ. He had previously +disturbed the meetings by throwing stones into the doorway +whenever he passed. But his sister was cured of malaria by the +missionary's medicine, and soon both sister and mother became +Christians, and finally the stone-thrower himself. And so, gradu +ally, the lines of the enemy were falling back, and at every sign +of retreat the little army of two advanced. A little army? No! +For was there not the whole host of heaven moving with them? And +Mackay was learn ing that his boyish dreams of glory were truly +to be fulfilled. He had wanted always to be a soldier like his +grandfather, and fight a great Waterloo, and here he was right +in the midst of the battle with the vic tory and the glory sure. + +The two missionaries often went on short trips here and there +into the country around Tamsui, and Mackay determined that when +the intense summer heat had lessened they would make a long tour +to some of the large cities. The heat of August was almost +overpowering to the Canadian. Flies and mosquitoes and insect +pests of all kinds made his life miserable, too, and prevented +his studying as hard as he wished. + +One oppressive day he and A Hoa returned from a preaching tour in +the country to find their home in a state of siege. Right across +the threshold lay a monster serpent, eight feet in length. A Hoa +shouted a warning, and seized a long pole, and the two managed to +kill it. But their troubles were not yet over. The next morning, +Mackay stepped outside the door and sprang back just in time to +escape another, the mate of the one killed. This one was even +larger than the first, and was very fierce. But they finished it +with sticks and stones. + +When September came the days grew clearer, and the many pests of +summer were not so numerous. The mosquitoes and flies that had +been such torments disappeared, and there was some relief from +the damp oppressive heat. But he had only begun to enjoy the +refreshing breaths of cool air, and had remarked to A Hoa that +the days reminded him of Canadian summers, when the weather gave +him to understand that every Formosan season has its drawbacks. +September brought tropical storms and typhoons that were +terrible, and he saw from his little house on the hillside big +trees torn up by the root, buildings swept away like chaff, and +out in the harbor great ships lifted from their anchorage and +whirled away to destruction. And then he was sometimes thankful +that his little hut was built into the hillside, solid and +secure. + +But the fierce storms cleared away the heavy dampness that had +made the heat of the summer so unbearable, and October and +November brought delightful days. The weather was still warm of +course, but the nights were cool and pleasant. + +So early one October morning, Mackay and A Hoa started off on a +tour to the cities. + +"We shall go to Kelung first," said the missionary. Kelung was a +seaport city on the northern coast, straight east across the +island from Tamsui. A coolie to carry food and clothing was +hired, and early in the morning, while the stars were still +shining, they passed through the sleeping town and out on the +little paths between the rice-fields. Though it was yet scarcely +daylight, the farmers were already in their fields. It was +harvest-time--the second harvest of the year --and the little +rice-fields were no longer like mirrors, but were filled with +high rustling grain ready for the sickle. The water had been +drained off and the reaper and thrasher were going through the +fields before dawn. There was no machinery like that used at +home. The reaper was a short sickle, the thrashing-machine a kind +of portable tub, and Mackay looked at them with some amusement, +and described to A Hoa how they took off the great wheat crops in +western Canada. + +The two were in high spirits, ready for any sort of adventure and +they met some. Toward evening they reached a place called +Sek-khau, and went to the little brick inn to get a +sleeping-place. The landlord came to the door and was about to +bid A Hoa enter, when the light fell upon Mackay's face. With a +shout, "Black-bearded barbarian!" he slammed the door in their +faces. They turned away, but already a crowd had begun to gather. +"The black-bearded barbarian is here! The foreign devil from +Tamsui has come!" was the cry. The mob followed the two down the +streets, shouting curses. Some one threw a broken piece of brick, +another a stone. Mackay turned and faced them, and for a few +moments they seemed cowed. But the crowd was increasing, and he +deemed it wise to move on. So the two marched out of the town +followed by stones and curses. And, as they went, Mackay reminded +A Hoa of what they had been read ing the night before. + +"Yes," said A Hoa brightly. "The Lord was driven out of his own +town in Galilee." + + "Yes, and Paul--you remember how he was stoned. Our Master +counts us worthy to suffer for him." But where to go was the +question. Before they could decide, night came down upon them, +and it came in that sudden tropical way to which Mackay, all his +life accustomed to the long mellow twilights of his northern +home, could never grow accustomed. They each took a torch out of +the carrier's bag, lighted it, and marched bravely on. The path +led along the Kelung river, through tall grass. They were not +sure where it led to, but thought it wise to follow the river; +they would surely come to Kelung some time. Mackay was ahead, A +Hoa right at his heels, and behind them the basketbearer. At a +sudden turn in the path A Hoa gave a shout of warning, and the +next instant, a band of robbers leaped from the long reeds and +grass, and brandished their spears in the travelers' faces. The +torchlight shone on their fierce evil eyes and their long knives, +making a horrible picture. The young Canadian Scot did not flinch +for a second. He looked the wild leader straight in the face. + +"We have no money, so you cannot rob us," + +he said steadily, "and you must let us pass at once. I am a +teacher and--" + +"A TEACHER!" he was interrupted by a dismayed exclamation from +several of the wild band. "A teacher!" As if with one accord they +turned and fled into the darkness. For even a highwayman in China +respects a man of learning. The travelers went on again, with +something of relief and something of the exultation that youth +feels in having faced danger. But a second trouble was upon them. +One of those terrible storms that still raged occasionally had +been brewing all evening, and now it opened its artillery. Great +howling gusts came down from the mountain, carrying sheets of +driving rain. Their torches went out like matches, and they were +left to stagger along in the black darkness. What were they to +do? They could not go back. They could not stay there. They +scarcely dared go on. For they did not know the way, and any +moment a fresh blast of wind or a misstep might hurl them into +the river. But they decided that they must go on, and on they +went, stumbling, slipping, sprawling, and falling outright. Now +there would be an exclamation from Mackay as he sank to the knees +in the mud of a rice-field, now a groan from A Hoa as he fell +over a boulder and bruised and scratched himself, and oftenest a +yell from the poor coolie, as he slipped, baskets and all, into +some rocky crevice, and was sure he was tumbling into the river; +but they staggered on, Mackay secure in his faith in God. His +Father knew and his Father would keep him safely. And behind him +came brave young A Hoa, buoyed up by his new growing faith, and +learning the lesson that sometimes the Captain asks his soldier +to march into hard encounters, but that the soldier must never +flinch. + +The "everlasting arms" were around them, for by midnight they +reached Kelung. They were drenched, breathless, and worn out, and +they spent the night in a damp hovel, glad of any shelter from +the wind and rain. + +But the next morning, young soldier A Hoa had a fiercer battle to +fight than any with robbers or storms. As soon as the city was +astir, Mackay and he went out to find a good place to preach. +They passed down the main thoroughfare, and everywhere they +attracted attention. Cries of "Ugly barbarian!" and oftenest +"Black-bearded barbarian" were heard on all sides. A Hoa was +known in Kelung and contempt and ridicule was heaped upon him by +his old college acquaintances. He was consorting with the +barbarian! He was a friend of this foreigner! They poured more +insults upon him than they did upon the barbarian himself. Some +took the stranger as a joke, and laughed and made funny remarks +upon his appearance. Here and there an old woman, peeping through +the doorway, would utter a loud cackling laugh, and pointing a +wizened finger at the missionary would cry: "Eh, eh, look at him! +Tee hee! He's got a wash basin on for a hat!" A Hoa was +distressed at these remarks, but Mackay was highly amused. + +"We're drawing a crowd, anyway," he remarked cheerfully, "and +that's what we want" + +Soon they came to an open square in front of a heathen temple. +The building had several large stone steps leading up to the +door. Mackay mounted them and stood facing the buzzing crowd, +with A Hoa at his side. They started a hymn. + +All people that on earth do dwell Sing to the Lord with cheerful +voice. + +The open square in front of them began to fill rapidly. The +people jostled each other in their endeavors to get a view of the +barbarian. Every one was curious, but every one was angry and +indignant, so sometimes the sound of the singing was lost in the +shouts of derision. + +When the hymn was finished, Mackay had a sudden inspiration. +"They will surely listen to one of their own people," he said to +himself, and turned to A Hoa. + +"Speak to them," he said. "Tell them about the true God." + +That was a hard moment for the young convert. He had been a +Christian only a few months and had never yet spoken in public +for Christ. He looked desperately over the sea of mocking faces +beneath him. He opened his mouth, as though to speak, and +hesitated. Just then came a rough and bitter taunt from one of +his old companions. It was too much. A Hoa turned away and hung +his head. + +The young missionary said nothing. But he did the very wisest +thing he could have done. He had some time before taught A Hoa a +grand old Scottish paraphrase, and they had often sung it +together: + +I'm not ashamed to own my Lord +Or to defend his cause, +Maintain the glory of his cross +And honor all his laws. + +Mackay's voice, loud and clear, burst into this fine old hymn. A +Hoa taised his head. He joined in the hymn and sang it to the +end. It put mettle into him. It was the battle-song that brought +back the young recruit's courage. Almost before the last note +sounded he began to speak. His voice rang out bold and unafraid +over the crowd of angry heathen. + +"I am a Christian!" he said distinctly. "I worship the true God. +I cannot worship idols," with a gesture toward the temple door, +"that rats can destroy. I am not afraid. I love Jesus. He is my +Savior and Friend." + +No, A Hoa was not "ashamed" any more. His testing time had come, +and he had not failed after all. And his brave, true words sent a +thrill of joy through the more seasoned soldier at his side. + +That was not the only difficult situation he met on that journey. +The two soldiers of the cross had many trials, but the thrill of +that victory before the Kelung temple never left them. + +When they returned to Tamsui they held daily services in their +house, and A Hoa often spoke to the people who gathered there. + +One Sunday they noticed an old woman present, who had come down +the river in a boat. Women as a rule did not come out to the +meetings, but this old lady continued to come every Sunday. She +showed great interest in the missionary's words, and, at the +close of one meeting, he spoke to her. She told him she was a +poor widow, that her name was Thah-so, and that she had come down +the river from Go-ko-khi to hear him preach. Then she added, "I +have passed through many trials in this world, and my idols never +gave me any comfort." Then her eyes shone, "But I like your +teaching very much," she went on. "I believe the God you tell +about will give me peace.. I will come again, and bring others." + +Next Sunday she was there with several other women. And after +that she came every Sunday, bringing more each time, until at +last a whole boat-load would come down to the service. + +These people were so interested that they asked the missionary if +he would not visit them. So one day he and A Hoa boarded one of +the queer-looking flat-bottomed river-boats and were pulled up +the rapids to Go ko-khi. Every village in Formosa had its +headman, who is virtually the ruler of the place. When the boat +landed, many of the villagers were at the shore to meet their +vise itors and took them at once to their mayor's house, the best +building in the village. Tan Paugh, a fine, big, powerfully-built +man, received them cordially. He frankly declared that he was +tired and sick of idols and wanted to hear more of this new +religion. An empty granary was obtained for both church and home, +and the missionary and his assistant took up their quarters +there, and for several months they remained, preaching and +teaching the Bible either in Go-ho-khi, or in the lovely +surrounding valleys. + + +CHAPTER VI. THE GREAT KAI BOK-SU + +The missionary was now becoming a familiar figure both in Tamsui +and in the surrounding country. By many he was loved, by all hd +was respected, but by a large number he was bitterly hated. The +scholars continued his worst enemies. They could never forgive +him for beating them so completely in argument, in the days when +A Hoa was striving for the light, and their hatred increased as +they saw other scholars becoming Christians under his teaching. +There was something about him, however, that compelled their +respect and even their admiration. Wherever they met him--on the +street, by their temples, or on the country roads--he bore +himself in such a way as to make them confess that he was their +superior both in ability and knowledge. + +These Chinese literati had a custom which Mackay found very +interesting. One proud scholar marching down the street and +scarcely noticing the obsequious bows of his inferiors, would +meet another equally proud scholar. Each would salute the other +in an exceedingly grand manner, and then one would spin off a +quotation from the writings of Confucius or some other Chinese +sage and say, "Now tell me where that is found." And scholar +number two had to ransack his brains to remember where the saying +was found, or else confess himself beaten. Mackay thought it +might be a good habit for the graduates of his own alma mater +across the wide sea to adopt. He wondered what some of his old +college chums would think, if, when he got back to Canada, he +should buttonhole one on the street some day, recite a quotation +from Shakespeare or Macaulay, and demand from his friend where it +could be found. He had a suspicion that the old friend would be +afraid that the Oriental sun bad touched George Mackay's brain. + +Nevertheless he thought the custom one he could turn to good +account, and before long he was trying it himself. He had such a +wonderful memory that he never forgot anything he had once read. +So the scholars of north Formosa soon discovered, again to their +humiliation, that this Kai Bok-su of Tamsui could beat them at +their own game. They did not care how much he might profess to +know of writers and lands beyond China. Such were only barbarians +anyway. But when, right before a crowd, he would display a surer +knowledge of the Chinese classics than they themselves, they +began not only to respect but to fear him. It was no use trying +to humiliate him with a quotation. With his bright eyes flashing, +he would tell, without a moment's hesitation, where it was found +and come back at the questioner swiftly with another, most +probably one long forgotten, and reel it off as though he had +studied Chinese all his life. + +He was a wonderful man certainly, they all agreed, and one whom +it was not safe to oppose. The common people liked him better +every day. He was so tactful, so kind, and always so careful not +to arouse the prejudice of the heathen. He was extremely wise in +dealing with their superstitions. No matter how absurd or +childish They might be, he never ridiculed them, but only strove +to show the people how much happier they might be if they +believed in God as their Father and in Jesus Christ as their +Savior. He never made light of anything sacred to the Chinese +mind, but always tried to take whatever germ of good he could +find in their religion, and lead on from it to the greater good +found in Christianity. He discovered that the ancestral worship +made the younger people kind and respectful to older folk, and he +saw that Chinese children reverenced their parents and elders in +a way that he felt many of his young friends across the sea would +do well to copy. + +One day when he and A Hoa were out on a preaching tour, the wise +Kai Bok-su made use of this respect for parents in quieting a +mob. He and his comrade were standing side by side on the steps +of a heathen temple as they had done at Kelung. The angry crowd +was scowling and muttering, ready to throw stones as soon as the +preacher uttered. a word. Mackay knew this, and when they had +sung a hymn and the people waited, ready for a riot, his voice +rang out clear and steady, repeating the fifth commandment "Honor +thy father and thy mother: that thy days may be long upon the +land which the Lord thy God giveth thee." A silence fell over the +muttering crowd, and an old heathen whose cue was white and whose +aged hands trembled on the top of his staff, nodded his head and +said, "That is heavenly doctrine." The people were surprised and +disarmed. If the black-bearded barbarian taught such truths as +this, he surely was not so very wicked after all. And so they +listened attentively as he went on to show that they had all one +great Father, even God. + +He sometimes found it rather a task to treat with respect that +which the Chinese held sacred. Especially was this so when he +discovered to his amusement and to some carefully concealed +disgust, that in the Chinese family the pig was looked upon with +affection, and as a young naval officer, who visited Mackay +remarked, "was treated like a gentleman." + +Every Chinese house of any size was made up of three buildings +joined together so as to make three sides of an enclosure. This +space was called a court, and a door led from it to another next +the street. In this outer yard pigs and fowl were always to be +found. Whenever the missionary dropped in at a home, mother pig +and all the little pigs often followed him inside the house, +quite like members of the family. Every one was always glad to +see Kai Bok-su, pigs and all, and as soon as he appeared the +order was given--"Infuse tea." And when the little handleless +cups of clear brown liquid were passed around and they all drank +and chatted, Mrs. Pig and her children strolled about as welcome +as the guest. + +The Chinese would allow no one to hurt their pigs, either. One +day as Mackay sat in his rooms facing the river, battling with +some new Chinese characters, he heard a great hubbub coming up +the street. The threatening mobs that used to surround his house +had long ago ceased to trouble him. lie arose in some surprise +and went to the door to see what was the matter. A very unusual +sight for Tamsui met his gaze. Coming up the street at a wild run +were some half-dozen English sailors, their loose blue blouses +and trousers flapping madly. They were evidently from a ship +which Mackay had seen lying in the harbor that morning. + +"Give us a gun!" roared the foremost as soon as he saw the +missionary. + +Mackay did not possess a gun, and would not have given the +enraged bluejacket one had he owned a dozen. But the Chinese +mob, roaring with fury, were coming up the street after the men +and he swiftly pointed out a narrow alley that led down to the +river. "Run down there!" he shouted to the sailors. "You can get +to your boats before they find you." + +They were gone in an instant, and the next moment the crowd of +pursuers were storming about the door demanding whither the enemy +had disappeared. + +"What is all this disturbance about?" demanded Kai Bok-su calmly, +glad of an opportunity to gain time for the fleeing sailors. + +The aggrieved Chinese gathered about him, each telling the story +as loud as his voice would permit. Those barbarians of the sea +had come swaggering along the streets waving their big sticks. +And they had dared--yes actually DARED--to hit the pet pigs +belonging to every house as they passed. The poor pigs who lay +sunning themselves at the door! + +This was indeed a serious offense. Mackay could picture the +rollicking sailor-lads gaily whacking the lazy porkers with their +canes as they passed, happily unconscious of the trouble they +were raising. But there was no amusement in Kai B ok-sn's grave +face. lie spoke kindly, and soothingly, and promised that if the +offenders misbehaved again he would complain to the authorities. +That made it all right. Heathen though they were, they knew Kai +Bok-su's promise would not be broken, and away they went quite +satisfied. + +One day he learned, quite by accident, a new and very useful way +of helping his people. He and A Hoa and several other young men +who had become Christians, went on a missionary tour to +Tek-chham, a large city which he had visited once before. + +On the day they left the place, Kai Boksu's preaching had drawn +such crowds that the authorities of the city became afraid of +him. And when the little party left, a dozen soldiers were sent +to follow the dangerous barbarian and his students and see that +they did not bewitch the people on the road. + +The soldiers tramped along after the mis sionary party, and with +his usual ability to make use of any situation, Mackay stepped +back and chatted with his spies. He found one poor fellow in +agony with the toothache. This malady was very common in north +Formosa, partly owing to the habit of chewing the betel-nut. He +examined the aching tooth and found it badly decayed. "There is a +worm in it," the soldier said, for the Formosan doctors had +taught the people this was the cause of toothache. + +Mackay had no forceps, but he knew how to pull a tooth, and he +was not the sort to be daunted by the lack of tools. He got a +piece of hard wood, whittled it into shape and with it pried out +the tooth. The relief from pain was so great that the soldier +almost wept for joy and overwhelmed the tooth-puller with +gratitude. And for the remainder of the journey the guards sent +to spy on the missionary's doings were his warmest friends. + +After this, dentistry became a part of this many-sided +missionary's work. He went to a native blacksmith and had a pair +of forceps hammered out of iron. It was a rather clumsy +instrument, but it proved of great value, and later he sent for a +complete set of the best instruments made in New York. + +So with forceps in one hand and the Bible in the other, Mackay +found himself doubly equipped. Every second person seemed to be +suffering from toothache, and when the pain was relieved by the +missionary, the patient was in a state of mind to receive his +teaching kindly. The cruel methods by which the native doctors +extracted teeth often caused more suffering than the toothache, +and sometimes evew resulted in death through blood-poisoning. + +A Hoa and some of the other young converts learned from their +teacher how to pull a tooth, and they, too, became experts in the +art. + +Whenever they visited a town or city after this, they had a +program which they always followed. First they would place +themselves in front of an idol temple or in an open square. Here +they would sing a hymn which always attracted a crowd. Next, any +one who wanted a tooth pulled was invited to come forward. Many +accepted the invitation gladly and sometimes a long line of +twenty or thirty would be waiting, each his turn. The Chinese +had considerable nerve, the Canadian discovered, and stood the +pain bravely. They literally "stood" it, too, for there was no +dentist's chair and every man stood up for his operation, very +much pleased and very grateful when it was over. Then there were +quinine and other simple remedies for malaria handed round, for +in a Formosan crowd there were often many shaking in the grip of +this terrible disease. And now, having opened the people's hearts +by his kindness, Kai Bok-su brought forth his cure for souls. He +would mount the steps of the temple or stand on a box or stone, +and tell the wonderful old story of the man Jesus who was also +God, and who said to all sick and weary and troubled ones, "Come +unto me, . . . and I will give you rest." And often, when he had +finished, the disease of sin in many a heart was cured by the +remedy of the gospel. + +And so the autumn passed away happily and busily, and Mackay +entered his first Formosan winter. And such a winter! The young +man who had felt the clear, bright cold of a Canadian January +needed all his fine courage to bear up under its dreariness. It +started about Christmas time. Just when his own people far away +in Canada were gathering about the blazing fire or jingling over +the crisp snow in sleighs and cutters, the great winter rains +commenced. Christmas day--his first Christmas in a land that did +not know its beautiful meaning--was one long dreary downpour. It +rained steadily all Christmas week. It poured on Newyear's day +and for a week after. It came down in torrents all January. +February set in and still it rained and rained, with only a +short interval each afternoon. Day and night, week in, week out, +it poured, until Mackay forgot what sunlight looked like. rns +house grew damp, his clothes moldy. A stream broke out up in the +hill behind and one morning he awoke to find a cascade tumbling +into his kitchen, and rushing across the floor out into the river +beyond. And still it poured and the wind blew and everything was +damp and cold and dreary. + +He caught an occasional glimpse of snow, only a very far-off +view, for it lay away up on the top of a mountain, but it made +his heart long for just one breath of good dry Canadian air, just +one whiff of the keen, cutting frost. + +But Kai Bok-su was not the sort to spend these dismal days +repining. Indeed he had no time, even had he been so inclined. +His work filled up every minute of every rainy day and hours of +the drenched night. If there was no sunshine outside there was +plenty in his brave heart, and A Hoa 's whole nature radiated +brightness. + +And there were many reasons for being happy after all. On the +second Sabbath of February, 1873, just one year after his arrival +in Tamsui, the missionary announced, at the close of one of his +Sabbath services, that he would receive a number into the +Christian church. There was instantly a commotion among the +heathen who were in the house, and yells and jeers from those +crowding about the door outside. + +"We'll stop him," they shouted. "Let us beat the converts," was +another cry. + +But Mackay went quietly on with the beautiful ceremony in spite +of the disturbance. Five young men, with A Hoa at their head, +came and were baptized into the name of the Father, the Son, and +the Holy Spirit. + + +When the next Sabbath came these five with their missionary sat +down for the first time to partake of the Lord's Supper. It was a +very impressive ceremony. One young fellow broke down, declaring +he was not worthy. Mackay took him alone into his little room and +they prayed together, and the young man came out to the Lord's +Supper comforted, knowing that all might be worthy in Jesus +Christ. + +Spring came at last, bright and clear, and Mackay announced to A +Hoa that they must go up the river and visit their friends at +Goko-khi. The two did not go alone this time. Three other young +men who wanted to be missionaries were now spending their days +with their teacher, learning with A Hoa how to preach the gospel. +So it was quite a little band of disciples that walked along the +river bank up to Go-ko-khi. Mackay preached at all the villages +along the route, and visited the homes of Christians. + +One day, as they passed a yamen or Chinese court-house where a +mandarin was trying some cases, they stepped in to see what was +going on. At one end of the room sat the mandarin who was judge. +He was dressed in magnificent silks and looked down very +haughtily upon the lesser people and the retinue of servants who +were gathered about him. On either side of the room stood a row +of constables and near them the executioners. The rest of the +room was filled with friends of the people on trial and by the +rabble from the street. The missionaries mixed with the former +and stood watching proceedings. There were no lawyers, no jury. +The mandarin's decision was law. + +The first case was one of theft. Whether the man had really +committed the crime or not was a question freely discussed among +the onlookers around Mackay. But there seemed no doubt as to his +punishment being swift and heavy. "He has not paid the mandarn," +a friend explained to the missionary. "He will be punished." + +"The mandarin eats cash," remarked another with a shrug. It was a +saying to which Mackay had become accustomed. For it was one of +the shameless proverbs of poor, oppressed Formosa. + +The case was soon finished. Nothing was definitely proven against +the man. But the mandarin pronounced the sentence of death. The +victim was hurried out, shrieking his innocence, and praying for +mercy. Case followed case, each one becoming more revolting than +the last to the eyes of the young man accustomed to British +justice. Imprisonment and torture were meted out to prisoners, +and even witnesses were laid hold of and beaten on the face by +the executioners if their tale did not suit the mandarin. Men who +were plainly guilty but Who had given their judge a liberal bribe +were let off, while innocent men were made to pay heavy fines or +were thrown into prison. The young missionary went out and on his +way sickened by the sights he had witnessed. And as he went, he +raised his eyes to heaven and prayed fervently that he might be a +faithful preacher of the gospel, and that one day Formosa would +be a Christian land and injustice and oppression be done away. + + +The next scene was a happier one. There was an earnest little +band of Christians in Go-ko-khi, and two of the young people were +about to be married. It was the first Christian marriage in the +place and Kai Bok-su was called upon to officiate. There was a +great deal of opposition raised among the heathen, but after +seeing the ceremony, they all voted a Christian wedding +everything that was beautiful and good. + + +CHAPTER VII. BESIEGING HEAD-HUNTERS When they returned from +their trip, Mackay and A Hoa with the assistance of some of their +Christian friends set about looking for a new house in a more +wholesome district. It was much easier for the missionary to rent +a place now, and he managed to secure a comfortable home upon +the bluff above the town. It was a dryer situation and much more +healthful. Here one room was used as a study and every + +morning when not away on a tour a party of young men gathered in +it for lessons. Sometimes, what with traveling, preaching, +training his students, visiting the sick, and pulling teeth, +Mackay had scarcely time to eat, and very little to sleep. But +always as he came and xvent on his travels, his eyes would wander +to the mountains where the savages lived, and with all his heart +he would wish that he might visit them also. + +His Chinese friends held up their hands in dismay when he +broached the subject. To the mountains where the Chhi-hoan lived! +Did Kai Bok-su not know that every man of them was a practised +head-hunter, and that behind every rock and tree and in the +darkness of the forests they lay in wait for any one who went +beyond the settled districts? Yes, Kai Bok-su knew all that, but +he could not quite explain that it was just that which made the +thought of a visit to them seem so alluring, just that which made +him so anxious to tell them of Jesus Christ, who wished all men +to live as brothers. A Hoa and a few others who had caught the +spirit of the true soldier of the cross understood. For they had +learned that one who follows Jesus must be ready to dare +anything, death included, to carry The news of his salvation to +the dark corners of the world. + +But the days were so filled with preaching, teaching, and +touring, that for some time Mackay had no opportunity for a trip +into the head-hunters' territory. And then one day, quite +unexpectedly, his chance came. There sailed into Tamsui harbor, +one hot afternoon, a British man-of-war, named The Dwarf. Captain +Bax from this vessel visited Tamsui, and expressed a desire to +see something of the life of the savages in the: mountains. This +was Mackay's opportunity, and in spite of protests from his +friends he offered to accompany the captain. So together they +started off, the sailor-soldier of England and the soldier of the +cross, each with the same place in view but each with a very +different object. + +It took three days journey from Tamsui across rice-fields and up +hillsides to reach even the foot of the mountains. Here there +lived a village of natives, closely related to the savages. But +they were not given to head-hunting and were quite friendly with +the people about them. Mackay had met some of these people on a +former trip inland, and now he and Captain Bax hired their chief +and a party of his men to guide them up into savage territory. + +The travelers slept that night in the village, and before dawn +were up and ready to start on their dangerous undertaking. Before +them in the gray dawn rose hill upon hill, each loftier than the +last, till they melted into the mountains, the territory of the +dreaded head-hunters. They started off on a steady tramp, up +hills, down valleys, and across streams, until at last they came +to the foot of the first mountain. + +Before them rose its sheer side, towering thirty-five hundred +feet above their heads. It was literally covered with rank growth +of all kinds, through which it was impossible to move. So a plan +of march had to be decided upon. In front went a line of men with +long sharp knives. With these they cut away the creepers and +tangled scrub or undergrowth. Next came the coolies with the +baggage, and last the two travelers. It was slow work, and +sometimes the climb was so steep they held their breath, as they +crept over a sheer ledge and saw the depth below to which they +might easily be hurled. The chief of the guides himself collapsed +in one terrible climb, and his men tied rattan ropes about him +and hauled him up over the steepest places. + +During this wearisome ascent the most tintiring one was the +missionary; and the sailor often looked at him in amazement. His +lithe, wiry frame never seemed to grow weary. He was often in the +advance line, cutting his way through the tangle, and here on +that first afternoon he met with an unpleasant adventure. + +The natives had warned the two strangers to be on the lookout for +poisonous snakes, and Mackay's year in Formosa had taught him to +be wary. But he had forgotten all danger in the toilsome climb. +He was soon reminded of it. They were passing up a slope covered +with long dense grass when a rustling at his side made the young +missionary pause. The next moment a huge cobra sprang out from a +clump of grass and struck at him. Mackay sprang aside just in +time to escape its deadly fangs. The guides rushed up with their +spears only to see its horrible scaly length disappear in the +long grass. + +That was not the only escape of the young adventurer, for there +were wild animals as well as poisonous snakes along the line of +march, and the man in the front was always in danger. But at the +front Mackay must be in spite of all warning. Nobody moved fast +enough for him. + +At last they reached the summit of the range. They were now on +the dividing line between Chinese ground and savage territory, +and the men who dared go a step farther went at terrible risk. +The head-hunters would very likely see that they did not return. + +But Mackay was all for pushing forward, and Captain Bax was no +less eager. So they spent a night in the forest and the next day +marched on up another and higher range. As they journeyed, the +travelers could not but burst into exclamations of delight at the +loveliness about them. Behind those great trees and in those +tangles of vines might lurk the head-hunters, but for all that +the beauty of the place made them forget the dangers. The great +banyan trees whose branches came down and took root in the earth, +making a wonderful round leafy tent, grew on every side. Camphor +trees towered far above them and then spread out great branches +sixty or seventy feet from the ground. Then there was the rattan +creeping out over the tops of the other trees and making a thick +canopy through which the hot tropical sun-rays could not +penetrate. + + And the flowers! Sometimes Mackay and Bax would stand amazed at +their beauty. They came one afternoon to an open glade in the +cool green dimness of the forest. On all sides the stately +tree-ferns rose up thirty or forty feet above them, and +underneath grew a tangle of lovely green undergrowth. + +And upon this green carpet it seemed to their dazzled eyes that +thousands of butterflies of the loveliest form and color had just +alighted. And not only butterflies, but birds and huge insects +and all sorts of winged creatures, pink and gold and green and +scarlet and blue, and all variegated hues. But the lovely things +sat motionless, sending out such a delightful perfume that there +could be no doubt that they were flowers,--the wonderful orchids +of Formosa! Mackay was a keen scientist, always highly interested +in botany, and he was charmed with this sight. There were many +such in the forest, and often he would stop spellbound before a +blaze of flowers hanging from tree or vine or shrub. Then he +would look up at the tangled growths of the bamboo, the palm, and +the elegant tree-fern, standing there all silent and beautiful, +and he would be struck by the harmony between God's work and +Word. "I can't keep from studying the flora of Formosa," he said +to Captain Bax. "What missionary would not be a better man, the +bearer of a richer gospel, what convert would not be a more +enduring Christian from becoming acquainted with such wonderful +works of the Creator?" + +At last they stood on the summit of the second range and saw +before them still more mountains, clothed from summit to base +with trees. They were now right in savage territory and their +guide clambered out upon a spur of rock and announced that there +was a party of head-hunters in the valley below. He gave a long +halloo. From away down in the valley came an answering call, +ringing through the forest. Then far down through the thicket +Mackay's sharp eyes descried the party coming up to meet them. +Just then their own guide gave the signal to move on, and the +missionary and Captain Bax walked down the hill--the first white +men who had ever come out to meet those savages. + +Half-way down the slope fhe two parties came face to face. The +head-hunters were a wild, uncouth-looking company, armed to the +teeth. They all carried guns, spears, and knives and some had +also bows and arrows slung over their backs. Their faces were +hideously tattooed in a regular pattern, while they wore no more +clothes than were necessary. A sort of sack of coarse linen with +holes in the sides for their arms, served as the chief garment, +and generally the only one. Every one wore a broad belt of woven +rattan in which was stuck his crooked pointed knife. Some of the +younger men had their coats ornamented with bright red and blue +threads woven into the texture. They had brass rings on their +arms and legs too, and even sported big earrings. These were ugly +looking things made of bamboo sticks. The head-hunters were all +barefooted, but most of them wore caps--queerlooking things, made +of rattan. From many of them hung bits of skin of the boar or +other wild animals they had killed. They stood staring +suspiciously at the two strangers. Never before had they seen a +white man, and the appearance of the naval officer and the +missionary, so different from themselves, and yet so different +from their hated enemies, the Chinese, filled them with amazement +and a good deal of suspicion. After a little talk with the +guides, however, the visitors were allowed to pass on. As soon as +they began to move, the savages fell into line behind them and +followed closely. The two white men, walking calmly onward, could +not help thinking how easy it would be for one of those +fierce-looking tattooed braves to win applause by springing upon +both of them and carrying their heads in triumph to the next +village. + +As they came down farther into the valley, they passed the place +where the savages had their camp. Here naked children and +tattooed womein crept out of the dense woods to stare at the +queer-looking Chinamen who had white faces and wore no cue. + +The march through this valley, even without the head-hunters at +their heels, would not have been easy. The visitors clambered +over huge trunks blown across the path, and tore their clothes +and hands scrambling through the thorny bushes. The sun was still +shining on the mountain-peaks far above them, but away down here +in the valley it was rapidly growing dark and very cold. They had +almost decided to stop and wait for morning when a light ahead +encouraged them to go on. They soon came upon a big camp-fire and +round it were squatted several hundred savages. The firelight +gleaming upon the dark, fierce faces of the head-hunters and on +their spears and knives, made a startling picture. + +They were round the visitors immediately, staring at the two +white men in amazement. The party of savages who had escorted +them seemed to be making some explanation of their appearance, +for they all subsided at last and once more sat round their fire. + +The newcomers started a fire of their own, and their servants +cooked their food. The white men were in momentary danger of +their lives. But they sat on the ground before the fire and +quietly ate their supper while hundreds of savage eyes were fixed +upon them in suspicious, watchful silence. + +The meal over the servants prepared a place for the travelers to +sleep, and while they were so doing, the young missionary was not +idle. He longed to speak to these poor, darkened heathen, but +they could not understand Chinese. However, he found several poor +fellows lying prostrate on the ground, overcome with malaria, and +he got his guide to ask if he might not give the sick ones +medicine. Being allowed to do so, he gave each one a dose of +quinine. The poor creatures tried to look their gratitude when +the terrible chills left them, and soon they were able to sink +into sleep. + +Before he retired to his own bed of boughs, the young missionary +sang that grand old anthem which these lonely woods and their +savage inhabitants had never yet. heard: + +All people that on earth do dwell, + +Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice. + +But these poor people could not "sing to the Lord," for they had +never yet so much as heard his name. + +All night the missionary lay on the ground, finding the chill +mountain air too cold for sleep, and whenever he looked out from +his shelter of boughs he saw hundreds of savage eyes, gleaming in +the firelight, still wide open and fixed upon him. + +Day broke late in the valley, but the travelers were astir in the +morning twilight. The mountain-tops were touched with rosy light +even while it was dark down in these forest depths. + +The chilled white men were glad to get up and exercise their +stiffened limbs. There were several of their party who could +speak both Chinese and the dialect of these mountaineers, and +through them Mackay persuaded the chief of the tribe to take them +to visit his village. + +He seemed reluctant at first and there was much discussion with +his braves. Evidently they were more anxious to go on a head-hunt +than to act the part of hosts. However, after a great deal of +chatter, they consented, and the chief and his son with thirty +men separated themselves from the rest of the band and led the +way out of the valley up the mountainside. The travelers had to +stop often, for, besides the natural difficulties of the way, the +chief proved a new obstacle. Every mile or so he would apparently +repent of his hospitality. He would stop, gather his tattooed +braves about him and confer with them, while his would-be +visitors sat on the ground or a fallen tree-trunk to await his +pleasure. Finally he would start off again, the travelers +following, but no sooner were they under way than again their +uncertain guide would stop. Once he and his men stood motionless, +listening. Away up in the boughs of a camphor tree a little +tailor-bird was twittering. The savages listened as though to the +voice of an oracle. + +"What are they doing?" Mackay asked of one of his men, when the +head-hunters stopped a second time and stared earnestly at the +boughs above. + +"Bird-listening," explained the guide. A few more questions drew +from him the fact that the savages believed the little birds +would tell them whether or not they should bring these strangers +home. They always consulted the birds when starting out on a +head-hunt, he further explained. If the birds gave a certain kind +of chirp and flew in a certain direction, then all was well, and +the hunters would go happily forward. But if the birds acted in +the opposite way, nothing in the world could persuade the chief +to go on. Evidently the birds gave their permission to bring the +travelers home, for in spite of many halts, the savages still +moved forward. + +They had been struggling for some miles through underbrush and +prickly rattan and the white men's clothes were torn and their +hands scratched. Now, however, they came upon a well-beaten path, +winding up the mountainside, and it proved a great relief to the +weary travelers. But here occurred another delay. The savages all +stopped, and the chief approached Mackay and spoke to him through +the interpreter. Would the white man join him in a head-hunting +expedition, was his modest request. There were some Chinese not +so far below them, cutting out rattan, and he was sure they could +secure one or more heads. He shook the big net head-bag that hung +over his shoulder and grinned savagely as he made his proposal. +If the white men and their party would come at the enemy from one +side, he and his men would attack them from the other, he said, +and they would be sure to get them all. The incongruity of a +Christian missionary being invited on a head-hunt struck Captain +Bax as rather funny in spite of its gruesomeness. This was a +delicate situation to handle, but Mackay put a bold front on it. +He answered indignantly that he and his friend had come in peace +to visit the chief, and that he was neither kind nor honorable in +trying to get his visitors to fight his battles. + +The interpreter translated and for a moment several pairs of +savage eyes gleamed angrily at the bold white man. But second +thoughts proved calmer. After another council the savages moved +on. + +They were now at the top of a range, and every one was ordered to +halt and remain silent. Mackay thought that advice was again to +be asked of some troublesome little birds, but instead the +savages raised a peculiar long-drawn shout. It was answered at +once from the opposite mountain-top, and immediately the whole +party moved on down the slope. + +Here was the same lovely tangle of vines and ferns and beautiful +flowers. Monkeys sported in the trees and chattered and scolded +the intruders. Down one range and up another they scrambled and +at last they came upon the village of the head-hunters. + +It lay in a valley in an open space where the forest trees had +been cleared away. It consisted of some half-dozen houses or huts +made of bamboo or wickerwork, and the place seemed literally +swarming with women and children and noisy yelping dogs. But even +these could not account for the terrible din that seemed to fill +the valley. Such unearthly yells and screeches the white men had +never heard before. + +"What is it?" asked Captain Bax. "Has the whole village gone +mad?" + +Mackay turned to one of his guides, and the man explained that +the noise came from a village a little farther down the valley. A +young hunter had returned with a Chinaman's head, and his friends +were rejoicing over it. The merrymaking sounded to the visitors +more like the howling of a pack of fiends, for it bore no +resemblance to any human sounds they had ever heard. + +Fortunately they were invited to stop at the nearer village and +were not compelled to take part in the horrible celebration. They +were taken at once to the chief's house. It was the best in the +village, and boasted of a floor, made of rattan ropes half an +inch thick. All along the outside wall, under the eaves, hung a +row of gruesome ornaments, heads of the boar and deer and other +wild animals killed in the chase, and here and there mingled with +them the skulls of Chinamen. The house held one large room, and, +as it was a cold evening, a fire burned at either end of it. At +one end the men stood chatting, at the other the women squatted. +The visitors were invited to sit by the men 's fire. There were +several beds along the wall, two of which were offered to the +strangers. But they were not prepared to remain for the night, +and had decided to start back before the shadows fell. + +The whole village came to the chief's house and crowded round the +newcomers, men first, women and children on the outskirts, and +dogs still farther back. Several men came forward and claimed +Mackay as a friend. They touched their own breasts and then his, +in salutation, grinning in a most friendly manner. The young +missionary was at first puzzled, then smiled delightedly. They +were some of the poor fellows to whom he had given quinine the +evening before in the valley. + +This greeting seemed to encourage the others. They became more +friendly and suddenly one man who had been circling round the +visitors touched the back of Mackay's head and exclaimed, "They +do not wear the cue! They are our kinsmen." From that moment they +were treated with far greater kindness, and on several other +visits that Mackay made to the head-hunters, they always spoke +with interest of him as kinsman. + +But all danger was not over. The savages were still suspicious, +and at any moment the newcomers might excite them. So they +decided to start back at once, while every one was in a friendly +mood. They made presents to the chief and some of his leading +men; and left with expressions of good-will on both sides. + +By evening they had reached the valley where they had first met +the savages and here they prepared to spend the night. They had +no sooner kindled their fires than from the darkness on every +side shadowy forms silently emerged,--the savages come to visit +them! They glided out of the black forest into the ring of +firelight and squatted upon the ground until fully five hundred +dusky faces looked out at the travelers from the gloom. It was +rather an unpleasant situation, there in the depths of the +forest, but Mackay turned it to good account. First he and +Captain Bax made presents to the headmen and they were as pleased +as children to receive the gay ornaments and bright cloth the +travelers gave them. And then Mackay called their interpreter to +his side and they stood up together, facing the crowd. Speaking +through his interpreter, the missionary said he wished to tell +them a story. These mountain savages were veritable children in +their love for a story, as they were in so many other ways, and +their eyes gleamed with delight. + +It was a wonderful story he told them, the like of which they had +never heard before. It was about the great God, who had made the +earth and the people on it, and was the Father of them all. He +told how God loved everybody, because they were his children. +Chinese, white men beyond the sea like himself and Captain Bax, +the people of the mountains,--all were God's children. And so all +men were brothers, and should love God their Father and each +other. And because God loved his children so, he sent his Son, +Jesus Christ, to live among men and to die for them. He told the +story simply and beautifully, just as he would to little +children, and these children of the forest listened and their +savage eyes grew less fierce as they heard for the first time of +the story of the Savior. + +The next day, after a toilsome journey, the travelers reached the +plain below. They had made their dangerous trip and had escaped +the head-hunters, but as fierce an enemy was lying in wait for +both, an enemy that in Formosa devours native and foreigner +alike. Captain Bax was the first to be attacked. All day, as they +descended the mountain, the rain came down in torrents, a real +Formosan rain that is like the floodgates opening. The travelers +were drenched and chilly, and just as they emerged from the +forest Captain Bax succumbed to the enemy. Malaria had smitten +him. + +Shaking with chills and then burning with fever, he was placed in +a sedan-chair and carried the remainder of the way, three days' +journey, to the coast, where the medical attendants on board his +ship cured him. Mackay was feeling desperately ill all the way +across the plain, but with his usual determination he refused to +give in until he almost staggered across the threshold of his +home. + +The house had been closed in his absence. It was now damp and +chilly and everything was covered with mold. He lay down in his +bed, alternately shivering with cold and burning with fever. In +the next room A Hoa, who had gone to bed also, heard his teeth +chattering and came to him at once. It was a terrible thing to +the young fellow to see his dauntless Kai Bok-su overcome by any +kind of force. It seemed impossible that he who had cured so many +should become a victim himself. A Hoa proved a kind nurse. He +stayed by the bedside all night, doing everything in his power to +allay the fever. His efforts proved successful, and in a few days +the patient was well. But never again was he quite free from the +dreaded disease, and all the rest of his life he was subject to +the most violent attacks of malaria, a terrible memento by which +he was always to remember his first visit to the headhunters. + + + +CHAPTER VIII. CITIES CAPTURED AND FORTS BUILT + +Up the river to Go-ko-khi! That was always a joy, and whenever +Mackay could take a day from his many duties, with A Hoa and one +or more other students, he would go up and visit old Thah-so and +the kindly people of this little village. + +One day, after they had preached in the empty granary and the +rain had come in, Mr. Tan, the headman, walked up the village +street with them, and he made them an offer. They might have the +plot of ground opposite his house for a chapel-site. This was +grand news. A chapel in north Formosa! Mackay could hardly +believe it, but it seemed that there really was to be one. There +were many Christians in Go-ko-khi now, and each one was ready for +work. Some collected stones, others prepared sun-dried bricks, +others dug the foundation, and the first church in north Formosa +was commenced. + +Now Go-ko-khi was, unfortunately, near the great city of +Bang-kah. This was the most hostile and wicked place in all that +country, and A Hoa and Mackay had been stoned out of it on their +visit there. The people in Bang-kah learned of the new church +building, and one day, when the brick walls flre about three feet +high, there arose a tramp of feet, beating of drums, and loud +shouts, and up marched a detachment of soldiers sent with orders +from the prefect of Bang-kah to stop the building of the chapel. +Their officers went straight to the house of the headman with his +commands. Mr. Tan was six feet two and he rose to his full height +and towered above his visitor majestically. The "mayor" of +Go-ko-khi was a Christian now, and on the wall of his house was +pasted a large sheet of paper with the ten commandments printed +on it. He pointed to this and said: "I am determined to abide by +these." The officer was taken aback. He was scarcely prepared to +defy the headman, and he went away to stir up the villagers. But +everywhere the soldiers met with opposition. There seemed no one +who would take their part. The officer knew he and his men were +scarcely within their rights in what they were doing; so, fearing +trouble, he marched back to the city, reporting there that the +black-bearded barbarian had bewitched the villagers with some +magic art. + +The prefect of Bang-kah next sent a message to the British +consul. The missionary was building a fort at Go-ko-khi, he +declared in great alarm, and would probably bring guns up the +river at night. He was a very bad man indeed, and if the British +consul desired peace he should stop this wicked Kai Bok-su at +once. And the British consul down in his old Dutch fort at Tamsui +laughed heartily over the letter, knowing all about Kai Bok-su +and the sort of fort he was building. + +So, in spite of all opposition, the little church rose steadily +up and up until it was crowned with a tiled roof and was ready +for the worshipers. + +That was a great day for north Formosa and its young missionary, +the day the first church was opened. The place was packed to the +doors, and many stood outside listening at the windows. And of +that crowd one hundred and fifty arose and declared that from +henceforth they would cast away their idols and worship only the +one and true God. Standing up there in his first pulpit and +looking down upon the crowd of upturned faces, and seeing the new +light in them which the blessed good news of Jesus and his love +had brought, Kai Bok-su's heart swelled with joy. + +He stayed with them some time after this, for, though so many +people had become Christians, they were like little children and +needed much careful teaching. Especially they must learn how to +live as Jesus Christ would have his followers live. Many heathen +as well as the Christians came to his meetings and listened +eagerly. At first the people found it almost impossible to sit +quiet and still during a service. They had never been accustomed +to such a task, and some of the missionary's experiences were +very funny. When they had sung a hymn and had settled down to +listen to the address, the preacher would no sooner start than +out would come one long pipe after another, pieces of flint would +strike on steel, and in a few minutes the smoke would begin to +ascend. Mackay would pause and gently tell them that as this was +a Christian service they must not do anything that might disturb +it. They were anxious to do just as he bade, so the pipes would +disappear, and nodding their heads politely they would say, "Oh, +yes, we must be quiet; oh, yes, indeed." + +One day when the congregation was very still and their young +pastor was speaking earnest words to them, one man less attentive +than the others happened to glance out of the window. Instantly +he sprang to his feet shouting, "Buffaloes in the rice-fields! +Buffaloes in the rice-fields!" and away he went with a good +fraction of the congregation helter-skelter at his heels. + +The missionary spoke again upon the necessity of quiet, and his +hearers nodded agreeably and murmured, "Yes, yes, we must be +quiet." + +They were very good for the next few minutes and the minister had +reached a very important point in his address, when there was a +great disturbance at the door. An old woman came hobbling up on +her small feet and poking her head in at the church door +screamed, "My pig has gone! Pig has gone!" and away went another +portion of the congregation to help find the truant porker. + +But, in spite of many interruptions, the congregation at +Go-ko-khi learned much of the beautiful truth of their new +religion. Their indulgent pastor never blamed his restless +hearers, but before the church was two months old he had trained +them so well that there was not a more orderly and attentive +congregation even in his own Christian Canada than that which +gathered in the first chapel in north Formosa. + +But the day came at last when he had to leave them, and the +question was who should be left over them. The answer seemed very +plain,--A Hoa. The first convert placed as pastor over the first +church! It was very fitting. Some months before, down in Tamsin, +when A Hoa had been baptized and had taken his first communion, +he had vowed to give his life more fully to his Master's service. +So here was his field of labor, and here he began his work. He +was so utterly sincere and lovable, so bright and jovial, so firm +of purpose and yet so kindly, that he was soon beloved by all the +Christians and respected by the heathen. And one of his greatest +helpers was widow Thah-so, who had been instrumental in bringing +the missionary with his glad tidings to her village. + +Mackay missed A Hoa sorely at first, but he had his other +students about him, and often when bent upon a long journey would +send for his first convert, and together they would travel here +and there over the island, making new recruits everywhere for the +army of their great Captain. + +The little church at Go-ko-khi was but the first of many. Like +the hepaticas that used to peep forth in the missionary's home +woods, telling that spring had arrived, here and there they came +up, showing that the long cruel winter of heathenism in north +Formosa was drawing to an end. + +Away up the Tamsui river, nestled at the foot of the mountains, +stood a busy town called Sin-tiam. A young man from this place +sailed down to Tamsui on business one day and there heard the +great Kai Bok-su preach of the new Jehovah-God, he went home full +of the wonderful news, and so much did he talk about it that a +large number of people in Sin-tiam were very anxious to hear the +barbarian themselves. So one day a delegation came down the river +to the house on the bluff above Tamsui. They made this request +known to the missionary as he sat teaching his students in the +study. Would he not come and tell the people of Sin-tiam the +story about this Jesus-God who loved all men? Would he go? Kai +Bok-su was on the road almost before the slow-going Orientals had +finished delivering the message. + +It was the season of a feast to their idols in Sin-tiam when the +missionary and his party arrived. Great crowds thronged the +streets, and the barbarian with his white face and his black +beard and his queer clothes attracted unusual attention. The +familiar cry, "Foreign devil," was mingled with "Kill the +barbarian," "Down with the foreigner." The crowd began to surge +closer around the missionary party, and affairs looked very +serious. Suddenly a little boy right in Mackay's path was struck +on the head by a brick intended for the missionary. He was picked +up, and Mackay, pressing through the crowd to where the little +fellow lay, took out his surgical instruments and dressed the +wound. All about him the cries of "Kill the foreign devil" +changed to cries of "Good heart! Good heart!" The crowd became +friendly at once, and Mackay passed on, having had once more a +narrow escape from death. + +The work of preaching to these people was carried on vigorously, +and before many months had passed the Christians met together and +declared they must build a chapel for the worship of the true +God. So, close by the riverside, in a most picturesque +spot, the walls of the second chapel of north Formosa began to +rise. It was not without opposition of course. One rabid +idol-worshiper stopped before the half-finished building with its +busy workmen, and, picking up a large stone, declared that he +would smash the head of the black-bearded barbarian if the work +was not stopped that moment. Needless to say, the missionary, +standing within a good stone's throw of his enemy, ordered tht +worl4rs to continue. George Mackay was not to be stopped by all +the stones in north Formosa. + +This stone was never thrown, however, and at last the chapel was +finished. Once more a preacher was ready to be its pastor. Tan +He, a young man who had been studying earnestly under his leader +for some time, was placed over this second congregation, and once +more there blossomed out a sure sign that the spring had indeed +come to north Formosa. + +Tek-chham, a walled city of over forty thousand inhabitants, was +the next place to be attacked by this little army of the King's +soldiers. The first visit of the missionary caused a riot, but +before long Tek-chham had a chapel with some of the rioters for +its best members, and a once proud graduate and worshiper of +Confucius installed in it as its pastor. + +Ten miles from Tek-chham stood a little village called Geh-bai. +The missionary-soldiers visited it, and to their delight found a +church building ready for them. It was quite a wonderful place, +capable of holding fully a thousand people without much crowding. +Its roof was the boughs of the great banyan tree; its one pillar +the trunk, and its walls the branches that bent down to enter the +ground and take root. It made a delightful shelter from the +broiling sun. And here Kai Bok-su preached. But a banyan does not +give perfect shelter in all kinds of weather, so when a number of +people had declared themselves followers of the Lord Jesus, a +large house was rented and fitted up as a chapel, with another +native pastor over it. + +Away over at Kelung a church was founded through a man who had +carried the gospel home from one of the missionary's sermons. +Here and there the hepaticas were springing up. From all sides +came invitations to preach the great news of the true God, and +the young missionary gave himself scarcely time to eat or sleep. +be worked like a giant himself, and he inspired the same spirit +in the students that accompanied him. be was like a Napoleon +among his sob diers. Wherever he went they would go, even though +it would surely mean abuse and might mean death. And, wherever +they went, they brought such a wonderful, glad change to people's +hearts that they were like slave-liberators setting captives +free. + +The most lawless and dangerous region in all north Formosa was +that surrounding the small town of Sa-kak-eng. In the mountains +near by lived a band of robbers who kept the people in a constant +state of dread by their terrible deeds of plunder and murder. +Sometimes the frightened townspeople would help the highwaymen +just to gain their good-will, and such treatment only made them +bolder. Bands of them would even come down into the town and +march through the streets, frightening every one into flight. +They would shout and sing, and their favorite song was one that +showed how little they cared for the laws of the land. + +You trust the mandarins, +We trust the mountains. + +So the song went, and when the missionary heard it first he could +not help confessing that after all it was a sorry job trusting +the mandarins for protection. + +The first time he visited the place with A Hoa they were stoned +and driven out. But the missionaries came back, and at last were +allowed to preach. And then converts came and a church was +established. The robber bands received no more assistance from +the people, and were soon scattered by the officers of the law. +And Sa-kak-eng was in peace because the missionary had come. + +But there was one place Mackay had so far scarcely dared to +enter. Even the robber-infested Sa-kak-eng would yield, but +Bang-kah defied all efforts. To the missionary it was the +Gibraltar of heathen Formosa, and he longed to storm it. North, +south, east, and west of this great wicked city churches had been +planted, some only within a few miles of its walls. But Bang-kah +still stood frowning and unyielding. It had always been very +bitter against outsiders of all kinds. No foreign merchant was +allowed to do business in Bang-kah, so no wonder the foreign +missionary was driven out. + +Mackay had dared to enter the place, being of the sort that would +dare anything. It was soon after he had settled in Formosa and A +Hoa had accompanied him. The result had been a riot. The streets +had immediately filled with a yelling, cursing mob that pelted +the two missionaries with stones and rotten eggs and filth, and +drove them from the city. + +But "Mackay never knew when he was beaten," as a fellow worker of +his once said, and though he was taking desperate chances, he +went once more inside the walls of Bangkah. This time he barely +escaped with his life, and the city authorities forbade every +one, on pain of death, to lease or sell property to him or in any +way accommodate the barbarian missionary. + +But meanwhile Kai Bok-su was keeping his eye on Bang-kah, and +when the territory around had been possessed, he went up to +Go-ko--khi and made the daring proposition to A Hoa. Should they +go up again and storm the citadel of heathenism? And A Hoa +answered promptly and bravely, "Let us go." + +So one day early in December, when the winter rains had commenced +to pour down, these two marched across the plain and into +Bang-kah. By keeping quiet and avoiding the main thoroughfare, +they managed to rent a house. It was a low, mean hovel in a +dirty, narrow street, but it was inside the forbidden city, and +that was something. The two daring young men then procured a +large sheet of paper, printed on it in Chinese characters "Jesus' +Temple," and pasted it on the door. This announced what they had +come for, and they awaited results. + +Presently there came the heavy tramp, tramp of feet on the stone +pavement. Mackay and A Hoa looked out. A party of soldiers, armed +with spears and swords, were returning from camp. They stopped +before the hut and read the inscription. They shouted loud +threats and tramped away to report the affair to headquarters. + +In a short time, with a great noise and tramping, once more +soldiers were at the door. Mackay waked out and faced them +quietly. The general had given orders that the barbarian must +leave this house immediately, the soldier declared in a loud +voice. The place belonged to the military authorities. + +"Show me your proof," said Mackay calmly. His bold behavior +demanded respectful treatment, so the soldier produced the deed +for the property. + +"I respect your law," said Mackay after he examined it, "and my +companion and I will vacate. But I have paid rent for this place, +therefore I am entitled to remain for the night. I will not go +out until morning." + +His firm words and fearless manner had their effect both on the +soldiers and the noisy mob waiting for him outside, and the men, +muttering angrily, turned away. That night Mackay and A Hoa lay +on a dirty grass mat on the mud floor. The place was damp and +filthy, but even had it been comfortable they would have had +little sleep. For, far into the night, angry soldiers paraded the +street. Often their voices rose to a clamor and they would make a +rush for the frail door of the little hut. Many times the two +young fellows arose, believing their last hour had come. But the +long night passed and they found that they were still left +untouched. + +They rose early and started out. Already a great mob filled the +space in front of the house. Even the low roofs of the +surrounding houses were covered with people all out early to see +the barbarian and his despised companion driven from Bang-kah, +and perhaps have the added pleasure of witnessing their death. + +The two walked bravely down the street. Curses were showered upon +them from all sides; broken tiles, stones, and filth were thrown +at them, but they moved on steadily. The mob hampered them so +that they were hours walking the short distance to the river. +Here they entered a boat and went down a few miles to a point +where a chapel stood, and where some of Mackay's students awaited +them. + +But the man who "did not know when he was beaten" had not turned +his back on the enemy. He gathered the group of students around +him in the little room attached to the chapel. Here they all +knelt and the young missionary laid their trouble before the +great Captain who had said, "All power is given unto me." "Give +us an entrance to Bang-kah," was the burden of the missionary 's +prayer. They arose from their knees, and he turned to A Hoa with +that quick challenging movement his students had learned to know +so well. + +"Come," he said, "we are going back to Bang-kah." + +And A Hoa, whose habit it was to walk into all danger with a +smile, answered with all his heart: + +"It is well, Kai Bok-su; we go back to Bang-kah." + +And straight back to this Gibraltar the little army of two +marched. It was quite dark by the time they entered. A Formosan +city is not the blaze of electricity to which Westerners are +accustomed, and only here and there in the narrow streets shone a +dim light. The travelers stumbled along, scarcely knowing whither +they were going. As they turned a dark corner and plunged into +another black street they met an old man hobbling with the aid of +a staff over the uneven stones of the pavement. Mackay spoke to +him politely and asked if he could tell him of any one who would +rent a house. "We want to do mission work," he added, feeling +that he must not get anything under false pretenses. + +The old man nodded. "Yes, I can rent you my place," he answered +readily. "Come with me." + +Full of amazement and gratitude the two adventurers groped their +way after him, stumbling over stones and heaps of rubbish. They +could not help realizing, as they got farther into the city, that +should the old man prove false and give an alarm the whole +murderous populace of that district would be around them +instantly like a swarm of hornets. But whether he was leading +them into a trap or not their only course was to follow. + +At last he paused at a low door opening into the back part of a +house. The old man lighted a lamp, a pith wick in a saucer of +peanut oil, and the visitors looked around. The room was damp and +dirty and infested with the crawling creatures that fairly swarm +in the Chinese houses of the lower order. Rain dripped from the +low ceiling on the mud floor, and the meager furniture was dirty +and sticky. + +But the two young men who had found it were delighted. They felt +like the advance guard of an army that has taken the enemy's +first outpost. They were established in Bang-kah! They set to +work at once to draw out a rental paper. A Hoa sat at the table +and wrote it out so that they might be within the law which said +that no foreigner must hold property in Bang-kah. When the paper +was signed and the money paid, the old man crept stealthily away. +He had his money, but he was too wary to let his fellow citizens +find how he had earned it. + +As soon as morning came the little army in the midst of the +hostile camp hoisted its banner. When the citizens of Bang-kah +awoke, they found on the door of the hut the hated sign, in large +Chinese characters, "Jesus' Temple." + +In less than an hour the street in front of it was thronged with +a shouting crowd. Before the day was past the news spread, and +the whole city was in an uproar. By the next afternoon the +excitement had reached white heat, and a wild crowd of men came +roaring down the street. They hurled themselves at the little +house where the missionaries were waiting and literally tore it +to splinters. The screams of rage and triumph were so horrible +that they reminded Mackay of the savage yells of the +head-hunters. + +When the mob leaped upon the roof and tore it off, the two hunted +men slipped out through a side door, and across the street into +an inn. The crowd instantly attacked it, smashing doors, ripping +the tiles off the roof, and uttering such bloodthirsty howls that +they resembled wild beasts far more than human beings. The +landlord ordered the missionaries out to where the mob was +waiting to tear them limb from limb. + +It was an awful moment. To go out was instant death, to remain +merely put off the end a few moments. Mackay, knowing his source +of help, sent up a desperate prayer to his Father in heaven. + +Suddenly there was a strange lull in the street outside. The +yells ceased, the crashing of tiles stopped. The door opened, and +there in his sedan-chair of state surrounded by his bodyguard, +appeared the Chinese mandarin. And just behind him--blessed sight +to the eyes of Kai Bok-su--Mr. Scott, the British consul of +Tamsui! + +Without a word the two British-born clasped hands. It was not an +occasion for words. There was immediately a council of war. The +mandarin urged the British consul to send the missionary out of +the city. + +"I have no authority to give such an order," retorted Mr. Scott +quickly. "On the other hand you must protect him while he is +here. He is a British subject." + +Mackay's heart swelled with pride. And he thanked God that his +Empire had such a worthy representative. + +Having again impressed upon the mandarin that the missionary must +be protected or there would be trouble, Mr. Scott set off for his +home. Mackay accompanied him to the city gate. Then he turned and +walked back through the muttering crowds straight to the inn he +had left. be stopped occasionally to pull a tooth or give +medicine for malaria, for even in Bang-kah he had a few friends. + +The mandarin was now as much afraid of the missionary as if he +had been the plague. He knew he dared not allow him to be +touched, and he also knew he had very little power over a mob. He +was responsible, too, to men in higher office, for the control of +the people, and would be severely punished if there was a riot, +be was indeed in a very had way when he heard that the +troublesome missionary had come back, and he followed him to the +inn to try to induce him to leave. + +He found Mackay with A Hoa, quietly seated in their room. First +he commanded, then he tried to bribe, and then he even descended +to beg the "foreign devil" to leave the city. But Mackay was +immovable. + +"I cannot leave," he said, touched by the man's distress. "I +cannot quit this city until I have preached the gospel here." He +held up his forceps and his Bible. "See! I use these to relieve +pain of the body, and this gives relief from sin,--the disease of +the soul. I cannot go until I have given your people the benefit +of them." + +The mandarin went away enraged and baffled. He could not persuade +the man to go; he dared not drive him out. He left a squad of +soldiers to guard the place, however, remembering the British +consul's warning. + +In a few days the excitement subsided. People became accustomed +to seeing the barbarian teacher and his companion go about the +streets. Many were relieved of much pain by him too, and a large +number listened with some interest to the new doctrine he taught +concerning one God. + +be had been there a week when some prominent citizens came to him +with a polite offer. They would give him free a piece of ground +outside the city on which to build a church. Kai Bok-su's +flashing black eyes at once saw the bribe. They wanted to coax +him out when they could not drive him. He refused politely but +firmly. + +"I own that property," he declared, pointing to the heap of ruins +into which his house had been turned, "and there I will build a +church." + +They did everything in their power to prevent him, but one day, +many months after, right on the site where they had literally +torn the roof from above him, arose a pretty little stone church, +and that was the beginning of great things in Bang-kah. + +And so Gibraltar was taken,--taken by an army of two,--a Canadian +missionary and a Chinese soldier of the King, for behind theiR +stood all the army of the Lord of hosts, and he led them to +victory! + + +CHAPTER IX. OTHER CONQUESTS. + +Away over on the east of the island ran a range of beautiful +mountains. And between these mountains and the sea stretched a +low rice plain. Here lived many Pe-po-hoan,-- "Barbarians of the +plain." Mackay had never visited this place, for the Kap-tsu-lan +plain, as it was called, was very hard to reach on account of the +mountains; but this only made the dauntless missionary all the +more anxious to visit it. + +So one day he suggested to his students, as they studied in his +house on the bluff, that they make a journey to tell the people +of Kap-tsu-lan the story of Jesus. Of course, the young fellows +were delighted. To go off with Kai Bok-su was merely transferring +their school from his house to the big beautiful outdoors. For he +always taught them by the way, and besides they were all eager to +go with him and help spread the good news that had made such a +difference in their lives. So when Kai Bok-su piled his books +upon a shelf and said, "Let us go to Kaptsu-lan," the young +fellows ran and made their preparations joyfully. A Hoa was in +Tamsui at the time, and Mackay suggested that he come too, for a +trip without A Hoa was robbed of half its enjoyment. + +Mackay had just recovered from one of those violent attacks of +malaria from which he suffered so often now, and he was still +looking pale and weak. So Sun-a, a bright young student-lad, came +to the study door with the suggestion, "Let us take Lu-a for Kai +Bok-su to ride." + +There was a laugh from the other students and an indulgent smile +from Kai Bok-su himself. Lu-a was a small, rather stubborn- +looking donkey with meek eyes and a little rat tail. He was a +present to the missionary from the English commissioner of +customs at Tamsui, when that gentleman was leaving the island. +Donkeys were commonly used on the mainland of China, and though +an animal was scarcely ever ridden in Formosa, horses being +almost unknown, the commissioner did not see why his Canadian +friend, who was an introducer of so many new things, should not +introduce donkey-riding. So he sent him Lu-a as a farewell +present and leaving this token of his good-will departed for +home. + +Up to this time Lu-a had served only as a pet and a joke among +the students, and high times they had with him in the grassy +field behind the missionary's house when lessons were over. In +great glee they brought him round to the door now, "all saddled +and bridled" and ready for the trip. The missionary mounted, and +Lu-a trotted meekly along the road that wound down the bluff +toward Kelung. The students followed in high spirits. The sight +of their teacher astride the donkey was such a novel one to them, +and Lu-a was such a joke at any time, that they were filled with +merriment. All went well until they left the road and turned into +a path that led across the buffalo common. At the end of it they +came to a ravine about fifteen feet deep. Over this stretched. a +plank bridge not more than three feet wide. Here Lu-a came to a +sudden stop. He had no mind to risk his small but precious body +on that shaky structure. His rider bade him "go on," but the +command only made Lu-a put back his ears, plant his fore feet +well forward and stand stock still. In fact he looked much more +settled and immovable than the bridge over which he was being +urged. The students gathered round him and petted and coaxed. +They called him "Good Lu-a" and "Honorable Lu-a" and every other +flattering title calculated to move his donkeyship, but Lu-a +flattened his ears back so he could not hear and would not move. +So Mackay dismounted and tried the plan of pulling him forward by +the bridle while some of the boys pushed him from behind. Lu-a +resented this treatment, especially that from the rear, and up +went his heels, scattering students in every direction; and to +discomfit the enemy in front he opened his mouth and gave forth +such loud resonant brays that the ravine fairly rang with his +music. + +A balking donkey is rather amusing to boys of any country, but to +these Formosan lads who had had no experience with one the sound +of Lu-a's harsh voice and the sight of his flying heels brought +convulsions of merriment. "He's pounding rice! He's pounding +rice!" shouted the wag of the party, and his companions flung +themselves upon the grass and rolled about laughing themselves +sick. + +With his followers rendered helpless and his steed continuing +stubborn, Mackay saw the struggle was useless. He could not +compete alone with Lu-a's firmness, so he gave orders that the +obstinate little obstructer of their journey be trotted back to +his pasture. + +"And to think that any one of us might have carried the little +rascal over!" he cried as he watched the donkey meekly depart. +His students looked at the little beast with something like +respect. Lu-a had beaten the dauntless Kai Bok-su who had never +before been beaten by anything. He was indeed a marvelous donkey! + +So the journey to the Kap-tsu-lan plain was made on foot. It was +a very wearisome one and often dangerous. The mountain paths were +steep and difficult and the travelers knew that often the +head-hunters lurked near. But the way was wonderfully beautiful +nevertheless. Standing on a mountain height one morning and +looking away down over wooded hills and valleys and the lake-like +terraces of the rice-fields, Mackay repeated to his students a +line of the old hymn: + +Every prospect pleases and only man is vile. + + +Around them the stately tree-fern lifted its lovely fronds and +the orchids dotted the green earth like a flock of gorgeous +butterifies just settled. Tropical birds of brilliant plumage +flashed among the trees. Beside them a great tree raised itself, +fairly covered. with morning-glories, and over at their right a +mountainside gleamed like snow in the sunlight, clothed from top +to bottom with white lilies. + +But the way had its dangers as well as its beauties. They were +passing the mouth of a ravine when they were stopped by yells and +screams of terror coming from farther up the mountainside. In a +few minutes a Chinaman darted out of the woods toward them. His +face was distorted with terror and he could scarcely get breath +to tell his horrible story. He and his four companions had been +chipping the camphor trees up in the woods; suddenly the armed +savages had leaped out upon them and he alone of the five had +escaped. + +At last they left the dangerous mountain and came down into the +Kap-tsu-lan plain. On every side was rice-field after rice-field, +with the water pouring from one terrace to another. The plain was +low and damp and the paths and roads lay deep in mud. They had a +long toilsome walk between the ricefields until they came to the +first village of these barbarians of the plain. It was very much +like a Chinese village,--dirty, noisy, and swarming with +wild-looking children and wolfish dogs. + +The visitors were received with the utmost disdain. The Chinese +students were of course well known, for these aborigines had long +ago adopted their customs and language. But the Chinese visitors +were in company with the foreigners, and all foreigners were +outcaste in this eastern plain. The men shouted the familiar +"foreign devil" and walked contemptuously away. The dirty women +and children fled into their grass huts and set the dogs upon the +strangers. They tried by all sorts of kindnesses to gain a +hearing, but all to no effect. So they gave it up, and plodded +through the mud and water a mile farther on to the next village. +But village number two received them in exactly the same way. +Only rough words and the barks of cruel dogs met them. The next +village was no better, the fourth a little worse. And so on they +went up and down the Kap-tsu-lan plain, sleeping at night in some +poor empty hut or in the shadow of a rice strawstack, eating +their meals of cold rice and buffalo-meat by the wayside, and +being driven from village to village, and receiving never a word +of welcome. + +And all through those wearisome days the young men looked at +their leader in vain for any smallest sign of discouragement or +inclination to retreat. There was no slightest look of dismay on +the face of Kai Bok-su, for how was it possible for a man who did +not know when he was beaten to feel discouraged? So still +undaunted in the face of defeat, he led them here and there over +the plain, hoping that some one would surely relent and give them +a hearing. + +One night, footsore and worn out, they slept on the damp mud +floor of a miserable hut where the rain dripped in upon their +faces. In the morning prospects looked rather discouraging to the +younger members of the party. They were wet and cold and weary, +and there seemed no use in going again and again to a village +only to be turned away. But Kai Bok-su's mouth was as firm as +ever, and his dark eyes flashed resolutely, as once more he gave +the order to march. It was a lovely morning, the sun was rising +gloriously out of the sea and the heavy mists were melting from +above the little rice-fields. Here and there fairy lakes gleamed +out from the rosy haze that rolled back toward the mountains. +They walked along the shore in the pink dawn-light and marched up +toward a fishing village. They had visited it before and had been +driven away, but Kai Bok-su was determined to try again. They +were surprised as they came nearer to see three men come out to +meet them with a friendly expression on their faces. + +The foremost was an old man who had been nicknamed "Black-face," +because of his dark skin. The second was a middleaged man, and +the third was a young fellow about the age of the students. They +saluted the travelers pleasantly, and the old man addressed the +missionary. + +"You have been going through and through our plain and no one has +received you," he said politely. "Come to our village, and we +will now be ready to listen to you." + +The door of Kap-tsu-lan had opened at last! The missionary's eyes +gleamed with joy and gratitude as he accepted the invitation. The +delegation led the visitors straight to the house of the headman. +For the Pepo-hoan governed their communities in the Chinese style +and had a headman for each village. The missionary party sat down +in front of the hut on some large flat stones and talked over the +matter with the chief and other important men. And while they +talked "Black-face" slipped away. He returned in a few moments +with a breakfast of rice and fish for the visitors. + +The result of the conference was that the villagers decided to +give the barbarian a chance. All he wanted it seemed was to tell +of this new Jehovah-religion which he believed, and surely there +could be no great harm in listening to him talk. + +In the evening the headman with the help of some friends set to +work to construct a meeting-house. A tent was erected, made from +boat sails. Several flat stones laid at one end and a plank +placed upon them made a pulpit. And that was the first church on +the Kap-tsu-lan plain! There was a "church bell" too, to call the +people to worship. In the village were some huge marine shells +with the ends broken off. In the old days these were used by the +chiefs as trumpets by which they called their men together +whenever they were starting out on the war-path. But now the +trumpet-shell was used to call the people to follow the King. +Just at dark a man took one, and walking up and down the +straggling village street blew loudly-- the first "church bell" +in east Formosa. + +The loud roar brought the villagers flocking down to the +tent-church by the shore. For the most part they brought their +pews with them. They came hurrying out of their huts carrying +benches, and arranging them in rows they seated themselves to +listen. + +Mackay and the students sang and the people listened eagerly. The +Pe-po-hoan by nature were more musical than the Chinese, and the +singing delighted them. Then the missionary arose and addressed +them. He told clearly and simply why he had come and preached to +them of the true God. Afterward the congregation was allowed to +ask questions, and they learned much of this God and of his love +in his Son Jesus Christ. + +The wonder of the great news shone in the eyes upturned to the +preacher. In the gloom of the half-lighted tent their dark faces +took on a new expression of half-wondering hope. Could it be +possible that this was true? Their poor, benighted minds had +always been held in terror of their gods and of the evil spirits +that forever haunted their footsteps. Could it be possible that +God was a great Father who loved his children? They asked so many +eager questions, and the story of Jesus Christ had to be told +over and over so many times, that before this first church +service ended a gray gleam of dawn was spreading out over the +Pacific. + +It was only the next day that these newlyawakened people decided +that they must have a church building. And they went to work to +get one in a way that might have shamed a congregation of people +in a Christian land. This new wonderful hope that had been raised +in their hearts by the knowledge that God loved them set them to +work with glad energy. Kai Bok-su and his men still preached and +prayed and sang and taught in the crazy old wind-flapped tent by +the seashore, and the people listened eagerly, and then, when +services were over, every one,--preacher, assistants, and +congregation,--set bravely to work to build a church. Brave they +certainly had to be, for at the very beginning they had to risk +their lives for their chapel. A party sailed down the coast and +entered savage territory for the poles to construct the building. +They were attacked and one or two were badly wounded, though they +managed to escape. But they were quite ready to go back and fight +again had it been necessary. Then they made the bricks for the +walls. Rice chaff mixed with clay were the materials, and the +Kap-tsu-lan plain had an abundance of both. The roof was made of +grass, the floor of hard dried earth, and a platform of the same +at one end served as a pulpit. + +When the little chapel was finished, every evening the big shell +rang out its summons through the village; and out from every +house came the people and swarmed into the chapel to hear Kai +Bok-su explain more of the wonders of God and his Son Jesus +Christ. + +Mackay's home during this period was a musty little room in a +damp mud-walled hut; and here every day he received donations of +idols, ancestral tablets, and all sorts of things belonging to +idol-worship. He was requested to burn them, and often in the +mornings he dried his damp clothes and moldy boots at a fire madc +from heathen idols. + +For eight weeks the missionary party remained in this place, +preaching, teaching, and working among the people. It was a +mystery to the students how their teacher found time for the +great amount of Bible study and prayer which he managed to get. +He surely worked as never man worked before. Late at night, long +after every one else was in bed, he would be bending over his +Bible, beside his peanut-oil lamp, and early in the morning +before the stars had disappeared he was up and at work again. +Four hours' sleep was all his restless, active mind could endure, +and with that he could. do work that would have killed any +ordinary man. + +One evening some new faces looked up at him from his congregation +in the little brick church. When the last hymn was sung the +missionary stepped down from his pulpit and spoke to the +strangers. They explained that they were from the next village. +They had heard rumors of this new doctrine, and. had been sent to +find out more ahout it. They had been charmed with the singing, +for that evening over two hundred voices had joined in a ringing +praise to the new Jehovah-God. They wanted to hear more, they +said, and they wanted to know what it was all about. Would Kai +Bok-su and his students deign to visit their village too? + +Would he? Why that was just what he was longing to do. be had +been driven out of that village by dogs only a few weeks before, +but a little thing like that did not matter to a man like Mackay. +This village lay but a short distance away, being connected with +their own by a path winding here and there between the +rice-fields. Early the next evening Mackay formed a procession. +He placed himself at its head, with A Hoa at his side. The +students came next, and then the converts in a double row. And +thus they marched slowly along the pathway singing as they went. +It was a stirring sight. On either side the waving fields of +rice, behind them the gleam of the blue ocean, before them the +great towering mountains clothed in green. Above them shone the +clear dazzling sky of a tropical evening. And on wound the long +procession of Christians in a heathen land, and from them arose +the glorious words: + +O thou, my soul, bless God the Lord, +And all that in me is +Be stirred up his holy name +To magnify and bless. + +And the heathen in the rice-fields stopped to gaze at the strange +sight, and the mountains gave back the echo of that Name which is +above every name. + +And so, marching to their song, the procession came to the +village. Everybody in the place had come out to meet them at the +first sound of the singing. And now they stood staring, the men +in a group by themselves, the women and children in the +background, the dogs snarling on the outskirts of the crowd. + +The congregation was there ready, and without waiting to find a +place of meeting, right out under the clear evening skies, the +young missionary told once more the great story of God and his +love as shown through Jesus Christ. The message took the village +by storm. It was like water to thirsty souls. The next day five +hundred of them brought their idols to the missionary to be +burned. + +And now Mackay went up and down the Kap-tsu-lan plain from +village to village as he had done before, but this time it was a +triumphal march. And everywhere he went throngs threw away their +idols and declared themselves followers of the true God. + +He was overcome with joy. It was so glorious he wished he could +stay there the rest of his life and lead these willing people to +a higher life. But Tamsui was waiting; Sin-tiam, Bang-kah, +Kelung, Go-ko-khi, they must all be visited; and finally he tore +himself away, leaving some of his students to care for these +people of Kap-tsu-lan. + +But he came back many times, until at last nineteen chapels +dotted the plain, and in them nineteen native preachers told the +story of Jesus and his love. Sometimes, in later years, when +Mackay was with them, tears would roll down the people's faces as +they recalled how badly they had used him on his first visit. + +It was while on his third visit here that he had a narrow escape +from the head-hunters. He was staying at a village called "South +Wind Harbor," which was near the border of savage territory. +Mackay often walked on the shore in the evening just before the +meeting, always with a book in his hand. One night he was +strolling along in deep meditation when he noticed some extremely +large turtle tracks in the sand. He followed them, for he liked +to watch the big clumsy creatures. These green turtles were from +four to five feet in length. They would come waddling up from the +sea, scratch a hole in the sand with their flippers, lay their +eggs, cover them carefully, and with head erect and neck +out-thrust waddle back. Mackay was intensely interested in all +the animal life of the island and made a study of it whenever he +had a chance. He knew the savages killed and ate these turtles, +but he supposed he was as yet too near the village to be molested +by them. So he followed the tracks and was nearing the edge of +the forest, when he heard a shout behind him. As he turned, one +of his village friends came running out of his hut waving to him +frantically to come back. Thinking some one must be ill, Mackay +hurried toward the man, to find that it was he himself who was in +danger. The man explained breathlessly that it was the habit of +the wily savages to make marks in the sand resembling turtle +tracks to lure people into the forest. If Kai Bok-su had entered +the woods, his head would certainly have been lost. + +It was always hard to say farewell to Kaptsu-lan, the people were +so warm-hearted, so kind, and so anxious for him to stay. One +morning just before leaving after his third visit, Mackay had an +experience that brought him the greatest joy. + +He had stayed all night at the little fishing village where the +first chapel had been built. As usual he was up with the dawn, +and after his breakfast of cold boiled rice and pork he walked +down to the shore for a farewell look at the village. As he +passed along the little crooked street he could see old women +sitting on the mud floors of their huts, by the open door, +weaving. They were all poor, wrinkled, toothless old folk with +faces seamed by years of hard heathen experience. But in their +eyes shone a new light, the reflection of the glory that they had +seen when the missionary showed them Jesus their Savior. And as +they threw their thread their quavering voices crooned the sweet +words: + +There is a happy land +Far, far away. + +And their old weary faces were lighted up with a hope and +happiness that had never been there in youth. + +Kai Bok-su smiled as he passed their doors and his eyes were +misty with tender tears. + +Just before him, playing on the sand with "jacks" or tops, just +as he had played not so very long ago away back in Canada, were +the village boys. And as they played they too were singing, their +little piping voices, sweet as birds, thrilling the mQrning air. +And the words they sang were: + +Jesus loves me, this I know, +For the Bible tells me so. + +They nodded and smiled to Kai Bok-su as he passed. be went down +to the shore where the wide Pacific flung long rollers away up +the hard-packed sand. The fishermen were going out to sea in the +rosy morning light, and as they stood up in their fishing-smacks, +and swept their long oars through the surf, they kept time to the +motion with singing. And their strong, brave voices rang out +above the roar of the breakers: + +I'm not ashamed to own my Lord, +Or to defend his cause. + +And standing there on the sunlit shore the young missionary +raised his face to the gleaming blue heavens with an emotion of +unutterable joy and thanksgiving. And in that moment he knew what +was that glory for which he had so vaguely longed in childish +years. It was the glory of work accomplished for his Master's +sake, and he was realizing it to the full. + + +CHAPTER X. REENFORCEMENTS + +Some of Mackay's happiest days were spent with his students. He +was such a wonder of a man for work himself that he inspired +every one else to do his best, so the young men made rapid +strides with their lessons. No matter how busy he was, and he was +surely one of the busiest men that ever lived, he somehow found +time for them. + +Sometimes in his house, sometimes on the road, by the seashore, +under a banyan tree, here and there and everywhere, the +missionary and his pupils held their classes. If he went on a +journey, they accompanied him and studied by the way. And it was +a f amiliar sight on north Formosan roads or field paths to see +Mackay, always with his book in one hand and his big ebony stick +under his arm, walking along surrounded by a group of young men. + +Sometimes there were as many as twenty in the student-band, but +somewhere in the country a new church would open, and the +brightest of the class would be called away to be its minister. +But just as often a young Christian would come to the missionary +and ask if he too might not be trained to preach the gospel of +Jesus Christ. + +Whether at home or abroad, pupils and teacher had to resort to +all sorts of means to get away for an uninterrupted hour +together. For Kai Bok-su was always in demand to visit the sick +or sad or troubled. + +There was a little kitchen separate from the house on the bluff, +and over this Mackay with his students built a second story. And +here they would often slip away for a little quiet time together. +One night, about eleven o'clock, Mackay was here alone poring +over his books. The young men had gone home to bed except two or +three who were in the kitchen below. Some papers had been dropped +over a pipe-hole in the floor of the room where Mackay was +studying, and for some time he had been disturbed by a rustling +among them. At last without looking up, he called to his boys +below: "I think there are rats up here among my papers!" + +Koa Kau, one of the younger of the students, ran lightly up the +stairs to give battle to the intruders. What was his horror when +he saw fully three feet of a monster serpent sticking up through +the pipe-hole and waving its horrible head in the air just a +little distance from Kai Bok-su's chair. + +The boy gave a shout, darted down the stair, and with a sharp +stick, pinned the body of the snake to the wall below. The +creature became terribly violent, but Koa Kau held on valiantly +and Mackay seized an old Chinese spear that happened to be in the +room above and pierced the serpent through the head. They pulled +its dead body down into the kitchen below and spread it out. It +measured nine feet. The students would not rest until it was +buried, and the remembrance of the horrible creature's visit for +some time spoiled the charm of the little upper room. + +The rocks at Kelung harbor were another favorite spot for this +little traveling university to hold its classes. Sometimes they +would take their dinner and row out in a little sampan to the +rocks outside the harbor and there, undisturbed, they would study +the whole day long. + +They always began the day's work with a prayer and a hymn of +praise, and no matter what subjects they might study, most of the +time was spent on the greatest of books. After a hard morning's +work each one would gather sticks, make a fire, and they would +have their dinner of vegetables, rice, and pork or buffalo-meat. +Then there were oysters, taken fresh off the rocks, to add to +their bill of fare. + +At five in the afternoon, when the strain of study was beginning +to tell, they would vary the program. One or two of the boys +would take a plunge into the sea and bring up a subject for +study,--a shell, some living coral, sea-weed, sea-urchins, or +some such treasure. They would examine it, and Kai Bok-su, always +delighted when on a scientific subject, would give them a lesson +in natural history. And he saw with joy how the wonders of the +sea and land opened these young men's minds to understand what a +great and wonderful God was theirs, who had made "the heaven and +the earth and the sea, and all that in them is." + +When they visited a chapel in the country, they had a daily +program which they tried hard to follow. They studied until four +o'clock every afternoon and all were trained in speaking and +preaching. After four they made visits together to Christians or +heathen, speaking always a word for their Master. Every evening a +public service was held at which Mackay preached. These sermons +were an important part of the young men's training, for he always +treated the gospel in a new way. A Hoa, who was Mackay's +companion for the greater part of sixteen years, stated that he +had never heard Kai Bok-su preach the same sermon twice. + +On the whole the students liked their college best when it was +moving. For on the road, while their principal gave much time to +the Bible and how to present the gospel, he would enliven their +walks by conversing about everything by the way and making it +full of interest. The structure of a wayside flower, the +geological formation of an overhanging rock, the composition of +the soil of the tea plantations, the stars that shone in the sky +when night came down upon them;--all these made the traveling +college a delight. + +Although his days were crammed with work, Mackay found time to +make friends among the European population of the island. They +all liked and admired him, and many of them tried to help the man +who was giving his life and strength so completely to others. +They were familiar with his quick, alert figure passing through +the streets of Tamsui, with his inevitable book and his big ebony +cane. And they would. smile and say, "There goes Mackay; he's the +busiest man in China."* + +* See Chapter XIII, Formosa becomes Japanese territory. + +The British consul in the old Dutch fort and the English +commissioner of customs proved true and loyal friends. The +representatives of foreign business firms, too, were always ready +to lend him a helping hand where possible. His most useful +friends were the foreign medical men. They helped him very much. +They not only did all they could for his own recovery when +malaria attacked him, but they helped also to cure his patients. +Traveling scientists always gave him a visit to get his help and +advice. He had friends that were shipcaptains, officers, +engineers, merchants, and British consuls. Everybody knew the +wonderful Kai Bok-su. "Whirlwind Mackay," some of them called +him, and they knew and admired him with the true admiration that +only a brave man can inspire. + +The friends to whom he turned for help of the best kind were the +English Presbyterians in south Formosa. They, more than any +others, knew his trials and difficulties. They alone could enter +with true sympathy into all his triumphs. At one time Dr. +Campbell, one of the south Formosan missionaries, paid him a +visit. He proved a delightful companion, and together the two +made a tour of the mission stations. Dr. Campbell preached +wherever they went and was a great inspiration to the people, as +well as to the students and to the missionary himself. + +One evening, when they were in Kelung, Mackay, with his +insatiable desire to use every moment, suggested that they spend +ten days without speaking English, so that they might improve +their Chinese. Dr. Campbell agreed, and they started their +"Chinese only." Next morning from the first early call of "Liong +tsong khi lai," "All, all, up come," not one word of their native +tongue did they speak. They had a long tramp that morning and +there was much to talk about and the conversation was all in +Chinese, according to the bargain. Dr. Campbell was ahead, and +after an hour's talk he suddenly turned upon his companion: +"Mackay!" he exclaimed, "this jabbering in Chinese is ridiculous, +and two Scotchmen should have more sense; let us return to our +mother tongue." Which advice Mackay gladly followed. + +His next visitor was the Rev. Mr. Ritchie from south Formosa, one +of the friends who had first introduced him to his work. Every +day of his visit was a joy. With nine of Mackay's students, the +two missionaries set out on a trip through the north Formosa +mission that lasted many weeks. + +But the more pleasant and helpful such companionship was the more +alone Mackay felt when it was over. His task was becoming too +much for one man. He was wanted on the northern coast, at the +southern boundary of his mission field, and away on the +Kap-tsu-lan plain all at once. He was crowded day and night with +work. What with preaching, dentistry, attending the sick, +training his students, and encouraging the new churches, he had +enough on his hands for a dozen missionaries. + +But now at last the Church at home, in far-away Canada, bestirred +herself to help him. They had been hearing something of the +wonderful mission in Formosa, but they had heard only hints of +it, for Mackay would not confess how he was toiling day and night +and how the work had grown until he was not able to overtake it +alone. But the Church understood something of his need, and they +now sent him the best present they could possibly give,--an +assistant. Just three years after Mackay had landed in Formosa, +the Rev. J. B. Fraser, M. D., and his wife and little ones +arrived. He was a young man, too, vigorous and ready for work. +Besides being an ordained minister, he was a physician as well, +just exactly what the north Formosan mission needed. + +Along with the missionary, the Church had sent funds for a house +for him and also one for Mackay. So the poor old Chinese house on +the bluff was replaced by a modern, comfortable dwelling, and by +its side another was built for the new missionary and his family. +One room of Mackay's house was used as a study for his students. + +After the houses were built and the new doctor was able to use +the language, he began to fill a long-felt want. Mackay had +always done a little medical work, and the foreign doctor of +Tamsui had been most kind in giving his aid, but a doctor of his +own, a missionary doctor, was exactly what Kai Bok-su wanted. +Soon the sick began to hear of the wonders the missionary doctor +could perform, and they flocked to him to be cured. + +It must not be supposed that there were not already doctors in +north Formosa. There were many in Tamsui alone, and very +indignant they were at this new barbarian's success. But the +native doctors were about the worst trouble that the people had +to bear. Their medical knowledge, like their religion, was a +mixture of ignorance and superstition, and some of their +practises would have been inexcusable except for the fact that +they themselves knew no better. There were two classes of medical +men; those who treated internal diseases and those who professed +to cure external maladies. It was hard to judge which class did +the more mischief, but perhaps the "inside doctors" killed more +of their patients. Dog's flesh was prescribed as a cure for +dyspepsia, a chip taken from a coffin and boiled and the water +drunk was a remedy for catarrh, and an apology made to the moon +was a specific for wind-roughened skin. For the dreaded malaria, +the scourge of Formosa, the young Canadian doctor found many and +amazing remedies prescribed, some worse than the disease itself. +The native doctors believed malaria to be caused by two devils in +a patient, one causing the chills, the other the fever. One of +the commonest remedies, and one that was quite as sensible as any +of the rest, was to tie seven hairs plucked from a black dog +around the sick one's wrist. + +But when the barbarian doctor opened his dispensary in Tamsui, a +new era dawned for the poor sick folk of north Formosa. The work +went on wonderfully well and Mackay found so much more time to +travel in the country that the gospel spread rapidly. + +But just when prospects were looking so fair and every one was +happy and hopeful, a sad event darkened the bright outlook of the +two missionaries. The young doctor had cured scores of cases, and +had brought health and happiness to many homes, but he was +powerless to keep death from his own door. + +And one day, a sad day for the mission of north Formosa, the +mother was called from husband and little ones to her home and +her reward in heaven. + +So the home on the bluff, the beautiful Christian home, which was +a pattern for all the Chinese, was broken up. The young doctor +was compelled to leave his patients, and taking his motherless +children he returned with them to Canada. + +The church at home sent out another helper. The Rev. Kenneth +Junor arrived one year later, and once more the work received a +fresh impetus. And then, just about two years after Mr. Junor's +arrival, Kai Bok-su found an assistant of his own right in +Formosa, and one who was destined to become a wonderful help to +him. And so one bright day, there was a wedding in the chapel of +the old Dutch fort, where the British consul married George +Leslie Mackay to a Formosan lady. Tui Chhang Mai, her name had +been. She was of a beautiful Christian character and for a long +time she had been a great help in the church. But as Mrs. Mackay +she proved a marvelous assistance to her husband. + +It had long been a great grief to the missionary that, while the +men would come in crowds to his meetings, the poor women had to +be left at home. Sometimes in a congregation of two hundred there +would be only two or three women. Chinese custom made it +impossible for a man missionary to preach to the women. Only a +few of the older ones came out. So the mothers of the little +children did not hear about Jesus and so could not teach their +little ones about him. + +But now everything was changed for them. They had a +lady-missionary, and one of their own people too. The Mackays +went on a wedding-trip through the country. Kai Bok-su walked, as +usual, and his wife rode in a sedan-chair. The wedding-trip was +really a missionary tour; for they visited all the chapels, and +the women came to the meetings in crowds, because they wanted to +hear and see the lady who had married Kai Bok-su. Often, after +the regular meetings when the men had gone away, the women would +crowd in and gather round Mrs. Mackay and she would tell them the +story of Jesus and his love. + +It was a wonderful wedding-journey and. it brought a double +blessing wherever the two went. Their experiences were not all +pleasant. One day they traveled over a sand plain so hot that +Mackay's feet were blistered. Another time they were drenched +with rain. One afternoon there came up a terrific wind storm. It +blew Mrs. Mackay's sedan-chair over and sent her and the carriers +flying into the mud by the roadside. At another place they all +barely escaped drowning when crossing a stieam. But the brave +young pair went through it all dauntlessly. The wife had caught +something of her husband's great spirit of sacrifice, and. he was +always the man on fire, utterly forgetful of self. + +For two years they worked happily together and at last a great +day came to KaiBok-su. He had been nearly eight years in Formosa. +It was time he came home, the Church in Canada said, for a little +rest and to tell the people at home something of his great work. + +And so he and his Formosan wife said good-by, amid tears and +regrets on all sides, and leaving Mr. Junor in charge with A Hoa +to help, they set sail for Canada. It was just a little over +seven years since he had settled in that little hut by the river, +despised and hated by every one about him; and now he left behind +him twenty chapels, each with a native preacher over it, and +hundreds of warm friends scattered over all north Formosa. + +He was not quite the same Mackay who had stood on the deck of the +America seven years before. His eyes were as bright and daring as +ever and his alert figure as full of energy, but his face showed +that his life had been a hard one. And no wonder, for he had +endured every kind of hardship and privation in those seven +years. He had been mobbed times without number. He had faced +death often, and day and night since his first year on the island +his footsteps had been dogged by the torturing malaria. + +But he was still the great, brave Mackay and his home-coming was +like the return of a hero from battle. He went through Canada +preaching in the churches, and his words were like a call to +arms. He swept over the country like one of his own Formosan +winds, carrying all before him. Wherever he preached hearts were +touched by his thrilling tales, and purses opened to help in his +work. Queen's University made him a Doctor of Divinity; Mrs. +Mackay, a lady of Detroit, gave him money enough to build a +hospital; and his home county, Oxford, presented him with $6,215 +with which to build a college. + +He visited his old home and had many long talks of his childhood +days with his loved ones. And he was reminded of the big stone in +the pasture-field which he was so determined to break. And he +thanked his heavenly Father for allowing him to break the great +rock of heathenism in north Formosa. + +He returned to his mission work more on fire than ever. If he had +been received with acclaim in his native land, his Formosan +friends' welcome was not less warm. Crowds of converts, all his +students who were not too far inland, and among them, Mr. Junor, +his face all smiles, were thronging the dock, many of them +weeping for joy. It was as if a long-absent father had come back +to his children. + +The work went forward now by leaps and bounds. Mackay's first +thought, after a hurried visit to the chapels and their +congregations, was to see that the hospital and college were +built. + +All day long the sound of the builders could be heard up on the +bluff near the missionaries' houses, and in a wonderfully short +time there arose two beautiful, stately buildings. Mackay +hospital they called one, not for Kai Bok-su--he did not like +things named for him--but in memory of the husband of the kind +lady who had furnished the money for it. The school for training +young men in the ministry was called Oxford College, in honor of +the county whose people had made it possible. + +Oxford College stood just overlooking the Tamsui river, two +hundred feet above its waters. The building was 116 feet long and +67 feet wide, and was built of small red bricks brought from +across the Formosa Channel. A wide, airy hall ran down the middle +of the building, and was used as a lecture-room. On either side +were rooms capable of accommodating fifty students and apartments +for two teachers and their families. There were, besides, two +smaller lecture-rooms, a museum filled with treasures collected +from all over Formosa by Dr. Mackay and his students, a library, +a bathroom, and a kitchen. + +The grounds about the college and hospital were very beautiful. +Nature had given one of the finest situations to be found about +Tamsui, and Kai Bok-su did the rest. Tha climate helped him, for +it was no great task to have a luxurious garden in north Formosa. +So, in a few years there were magnificent trees and hedges, and +always glorious flower beds abloom all the time around the +missionary premises. + +But all this was not accomplished without great toil, and Kai +Bok-su appeared never to rest in those building days. It seemed +impossible that one man should work so hard, he was in Tamsui +superintending the hospital building to-day, and away off miles +in the country preaching to-morrow. He never seemed to get time +to eat, and he certainly slept less than his allotted four hours. + +A great disappointment was pending, however, and one he saw +coming nearer every day. The trying Formosan climate was proving +too much for his young assistant, and one sad day he stood on the +dock and saw Mr. Junor, pale and weak and broken in health, sail +away back to Canada. + +But there was always a brave soldier waitkg to step into the +breach, and the next year Kai Bok-su had the joy of welcoming two +new helpers, when the Rev. Mr. Jamieson and his wife came out +from Canada and settled in the empty house on the bluff. Yes, and +in time there came to his own house other helpers--very little +and helpless at first they were--but they soon made the house +ring with happy noise and filled the hearts of their parents with +joy. + +There were two ladies now to lead in the work for girls and +women. Their sisters in Canada came to their help too. The young +men had a school in Formosa, and why should there not be a school +for women and girls? they asked. And so the Women's Foreign +Missionary Society of Canada sent to Dr. Mackay money to build +one. It took only two months to erect it. It stood just a few +rods from Oxford College, and was a fine, airy building. Here a +native preacher and his wife took up their abode and with the +help of Mrs. Mackay and two other native Christian women they +strove to teach the girls of north Formosa how to make beautiful +Christian homes. + +And now to the two missionaries every prospect seemed bright. The +college, the girls' school, the hospital, were all in splendid +working order. Mr. and Mrs. Jamieson were giving their best +assistance. A Hoa and the other native pastors were working +faithfully. God's blessing seemed to be showering down upon the +work and on every side were signs of growth. And then, right from +this shining sky, there fell a storm of such fierceness that it +threatened to wipe out completely the whole north Formosan +mission. + + +CHAPTER XI. UNEXPECTED BOMBARDMENT + +An enemy's battle-ships off the coast of Formosa! During all the +spring rumors of trouble had been coming across the channel from +the mainland. France* and China had been quarreling over a +boundaryline in Tongking. The affair had been settled but not in +a way that pleased France. So, without even waiting to declare +war, she sent a fleet to the China Sea and bombarded some of her +enemy's ports. Formosa, of course, came in for her share of the +trouble, and it was early in the summer that the French +battle-ships appeared. They hove in sight, sailing down the +Formosa Channel or Strait one hot day, and instantly all Formosa +was in an uproar of alarm and rage. The rage was greater than the +alarm, for China cordially despised all peoples beyond her own +border, and felt that the barbarians would probably be too feeble +to do them any harm. But that the barbarians should dare to +approach their coast with a war-vessel! That was a terrible +insult, and the fierce indignation of the people knew no bounds. +Their rage broke out against all foreigners. They did not +distinguish between the missionary from British soil and the +French soldiers on their enemy's vessels. They were all +barbarians alike, the Chinese declared, and as such were the +deadly foe of China. This Kai Bok-su was in league with the +French, and the native Christians all over Formosa were in league +with him, and all deserved death! + +*War in 1844. + +So hard days came for the Christians of north Formosa. Wherever +there was a house containing converts, there was riot and +disorder. For bands of enraged heathen, armed with knives and +swords, would parade the streets about them and threaten all with +a violent death the moment the French fired a shot. + +In some places near the coast the Christian people dared not +leave their houses, and whenever they sent out their children to +buy food, often a heathen neighbor would catch them, brandish +knives over the terrified little ones' heads and declare they +would all be cut to pieces when the barbarian ships came into +port. + +Every hour of the day and often in the night, letters came from +all parts of the country to Dr. Mackay. They were brought by +runners who came at great peril of their lives, and were sent by +the poor Christians. Each letter told the same tale; the lives +and property of all the converts were in grave danger if the +enemy did not leave. And they all asked Kai Bok-su to do +something to help them. + +Now Kai Bok-su was a man with great power and influence both in +Formosa and in his far-off Canada, but he had no means of +bringing that power to bear on the French. And indeed his own +life was in as great danger as any one's. + +He wrote to the Christians comforting them and enthusing them +with his own spirit. He bade them all be brave, and no matter +what came, danger or torture or death itself, they must be true +to Jesus Christ. He went about his work in the college or +hospital just as usual, though he knew that any day the angry mob +from the town below might come raging up to destroy and kill. + +The French had entered Kelung harbor and the danger was growing +more serious every day when Mackay found it necessary to go to +Palm Island, a pretty islet in the mouth of the Kelung river. It +was almost courting death to go, but he had been sent for, and he +went. He found the place right under the French guns and in the +midst of raging Chinese. Some of the faithful students were +there, and they were overcome with joy and hope at the sight of +him. Tile gathered them about him in a mission house for prayer +and a word of encouragement. Outside the Chinese soldiers paraded +up and down. Sometimes indeed they would burst into the room and +threaten the inmates with violence should the French fire. Kai +Bok-su went on quietly talking to his students. He urged them to +be faithful and reminded them of what their Master suffered at +the hands of a mob for their sake. But, in spite of their brave +spirits, the little company could not help listening for the boom +of the French guns. It was fully expected that the enemy would +soon fire, and when they did, the Christians well knew there +would be little chance for them to escape. + +But God had prepared a way out of the difficulty. The meeting was +scarcely over when a messenger came in, asking for the +missionary. A Christian on the mainland was very ill and wanted +Kai Bok-su to visit him. Mackay with his students left the island +at once and went to the home of the sick man. + +They had been gone but a short time when the thunder of the +French cannon broke over the harbor. The guns from the Chinese +fort answered, and had the missionary been on Palm Island he and +his converts would surely have been killed. + +The Chinese were no match for the French gunners. The bombardment +destroyed the fort and killed every soldier who did not manage to +get away. A great shell crashed into the magazine of the fort, +and the explosion hurled masses of the concrete walls an +incredible distance. The city about the fort was completely +deserted, for the people fled at the first sound of the guns. + +As soon as the firing was over, the rabble broke loose and a +perfect reign of terror prevailed. The mob carried black flags +and swept over town and country, plundering and murdering. The +Christians were of course the first object of attack, and to tear +down a church was the mob's fiercest joy. Seven of the most +beautiful chapels were completely destroyed and many others +injured. + +In the town of Toa-liong-pong was the home of Koa Kau, one of Kai +Bok-su's most devoted students. Here was a lovely chapel built at +great expense. The crowd tore it to pieces from roof to +foundation. Then, out of the bricks of the ruin they erected a +huge pile, eight feet high; they plastered it over with mud, and +on the face of it, next the highway where every one might see it, +they wrote in large Chinese characters: + +MACKAY, THE BLACK-BEARDED BARBARIAN, +LIES HERE. HIS WORK IS ENDED. + +They knew that the first was not true, but they firmly believed +the latter statement, for they understood little of the power of +the gospel. + +At Sin-tiam the crowd of ruffians smashed the doors and windows +of the church. Then they took the communion roll and read aloud +the names of the Christians who had been baptized. As each name +was announced, some of the murderers would rush off toward the +home of the one mentioned. Here they would torture and often kill +the members of the family. The native preacher and his family +barely escaped with their lives. One good old Christian man with +his wife, both over sixty, were dragged out into the deep water +of the Sin-tiam river. Here they were given a choice. If they +gave up Jesus Christ, their lives would be saved. If they still +remained Christians, they would be drowned right there and then. +The brave old couple refused to accept life at such a cost. + +"I'm not ashamed to own my Lord," was a hymn Kai Bok-su had +taught them, and They had meant every word as they had sung it +many times in the pretty chapel by the river. And so they were +"not ashamed" now. They were led deeper and deeper into the +water, and at every few feet the way of escape was offered, but +they steadily refused, and were at last flung into the river-- +faithful martyrs who certainly won a crown of life. + +These were only two among many brave Christians who died for +their Master's sake. Some were put to tortures too horrible to +tell to make them give up their faith. Some were hung by their +hair to trees, some were kicked or beaten to death, many were +slashed with knives until death relieved their pain. And on every +side the most noble Christian heroism was shown. In all ages +there have been those who died for their faith in Jesus Christ; +and these Formosan followers of their Master proved themselves no +less faithful than the martyrs of old. + +And where was Kai Bok-su while the mob raged over the country? +Going about his work in Tamsui as of old. Only now he worked both +night and day, and the anxiety for his poor converts kept him +awake in the few hours when he might have snatched some sleep. He +was here, there, everywhere at once, it seemed, writing letters +to encourage the Christians in distress, visiting those who were +wavering to strengthen their faith, teaching his students, +praying, preaching, night and day, he never ceased; and always +the mob surged about him threatening his life. + +The French ships now sailed out of Kelung harbor and took up +their position opposite Tamsui. Every one knew this probably +meant bombardment, and Dr. Mackay and Mr. Jamieson, standing on +the bluff before their houses, looked at each other and each knew +the other's thought. Bombardment would mean that the mob would +come raging up and destroy both life and property on the hill. + +But just as they expected the roar of guns to open, there sailed +into Tamsui harbor a vessel that flew a different flag from the +French. Mackay, looking at her through a glass, made out with joy +the crosses on the red banner of Britain! England had nothing to +do with this Chinese-French war, but as a British vessel can be +found lying around almost any port in the wide world, there of +course happened to be one near Tamsui. She gained a passport into +the harbor and sailed in with a very kindly mission; it was to +protect the lives of foreigners, not only from the French guns, +but from the Chinese mobs. + +The ship had been in the harbor but a short time when a young +English naval officer, carrying the British flag, came up the +path to the houses on the bluff. Dr. Mackay was in the library of +Oxford College, lecturing to his students, when the visitor +entered. + +The missionary made the sailor welcome and the young man told his +errand. Dr. Mackay was invited to bring his family and his +valuables and come on board the vessel to be the guest of the +captain until the disturbance was over. + +It was a most kindly invitation and Dr. Mackay shook his +visitor's hand warmly as he thanked hiffi. He turned and +translated the message to his students, and their hearts stood +still with dismay. If Kai Bok-su, their stay and support, were to +be taken away, what would become of them? But Kai Bok-su had not +changed with the changing circumstances. He was still as brave +and undaunted as though trouble had never come to his island. + +He turned to the officer again with a smile. "My family would not +be hard to move," he said, "but my valuables--I am afraid I could +not take them." He made a gesture toward the students standing +about him. "These young men and many more converts scattered all +over north Formosa, are my valuables. Many of them have faced +death unflinchingly for my sake. They are my valuables, and I +cannot leave them." + +It was bravely said, just as Kai Bok-su might be expected to +speak, and the English officer's eyes kindled with appreciation. +The words found a ready response in his heart. They were the +words of a true soldier of the King. The officer went back to his +captain with Mackay's message and with a deep admiration in his +heart for the man who would rather face death than leave his +friends. + +So the British man-of-war drew off, leaving the missionaries in +the midst of danger. And almost immediately, with a great +bursting roar, the bombardment from the French ships opened. +Sometimes the shells flew high over the town and up to the bluff, +so Dr. and Mrs. Mackay put their three little ones in a safe +corner under the house; but they themselves as well as Mr. and +Mrs. Jamieson, went in and out to and from the college, and the +girls' school as though nothing were happening. + +Every day Mackay's work grew heavier and his anxiety for the +persecuted Christians grew deeper. He ate very little, and he +scarcely slept at all. It was not the noise of the carnage about +him that kept him awake. He would have fallen asleep peacefully +amidst bursting shells, but he had no opportunity. The whole +burden of the young Church, harassed by persecution on all sides, +seemed to rest upon his spirit. Anxiety for the Christians in the +inland stations from whom he could not hear weighed on him night +and day, and his brave spirit was put to the severest test. + +Only his great strong faith in God kept him up and kept up the +spirits of the converts who looked to him for an example. And a +brave pattern he showed them. Often he and A Hoa paced the lawn +in front of the house while shot and shell whizzed around them. +During the worst of the bombardment they came and went between +the college and the house as if they had charmed lives. One day +there was a great roar and a shell struck Oxford College, shaking +it to its foundations. The smoke from fort and ships had scarcely +cleared away when, crash! and the girls' school was struck by a +bursting shell. Next moment there was a fearful bang and a great +stone that stood in front of the Mackays' house went up into the +air in a thousand fragments. + +But when the firing was hottest, Kai Bok-su would repeat to his +students the comforting Psalm: + +"Thou shalt not be afraid for the terror by night; nor for the +arrow that flieth by day." + +But in spite of his brave demeanor, the strain on the shepherd of +this harassed flock was beginning to tell. And when the +bombardment ceased and the intense anxiety for his loved ones was +over, Kai Bok-su suddenly collapsed. Dr. Johnsen, the foreign +physician of Tamsui, came hurriedly up to the mission house to +see him. His verdict sent a thrill of dismay through every heart +that loved him, from the anxious little wife by the patient's +side, to the poorest convert in the town below. Their beloved Kai +Bok-su had brain fever. + +"Too much anxiety and too little sleep," said the medical man. +"He must sleep now," he added, "or he will die." But now that Kai +Bok-su had a chance to rest, he could not. Sleep had been chased +away too long to stay with him. Night and day he tossed about, +wide awake and burning with fever. His temperature was never less +than 102 during those days, and all the doctor's efforts could +not lower it. The awful heat of September was on, and the great +typhoons that would soon sweep across the country and clear the +air had not yet come. The glaring sun and the stifling damp heat +were all against the patient. At last one day the doctor saw a +crisis was approaching. He stood looking down at the hot, flushed +face, at the burning eyes, and the restless hands that were never +still, and he said to himself, "If the fever does not go down +to-day, he will die." + +The doctor went along "College Road toward his home, answering +the eager, anxious questions that met him on all sides with only +a shake of his head. + +A Hoa followed him, his drawn face full of pleading. Was he no +better ? he asked with quivering lips. It was the question poor A +Hoa asked many, many times a day, for he never left the house +when not away on duty. The doctor's face was full of sympathy and +his own heart weighed down as he sadly answered, "No." + +"If I only had some ice," he muttered, knowing well he had none. +"If there was only one bit of ice in Tamsui, I'd save him yet." + +Over in the British consulate Dr. Johnsen had another patient. +Mr. Dodd lay sick there, though not nearly as ill as the +missionary, and the physician's next visit was to him. When he +entered he found a servant carrying a tray with some ice on it to +the sick room. + +"Ice!" cried the doctor, overjoyed. "Where did it come from?" + +The servant explained that the steamship Hailoong had just +arrived in Tamsui harbor with it that morning. The doctor entered +Mr. Dodd's room. Would he give him that ice to save Mackay's +life? was the question he asked. To save such a life as Mackay's! +That was an absurd question, Mr. Dodd declared, and he +immediately ordered that every bit of ice he had should be sent +at once to the missionary's house. + +The doctor hurried back up the hill with the precious remedy. He +broke up a piece and laid it like a little cushion on poor Kai +Bok-su's hot forehead; that forehead beneath which the busy +brain, resting neither day nor night, was burning up. It had not +been there a great while before the restless eyes lost their +fire, the eyelids drooped and, wonderful sight, Kai Bok-su sank +into a sleep! The doctor hardly dared to breathe If he could only +be kept asleep now, he had a chance. Dr. Mackay had never been a +sleeper, he well knew. He was too restless, too energetic, to +allow himself even proper rest. When Dr. Fraser, his first +assistant, had been with him, he had struggled to persuade him to +stay in bed at least six hours every night, but not always with +success. But now he was to show what he could do in the matter of +sleeping. All that night he lay, breathing peacefully, the next +day he slept on from morning till night, and little by little the +ice melted away on his forehead. He did not move all the next +night, and A Hoa and Mrs. Mackay and the doctor took turns at his +bedside watching that the precious ice was always there. Morning +came and it was all finished. The patient opened his eyes. He had +slept thirty-six hours, and a thrill of joy went through every +Christian heart in Tamsui, for their Kai Bok-su was saved! + +But though the crisis was over, he was still very weak, and such +was the state of affairs through the country that he was in no +condition to cope with them. Riot and. plunder was the order of +the day. News of churches being destroyed, of faithful Christians +being tortured or put to death, were still coming to the mission +house, and no one could tell what day would bring Kai Boksu's +turn. + +And now came an order from the British consul which the +missionaries could not disobey. He commanded that their families +must be moved at once from Formosa, as he could not answer for +their protection. So at once preparations for their departure +were made, and Mr. Jamieson took his wife and Mrs. Mackay and her +three little ones and sailed away for Hongkong. + +But once more Kai Bok-su stayed behind. It cost him bitter pain +to part with his loved ones, knowing he might never see them +again; he was weak and spent with fever, and his poor body was +worn to a shadow, but he stubbornly refused to leave the men who +had stood by him in every danger. The consul commanded, the +doctor pleaded, but no, Kai Bok-su would not go. If the danger +had grown greater, then all the more reason why he should stay +and comfort his people. And if God were pleased to send death, +then they would all die together. + +But he was so weak and sick that the doctor feared that if he +remained there would be little chance for the mob to kill him: +death would come sooner. So he came to his stubborn patient with +a new proposition. The Fukien, a merchant steamship, was now +lying in Tamsui harbor. She was to run to Hongkong and back +directly. If Mackay would only take that trip, his physician +urged, the sea air would make him new again, and he would return +in a short time and be ready to take up his work once more. + +It was that promise that moved Mackay's resolution. His utter +weakness held him down from work, and he longed with all his soul +to go out through the country to helps the poor, suffering +churches. So he finally consented to take the short journey and +pay a visit to his dear ones in Hongkong. + +He did not get back quite as soon as he intended, for the French +blockade delayed his vessel. But at last he stepped out upon the +Tamsui dock into a crowd of preachers, students, and converts who +were weeping for joy about him and exclaiming over his improved +looks. + +The voyage had certainly done wonders for him, and at once he +declared he must take a trip into the country and visit those who +were left of the churches. + +It was a desperate undertaking, for French soldiers were now +scattered through the country, guarding the larger towns and +cities and everywhere mobs of furious Chinese were ready to +torture or kill every foreigner. But it would take even greater +difficulties than these to stop Kai Bok-su, and he began at once +to lay plans for going on a tour. + +He first went to the British consul and came back in high spirits +with a folded paper m his hand. He spread it out on the library +table before A Hoa and Sun-a, who were to go with him, and this +is what it said: + +British Consulate, Tamsui, + +May 27th, 1885. + +To THE OFFICER IN CHIEF COMMAND OF THE FRENCH FORCES AT KELUNG: + +The bearer of this paper, the Rev. George Leslie Mackay, D.D., a +British subject, missionary in Formosa, wishes to enter Kelung, +to visit his chapel and his house there, and to proceed through +Kelung to Kap-tsu-lan on the east coast of Formosa to visit his +converts there. Wherefore I, the undersigned, consul for Great +Britain at Tamsui, do beg the officer in chief command of the +French forces in Kelung to grant the said George Leslie Mackay +entry into, and a free and safe passage through, Kelung. He will +be accompanied by two Chinese followers, belonging to his +mission, named, respectively, Giam Chheng Hoa, and Iap Sun. +A. FRATER, +Her Britannic Majesty's Consul at Tamsui. + +They had all the power of the British Empire behind them so long +as they held that paper. Then they hired a burdenbearer to carry +their food, and Mackay cut a bamboo pole, fully twenty feet long, +and on it tied the British flag. With this floating over them, +the little army marched through the rice-fields down to Kelung. + +It was an adventurous journey. But, wonderful though it seemed, +they came through it safely. Poor Kai Bok-su's heart was torn as +he saw the ravages the mob had made on his churches. But what a +cheer his heart received when he found that persecution had +strengthened the converts that were left and everywhere the +heathen marveled that men should die for the faith the barbarian +missionary had taught. They were taken prisoners once for German +spies, and led far out of their way. But they came back to Tamsui +safely, having greatly cheered the faithful Christians who still +were true to their Master, Jesus Christ. It was early in June, +just one year from the opening of the war, that the French sailed +away. They were disgnsted with the whole affair, the commander of +one vessel told Dr. Mackay, and they were all very glad it was +over. + +Mr. and Mrs. Jamieson and Dr. Mackay's family returned to their +homes on the bluff, and work started up again with its old vigor. + +But everywhere the heathen were in great glee. Christianity had +been destroyed with the chapels, they were sure. Wherever Mackay +went, shouts of derision followed him, and everywhere he could +hear the joyful cry "Long-tsong bo-khi !" which meant "The +mission is wiped out!" + +But strange though it may seem, the mission had never been +stronger, and it soon began to assert itself. Dr. Mackay went at +the work of repairing the lost buildings with all the force of +his nature. First, he and Mr. Jamieson and A Hoa sat down and +prepared a statement of their losses. This they sent to the +commander-in-chief of the Chinese forces, who had been +responsible for law and order. Without any delay or questioning +of the missionaries' rights, the general sent Dr. Mackay the sum +asked for--ten thousand Mexican dollars.* + +*About $5000. + +The next thing was to plan the new chapels and see to the +building of them. And before the shouts of "Long-tsong bo-khi" +had well started, they began to be contradicted by walls of brick +or stone that rose up strong and sure to show that the mission +had not been wiped out. Three of the chapels were commenced all +at once--at Sintiam, at Bang-kah and at Sek-khau. Before anything +was done Dr. Mackay and a party of his students went up to +Sin-tiam to look over the site. They stood up on the pile of +ruins, surrounded by the Christians, and a crowd of heathen came +around gleefully to watch them in the hopes of seeing their +despair. + +But to their amazement the little company of Christians led by +the wonderful Kai Bok-su, suddenly burst into a hymn of praise to +God who had brought them safely through all their troubles: + +Bless, O my soul, the Lord thy God, +And not forgetful be +Of all his gracious benefits +He hath bestowed on thee! + +The heathen listened in wonder to the words of praise where they +had expected lamentation, and they asked each other what was this +strange power that made men so strong and brave. + +And their amazement grew as the chapels, the lovely new chapels +of stone or brick, began to rise from the ruins of the old ones. +And not only did the old ones reappear, new and more beautiful, +but as Dr. Mackay and his native preachers went here and there +over the country others peeped forth like the hepaticas of +springtime, until there were not only the forty original chapels, +but in a few years the number had increased to sixty. + +The triumphant shout that the mission had been wiped out ceased +completely, and the people declared that they had been fools to +try to destroy the chapels, for the result had been only bigger +and better ones. + +"Look now," said one old heathen, pointing a withered finger to +the handsome spire of the Bang-kah chapel, that lifted itself +toward the sky, "Look now, the chapel towers above our temple. It +is larger than the one we destroyed." + +His neighbors crowding about him and gazing up with superstitious +awe at the spire, agreed. + +"If we touch this one he will build another and a bigger one," +remarked another man. + +"We cannot stop the barbarian missionary," said the old heathen +with an air of conviction. + +"No, no one can stop the great Kai Boksu," they finally agreed, +and so they left off all opposition in despair. + +Yes, the cry of "Long-tsong bo-khi" had died, and the answer to +it was inscribed on the front of the splendid chapels that sprang +up all over north Formosa. For, just above the main entrance to +each, worked out in stucco plaster, was a picture of the burning +bush, and around it in Chinese the grand old motto: + +"Nec tamen consumebatur" ("Yet it was not consumed.") + + +CHAPTER XII. TRIUMPHAL MARCH + +Up and down the length and breadth of north Formosa, seeming to +be in two or three places at once, went Kai Bok-su, during this +time of reviving after the war. He would be in Kelung to-day +superintending the new chapel building, in Tamsui at Oxford +College the next day, in Bang-kali preaching a short while after, +and no one could tell just where the next day. + +But every one did know that wherever he went, Christians grew +stronger and heathen gave up their idols. The Kap-tsu-lan plain, +away on the eastem coast, seemed to be a sort of pet among all +his mission fields, and he was always turning his steps thither. +For the Pe-pohoan who lived there, while they were simple and +warm-hearted and easily moved by the gospel story, were not such +strong characters as the Chinese. So the missionary felt he must +visit them often to help steady their faith. + +Not long after the close of the war, he set off on a trip to the +Kap-tsu-lan plain. Besides his students, he was accompanied by a +young German scientist Dr. Warburg had come from Germany to +Formosa to collect peculiar plants and flowers and to find any +old weapons or relics of interest belonging to the savage tribes. +All these were for the use of the university in Germany which had +sent him out. + +The young scientist was delighted with Dr. Mackay and found in +him a very interesting companion. They met in Kelung, and when +Dr. Warburg found that Dr. Mackay was going to visit the +Kap-tsu-lan plain, he joined his party. The stranger found many +rare specimens of orchids on that trip and several peculiar spear +and arrow heads to be taken back as curios to Germany. But he +found something rarer and more wonderful and something for which +he had not come to search. + +He saw in one place three hundred people gather about their +missionary and raise a ringing hymn of praise to the God of +heaven, of whom they had not so much as heard but a few short +years before. He visited sixteen little chapels and heard clever, +brightfaced young Chinese preachers stand up in them and tell the +old, old story of Jesus and his love. And he realized that these +things were far more wonderful than the rarest curios he could +find in all Formosa. + +When he bade good-by to Dr. Mackay, he said: "I never saw +anything like this before. If scientific skeptics had traveled +with a missionary as I have and witiiessed what I have witnessed +on this plain, they would assume a different attitude toward the +heralds of the cross." + +Not many months later Dr. Mackay again went down the eastern +coast. This time he took three of his closest friends, all +preacher students, Tan be, Sun-a, and Koa Kau. With a coolie to +carry provisions, their Bibles, their forceps, and some malaria +medicine, they started off fully equipped. + +By steam launch to Bang-kah, by a queer little railway train to +Tsui-tng-kha and by foot to Kelung was the first part of the +journey. The next part was a tramp over the mountains to +Kap-tsu-lan. + +The road now grew rough and dangerous. Overhead hung loose rocks, +huge enough to crush the whole party should they fall. Underneath +were wet, slippery stones which might easily make one go sliding +down into the chasm below. + +As usual on this trip they had many hairbreadth escapes, for +there were savages too hiding up in the dense forest and waiting +an opportunity to spring out upon the travelers. Dr. Mackay was +almost caught in a small avalanche also. He leaped over a narrow +stream-bed, and as he did so, he dislodged a loose mass of rock +above him. It came down with a fearful crash, scattering the +smaller pieces right upon his heels; but they passed all dangers +safely and toward evening reached the shore where the great long +Pacific billows rolled upon the sand. They were in the +Kap-tsu-lan plain. + +Their journey through the plain was like a triumphal march. +Wherever a chapel had been erected, there were converts to be +examined; wherever there was no chapel, the people gathered about +the missionary and pleaded for one. They often recalled the first +visit of Kai Bok-su when "No room for barbarians" were the only +words that met him. + +But Dr. Mackay wished to go farther on this journey than he had +ever gone. Some distance south of Kap-tsu-lan lay another +district called the Ki-lai plain. The people here were also +aborigines of the island who had been conquered by the Chinese +like the Pepo-hoan. But the inhabitants of Ki-lai were called +Lam-si-ho an, which means "Barbarians of the south." Dr. Mackay +had never been among them, but they had heard the gospel. A +missionary from Oxford College had journeyed away down there to +tell the people about Jesus and had been working among them for +some years. He was not a graduate, not even a student--but only +the cook! For Oxford College was such a place of inspiration +under Kai Bok-su, that even the servants in the kitchen wanted to +go out and preach the gospel. So the cook had gone away to the +Ki-lai plain, and, ever since he had left, Dr. Mackay had longed +to go and see how his work was prospering. + +So at one of the most southerly points of the Kap-tsu-lan plain +he secured a boat for the voyage south. The best he could get was +a small craft quite open, only twelve feet long. It was not a +very fine vessel with which to brave the Pacific Ocean, but where +was the crazy craft in which Kai Bok-su would not embark to go +and tell the gospel to the heathen? The boat was manned by six +Pe-po-hoan rowers, all Christians, and at five o'clock in the +evening they pushed out into the surf of So Bay. A crowd of +converts came down to the shore to bid them farewell. As the boat +shoved off the friends on the beach started a hymn. The rowers +and the missionaries caught it up and the two groups joined, the +sound of each growing fainter and fainter to the other as the +distance widened. + +All lands to God in joyful sounds +Aloft your voices raise, +Sing forth the honor of his name, +And glorious make his praise! + +And the land and the sea, answering each other, joined in praise +to him who was the Maker of both. + +And so the rowers pulled away in time to the swing of the Psalm, +the boat rounded a point, and the beloved figure of Kai Bok-su +disappeared from sight. + +Away down the coast the oarsmen pulled, and the four missionaries +squeezed themselves into as small a space as possible to be out +of the way of the oars. All the evening they rowed steadily, and +as they still swept along night came down suddenly. They kept +close to the shore, where to their right arose great mountains +straight up from the water's edge. They were covered with forest, +and here and there in the blackness fires twinkled. + +"Head-hunters!" said the helmsman, pointing toward them. + +Away to the left stretched the Pacific. Ocean, and above shone +the stars in the deep blue dome. It was a still, hot tropical +night. From the land came the heavy scent of flowers. The only +sound that broke the stillness was the regular thud, thud of the +oars or the cry of some wild animal floating out from the jungle. +As they passed on through the warm darkness, the sea took on that +wonderful fiery glow that so often burns on the oceans of the +tropics. Every wave became a blaze of phosphorescence. Every +ripple from the oars ran away in many-colored flames--red, green, +blue, and orange. Kai Bok-su, sitting amazed at the glory to +which the Pe-po-hoan boatmen had become accustomed, was silent +with awe. He had seen the phosphorescent lights often before, but +never anything like this. He put his hand down into the molten +sea and scooped up handfuls of what seemed drops of liquid fire. +And as his fingers dipped into the water they shone like rods of +red-hot iron. Over the gleaming iridescent surface, sparks of +fire darted like lightning, and from the little boat's sides +flashed out flames of gold and rose and amber. It was grand. And +no wonder they all joined--Chinese, Malayan, and Canadian--in +making the dark cliffs and the gleaming sea echo to the strains +of praise to the One who had created all this glory. + +O come let us sing to the Lord, +To him our voices raise +With joyful noise, let us the rock +Of our salvation praise. + +To him the spacious sea belongs, +For he the same did make; +The dry land also from his hand +Its form at first did take. + +Dawn came up out of the Pacific with a new glory of light and +color that dispelled the wonders of the night. It showed the +voyagers that they were very near a low shore where it would be +possible to land. But the helmsman shook his head at the +proposal. He pointed out huts along the line of forest and +figures on the shore. And then with a common impulse, the rowers +swung round and pulled straight out to sea; for with Pe-po-hoan +experience they saw at once that here was a savage village, and +not long would their heads remain on their shoulders should they +touch land. + +The scorching sun soon poured its hot rays upon the tired rowers, +but they pulled steadily. They too, like Kai Bok-su, were anxious +to take this great good news of Jesus Christ to those who had not +yet learned of him. When safely out of reach of the headhunters, +they once more turned south, and, about noon, tired and hot, at +last approached the first port of the Ki-lai plain. Every one +drew a sigh of relief, for the men had been rowing steadily all +night and half the day. As they drew near Dr. Mackay looked +eagerly at the queer village. It appeared to be half Chinese and +half Lam-si-hoan. It consisted of two rows of small thatched +houses with a street between nearly two hundred feet wide. + +The rowers ran the boat up on the sloping pebbly beach and all +stepped out with much relief to stretch their stiffened limbs. +They had scarcely done so when a military officer came down the +shore and approaching Dr. Mackay made him welcome with the +greatest warmth. There was a military encampment here, and this +was the officer as well as the headman of the village. lie +invited Dr. Mackay and his friends to take dinner with him. Dr. +Mackay accepted with pleased surprise. This was far better than +he had expected. He was still more surprised to hear his name on +every hand. + +"It is the great Kai Bok-su," could be heard in tones of deepest +respect from fishermen at their nets and old women by the door +and children playing with their kites in the wide street. + +"How do they know me?" he asked, as he was greeted by a +rice-seller, sitting at the open front of his shop. + +"Ah, we have heard of you and your work in the north, Pastor +Mackay," said his host, smiling, "and our people want to hear of +this new Jehovah-religion too. + +The cook-missionary had evidently spread. wonderful reports of +Kai Bok-su and his gospel and so prepared the way. He was +preaching just then in a place called Kale-oan, farther inland. +When the officer learned that Dr. Mackay wanted to visit him he +turned to his servant with a most surprising order. It was to +saddle his pony and bring him for Kai Bok-su to ride to Ka-leoan. + +The pony came, sleek and plump and with a string of jingling +bells adorning him. A pony was a wonderful sight in Formosa, and +Dr. Mackay had not used any sort of animal in his work since that +disastrous day when he had tried in vain to ride the stubborn +Lu-a. But now he gladly mounted the sedate little steed and +trotted away along the narrow pathway between the rice-fields +toward Ka-le-oan. + +Darkness had almost descended when he rode into the village and +stopped before a small grass-covered bamboo dwelling where the +cook-preacher lived. For years the people here had looked for Kai +Bok-su's coming, for years they had talked of this great event, +and for years their preacher had been writing and saying as he +received his reply from the eager missionary in Tamsui, "He may +come soon." + +And now he was really here! The sound of his horse's bells had +scarcely stopped before the preacher's house, when the news began +to spread like fire through the village. The preacher, who had +worked so hard and waited so long, wept for joy, and before he +could make Dr. Mackay welcome in a proper manner the room was +filled with men, all wildly eager for a sight of the great Kai +Bok-su, while outside a crowd gathered about the door striving to +get even a glimpse of him. The ex-cook of Oxford College had +preached so faithfully that many were already converted to +Christianity, many more knew a good deal of the gospel, and +crowds were ready to throw away their idols. They were weary of +their heathen rites and superstitions. They were longing for +something better, they scarcely knew what. "But the mandarin will +not let them become Christians," said the preacher anxiously. "It +is he who is keeping them from decision. He has said that they +must continue in idolatry, as a token of loyalty to China." + +"Are you sure that is true?" cried Dr. Mackay. + +The converts nodded. They had "heard" it said at least. + +But Kai Bok-su was not the man to accept mere hearsay. He was +always wisely careful to avoid any collision with the +authorities. But remembering the kindness shown him back in +Hoe-lien-kang, he could not quite believe that the mandarin who +had been so kind to him could be hostile to the religion of Jesus +Christ. + +To think was to act, and early the next morning, he was riding +back to the seacoast, to inquire how much of this rumor was true. + +His reception was very warm. It was all right, the officer +declared. Whatever had been said or done in the past must be +forgotten. Kai Bok-su might go where he pleased and preach his +Jehovah-religion to whomsoever he would. + +It was a very light-hearted rider the pony carried as he galloped +back along the narrow paths, with the good news for the +villagers. The word went round as soon as he arrived. Kai Bok-su +wanted to know how many were for the true God. All who would +worship him were at once to clear their houses of idols and +declare that they would serve Jehovah and him only. At dark a +great crowd gathered in an open space in the village. +Representatives from five villages were there, chiefs were +shouting to their people, and when Dr. Mackay and his students +arrived, the place was all noise and confusion. He was puzzled. +It almost looked as if there was to be a riot, though the voices +did not sound angry. + +He climbed up on a pile of rubbish and his face shone clear in +the light of the flaring torches. His voice rang out loud and +commanding above the tumult. + +"What is this noise about?" he cried. "Is there a difference of +opinion among you as to whether you shall worship these poor toys +of wood and stone, or the true God who is your Father?" + +He paused and as if from one man came back the answer in a mighty +shout: + +"No, we will worship the true God!" + +The tumult had been one of enthusiasm and not of dispute! + +Kai Bok-su's heart gave a great bound. For a moment he could not +speak. He who had so often stood up fearless and bold before a +raging heathen mob, now faltered before this sea of eager faces, +upturned to him. It seemed too good to be true that all this +crowd, representing five villages, was anxious to become +followers of the God of heaven. His voice grew steady at last, +and. standing up there in the flickering torchlight he told those +children of the plain what it meant to be a follower of Jesus +Christ. It was a late hour when the meeting broke up, but even +then Dr. Mackay could not go to bed. Never since the day that A +Hoa, his first convert, had accepted Jesus Christ as his Savior, +had he felt such joy, and all night he walked up and down in +front of the preacher's house, unable to sleep for the +thankfulness to God that surged in his heart. + +Morning brought a wonderful day for the Ki-lai plain. It was like +a day when freedom from slavery was announced. Had there been +bells in the village they would certainly have been rung. But joy +bells were ringing in every heart. Nobody could work all day. The +rice-fields and the shops and the pottery works lay idle. There +was but one business to do that day, and that was to get rid of +their idols. + +Early in the morning the mayor of the place, or the headman as he +was called, came to the house to invite the missionary and his +party to join him. Behind him walked four big boys, carrying two +large wicker baskets, hanging from poles across their shoulders; +and behind them came the whole village, men, women, and children, +their faces shining with a new joy. The procession moved along +from house to house. At every place it stopped and out from the +home were carried idols, ancestral tablets, mock-money, flags, +incense sticks, and all the stuff used in idol worship. These +were all emptied into the baskets carried by the boys. When even +the temple had been ransacked and the work of clearing out the +idols in the village was finished, the procession moved on to the +next hamlet. The villages were very near each other, so the +journey was not wearisome; and at last when every vestige of the +old idolatrous life had been taken from the homes of five +villages, the happy crowd marched back to the first village. +There was a large courtyard near the temple and here the +procession halted. The boys dropped their well-filled baskets, +and their contents were piled in the center of the court. The +people gathered about the heap and with shouts of joy set fire to +these signs of their lifelong slavery. Soon the pile was blazing +and crackling, and all the people, even the chiefs of the +villages, vied with each other in burning up the idols they had +so lately besought for blessings. + +And then they turned toward the heathen temple and delivered it +over to Kai Bok-su for a chapel in which he and his students +might preach the gospel. + +And so the temple was lighted up for a new kind of worship. It +had been used for worship many, many times before, but oh, how +different it was this time! Instead of coming in fear of demons, +dread of their gods' anger, and determination to cheat them if +possible, these poor folk crowded into the new-old temple with +light, happy hearts, as children coming to their Father. And was +not God their Father, only they had not known him before? + +The heathen temple was dedicated to the worship of the true God +by singing the old but always new, one hundredth Psalm. The +Lam-si-hoan were not very good singers. They had not much idea of +tun,e. They had less idea of just when to start, and there was +very little to be said about the harmony of those hundreds of +voices. But in spite of it all, Kai Bok-su had to confess that +never in the music of his homeland or in the more finished +harmonies of Europe, had he heard anything so grandly uplifting +as when those newly-freed people stood up in their idol temple +and with heart and soul and voice unitedly poured forth in +thunderous volume of praise the great command: + +All people that on earth do dwell, +Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice. + +For a whole week with his pony and groom, which were still his to +do with as he pleased, the busy missionary rode up and down this +plain, visiting the villages, preaching, and teaching the people +how to live as Jesus Christ their Savior had lived; for it was +necessary to impress upon their childlike minds that it would be +of no use to burn up the idols in their homes and temple unless +they also gave up the still more harmful idols in their hearts. + +But at last the day came when the pony had to be returned to its +owner and the missionary and his helpers must leave. It was a sad +day but a joyous one--the day that great visit came to an end. +Crowds of Christians, fain to keep him, followed him down to the +shore, and many kindly but reluctant hands shoved the little boat +out into the surf. And as the rowers sent it skimming out over +the great Pacific rollers, there rose from the beach the parting +hymn, the one that had dedicated the heathen temple to the +worship of the true God: + +All people that on earth do dwell, +Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice. + +and from the rowers and the missionaries in the boat, came back +the glad echo: + +Know that the Lord is God indeed +Without our aid he did us make. + +They were soon out of sight. The rowers pulled hard, but a stiff +northeaster straight from Japan was blowing against them, and +they made but little headway. Night came down, and they were +again skirting those dark cliffs, where, here and there, along +the narrow strip of sand, the night-fires of the savages flamed +out against the dark tangle of foliage. All night long the rowers +struggled against the wind. They were afraid to go out far for +the waves were wild, they dared not land, for, crueler than the +sea, the head-hunters waited for them on the shore. And so all +that night, taking turns with the rowers, the missionary and his +students toiled against the wind and wave. The dawn came up gray +and stormy, and they were still tossing about among the white +billows. No one had touched food for twenty-four hours. They had +rice in the boat, but there was no place where they dared land to +have it cooked. There was nothing to do but to pull, pull at the +oars, and a weary task it seemed, for the boat appeared to make +little headway, and the rowers barely succeeded in keeping her +from being dashed upon the rocks. + +They were becoming almost too weak to keep any control over their +boat, when about three o'clock in the afternoon they managed. to +round a point. There before them curved a beautiful bay. Behind +it and on both sides arose a perpendicular wall several hundred +feet high. At its foot stretched a narrow sandy beach. It was an +ideal spot, secure from savages both by land and sea. A shout of +encouragement from Kai Bok-su was the one thing needed. Tired +arms and aching backs bent to the oars for one last effort, and +when the boat swept up on the sandy beach every one uttered a +heartfelt prayer of thankfulness to the Father who had provided +this little haven in a time of such distress. + +The rest of the journey was made safely, and just forty days +after their departure the four missionaries returned, worn out, +to Tamsui. + + +CHAPTER XIII. THE LAND OCCUPIED + +But Kai Bok-su had no sooner returned than he was off again. He +was not one of that sort who could settle down after an +achievement, content to rest for a little. He seemed to forget +all about what had been done and was "up and at it again." If he +"did not know when he was beaten," neither did he seem to know +when he was successful; and like Alexander the Great he was +always sighing for new worlds to conquer, yes, and marching off +and conquering them too. + +But every time he returned to his work at Tamsui from one of +these tours, it was borne in upon him more forcibly every day +that his faithful assistant who was left in charge, could not +long shoulder his work. Mr. Jarnieson was fighting a losing +baffle with ill health. The terrible experiences during the +war year, the hard work, and the trying Formosan climate had all +combined against him. His brave spirit could not always sustain +the body that was growing gradually weaker, and one day, a dark, +sad day, the devoted soul was set free from the poor pain-racked +body. He had given eight years of hard, faithful work to the +study of the language and to the service of the Master in the +mission. Mrs. Jamieson returned to Canada, and once more Dr. +Mackay faced the work, unaided except by native preachers. But he +was not daunted even by this bereavement, for he always lived in +the perfect faith that God was on his side. + +And then, he had by this time three new assistants in the +mission-house on the bluff. They did not even guess that they +were any help to him, for they could never go with him on his +mission tours. But by their sweet merry ways and their joyous +welcome to father, when he returned, they did help him greatly, +and made his home-comings a delight. + +"How many did you baptize, father?" was baby George's inevitable +question on his father's return. For already the wise toddler had +learned something of the bitter enmity of the heathen world, and +knew that converts meant friends. Then father's home-coming meant +presents too, wonderful things, bows and arrows, rare curios for +the museum in the college, and, once, a pair of the funniest +monkeys in the world, which proved most entertaining playthings +for the little boy and his two sisters. Another time the father +brought home a young bear to keep the monkeys company, but they +were not at all polite to their guest, for they made poor bruin's +life miserable by teasing him. They would torment him until he +would stamp with rage. But he was not always badly used, for when +the three children would come out to feed him, he was very happy, +and he would show his pleasure by putting his head between his +paws and rolling over and over like a big ball of fur. And he +always seemed quite proud of his performance when his three +little keepers shrieked with laughter. + +The next year after Mr. Jamieson's death the empty mission-house +was once more filled. In September the Rev. Mr. William and Mrs. +Gauld sailed from Canada, and with their arrival Dr. Mackay took +new heart. + +The new missionaries had learned the language and their work was +well under way when the time came round once more for Dr. Mackay +to go back to Canada for a year's rest. This time there was quite +a little party went with him: his wife, their three children, and +Koa Kau, one of his students. + +Among those left to assist Mr. Gauld, there was none he relied +upon more than A boa. Mr. Gauld, at the close of his second +year's work, wrote of this fellow worker: "The longer and better +I know him, the more I can love him, trust his honesty, and +respect his judgment. He knows his own people, from the governor +of the island to the ragged opium-smoking beggar, and has +influence with them all." + +There were many others besides A Hoa to render the missionary +faithful help; among them Sun-a and Tan He, the latter pastor of +the church of Sin-tiam; and just because Kai Bok-su was away they +worked the harder, that he might receive a good report of them on +his return. + +The separation was longer this time, for Dr. Mackay wished to +send his children to school, and he decided that they would +remain in Canada two years. He was made Moderator of the General +Assembly, too, and the Church at home needed him to stir them up +to a greater desire to help those beyond the seas. + +While he was working and preaching in Canada, his heart turned +always to his beloved Formosa, and letters from the friends there +were among his greatest pleasures. A Hoa's of course, were doubly +welcome. Pastor Giam, the name by which he was now called, was +Mr. Gauld's right-hand helper in those days, and once he went +alone on a tour away to the eastern shore. While there he had an +adventure of which he wrote to Kai Bok-su. + +"The other morning while walking on the seashore I saw a +sailing-vessel slowly drifting shoreward and in danger of being +wrecked, for there was a fog and a heavy sea. I hastened back to +the chapel and beat the drum to call the villagers to worship. As +soon as it was over I asked converts and heathen to go in their +fishing-boats as quickly as possible and let the sailors know +they need not fear savages there, and if they wished to come +ashore a chapel would be given them to stay in. The whole crew +came ashore in the boats at once. I gave your old room to the +captain, his wife and child, and other accommodation to the rest. +I then hurried away to a mandarin and asked him to send men to +protect the ship." + +When Kai Bok-su read the story and remembered that, twenty-five +years earlier, the crew of that vessel would have been murdered +and their ship plundered, he exclaimed with joy, "Blessed +Christianity! Surely, + +Blessings abound where'er He reigns!" + +A Hoa had another tale to tell. One afternoon he had a strange +congregation in that little chapel. There were one hundred and +forty-six native converts and twenty-one Europeans. These were +made up of seven nationalities, British, American, French, +Danish, Turkish, Swiss, and Norwegian. Their ship was from +America and was bound for Hongkong with coal-oil. + +They were amazed at seeing a pretty, neat chapel away in this +wild, remote place, which they had always supposed was overrun by +head-hunters, and indeed it was just that little chapel that had +made the great change. These men now entered it and joined the +natives in worshiping the true God, where, only a few years +before, their blood would have stained the sands. + +A Hoa told them something of the great Kai Bok-su and the +struggles he had had with savages and other enemies, when he +first came to this region. The visitors were very much interested +and did not wonder that the name "Kai Bok-su" was held in such +reverence. When they left, the captain presented the little +chapel with a bell, a lamp, and a mirror which were on board his +ship. + +The long months of separation were rolling around, when something +happened that brought Kai Bok-su back to his island in great +haste. Once more war swept over Formosa. This time the trouble +was between China and Japan. The big Empire proved no match for +the clever Japanese, and everywhere China was forced to give in. + +One of the places which Japan set her affections on was Formosa. +She must have the Beautiful Isle and have it at once. China was +in no position to say no, so the Chinese envoy went on board a +Japanese vessel and sailed toward Formosa. When in sight of its +lovely mountains, without any ceremony he pointed to the land and +said, "There it is, take it." And that was how Formosa became a +province of Japan. At noon on May 26, 1895, the dragon flag of +China was hauled down from Formosan forts and the banner of Japan +was hoisted. + +Of course this was not done without a struggle. The Formosans +themselves fought hard, and in the fight the Christians came in +for times of trouble. So Kai Bok-su, hearirig that his +"valuables" were again in danger, set sail for Tamsui. + +When he arrived the war was practically over, but everywhere were +signs of strife. As soon as he was able, he took A Hoa and Koa +Kau and visited the chapels all over the country. Everywhere were +sights to make his heart very sad. The Japanese soldiers had used +many of the chapels for military stables, and they were in a +filthy state. At one place the native preacher was a prisoner, +the Japanese believing him to be a spy. At another village the +Christians sadly led their missionary out to a tea plantation and +showed him the place where their beloved pastor had been shot by +the Japanese soldiers. Mackay stood beside his grave, his heart +heavy with sorrow. + +But his courage never left him. The native Christians everywhere +forgot their woes in the great joy of seeing him once more; and +he joined them in a brave attempt to put things to rights once +more. The Japanese paid for all damages done by their soldiers +and in a short time the work was going on splendidly. + +"We have no fear," wrote Dr. Mackay. "The King of kings is +greater than Emperor or Mikado. He will rule and overrule all +things." + +His faith was rewarded, for when the troublous time was over, the +government of Japan proved better than that of China, and on the +whole the trial proved a blessing. + +Oxford College had been closed while Dr. Mackay was away, and the +girls' school had not been opened since the war commenced, for it +was not safe for the girls and women to leave their homes during +such disturbed times. But now both schools reopened, and again +Kai Bok-su with his cane and his book and his crowd of students +could be seen going up to the lecture halls, or away out on the +Formosan roads. + +He had conquered so often, overcome such tremendous obstacles, +and faced unffinchingly so many awful dangers for the sake of his +converts, that it was no wonder that they adored him, their +feeling amounting almost to worship. "Kai Bok-su says it must be +so" was sufficient to compel any one in the north Formosa Church +to do what was required. Surely never before was a man so +wonderfully rewarded in this life. He had given up all he +possessed for the glory of his Master and he had his full +compensation. + +A few happy years sped round. The time for him to go back home +again was drawing near when there came the first hint that he +might soon be called on a longer furlough than he would have in +Canada. + +At first, when the dread suspicion began to be whispered in the +halls of Oxford College and in the chapel gatherings throughout +the country, people refused to believe it. Kai Bok-su ill? No, +no, it was only the malaria, and he always arose from that and +went about again. It could not be serious. + +But in spite of the fact that loving hearts refused to accept it, +there was no use denying the sad fact. There was something wrong +with Kai Bok-su. For months his voice had been growing weaker, +the doctors had examined his throat, and attended him, but it was +all of no use. At last he could not speak at all, but wrote his +words on a slate. + +And everywhere in north Formosa, converts and students and +preachers watched and waited and prayed most fervently that he +might soon recover. Those who lived in Tamsui whispered to each +other in tones of dread, as they watched him come and go with +slower steps than they had been accustomed to see. + +"He will be well next month, "they would say hopefully, or, "He +will look like himself when the rains dry." But little by little +the conviction grew that the beloved missionary was seriously +ill, and a great gloom settled all over north Formosa. There was +a little gleam of joy when the doctor in Tamsui advised him +finally to go to Hongkong and see a specialist He went, leaving +many loving hearts waiting anxiously between hope and fear to +hear what the doctors would say. And prayers went up night and +day from those who loved him. From the heart-broken wife in the +lonely house on the bluff to the farthest-off convert on the +Ki-lai plain, every Christian on the island, even those in the +south Formosa mission, prayed that the useful life might be +spared. + +But God had other and greater plans for Kai Bok-su. He came back +from Hongkong, and the fist look at his pale face told the +dreaded truth. The shadow of death lay on it. + +Those were heart-breaking days in north Formosa. From all sides +came such messages of devotion that it seemed as if the +passionate love of his followers must hold him back. But a +stronger love was calling him on. And one bright June day, in +1901, when the green mountainsides, the blue rivers, and the +waving rice-fields of Formosa lay smiling in the sun, Kai Bok-su +heard once more that call that had brought him so far from home. +Once more he obeyed, and he opened his eyes on a new glory +greater than any of which he had ever dreamed. The task had been +a hard one. The "big stone" had been stubborn, but it had been +broken, and not long after the noontide of his life the tired +worker was called home. + +They laid his poor, worn body up on the hill above the river, +beside the bodies of the Christians he had loved so well. And the +soft Formosan grass grew over his grave, the winds roared about +it, and the river and the sea sang his requiem. + +Gallant Kai Bok-su! As he rests up there on his wind-swept +height, there are hearts in the valleys and on the plains of his +beloved Formosa and in his far-off native land that are aching +for him. And sometimes to these last comes the question "Was it +well?" Was it well that he should wear out that splendid life in +such desperate toil among heathen that hated and reviled him? And +from every part of north Formosa, sounding on the wind, comes +many an answer. + +Up from the damp rice-fields, where the farmer goes to and fro in +the gray dawn, arises a song: + +I'm not ashamed to own my Lord, +Or to defend his cause. + +Far away on the mountainside, the once savage mother draws her +little one to her and teaches him, not the old lesson of +bloodshed, but the older one of love and kindness, and together +they croon: + +Jesus loves me, this I know, +For the Bible tells me so. + +And up from scores of chapels dotting the land, comes the sound +of the old, old story of Jesus and his love, preached by native +Formosans, and from the thousand tongues of their congregations +soars upward the Psalm: + +All people that on earth do dwell, +Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice! + +These all unite in one great harmony, replying, "It is well!" + +But is it well with the work? What of his Beautiful Island, now +that Kai Bok-su has left for a greater work in a more beautiful +land? Yes, it is well also with Formosa. The work goes on. + +There are two thousand, one hundred members now in the four +organized congregations, and over fifty mission stations and +outstations. But better still there are in addition twenty-two +hundred who have forsaken their idols and are being trained to +become church-members. The Formosa Church out of its poverty +gives liberally too. In 1911 they contributed more than +thirtyfive hundred dollars to Christian work. "Every year," +writes Mr. Jack, "a special collection is taken by the Church for +the work among the Ami--the aborigines of the Ki-lai plain." This +is the foreign mission of the north Formosa Church. + +A Hoa lately followed his pastor to the home above, but many +others remain. Mr. Gauld and his family are still there, in the +front of the battle, and with him is a fine corps of soldiers, +comprising fifty-nine native and several Canadian missionaries, +inchiding the Rev. Dr. J. Y. Ferguson and his wife, the Rev. +Milton Jack and Mrs. Jack, the Rev. and Mrs. Duncan MacLeod, Miss +J. M. Kinney, Miss Hannah Connell, Miss Mabel G. Clazie, and Miss +Lily Adair. Miss Isabelle J. Elliott, a graduate nurse, and +deaconess, will join the staff shortly, and a few others will be +sent when secured, in order that the force may be sufficient to +evangelize the million people in north Formosa. + +Mrs. Mackay and her two daughters, Helen and Mary, the latter +having married native preachers, Koa Kau and Tan He, are keeping +up the work that husband and father left. A new hospital is being +built under Dr. Ferguson, and plans are on foot for new school +and college buildings. + +And the latest arrived missionary? What of him? Why his name is +George Mackay, and he has just sailed from Canada as the first +Mackay sailed forty-one years earlier. He has been nine years in +Canada and the United States, at school and college, and now with +his Canadian wife, has gone back to his native land. Yes, Kai +Bok-su's son has gone out to carry on his father's work, and +Formosa has welcomed him as no other missionary has been welcomed +since Kai Bok-su's day. + +But these are not all. From far across the sea, in the land where +Kai Bok-su lived his boyhood days, comes a voice. It is the echo +from the hearts of other boys, who have read his noble life. And +their answer is, "We too will go out, as he went, and fight and +win!" + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg Etext of The Black-Bearded Barbarian, by Keith + diff --git a/old/bbbrb09.zip b/old/bbbrb09.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8c56fd5 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/bbbrb09.zip diff --git a/old/bbbrb10.txt b/old/bbbrb10.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9148a62 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/bbbrb10.txt @@ -0,0 +1,5368 @@ +Project Gutenberg Etext of The Black-Bearded Barbarian, by Keith + + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world, be sure to check +the copyright laws for your country before posting these files!! + +Please take a look at the important information in this header. +We encourage you to keep this file on your own disk, keeping an +electronic path open for the next readers. Do not remove this. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**Etexts Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*These Etexts Prepared By Hundreds of Volunteers and Donations* + +Information on contacting Project Gutenberg to get Etexts, and +further information is included below. We need your donations. + + +The Black-Bearded Barbarian + +by Marian Keith + +May, 1999 [Etext #1759] +[Most recently updated June 24, 2002] + + +Project Gutenberg Etext of The Black-Bearded Barbarian, by Keith +******This file should be named bbbrb10.txt or bbbrb010zip****** + +Corrected EDITIONS of our etexts get a new NUMBER, bbbrb11.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, bbbrb10a.txt + + +Project Gutenberg Etexts are usually created from multiple editions, +all of which are in the Public Domain in the United States, unless a +copyright notice is included. Therefore, we usually do NOT keep any +of these books in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +We are now trying to release all our books one month in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. + +Please note: neither this list nor its contents are final till +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg Etexts is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. To be sure you have an +up to date first edition [xxxxx10x.xxx] please check file sizes +in the first week of the next month. Since our ftp program has +a bug in it that scrambles the date [tried to fix and failed] a +look at the file size will have to do, but we will try to see a +new copy has at least one byte more or less. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any etext selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. This +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If our value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour this year as we release thirty-six text +files per month, or 432 more Etexts in 1999 for a total of 2000+ +If these reach just 10% of the computerized population, then the +total should reach over 200 billion Etexts given away this year. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away One Trillion Etext +Files by December 31, 2001. [10,000 x 100,000,000 = 1 Trillion] +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only ~5% of the present number of computer users. + +At our revised rates of production, we will reach only one-third +of that goal by the end of 2001, or about 3,333 Etexts unless we +manage to get some real funding; currently our funding is mostly +from Michael Hart's salary at Carnegie-Mellon University, and an +assortment of sporadic gifts; this salary is only good for a few +more years, so we are looking for something to replace it, as we +don't want Project Gutenberg to be so dependent on one person. + +We need your donations more than ever! + + +All donations should be made to "Project Gutenberg/CMU": and are +tax deductible to the extent allowable by law. (CMU = Carnegie- +Mellon University). + +For these and other matters, please mail to: + +Project Gutenberg +P. O. Box 2782 +Champaign, IL 61825 + +When all other email fails. . .try our Executive Director: +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> +hart@pobox.com forwards to hart@prairienet.org and archive.org +if your mail bounces from archive.org, I will still see it, if +it bounces from prairienet.org, better resend later on. . . . + +We would prefer to send you this information by email. + +****** + +To access Project Gutenberg etexts, use any Web browser +to view http://promo.net/pg. This site lists Etexts by +author and by title, and includes information about how +to get involved with Project Gutenberg. You could also +download our past Newsletters, or subscribe here. This +is one of our major sites, please email hart@pobox.com, +for a more complete list of our various sites. + +To go directly to the etext collections, use FTP or any +Web browser to visit a Project Gutenberg mirror (mirror +sites are available on 7 continents; mirrors are listed +at http://promo.net/pg). + +Mac users, do NOT point and click, typing works better. + +Example FTP session: + +ftp sunsite.unc.edu +login: anonymous +password: your@login +cd pub/docs/books/gutenberg +cd etext90 through etext99 +dir [to see files] +get or mget [to get files. . .set bin for zip files] +GET GUTINDEX.?? [to get a year's listing of books, e.g., GUTINDEX.99] +GET GUTINDEX.ALL [to get a listing of ALL books] + +*** + +**Information prepared by the Project Gutenberg legal advisor** + +(Three Pages) + + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this etext, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you can distribute copies of this etext if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS ETEXT +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +etext, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this etext by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this etext on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM ETEXTS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG- +tm etexts, is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor +Michael S. Hart through the Project Gutenberg Association at +Carnegie-Mellon University (the "Project"). Among other +things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this etext +under the Project's "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +To create these etexts, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's etexts and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other etext medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] the Project (and any other party you may receive this +etext from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext) disclaims all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this etext within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS ETEXT IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE ETEXT OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold the Project, its directors, +officers, members and agents harmless from all liability, cost +and expense, including legal fees, that arise directly or +indirectly from any of the following that you do or cause: +[1] distribution of this etext, [2] alteration, modification, +or addition to the etext, or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this etext electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + etext or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this etext in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word pro- + cessing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The etext, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The etext may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the etext (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + etext in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the etext refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Project of 20% of the + net profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Association/Carnegie-Mellon + University" within the 60 days following each + date you prepare (or were legally required to prepare) + your annual (or equivalent periodic) tax return. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +The Project gratefully accepts contributions in money, time, +scanning machines, OCR software, public domain etexts, royalty +free copyright licenses, and every other sort of contribution +you can think of. Money should be paid to "Project Gutenberg +Association / Carnegie-Mellon University". + +*END*THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS*Ver.04.29.93*END* + + + + + +Etext scanned by Dianne Bean of Phoenix, Arizona. + + + + + +THE BLACK BEARDED BARBARIAN + +<new> FOREWORD + +This is a very little story of a very great man. It contains only +a few of the wonderful adventures he met, and the splendid deeds +he did. Most of them may never be written. Perhaps they may be +lived again in the lives of some of the readers. Who knows? + +Even this brief account of Dr. Mackay's life could not have been +written had it not been for the help of many kind friends. The +Rev. R.P. Mackay, D.D., of Toronto, Canada, who visited Formosa, +and met many of the people mentioned in this story, gave me great +assistance. Mr. Alexander Mackay, brother of the hero of this +book, was very kind in telling many interesting tales of boyhood +in Zorra. My most untiring and painstaking assistant has been the +Rev. J. B. Fraser, M.D., of Annan, Ontario, formerly of Formosa. +You will find him among the many heroes of this story. To his +kind and careful oversight is due much that gives this little +book any value as a history. The life of Dr. Mackay in Far From +Formosa, compiled by Dr. J. A. MacDonald, editor of the Toronto +Globe, has been my chief source of information. Indeed this story +has been taken almost entirely from its pages, and owes Dr. +MacDonald much thanks. + +And now there is just one more favor it asks, that you who read +it may in some measure strive to catch the great spirit of its +hero. + +Marian Keith. +Toronto, Canada, April 24, 1912. + + + +THE BLACK BEARDED BARBARIAN[1] + +[1] The name by which George Leslie Mackay was known among the +Chinese of north Formosa. + +CHAPTER I. SPLITTING ROCKS + +Up in the stony pasture-field behind the barn the boys had been +working all the long afternoon. Nearly all, that is, for, being +boys, they had managed to mix a good deal of fun with their +labor. But now they were tired of both work and play, and +wondered audibly, many times over, why they were not yet called +home to supper. + +The work really belonged to the Mackay boys, but, like Tom +Sawyer, they had made it so attractive that several volunteers +had come to their aid. Their father was putting up a new stone +house, near the old one down there behind the orchard, and the +two youngest of the family had been put at the task of breaking +the largest stones in the field. + +It meant only to drag some underbrush and wood from the forest +skirting the farm, pile them on the stones, set fire to them, and +let the heat do the rest. It had been grand sport at first, they +all voted, better than playing shinny, and almost as good as +going fishing. In fact it was a kind of free picnic, where one +could play at Indians all day long. But as the day wore on, the +picnic idea had languished, and the stone-breaking grew more and +more to resemble hard work. + +The warm spring sunset had begun to color the western sky; the +meadow-larks had gone to bed, and the stone-breakers were tired +and ravenously hungry--as hungry as only wolves or country boys +can be. The visitors suggested that they ought to be going home. +"Hold on, Danny, just till this one breaks," said the older +Mackay boy, as he set a burning stick to a new pile of brush. + +"This'll be a dandy, and it's the last, too. They're sure to call +us to supper before we've time to do another." + +The new fire, roaring and snapping, sending up showers of sparks +and filling the air with the sweet odor of burning cedar, proved +too alluring to be left. The company squatted on the ground +before it, hugging their knees and watching the blue column of +smoke go straight up into the colored sky. It suggested a +camp-fire in war times, and each boy began to tell what great and +daring deeds he intended to perform when he became a man. + +Jimmy, one of the visitors, who had been most enthusiastic over +the picnic side of the day's work, announced that he was going to +be a sailor. He would command a fleet on the high seas, so he +would, and capture pirates, and grow fabulously wealthy on +prize-money. Danny, who was also a guest, declared his purpose +one day to lead a band of rough riders to the Western plains, +where he would kill Indians, and escape fearful deaths by the +narrowest hairbreadth. + +"Mebbe I'm goin' to be Premier of Canada, some day," said one +youngster, poking his bare toes as near as he dared to the +flames. + +There were hoots of derision. This was entirely too tame to be +even considered as a career. + +"And what are you going to be, G. L.?" inquired the biggest boy +of the smallest. + +The others looked at the little fellow and laughed. George Mackay +was the youngest of the group, and was a small wiry youngster +with a pair of flashing eyes lighting up his thin little face. He +seemed far too small and insignificant to even think about a +career. But for all the difference in their size and age the +bigger boys treated little George with a good deal of respect. +For, somehow, he never failed to do what he set out to do. He +always won at races, he was never anywhere but at the head of his +class, he was never known to be afraid of anything in field or +forest or school ground, he was the hardest worker at home or at +school, and by sheer pluck he managed to do everything that boys +bigger and older and stronger could do. + +So when Danny asked, "And what are you going to be, G. L.?" +though the boys laughed at the small thin little body, they +respected the daring spirit it held, and listened for his answer. + +"He's goin' to be a giant, and go off with a show," cried one, +and they all laughed again. + +Little G. L. laughed too, but he did not say what he intended to +do when he grew big. Down in his heart he held a far greater +ambition than the others dreamed of. It was too great to be +told--so great he scarcely knew what it was himself. So he only +shook his small head and closed his lips tightly, and the rest +forgot him and chattered on. + +Away beyond the dark woods, the sunset shone red and gold between +the black tree trunks. The little boy gazed at it wonderingly. +The sight of those morning and evening glories always stirred his +child's soul, and made him long to go away--away, he knew not +where--to do great and glorious deeds. The Mackay boys' +grandfather had fought at Waterloo, and little George Leslie, the +youngest of six, had heard many, many tales of that gallant +struggle, and every time they had been told him he had silently +resolved that, some day, he too would do just such brave deeds as +his grandfather had done. + +As the boys talked on, and the little fellow gazed at the sunset +and dreamed, the big stone cracked in two, the fire died down, +and still there came no welcome call to supper from any of the +farmhouses in sight. The Mackay boys had been trained in a fine +old-fashioned Canadian home, and did not dream of quitting work +until they were summoned. But the visitors were merely visitors, +and could go home when they liked. The future admiral of the +pirate-killing fleet declared he must go and get supper, or he'd +eat the grass, he was so hungry. The coming Premier of Canada and +the Indian-slayer agreed with him, and they all jumped the fence, +and went whooping away over the soft brown fields toward home. + +There was just one big stone left. It was a huge boulder, four +feet across. + +"We'll never get enough wood to crack that, G. L.," declared his +brother. "It just can't be done." + +But little George answered just as any one who knew his +determination would have expected. In school he astonished his +teacher by learning everything at a tremendous rate, but there +was one small word he refused to learn--the little word "can't." +His bright eyes flashed, now, at the sound of it. He jumped upon +the big stone, and clenched his fist. + +"It's GOT to be broken!" he cried. "I WON'T let it beat me." He +leaped down, and away he ran toward the woods. His brother caught +his spirit, and ran too. They forgot they were both tired and +hungry. They seized a big limb of a fallen tree and dragged it +across the field. They chopped it into pieces, and piled it high +with plenty of brush, upon the big stone. In a few minutes it was +all in a splendid blaze, leaping and crackling, and sending the +boys' long shadows far across the field. + +The fire grew fiercer and hotter, and suddenly the big boulder +cracked in four pieces, as neatly as though it had been slashed +by a giant's sword. Little G. L. danced around it, and laughed +triumphantly. The next moment there came the welcome "hoo-hoo" +from the house behind the orchard, and away the two scampered +down the hill toward home and supper. + +When the day's work of the farmhouse had been finished, the +Mackay family gathered about the fire, for the spring evening was +chilly. George Leslie sat near his mother, his face full of deep +thought. It was the hour for family worship, and always at this +time he felt most keenly that longing to do something great and +glorious. Tonight his father read of a Man who was sending out +his army to conquer the world. It was only a little army, just +twelve men, but they knew their Leader had more power than all +the soldiers of the world. And they were not afraid, though he +said, "Behold, I send you forth as sheep in the midst of wolves." +For he added, "Fear ye not," for he would march before them, and +they would be sure of victory. + +The little boy listened with all his might. He did everything +that way. Surely this was a story of great and glorious deeds, +even better than Waterloo, he felt. And there came to his heart a +great longing to go out and fight wrong and put down evil as +these men had done. He did not know that the longing was the +voice of the great King calling his young knight to go out and +"Live pure, speak true, right wrong, follow the King." + +But there came a day when he did understand, and on that day he +was ready to obey. + +When bedtime came the boys were asked if they had finished their +work, and the story of the last big stone was told. "G. L. would +not leave it," the brother explained. The father looked smilingly +at little G. L. who still sat, dangling his short legs from his +chair, and studying the fire. + +He spoke to his wife in Gaelic. "Perhaps the lad will be called +to break a great rock some day. The Lord grant he may do it." + +The boy looked up wonderingly. He understood Gaelic as well as +English, but he did not comprehend his father's words. He had no +idea they were prophetic, and that away on the other side of the +world, in a land his geography lessons had not yet touched, there +stood a great rock, ugly and hard and grim, which he was one day +to be called upon to break. + + + +CHAPTER II. A VOYAGE OF DISCOVERY + +The steamship America, bound for Hongkong, was leaving the dock +at San Francisco. All was bustle and noise and stir. Friends +called a last farewell from the deck, handkerchiefs waved, many +of them wet with tears. The long boom of a gun roared out over +the harbor, a bell rang, and the signal was given. Up came the +anchor, and slowly and with dignity the great vessel moved out +through the Golden Gate into the wide Pacific. + +Crowds stood on the deck to get a last glimpse of home and loved +ones, and to wave to friends as long as they could be +distinguished. There was one young man who stood apart from the +crowd, and who did not wave farewell to any one. He had come on +board with a couple of men, but they had gone back to the dock, +and were lost in the crowd. He seemed entirely alone. He leaned +against the deck-railing and gazed intently over the widening +strip of tumbling wafers to the city on the shore. But he did not +see it. Instead, he saw a Canadian farmhouse, a garden and +orchard, and gently sloping meadows hedged in by forest. And up +behind the barn he saw a stony field, where long ago he and his +brother and the neighbor boys had broken the stones for the new +house. + +His quick movements, his slim, straight figure, and his bright, +piercing eyes showed he was the same boy who had broken the big +rock in the pasture-field long before. Just the same boy, only +bigger, and more man than boy now, for he wore an air of command +and his thin keen face bore a beard, a deep black, like his hair. +And now he was going away, as he had longed to go, when he was a +boy, and ahead of him lay the big frowning rock, which he must +either break or be broken upon. + +He had learned many things since those days when he had scampered +barefoot over the fields, or down the road to school. He had been +to college in Toronto, in Princeton, and away over in Edinburgh, +in the old homeland where his father and mother were born. And +all through his life that call to go and do great deeds for the +King had come again and again. He had determined to obey it when +he was but a little lad at school. He had encountered many big +stones in his way, which he had to break, before he could go on. +But the biggest stone of all lay across his path when college was +over, and he was ready and anxious to go away as a missionary. +The Presbyterian Church of Canada had never yet sent out a +missionary to a foreign land, and some of the good old men bade +George Mackay stay at home and preach the gospel there. But as +usual he conquered. Every one saw he would be a great missionary +if he were only given a chance. At last the General Assembly gave +its consent, and now, in spite of all stones in the way, here he +was, bound for China, and ready to do anything the King +commanded. Land was beginning to fade away into a gray mist, the +November wind was damp and chill, he turned and went down to his +stateroom. He sat down on his little steamer trunk, and for the +first time the utter loneliness and the uncertainty of this +voyage came over him. He took up his Bible and turned to the +fly-leaf. There he read the inscription: + + Presented to + REV. G. L. MACKAY + +First missionary of the Canadian Presbyterian Church to China, by +the Foreign Mission Committee, as a parting token of their +esteem, when about to leave his native land for the sphere of his +future labors among the heathen. + WILLIAM MACLAREN, Convener. + + Ottawa, 9th October, 1871. + Matthew xxviii: 18-20. Psalm cxxi + +It was a moment of severe trial to the young soldier. But he +turned to the Psalm marked on the fly-leaf of his Bible, and he +read it again and again. + +"My help cometh from the Lord which made heaven and earth.". . . + +"The Lord is thy keeper: the Lord is thy shade upon thy right +hand." + +"The sun shall not smite thee by day, nor the moon by night." + +The beautiful words gave him comfort. Homesickness, loneliness, +and fears for the future all vanished. He was going out to an +unknown land where dangers and perhaps death awaited him, but the +Lord would be his keeper and nothing could harm him. + +Twenty-six days on the Pacific! And a stormy voyage it was, for +the Pacific does not always live up to her beautiful name, and +she tossed the America about in a shocking manner. But the voyage +did not seem long to George Mackay. There were other missionaries +on board with whom he had become acquainted, and he had long +delightful talks with them and they taught him many things about +his new work. He was the same busy G. L. he had been when a boy; +always working, working, and he did not waste a moment on the +voyage. There was a fine library on the ship and he studied the +books on China until he knew more about the religion of that +country than did many of the Chinese themselves. + +One day, as he was poring over a Chinese history, some one called +him hastily to come on deck. He threw down his book and ran +up-stairs. The whole ship was in a joyous commotion. His friend +pointed toward the horizon, and away off there against the sky +stood the top of a snow-capped peak--Fujiyama!--the majestic, +sacred mountain of Japan! + +It was a welcome sight, after the long ocean voyage, and the +hours they lay in Yokahama harbor were full of enjoyment. Every +sight was thrilling and strange to young Mackay's Western eyes. +The harbor fairly swarmed with noisy, shouting, chattering +Japanese boatmen. He wondered why they seemed so familiar, until +it suddenly dawned on him that their queer rice-straw coats made +them look like a swarm of Robinson Crusoes who had just been +rescued from their islands. + +When he landed he found things still funnier. The streets were +noisier than the harbor. Through them rolled large heavy wooden +carts, pulled and pushed by men, with much grunting and groaning. +Past him whirled what looked like overgrown baby carriages, also +pulled by men, and each containing a big grown-up human baby. It +was all so pretty too, and so enchanting that the young +missionary would fain have remained there. But China was still +farther on, so when the America again set sail, he was on board. + +Away they sailed farther and farther east, or was it west? He +often asked himself that question in some amusement as they +approached the coast of China. They entered a long winding +channel and steamed this way and that until one day they sailed +into a fine broad harbor with a magnificent city rising far up +the steep sides of a hill. It was an Oriental city, and therefore +strange to the young traveller. But for all that there seemed +something familiar in the fine European buildings that lined the +streets, and something still more homelike in that which floated +high above them--something that brought a thrill to the heart of +the young Canadian--the red-crossed banner of Britain! + +It was Hongkong, the great British port of the East, and here he +decided to land. No sooner had the travelers touched the dock, +than they were surrounded by a yelling, jostling crowd of Chinese +coolies, all shouting in an outlandish gibberish for the +privilege of carrying the Barbarians' baggage. A group gathered +round Mackay, and in their eagerness began hammering each other +with bamboo poles. He was well-nigh bewildered, when above the +din sounded the welcome music of an English voice. + +"Are you Mackay from Canada?" + +He whirled round joyfully. It was Dr. E. J. Eitel, a missionary +from England. He had been told that the young Canadian would +arrive on the America and was there to welcome him. + +Although the Canadian Presbyterian Church had as yet sent out no +missionaries to a foreign land, the Presbyterian Church of +England had many scattered over China. They were all hoping that +the new recruit would join them, and invited him to visit +different mission stations, and see where he would like to +settle. + +So he remained that night in Hongkong, as Dr. Eitel's guest, and +the next morning he took a steamer for Canton. Here he was met on +the pier by an old fellow student of Princeton University, and +the two old college friends had a grand reunion. He returned to +Hongkong shortly, and next visited Swatow. As they sailed into +the harbor, he noticed two Englishmen rowing out toward them in a +sampan.* No sooner had the ship's ladder been lowered, than the +two sprang out of their boat and clambered quickly on deck. To +Mackay's amazement, one of them called out, "Is Mackay of Canada +on board?" + +* A Chinese boat from twelve to fifteen feet long, covered with a +house. + +"Mackay of Canada," sprang forward delighted, and found his two +new friends to be Mr. Hobson of the Chinese imperial customs, and +Dr. Thompson of the English Presbyterian mission in Swatow. + +The missionaries here gave the stranger a warm welcome. At every +place he had visited there had awaited him a cordial invitation +to stay and work. And now at Swatow he was urged to settle down +and help them. There was plenty to be done, and they would be +delighted to have his help. + +But for some reason, Mackay scarcely knew why himself, he wanted +to see another place. + +Away off the southeastern coast of China lies a large island +called Formosa. It is separated from the mainland by a body of +water called the Formosa Channel. This is in some places eighty +miles wide, in others almost two hundred. Mackay had often heard +of Formosa even before coming to China, and knew it was famed for +its beauty. + +Even its name shows this. Long, long years before, some +navigators from Portugal sailed to this beautiful island. They +had stood on the deck of their ship as they approached it, and +were amazed at its loveliness. They saw lofty green mountains +piercing the clouds. They saw silvery cascades tumbling down +their sides, flashing in the sunlight, and, below, terraced +plains sloping down to the sea, covered with waving bamboo or +with little water-covered rice-fields. It was all so delightful +that no wonder they cried, + +"Illha Formosa! Illha Formosa!" + +"Beautiful Isle! Beautiful Isle." Since that day the "Beautiful +Isle," perhaps the most charming in all the world, has been +called Formosa. + +And, somehow, Mackay longed to see this Beautiful Isle before he +decided where he was going to preach the gospel. And so when the +kind friends at Swatow said, "Stay and work with us," he always +answered, "I must first see Formosa." + +So, one day, he sailed away from the mainland toward the +Beautiful Isle. He landed at Takow in the south of the island, +just about Christmas-time. But Formosa was green, the weather was +hot, and he could scarcely believe that, at home in Oxford +county, Ontario, they were flying over the snow to the music of +sleigh-bells. On New Year's day he met a missionary of this south +Formosa field, named Dr. Ritchie. He belonged to the Presbyterian +Church of England, which had a fine mission there. For nearly a +month Mackay visited with him and studied the language. + +And while he visited and worked there the missionaries told him +of the northern part of the island. No person was there to tell +all those crowded cities of Jesus Christ and His love. It would +be lonely for him there, it would be terribly hard work, but it +would be a grand thing to lay the foundations, to be the first to +tell those people the "good news," the young missionary thought. +And, one day, he looked up from the Chinese book he was studying +and said to Dr. Ritchie: + +"I have decided to settle in north Formosa." + +And Dr. Ritchie's quick answer was: + +"God bless you, Mackay." + +As soon as the decision was made, another missionary, Dr. +Dickson, who was with Mr. Ritchie, decided to go to north Formosa +with the young man, and show him over the ground. So, early in +the month of March in the year 1872, the three men set off by +steamship to sail for Tamsui, a port in north Formosa. They were +two days making the voyage, and a tropical storm pitched the +small vessel hither and thither, so that they were very much +relieved when they sailed up to the mouth of the Tamsui river. + +It was low tide and a bare sand-bar stretched across the mouth of +the harbor, so the anchor was dropped, and they waited until the +tide should cover the bar, and allow them to sail in. + +This wait gave the travellers a fine opportunity to see the +country. The view from this harbor of the "Beautiful Island" was +an enchanting one. Before them, toward the east, rose tier upon +tier of magnificent mountains, stretching north and south. Down +their sloping sides tumbled sparkling cascades and here and there +patches of bright green showed where there were tea plantations. +Farther down were stretches of grass and groves of lovely +feathery bamboo. And between these groves stretched what seemed +to be little silvery lakes, with the reflection of the great +mountains in them. They were really the famous rice-fields of +Formosa, at this time of the year all under water. There were no +fences round their little lake-fields. They were of all shapes +and sizes, and were divided from each other by little green +fringed dykes or walls. Each row of fields was lower than the +last until they came right down to the sea-level, and all lay +blue and smiling in the blazing sunlight. + +As the young missionary stood spellbound, gazing over the lovely, +fairylike scene, Mr. Ritchie touched his arm. + +"This is your parish, Mackay," he whispered smilingly. + +And then for the first time since he had started on his long, +long journey, the young missionary felt his spirit at peace. The +restlessness that had driven him on from one Chinese port to +another was gone. This was indeed HIS parish. + +Suddenly out swung a signal; the tide had risen. Up came the +anchor, and away they glided over the now submerged sand-bar into +the harbor. + +A nearer view showed greater charms in the Beautiful Isle. On the +south, at their right, lay the great Quan Yin mountain, towering +seventeen hundred feet above them, clothed in tall grass and +groves of bamboo, banyan, and fir trees of every conceivable +shade of green. Nestling at its feet were little villages almost +buried in trees. Slowly the ship drifted along, passing, here a +queer fishing village close to the sandy shore, yonder a +light-house, there a battered Chinese fort rising from the top of +a hill. + +And now Tamsui came in sight--the new home of the young +missionary. It seemed to him that it was the prettiest and the +dirtiest place he had ever seen. The town lay along the bank of +the river at the foot of a hill. This bluff rose abruptly behind +it to a height of two hundred feet. On its face stood a +queer-looking building. It was red in color, solid and weather +worn, and above it floated the grand old flag of Britain. + +"That's an old Dutch fort," explained Mr. Ritchie, "left there +since they were in the island. It is the British consulate now. +There, next to it, is the consul's residence." + +It was a handsome house, just below the fort, and surrounded by +lovely gardens. But down beneath it, on the shore, was the most +interesting place to the newcomer, the town of Tamsui proper, or +Ho Be, as the Chinese called it. The foreigners landed and made +their way up the street. To the two from south Formosa, Tamsui +was like every other small Chinese town, but Mackay had not yet +become accustomed to the strange sights and sounds and stranger +smells, and his bright eyes were keen with interest. + +The main thoroughfare wound this way and that, only seven or +eight feet wide at its best. It was filled with noisy crowds of +men who acted as if they were on the verge of a terrible fight. +But the older missionaries knew that they were merely acting as +Chinese crowds always do. On each side were shops,--tea shops, +rice shops, tobacco shops, and many other kinds. And most +numerous of all were the shops where opium, one of the greatest +curses of Chinese life, was sold. The front wall of each was +removed, and the customers stood in the street and dickered with +the shopkeeper, while at the top of his harsh voice the latter +swore by all the gods in China that he was giving the article +away at a terrific loss. Through the crowd pushed hawkers, +carrying their wares balanced on poles across their shoulders. +Boys with trays of Chinese candies and sugar-cane yelled their +wares above the din. The visitors stumbled along over the rough +stones of the pavement until they came to the market-place. +Foreigners were not such a curiosity in Tamsui as in the inland +towns, and not a great deal of notice was taken of them, but +occasionally Mackay could hear the now familiar words of contempt +--"Ugly barbarian"--"Foreign devil" from the men that passed +them. And one man, pointing to Mackay, shouted "Ho! the +black-bearded barbarian!" It was a name the young missionary was +destined to hear very frequently. Past opium-dens, barber shops, +and drug stores they went and through the noise and bustle and +din of the market-place. They knew that the inns, judging by the +outside, would be filthy, so Mr. Ritchie suggested, as evening +was approaching, that they find some comfortable place to spend +the night. + +There was a British merchant in Tamsui named Mr. Dodd, whom the +missionaries knew. So to him they went, and were given fine +quarters in his warehouse. They ate their supper here, from the +provisions they had bought in the market, and stretching +themselves out on their grass mats they slept soundly. The next +day was Sunday, but the three travelers spent it quietly in the +warehouse by the river, studying their Bibles and discussing +their proposed trip. They concluded it was best not to provoke +the anger of the people against the new missionary by preaching, +so they did not go out. To-morrow they would start southward and +take Mackay to the bounds of their mission field, and show him +the land that was to be "his parish." + + + +CHAPTER III. RECONNOITERING THE TERRITORY + +Early Monday morning Mackay peeped out of the big warehouse door +at the great calm mountain shrouded in the pale mists of early +dawn. The other two travelers were soon astir, and were surprised +to find their young companion all ready. They were not yet well +enough acquainted with him to know that he could do with less +sleep at night than an owl. He was in high spirits and as eager +to be off as he had ever been to start for a day's fishing in the +old times back in Ontario. And indeed this was just a great +fishing expedition he was commencing. For had not one said to +him, long long ago when he was but a little boy, "Come follow me, +and I will make you to become a fisher of men?" and he had +obeyed. The first task was to go out and buy food for the +journey, and to hire a couple of coolies to carry it and what +baggage they must take. + +Dr. Dickson went off on this errand, and being well acquainted +with Formosan customs and language, soon returned with two +Chinese carriers and plenty of food. This last consisted of +canned meats, biscuits, coffee, and condensed milk, bought at a +store where ships' supplies were kept for sale. There was also +some salted water-buffalo meat, a Chinese dish with which the +young missionary was destined to become very familiar. + +They started out three abreast, Mr. Ritchie's blue serge figure +capped by a white helmet on the right, Dr. Dickson on the left in +his Scotch tweed, and between them the alert, slim figure of the +newcomer, in his suit of Canadian gray. The coolies, with baskets +hung to a pole across their shoulders, came ambling along behind. + +The three travelers were in the gayest mood. Perhaps it was the +clear spring morning air, or the breath of the salt ocean, +perhaps it was the intoxicating beauty of mountain and plain and +river that surrounded them or it may have been because they had +given their lives in perfect service to the One who is the source +of all happiness, but whatever was the cause, they were all like +schoolboys off for a holiday. The coolies who trotted in the rear +were very much amazed and not a little amused at the actions of +these foolish foreign devils, who laughed and joked and seemed in +such high spirits for no reason at all. + +They swung along the bank of the river until they came to the +ferry that was to take them to the other side. They sprang into +the boat and were shoved off. Before they reached the other side, +at Dr. Dickson's suggestion, they took off their shoes and socks, +and stowed them away in the carriers' baskets. When they came to +the opposite bank they rolled up their trousers to their knees +and sprang out into the shallow water. For a short distance they +had the joy of tramping barefoot along the hard gleaming sand of +the harbor. + +But shoes and stockings had to be resumed, for soon they turned +inland, on a path that wound up to the high plain above the +river. "Do you ever use a horse on your travels?" asked young +Mackay as they climbed upward. + +Mr. Ritchie laughed. "You couldn't get one in north Formosa for +love or money. And if you could, he wouldn't be any use." + +"Unless he was a second Pegasus, and could soar above the +Formosan roads," added Dr. Dickson. "Wait a bit and you'll +understand." + +The young missionary waited, and kept his eyes open for the +answer. The pathway crossed a grassy plain where groups of +queer-looking, mouse-colored animals, half ox, half buffalo, with +great spreading horns, strayed about, herded by boys, or lay +wallowing in deep pools. + +"Water-buffaloes," he said, remembering them as he had seen them +in the south. + +"The most useful animal on the island," remarked Mr. Ritchie, +adding with a laugh, "except perhaps the pig. You'll have a taste +of Mr. Buffalo for your dinner, Mackay." + +And now they were up on the heights, and the lovely country lay +spread out before them. Mackay mentally compared this walk to +many he had taken along the country roads of his native land. It +was early in March, but as there had been no winter, so there was +no spring. It was summer, warm, radiant summer, like a lovely day +in June at home. Dandelions, violets, and many gay flowers that +he did not recognize spangled the grassy plain. The skylark high +overhead was pouring out its glorious song, just as he had heard +it in his student days in Scotland. Here and there were clumps of +fir trees that reminded him of Canada, but on the whole the scene +was new and wonderful to his Western eyes. + +They were now on the first level of the rice-fields. The farms +were tiny things, none larger than eight or ten acres. They were +divided into queer-shaped little irrigated fields, separated not +by fences, but by little low walls of mud. Every farm was under +water now, and here and there, wading through his little flooded +fields, went the farmer with his plough, drawn by a useful +water-buffalo,--the latter apparently quite happy at being +allowed to splash about in the mud. + +These rice-farms soon became a familiar sight to the newcomer. He +liked to see them at all times--when each field was a pretty blue +or green lake, later when the water was choked with the fresh +green growth, or in harvest days, when the farmers stripped the +fields of their grain. Just now they were at their prettiest. Row +above row, they went up the mountainside, like a great glass +stairs, each row reflecting the green hills and the bamboo groves +above. And from each terrace to the one below, the water tumbled +in pretty little cascades that sparkled in the sunlight and +filled the air with music. For travelers there were only narrow +paths between farms, and often only the ridge of the dykes +between field and field. As they made their way between the tiny +fields, walking along the narrow dykes, and listening to the +splashing sound of the water, Mackay understood what Dr. Dickson +meant, when he remarked that only a flying horse could be of use +on such Formosan cross-country journeys. + +Soon the pathway changed once more to the broader public highway. +Here there was much traffic, and many travelers carried in +sedan-chairs passed them. And many times by the roadside Mackay +saw something that reminded him forcibly of why he had come to +Formosa--a heathen shrine. The whole countryside seemed dotted +with them. And as he watched the worshippers coming and going, +and heard the disdainful words from the priests cast at the hated +foreigners, he realized that he was face to face with an awful +opposing force. It was the great stone of heathenism he had come +to break, and the question was, would he be as successful as he +had been long ago in the Canadian pasture-field? + +The travelers ate their dinner by the roadside under the shade of +some fir trees that made Mackay feel at home. They were soon up +and off again, and, tired with their long tramp, they arrived at +a town called Tionglek, and decided to spend the night there. The +place was about the size of Tamsui, with between four and five +thousand inhabitants, and was quite as dirty and almost as noisy. +They walked down the main street with its uneven stone pavement, +its open shops, its noisy bargains, and above all its horrible +smells. With the exception of an occasional visit from an +official, foreigners scarcely ever came to Tionglek, and on every +side were revilings and threatenings. One yellow-faced youngster +picked up a handful of mud and threw it at the hated foreigners; +and "Black-bearded barbarian," mingled with their shouts. +Mackay's bright eyes took in everything, and he realized more and +more the difficulties of the task before him. + +They stopped in front of a low one-story building made of +sun-dried bricks. This was the Tionglek hotel where they were to +spend the night. Like most Chinese houses it was composed of a +number of buildings arranged in the form of a square with a +courtyard in the center. Dr. Dickson asked for lodgings from the +slant-eyed proprietor. He looked askance at the foreigners, but +concluded that their money was as good as any one else's, and he +led them through the deep doorway into the courtyard. + +In the center of this yard stood an earthen range, with a fire in +it. Several travelers stood about it cooking their rice. It was +evidently the hotel dining-room; a dining-room that was open to +all too, for chickens clucked and cackled and pigs grunted about +the range and made themselves quite at home. The men about the +gateway scowled and muttered "Foreign devil," as the three +strangers passed them. + +They crossed the courtyard and entered their room, or rather +stumbled into it, in semi-darkness. Mackay peered about him +curiously. He discovered three beds, made of planks and set on +brick pillars for legs. Each was covered with a dirty mat woven +from grass and reeking with the odor of opium smoke. + +A servant came in with something evidently intended for a lamp--a +burning pith wick set in a saucer of peanut oil. It gave out only +a faint glimmer of light, but enough to enable the young +missionary to see something else in the room,--some THINGS +rather, that ran and skipped and swarmed all over the damp +earthen floor and the dirty walls. There were thousands of these +brisk little creatures, all leaping about in pleasant +anticipation of the good time they would have when the barbarians +went to bed. There was no window, and only the one door that +opened into the courtyard. An old pig, evidently more friendly to +the foreigners than her masters, came waddling toward them +followed by her squealing little brood, and flopping down into +the mud in the doorway lay there uttering grunts of content. + +The evil smells of the room, the stench from the pigs, and the +still more dreadful odors wafted from the queer food cooking on +the range, made the young traveler's unaccustomed senses revolt. +He had a half notion that the two older men were putting up a +joke on him. + +"I suppose you thought it wise to give me a strong dose of all +this at the start?" he inquired humorously, holding his nose and +glancing from the pigs at the door to the crawlers on the wall. + +"A strong dose!" laughed Mr. Ritchie. "Not a bit of it, young +man. Wait till you've had some experience of the luxuries of +Formosan inns. You'll be calling this the Queen's Hotel, before +you've been here long!" + +And so indeed it proved later, for George Mackay had yet much to +learn of the true character of Chinese inns. Needless to say he +spent a wakeful night, on his hard plank bed, and was up early in +the morning. The travelers ate their breakfast in a room where +the ducks and hens clattered about under the table and between +their legs. Fortunately the food was taken from their own stores, +and in spite of the surroundings was quite appetizing. + +They started off early, drawing in great breaths of the pure +morning air, relieved to be away from the odors of the "Queen's +Hotel." Three hundred feet above them, high against the deep blue +of the morning sky, stood Table Hill, and they started on a brisk +climb up its side. The sun had not risen, but already the farmers +were out in their little water-fields, or working in their tea +plantations. The mountain with its groves of bamboo lay reflected +in the little mirrors of the rice-fields. A steady climb brought +them to the summit, and after a long descent on the other side +and a tramp through tea plantations they arrived in the evening +at a large city with a high wall around it, the city of +Tek-chham. That night in the city inn was so much worse than the +one at Tionglek that the Canadian was convinced his friends must +have reserved the "strong dose" for the second night. There were +the same smells, the same sorts of pigs and ducks and hens, the +same breeds of lively nightly companions, and each seemed to have +gained a fresh force. + +It was a relief to be out in the fields again after the foul +odors of the night, and the travelers were off before dawn. The +country looked more familiar to Mackay this morning, for they +passed through wheat and barley fields. It seemed so strange to +wander over a man's farm by a footpath, but it was a Chinese +custom to which he soon became accustomed. + +The sun was blazing hot, and it was a great relief when they +entered the cool shade of a forest. It was a delightful place and +George Mackay reveled in its beauty. Ever since he had been able +to run about his own home farm in Ontario his eyes had always +been wide open to observe anything new. He had studied as much +out of doors, all his life, as he had done in college, and now he +found this forest a perfect library of new things. Nearly every +tree and flower was strange to his Canadian eyes. Here and there, +in sheltered valleys, grew the tree-fern, the most beautiful +object in the forest, towering away up sometimes to a height of +sixty feet, and spreading its stately fronds out to a width of +fifteen feet. There was a lovely big plant with purple stem and +purple leaves, and when Dr. Dickson told him it was the +castor-oil plant, he smiled at the remembrance of the trials that +plant had caused him in younger days. One elegant tree, straight +as a pine, rose fifty feet in height, with leaves away up at the +top only. + +This was the betel-nut tree. + +"The nuts of that tree," said Mr. Ritchie, standing and pointing +away up to where the sunlight filtered through the far-off +leaves, "are the chewing tobacco of Formosa and all the islands +about here. The Chinese do not chew it, but the Malayans do. You +will meet some of these natives soon." + +On every side grew the rattan, half tree, half vine. It started +off as a tree and grew straight up often to twenty feet in +height, and then spread itself out over the tops of other trees +and plants in vine-like fashion; some of its branches measured +almost five hundred feet in length. + +The travelers paused to admire one high in the branches of the +trees. + +"Many a Chinaman loses his head hunting that plant," remarked Mr. +Ritchie. "These islanders export a great deal of rattan, and the +head-hunters up there in the mountains watch for the Chinese when +they are working in the forest." + +Mackay listened eagerly to his friends' tales of the head-hunting +savages, living in the mountains. They were always on the lookout +for the farmers near their forest lairs. They watched for any +unwary man who went too near the woods, pounced upon him, and +went off in triumph with his head in a bag. + +The young traveler's eyes brightened, "I'll visit them some day!" +he cried, looking off toward the mountainside. Mr. Ritchie +glanced quickly at the flashing eyes and the quick, alert figure +of the young man as he strode along, and some hint came to him of +the dauntless young heart which beat beneath that coat of +Canadian gray. + +Two days more over hill and dale, through rice and tea and +tobacco-fields, and then, in the middle of a hot afternoon, Mr. +Ritchie began to shiver and shake as though half frozen. Dr. +Dickson understood, and at the next stopping-place he ordered a +sedan-chair and four coolies to carry it. It was the old dreaded +disease that hangs like a black cloud over lovely Formosa, the +malarial fever. Mr. Ritchie had been a missionary only four years +in the island, but already the scourge had come upon him, and his +system was weakened. For, once seized by malaria in Formosa, one +seldom makes his escape. They put the sick man into the chair, +now in a raging fever, and he was carried by the four coolies. + +They were nearing the end of their journey and were now among a +people not Chinese. They belonged to the original Malayan race of +the island. They had been conquered by the Chinese, who in the +early days came over from China under a pirate named Koxinga. As +the Chinese name every one but themselves "barbarians," they gave +this name to all the natives of the island. They had conquered +all but the dreaded head-hunters, who, free in their mountain +fastnesses, took a terrible toll of heads from their would-be +conquerors, or even from their own half-civilized brethren. + +The native Malayans who had been subdued by the Chinese were +given different names. Those who lived on the great level +rice-plain over which the missionaries were traveling, were +called Pe-po-hoan, "Barbarians of the plain." Mackay could see +little difference between them and the Chinese, except in the +cast of their features, and their long-shaped heads. They wore +Chinese dress, even to the cue, worshiped the Chinese gods, and +spoke with a peculiar Malayan twang. + +The travelers were journeying rather wearily over a low muddy +stretch of ground, picking their way along the narrow paths +between the rice-fields, when they saw a group of men come +hurrying down the path to meet them. They kept calling out, but +the words they used were not the familiar "foreign devil" or +"ugly barbarian." Instead the people were shouting words of +joyful welcome. + +Dr. Dickson hailed them with delight, and soon he and Mr. +Ritchie's sedan-chair were surrounded by a clamorous group of +friends. + +They had journeyed so far south that they had arrived at the +borders of the English Presbyterian mission, and the people +crowding about them were native Christians. It was all so +different from their treatment by the heathen that Mackay's heart +was warmed. When the great stone of heathenism was broken, what +love and kindness were revealed! + +The visitors were led in triumph to the village. There was a +chapel here, and they stayed nearly a week, preaching and +teaching. + +The rest did Mr. Ritchie much good, and at the end of their visit +he was once more able to start off on foot. They moved on from +village to village and everywhere the Pe-po-hoan Christians +received them with the greatest hospitality. + +But at last the three friends found the time had come for them to +part. The two Englishmen had to go on through their fields to +their south Formosan home and the young Canadian must go back to +fight the battle alone in the north of the island. He had +endeared himself to the two older men, and when the farewells +came they were filled with regret. + +They bade him a lingering good-by, with many blessings upon his +young head, and many prayers for success in the hard fight upon +which he was entering. They walked a short way with him, and +stood watching the straight, lithe young figure, so full of +courage and hope until it disappeared down the valley. They knew +only too well the dangers and trials ahead of him, but they knew +also that he was not going into the fight alone. For the Captain +was going with his young soldier. + +There was a suspicion of moisture in the eyes of the older +missionaries as they turned back to prepare for their own journey +southward. + +"God bless the boy!" said Dr. Dickson fervently. "We'll hear of +that young fellow yet, Ritchie. He's on fire." + + + +CHAPTER IV. BEGINNING THE SIEGE + +The news was soon noised about Tamsui that one of the three +barbarians who had so lately visited the town had returned to +make the place his home. This was most unwelcome tidings to the +heathen, and the air was filled with mutterings and threatenings, +and every one was determined to drive the foreign devil out if at +all possible. + +So Mackay found himself meeting every kind of opposition. He was +too independent to ask assistance from the British consul in the +old Dutch fort on the bluff, or of any other European settlers in +Tamsui. He was bound to make his own way. But it was not easy to +do so in view of the forces which opposed him. He had now been in +Formosa about two months and had studied the Chinese language +every waking hour, but it was very difficult, and he found his +usually ready tongue wofully handicapped. + +His first concern was to get a dwelling-place, and he went from +house to house inquiring for some place to rent. Everywhere he +went he was turned away with rough abuse, and occasionally the +dogs were set upon him. + +But at last he was successful. Up on the bank of the river, a +little way from the edge of the town, he found a place which the +owner condescended to rent. It was a miserable little hut, half +house, half cellar, built into the side of the hill facing the +river. A military officer had intended it for his horse-stable, +and yet Mackay paid for this hovel the sum of fifteen dollars a +month. It had three rooms, one without a floor. The road ran past +the door, and a few feet beyond was the river. By spending money +rather liberally he managed to hire the coolie who had +accompanied him to south Formosa. With his servant's help Mackay +had his new establishment thoroughly cleaned and whitewashed, and +then he moved in his furniture. He laughed as he called it +furniture, for it consisted of but two packing boxes full of +books and clothing. But more came later. The British consul, Mr. +Frater, lent him a chair and a bed. There was one old Chinese, +who kept a shop near by, and who seemed inclined to be friendly +to the queer barbarian with the black beard. He presented him +with an old pewter lamp, and the house was furnished complete. + +Mackay sat down at his one table, the first night after he was +settled. The damp air was hot and heavy, and swarms of tormenting +mosquitoes filled the room. Through the open door came the murmur +of the river, and from far down in the village the sounds of +harsh, clamorous voices. He was alone, many, many miles from home +and friends. Around him on every side were bitter enemies. + +One might have supposed he would be overcome at the thought of +the stupendous task before him, but whoever supposed that did not +know George Mackay. He lighted his pewter lamp, opened his diary, +and these are the words he wrote: + +"Here I am in this house, having been led all the way from the +old homestead in Zorra by Jesus, as direct as though my boxes +were labeled, 'Tamsui, Formosa, China.' Oh, the glorious +privilege to lay the foundation of Christ's Church in unbroken +heathenism! God help me to do this with the open Bible! Again I +swear allegiance to thee, O King Jesus, my Captain. So help me +God!" + +And now his first duty was to learn the Chinese language. He +could already speak a little, but it would be a long time, he +knew, before he could preach. And yet, how was he to learn? he +asked himself. He was a scholar without a teacher or school. But +there was his servant, and nothing daunted by the difficulties to +be overcome, he set to work to make him his teacher also. + +George Mackay always went at any task with all his might and +main, and he attacked the Chinese language in the same manner. He +found it a hard stone to break, however. "Of all earthly things I +know of," he remarked once, "it is the most intricate and +difficult to master." + +His unwilling teacher was just about as hard to manage as his +task, for the coolie did not take kindly to giving lessons. He +certainly had a rather hard time. Day and night his master +deluged him with questions. He made him repeat phrases again and +again until his pupil could say them correctly. He asked him the +name of everything inside the house and out, until the easy-going +Oriental was overcome with dismay. This wild barbarian, with the +fiery eyes and the black beard, was a terrible creature who gave +one no rest night nor day. Sometimes after Mackay had spent hours +with him, imitating sounds and repeating the names of things over +and over, his harassed teacher would back out of the room +stealthily, keeping an anxious eye on his master, and showing +plainly he had grave fears that the foreigner had gone quite mad. + +Mackay realized that the pace was too hard for his servant, and +that the poor fellow was in a fair way to lose what little wits +he had, if not left alone occasionally. So one day he wandered +out along the riverbank, in search of some one who would talk +with him. He turned into a path that led up the hill behind the +town. He was in hopes he might meet a farmer who would be +friendly. + +When he reached the top of the bluff he found a grassy common +stretching back toward the rice-fields. Here and there over these +downs strayed the queer-looking water-buffaloes. Some of them +were plunged deep in pools of water, and lay there like pigs with +only their noses out. + +He heard a merry laugh and shout from another part of the common, +and there sat a crowd of frolicsome Chinese boys, in large sun +hats, and short loose trousers. There were about a dozen of them, +and they were supposed to be herding the water-buffaloes to keep +them out of the unfenced fields. But, boylike, they were flying +kites, and letting their huge-horned charges herd themselves. + +Mackay walked over toward them. It was not so long since he had +been a boy himself, and these jolly lads appealed to him. But the +moment one caught sight of the stranger, he gave a shout of +alarm. The rest jumped up, and with yells of terror and cries of +"Here's the foreign devil!" "Run, or the foreign devil will get +you!" away they went helter-skelter, their big hats waving, their +loose clothes flapping wildly. They all disappeared like magic +behind a big boulder, and the cause of their terror had to walk +away. + +But the next day, when his servant once more showed signs of +mental exhaustion, he strolled out again upon the downs. The boys +were there and saw him coming. Though they did not actually run +away this time, they retired to a safe distance, and stood ready +to fly at any sign of the barbarian's approach. They watched him +wonderingly. They noticed his strange white face, his black +beard, his hair cut off quite short, his amazing hat, and his +ridiculous clothes. And when at last he walked away, and all +danger was over, they burst into shouts of laughter. + +The next day, as they scampered about the common, here again came +the absurd-looking stranger, walking slowly, as though careful +not to frighten them. The boys did not run away this time, and to +their utter astonishment he spoke to them. Mackay had practised +carefully the words he was to say to them, and the well-spoken +Chinese astounded the lads as much as if one of the monkeys that +gamboled about the trees of their forests should come down and +say, "How do you do, boys?" + +"Why, he speaks our words!" they all cried at once. + +As they stood staring, Mackay took out his watch and held it up +for them to see. It glittered in the sun, and at the sight of it +and the kind smiling face above, they lost their fears and +crowded around him. They examined the watch in great wonder. They +handled his clothes, exclaimed over the buttons on his coat, and +inquired what they were for. They felt his hands and his fingers, +and finally decided that, in spite of his queer looks, he was +after all a man. + +From that day the young missionary and the herd-boys were great +friends. Every day he joined them in the buffalo pasture, and +would spend from four to five hours with them. And as they were +very willing to talk, he not only learned their language rapidly, +but also learned much about their homes, their schools, their +customs, and their religion. + +One day, after a lengthy lesson from his servant, the latter +decided that the barbarian was unbearable, and bundling up his +clothes he marched off, without so much as "by your leave." So +Mackay fell back entirely upon his little teachers on the common. +With their assistance in the daytime and his Chinese-English +dictionary at night, he made wonderful progress. + +He was left alone now, to get his own meals and keep the swarms +of flies and the damp mold out of his hut by the riverside. He +soon learned to eat rice and water-buffalo meat, but he missed +the milk and butter and cheese of his old Canadian home. For he +discovered that cows were never milked in Formosa. There was +variety of food, however, as almost every kind of vegetable that +he had ever tasted and many new kinds that he found delicious +were for sale in the open-fronted shops in the village. Then the +fruits! They were fresh at all seasons--oranges the whole year, +bananas fresh from the fields--and such pineapples! He realized +that he had never really tasted pineapples before. + +Meanwhile, he was becoming acquainted. All the families of the +herd-boys learned to like him, and when others came to know him +they treated him with respect. He was a teacher, they learned, +and in China a teacher is always looked upon with something like +reverence. And, besides, he had a beard. This appendage was +considered very honorable among Chinese, so the black-bearded +barbarian was respected because of this. + +But there was one class that treated him with the greatest scorn. +These were the Chinese scholars. They were the literati, and were +like princes in the land. They despised every one who was not a +graduate of their schools, and most of all they despised this +barbarian who dared to set himself up as a teacher. Mackay had +now learned Chinese well enough to preach, and his sermons +aroused the indignation of these proud graduates. + +Sometimes when one was passing the little hut by the river, he +would drop in, and glance around just to see what sort of place +the barbarian kept. He would pick up the Bible and other books, +throw them on the floor, and with words of contempt strut proudly +out. + +Mackay endured this treatment patiently, but he set himself to +study their books, for he felt sure that the day was not far +distant when he must meet these conceited literati in argument. + +He went about a good deal now. The Tamsui people became +accustomed to him, and he was not troubled much. His bright eyes +were always wide open and he learned much of the lives of the +people he had come to teach. Among the poor he found a poverty of +which he had never dreamed. They could live upon what a so-called +poor family in Canada would throw away. Nothing was wasted in +China. He often saw the meat and fruit tins he threw away when +they were emptied, reappearing in the market-place. He learned +that these poorer people suffered cruel wrongs at the hands of +their magistrates. He visited a yamen, or court-house, and saw +the mandarin dispense "justice," but his judgment was said to be +always given in favor of the one who paid him the highest bribe. +He saw the widow robbed, and the innocent suffering frightful +tortures, and sometimes he strode home to his little hut by the +river, his blood tingling with righteous indignation. And then he +would pray with all his soul: + +"O God, give me power to teach these people of thy love through +Jesus Christ!" + +But of all the horrors of heathenism, and there were many, he +found the religion the most dreadful. He had read about it when +on board ship, but he found it was infinitely worse when written +in men's lives than when set down in print. He never realized +what a blessing was the religion of Jesus Christ to a nation +until he lived among a people who did not know Him. + +He found almost as much difficulty in learning the Chinese +religion as the Chinese language. After he had spent days trying +to understand it, it would seem to him like some horrible +nightmare filled with wicked devils and no less wicked gods and +evil spirits and ugly idols. And to make matters worse there was +not one religion, but a bewildering mixture of three. First of +all there was the ancient Chinese religion, called Confucianism. +Confucius, a wise man of China, who lived ages before, had laid +down some rules of conduct, and had been worshiped ever since. +Very good rules they were as far as they went, and if the Chinese +had followed this wise man they would not have drifted so far +from the truth. But Confucianism meant ancestor-worship. In every +home was a little tablet with the names of the family's ancestors +upon it, and every one in the house worshiped the spirits of +those departed. With this was another religion called Taoism. +This taught belief in wicked demons who lurked about people ready +to do them some ill. Then, years and years before, some people +from India had brought over their religion, Buddhism, which had +become a system of idol-worship. These three religions were so +mixed up that the people themselves were not able to distinguish +between them. The names of their idols would cover pages, and an +account of their religion would fill volumes. The more Mackay +learned of it, the more he yearned to tell the people of the one +God who was Lord and Father of them all. + +As soon as he had learned to write clearly, he bought a large +sheet of paper, and printed on it the ten commandments in Chinese +characters. Then he hung it on the outside of his door. People +who passed read it and made comments of various kinds. Several +threw mud at it, and at last a proud graduate, who came striding +past his silk robes rustling grandly, caught the paper and tore +it down. Mackay promptly put up another. It shared the fate of +the first. Then he put up a third, and the people let it alone. +Even these heathen Chinese were beginning to get an impression of +the dauntless determination of the man with whom they were to get +much better acquainted. + +And all this time, while he was studying and working and arguing +with the heathen and preaching to them, the young missionary was +working just as hard at something else; something into which he +was putting as much energy and force as he did into learning the +Chinese language. With all his might and main, day and night, he +was praying--praying for one special object. He had been praying +for this long before he saw Formosa. He was pleading with God to +give him, as his first convert, a young man of education. And so +he was always on the lookout for such, as he preached and taught, +and never once did he cease praying that he might find him. + +One forenoon he was sitting at his books, near the open door, +when a visitor stopped before him. It was a fine-looking young +man, well dressed and with all the unmistakable signs of the +scholar. He had none of the graduate's proud insolence, however, +for when Mackay arose, he spoke in the most gentlemanly manner. +At the missionary's invitation he entered, and sat down, and the +two chatted pleasantly. The visitor seemed interested in the +foreigner, and asked him many questions that showed a bright, +intelligent mind. When he arose to go, Mackay invited him to come +again, and he promised he would. He left his card, a strip of +pink paper about three inches by six; the name on it read Giam +Cheng Hoa. Mackay was very much interested in him, he was so +bright, so affable, and such pleasant company. He waited +anxiously to see if he would return. + +At the appointed hour the visitor was at the door, and the +missionary welcomed him warmly. The second visit was even more +pleasant than the first. And Mackay told his guest why he had +come to Formosa, and of Jesus Christ who was both God and man and +who had come to the earth to save mankind. + +The young man's bright eyes were fixed steadily upon the +missionary as he talked, and when he went away his face was very +thoughtful. Mackay sat thinking about him long after he had left. + +He had met many graduates, but none had impressed him as had this +youth, with his frank face and his kind, genial manner. There was +something too about the young fellow, he felt, that marked him as +superior to his companions. And then a sudden divine inspiration +flashed into the lonely young missionary's heart. THIS WAS HIS +MAN! This was the man for whom he had been praying. The stranger +had as yet shown no sign of conversion, but Mackay could not get +away from that inspired thought. And that night he could not +sleep for joy. + +In a day or two the young man returned. With him was a noted +graduate, who asked many questions about the new religion. The +next day he came again with six graduates, who argued and +discussed. + +When they were gone Mackay paced up and down the room and faced +the serious situation which he realized he was in. He saw plainly +that the educated men of the town were banded together to beat +him in argument. And with all his energy and desperate +determination he set to work to be ready for them. + +His first task was to gain a thorough knowledge of the Chinese +religions. He had already learned much about them, both from +books on shipboard and since he had come to the island. But now +he spent long hours of the night, poring over the books of +Confucianism, Buddhism, and Taoism, by the light of his smoky +little pewter lamp. And before the next visit of his enemies he +knew almost more of their jumble of religions than they did +themselves. + +It was well he was prepared, for his opponents came down upon him +in full force. Every day a band of college graduates, always +headed by Giam Cheng Hoa, came up from the town to the +missionary's little hut by the river, and for hours they would +sit arguing and talking. They were always the most noted scholars +the place could produce, but in spite of all their cleverness the +barbarian teacher silenced them every time. He fairly took the +wind out of their sails by showing he knew quite as much about +Chinese religions as they did. If they quoted Confucius to +contradict the Bible, he would quote Confucius to contradict +them. He confounded them by proving that they were not really +followers of Confucius, for they did not keep his sayings. And +with unanswerable arguments he went on to show that the religion +taught by Jesus Christ was the one and only religion to make man +good and noble. + +Each day the group of visitors grew larger, and at last one +morning, as Mackay looked out of his door, he saw quite a crowd +approaching. They were led, as usual, by the friendly young +scholar. By his side walked, or rather, swaggered a man of whom +the missionary had often heard. He was a scholar of high degree +and was famed all over Formosa for his great learning. Behind him +came about twenty men, and Mackay could see by their dress and +appearance that they were all literary graduates. They were +coming in great force this time, to crush the barbarian with +their combined knowledge. He met them at the door with his usual +politeness and hospitality. He was always courteous to these +proud literati, but he always treated them as equals, and showed +none of the deference they felt he owed them. The crowd seated +itself on improvised benches and the argument opened. + +This time Mackay led the attack. He carried the war right into +the enemy's camp. Instead of letting them put questions to him, +he asked them question after question concerning Confucianism, +Buddhism, and Taoism. They were questions that sometimes they +could not answer, and to their chagrin they had to hear "the +barbarian" answer for them. There were other questions, still +more humiliating, which, when they answered, only served to show +their religion as false and degrading. Their spokesman, the great +learned man, became at last so entangled that there was nothing +for him but flight. He arose and stalked angrily away, and in a +little while they all left. Mackay looked wistfully at young Giam +as he went out, wondering what effect these words had upon him. + +He was not left long in doubt. Not half an hour after a shadow +fell across the open Bible the missionary was studying. He +glanced up. There he stood! His bright face was very serious. He +looked gravely at the other young man, and his eyes shone as he +spoke. + +"I brought all those graduates and teachers here," he confessed, +"to silence you or be silenced. And now I am convinced that the +doctrines you teach are true. I am determined to become a +Christian, even though I suffer death for it." + +Mackay rose from his seat, his face alight with an overwhelming +joy. The man he had prayed for! He took the young fellow's hand-- +speechless. And together the only missionary of north Formosa and +his first convert fell upon their knees before the true God and +poured out their hearts in joy and thanksgiving. + + + +CHAPTER V. SOLDIERS TWO + +And now a new day dawned for the lonely young missionary. He had +not a convert but a helper and a delightful companion. His new +friend was of a bright, joyous nature, the sort that everybody +loves. Giam was his surname, but almost every one called him by +his given name, Hoa, and those who knew him best called him A +Hoa. Mackay used this more familiar boyish name, for Giam was the +younger by a few years. + +To A Hoa his new friend was always Pastor Mackay, or as the +Chinese put it, Mackay Pastor, Kai Bok-su was the real Chinese of +it, and Kai Bok-su soon became a name known all over the island +of Formosa. + +A Hoa needed all his kind new friend's help in the first days +after his conversion. For family, relatives, and friends turned +upon him with the bitterest hatred for taking up the barbarian's +religion. So, driven from his friends, he came to live in the +little hut by the river with Mackay. While at home these two +read, sang, and studied together all the day long. It would have +been hard for an observer to guess who was teacher and who pupil. +For at one time A Hoa was receiving Bible instruction and the +next time Mackay was being drilled in the Chinese of the educated +classes. Each teacher was as eager to instruct as each pupil was +eager to learn. + +The Bible was, of course, the chief textbook, but they studied +other things, astronomy, geology, history, and similar subjects. +One day the Canadian took out a map of the world, and the Chinese +gazed with amazement at the sight of the many large countries +outside China. A Hoa had been private secretary to a mandarin, +and had traveled much in China, and once spent six months in +Peking. His idea had been that China was everything, that all +countries outside it were but insignificant barbarian places. His +geography lessons were like revelations. + +His progress was simply astonishing, as was also Mackay's. The +two seemed possessed with the spirit of hard work. But a +superstitious old man who lived near believed they were possessed +with a demon. He often listened to the two singing, drilling, and +repeating words as they marched up and down, either in the house +or in front of it, and he became alarmed. He was a kindly old +fellow, and, though a heathen, felt well disposed toward the +missionary and A Hoa. So one day, very much afraid, he slipped +over to the little house with two small cups of strong tea. He +came to the door and proffered them with a polite bow. He hoped +they might prove soothing to the disturbed nerves of the +patients, he said. He suggested, also, that a visit to the +nearest temple might help them. + +The two affected ones received his advice politely, but the humor +of it struck them both, and when their visitor was gone they +laughed so hard the tea nearly choked them. + +The missionary was soon able to speak so fluently that he +preached almost every day, either in the little house by the +river, or on the street in some open square. There were other +things he did, too. On every side he saw great suffering from +disease. The chief malady was the terrible malaria, and the +native doctors with their ridiculous remedies only made the poor +sufferers worse. Mackay had studied medicine for a short time +while in college, and now found his knowledge very useful. He +gave some simple remedies to several victims of malaria which +proved effective. The news of the cures spread far and wide. The +barbarian was kind, he had a good heart, the people declared. +Many more came to him for medicine, and day by day the circle of +his friends grew. And wherever he went, curing disease, teaching, +or preaching, A Hoa went with him, and shared with him the taunts +of their heathen enemies. + +But the gospel was gradually making its way. Not long after A +Hoa's conversion a second man confessed Christ. He had previously +disturbed the meetings by throwing stones into the doorway +whenever he passed. But his sister was cured of malaria by the +missionary's medicine, and soon both sister and mother became +Christians, and finally the stone-thrower himself. And so, +gradually, the lines of the enemy were falling back, and at every +sign of retreat the little army of two advanced. A little army? +No! For was there not the whole host of heaven moving with them? +And Mackay was learning that his boyish dreams of glory were +truly to be fulfilled. He had wanted always to be a soldier like +his grandfather, and fight a great Waterloo, and here he was +right in the midst of the battle with the victory and the glory +sure. + +The two missionaries often went on short trips here and there +into the country around Tamsui, and Mackay determined that when +the intense summer heat had lessened they would make a long tour +to some of the large cities. The heat of August was almost +overpowering to the Canadian. Flies and mosquitoes and insect +pests of all kinds made his life miserable, too, and prevented +his studying as hard as he wished. + +One oppressive day he and A Hoa returned from a preaching tour in +the country to find their home in a state of siege. Right across +the threshold lay a monster serpent, eight feet in length. A Hoa +shouted a warning, and seized a long pole, and the two managed to +kill it. But their troubles were not yet over. The next morning, +Mackay stepped outside the door and sprang back just in time to +escape another, the mate of the one killed. This one was even +larger than the first, and was very fierce. But they finished it +with sticks and stones. + +When September came the days grew clearer, and the many pests of +summer were not so numerous. The mosquitoes and flies that had +been such torments disappeared, and there was some relief from +the damp oppressive heat. But he had only begun to enjoy the +refreshing breaths of cool air, and had remarked to A Hoa that +days reminded him of Canadian summers, when the weather gave him +to understand that every Formosan season has its drawbacks. +September brought tropical storms and typhoons that were +terrible, and he saw from his little house on the hillside big +trees torn up by the root, buildings swept away like chaff, and +out in the harbor great ships lifted from their anchorage and +whirled away to destruction. And then he was sometimes thankful +that his little hut was built into the hillside, solid and +secure. + +But the fierce storms cleared away the heavy dampness that had +made the heat of the summer so unbearable, and October and +November brought delightful days. The weather was still warm of +course, but the nights were cool and pleasant. + +So early one October morning, Mackay and A Hoa started off on a +tour to the cities. + +"We shall go to Kelung first," said the missionary. Kelung was a +seaport city on the northern coast, straight east across the +island from Tamsui. A coolie to carry food and clothing was +hired, and early in the morning, while the stars were still +shining, they passed through the sleeping town and out on the +little paths between the rice-fields. Though it was yet scarcely +daylight, the farmers were already in their fields. It was +harvest-time--the second harvest of the year--and the little +rice-fields were no longer like mirrors, but were filled with +high rustling grain ready for the sickle. The water had been +drained off and the reaper and thrasher were going through the +fields before dawn. There was no machinery like that used at +home. The reaper was a short sickle, the thrashing-machine a kind +of portable tub, and Mackay looked at them with some amusement, +and described to A Hoa how they took off the great wheat crops in +western Canada. + +The two were in high spirits, ready for any sort of adventure and +they met some. Toward evening they reached a place called +Sek-khau, and went to the little brick inn to get a +sleeping-place. The landlord came to the door and was about to +bid A Hoa enter, when the light fell upon Mackay's face. With a +shout, "Black-bearded barbarian!" he slammed the door in their +faces. They turned away, but already a crowd had begun to gather. +"The black-bearded barbarian is here! The foreign devil from +Tamsui has come!" was the cry. The mob followed the two down the +streets, shouting curses. Some one threw a broken piece of brick, +another a stone. Mackay turned and faced them, and for a few +moments they seemed cowed. But the crowd was increasing, and he +deemed it wise to move on. So the two marched out of the town +followed by stones and curses. And, as they went, Mackay reminded +A Hoa of what they had been reading the night before. + +"Yes," said A Hoa brightly. "The Lord was driven out of his own +town in Galilee." + +"Yes, and Paul--you remember how he was stoned. Our Master counts +us worthy to suffer for him." But where to go was the question. +Before they could decide, night came down upon them, and it came +in that sudden tropical way to which Mackay, all his life +accustomed to the long mellow twilights of his northern home, +could never grow accustomed. They each took a torch out of the +carrier's bag, lighted it, and marched bravely on. The path led +along the Kelung river, through tall grass. They were not sure +where it led to, but thought it wise to follow the river; they +would surely come to Kelung some time. Mackay was ahead, A Hoa +right at his heels, and behind them the basket-bearer. At a +sudden turn in the path A Hoa gave a shout of warning, and the +next instant, a band of robbers leaped from the long reeds and +grass, and brandished their spears in the travelers' faces. The +torchlight shone on their fierce evil eyes and their long knives, +making a horrible picture. The young Canadian Scot did not flinch +for a second. He looked the wild leader straight in the face. + +"We have no money, so you cannot rob us," he said steadily, "and +you must let us pass at once. I am a teacher and--" + +"A TEACHER!" he was interrupted by a dismayed exclamation from +several of the wild band. "A teacher!" As if with one accord they +turned and fled into the darkness. For even a highwayman in China +respects a man of learning. The travelers went on again, with +something of relief and something of the exultation that youth +feels in having faced danger. But a second trouble was upon them. +One of those terrible storms that still raged occasionally had +been brewing all evening, and now it opened its artillery. Great +howling gusts came down from the mountain, carrying sheets of +driving rain. Their torches went out like matches, and they were +left to stagger along in the black darkness. What were they to +do? They could not go back. They could not stay there. They +scarcely dared go on. For they did not know the way, and any +moment a fresh blast of wind or a misstep might hurl them into +the river. But they decided that they must go on, and on they +went, stumbling, slipping, sprawling, and falling outright. Now +there would be an exclamation from Mackay as he sank to the knees +in the mud of a rice-field, now a groan from A Hoa as he fell +over a boulder and bruised and scratched himself, and oftenest a +yell from the poor coolie, as he slipped, baskets and all, into +some rocky crevice, and was sure he was tumbling into the river; +but they staggered on, Mackay secure in his faith in God. His +Father knew and his Father would keep him safely. And behind him +came brave young A Hoa, buoyed up by his new growing faith, and +learning the lesson that sometimes the Captain asks his soldier +to march into hard encounters, but that the soldier must never +flinch. + +The "everlasting arms" were around them, for by midnight they +reached Kelung. They were drenched, breathless, and worn out, and +they spent the night in a damp hovel, glad of any shelter from +the wind and rain. + +But the next morning, young soldier A Hoa had a fiercer battle to +fight than any with robbers or storms. As soon as the city was +astir, Mackay and he went out to find a good place to preach. +They passed down the main thoroughfare, and everywhere they +attracted attention. Cries of "Ugly barbarian!" and oftenest +"Black-bearded barbarian" were heard on all sides. A Hoa was +known in Kelung and contempt and ridicule was heaped upon him by +his old college acquaintances. He was consorting with the +barbarian! He was a friend of this foreigner! They poured more +insults upon him than they did upon the barbarian himself. Some +took the stranger as a joke, and laughed and made funny remarks +upon his appearance. Here and there an old woman, peeping through +the doorway, would utter a loud cackling laugh, and pointing a +wizened finger at the missionary would cry: "Eh, eh, look at him! +Tee hee! He's got a wash basin on for a hat!" A Hoa was +distressed at these remarks, but Mackay was highly amused. + +"We're drawing a crowd, anyway," he remarked cheerfully, "and +that's what we want." + +Soon they came to an open square in front of a heathen temple. +The building had several large stone steps leading up to the +door. Mackay mounted them and stood facing the buzzing crowd, +with A Hoa at his side. They started a hymn. + +All people that on earth do dwell +Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice. + +The open square in front of them began to fill rapidly. The +people jostled each other in their endeavors to get a view of the +barbarian. Every one was curious, but every one was angry and +indignant, so sometimes the sound of the singing was lost in the +shouts of derision. + +When the hymn was finished, Mackay had a sudden inspiration. +"They will surely listen to one of their own people," he said to +himself, and turned to A Hoa. + +"Speak to them," he said. "Tell them about the true God." + +That was a hard moment for the young convert. He had been a +Christian only a few months and had never yet spoken in public +for Christ. He looked desperately over the sea of mocking faces +beneath him. He opened his mouth, as though to speak, and +hesitated. Just then came a rough and bitter taunt from one of +his old companions. It was too much. A Hoa turned away and hung +his head. + +The young missionary said nothing. But he did the very wisest +thing he could have done. He had some time before taught A Hoa a +grand old Scottish paraphrase, and they had often sung it +together: + +I'm not ashamed to own my Lord +Or to defend his cause, +Maintain the glory of his cross +And honor all his laws. + +Mackay's voice, loud and clear, burst into this fine old hymn. A +Hoa raised his head. He joined in the hymn and sang it to the +end. It put mettle into him. It was the battle-song that brought +back the young recruit's courage. Almost before the last note +sounded he began to speak. His voice rang out bold and unafraid +over the crowd of angry heathen. + +"I am a Christian!" he said distinctly. "I worship the true God. +I cannot worship idols," with a gesture toward the temple door, +"that rats can destroy. I am not afraid. I love Jesus. He is my +Savior and Friend." + +No, A Hoa was not "ashamed" any more. His testing time had come, +and he had not failed after all. And his brave, true words sent a +thrill of joy through the more seasoned soldier at his side. + +That was not the only difficult situation he met on that journey. +The two soldiers of the cross had many trials, but the thrill of +that victory before the Kelung temple never left them. + +When they returned to Tamsui they held daily services in their +house, and A Hoa often spoke to the people who gathered there. + +One Sunday they noticed an old woman present, who had come down +the river in a boat. Women as a rule did not come out to the +meetings, but this old lady continued to come every Sunday. She +showed great interest in the missionary's words, and, at the +close of one meeting, he spoke to her. She told him she was a +poor widow, that her name was Thah-so, and that she had come down +the river from Go-ko-khi to hear him preach. Then she added, "I +have passed through many trials in this world, and my idols never +gave me any comfort." Then her eyes shone, "But I like your +teaching very much," she went on. "I believe the God you tell +about will give me peace. I will come again, and bring others." + +Next Sunday she was there with several other women. And after +that she came every Sunday, bringing more each time, until at +last a whole boat-load would come down to the service. + +These people were so interested that they asked the missionary if +he would not visit them. So one day he and A Hoa boarded one of +the queer-looking flat-bottomed river-boats and were pulled up +the rapids to Go-ko-khi. Every village in Formosa had its +headman, who is virtually the ruler of the place. When the boat +landed, many of the villagers were at the shore to meet their +visitors and took them at once to their mayor's house, the best +building in the village. Tan Paugh, a fine, big, powerfully-built +man, received them cordially. He frankly declared that he was +tired and sick of idols and wanted to hear more of this new +religion. An empty granary was obtained for both church and home, +and the missionary and his assistant took up their quarters +there, and for several months they remained, preaching and +teaching the Bible either in Go-ko-khi, or in the lovely +surrounding valleys. + + + +CHAPTER VI. THE GREAT KAI BOK-SU + +The missionary was now becoming a familiar figure both in Tamsui +and in the surrounding country. By many he was loved, by all he +was respected, but by a large number he was bitterly hated. The +scholars continued his worst enemies. They could never forgive +him for beating them so completely in argument, in the days when +A Hoa was striving for the light, and their hatred increased as +they saw other scholars becoming Christians under his teaching. +There was something about him, however, that compelled their +respect and even their admiration. Wherever they met him--on the +street, by their temples, or on the country roads--he bore +himself in such a way as to make them confess that he was their +superior both in ability and knowledge. + +These Chinese literati had a custom which Mackay found very +interesting. One proud scholar marching down the street and +scarcely noticing the obsequious bows of his inferiors, would +meet another equally proud scholar. Each would salute the other +in an exceedingly grand manner, and then one would spin off a +quotation from the writings of Confucius or some other Chinese +sage and say, "Now tell me where that is found." And scholar +number two had to ransack his brains to remember where the saying +was found, or else confess himself beaten. Mackay thought it +might be a good habit for the graduates of his own alma mater +across the wide sea to adopt. He wondered what some of his old +college chums would think, if, when he got back to Canada, he +should buttonhole one on the street some day, recite a quotation +from Shakespeare or Macaulay, and demand from his friend where it +could be found. He had a suspicion that the old friend would be +afraid that the Oriental sun had touched George Mackay's brain. + +Nevertheless he thought the custom one he could turn to good +account, and before long he was trying it himself. He had such a +wonderful memory that he never forgot anything he had once read. +So the scholars of north Formosa soon discovered, again to their +humiliation, that this Kai Bok-su of Tamsui could beat them at +their own game. They did not care how much he might profess to +know of writers and lands beyond China. Such were only barbarians +anyway. But when, right before a crowd, he would display a surer +knowledge of the Chinese classics than they themselves, they +began not only to respect but to fear him. It was no use trying +to humiliate him with a quotation. With his bright eyes flashing, +he would tell, without a moment's hesitation, where it was found +and come back at the questioner swiftly with another, most +probably one long forgotten, and reel it off as though he had +studied Chinese all his life. + +He was a wonderful man certainly, they all agreed, and one whom +it was not safe to oppose. The common people liked him better +every day. He was so tactful, so kind, and always so careful not +to arouse the prejudice of the heathen. He was extremely wise in +dealing with their superstitions. No matter how absurd or +childish they might be, he never ridiculed them, but only strove +to show the people how much happier they might be if they +believed in God as their Father and in Jesus Christ as their +Savior. He never made light of anything sacred to the Chinese +mind, but always tried to take whatever germ of good he could +find in their religion, and lead on from it to the greater good +found in Christianity. He discovered that the ancestral worship +made the younger people kind and respectful to older folk, and he +saw that Chinese children reverenced their parents and elders in +a way that he felt many of his young friends across the sea would +do well to copy. + +One day when he and A Hoa were out on a preaching tour, the wise +Kai Bok-su made use of this respect for parents in quieting a +mob. He and his comrade were standing side by side on the steps +of a heathen temple as they had done at Kelung. The angry crowd +was scowling and muttering, ready to throw stones as soon as the +preacher uttered a word. Mackay knew this, and when they had sung +a hymn and the people waited, ready for a riot, his voice rang +out clear and steady, repeating the fifth commandment "Honor thy +father and thy mother: that thy days may be long upon the land +which the Lord thy God giveth thee." A silence fell over the +muttering crowd, and an old heathen whose cue was white and whose +aged hands trembled on the top of his staff, nodded his head and +said, "That is heavenly doctrine." The people were surprised and +disarmed. If the black-bearded barbarian taught such truths as +this, he surely was not so very wicked after all. And so they +listened attentively as he went on to show that they had all one +great Father, even God. + +He sometimes found it rather a task to treat with respect that +which the Chinese held sacred. Especially was this so when he +discovered to his amusement and to some carefully concealed +disgust, that in the Chinese family the pig was looked upon with +affection, and as a young naval officer, who visited Mackay +remarked, "was treated like a gentleman." + +Every Chinese house of any size was made up of three buildings +joined together so as to make three sides of an enclosure. This +space was called a court, and a door led from it to another next +the street. In this outer yard pigs and fowl were always to be +found. Whenever the missionary dropped in at a home, mother pig +and all the little pigs often followed him inside the house, +quite like members of the family. Every one was always glad to +see Kai Bok-su, pigs and all, and as soon as he appeared the +order was given--"Infuse tea." And when the little handleless +cups of clear brown liquid were passed around and they all drank +and chatted, Mrs. Pig and her children strolled about as welcome +as the guest. + +The Chinese would allow no one to hurt their pigs, either. One +day as Mackay sat in his rooms facing the river, battling with +some new Chinese characters, he heard a great hubbub coming up +the street. The threatening mobs that used to surround his house +had long ago ceased to trouble him. He arose in some surprise and +went to the door to see what was the matter. A very unusual sight +for Tamsui met his gaze. Coming up the street at a wild run were +some half-dozen English sailors, their loose blue blouses and +trousers flapping madly. They were evidently from a ship which +Mackay had seen lying in the harbor that morning. + +"Give us a gun!" roared the foremost as soon as he saw the +missionary. + +Mackay did not possess a gun, and would not have given the +enraged bluejacket one had he owned a dozen. But the Chinese mob, +roaring with fury, were coming up the street after the men and he +swiftly pointed out a narrow alley that led down to the river. +"Run down there!" he shouted to the sailors. "You can get to your +boats before they find you." + +They were gone in an instant, and the next moment the crowd of +pursuers were storming about the door demanding whither the enemy +had disappeared. + +"What is all this disturbance about?" demanded Kai Bok-su calmly, +glad of an opportunity to gain time for the fleeing sailors. + +The aggrieved Chinese gathered about him, each telling the story +as loud as his voice would permit. Those barbarians of the sea +had come swaggering along the streets waving their big sticks. +And they had dared--yes actually DARED--to hit the pet pigs +belonging to every house as they passed. The poor pigs who lay +sunning themselves at the door! + +This was indeed a serious offense. Mackay could picture the +rollicking sailor-lads gaily whacking the lazy porkers with their +canes as they passed, happily unconscious of the trouble they +were raising. But there was no amusement in Kai Bok-su's grave +face. He spoke kindly, and soothingly, and promised that if the +offenders misbehaved again he would complain to the authorities. +That made it all right. Heathen though they were, they knew Kai +Bok-su's promise would not be broken, and away they went quite +satisfied. + +One day he learned, quite by accident, a new and very useful way +of helping his people. He and A Hoa and several other young men +who had become Christians, went on a missionary tour to +Tek-chham, a large city which he had visited once before. + +On the day they left the place, Kai Bok-su's preaching had drawn +such crowds that the authorities of the city became afraid of +him. And when the little party left, a dozen soldiers were sent +to follow the dangerous barbarian and his students and see that +they did not bewitch the people on the road. + +The soldiers tramped along after the missionary party, and with +his usual ability to make use of any situation, Mackay stepped +back and chatted with his spies. He found one poor fellow in +agony with the toothache. This malady was very common in north +Formosa, partly owing to the habit of chewing the betel-nut. He +examined the aching tooth and found it badly decayed. "There is a +worm in it," the soldier said, for the Formosan doctors had +taught the people this was the cause of toothache. + +Mackay had no forceps, but he knew how to pull a tooth, and he +was not the sort to be daunted by the lack of tools. He got a +piece of hard wood, whittled it into shape and with it pried out +the tooth. The relief from pain was so great that the soldier +almost wept for joy and overwhelmed the tooth-puller with +gratitude. And for the remainder of the journey the guards sent +to spy on the missionary's doings were his warmest friends. + +After this, dentistry became a part of this many-sided +missionary's work. He went to a native blacksmith and had a pair +of forceps hammered out of iron. It was a rather clumsy +instrument, but it proved of great value, and later he sent for a +complete set of the best instruments made in New York. + +So with forceps in one hand and the Bible in the other, Mackay +found himself doubly equipped. Every second person seemed to be +suffering from toothache, and when the pain was relieved by the +missionary, the patient was in a state of mind to receive his +teaching kindly. The cruel methods by which the native doctors +extracted teeth often caused more suffering than the toothache, +and sometimes even resulted in death through blood-poisoning. + +A Hoa and some of the other young converts learned from their +teacher how to pull a tooth, and they, too, became experts in the +art. + +Whenever they visited a town or city after this, they had a +program which they always followed. First they would place +themselves in front of an idol temple or in an open square. Here +they would sing a hymn which always attracted a crowd. Next, any +one who wanted a tooth pulled was invited to come forward. Many +accepted the invitation gladly and sometimes a long line of +twenty or thirty would be waiting, each his turn. The Chinese had +considerable nerve, the Canadian discovered, and stood the pain +bravely. They literally "stood" it, too, for there was no +dentist's chair and every man stood up for his operation, very +much pleased and very grateful when it was over. Then there were +quinine and other simple remedies for malaria handed round, for +in a Formosan crowd there were often many shaking in the grip of +this terrible disease. And now, having opened the people's hearts +by his kindness, Kai Bok-su brought forth his cure for souls. He +would mount the steps of the temple or stand on a box or stone, +and tell the wonderful old story of the man Jesus who was also +God, and who said to all sick and weary and troubled ones, "Come +unto me, . . . and I will give you rest." And often, when he had +finished, the disease of sin in many a heart was cured by the +remedy of the gospel. + +And so the autumn passed away happily and busily, and Mackay +entered his first Formosan winter. And such a winter! The young +man who had felt the clear, bright cold of a Canadian January +needed all his fine courage to bear up under its dreariness. It +started about Christmas time. Just when his own people far away +in Canada were gathering about the blazing fire or jingling over +the crisp snow in sleighs and cutters, the great winter rains +commenced. Christmas day--his first Christmas in a land that did +not know its beautiful meaning--was one long dreary downpour. It +rained steadily all Christmas week. It poured on New Year's day +and for a week after. It came down in torrents all January. +February set in and still it rained and rained, with only a short +interval each afternoon. Day and night, week in, week out, it +poured, until Mackay forgot what sunlight looked like. His house +grew damp, his clothes moldy. A stream broke out up in the hill +behind and one morning he awoke to find a cascade tumbling into +his kitchen, and rushing across the floor out into the river +beyond. And still it poured and the wind blew and everything was +damp and cold and dreary. + +He caught an occasional glimpse of snow, only a very far-off +view, for it lay away up on the top of a mountain, but it made +his heart long for just one breath of good dry Canadian air, just +one whiff of the keen, cutting frost. + +But Kai Bok-su was not the sort to spend these dismal days +repining. Indeed he had no time, even had he been so inclined. +His work filled up every minute of every rainy day and hours of +the drenched night. If there was no sunshine outside there was +plenty in his brave heart, and A Hoa's whole nature radiated +brightness. + +And there were many reasons for being happy after all. On the +second Sabbath of February, 1873, just one year after his arrival +in Tamsui, the missionary announced, at the close of one of his +Sabbath services, that he would receive a number into the +Christian church. There was instantly a commotion among the +heathen who were in the house, and yells and jeers from those +crowding about the door outside. + +"We'll stop him," they shouted. "Let us beat the converts," was +another cry. + +But Mackay went quietly on with the beautiful ceremony in spite +of the disturbance. Five young men, with A Hoa at their head, +came and were baptized into the name of the Father, the Son, and +the Holy Spirit. + +When the next Sabbath came these five with their missionary sat +down for the first time to partake of the Lord's Supper. It was a +very impressive ceremony. One young fellow broke down, declaring +he was not worthy. Mackay took him alone into his little room and +they prayed together, and the young man came out to the Lord's +Supper comforted, knowing that all might be worthy in Jesus +Christ. + +Spring came at last, bright and clear, and Mackay announced to A +Hoa that they must go up the river and visit their friends at Go-ko-khi. The two did not go alone this time. +Three other young men +who wanted to be missionaries were now spending their days with +their teacher, learning with A Hoa how to preach the gospel. So +it was quite a little band of disciples that walked along the +river bank up to Go-ko-khi. Mackay preached at all the villages +along the route, and visited the homes of Christians. + +One day, as they passed a yamen or Chinese court-house where a +mandarin was trying some cases, they stepped in to see what was +going on. At one end of the room sat the mandarin who was judge. +He was dressed in magnificent silks and looked down very +haughtily upon the lesser people and the retinue of servants who +were gathered about him. On either side of the room stood a row +of constables and near them the executioners. The rest of the +room was filled with friends of the people on trial and by the +rabble from the street. The missionaries mixed with the former +and stood watching proceedings. There were no lawyers, no jury. +The mandarin's decision was law. + +The first case was one of theft. Whether the man had really +committed the crime or not was a question freely discussed among +the onlookers around Mackay. But there seemed no doubt as to his +punishment being swift and heavy. "He has not paid the mandarin," +a friend explained to the missionary. "He will be punished." + +"The mandarin eats cash," remarked another with a shrug. It was a +saying to which Mackay had become accustomed. For it was one of +the shameless proverbs of poor, oppressed Formosa. + +The case was soon finished. Nothing was definitely proven against +the man. But the mandarin pronounced the sentence of death. The +victim was hurried out, shrieking his innocence, and praying for +mercy. Case followed case, each one becoming more revolting than +the last to the eyes of the young man accustomed to British +justice. Imprisonment and torture were meted out to prisoners, +and even witnesses were laid hold of and beaten on the face by +the executioners if their tale did not suit the mandarin. Men who +were plainly guilty but who had given their judge a liberal bribe +were let off, while innocent men were made to pay heavy fines or +were thrown into prison. The young missionary went out and on his +way sickened by the sights he had witnessed. And as he went, he +raised his eyes to heaven and prayed fervently that he might be a +faithful preacher of the gospel, and that one day Formosa would +be a Christian land and injustice and oppression be done away. + +The next scene was a happier one. There was an earnest little +band of Christians in Go-ko-khi, and two of the young people were +about to be married. It was the first Christian marriage in the +place and Kai Bok-su was called upon to officiate. There was a +great deal of opposition raised among the heathen, but after +seeing the ceremony, they all voted a Christian wedding +everything that was beautiful and good. + + + +CHAPTER VII. BESIEGING HEAD-HUNTERS + +When they returned from their trip, Mackay and A Hoa with the +assistance of some of their Christian friends set about looking +for a new house in a more wholesome district. It was much easier +for the missionary to rent a place now, and he managed to secure +a comfortable home upon the bluff above the town. It was a dryer +situation and much more healthful. Here one room was used as a +study and every morning when not away on a tour a party of young +men gathered in it for lessons. Sometimes, what with traveling, +preaching, training his students, visiting the sick, and pulling +teeth, Mackay had scarcely time to eat, and very little to sleep. +But always as he came and went on his travels, his eyes would +wander to the mountains where the savages lived, and with all his +heart he would wish that he might visit them also. + +His Chinese friends held up their hands in dismay when he +broached the subject. To the mountains where the Chhi-hoan lived! +Did Kai Bok-su not know that every man of them was a practised +head-hunter, and that behind every rock and tree and in the +darkness of the forests they lay in wait for any one who went +beyond the settled districts? Yes, Kai Bok-su knew all that, but +he could not quite explain that it was just that which made the +thought of a visit to them seem so alluring, just that which made +him so anxious to tell them of Jesus Christ, who wished all men +to live as brothers. A Hoa and a few others who had caught the +spirit of the true soldier of the cross understood. For they had +learned that one who follows Jesus must be ready to dare +anything, death included, to carry the news of his salvation to +the dark corners of the world. + +But the days were so filled with preaching, teaching, and +touring, that for some time Mackay had no opportunity for a trip +into the head-hunters' territory. And then one day, quite +unexpectedly, his chance came. There sailed into Tamsui harbor, +one hot afternoon, a British man-of-war, named The Dwarf. Captain +Bax from this vessel visited Tamsui, and expressed a desire to +see something of the life of the savages in the mountains. This +was Mackay's opportunity, and in spite of protests from his +friends he offered to accompany the captain. So together they +started off, the sailor-soldier of England and the soldier of the +cross, each with the same place in view but each with a very +different object. + +It took three days journey from Tamsui across rice-fields and up +hillsides to reach even the foot of the mountains. Here there +lived a village of natives, closely related to the savages. But +they were not given to head-hunting and were quite friendly with +the people about them. Mackay had met some of these people on a +former trip inland, and now he and Captain Bax hired their chief +and a party of his men to guide them up into savage territory. + +The travelers slept that night in the village, and before dawn +were up and ready to start on their dangerous undertaking. Before +them in the gray dawn rose hill upon hill, each loftier than the +last, till they melted into the mountains, the territory of the +dreaded head-hunters. They started off on a steady tramp, up +hills, down valleys, and across streams, until at last they came +to the foot of the first mountain. + +Before them rose its sheer side, towering thirty-five hundred +feet above their heads. It was literally covered with rank growth +of all kinds, through which it was impossible to move. So a plan +of march had to be decided upon. In front went a line of men with +long sharp knives. With these they cut away the creepers and +tangled scrub or undergrowth. Next came the coolies with the +baggage, and last the two travelers. It was slow work, and +sometimes the climb was so steep they held their breath, as they +crept over a sheer ledge and saw the depth below to which they +might easily be hurled. The chief of the guides himself collapsed +in one terrible climb, and his men tied rattan ropes about him +and hauled him up over the steepest places. + +During this wearisome ascent the most untiring one was the +missionary; and the sailor often looked at him in amazement. His +lithe, wiry frame never seemed to grow weary. He was often in the +advance line, cutting his way through the tangle, and here on +that first afternoon he met with an unpleasant adventure. + +The natives had warned the two strangers to be on the lookout for +poisonous snakes, and Mackay's year in Formosa had taught him to +be wary. But he had forgotten all danger in the toilsome climb. +He was soon reminded of it. They were passing up a slope covered +with long dense grass when a rustling at his side made the young +missionary pause. The next moment a huge cobra sprang out from a +clump of grass and struck at him. Mackay sprang aside just in +time to escape its deadly fangs. The guides rushed up with their +spears only to see its horrible scaly length disappear in the +long grass. + +That was not the only escape of the young adventurer, for there +were wild animals as well as poisonous snakes along the line of +march, and the man in the front was always in danger. But at the +front Mackay must be in spite of all warning. Nobody moved fast +enough for him. + +At last they reached the summit of the range. They were now on +the dividing line between Chinese ground and savage territory, +and the men who dared go a step farther went at terrible risk. +The head-hunters would very likely see that they did not return. + +But Mackay was all for pushing forward, and Captain Bax was no +less eager. So they spent a night in the forest and the next day +marched on up another and higher range. As they journeyed, the +travelers could not but burst into exclamations of delight at the +loveliness about them. Behind those great trees and in those +tangles of vines might lurk the head-hunters, but for all that +the beauty of the place made them forget the dangers. The great +banyan trees whose branches came down and took root in the earth, +making a wonderful round leafy tent, grew on every side. Camphor +trees towered far above them and then spread out great branches +sixty or seventy feet from the ground. Then there was the rattan +creeping out over the tops of the other trees and making a thick +canopy through which the hot tropical sun-rays could not +penetrate. + + +And the flowers! Sometimes Mackay and Bax would stand amazed at +their beauty. They came one afternoon to an open glade in the +cool green dimness of the forest. On all sides the stately +tree-ferns rose up thirty or forty feet above them, and +underneath grew a tangle of lovely green undergrowth. + +And upon this green carpet it seemed to their dazzled eyes that +thousands of butterflies of the loveliest form and color had just +alighted. And not only butterflies, but birds and huge insects +and all sorts of winged creatures, pink and gold and green and +scarlet and blue, and all variegated hues. But the lovely things +sat motionless, sending out such a delightful perfume that there +could be no doubt that they were flowers,--the wonderful orchids +of Formosa! Mackay was a keen scientist, always highly interested +in botany, and he was charmed with this sight. There were many +such in the forest, and often he would stop spellbound before a +blaze of flowers hanging from tree or vine or shrub. Then he +would look up at the tangled growths of the bamboo, the palm, and +the elegant tree-fern, standing there all silent and beautiful, +and he would be struck by the harmony between God's work and +Word. "I can't keep from studying the flora of Formosa," he said +to Captain Bax. "What missionary would not be a better man, the +bearer of a richer gospel, what convert would not be a more +enduring Christian from becoming acquainted with such wonderful +works of the Creator?" + +At last they stood on the summit of the second range and saw +before them still more mountains, clothed from summit to base +with trees. They were now right in savage territory and their +guide clambered out upon a spur of rock and announced that there +was a party of head-hunters in the valley below. He gave a long +halloo. From away down in the valley came an answering call, +ringing through the forest. Then far down through the thicket +Mackay's sharp eyes descried the party coming up to meet them. +Just then their own guide gave the signal to move on, and the +missionary and Captain Bax walked down the hill--the first white +men who had ever come out to meet those savages. + +Half-way down the slope the two parties came face to face. The +head-hunters were a wild, uncouth-looking company, armed to the +teeth. They all carried guns, spears, and knives and some had +also bows and arrows slung over their backs. Their faces were +hideously tattooed in a regular pattern, while they wore no more +clothes than were necessary. A sort of sack of coarse linen with +holes in the sides for their arms, served as the chief garment, +and generally the only one. Every one wore a broad belt of woven +rattan in which was stuck his crooked pointed knife. Some of the +younger men had their coats ornamented with bright red and blue +threads woven into the texture. They had brass rings on their +arms and legs too, and even sported big earrings. These were ugly +looking things made of bamboo sticks. The head-hunters were all +barefooted, but most of them wore caps--queer-looking things, +made of rattan. From many of them hung bits of skin of the boar +or other wild animals they had killed. They stood staring +suspiciously at the two strangers. Never before had they seen a +white man, and the appearance of the naval officer and the +missionary, so different from themselves, and yet so different +from their hated enemies, the Chinese, filled them with amazement +and a good deal of suspicion. After a little talk with the +guides, however, the visitors were allowed to pass on. As soon as +they began to move, the savages fell into line behind them and +followed closely. The two white men, walking calmly onward, could +not help thinking how easy it would be for one of those +fierce-looking tattooed braves to win applause by springing upon +both of them and carrying their heads in triumph to the next +village. + +As they came down farther into the valley, they passed the place +where the savages had their camp. Here naked children and +tattooed women crept out of the dense woods to stare at the +queer-looking Chinamen who had white faces and wore no cue. + +The march through this valley, even without the head-hunters at +their heels, would not have been easy. The visitors clambered +over huge trunks blown across the path, and tore their clothes +and hands scrambling through the thorny bushes. The sun was still +shining on the mountain-peaks far above them, but away down here +in the valley it was rapidly growing dark and very cold. They had +almost decided to stop and wait for morning when a light ahead +encouraged them to go on. They soon came upon a big camp-fire and +round it were squatted several hundred savages. The firelight +gleaming upon the dark, fierce faces of the head-hunters and on +their spears and knives, made a startling picture. + +They were round the visitors immediately, staring at the two +white men in amazement. The party of savages who had escorted +them seemed to be making some explanation of their appearance, +for they all subsided at last and once more sat round their fire. + +The newcomers started a fire of their own, and their servants +cooked their food. The white men were in momentary danger of +their lives. But they sat on the ground before the fire and +quietly ate their supper while hundreds of savage eyes were fixed +upon them in suspicious, watchful silence. + +The meal over the servants prepared a place for the travelers to +sleep, and while they were so doing, the young missionary was not +idle. He longed to speak to these poor, darkened heathen, but +they could not understand Chinese. However, he found several poor +fellows lying prostrate on the ground, overcome with malaria, and +he got his guide to ask if he might not give the sick ones +medicine. Being allowed to do so, he gave each one a dose of +quinine. The poor creatures tried to look their gratitude when +the terrible chills left them, and soon they were able to sink +into sleep. + +Before he retired to his own bed of boughs, the young missionary +sang that grand old anthem which these lonely woods and their +savage inhabitants had never yet heard: + +All people that on earth do dwell, +Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice. + +But these poor people could not "sing to the Lord," for they had +never yet so much as heard his name. + +All night the missionary lay on the ground, finding the chill +mountain air too cold for sleep, and whenever he looked out from +his shelter of boughs he saw hundreds of savage eyes, gleaming in +the firelight, still wide open and fixed upon him. + +Day broke late in the valley, but the travelers were astir in the +morning twilight. The mountain-tops were touched with rosy light +even while it was dark down in these forest depths. + +The chilled white men were glad to get up and exercise their +stiffened limbs. There were several of their party who could +speak both Chinese and the dialect of these mountaineers, and +through them Mackay persuaded the chief of the tribe to take them +to visit his village. + +He seemed reluctant at first and there was much discussion with +his braves. Evidently they were more anxious to go on a head-hunt +than to act the part of hosts. However, after a great deal of +chatter, they consented, and the chief and his son with thirty +men separated themselves from the rest of the band and led the +way out of the valley up the mountainside. The travelers had to +stop often, for, besides the natural difficulties of the way, the +chief proved a new obstacle. Every mile or so he would apparently +repent of his hospitality. He would stop, gather his tattooed +braves about him and confer with them, while his would-be +visitors sat on the ground or a fallen tree-trunk to await his +pleasure. Finally he would start off again, the travelers +following, but no sooner were they under way than again their +uncertain guide would stop. Once he and his men stood motionless, +listening. Away up in the boughs of a camphor tree a little +tailor-bird was twittering. The savages listened as though to the +voice of an oracle. + +"What are they doing?" Mackay asked of one of his men, when the +head-hunters stopped a second time and stared earnestly at the +boughs above. + +"Bird-listening," explained the guide. A few more questions drew +from him the fact that the savages believed the little birds +would tell them whether or not they should bring these strangers +home. They always consulted the birds when starting out on a +head-hunt, he further explained. If the birds gave a certain kind +of chirp and flew in a certain direction, then all was well, and +the hunters would go happily forward. But if the birds acted in +the opposite way, nothing in the world could persuade the chief +to go on. Evidently the birds gave their permission to bring the +travelers home, for in spite of many halts, the savages still +moved forward. + +They had been struggling for some miles through underbrush and +prickly rattan and the white men's clothes were torn and their +hands scratched. Now, however, they came upon a well-beaten path, +winding up the mountainside, and it proved a great relief to the +weary travelers. But here occurred another delay. The savages all +stopped, and the chief approached Mackay and spoke to him through +the interpreter. Would the white man join him in a head-hunting +expedition, was his modest request. There were some Chinese not +so far below them, cutting out rattan, and he was sure they could +secure one or more heads. He shook the big net head-bag that hung +over his shoulder and grinned savagely as he made his proposal. +If the white men and their party would come at the enemy from one +side, he and his men would attack them from the other, he said, +and they would be sure to get them all. The incongruity of a +Christian missionary being invited on a head-hunt struck Captain +Bax as rather funny in spite of its gruesomeness. This was a +delicate situation to handle, but Mackay put a bold front on it. +He answered indignantly that he and his friend had come in peace +to visit the chief, and that he was neither kind nor honorable in +trying to get his visitors to fight his battles. + +The interpreter translated and for a moment several pairs of +savage eyes gleamed angrily at the bold white man. But second +thoughts proved calmer. After another council the savages moved +on. + +They were now at the top of a range, and every one was ordered to +halt and remain silent. Mackay thought that advice was again to +be asked of some troublesome little birds, but instead the +savages raised a peculiar long-drawn shout. It was answered at +once from the opposite mountain-top, and immediately the whole +party moved on down the slope. + +Here was the same lovely tangle of vines and ferns and beautiful +flowers. Monkeys sported in the trees and chattered and scolded +the intruders. Down one range and up another they scrambled and +at last they came upon the village of the head-hunters. + +It lay in a valley in an open space where the forest trees had +been cleared away. It consisted of some half-dozen houses or huts +made of bamboo or wickerwork, and the place seemed literally +swarming with women and children and noisy yelping dogs. But even +these could not account for the terrible din that seemed to fill +the valley. Such unearthly yells and screeches the white men had +never heard before. + +"What is it?" asked Captain Bax. "Has the whole village gone +mad?" + +Mackay turned to one of his guides, and the man explained that +the noise came from a village a little farther down the valley. A +young hunter had returned with a Chinaman's head, and his friends +were rejoicing over it. The merrymaking sounded to the visitors +more like the howling of a pack of fiends, for it bore no +resemblance to any human sounds they had ever heard. + +Fortunately they were invited to stop at the nearer village and +were not compelled to take part in the horrible celebration. They +were taken at once to the chief's house. It was the best in the +village, and boasted of a floor, made of rattan ropes half an +inch thick. All along the outside wall, under the eaves, hung a +row of gruesome ornaments, heads of the boar and deer and other +wild animals killed in the chase, and here and there mingled with +them the skulls of Chinamen. The house held one large room, and, +as it was a cold evening, a fire burned at either end of it. At +one end the men stood chatting, at the other the women squatted. +The visitors were invited to sit by the men's fire. There were +several beds along the wall, two of which were offered to the +strangers. But they were not prepared to remain for the night, +and had decided to start back before the shadows fell. + +The whole village came to the chief's house and crowded round the +newcomers, men first, women and children on the outskirts, and +dogs still farther back. Several men came forward and claimed +Mackay as a friend. They touched their own breasts and then his, +in salutation, grinning in a most friendly manner. The young +missionary was at first puzzled, then smiled delightedly. They +were some of the poor fellows to whom he had given quinine the +evening before in the valley. + +This greeting seemed to encourage the others. They became more +friendly and suddenly one man who had been circling round the +visitors touched the back of Mackay's head and exclaimed, "They +do not wear the cue! They are our kinsmen." From that moment they +were treated with far greater kindness, and on several other +visits that Mackay made to the head-hunters, they always spoke +with interest of him as kinsman. + +But all danger was not over. The savages were still suspicious, +and at any moment the newcomers might excite them. So they +decided to start back at once, while every one was in a friendly +mood. They made presents to the chief and some of his leading +men; and left with expressions of good-will on both sides. + +By evening they had reached the valley where they had first met +the savages and here they prepared to spend the night. They had +no sooner kindled their fires than from the darkness on every +side shadowy forms silently emerged,--the savages come to visit +them! They glided out of the black forest into the ring of +firelight and squatted upon the ground until fully five hundred +dusky faces looked out at the travelers from the gloom. It was +rather an unpleasant situation, there in the depths of the +forest, but Mackay turned it to good account. First he and +Captain Bax made presents to the headmen and they were as pleased +as children to receive the gay ornaments and bright cloth the +travelers gave them. And then Mackay called their interpreter to +his side and they stood up together, facing the crowd. Speaking +through his interpreter, the missionary said he wished to tell +them a story. These mountain savages were veritable children in +their love for a story, as they were in so many other ways, and +their eyes gleamed with delight. + +It was a wonderful story he told them, the like of which they had +never heard before. It was about the great God, who had made the +earth and the people on it, and was the Father of them all. He +told how God loved everybody, because they were his children. +Chinese, white men beyond the sea like himself and Captain Bax, +the people of the mountains,--all were God's children. And so all +men were brothers, and should love God their Father and each +other. And because God loved his children so, he sent his Son, +Jesus Christ, to live among men and to die for them. He told the +story simply and beautifully, just as he would to little +children, and these children of the forest listened and their +savage eyes grew less fierce as they heard for the first time of +the story of the Savior. + +The next day, after a toilsome journey, the travelers reached the +plain below. They had made their dangerous trip and had escaped +the head-hunters, but as fierce an enemy was lying in wait for +both, an enemy that in Formosa devours native and foreigner +alike. Captain Bax was the first to be attacked. All day, as they +descended the mountain, the rain came down in torrents, a real +Formosan rain that is like the floodgates opening. The travelers +were drenched and chilly, and just as they emerged from the +forest Captain Bax succumbed to the enemy. Malaria had smitten +him. + +Shaking with chills and then burning with fever, he was placed in +a sedan-chair and carried the remainder of the way, three days' +journey, to the coast, where the medical attendants on board his +ship cured him. Mackay was feeling desperately ill all the way +across the plain, but with his usual determination he refused to +give in until he almost staggered across the threshold of his +home. + +The house had been closed in his absence. It was now damp and +chilly and everything was covered with mold. He lay down in his +bed, alternately shivering with cold and burning with fever. In +the next room A Hoa, who had gone to bed also, heard his teeth +chattering and came to him at once. It was a terrible thing to +the young fellow to see his dauntless Kai Bok-su overcome by any +kind of force. It seemed impossible that he who had cured so many +should become a victim himself. A Hoa proved a kind nurse. He +stayed by the bedside all night, doing everything in his power to +allay the fever. His efforts proved successful, and in a few days +the patient was well. But never again was he quite free from the +dreaded disease, and all the rest of his life he was subject to +the most violent attacks of malaria, a terrible memento by which +he was always to remember his first visit to the headhunters. + + + +CHAPTER VIII. CITIES CAPTURED AND FORTS BUILT + +Up the river to Go-ko-khi! That was always a joy, and whenever +Mackay could take a day from his many duties, with A Hoa and one +or more other students, he would go up and visit old Thah-so and +the kindly people of this little village. + +One day, after they had preached in the empty granary and the +rain had come in, Mr. Tan, the headman, walked up the village +street with them, and he made them an offer. They might have the +plot of ground opposite his house for a chapel-site. This was +grand news. A chapel in north Formosa! Mackay could hardly +believe it, but it seemed that there really was to be one. There +were many Christians in Go-ko-khi now, and each one was ready for +work. Some collected stones, others prepared sun-dried bricks, +others dug the foundation, and the first church in north Formosa +was commenced. + +Now Go-ko-khi was, unfortunately, near the great city of +Bang-kah. This was the most hostile and wicked place in all that +country, and A Hoa and Mackay had been stoned out of it on their +visit there. The people in Bang-kah learned of the new church +building, and one day, when the brick walls were about three feet +high, there arose a tramp of feet, beating of drums, and loud +shouts, and up marched a detachment of soldiers sent with orders +from the prefect of Bang-kah to stop the building of the chapel. +Their officers went straight to the house of the headman with his +commands. Mr. Tan was six feet two and he rose to his full height +and towered above his visitor majestically. The "mayor" of +Go-ko-khi was a Christian now, and on the wall of his house was +pasted a large sheet of paper with the ten commandments printed +on it. He pointed to this and said: "I am determined to abide by +these." The officer was taken aback. He was scarcely prepared to +defy the headman, and he went away to stir up the villagers. But +everywhere the soldiers met with opposition. There seemed no one +who would take their part. The officer knew he and his men were +scarcely within their rights in what they were doing; so, fearing +trouble, he marched back to the city, reporting there that the +black-bearded barbarian had bewitched the villagers with some +magic art. + +The prefect of Bang-kah next sent a message to the British +consul. The missionary was building a fort at Go-ko-khi, he +declared in great alarm, and would probably bring guns up the +river at night. He was a very bad man indeed, and if the British +consul desired peace he should stop this wicked Kai Bok-su at +once. And the British consul down in his old Dutch fort at Tamsui +laughed heartily over the letter, knowing all about Kai Bok-su +and the sort of fort he was building. + +So, in spite of all opposition, the little church rose steadily +up and up until it was crowned with a tiled roof and was ready +for the worshipers. + +That was a great day for north Formosa and its young missionary, +the day the first church was opened. The place was packed to the +doors, and many stood outside listening at the windows. And of +that crowd one hundred and fifty arose and declared that from +henceforth they would cast away their idols and worship only the +one and true God. Standing up there in his first pulpit and +looking down upon the crowd of upturned faces, and seeing the new +light in them which the blessed good news of Jesus and his love +had brought, Kai Bok-su's heart swelled with joy. + +He stayed with them some time after this, for, though so many +people had become Christians, they were like little children and +needed much careful teaching. Especially they must learn how to +live as Jesus Christ would have his followers live. Many heathen +as well as the Christians came to his meetings and listened +eagerly. At first the people found it almost impossible to sit +quiet and still during a service. They had never been accustomed +to such a task, and some of the missionary's experiences were +very funny. When they had sung a hymn and had settled down to +listen to the address, the preacher would no sooner start than +out would come one long pipe after another, pieces of flint would +strike on steel, and in a few minutes the smoke would begin to +ascend. Mackay would pause and gently tell them that as this was +a Christian service they must not do anything that might disturb +it. They were anxious to do just as he bade, so the pipes would +disappear, and nodding their heads politely they would say, "Oh, +yes, we must be quiet; oh, yes, indeed." + +One day when the congregation was very still and their young +pastor was speaking earnest words to them, one man less attentive +than the others happened to glance out of the window. Instantly +he sprang to his feet shouting, "Buffaloes in the rice-fields! +Buffaloes in the rice-fields!" and away he went with a good +fraction of the congregation helter-skelter at his heels. + +The missionary spoke again upon the necessity of quiet, and his +hearers nodded agreeably and murmured, "Yes, yes, we must be +quiet." + +They were very good for the next few minutes and the minister had +reached a very important point in his address, when there was a +great disturbance at the door. An old woman came hobbling up on +her small feet and poking her head in at the church door +screamed, "My pig has gone! Pig has gone!" and away went another +portion of the congregation to help find the truant porker. + +But, in spite of many interruptions, the congregation at +Go-ko-khi learned much of the beautiful truth of their new +religion. Their indulgent pastor never blamed his restless +hearers, but before the church was two months old he had trained +them so well that there was not a more orderly and attentive +congregation even in his own Christian Canada than that which +gathered in the first chapel in north Formosa. + +But the day came at last when he had to leave them, and the +question was who should be left over them. The answer seemed very +plain,--A Hoa. The first convert placed as pastor over the first +church! It was very fitting. Some months before, down in Tamsui, +when A Hoa had been baptized and had taken his first communion, +he had vowed to give his life more fully to his Master's service. +So here was his field of labor, and here he began his work. He +was so utterly sincere and lovable, so bright and jovial, so firm +of purpose and yet so kindly, that he was soon beloved by all the +Christians and respected by the heathen. And one of his greatest +helpers was widow Thah-so, who had been instrumental in bringing +the missionary with his glad tidings to her village. + +Mackay missed A Hoa sorely at first, but he had his other +students about him, and often when bent upon a long journey would +send for his first convert, and together they would travel here +and there over the island, making new recruits everywhere for the +army of their great Captain. + +The little church at Go-ko-khi was but the first of many. Like +the hepaticas that used to peep forth in the missionary's home +woods, telling that spring had arrived, here and there they came +up, showing that the long cruel winter of heathenism in north +Formosa was drawing to an end. + +Away up the Tamsui river, nestled at the foot of the mountains, +stood a busy town called Sin-tiam. A young man from this place +sailed down to Tamsui on business one day and there heard the +great Kai Bok-su preach of the new Jehovah-God, he went home full +of the wonderful news, and so much did he talk about it that a +large number of people in Sin-tiam were very anxious to hear the +barbarian themselves. So one day a delegation came down the river +to the house on the bluff above Tamsui. They made this request +known to the missionary as he sat teaching his students in the +study. Would he not come and tell the people of Sin-tiam the +story about this Jesus-God who loved all men? Would he go? Kai +Bok-su was on the road almost before the slow-going Orientals had +finished delivering the message. + +It was the season of a feast to their idols in Sin-tiam when the +missionary and his party arrived. Great crowds thronged the +streets, and the barbarian with his white face and his black +beard and his queer clothes attracted unusual attention. The +familiar cry, "Foreign devil," was mingled with "Kill the +barbarian," "Down with the foreigner." The crowd began to surge +closer around the missionary party, and affairs looked very +serious. Suddenly a little boy right in Mackay's path was struck +on the head by a brick intended for the missionary. He was picked +up, and Mackay, pressing through the crowd to where the little +fellow lay, took out his surgical instruments and dressed the +wound. All about him the cries of "Kill the foreign devil" +changed to cries of "Good heart! Good heart!" The crowd became +friendly at once, and Mackay passed on, having had once more a +narrow escape from death. + +The work of preaching to these people was carried on vigorously, +and before many months had passed the Christians met together and +declared they must build a chapel for the worship of the true +God. So, close by the riverside, in a most picturesque spot, the +walls of the second chapel of north Formosa began to rise. It was +not without opposition of course. One rabid idol-worshiper +stopped before the half-finished building with its busy workmen, +and, picking up a large stone, declared that he would smash the +head of the black-bearded barbarian if the work was not stopped +that moment. Needless to say, the missionary, standing within a +good stone's throw of his enemy, ordered the workers to continue. +George Mackay was not to be stopped by all the stones in north +Formosa. + +This stone was never thrown, however, and at last the chapel was +finished. Once more a preacher was ready to be its pastor. Tan +He, a young man who had been studying earnestly under his leader +for some time, was placed over this second congregation, and once +more there blossomed out a sure sign that the spring had indeed +come to north Formosa. + +Tek-chham, a walled city of over forty thousand inhabitants, was +the next place to be attacked by this little army of the King's +soldiers. The first visit of the missionary caused a riot, but +before long Tek-chham had a chapel with some of the rioters for +its best members, and a once proud graduate and worshiper of +Confucius installed in it as its pastor. + +Ten miles from Tek-chham stood a little village called Geh-bai. +The missionary-soldiers visited it, and to their delight found a +church building ready for them. It was quite a wonderful place, +capable of holding fully a thousand people without much crowding. +Its roof was the boughs of the great banyan tree; its one pillar +the trunk, and its walls the branches that bent down to enter the +ground and take root. It made a delightful shelter from the +broiling sun. And here Kai Bok-su preached. But a banyan does not +give perfect shelter in all kinds of weather, so when a number of +people had declared themselves followers of the Lord Jesus, a +large house was rented and fitted up as a chapel, with another +native pastor over it. + +Away over at Kelung a church was founded through a man who had +carried the gospel home from one of the missionary's sermons. +Here and there the hepaticas were springing up. From all sides +came invitations to preach the great news of the true God, and +the young missionary gave himself scarcely time to eat or sleep. +He worked like a giant himself, and he inspired the same spirit +in the students that accompanied him. He was like a Napoleon +among his soldiers. Wherever he went they would go, even though +it would surely mean abuse and might mean death. And, wherever +they went, they brought such a wonderful, glad change to people's +hearts that they were like slave-liberators setting captives +free. + +The most lawless and dangerous region in all north Formosa was +that surrounding the small town of Sa-kak-eng. In the mountains +near by lived a band of robbers who kept the people in a constant +state of dread by their terrible deeds of plunder and murder. +Sometimes the frightened townspeople would help the highwaymen +just to gain their good-will, and such treatment only made them +bolder. Bands of them would even come down into the town and +march through the streets, frightening every one into flight. +They would shout and sing, and their favorite song was one that +showed how little they cared for the laws of the land. + +You trust the mandarins, +We trust the mountains. + +So the song went, and when the missionary heard it first he could +not help confessing that after all it was a sorry job trusting +the mandarins for protection. + +The first time he visited the place with A Hoa they were stoned +and driven out. But the missionaries came back, and at last were +allowed to preach. And then converts came and a church was +established. The robber bands received no more assistance from +the people, and were soon scattered by the officers of the law. +And Sa-kak-eng was in peace because the missionary had come. + +But there was one place Mackay had so far scarcely dared to +enter. Even the robber-infested Sa-kak-eng would yield, but +Bang-kah defied all efforts. To the missionary it was the +Gibraltar of heathen Formosa, and he longed to storm it. North, +south, east, and west of this great wicked city churches had been +planted, some only within a few miles of its walls. But Bang-kah +still stood frowning and unyielding. It had always been very +bitter against outsiders of all kinds. No foreign merchant was +allowed to do business in Bang-kah, so no wonder the foreign +missionary was driven out. + +Mackay had dared to enter the place, being of the sort that would +dare anything. It was soon after he had settled in Formosa and A +Hoa had accompanied him. The result had been a riot. The streets +had immediately filled with a yelling, cursing mob that pelted +the two missionaries with stones and rotten eggs and filth, and +drove them from the city. + +But "Mackay never knew when he was beaten," as a fellow worker of +his once said, and though he was taking desperate chances, he +went once more inside the walls of Bang-kah. This time he barely +escaped with his life, and the city authorities forbade every +one, on pain of death, to lease or sell property to him or in any +way accommodate the barbarian missionary. + +But meanwhile Kai Bok-su was keeping his eye on Bang-kah, and +when the territory around had been possessed, he went up to +Go-ko-khi and made the daring proposition to A Hoa. Should they +go up again and storm the citadel of heathenism? And A Hoa +answered promptly and bravely, "Let us go." + +So one day early in December, when the winter rains had commenced +to pour down, these two marched across the plain and into +Bang-kah. By keeping quiet and avoiding the main thoroughfare, +they managed to rent a house. It was a low, mean hovel in a +dirty, narrow street, but it was inside the forbidden city, and +that was something. The two daring young men then procured a +large sheet of paper, printed on it in Chinese characters "Jesus' +Temple," and pasted it on the door. This announced what they had +come for, and they awaited results. + +Presently there came the heavy tramp, tramp of feet on the stone +pavement. Mackay and A Hoa looked out. A party of soldiers, armed +with spears and swords, were returning from camp. They stopped +before the hut and read the inscription. They shouted loud +threats and tramped away to report the affair to headquarters. + +In a short time, with a great noise and tramping, once more +soldiers were at the door. Mackay waked out and faced them +quietly. The general had given orders that the barbarian must +leave this house immediately, the soldier declared in a loud +voice. The place belonged to the military authorities. + +"Show me your proof," said Mackay calmly. His bold behavior +demanded respectful treatment, so the soldier produced the deed +for the property. + +"I respect your law," said Mackay after he examined it, "and my +companion and I will vacate. But I have paid rent for this place, +therefore I am entitled to remain for the night. I will not go +out until morning." + +His firm words and fearless manner had their effect both on the +soldiers and the noisy mob waiting for him outside, and the men, +muttering angrily, turned away. That night Mackay and A Hoa lay +on a dirty grass mat on the mud floor. The place was damp and +filthy, but even had it been comfortable they would have had +little sleep. For, far into the night, angry soldiers paraded the +street. Often their voices rose to a clamor and they would make a +rush for the frail door of the little hut. Many times the two +young fellows arose, believing their last hour had come. But the +long night passed and they found that they were still left +untouched. + +They rose early and started out. Already a great mob filled the +space in front of the house. Even the low roofs of the +surrounding houses were covered with people all out early to see +the barbarian and his despised companion driven from Bang-kah, +and perhaps have the added pleasure of witnessing their death. + +The two walked bravely down the street. Curses were showered upon +them from all sides; broken tiles, stones, and filth were thrown +at them, but they moved on steadily. The mob hampered them so +that they were hours walking the short distance to the river. +Here they entered a boat and went down a few miles to a point +where a chapel stood, and where some of Mackay's students awaited +them. + +But the man who "did not know when he was beaten" had not turned +his back on the enemy. He gathered the group of students around +him in the little room attached to the chapel. Here they all +knelt and the young missionary laid their trouble before the +great Captain who had said, "All power is given unto me." "Give +us an entrance to Bang-kah," was the burden of the missionary's +prayer. They arose from their knees, and he turned to A Hoa with +that quick challenging movement his students had learned to know +so well. + +"Come," he said, "we are going back to Bang-kah." + +And A Hoa, whose habit it was to walk into all danger with a +smile, answered with all his heart: + +"It is well, Kai Bok-su; we go back to Bang-kah." + +And straight back to this Gibraltar the little army of two +marched. It was quite dark by the time they entered. A Formosan +city is not the blaze of electricity to which Westerners are +accustomed, and only here and there in the narrow streets shone a +dim light. The travelers stumbled along, scarcely knowing whither +they were going. As they turned a dark corner and plunged into +another black street they met an old man hobbling with the aid of +a staff over the uneven stones of the pavement. Mackay spoke to +him politely and asked if he could tell him of any one who would +rent a house. "We want to do mission work," he added, feeling +that he must not get anything under false pretenses. + +The old man nodded. "Yes, I can rent you my place," he answered +readily. "Come with me." + +Full of amazement and gratitude the two adventurers groped their +way after him, stumbling over stones and heaps of rubbish. They +could not help realizing, as they got farther into the city, that +should the old man prove false and give an alarm the whole +murderous populace of that district would be around them +instantly like a swarm of hornets. But whether he was leading +them into a trap or not their only course was to follow. + +At last he paused at a low door opening into the back part of a +house. The old man lighted a lamp, a pith wick in a saucer of +peanut oil, and the visitors looked around. The room was damp and +dirty and infested with the crawling creatures that fairly swarm +in the Chinese houses of the lower order. Rain dripped from the +low ceiling on the mud floor, and the meager furniture was dirty +and sticky. + +But the two young men who had found it were delighted. They felt +like the advance guard of an army that has taken the enemy's +first outpost. They were established in Bang-kah! They set to +work at once to draw out a rental paper. A Hoa sat at the table +and wrote it out so that they might be within the law which said +that no foreigner must hold property in Bang-kah. When the paper +was signed and the money paid, the old man crept stealthily away. +He had his money, but he was too wary to let his fellow citizens +find how he had earned it. + +As soon as morning came the little army in the midst of the +hostile camp hoisted its banner. When the citizens of Bang-kah +awoke, they found on the door of the hut the hated sign, in large +Chinese characters, "Jesus' Temple." + +In less than an hour the street in front of it was thronged with +a shouting crowd. Before the day was past the news spread, and +the whole city was in an uproar. By the next afternoon the +excitement had reached white heat, and a wild crowd of men came +roaring down the street. They hurled themselves at the little +house where the missionaries were waiting and literally tore it +to splinters. The screams of rage and triumph were so horrible +that they reminded Mackay of the savage yells of the +head-hunters. + +When the mob leaped upon the roof and tore it off, the two hunted +men slipped out through a side door, and across the street into +an inn. The crowd instantly attacked it, smashing doors, ripping +the tiles off the roof, and uttering such bloodthirsty howls that +they resembled wild beasts far more than human beings. The +landlord ordered the missionaries out to where the mob was +waiting to tear them limb from limb. + +It was an awful moment. To go out was instant death, to remain +merely put off the end a few moments. Mackay, knowing his source +of help, sent up a desperate prayer to his Father in heaven. + +Suddenly there was a strange lull in the street outside. The +yells ceased, the crashing of tiles stopped. The door opened, and +there in his sedan-chair of state surrounded by his bodyguard, +appeared the Chinese mandarin. And just behind him--blessed sight +to the eyes of Kai Bok-su--Mr. Scott, the British consul of +Tamsui! + +Without a word the two British-born clasped hands. It was not an +occasion for words. There was immediately a council of war. The +mandarin urged the British consul to send the missionary out of +the city. + +"I have no authority to give such an order," retorted Mr. Scott +quickly. "On the other hand you must protect him while he is +here. He is a British subject." + +Mackay's heart swelled with pride. And he thanked God that his +Empire had such a worthy representative. + +Having again impressed upon the mandarin that the missionary must +be protected or there would be trouble, Mr. Scott set off for his +home. Mackay accompanied him to the city gate. Then he turned and +walked back through the muttering crowds straight to the inn he +had left. He stopped occasionally to pull a tooth or give +medicine for malaria, for even in Bang-kah he had a few friends. + +The mandarin was now as much afraid of the missionary as if he +had been the plague. He knew he dared not allow him to be +touched, and he also knew he had very little power over a mob. He +was responsible, too, to men in higher office, for the control of +the people, and would be severely punished if there was a riot. +He was indeed in a very bad way when he heard that the +troublesome missionary had come back, and he followed him to the +inn to try to induce him to leave. + +He found Mackay with A Hoa, quietly seated in their room. First +he commanded, then he tried to bribe, and then he even descended +to beg the "foreign devil" to leave the city. But Mackay was +immovable. + +"I cannot leave," he said, touched by the man's distress. "I +cannot quit this city until I have preached the gospel here." He +held up his forceps and his Bible. "See! I use these to relieve +pain of the body, and this gives relief from sin,--the disease of +the soul. I cannot go until I have given your people the benefit +of them." + +The mandarin went away enraged and baffled. He could not persuade +the man to go; he dared not drive him out. He left a squad of +soldiers to guard the place, however, remembering the British +consul's warning. + +In a few days the excitement subsided. People became accustomed +to seeing the barbarian teacher and his companion go about the +streets. Many were relieved of much pain by him too, and a large +number listened with some interest to the new doctrine he taught +concerning one God. + +He had been there a week when some prominent citizens came to him +with a polite offer. They would give him free a piece of ground +outside the city on which to build a church. Kai Bok-su's +flashing black eyes at once saw the bribe. They wanted to coax +him out when they could not drive him. He refused politely but +firmly. + +"I own that property," he declared, pointing to the heap of ruins +into which his house had been turned, "and there I will build a +church." + +They did everything in their power to prevent him, but one day, +many months after, right on the site where they had literally +torn the roof from above him, arose a pretty little stone church, +and that was the beginning of great things in Bang-kah. + +And so Gibraltar was taken,--taken by an army of two,--a Canadian +missionary and a Chinese soldier of the King, for behind them +stood all the army of the Lord of hosts, and he led them to +victory! + + + +CHAPTER IX. OTHER CONQUESTS. + +Away over on the east of the island ran a range of beautiful +mountains. And between these mountains and the sea stretched a +low rice plain. Here lived many Pe-po-hoan,-- "Barbarians of the +plain." Mackay had never visited this place, for the Kap-tsu-lan +plain, as it was called, was very hard to reach on account of the +mountains; but this only made the dauntless missionary all the +more anxious to visit it. + +So one day he suggested to his students, as they studied in his +house on the bluff, that they make a journey to tell the people +of Kap-tsu-lan the story of Jesus. Of course, the young fellows +were delighted. To go off with Kai Bok-su was merely transferring +their school from his house to the big beautiful outdoors. For he +always taught them by the way, and besides they were all eager to +go with him and help spread the good news that had made such a +difference in their lives. So when Kai Bok-su piled his books +upon a shelf and said, "Let us go to Kap-tsu-lan," the young +fellows ran and made their preparations joyfully. A Hoa was in +Tamsui at the time, and Mackay suggested that he come too, for a +trip without A Hoa was robbed of half its enjoyment. + +Mackay had just recovered from one of those violent attacks of +malaria from which he suffered so often now, and he was still +looking pale and weak. So Sun-a, a bright young student-lad, came +to the study door with the suggestion, "Let us take Lu-a for Kai +Bok-su to ride." + +There was a laugh from the other students and an indulgent smile +from Kai Bok-su himself. Lu-a was a small, rather stubborn-looking donkey with meek eyes and a little rat +tail. He was a +present to the missionary from the English commissioner of +customs at Tamsui, when that gentleman was leaving the island. +Donkeys were commonly used on the mainland of China, and though +an animal was scarcely ever ridden in Formosa, horses being +almost unknown, the commissioner did not see why his Canadian +friend, who was an introducer of so many new things, should not +introduce donkey-riding. So he sent him Lu-a as a farewell +present and leaving this token of his good-will departed for +home. + +Up to this time Lu-a had served only as a pet and a joke among +the students, and high times they had with him in the grassy +field behind the missionary's house when lessons were over. In +great glee they brought him round to the door now, "all saddled +and bridled" and ready for the trip. The missionary mounted, and +Lu-a trotted meekly along the road that wound down the bluff +toward Kelung. The students followed in high spirits. The sight +of their teacher astride the donkey was such a novel one to them, +and Lu-a was such a joke at any time, that they were filled with +merriment. All went well until they left the road and turned into +a path that led across the buffalo common. At the end of it they +came to a ravine about fifteen feet deep. Over this stretched. a +plank bridge not more than three feet wide. Here Lu-a came to a +sudden stop. He had no mind to risk his small but precious body +on that shaky structure. His rider bade him "go on," but the +command only made Lu-a put back his ears, plant his fore feet +well forward and stand stock still. In fact he looked much more +settled and immovable than the bridge over which he was being +urged. The students gathered round him and petted and coaxed. +They called him "Good Lu-a" and "Honorable Lu-a" and every other +flattering title calculated to move his donkeyship, but Lu-a +flattened his ears back so he could not hear and would not move. +So Mackay dismounted and tried the plan of pulling him forward by +the bridle while some of the boys pushed him from behind. Lu-a +resented this treatment, especially that from the rear, and up +went his heels, scattering students in every direction; and to +discomfit the enemy in front he opened his mouth and gave forth +such loud resonant brays that the ravine fairly rang with his +music. + +A balking donkey is rather amusing to boys of any country, but to +these Formosan lads who had had no experience with one the sound +of Lu-a's harsh voice and the sight of his flying heels brought +convulsions of merriment. "He's pounding rice! He's pounding +rice!" shouted the wag of the party, and his companions flung +themselves upon the grass and rolled about laughing themselves +sick. + +With his followers rendered helpless and his steed continuing +stubborn, Mackay saw the struggle was useless. He could not +compete alone with Lu-a's firmness, so he gave orders that the +obstinate little obstructer of their journey be trotted back to +his pasture. + +"And to think that any one of us might have carried the little +rascal over!" he cried as he watched the donkey meekly depart. +His students looked at the little beast with something like +respect. Lu-a had beaten the dauntless Kai Bok-su who had never +before been beaten by anything. He was indeed a marvelous donkey! + +So the journey to the Kap-tsu-lan plain was made on foot. It was +a very wearisome one and often dangerous. The mountain paths were +steep and difficult and the travelers knew that often the +head-hunters lurked near. But the way was wonderfully beautiful +nevertheless. Standing on a mountain height one morning and +looking away down over wooded hills and valleys and the lake-like +terraces of the rice-fields, Mackay repeated to his students a +line of the old hymn: + +Every prospect pleases and only man is vile. + +Around them the stately tree-fern lifted its lovely fronds and +the orchids dotted the green earth like a flock of gorgeous +butterflies just settled. Tropical birds of brilliant plumage +flashed among the trees. Beside them a great tree raised itself, +fairly covered with morning-glories, and over at their right a +mountainside gleamed like snow in the sunlight, clothed from top +to bottom with white lilies. + +But the way had its dangers as well as its beauties. They were +passing the mouth of a ravine when they were stopped by yells and +screams of terror coming from farther up the mountainside. In a +few minutes a Chinaman darted out of the woods toward them. His +face was distorted with terror and he could scarcely get breath +to tell his horrible story. He and his four companions had been +chipping the camphor trees up in the woods; suddenly the armed +savages had leaped out upon them and he alone of the five had +escaped. + +At last they left the dangerous mountain and came down into the +Kap-tsu-lan plain. On every side was rice-field after rice-field, +with the water pouring from one terrace to another. The plain was +low and damp and the paths and roads lay deep in mud. They had a +long toilsome walk between the rice-fields until they came to the +first village of these barbarians of the plain. It was very much +like a Chinese village,--dirty, noisy, and swarming with +wild-looking children and wolfish dogs. + +The visitors were received with the utmost disdain. The Chinese +students were of course well known, for these aborigines had long +ago adopted their customs and language. But the Chinese visitors +were in company with the foreigners, and all foreigners were +outcaste in this eastern plain. The men shouted the familiar +"foreign devil" and walked contemptuously away. The dirty women +and children fled into their grass huts and set the dogs upon the +strangers. They tried by all sorts of kindnesses to gain a +hearing, but all to no effect. So they gave it up, and plodded +through the mud and water a mile farther on to the next village. +But village number two received them in exactly the same way. +Only rough words and the barks of cruel dogs met them. The next +village was no better, the fourth a little worse. And so on they +went up and down the Kap-tsu-lan plain, sleeping at night in some +poor empty hut or in the shadow of a rice strawstack, eating +their meals of cold rice and buffalo-meat by the wayside, and +being driven from village to village, and receiving never a word +of welcome. + +And all through those wearisome days the young men looked at +their leader in vain for any smallest sign of discouragement or +inclination to retreat. There was no slightest look of dismay on +the face of Kai Bok-su, for how was it possible for a man who did +not know when he was beaten to feel discouraged? So still +undaunted in the face of defeat, he led them here and there over +the plain, hoping that some one would surely relent and give them +a hearing. + +One night, footsore and worn out, they slept on the damp mud +floor of a miserable hut where the rain dripped in upon their +faces. In the morning prospects looked rather discouraging to the +younger members of the party. They were wet and cold and weary, +and there seemed no use in going again and again to a village +only to be turned away. But Kai Bok-su's mouth was as firm as +ever, and his dark eyes flashed resolutely, as once more he gave +the order to march. It was a lovely morning, the sun was rising +gloriously out of the sea and the heavy mists were melting from +above the little rice-fields. Here and there fairy lakes gleamed +out from the rosy haze that rolled back toward the mountains. +They walked along the shore in the pink dawn-light and marched up +toward a fishing village. They had visited it before and had been +driven away, but Kai Bok-su was determined to try again. They +were surprised as they came nearer to see three men come out to +meet them with a friendly expression on their faces. + +The foremost was an old man who had been nicknamed "Black-face," +because of his dark skin. The second was a middle-aged man, and +the third was a young fellow about the age of the students. They +saluted the travelers pleasantly, and the old man addressed the +missionary. + +"You have been going through and through our plain and no one has +received you," he said politely. "Come to our village, and we +will now be ready to listen to you." + +The door of Kap-tsu-lan had opened at last! The missionary's eyes +gleamed with joy and gratitude as he accepted the invitation. The +delegation led the visitors straight to the house of the headman. +For the Pe-po-hoan governed their communities in the Chinese +style and had a headman for each village. The missionary party +sat down in front of the hut on some large flat stones and talked +over the matter with the chief and other important men. And while +they talked "Black-face" slipped away. He returned in a few +moments with a breakfast of rice and fish for the visitors. + +The result of the conference was that the villagers decided to +give the barbarian a chance. All he wanted it seemed was to tell +of this new Jehovah-religion which he believed, and surely there +could be no great harm in listening to him talk. + +In the evening the headman with the help of some friends set to +work to construct a meeting-house. A tent was erected, made from +boat sails. Several flat stones laid at one end and a plank +placed upon them made a pulpit. And that was the first church on +the Kap-tsu-lan plain! There was a "church bell" too, to call the +people to worship. In the village were some huge marine shells +with the ends broken off. In the old days these were used by the +chiefs as trumpets by which they called their men together +whenever they were starting out on the war-path. But now the +trumpet-shell was used to call the people to follow the King. +Just at dark a man took one, and walking up and down the +straggling village street blew loudly-- the first "church bell" +in east Formosa. + +The loud roar brought the villagers flocking down to the +tent-church by the shore. For the most part they brought their +pews with them. They came hurrying out of their huts carrying +benches, and arranging them in rows they seated themselves to +listen. + +Mackay and the students sang and the people listened eagerly. The +Pe-po-hoan by nature were more musical than the Chinese, and the +singing delighted them. Then the missionary arose and addressed +them. He told clearly and simply why he had come and preached to +them of the true God. Afterward the congregation was allowed to +ask questions, and they learned much of this God and of his love +in his Son Jesus Christ. + +The wonder of the great news shone in the eyes upturned to the +preacher. In the gloom of the half-lighted tent their dark faces +took on a new expression of half-wondering hope. Could it be +possible that this was true? Their poor, benighted minds had +always been held in terror of their gods and of the evil spirits +that forever haunted their footsteps. Could it be possible that +God was a great Father who loved his children? They asked so many +eager questions, and the story of Jesus Christ had to be told +over and over so many times, that before this first church +service ended a gray gleam of dawn was spreading out over the +Pacific. + +It was only the next day that these newly awakened people decided +that they must have a church building. And they went to work to +get one in a way that might have shamed a congregation of people +in a Christian land. This new wonderful hope that had been raised +in their hearts by the knowledge that God loved them set them to +work with glad energy. Kai Bok-su and his men still preached and +prayed and sang and taught in the crazy old wind-flapped tent by +the seashore, and the people listened eagerly, and then, when +services were over, every one,--preacher, assistants, and +congregation,--set bravely to work to build a church. Brave they +certainly had to be, for at the very beginning they had to risk +their lives for their chapel. A party sailed down the coast and +entered savage territory for the poles to construct the building. +They were attacked and one or two were badly wounded, though they +managed to escape. But they were quite ready to go back and fight +again had it been necessary. Then they made the bricks for the +walls. Rice chaff mixed with clay were the materials, and the +Kap-tsu-lan plain had an abundance of both. The roof was made of +grass, the floor of hard dried earth, and a platform of the same +at one end served as a pulpit. + +When the little chapel was finished, every evening the big shell +rang out its summons through the village; and out from every +house came the people and swarmed into the chapel to hear Kai +Bok-su explain more of the wonders of God and his Son Jesus +Christ. + +Mackay's home during this period was a musty little room in a +damp mud-walled hut; and here every day he received donations of +idols, ancestral tablets, and all sorts of things belonging to +idol-worship. He was requested to burn them, and often in the +mornings he dried his damp clothes and moldy boots at a fire made +from heathen idols. + +For eight weeks the missionary party remained in this place, +preaching, teaching, and working among the people. It was a +mystery to the students how their teacher found time for the +great amount of Bible study and prayer which he managed to get. +He surely worked as never man worked before. Late at night, long +after every one else was in bed, he would be bending over his +Bible, beside his peanut-oil lamp, and early in the morning +before the stars had disappeared he was up and at work again. +Four hours' sleep was all his restless, active mind could endure, +and with that he could do work that would have killed any +ordinary man. + +One evening some new faces looked up at him from his congregation +in the little brick church. When the last hymn was sung the +missionary stepped down from his pulpit and spoke to the +strangers. They explained that they were from the next village. +They had heard rumors of this new doctrine, and had been sent to +find out more about it. They had been charmed with the singing, +for that evening over two hundred voices had joined in a ringing +praise to the new Jehovah-God. They wanted to hear more, they +said, and they wanted to know what it was all about. Would Kai +Bok-su and his students deign to visit their village too? + +Would he? Why that was just what he was longing to do. He had +been driven out of that village by dogs only a few weeks before, +but a little thing like that did not matter to a man like Mackay. +This village lay but a short distance away, being connected with +their own by a path winding here and there between the +rice-fields. Early the next evening Mackay formed a procession. +He placed himself at its head, with A Hoa at his side. The +students came next, and then the converts in a double row. And +thus they marched slowly along the pathway singing as they went. +It was a stirring sight. On either side the waving fields of +rice, behind them the gleam of the blue ocean, before them the +great towering mountains clothed in green. Above them shone the +clear dazzling sky of a tropical evening. And on wound the long +procession of Christians in a heathen land, and from them arose +the glorious words: + +O thou, my soul, bless God the Lord, +And all that in me is +Be stirred up his holy name +To magnify and bless. + +And the heathen in the rice-fields stopped to gaze at the strange +sight, and the mountains gave back the echo of that Name which is +above every name. + +And so, marching to their song, the procession came to the +village. Everybody in the place had come out to meet them at the +first sound of the singing. And now they stood staring, the men +in a group by themselves, the women and children in the +background, the dogs snarling on the outskirts of the crowd. + +The congregation was there ready, and without waiting to find a +place of meeting, right out under the clear evening skies, the +young missionary told once more the great story of God and his +love as shown through Jesus Christ. The message took the village +by storm. It was like water to thirsty souls. The next day five +hundred of them brought their idols to the missionary to be +burned. + +And now Mackay went up and down the Kap-tsu-lan plain from +village to village as he had done before, but this time it was a +triumphal march. And everywhere he went throngs threw away their +idols and declared themselves followers of the true God. + +He was overcome with joy. It was so glorious he wished he could +stay there the rest of his life and lead these willing people to +a higher life. But Tamsui was waiting; Sin-tiam, Bang-kah, +Kelung, Go-ko-khi, they must all be visited; and finally he tore +himself away, leaving some of his students to care for these +people of Kap-tsu-lan. + +But he came back many times, until at last nineteen chapels +dotted the plain, and in them nineteen native preachers told the +story of Jesus and his love. Sometimes, in later years, when +Mackay was with them, tears would roll down the people's faces as +they recalled how badly they had used him on his first visit. + +It was while on his third visit here that he had a narrow escape +from the head-hunters. He was staying at a village called "South +Wind Harbor," which was near the border of savage territory. +Mackay often walked on the shore in the evening just before the +meeting, always with a book in his hand. One night he was +strolling along in deep meditation when he noticed some extremely +large turtle tracks in the sand. He followed them, for he liked +to watch the big clumsy creatures. These green turtles were from +four to five feet in length. They would come waddling up from the +sea, scratch a hole in the sand with their flippers, lay their +eggs, cover them carefully, and with head erect and neck +out-thrust waddle back. Mackay was intensely interested in all +the animal life of the island and made a study of it whenever he +had a chance. He knew the savages killed and ate these turtles, +but he supposed he was as yet too near the village to be molested +by them. So he followed the tracks and was nearing the edge of +the forest, when he heard a shout behind him. As he turned, one +of his village friends came running out of his hut waving to him +frantically to come back. Thinking some one must be ill, Mackay +hurried toward the man, to find that it was he himself who was in +danger. The man explained breathlessly that it was the habit of +the wily savages to make marks in the sand resembling turtle +tracks to lure people into the forest. If Kai Bok-su had entered +the woods, his head would certainly have been lost. + +It was always hard to say farewell to Kap-tsu-lan, the people +were so warm-hearted, so kind, and so anxious for him to stay. +One morning just before leaving after his third visit, Mackay had +an experience that brought him the greatest joy. + +He had stayed all night at the little fishing village where the +first chapel had been built. As usual he was up with the dawn, +and after his breakfast of cold boiled rice and pork he walked +down to the shore for a farewell look at the village. As he +passed along the little crooked street he could see old women +sitting on the mud floors of their huts, by the open door, +weaving. They were all poor, wrinkled, toothless old folk with +faces seamed by years of hard heathen experience. But in their +eyes shone a new light, the reflection of the glory that they had +seen when the missionary showed them Jesus their Savior. And as +they threw their thread their quavering voices crooned the sweet +words: + +There is a happy land +Far, far away. + +And their old weary faces were lighted up with a hope and +happiness that had never been there in youth. + +Kai Bok-su smiled as he passed their doors and his eyes were +misty with tender tears. + +Just before him, playing on the sand with "jacks" or tops, just +as he had played not so very long ago away back in Canada, were +the village boys. And as they played they too were singing, their +little piping voices, sweet as birds, thrilling the morning air. +And the words they sang were: + +Jesus loves me, this I know, +For the Bible tells me so. + +They nodded and smiled to Kai Bok-su as he passed. He went down +to the shore where the wide Pacific flung long rollers away up +the hard-packed sand. The fishermen were going out to sea in the +rosy morning light, and as they stood up in their fishing-smacks, +and swept their long oars through the surf, they kept time to the +motion with singing. And their strong, brave voices rang out +above the roar of the breakers: + +I'm not ashamed to own my Lord, +Or to defend his cause. + +And standing there on the sunlit shore the young missionary +raised his face to the gleaming blue heavens with an emotion of +unutterable joy and thanksgiving. And in that moment he knew what +was that glory for which he had so vaguely longed in childish +years. It was the glory of work accomplished for his Master's +sake, and he was realizing it to the full. + + + +CHAPTER X. REENFORCEMENTS + +Some of Mackay's happiest days were spent with his students. He +was such a wonder of a man for work himself that he inspired +every one else to do his best, so the young men made rapid +strides with their lessons. No matter how busy he was, and he was +surely one of the busiest men that ever lived, he somehow found +time for them. + +Sometimes in his house, sometimes on the road, by the seashore, +under a banyan tree, here and there and everywhere, the +missionary and his pupils held their classes. If he went on a +journey, they accompanied him and studied by the way. And it was +a familiar sight on north Formosan roads or field paths to see +Mackay, always with his book in one hand and his big ebony stick +under his arm, walking along surrounded by a group of young men. + +Sometimes there were as many as twenty in the student-band, but +somewhere in the country a new church would open, and the +brightest of the class would be called away to be its minister. +But just as often a young Christian would come to the missionary +and ask if he too might not be trained to preach the gospel of +Jesus Christ. + +Whether at home or abroad, pupils and teacher had to resort to +all sorts of means to get away for an uninterrupted hour +together. For Kai Bok-su was always in demand to visit the sick +or sad or troubled. + +There was a little kitchen separate from the house on the bluff, +and over this Mackay with his students built a second story. And +here they would often slip away for a little quiet time together. +One night, about eleven o'clock, Mackay was here alone poring +over his books. The young men had gone home to bed except two or +three who were in the kitchen below. Some papers had been dropped +over a pipe-hole in the floor of the room where Mackay was +studying, and for some time he had been disturbed by a rustling +among them. At last without looking up, he called to his boys +below: "I think there are rats up here among my papers!" + +Koa Kau, one of the younger of the students, ran lightly up the +stairs to give battle to the intruders. What was his horror when +he saw fully three feet of a monster serpent sticking up through +the pipe-hole and waving its horrible head in the air just a +little distance from Kai Bok-su's chair. + +The boy gave a shout, darted down the stair, and with a sharp +stick, pinned the body of the snake to the wall below. The +creature became terribly violent, but Koa Kau held on valiantly +and Mackay seized an old Chinese spear that happened to be in the +room above and pierced the serpent through the head. They pulled +its dead body down into the kitchen below and spread it out. It +measured nine feet. The students would not rest until it was +buried, and the remembrance of the horrible creature's visit for +some time spoiled the charm of the little upper room. + +The rocks at Kelung harbor were another favorite spot for this +little traveling university to hold its classes. Sometimes they +would take their dinner and row out in a little sampan to the +rocks outside the harbor and there, undisturbed, they would study +the whole day long. + +They always began the day's work with a prayer and a hymn of +praise, and no matter what subjects they might study, most of the +time was spent on the greatest of books. After a hard morning's +work each one would gather sticks, make a fire, and they would +have their dinner of vegetables, rice, and pork or buffalo-meat. +Then there were oysters, taken fresh off the rocks, to add to +their bill of fare. + +At five in the afternoon, when the strain of study was beginning +to tell, they would vary the program. One or two of the boys +would take a plunge into the sea and bring up a subject for +study,--a shell, some living coral, sea-weed, sea-urchins, or +some such treasure. They would examine it, and Kai Bok-su, always +delighted when on a scientific subject, would give them a lesson +in natural history. And he saw with joy how the wonders of the +sea and land opened these young men's minds to understand what a +great and wonderful God was theirs, who had made "the heaven and +the earth and the sea, and all that in them is." + +When they visited a chapel in the country, they had a daily +program which they tried hard to follow. They studied until four +o'clock every afternoon and all were trained in speaking and +preaching. After four they made visits together to Christians or +heathen, speaking always a word for their Master. Every evening a +public service was held at which Mackay preached. These sermons +were an important part of the young men's training, for he always +treated the gospel in a new way. A Hoa, who was Mackay's +companion for the greater part of sixteen years, stated that he +had never heard Kai Bok-su preach the same sermon twice. + +On the whole the students liked their college best when it was +moving. For on the road, while their principal gave much time to +the Bible and how to present the gospel, he would enliven their +walks by conversing about everything by the way and making it +full of interest. The structure of a wayside flower, the +geological formation of an overhanging rock, the composition of +the soil of the tea plantations, the stars that shone in the sky +when night came down upon them;--all these made the traveling +college a delight. + +Although his days were crammed with work, Mackay found time to +make friends among the European population of the island. They +all liked and admired him, and many of them tried to help the man +who was giving his life and strength so completely to others. +They were familiar with his quick, alert figure passing through +the streets of Tamsui, with his inevitable book and his big ebony +cane. And they would smile and say, "There goes Mackay; he's the +busiest man in China."* + +* See Chapter XIII. Formosa becomes Japanese territory. + +The British consul in the old Dutch fort and the English +commissioner of customs proved true and loyal friends. The +representatives of foreign business firms, too, were always ready +to lend him a helping hand where possible. His most useful +friends were the foreign medical men. They helped him very much. +They not only did all they could for his own recovery when +malaria attacked him, but they helped also to cure his patients. +Traveling scientists always gave him a visit to get his help and +advice. He had friends that were ship-captains, officers, +engineers, merchants, and British consuls. Everybody knew the +wonderful Kai Bok-su. "Whirlwind Mackay," some of them called +him, and they knew and admired him with the true admiration that +only a brave man can inspire. + +The friends to whom he turned for help of the best kind were the +English Presbyterians in south Formosa. They, more than any +others, knew his trials and difficulties. They alone could enter +with true sympathy into all his triumphs. At one time Dr. +Campbell, one of the south Formosan missionaries, paid him a +visit. He proved a delightful companion, and together the two +made a tour of the mission stations. Dr. Campbell preached +wherever they went and was a great inspiration to the people, as +well as to the students and to the missionary himself. + +One evening, when they were in Kelung, Mackay, with his +insatiable desire to use every moment, suggested that they spend +ten days without speaking English, so that they might improve +their Chinese. Dr. Campbell agreed, and they started their +"Chinese only." Next morning from the first early call of "Liong +tsong khi lai," "All, all, up come," not one word of their native +tongue did they speak. They had a long tramp that morning and +there was much to talk about and the conversation was all in +Chinese, according to the bargain. Dr. Campbell was ahead, and +after an hour's talk he suddenly turned upon his companion: +"Mackay!" he exclaimed, "this jabbering in Chinese is ridiculous, +and two Scotchmen should have more sense; let us return to our +mother tongue." Which advice Mackay gladly followed. + +His next visitor was the Rev. Mr. Ritchie from south Formosa, one +of the friends who had first introduced him to his work. Every +day of his visit was a joy. With nine of Mackay's students, the +two missionaries set out on a trip through the north Formosa +mission that lasted many weeks. + +But the more pleasant and helpful such companionship was the more +alone Mackay felt when it was over. His task was becoming too +much for one man. He was wanted on the northern coast, at the +southern boundary of his mission field, and away on the +Kap-tsu-lan plain all at once. He was crowded day and night with +work. What with preaching, dentistry, attending the sick, +training his students, and encouraging the new churches, he had +enough on his hands for a dozen missionaries. + +But now at last the Church at home, in far-away Canada, bestirred +herself to help him. They had been hearing something of the +wonderful mission in Formosa, but they had heard only hints of +it, for Mackay would not confess how he was toiling day and night +and how the work had grown until he was not able to overtake it +alone. But the Church understood something of his need, and they +now sent him the best present they could possibly give,--an +assistant. Just three years after Mackay had landed in Formosa, +the Rev. J. B. Fraser, M. D., and his wife and little ones +arrived. He was a young man, too, vigorous and ready for work. +Besides being an ordained minister, he was a physician as well, +just exactly what the north Formosan mission needed. + +Along with the missionary, the Church had sent funds for a house +for him and also one for Mackay. So the poor old Chinese house on +the bluff was replaced by a modern, comfortable dwelling, and by +its side another was built for the new missionary and his family. +One room of Mackay's house was used as a study for his students. + +After the houses were built and the new doctor was able to use +the language, he began to fill a long-felt want. Mackay had +always done a little medical work, and the foreign doctor of +Tamsui had been most kind in giving his aid, but a doctor of his +own, a missionary doctor, was exactly what Kai Bok-su wanted. +Soon the sick began to hear of the wonders the missionary doctor +could perform, and they flocked to him to be cured. + +It must not be supposed that there were not already doctors in +north Formosa. There were many in Tamsui alone, and very +indignant they were at this new barbarian's success. But the +native doctors were about the worst trouble that the people had +to bear. Their medical knowledge, like their religion, was a +mixture of ignorance and superstition, and some of their +practises would have been inexcusable except for the fact that +they themselves knew no better. There were two classes of medical +men; those who treated internal diseases and those who professed +to cure external maladies. It was hard to judge which class did +the more mischief, but perhaps the "inside doctors" killed more +of their patients. Dog's flesh was prescribed as a cure for +dyspepsia, a chip taken from a coffin and boiled and the water +drunk was a remedy for catarrh, and an apology made to the moon +was a specific for wind-roughened skin. For the dreaded malaria, +the scourge of Formosa, the young Canadian doctor found many and +amazing remedies prescribed, some worse than the disease itself. +The native doctors believed malaria to be caused by two devils in +a patient, one causing the chills, the other the fever. One of +the commonest remedies, and one that was quite as sensible as any +of the rest, was to tie seven hairs plucked from a black dog +around the sick one's wrist. + +But when the barbarian doctor opened his dispensary in Tamsui, a +new era dawned for the poor sick folk of north Formosa. The work +went on wonderfully well and Mackay found so much more time to +travel in the country that the gospel spread rapidly. + +But just when prospects were looking so fair and every one was +happy and hopeful, a sad event darkened the bright outlook of the +two missionaries. The young doctor had cured scores of cases, and +had brought health and happiness to many homes, but he was +powerless to keep death from his own door. + +And one day, a sad day for the mission of north Formosa, the +mother was called from husband and little ones to her home and +her reward in heaven. + +So the home on the bluff, the beautiful Christian home, which was +a pattern for all the Chinese, was broken up. The young doctor +was compelled to leave his patients, and taking his motherless +children he returned with them to Canada. + +The church at home sent out another helper. The Rev. Kenneth +Junor arrived one year later, and once more the work received a +fresh impetus. And then, just about two years after Mr. Junor's +arrival, Kai Bok-su found an assistant of his own right in +Formosa, and one who was destined to become a wonderful help to +him. And so one bright day, there was a wedding in the chapel of +the old Dutch fort, where the British consul married George +Leslie Mackay to a Formosan lady. Tui Chhang Mai, her name had +been. She was of a beautiful Christian character and for a long +time she had been a great help in the church. But as Mrs. Mackay +she proved a marvelous assistance to her husband. + +It had long been a great grief to the missionary that, while the +men would come in crowds to his meetings, the poor women had to +be left at home. Sometimes in a congregation of two hundred there +would be only two or three women. Chinese custom made it +impossible for a man missionary to preach to the women. Only a +few of the older ones came out. So the mothers of the little +children did not hear about Jesus and so could not teach their +little ones about him. + +But now everything was changed for them. They had a +lady-missionary, and one of their own people too. The Mackays +went on a wedding-trip through the country. Kai Bok-su walked, as +usual, and his wife rode in a sedan-chair. The wedding-trip was +really a missionary tour; for they visited all the chapels, and +the women came to the meetings in crowds, because they wanted to +hear and see the lady who had married Kai Bok-su. Often, after +the regular meetings when the men had gone away, the women would +crowd in and gather round Mrs. Mackay and she would tell them the +story of Jesus and his love. + +It was a wonderful wedding-journey and it brought a double +blessing wherever the two went. Their experiences were not all +pleasant. One day they traveled over a sand plain so hot that +Mackay's feet were blistered. Another time they were drenched +with rain. One afternoon there came up a terrific wind storm. It +blew Mrs. Mackay's sedan-chair over and sent her and the carriers +flying into the mud by the roadside. At another place they all +barely escaped drowning when crossing a stream. But the brave +young pair went through it all dauntlessly. The wife had caught +something of her husband's great spirit of sacrifice, and he was +always the man on fire, utterly forgetful of self. + +For two years they worked happily together and at last a great +day came to Kai-Bok-su. He had been nearly eight years in +Formosa. It was time he came home, the Church in Canada said, for +a little rest and to tell the people at home something of his +great work. + +And so he and his Formosan wife said good-by, amid tears and +regrets on all sides, and leaving Mr. Junor in charge with A Hoa +to help, they set sail for Canada. It was just a little over +seven years since he had settled in that little hut by the river, +despised and hated by every one about him; and now he left behind +him twenty chapels, each with a native preacher over it, and +hundreds of warm friends scattered over all north Formosa. + +He was not quite the same Mackay who had stood on the deck of the +America seven years before. His eyes were as bright and daring as +ever and his alert figure as full of energy, but his face showed +that his life had been a hard one. And no wonder, for he had +endured every kind of hardship and privation in those seven +years. He had been mobbed times without number. He had faced +death often, and day and night since his first year on the island +his footsteps had been dogged by the torturing malaria. + +But he was still the great, brave Mackay and his home-coming was +like the return of a hero from battle. He went through Canada +preaching in the churches, and his words were like a call to +arms. He swept over the country like one of his own Formosan +winds, carrying all before him. Wherever he preached hearts were +touched by his thrilling tales, and purses opened to help in his +work. Queen's University made him a Doctor of Divinity; Mrs. +Mackay, a lady of Detroit, gave him money enough to build a +hospital; and his home county, Oxford, presented him with $6,215 +with which to build a college. + +He visited his old home and had many long talks of his childhood +days with his loved ones. And he was reminded of the big stone in +the pasture-field which he was so determined to break. And he +thanked his heavenly Father for allowing him to break the great +rock of heathenism in north Formosa. + +He returned to his mission work more on fire than ever. If he had +been received with acclaim in his native land, his Formosan +friends' welcome was not less warm. Crowds of converts, all his +students who were not too far inland, and among them, Mr. Junor, +his face all smiles, were thronging the dock, many of them +weeping for joy. It was as if a long-absent father had come back +to his children. + +The work went forward now by leaps and bounds. Mackay's first +thought, after a hurried visit to the chapels and their +congregations, was to see that the hospital and college were +built. + +All day long the sound of the builders could be heard up on the +bluff near the missionaries' houses, and in a wonderfully short +time there arose two beautiful, stately buildings. Mackay +hospital they called one, not for Kai Bok-su--he did not like +things named for him--but in memory of the husband of the kind +lady who had furnished the money for it. The school for training +young men in the ministry was called Oxford College, in honor of +the county whose people had made it possible. + +Oxford College stood just overlooking the Tamsui river, two +hundred feet above its waters. The building was 116 feet long and +67 feet wide, and was built of small red bricks brought from +across the Formosa Channel. A wide, airy hall ran down the middle +of the building, and was used as a lecture-room. On either side +were rooms capable of accommodating fifty students and apartments +for two teachers and their families. There were, besides, two +smaller lecture-rooms, a museum filled with treasures collected +from all over Formosa by Dr. Mackay and his students, a library, +a bathroom, and a kitchen. + +The grounds about the college and hospital were very beautiful. +Nature had given one of the finest situations to be found about +Tamsui, and Kai Bok-su did the rest. The climate helped him, for +it was no great task to have a luxurious garden in north Formosa. +So, in a few years there were magnificent trees and hedges, and +always glorious flower beds abloom all the time around the +missionary premises. + +But all this was not accomplished without great toil, and Kai +Bok-su appeared never to rest in those building days. It seemed +impossible that one man should work so hard, he was in Tamsui +superintending the hospital building to-day, and away off miles +in the country preaching to-morrow. He never seemed to get time +to eat, and he certainly slept less than his allotted four hours. + +A great disappointment was pending, however, and one he saw +coming nearer every day. The trying Formosan climate was proving +too much for his young assistant, and one sad day he stood on the +dock and saw Mr. Junor, pale and weak and broken in health, sail +away back to Canada. + +But there was always a brave soldier waiting to step into the +breach, and the next year Kai Bok-su had the joy of welcoming two +new helpers, when the Rev. Mr. Jamieson and his wife came out +from Canada and settled in the empty house on the bluff. Yes, and +in time there came to his own house other helpers--very little +and helpless at first they were--but they soon made the house +ring with happy noise and filled the hearts of their parents with +joy. + +There were two ladies now to lead in the work for girls and +women. Their sisters in Canada came to their help too. The young +men had a school in Formosa, and why should there not be a school +for women and girls? they asked. And so the Women's Foreign +Missionary Society of Canada sent to Dr. Mackay money to build +one. It took only two months to erect it. It stood just a few +rods from Oxford College, and was a fine, airy building. Here a +native preacher and his wife took up their abode and with the +help of Mrs. Mackay and two other native Christian women they +strove to teach the girls of north Formosa how to make beautiful +Christian homes. + +And now to the two missionaries every prospect seemed bright. The +college, the girls' school, the hospital, were all in splendid +working order. Mr. and Mrs. Jamieson were giving their best +assistance. A Hoa and the other native pastors were working +faithfully. God's blessing seemed to be showering down upon the +work and on every side were signs of growth. And then, right from +this shining sky, there fell a storm of such fierceness that it +threatened to wipe out completely the whole north Formosan +mission. + + + +CHAPTER XI. UNEXPECTED BOMBARDMENT + +An enemy's battle-ships off the coast of Formosa! During all the +spring rumors of trouble had been coming across the channel from +the mainland. France* and China had been quarreling over a +boundary-line in Tongking. The affair had been settled but not in +a way that pleased France. So, without even waiting to declare +war, she sent a fleet to the China Sea and bombarded some of her +enemy's ports. Formosa, of course, came in for her share of the +trouble, and it was early in the summer that the French +battle-ships appeared. They hove in sight, sailing down the +Formosa Channel or Strait one hot day, and instantly all Formosa +was in an uproar of alarm and rage. The rage was greater than the +alarm, for China cordially despised all peoples beyond her own +border, and felt that the barbarians would probably be too feeble +to do them any harm. But that the barbarians should dare to +approach their coast with a war-vessel! That was a terrible +insult, and the fierce indignation of the people knew no bounds. +Their rage broke out against all foreigners. They did not +distinguish between the missionary from British soil and the +French soldiers on their enemy's vessels. They were all +barbarians alike, the Chinese declared, and as such were the +deadly foe of China. This Kai Bok-su was in league with the +French, and the native Christians all over Formosa were in league +with him, and all deserved death! + +*War in 1844. + +So hard days came for the Christians of north Formosa. Wherever +there was a house containing converts, there was riot and +disorder. For bands of enraged heathen, armed with knives and +swords, would parade the streets about them and threaten all with +a violent death the moment the French fired a shot. + +In some places near the coast the Christian people dared not +leave their houses, and whenever they sent out their children to +buy food, often a heathen neighbor would catch them, brandish +knives over the terrified little ones' heads and declare they +would all be cut to pieces when the barbarian ships came into +port. + +Every hour of the day and often in the night, letters came from +all parts of the country to Dr. Mackay. They were brought by +runners who came at great peril of their lives, and were sent by +the poor Christians. Each letter told the same tale; the lives +and property of all the converts were in grave danger if the +enemy did not leave. And they all asked Kai Bok-su to do +something to help them. + +Now Kai Bok-su was a man with great power and influence both in +Formosa and in his far-off Canada, but he had no means of +bringing that power to bear on the French. And indeed his own +life was in as great danger as any one's. + +He wrote to the Christians comforting them and enthusing them +with his own spirit. He bade them all be brave, and no matter +what came, danger or torture or death itself, they must be true +to Jesus Christ. He went about his work in the college or +hospital just as usual, though he knew that any day the angry mob +from the town below might come raging up to destroy and kill. + +The French had entered Kelung harbor and the danger was growing +more serious every day when Mackay found it necessary to go to +Palm Island, a pretty islet in the mouth of the Kelung river. It +was almost courting death to go, but he had been sent for, and he +went. He found the place right under the French guns and in the +midst of raging Chinese. Some of the faithful students were +there, and they were overcome with joy and hope at the sight of +him. He gathered them about him in a mission house for prayer and +a word of encouragement. Outside the Chinese soldiers paraded up +and down. Sometimes indeed they would burst into the room and +threaten the inmates with violence should the French fire. Kai +Bok-su went on quietly talking to his students. He urged them to +be faithful and reminded them of what their Master suffered at +the hands of a mob for their sake. But, in spite of their brave +spirits, the little company could not help listening for the boom +of the French guns. It was fully expected that the enemy would +soon fire, and when they did, the Christians well knew there +would be little chance for them to escape. + +But God had prepared a way out of the difficulty. The meeting was +scarcely over when a messenger came in, asking for the +missionary. A Christian on the mainland was very ill and wanted +Kai Bok-su to visit him. Mackay with his students left the island +at once and went to the home of the sick man. + +They had been gone but a short time when the thunder of the +French cannon broke over the harbor. The guns from the Chinese +fort answered, and had the missionary been on Palm Island he and +his converts would surely have been killed. + +The Chinese were no match for the French gunners. The bombardment +destroyed the fort and killed every soldier who did not manage to +get away. A great shell crashed into the magazine of the fort, +and the explosion hurled masses of the concrete walls an +incredible distance. The city about the fort was completely +deserted, for the people fled at the first sound of the guns. + +As soon as the firing was over, the rabble broke loose and a +perfect reign of terror prevailed. The mob carried black flags +and swept over town and country, plundering and murdering. The +Christians were of course the first object of attack, and to tear +down a church was the mob's fiercest joy. Seven of the most +beautiful chapels were completely destroyed and many others +injured. + +In the town of Toa-liong-pong was the home of Koa Kau, one of Kai +Bok-su's most devoted students. Here was a lovely chapel built at +great expense. The crowd tore it to pieces from roof to +foundation. Then, out of the bricks of the ruin they erected a +huge pile, eight feet high; they plastered it over with mud, and +on the face of it, next the highway where every one might see it, +they wrote in large Chinese characters: + +MACKAY, THE BLACK-BEARDED BARBARIAN, LIES HERE. HIS WORK IS +ENDED. + +They knew that the first was not true, but they firmly believed +the latter statement, for they understood little of the power of +the gospel. + +At Sin-tiam the crowd of ruffians smashed the doors and windows +of the church. Then they took the communion roll and read aloud +the names of the Christians who had been baptized. As each name +was announced, some of the murderers would rush off toward the +home of the one mentioned. Here they would torture and often kill +the members of the family. The native preacher and his family +barely escaped with their lives. One good old Christian man with +his wife, both over sixty, were dragged out into the deep water +of the Sin-tiam river. Here they were given a choice. If they +gave up Jesus Christ, their lives would be saved. If they still +remained Christians, they would be drowned right there and then. +The brave old couple refused to accept life at such a cost. + +"I'm not ashamed to own my Lord," was a hymn Kai Bok-su had +taught them, and they had meant every word as they had sung it +many times in the pretty chapel by the river. And so they were +"not ashamed" now. They were led deeper and deeper into the +water, and at every few feet the way of escape was offered, but +they steadily refused, and were at last flung into the river-- +faithful martyrs who certainly won a crown of life. + +These were only two among many brave Christians who died for +their Master's sake. Some were put to tortures too horrible to +tell to make them give up their faith. Some were hung by their +hair to trees, some were kicked or beaten to death, many were +slashed with knives until death relieved their pain. And on every +side the most noble Christian heroism was shown. In all ages +there have been those who died for their faith in Jesus Christ; +and these Formosan followers of their Master proved themselves no +less faithful than the martyrs of old. + +And where was Kai Bok-su while the mob raged over the country? +Going about his work in Tamsui as of old. Only now he worked both +night and day, and the anxiety for his poor converts kept him +awake in the few hours when he might have snatched some sleep. He +was here, there, everywhere at once, it seemed, writing letters +to encourage the Christians in distress, visiting those who were +wavering to strengthen their faith, teaching his students, +praying, preaching, night and day, he never ceased; and always +the mob surged about him threatening his life. + +The French ships now sailed out of Kelung harbor and took up +their position opposite Tamsui. Every one knew this probably +meant bombardment, and Dr. Mackay and Mr. Jamieson, standing on +the bluff before their houses, looked at each other and each knew +the other's thought. Bombardment would mean that the mob would +come raging up and destroy both life and property on the hill. + +But just as they expected the roar of guns to open, there sailed +into Tamsui harbor a vessel that flew a different flag from the +French. Mackay, looking at her through a glass, made out with joy +the crosses on the red banner of Britain! England had nothing to +do with this Chinese-French war, but as a British vessel can be +found lying around almost any port in the wide world, there of +course happened to be one near Tamsui. She gained a passport into +the harbor and sailed in with a very kindly mission; it was to +protect the lives of foreigners, not only from the French guns, +but from the Chinese mobs. + +The ship had been in the harbor but a short time when a young +English naval officer, carrying the British flag, came up the +path to the houses on the bluff. Dr. Mackay was in the library of +Oxford College, lecturing to his students, when the visitor +entered. + +The missionary made the sailor welcome and the young man told his +errand. Dr. Mackay was invited to bring his family and his +valuables and come on board the vessel to be the guest of the +captain until the disturbance was over. + +It was a most kindly invitation and Dr. Mackay shook his +visitor's hand warmly as he thanked him. He turned and translated +the message to his students, and their hearts stood still with +dismay. If Kai Bok-su, their stay and support, were to be taken +away, what would become of them? But Kai Bok-su had not changed +with the changing circumstances. He was still as brave and +undaunted as though trouble had never come to his island. + +He turned to the officer again with a smile. "My family would not +be hard to move," he said, "but my valuables--I am afraid I could +not take them." He made a gesture toward the students standing +about him. "These young men and many more converts scattered all +over north Formosa, are my valuables. Many of them have faced +death unflinchingly for my sake. They are my valuables, and I +cannot leave them." + +It was bravely said, just as Kai Bok-su might be expected to +speak, and the English officer's eyes kindled with appreciation. +The words found a ready response in his heart. They were the +words of a true soldier of the King. The officer went back to his +captain with Mackay's message and with a deep admiration in his +heart for the man who would rather face death than leave his +friends. + +So the British man-of-war drew off, leaving the missionaries in +the midst of danger. And almost immediately, with a great +bursting roar, the bombardment from the French ships opened. +Sometimes the shells flew high over the town and up to the bluff, +so Dr. and Mrs. Mackay put their three little ones in a safe +corner under the house; but they themselves as well as Mr. and +Mrs. Jamieson, went in and out to and from the college, and the +girls' school as though nothing were happening. + +Every day Mackay's work grew heavier and his anxiety for the +persecuted Christians grew deeper. He ate very little, and he +scarcely slept at all. It was not the noise of the carnage about +him that kept him awake. He would have fallen asleep peacefully +amidst bursting shells, but he had no opportunity. The whole +burden of the young Church, harassed by persecution on all sides, +seemed to rest upon his spirit. Anxiety for the Christians in the +inland stations from whom he could not hear weighed on him night +and day, and his brave spirit was put to the severest test. + +Only his great strong faith in God kept him up and kept up the +spirits of the converts who looked to him for an example. And a +brave pattern he showed them. Often he and A Hoa paced the lawn +in front of the house while shot and shell whizzed around them. +During the worst of the bombardment they came and went between +the college and the house as if they had charmed lives. One day +there was a great roar and a shell struck Oxford College, shaking +it to its foundations. The smoke from fort and ships had scarcely +cleared away when, crash! and the girls' school was struck by a +bursting shell. Next moment there was a fearful bang and a great +stone that stood in front of the Mackays' house went up into the +air in a thousand fragments. + +But when the firing was hottest, Kai Bok-su would repeat to his +students the comforting Psalm: + +"Thou shalt not be afraid for the terror by night; nor for the +arrow that flieth by day." + +But in spite of his brave demeanor, the strain on the shepherd of +this harassed flock was beginning to tell. And when the +bombardment ceased and the intense anxiety for his loved ones was +over, Kai Bok-su suddenly collapsed. Dr. Johnsen, the foreign +physician of Tamsui, came hurriedly up to the mission house to +see him. His verdict sent a thrill of dismay through every heart +that loved him, from the anxious little wife by the patient's +side, to the poorest convert in the town below. Their beloved Kai +Bok-su had brain fever. + +"Too much anxiety and too little sleep," said the medical man. +"He must sleep now," he added, "or he will die." But now that Kai +Bok-su had a chance to rest, he could not. Sleep had been chased +away too long to stay with him. Night and day he tossed about, +wide awake and burning with fever. His temperature was never less +than 102 during those days, and all the doctor's efforts could +not lower it. The awful heat of September was on, and the great +typhoons that would soon sweep across the country and clear the +air had not yet come. The glaring sun and the stifling damp heat +were all against the patient. At last one day the doctor saw a +crisis was approaching. He stood looking down at the hot, flushed +face, at the burning eyes, and the restless hands that were never +still, and he said to himself, "If the fever does not go down +to-day, he will die." + +The doctor went along College Road toward his home, answering the +eager, anxious questions that met him on all sides with only a +shake of his head. + +A Hoa followed him, his drawn face full of pleading. Was he no +better? he asked with quivering lips. It was the question poor A +Hoa asked many, many times a day, for he never left the house +when not away on duty. The doctor's face was full of sympathy and +his own heart weighed down as he sadly answered, "No." + +"If I only had some ice," he muttered, knowing well he had none. +"If there was only one bit of ice in Tamsui, I'd save him yet." + +Over in the British consulate Dr. Johnsen had another patient. +Mr. Dodd lay sick there, though not nearly as ill as the +missionary, and the physician's next visit was to him. When he +entered he found a servant carrying a tray with some ice on it to +the sick room. + +"Ice!" cried the doctor, overjoyed. "Where did it come from?" + +The servant explained that the steamship Hailoong had just +arrived in Tamsui harbor with it that morning. The doctor entered +Mr. Dodd's room. Would he give him that ice to save Mackay's +life? was the question he asked. To save such a life as Mackay's! +That was an absurd question, Mr. Dodd declared, and he +immediately ordered that every bit of ice he had should be sent +at once to the missionary's house. + +The doctor hurried back up the hill with the precious remedy. He +broke up a piece and laid it like a little cushion on poor Kai +Bok-su's hot forehead; that forehead beneath which the busy +brain, resting neither day nor night, was burning up. It had not +been there a great while before the restless eyes lost their +fire, the eyelids drooped and, wonderful sight, Kai Bok-su sank +into a sleep! The doctor hardly dared to breathe. If he could +only be kept asleep now, he had a chance. Dr. Mackay had never +been a sleeper, he well knew. He was too restless, too energetic, +to allow himself even proper rest. When Dr. Fraser, his first +assistant, had been with him, he had struggled to persuade him to +stay in bed at least six hours every night, but not always with +success. But now he was to show what he could do in the matter of +sleeping. All that night he lay, breathing peacefully, the next +day he slept on from morning till night, and little by little the +ice melted away on his forehead. He did not move all the next +night, and A Hoa and Mrs. Mackay and the doctor took turns at his +bedside watching that the precious ice was always there. Morning +came and it was all finished. The patient opened his eyes. He had +slept thirty-six hours, and a thrill of joy went through every +Christian heart in Tamsui, for their Kai Bok-su was saved! + +But though the crisis was over, he was still very weak, and such +was the state of affairs through the country that he was in no +condition to cope with them. Riot and plunder was the order of +the day. News of churches being destroyed, of faithful Christians +being tortured or put to death, were still coming to the mission +house, and no one could tell what day would bring Kai Bok-su's +turn. + +And now came an order from the British consul which the +missionaries could not disobey. He commanded that their families +must be moved at once from Formosa, as he could not answer for +their protection. So at once preparations for their departure +were made, and Mr. Jamieson took his wife and Mrs. Mackay and her +three little ones and sailed away for Hongkong. + +But once more Kai Bok-su stayed behind. It cost him bitter pain +to part with his loved ones, knowing he might never see them +again; he was weak and spent with fever, and his poor body was +worn to a shadow, but he stubbornly refused to leave the men who +had stood by him in every danger. The consul commanded, the +doctor pleaded, but no, Kai Bok-su would not go. If the danger +had grown greater, then all the more reason why he should stay +and comfort his people. And if God were pleased to send death, +then they would all die together. + +But he was so weak and sick that the doctor feared that if he +remained there would be little chance for the mob to kill him: +death would come sooner. So he came to his stubborn patient with +a new proposition. The Fukien, a merchant steamship, was now +lying in Tamsui harbor. She was to run to Hongkong and back +directly. If Mackay would only take that trip, his physician +urged, the sea air would make him new again, and he would return +in a short time and be ready to take up his work once more. + +It was that promise that moved Mackay's resolution. His utter +weakness held him down from work, and he longed with all his soul +to go out through the country to help the poor, suffering +churches. So he finally consented to take the short journey and +pay a visit to his dear ones in Hongkong. + +He did not get back quite as soon as he intended, for the French +blockade delayed his vessel. But at last he stepped out upon the +Tamsui dock into a crowd of preachers, students, and converts who +were weeping for joy about him and exclaiming over his improved +looks. + +The voyage had certainly done wonders for him, and at once he +declared he must take a trip into the country and visit those who +were left of the churches. + +It was a desperate undertaking, for French soldiers were now +scattered through the country, guarding the larger towns and +cities and everywhere mobs of furious Chinese were ready to +torture or kill every foreigner. But it would take even greater +difficulties than these to stop Kai Bok-su, and he began at once +to lay plans for going on a tour. + +He first went to the British consul and came back in high spirits +with a folded paper in his hand. He spread it out on the library +table before A Hoa and Sun-a, who were to go with him, and this +is what it said: + +British Consulate, Tamsui, + +May 27th, 1885. + +To THE OFFICER IN CHIEF COMMAND OF THE FRENCH FORCES AT KELUNG: + +The bearer of this paper, the Rev. George Leslie Mackay, D.D., a +British subject, missionary in Formosa, wishes to enter Kelung, +to visit his chapel and his house there, and to proceed through +Kelung to Kap-tsu-lan on the east coast of Formosa to visit his +converts there. Wherefore I, the undersigned, consul for Great +Britain at Tamsui, do beg the officer in chief command of the +French forces in Kelung to grant the said George Leslie Mackay +entry into, and a free and safe passage through, Kelung. He will +be accompanied by two Chinese followers, belonging to his +mission, named, respectively, Giam Chheng Hoa, and Iap Sun. + +A. FRATER, Her Britannic Majesty's Consul at Tamsui. + +They had all the power of the British Empire behind them so long +as they held that paper. Then they hired a burden-bearer to carry +their food, and Mackay cut a bamboo pole, fully twenty feet long, +and on it tied the British flag. With this floating over them, +the little army marched through the rice-fields down to Kelung. + +It was an adventurous journey. But, wonderful though it seemed, +they came through it safely. Poor Kai Bok-su's heart was torn as +he saw the ravages the mob had made on his churches. But what a +cheer his heart received when he found that persecution had +strengthened the converts that were left and everywhere the +heathen marveled that men should die for the faith the barbarian +missionary had taught. They were taken prisoners once for German +spies, and led far out of their way. But they came back to Tamsui +safely, having greatly cheered the faithful Christians who still +were true to their Master, Jesus Christ. It was early in June, +just one year from the opening of the war, that the French sailed +away. They were disgusted with the whole affair, the commander of +one vessel told Dr. Mackay, and they were all very glad it was +over. + +Mr. and Mrs. Jamieson and Dr. Mackay's family returned to their +homes on the bluff, and work started up again with its old vigor. + +But everywhere the heathen were in great glee. Christianity had +been destroyed with the chapels, they were sure. Wherever Mackay +went, shouts of derision followed him, and everywhere he could +hear the joyful cry "Long-tsong bo-khi!" which meant "The mission +is wiped out!" + +But strange though it may seem, the mission had never been +stronger, and it soon began to assert itself. Dr. Mackay went at +the work of repairing the lost buildings with all the force of +his nature. First, he and Mr. Jamieson and A Hoa sat down and +prepared a statement of their losses. This they sent to the +commander-in-chief of the Chinese forces, who had been +responsible for law and order. Without any delay or questioning +of the missionaries' rights, the general sent Dr. Mackay the sum +asked for--ten thousand Mexican dollars.* + +*About $5000. + +The next thing was to plan the new chapels and see to the +building of them. And before the shouts of "Long-tsong bo-khi" +had well started, they began to be contradicted by walls of brick +or stone that rose up strong and sure to show that the mission +had not been wiped out. Three of the chapels were commenced all +at once--at Sintiam, at Bang-kah and at Sek-khau. Before anything +was done Dr. Mackay and a party of his students went up to +Sin-tiam to look over the site. They stood up on the pile of +ruins, surrounded by the Christians, and a crowd of heathen came +around gleefully to watch them in the hopes of seeing their +despair. + +But to their amazement the little company of Christians led by +the wonderful Kai Bok-su, suddenly burst into a hymn of praise to +God who had brought them safely through all their troubles: + +Bless, O my soul, the Lord thy God, +And not forgetful be +Of all his gracious benefits +He hath bestowed on thee! + +The heathen listened in wonder to the words of praise where they +had expected lamentation, and they asked each other what was this +strange power that made men so strong and brave. + +And their amazement grew as the chapels, the lovely new chapels +of stone or brick, began to rise from the ruins of the old ones. +And not only did the old ones reappear, new and more beautiful, +but as Dr. Mackay and his native preachers went here and there +over the country others peeped forth like the hepaticas of +springtime, until there were not only the forty original chapels, +but in a few years the number had increased to sixty. + +The triumphant shout that the mission had been wiped out ceased +completely, and the people declared that they had been fools to +try to destroy the chapels, for the result had been only bigger +and better ones. + +"Look now," said one old heathen, pointing a withered finger to +the handsome spire of the Bang-kah chapel, that lifted itself +toward the sky, "Look now, the chapel towers above our temple. It +is larger than the one we destroyed." + +His neighbors crowding about him and gazing up with superstitious +awe at the spire, agreed. + +"If we touch this one he will build another and a bigger one," +remarked another man. + +"We cannot stop the barbarian missionary," said the old heathen +with an air of conviction. + +"No, no one can stop the great Kai Bok-su," they finally agreed, +and so they left off all opposition in despair. + +Yes, the cry of "Long-tsong bo-khi" had died, and the answer to +it was inscribed on the front of the splendid chapels that sprang +up all over north Formosa. For, just above the main entrance to +each, worked out in stucco plaster, was a picture of the burning +bush, and around it in Chinese the grand old motto: + +"Nec tamen consumebatur" ("Yet it was not consumed.") + + + +CHAPTER XII. TRIUMPHAL MARCH + +Up and down the length and breadth of north Formosa, seeming to +be in two or three places at once, went Kai Bok-su, during this +time of reviving after the war. He would be in Kelung to-day +superintending the new chapel building, in Tamsui at Oxford +College the next day, in Bang-kah preaching a short while after, +and no one could tell just where the next day. + +But every one did know that wherever he went, Christians grew +stronger and heathen gave up their idols. The Kap-tsu-lan plain, +away on the eastern coast, seemed to be a sort of pet among all +his mission fields, and he was always turning his steps thither. +For the Pe-po-hoan who lived there, while they were simple and +warm-hearted and easily moved by the gospel story, were not such +strong characters as the Chinese. So the missionary felt he must +visit them often to help steady their faith. + +Not long after the close of the war, he set off on a trip to the +Kap-tsu-lan plain. Besides his students, he was accompanied by a +young German scientist. Dr. Warburg had come from Germany to +Formosa to collect peculiar plants and flowers and to find any +old weapons or relics of interest belonging to the savage tribes. +All these were for the use of the university in Germany which had +sent him out. + +The young scientist was delighted with Dr. Mackay and found in +him a very interesting companion. They met in Kelung, and when +Dr. Warburg found that Dr. Mackay was going to visit the +Kap-tsu-lan plain, he joined his party. The stranger found many +rare specimens of orchids on that trip and several peculiar spear +and arrow heads to be taken back as curios to Germany. But he +found something rarer and more wonderful and something for which +he had not come to search. + +He saw in one place three hundred people gather about their +missionary and raise a ringing hymn of praise to the God of +heaven, of whom they had not so much as heard but a few short +years before. He visited sixteen little chapels and heard clever, +bright-faced young Chinese preachers stand up in them and tell +the old, old story of Jesus and his love. And he realized that +these things were far more wonderful than the rarest curios he +could find in all Formosa. + +When he bade good-by to Dr. Mackay, he said: "I never saw +anything like this before. If scientific skeptics had traveled +with a missionary as I have and witnessed what I have witnessed +on this plain, they would assume a different attitude toward the +heralds of the cross." + +Not many months later Dr. Mackay again went down the eastern +coast. This time he took three of his closest friends, all +preacher students, Tan He, Sun-a, and Koa Kau. With a coolie to +carry provisions, their Bibles, their forceps, and some malaria +medicine, they started off fully equipped. By steam launch to +Bang-kah, by a queer little railway train to Tsui-tng-kha and by +foot to Kelung was the first part of the journey. The next part +was a tramp over the mountains to Kap-tsu-lan. + +The road now grew rough and dangerous. Overhead hung loose rocks, +huge enough to crush the whole party should they fall. Underneath +were wet, slippery stones which might easily make one go sliding +down into the chasm below. + +As usual on this trip they had many hair-breadth escapes, for +there were savages too hiding up in the dense forest and waiting +an opportunity to spring out upon the travelers. Dr. Mackay was +almost caught in a small avalanche also. He leaped over a narrow +stream-bed, and as he did so, he dislodged a loose mass of rock +above him. It came down with a fearful crash, scattering the +smaller pieces right upon his heels; but they passed all dangers +safely and toward evening reached the shore where the great long +Pacific billows rolled upon the sand. They were in the +Kap-tsu-lan plain. + +Their journey through the plain was like a triumphal march. +Wherever a chapel had been erected, there were converts to be +examined; wherever there was no chapel, the people gathered about +the missionary and pleaded for one. They often recalled the first +visit of Kai Bok-su when "No room for barbarians" were the only +words that met him. + +But Dr. Mackay wished to go farther on this journey than he had +ever gone. Some distance south of Kap-tsu-lan lay another +district called the Ki-lai plain. The people here were also +aborigines of the island who had been conquered by the Chinese +like the Pe-po-hoan. But the inhabitants of Ki-lai were called +Lam-si-hoan, which means "Barbarians of the south." Dr. Mackay +had never been among them, but they had heard the gospel. A +missionary from Oxford College had journeyed away down there to +tell the people about Jesus and had been working among them for +some years. He was not a graduate, not even a student--but only +the cook! For Oxford College was such a place of inspiration +under Kai Bok-su, that even the servants in the kitchen wanted to +go out and preach the gospel. So the cook had gone away to the +Ki-lai plain, and, ever since he had left, Dr. Mackay had longed +to go and see how his work was prospering. + +So at one of the most southerly points of the Kap-tsu-lan plain +he secured a boat for the voyage south. The best he could get was +a small craft quite open, only twelve feet long. It was not a +very fine vessel with which to brave the Pacific Ocean, but where +was the crazy craft in which Kai Bok-su would not embark to go +and tell the gospel to the heathen? The boat was manned by six +Pe-po-hoan rowers, all Christians, and at five o'clock in the +evening they pushed out into the surf of So Bay. A crowd of +converts came down to the shore to bid them farewell. As the boat +shoved off the friends on the beach started a hymn. The rowers +and the missionaries caught it up and the two groups joined, the +sound of each growing fainter and fainter to the other as the +distance widened. + +All lands to God in joyful sounds +Aloft your voices raise, +Sing forth the honor of his name, +And glorious make his praise! + +And the land and the sea, answering each other, joined in praise +to him who was the Maker of both. + +And so the rowers pulled away in time to the swing of the Psalm, +the boat rounded a point, and the beloved figure of Kai Bok-su +disappeared from sight. + +Away down the coast the oarsmen pulled, and the four missionaries +squeezed themselves into as small a space as possible to be out +of the way of the oars. All the evening they rowed steadily, and +as they still swept along night came down suddenly. They kept +close to the shore, where to their right arose great mountains +straight up from the water's edge. They were covered with forest, +and here and there in the blackness fires twinkled. + +"Head-hunters!" said the helmsman, pointing toward them. + +Away to the left stretched the Pacific Ocean, and above shone the +stars in the deep blue dome. It was a still, hot tropical night. +From the land came the heavy scent of flowers. The only sound +that broke the stillness was the regular thud, thud of the oars +or the cry of some wild animal floating out from the jungle. As +they passed on through the warm darkness, the sea took on that +wonderful fiery glow that so often burns on the oceans of the +tropics. Every wave became a blaze of phosphorescence. Every +ripple from the oars ran away in many-colored flames--red, green, +blue, and orange. Kai Bok-su, sitting amazed at the glory to +which the Pe-po-hoan boatmen had become accustomed, was silent +with awe. He had seen the phosphorescent lights often before, but +never anything like this. He put his hand down into the molten +sea and scooped up handfuls of what seemed drops of liquid fire. +And as his fingers dipped into the water they shone like rods of +red-hot iron. Over the gleaming iridescent surface, sparks of +fire darted like lightning, and from the little boat's sides +flashed out flames of gold and rose and amber. It was grand. And +no wonder they all joined--Chinese, Malayan, and Canadian--in +making the dark cliffs and the gleaming sea echo to the strains +of praise to the One who had created all this glory. + +O come let us sing to the Lord, +To him our voices raise +With joyful noise, let us the rock +Of our salvation praise. + +To him the spacious sea belongs, +For he the same did make; +The dry land also from his hand +Its form at first did take. + +Dawn came up out of the Pacific with a new glory of light and +color that dispelled the wonders of the night. It showed the +voyagers that they were very near a low shore where it would be +possible to land. But the helmsman shook his head at the +proposal. He pointed out huts along the line of forest and +figures on the shore. And then with a common impulse, the rowers +swung round and pulled straight out to sea; for with Pe-po-hoan +experience they saw at once that here was a savage village, and +not long would their heads remain on their shoulders should they +touch land. + +The scorching sun soon poured its hot rays upon the tired rowers, +but they pulled steadily. They too, like Kai Bok-su, were anxious +to take this great good news of Jesus Christ to those who had not +yet learned of him. When safely out of reach of the headhunters, +they once more turned south, and, about noon, tired and hot, at +last approached the first port of the Ki-lai plain. Every one +drew a sigh of relief, for the men had been rowing steadily all +night and half the day. As they drew near Dr. Mackay looked +eagerly at the queer village. It appeared to be half Chinese and +half Lam-si-hoan. It consisted of two rows of small thatched +houses with a street between nearly two hundred feet wide. + +The rowers ran the boat up on the sloping pebbly beach and all +stepped out with much relief to stretch their stiffened limbs. +They had scarcely done so when a military officer came down the +shore and approaching Dr. Mackay made him welcome with the +greatest warmth. There was a military encampment here, and this +was the officer as well as the headman of the village. He invited +Dr. Mackay and his friends to take dinner with him. Dr. Mackay +accepted with pleased surprise. This was far better than he had +expected. He was still more surprised to hear his name on every +hand. + +"It is the great Kai Bok-su," could be heard in tones of deepest +respect from fishermen at their nets and old women by the door +and children playing with their kites in the wide street. + +"How do they know me?" he asked, as he was greeted by a +rice-seller, sitting at the open front of his shop. + +"Ah, we have heard of you and your work in the north, Pastor +Mackay," said his host, smiling, "and our people want to hear of +this new Jehovah-religion too." + +The cook-missionary had evidently spread wonderful reports of Kai +Bok-su and his gospel and so prepared the way. He was preaching +just then in a place called Ka-le-oan, farther inland. When the +officer learned that Dr. Mackay wanted to visit him he turned to +his servant with a most surprising order. It was to saddle his +pony and bring him for Kai Bok-su to ride to Ka-le-oan. + +The pony came, sleek and plump and with a string of jingling +bells adorning him. A pony was a wonderful sight in Formosa, and +Dr. Mackay had not used any sort of animal in his work since that +disastrous day when he had tried in vain to ride the stubborn +Lu-a. But now he gladly mounted the sedate little steed and +trotted away along the narrow pathway between the rice-fields +toward Ka-le-oan. + +Darkness had almost descended when he rode into the village and +stopped before a small grass-covered bamboo dwelling where the +cook-preacher lived. For years the people here had looked for Kai +Bok-su's coming, for years they had talked of this great event, +and for years their preacher had been writing and saying as he +received his reply from the eager missionary in Tamsui, "He may +come soon." + +And now he was really here! The sound of his horse's bells had +scarcely stopped before the preacher's house, when the news began +to spread like fire through the village. The preacher, who had +worked so hard and waited so long, wept for joy, and before he +could make Dr. Mackay welcome in a proper manner the room was +filled with men, all wildly eager for a sight of the great Kai +Bok-su, while outside a crowd gathered about the door striving to +get even a glimpse of him. The ex-cook of Oxford College had +preached so faithfully that many were already converted to +Christianity, many more knew a good deal of the gospel, and +crowds were ready to throw away their idols. They were weary of +their heathen rites and superstitions. They were longing for +something better, they scarcely knew what. "But the mandarin will +not let them become Christians," said the preacher anxiously. "It +is he who is keeping them from decision. He has said that they +must continue in idolatry, as a token of loyalty to China." + +"Are you sure that is true?" cried Dr. Mackay. + +The converts nodded. They had "heard" it said at least. + +But Kai Bok-su was not the man to accept mere hearsay. He was +always wisely careful to avoid any collision with the +authorities. But remembering the kindness shown him back in +Hoe-lien-kang, he could not quite believe that the mandarin who +had been so kind to him could be hostile to the religion of Jesus +Christ. + +To think was to act, and early the next morning, he was riding +back to the seacoast, to inquire how much of this rumor was true. + +His reception was very warm. It was all right, the officer +declared. Whatever had been said or done in the past must be +forgotten. Kai Bok-su might go where he pleased and preach his +Jehovah-religion to whomsoever he would. + +It was a very light-hearted rider the pony carried as he galloped +back along the narrow paths, with the good news for the +villagers. The word went round as soon as he arrived. Kai Bok-su +wanted to know how many were for the true God. All who would +worship him were at once to clear their houses of idols and +declare that they would serve Jehovah and him only. At dark a +great crowd gathered in an open space in the village. +Representatives from five villages were there, chiefs were +shouting to their people, and when Dr. Mackay and his students +arrived, the place was all noise and confusion. He was puzzled. +It almost looked as if there was to be a riot, though the voices +did not sound angry. + +He climbed up on a pile of rubbish and his face shone clear in +the light of the flaring torches. His voice rang out loud and +commanding above the tumult. + +"What is this noise about?" he cried. "Is there a difference of +opinion among you as to whether you shall worship these poor toys +of wood and stone, or the true God who is your Father?" + +He paused and as if from one man came back the answer in a mighty +shout: + +"No, we will worship the true God!" + +The tumult had been one of enthusiasm and not of dispute! + +Kai Bok-su's heart gave a great bound. For a moment he could not +speak. He who had so often stood up fearless and bold before a +raging heathen mob, now faltered before this sea of eager faces, +upturned to him. It seemed too good to be true that all this +crowd, representing five villages, was anxious to become +followers of the God of heaven. His voice grew steady at last, +and standing up there in the flickering torchlight he told those +children of the plain what it meant to be a follower of Jesus +Christ. It was a late hour when the meeting broke up, but even +then Dr. Mackay could not go to bed. Never since the day that A +Hoa, his first convert, had accepted Jesus Christ as his Savior, +had he felt such joy, and all night he walked up and down in +front of the preacher's house, unable to sleep for the +thankfulness to God that surged in his heart. + +Morning brought a wonderful day for the Ki-lai plain. It was like +a day when freedom from slavery was announced. Had there been +bells in the village they would certainly have been rung. But joy +bells were ringing in every heart. Nobody could work all day. The +rice-fields and the shops and the pottery works lay idle. There +was but one business to do that day, and that was to get rid of +their idols. + +Early in the morning the mayor of the place, or the headman as he +was called, came to the house to invite the missionary and his +party to join him. Behind him walked four big boys, carrying two +large wicker baskets, hanging from poles across their shoulders; +and behind them came the whole village, men, women, and children, +their faces shining with a new joy. The procession moved along +from house to house. At every place it stopped and out from the +home were carried idols, ancestral tablets, mock-money, flags, +incense sticks, and all the stuff used in idol worship. These +were all emptied into the baskets carried by the boys. When even +the temple had been ransacked and the work of clearing out the +idols in the village was finished, the procession moved on to the +next hamlet. The villages were very near each other, so the +journey was not wearisome; and at last when every vestige of the +old idolatrous life had been taken from the homes of five +villages, the happy crowd marched back to the first village. +There was a large courtyard near the temple and here the +procession halted. The boys dropped their well-filled baskets, +and their contents were piled in the center of the court. The +people gathered about the heap and with shouts of joy set fire to +these signs of their lifelong slavery. Soon the pile was blazing +and crackling, and all the people, even the chiefs of the +villages, vied with each other in burning up the idols they had +so lately besought for blessings. + +And then they turned toward the heathen temple and delivered it +over to Kai Bok-su for a chapel in which he and his students +might preach the gospel. + +And so the temple was lighted up for a new kind of worship. It +had been used for worship many, many times before, but oh, how +different it was this time! Instead of coming in fear of demons, +dread of their gods' anger, and determination to cheat them if +possible, these poor folk crowded into the new-old temple with +light, happy hearts, as children coming to their Father. And was +not God their Father, only they had not known him before? + +The heathen temple was dedicated to the worship of the true God +by singing the old but always new, one hundredth Psalm. The +Lam-si-hoan were not very good singers. They had not much idea of +tune. They had less idea of just when to start, and there was +very little to be said about the harmony of those hundreds of +voices. But in spite of it all, Kai Bok-su had to confess that +never in the music of his homeland or in the more finished +harmonies of Europe, had he heard anything so grandly uplifting +as when those newly-freed people stood up in their idol temple +and with heart and soul and voice unitedly poured forth in +thunderous volume of praise the great command: + +All people that on earth do dwell, +Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice. + +For a whole week with his pony and groom, which were still his to +do with as he pleased, the busy missionary rode up and down this +plain, visiting the villages, preaching, and teaching the people +how to live as Jesus Christ their Savior had lived; for it was +necessary to impress upon their childlike minds that it would be +of no use to burn up the idols in their homes and temple unless +they also gave up the still more harmful idols in their hearts. + +But at last the day came when the pony had to be returned to its +owner and the missionary and his helpers must leave. It was a sad +day but a joyous one--the day that great visit came to an end. +Crowds of Christians, fain to keep him, followed him down to the +shore, and many kindly but reluctant hands shoved the little boat +out into the surf. And as the rowers sent it skimming out over +the great Pacific rollers, there rose from the beach the parting +hymn, the one that had dedicated the heathen temple to the +worship of the true God: + +All people that on earth do dwell, +Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice. + +and from the rowers and the missionaries in the boat, came back +the glad echo: + +Know that the Lord is God indeed +Without our aid he did us make. + +They were soon out of sight. The rowers pulled hard, but a stiff +northeaster straight from Japan was blowing against them, and +they made but little headway. Night came down, and they were +again skirting those dark cliffs, where, here and there, along +the narrow strip of sand, the night-fires of the savages flamed +out against the dark tangle of foliage. All night long the rowers +struggled against the wind. They were afraid to go out far for +the waves were wild, they dared not land, for, crueler than the +sea, the head-hunters waited for them on the shore. And so all +that night, taking turns with the rowers, the missionary and his +students toiled against the wind and wave. The dawn came up gray +and stormy, and they were still tossing about among the white +billows. No one had touched food for twenty-four hours. They had +rice in the boat, but there was no place where they dared land to +have it cooked. There was nothing to do but to pull, pull at the +oars, and a weary task it seemed, for the boat appeared to make +little headway, and the rowers barely succeeded in keeping her +from being dashed upon the rocks. + +They were becoming almost too weak to keep any control over their +boat, when about three o'clock in the afternoon they managed to +round a point. There before them curved a beautiful bay. Behind +it and on both sides arose a perpendicular wall several hundred +feet high. At its foot stretched a narrow sandy beach. It was an +ideal spot, secure from savages both by land and sea. A shout of +encouragement from Kai Bok-su was the one thing needed. Tired +arms and aching backs bent to the oars for one last effort, and +when the boat swept up on the sandy beach every one uttered a +heartfelt prayer of thankfulness to the Father who had provided +this little haven in a time of such distress. + +The rest of the journey was made safely, and just forty days +after their departure the four missionaries returned, worn out, +to Tamsui. + + + +CHAPTER XIII. THE LAND OCCUPIED + +But Kai Bok-su had no sooner returned than he was off again. He +was not one of that sort who could settle down after an +achievement, content to rest for a little. He seemed to forget +all about what had been done and was "up and at it again." If he +"did not know when he was beaten," neither did he seem to know +when he was successful; and like Alexander the Great he was +always sighing for new worlds to conquer, yes, and marching off +and conquering them too. + +But every time he returned to his work at Tamsui from one of +these tours, it was borne in upon him more forcibly every day +that his faithful assistant who was left in charge, could not +long shoulder his work. Mr. Jamieson was fighting a losing battle +with ill health. The terrible experiences during the war year, +the hard work, and the trying Formosan climate had all combined +against him. His brave spirit could not always sustain the body +that was growing gradually weaker, and one day, a dark, sad day, +the devoted soul was set free from the poor pain-racked body. He +had given eight years of hard, faithful work to the study of the +language and to the service of the Master in the mission. Mrs. +Jamieson returned to Canada, and once more Dr. Mackay faced the +work, unaided except by native preachers. But he was not daunted +even by this bereavement, for he always lived in the perfect +faith that God was on his side. + +And then, he had by this time three new assistants in the +mission-house on the bluff. They did not even guess that they +were any help to him, for they could never go with him on his +mission tours. But by their sweet merry ways and their joyous +welcome to father, when he returned, they did help him greatly, +and made his home-comings a delight. + +"How many did you baptize, father?" was baby George's inevitable +question on his father's return. For already the wise toddler had +learned something of the bitter enmity of the heathen world, and +knew that converts meant friends. Then father's home-coming meant +presents too, wonderful things, bows and arrows, rare curios for +the museum in the college, and, once, a pair of the funniest +monkeys in the world, which proved most entertaining playthings +for the little boy and his two sisters. Another time the father +brought home a young bear to keep the monkeys company, but they +were not at all polite to their guest, for they made poor bruin's +life miserable by teasing him. They would torment him until he +would stamp with rage. But he was not always badly used, for when +the three children would come out to feed him, he was very happy, +and he would show his pleasure by putting his head between his +paws and rolling over and over like a big ball of fur. And he +always seemed quite proud of his performance when his three +little keepers shrieked with laughter. + +The next year after Mr. Jamieson's death the empty mission-house +was once more filled. In September the Rev. Mr. William and Mrs. +Gauld sailed from Canada, and with their arrival Dr. Mackay took +new heart. + +The new missionaries had learned the language and their work was +well under way when the time came round once more for Dr. Mackay +to go back to Canada for a year's rest. This time there was quite +a little party went with him: his wife, their three children, and +Koa Kau, one of his students. + +Among those left to assist Mr. Gauld, there was none he relied +upon more than A Hoa. Mr. Gauld, at the close of his second +year's work, wrote of this fellow worker: "The longer and better +I know him, the more I can love him, trust his honesty, and +respect his judgment. He knows his own people, from the governor +of the island to the ragged opium-smoking beggar, and has +influence with them all." + +There were many others besides A Hoa to render the missionary +faithful help; among them Sun-a and Tan He, the latter pastor of +the church of Sin-tiam; and just because Kai Bok-su was away they +worked the harder, that he might receive a good report of them on +his return. + +The separation was longer this time, for Dr. Mackay wished to +send his children to school, and he decided that they would +remain in Canada two years. He was made Moderator of the General +Assembly, too, and the Church at home needed him to stir them up +to a greater desire to help those beyond the seas. + +While he was working and preaching in Canada, his heart turned +always to his beloved Formosa, and letters from the friends there +were among his greatest pleasures. A Hoa's of course, were doubly +welcome. Pastor Giam, the name by which he was now called, was +Mr. Gauld's right-hand helper in those days, and once he went +alone on a tour away to the eastern shore. While there he had an +adventure of which he wrote to Kai Bok-su. + +"The other morning while walking on the seashore I saw a +sailing-vessel slowly drifting shoreward and in danger of being +wrecked, for there was a fog and a heavy sea. I hastened back to +the chapel and beat the drum to call the villagers to worship. As +soon as it was over I asked converts and heathen to go in their +fishing-boats as quickly as possible and let the sailors know +they need not fear savages there, and if they wished to come +ashore a chapel would be given them to stay in. The whole crew +came ashore in the boats at once. I gave your old room to the +captain, his wife and child, and other accommodation to the rest. +I then hurried away to a mandarin and asked him to send men to +protect the ship." + +When Kai Bok-su read the story and remembered that, twenty-five +years earlier, the crew of that vessel would have been murdered +and their ship plundered, he exclaimed with joy, "Blessed +Christianity! Surely, + +Blessings abound where'er He reigns!" + +A Hoa had another tale to tell. One afternoon he had a strange +congregation in that little chapel. There were one hundred and +forty-six native converts and twenty-one Europeans. These were +made up of seven nationalities, British, American, French, +Danish, Turkish, Swiss, and Norwegian. Their ship was from +America and was bound for Hongkong with coal-oil. + +They were amazed at seeing a pretty, neat chapel away in this +wild, remote place, which they had always supposed was overrun by +head-hunters, and indeed it was just that little chapel that had +made the great change. These men now entered it and joined the +natives in worshiping the true God, where, only a few years +before, their blood would have stained the sands. + +A Hoa told them something of the great Kai Bok-su and the +struggles he had had with savages and other enemies, when he +first came to this region. The visitors were very much interested +and did not wonder that the name "Kai Bok-su" was held in such +reverence. When they left, the captain presented the little +chapel with a bell, a lamp, and a mirror which were on board his +ship. + +The long months of separation were rolling around, when something +happened that brought Kai Bok-su back to his island in great +haste. Once more war swept over Formosa. This time the trouble +was between China and Japan. The big Empire proved no match for +the clever Japanese, and everywhere China was forced to give in. + +One of the places which Japan set her affections on was Formosa. +She must have the Beautiful Isle and have it at once. China was +in no position to say no, so the Chinese envoy went on board a +Japanese vessel and sailed toward Formosa. When in sight of its +lovely mountains, without any ceremony he pointed to the land and +said, "There it is, take it." And that was how Formosa became a +province of Japan. At noon on May 26, 1895, the dragon flag of +China was hauled down from Formosan forts and the banner of Japan +was hoisted. + +Of course this was not done without a struggle. The Formosans +themselves fought hard, and in the fight the Christians came in +for times of trouble. So Kai Bok-su, hearing that his "valuables" +were again in danger, set sail for Tamsui. + +When he arrived the war was practically over, but everywhere were +signs of strife. As soon as he was able, he took A Hoa and Koa +Kau and visited the chapels all over the country. Everywhere were +sights to make his heart very sad. The Japanese soldiers had used +many of the chapels for military stables, and they were in a +filthy state. At one place the native preacher was a prisoner, +the Japanese believing him to be a spy. At another village the +Christians sadly led their missionary out to a tea plantation and +showed him the place where their beloved pastor had been shot by +the Japanese soldiers. Mackay stood beside his grave, his heart +heavy with sorrow. + +But his courage never left him. The native Christians everywhere +forgot their woes in the great joy of seeing him once more; and +he joined them in a brave attempt to put things to rights once +more. The Japanese paid for all damages done by their soldiers +and in a short time the work was going on splendidly. + +"We have no fear," wrote Dr. Mackay. "The King of kings is +greater than Emperor or Mikado. He will rule and overrule all +things." + +His faith was rewarded, for when the troublous time was over, the +government of Japan proved better than that of China, and on the +whole the trial proved a blessing. + +Oxford College had been closed while Dr. Mackay was away, and the +girls' school had not been opened since the war commenced, for it +was not safe for the girls and women to leave their homes during +such disturbed times. But now both schools reopened, and again +Kai Bok-su with his cane and his book and his crowd of students +could be seen going up to the lecture halls, or away out on the +Formosan roads. + +He had conquered so often, overcome such tremendous obstacles, +and faced unflinchingly so many awful dangers for the sake of his +converts, that it was no wonder that they adored him, their +feeling amounting almost to worship. "Kai Bok-su says it must be +so" was sufficient to compel any one in the north Formosa Church +to do what was required. Surely never before was a man so +wonderfully rewarded in this life. He had given up all he +possessed for the glory of his Master and he had his full +compensation. + +A few happy years sped round. The time for him to go back home +again was drawing near when there came the first hint that he +might soon be called on a longer furlough than he would have in +Canada. + +At first, when the dread suspicion began to be whispered in the +halls of Oxford College and in the chapel gatherings throughout +the country, people refused to believe it. Kai Bok-su ill? No, +no, it was only the malaria, and he always arose from that and +went about again. It could not be serious. + +But in spite of the fact that loving hearts refused to accept it, +there was no use denying the sad fact. There was something wrong +with Kai Bok-su. For months his voice had been growing weaker, +the doctors had examined his throat, and attended him, but it was +all of no use. At last he could not speak at all, but wrote his +words on a slate. + +And everywhere in north Formosa, converts and students and +preachers watched and waited and prayed most fervently that he +might soon recover. Those who lived in Tamsui whispered to each +other in tones of dread, as they watched him come and go with +slower steps than they had been accustomed to see. + +"He will be well next month," they would say hopefully, or, "He +will look like himself when the rains dry." But little by little +the conviction grew that the beloved missionary was seriously +ill, and a great gloom settled all over north Formosa. There was +a little gleam of joy when the doctor in Tamsui advised him +finally to go to Hongkong and see a specialist. He went, leaving +many loving hearts waiting anxiously between hope and fear to +hear what the doctors would say. And prayers went up night and +day from those who loved him. From the heart-broken wife in the +lonely house on the bluff to the farthest-off convert on the +Ki-lai plain, every Christian on the island, even those in the +south Formosa mission, prayed that the useful life might be +spared. + +But God had other and greater plans for Kai Bok-su. He came back +from Hongkong, and the first look at his pale face told the +dreaded truth. The shadow of death lay on it. + +Those were heart-breaking days in north Formosa. From all sides +came such messages of devotion that it seemed as if the +passionate love of his followers must hold him back. But a +stronger love was calling him on. And one bright June day, in +1901, when the green mountainsides, the blue rivers, and the +waving rice-fields of Formosa lay smiling in the sun, Kai Bok-su +heard once more that call that had brought him so far from home. +Once more he obeyed, and he opened his eyes on a new glory +greater than any of which he had ever dreamed. The task had been +a hard one. The "big stone" had been stubborn, but it had been +broken, and not long after the noontide of his life the tired +worker was called home. + +They laid his poor, worn body up on the hill above the river, +beside the bodies of the Christians he had loved so well. And the +soft Formosan grass grew over his grave, the winds roared about +it, and the river and the sea sang his requiem. + +Gallant Kai Bok-su! As he rests up there on his wind-swept +height, there are hearts in the valleys and on the plains of his +beloved Formosa and in his far-off native land that are aching +for him. And sometimes to these last comes the question "Was it +well?" Was it well that he should wear out that splendid life in +such desperate toil among heathen that hated and reviled him? And +from every part of north Formosa, sounding on the wind, comes +many an answer. + +Up from the damp rice-fields, where the farmer goes to and fro in +the gray dawn, arises a song: + +I'm not ashamed to own my Lord, +Or to defend his cause. + +Far away on the mountainside, the once savage mother draws her +little one to her and teaches him, not the old lesson of +bloodshed, but the older one of love and kindness, and together +they croon: + +Jesus loves me, this I know, +For the Bible tells me so. + +And up from scores of chapels dotting the land, comes the sound +of the old, old story of Jesus and his love, preached by native +Formosans, and from the thousand tongues of their congregations +soars upward the Psalm: + +All people that on earth do dwell, +Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice! + +These all unite in one great harmony, replying, "It is well!" + +But is it well with the work? What of his Beautiful Island, now +that Kai Bok-su has left for a greater work in a more beautiful +land? Yes, it is well also with Formosa. The work goes on. + +There are two thousand, one hundred members now in the four +organized congregations, and over fifty mission stations and +outstations. But better still there are in addition twenty-two +hundred who have forsaken their idols and are being trained to +become church-members. The Formosa Church out of its poverty +gives liberally too. In 1911 they contributed more than +thirty-five hundred dollars to Christian work. "Every year," +writes Mr. Jack, "a special collection is taken by the Church for +the work among the Ami--the aborigines of the Ki-lai plain." This +is the foreign mission of the north Formosa Church. + +A Hoa lately followed his pastor to the home above, but many +others remain. Mr. Gauld and his family are still there, in the +front of the battle, and with him is a fine corps of soldiers, +comprising fifty-nine native and several Canadian missionaries, +including the Rev. Dr. J. Y. Ferguson and his wife, the Rev. +Milton Jack and Mrs. Jack, the Rev. and Mrs. Duncan MacLeod, Miss +J. M. Kinney, Miss Hannah Connell, Miss Mabel G. Clazie, and Miss +Lily Adair. Miss Isabelle J. Elliott, a graduate nurse, and +deaconess, will join the staff shortly, and a few others will be +sent when secured, in order that the force may be sufficient to +evangelize the million people in north Formosa. + +Mrs. Mackay and her two daughters, Helen and Mary, the latter +having married native preachers, Koa Kau and Tan He, are keeping +up the work that husband and father left. A new hospital is being +built under Dr. Ferguson, and plans are on foot for new school +and college buildings. + +And the latest arrived missionary? What of him? Why his name is +George Mackay, and he has just sailed from Canada as the first +Mackay sailed forty-one years earlier. He has been nine years in +Canada and the United States, at school and college, and now with +his Canadian wife, has gone back to his native land. Yes, Kai +Bok-su's son has gone out to carry on his father's work, and +Formosa has welcomed him as no other missionary has been welcomed +since Kai Bok-su's day. + +But these are not all. From far across the sea, in the land where +Kai Bok-su lived his boyhood days, comes a voice. It is the echo +from the hearts of other boys, who have read his noble life. And +their answer is, "We too will go out, as he went, and fight and +win!" + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg Etext of The Black-Bearded Barbarian, by Keith + + + + diff --git a/old/bbbrb10.zip b/old/bbbrb10.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..18f3cc2 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/bbbrb10.zip |